List Manual 12/2004 Edition

sinamics
SINAMICS S
s

Preface

1
SINAMICS Parameters

2
Function diagrams
SINAMICS S List Manual 3
Faults and Alarms

Manual List of Abbreviations

References

Index

Valid as from
Drive Software version
SINAMICS S 2.2

6SL3 097-2AP00-0BP2

Edition 12.2004
Safety Information
This manual contains information that you must observe for your personal safety and to avoid material
damage. The information is indicated by a warning triangle and displayed as follows according to the level
of risk:

Danger
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury or
in substantial property damage.

Warning
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury or
in substantial property damage.

Caution
Used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in minor or moderate injury or in property damage.

Caution
Used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in property damage.

Notice
Used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potential situation which, if not avoided, may result in an
undesirable result or state.

Qualified Personnel
The device must only be commissioned and operated by qualified personnel. For the purpose of the
safety information in this documentation, a "qualified person" is someone who is authorized to operate,
ground, and tag devices, systems, and circuits in accordance with established safety procedures.

Proper Use
Observe the following information:

Warning
The device must only be used for the applications specified in the catalog and in the technical description.
The device must only be used in conjunction with external devices and components recommended or
approved by Siemens.
The successful and safe operation of this device depends on correct transport, proper storage and instal-
lation, as well as careful operation and maintenance.

Trademarks
SIMATIC®, SIMATIC HMI®, SIMATIC NET®, SIMODRIVE®, SIMOTION®, SINAMICS® and
SINUMERIK® are trademarks of SIEMENS AG.
The designations in this documentation may be trademarks whose use by third-parties for their own
purposes may infringe the rights of the owner.

Copyright Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved Exclusion of Liability

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents We have conscientiously checked the contents of this manual to en-
is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be li- sure that they coincide with the hardware and software described.
able for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee
or registration or a utility model or design, are reserved. complete conformance. However, the data in this manual is reviewed
regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent
Siemens AG editions. We are grateful for any recommendations or suggestions.
Automation & Drives
Motion Control Systems
P.O. Box 3180, D-91050 Erlangen  Siemens AG 2004
Federal Republic of Germany Subject to technical changes without notice.

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft SINAMICS S List Manual

Preface

Information about the SINAMICS documentation

The SINAMICS documentation is divided into the following areas:
• General documentation / catalogs
• User documentation
• Manufacturer/service documentation
• Electronic documentation

Table Preface-1Useful phases and available documentation/tools

Useful phase Document/Tool

Exploratory SINAMICS S Sales Documentation

Planning/configuration SIZER configuration tool
Decision/ordering SINAMICS S Catalog
Installation/assembly • SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual for Control Units
and Supplementary System Components
• SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual Power Modules
Booksize
• SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual Power Modules
Chassis
• SINAMICS S150 Operating Manual
Commissioning • STARTER parameterization and commissioning tool
• SINAMICS S120 Getting Started
• SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
• SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual CANopen
• SINAMICS S List Manual
• SINAMICS S150 Operating Manual
Usage/operation • SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
• SINAMICS S List Manual
• SINAMICS S150 Operating Manual
Maintenance/servicing • SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
• SINAMICS S List Manual
• SINAMICS S150 Operating Manual

This documentation is part of the technical customer documentation for

SINAMICS. All documents can be obtained separately.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved Preface-5

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
Preface

You can obtain detailed information about the documents named in the documen-
tation overview and other documents available for SINAMICS from your local Sie-
mens office.
In the interests of clarity, this documentation does not contain all the detailed
information for all product types and cannot take into account every possible
aspect of installation, operation, or maintenance.
The contents of this documentation are not part of an earlier or existing agree-
ment, a promise, or a legal agreement, nor do they change this. All obligations
entered into by Siemens result from the respective contract of sale that contains
the complete and sole valid warranty arrangements. These contractual warranty
provisions are neither extended nor curbed as a result of the statements made in
this documentation.

Audience
This documentation is aimed at machine manufacturers, commissioning engi-
neers, and service personnel who use SINAMICS.

Objective
This manual contains the comprehensive information about parameters, function
diagrams and faults and alarms required to commission and service the system.
It must be used as a supplementary document to the other manuals and tools
available for the product.

Finding Your Way Around

The following guides are provided to help you locate information in this manual:
1. Table of contents
− General table of contents for complete manual (after the preface).
− Table of contents for function diagrams (Section 2.1).
2. List of Abbreviations
3. References
4. IndexGlossary

Preface-6  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Preface

Technical Support
If you have any further questions, please call our hotline:
Tel. +49 (0) 180 5050 - 222
Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050 - 223
Internet: http://www.siemens.de/automation/support-request

Please send any questions about the documentation (e.g. suggestions for
improvement, corrections) to the following fax number or email address:
Fax: +49 (0) 9131 98 - 2176
Fax form: See feedback page at the end of this publication
E-mail: motioncontrol.docu@erlf.siemens.de

Internet Address
Up-to-date information about our products can be found on the Internet at the fol-
lowing address:
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved Preface-7

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
Preface

Preface-8  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
Contents

1 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.1 Overview of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.1.1 Explanation of list of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.1.2 Numerical ranges of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1.2 Parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
1.3 Parameters for data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-528
1.3.1 Parameters for Command Data Sets (CDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-528
1.3.2 Parameters for Drive Data Sets (DDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-530

2 Function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-537

2.1 Function diagrams - Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-539
2.2 Explanations of the function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-546
2.3 Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-551
2.4 CU320 input/output terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-570
2.5 CX32 input/output terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-577
2.6 PROFIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-581
2.7 Internal control/status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-604
2.8 Sequence control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-616
2.9 Motor holding brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-619
2.10 Safety Integrated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-624
2.11 Setpoint channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-630
2.12 Configuration without setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-640
2.13 Servo control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-642
2.14 Vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-668
2.15 Technology controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-694
2.16 Signals and monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-698
2.17 Faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-704
2.18 Test sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-709
2.19 Data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-711
2.20 Basic Infeed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-714
2.21 Active Infeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-721
2.22 Terminal Board 30 (TB30). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-732
2.23 Communication Board CAN 10 (CBC10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-737
2.24 Terminal Module 31 (TM31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-742

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved Contents-9

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
Contents

2.25 Terminal Module 41 (TM41) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-753

2.26 Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-755

3 Faults and Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-759

3.1 Overview of Faults and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-760
3.1.1 General information about faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-760
3.1.2 Explanation of the List of Faults and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-764
3.1.3 Numerical Ranges of Faults and Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-767
3.2 List of faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-768

List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abbreviations-951

References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . References-957

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-963

Contents-10  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
Parameters 1
Content

1.1 Overview of parameters 1-12

1.2 Parameter list 1-23

1.3 Parameters for data sets 1-528

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-11

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Overview of parameters

1.1 Overview of parameters

1.1.1 Explanation of list of parameters

Basic structure of parameter descriptions

The data in the following example has been chosen at random. The table below
shows all the information which can be included in the description of a parameter.
Some of the information is optional.
The structure of the parameter list (see Section 1.2) is as follows:

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Start of example- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

pxxxx[0...n] BICO: Full parameter name / Abbreviated name

Drive object (function Changeable in: C1, C2, U, T Access level: 2
module) Data type: Integer16 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2080
P group: Cl.-lp. control Unit group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory Setting
0.00 [Nm] 10.00 [Nm] 2.00 [Nm]

Description: Text
Values: 0: Name and meaning of value 0
1: Name and meaning of value 1
2: Name and meaning of value 2
etc.
Recommenda- Text
tion:
Index: [0] = Name and meaning of index 0
[1] = Name and meaning of index 1
[2] = Name and meaning of index 2
etc.
Bit array: Bit Signal name 0-signal 1-signal FP
00 Name and meaning of bit 0 No Yes 8010
01 Name and meaning of bit 1 No Yes -
02 Name and meaning of bit 2 No Yes 8012
etc.
Depends on: Text
see also: pxxxx, rxxxx
see also: Fxxxxx, Axxxxx
Danger! Corresponds to safety notice "Danger with warning triangle".
Warning! Corresponds to safety notice "Warning with warning triangle".
Caution! Corresponds to safety notice "Caution with warning triangle".
Caution: Corresponds to safety notice "Caution without warning triangle".
Notice: Corresponds to safety notice "Notice without warning triangle".
Note: Information which might be useful.

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - End of example- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

1-12  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Overview of parameters

pxxxx[0...n] Parameter number

The parameter number consists of a "p" or "r", followed by the parameter number
and the index (optional).
Examples of number representation in the parameter list:
• p... Adjustable parameter (read and write parameter)
• r... Visualization parameters (read-only)
• p0918 Adjustable parameter 918
• p0099[0...3] Adjustable parameter 99, indices 0 to 3
• p1001[0...n] Adjustable parameter 1001, indices 0 to n (n = configurable)
• r0944 Visualization parameter 944

Other examples of notation in the documentation:

• p1070[1] Adjustable parameter 1070, index 1
• p2098[1].3 Adjustable parameter 2098, index 1 bit 3
• r0945[2](3) Visualization parameter 945, index 2 of drive object 3
• p0795.4 Adjustable parameter 795, bit 4

The following applies to adjustable parameters:

The "shipped" parameter value is specified under "Factory setting" with the rele-
vant unit in square parenthesis. The value can be adjusted within the range
defined by "Min" and "Max".
The term "linked parameterization" is used in cases where changes to adjustable
parameters affect the settings of other parameters.
Linked parameterization can occur, for example, as a result of the following
actions or parameters:
• Execute macros
p0015, p0700, p1000, p1500
• Set PROFIBUS telegram (BICO interconnection)
p0922
• Set component lists
p0230, p0300, p0301, p0400
• Calculate and preset automatically
p0112, p0340, p0578, p3900
• Restore factory settings
p0970
The following applies to visualization parameters:
The fields "Min", "Max" and "Factory setting" are specified with a dash "-" and the
relevant unit in square parenthesis.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-13

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
Parameters
Overview of parameters

BICO: Full parameter name / Abbreviated name

Some parameters have the following abbreviations in front of their name:
• BI: Binector input
This parameter selects the source of a digital signal.
• BO: Binector output
This parameter is available as a digital signal for interconnection
with other parameters.
• CI: Connector input
This parameter selects the source of an "analog" signal.
• CO: Connector output
This parameter is available as an "analog" signal for interconnec-
tion with other parameters.
• CO/BO: Connector/binector output
This parameter is available as an "analog" and digital signal for
interconnection with other parameters.

Drive object (function module)

A drive object (DO) is an independent, "self-contained" functional unit which pos-
sesses its own parameters and, in some cases, faults and warnings. Further func-
tions and their parameters can be selected or deselected through appropriate
activation of function modules at the commissioning stage.
The parameter list specifies the associated drive object and function module for
each individual parameter.
Examples:
• p1070 CI: Main setpoint
SERVO (setp.), VECTOR
The parameter is available only in association with drive object SERVO and
function module "Setpoint channel" or with drive object VECTOR irrespective
of activated function modules.
• p1055 BI: Jog bit 0
SERVO, VECTOR
The parameter is available in association with drive objects SERVO and VEC-
TOR irrespective of activated function modules, i.e. it is available with every
activated function module belonging to the drive object.
Each parameter can belong to either one, several or all drive objects.
The following information relating to "Drive object" and "Function module" can be
displayed under the parameter number:

1-14  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Overview of parameters

Table 1-1 Data in "Drive object (function module)" field

Drive object Meaning

(function module)

A_INF Active infeed closed-loop control

Closed-loop-controlled, self-commutated infeed/regenerative feedback unit
for generating a constant DC-link voltage.
A_INF (Parallel) Active infeed with function module "Parallel connection" (r0108.15).
All objects This parameter belongs to all drive objects.
B_INF Basic infeed closed-loop control
Unregulated line infeed unit (without feedback) for rectifying the line voltage
of the DC Link.
B_INF (Parallel) Basic infeed with function module "Parallel connection" (r0108.15).
CU Control Unit (all variants)
CU (CAN) Control Unit with function module "CAN"
CU_S Control Unit SINAMICS S (SINAMICS S120/S150)
SERVO Servo Drive
SERVO (Setp) Servo drive with function module "Setpoint channel" (r0108.8)
SERVO (Extended brk) Servo drive with function module "Extended brake control" (r0108.14)
SERVO (Tech ctrl) Servo drive with function module "Technology controller" (r0108.16)
SERVO (CAN) Servo drive with function module "CAN" (r0108.29)
SERVO (Extended msg) Servo drive with function module "Extended reports/monitors" (r0108.17)
TB30 Terminal Board 30
TM15 Terminal Module 15 (SIMOTION D4xx only)
TM17 Terminal Module 17 (SIMOTION D4xx only)
TM31 Terminal Module 31
TM41 Terminal Module 41
VECTOR Vector drive
VECTOR (n/M) Vector drive with function module "Closed-loop speed/torque control"
(r0108.2)
VECTOR (Extended brk) Vector drive with function module "Extended brake control" (r0108.14)
VECTOR (Parallel) Vector drive with function module "Parallel connection" (r0108.15)
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Vector drive with function module "Technology controller" (r0108.16)
VECTOR (Extended msg) Vector drive with function module "Extended reports/monitors" (r0108.17)

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-15

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
Parameters
Overview of parameters

Note:
References: /IH1/ SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
in section "Drive Objects"

Changeable in
The "-" sign indicates that the parameter can be changed in any object state and
that the change will be effective immediately.
The letters "C1, C2, T, U" mean that the parameter can be changed only in the
specified drive object state and that the change will not take effect until the object
switches to another state. This can be one or more states.
The following states may be specified:
• C1 Converter commissioning C1: Commissioning 1
Converter commissioning is in progress (p0009 > 0).
Pulses cannot be enabled.
A modified parameter value does not take effect until converter com-
missioning mode is exited with p0009 = 0.
• C2 Drive object commissioning C2: Commissioning 2
Drive commissioning is in progress (p0009 = 0 and p0010 > 0).
Pulses cannot be enabled.
A modified parameter value does not take effect until drive commis-
sioning mode is exited with p0010 = 0.
• U Operation U: Run
Pulses are enabled.
• T Ready T: Ready to run
Pulses are not enabled and status "C1" or "C2" is not active.

Note:
Parameter p0009 is CU-specific (belongs to control unit).
Parameter p0010 is drive-specific (belongs to each drive object).
The operating status of individual drive objects is displayed in r0002.

1-16  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Overview of parameters

Access level (refers only to access via Basic Operator Panel)

Specifies the access level required to be able to display and change the relevant
parameter. The required access level can be set via p0003.
The system uses the following access levels:
1. Standard
2. Extended
3. Expert
4. Service

Note:
Parameter p0003 is CU-specific (belongs to control unit).

Data type
The possible data types of parameter values are as follows:
• I8 Integer8 8-bit integer
• I16 Integer16 16-bit integer
• I32 Integer32 32-bit integer
• U8 Unsigned8 8 bits without sign
• U16 Unsigned16 16 bits without sign
• U32 Unsigned32 32 bits without sign
• Float FloatingPoint Floating point number

Data set
Parameters which are dependent on a data set are identified as follows:
• CDS (Command Data Set)
Example:
p1070[0]
main setpoint [command data set 0]
p1070[1]
main setpoint [command data set 1], etc.
• DDS (Drive Data Set)
• EDS (Encoder Data Set)
• MDS (Motor Data Set)
• PDS (Power Module Data Set)

Note:
References: /IH1/ SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
in section "Data Sets"

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-17

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
Parameters
Overview of parameters

Function diagram
The parameter is included in this function diagram. The structure of the parameter
function and its interrelationship with other parameters is shown in the specified
function diagram.
Example:
Function diagram: 3060.3 3060: Function diagram number
3: Signal path (optional)

P group (refers only to access via BOP (Basic Operator Panel))

Specifies the functional group to which the parameter belongs. The required
parameter group can be set via p0004.

Note:
Parameter p0004 is CU-specific (belongs to control unit).

Unit, unit group and unit choice

The following applies to parameters with a unit:
• Each of these parameters is assigned to a unit group.
• The relevant unit for the parameter is specified in square parenthesis.
• If the parameter unit can be set within the unit group, then the parameters
required to do so are specified under "Unit choice".

Note:
References: /IH1/ SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
in section "Units"

Parameter values

Min Minimum value of the parameter [unit]

Max Maximum value of the parameter [unit]
Factory Setting Shipped value (default) [unit]
A different value may be displayed for certain parameters
(e. g. p1800) at the initial commissioning stage.
Reason:
The setting of these parameters is determined by the
operating environment of the Control Unit
(e. g. depending on converter type, macro, power mod-
ule).

1-18  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Overview of parameters

Description
Explanation of the function of a parameter.

Values
Lists the possible values of a parameter.

Recommendation
Information about recommended settings.

Index
The name and meaning of each individual index is specified for indexed parame-
ters.
The following applies to the values (min, max, factory setting) of indexed setting
parameters:
• Min, Max:
The setting range and unit apply to all indices.
• Factory setting:
When all indices have the same factory setting, index 0 is specified with unit
to represent all indices.
When the indices have different factory settings, they are all listed individually
with unit.

Bit field
For parameters with bit fields, the following information is provided about each bit:
• Bit number and signal name
• Meaning with signal states 0 and 1
• Function diagram (optional)
The signal is shown on this function diagram.

Dependency
Conditions which need to be fulfilled in connection with this parameter. Also
includes special effects which can occur between this parameter and others.
see also: List of other relevant parameters.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-19

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
Parameters
Overview of parameters

Safety Information
Important information which must be heeded to avoid the risk of physical injury or
property damage.
Information which must be observed to avoid problems.
Information which the user or operator may find useful.
Danger! Corresponds to Danger

Warning! Corresponds to Warning

Caution! Corresponds to Caution

Caution: Corresponds to Caution

Notice: Corresponds to Important

Note:
A description of individual safety notices can be found in the appendix to this man-
ual (see Safety Information).

1-20  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Overview of parameters

1.1.2 Numerical ranges of parameters

Parameters are grouped into the following numerical ranges:

Table 1-2 Numerical Ranges of Parameters

Range Description

From To

0000 0099 Operation and visualization

0100 0199 Commissioning
0200 0299 Power module
0300 0399 Motor
0400 0499 Encoder
0500 0599 Technology and units
0600 0699 Thermal motor protection and motor model, maximum current
0700 0799 Command sources and terminals on control unit, measuring
sockets
0800 0839 CDS, DDS data sets (e.g. switch over, copy)
0840 0879 Sequential control (e.g. source for ON/OFF1)
0880 0899 Control and status words
0900 0999 PROFIBUS/PROFIdrive
1000 1199 Setpoint channel
1200 1299 Functions (e.g. motor holding brake)
1300 1399 V/f control
1400 1799 Closed-loop control
1800 1899 Gating unit
1900 1999 Power module and motor identification
2000 2099 Communication (PROFIBUS)
2100 2199 Faults and alarms, monitoring functions
2200 2399 Techn. ctrl
2900 2930 Fixed values (e.g. per cent, torque)
3400 3699 Infeed control (Active Line Module)
3900 3999 Management parameters
4000 4199 Terminal boards, terminal modules (e.g. TB30, TM31)
4200 4399 Terminal modules (e.g. TM15, TM17)
6500 6599 External reports
7000 7499 Parallel connection of power modules
7800 7899 EEPROM read/write parameters
8600 8799 CAN bus

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-21

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
Parameters
Overview of parameters

Table 1-2 Numerical Ranges of Parameters, continued

Range Description

From To

8800 8899 Communication board

9400 9499 Parameter consistency and storage
9500 9899 Safety Integrated
9900 9949 Topology
9950 9999 Diagnostics (internal)

1-22  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

1.2 Parameter list

Product: SINAMICS S, Version: V02.20.28.00, Label: ARM_M0475_11, Language: en

r0002 Control module, operating display / CU op_display

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Operating display for the control board.

Values: 0: [00] Operation
10: [10] Ready
20: [20] Wait for run-up
31: [31] Commissioning software download active
33: [33] Remove topology error / acknowledge
34: [34] Exit the commissioning mode
35: [35] Carry-out first commissioning
70: [70] Initialization
80: [80] Reset active
99: [99] Internal software error

r0002 Infeed operating display / INF op_display

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Operating display for the infeed.

The value provides information about the actual operating state and the conditions necessary to reach the next
operating state.
The higher the numerical value, the greater the number of conditions that still have to be fulfilled in order to achieve
the "Run" operating state.
Values: 0: [00] Operation - everything enabled
21: [21] Ready - set the "enable operation" signal to "1" (p0852)
31: [31] Ready to power-up - pre-charging running (monitoring time p0857)
32: [32] Ready to power-up - set the "ON/OFF1" signal with 0/1 edge (p0840)
41: [41] Power-on inhibit - set "ON/OFF1" signal to "0" (p0840)
42: [42] Power-on inhibit - set "OC/OFF2" signal to "1" (p0844, p0845)
44: [44] Power-on inhibit - connect 24 V to terminal EP (hardware)
45: [45] Power-on inhibit - remove the cause of the fault, acknowledge the fault
46: [46] Power-on inhibit - exit the commissioning mode (p0009, p0010)
Dependency: Refer to: r0046
Note: OC: Operating condition
EP: Enable Pulses (pulse enable)

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-23

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0002 Drive operating display / Drv op_display

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Operating display for the drive.
The value provides information about the actual operating state and the conditions necessary to reach the next
operating state.
The higher the numerical value, the greater the number of conditions that still have to be fulfilled in order to achieve
the "Run" operating state.
Values: 0: [00] Operation - everything enabled
10: [10] Operation - set "enable setpoint" signal to "1" (p1142)
11: [11] Operation - set "enable speed controller" signal to "1" (p0856)
12: [12] Operation - RFG frozen, set "RFG start" signal to "1" (p1141)
13: [13] Operation - set "enable ramp-function generator" signal to "1" (p1140)
14: [14] Operation - wait for the brake opening time (p1216, vector magn_time p0346)
15: [15] Operation - open brake (p1215)
16: [16] Operation - Withdraw braking with OFF1 using "ON/OFF1" signal to "1"
17: [17] Operation - braking with OFF3 can only be interrupted with OFF2
18: [18] Operation - a fault has occurred and the drive brakes - remove the cause of the fault and acknowledge
the fault
21: [21] Ready - set the "enable operation" signal to "1" (p0852)
22: [22] Ready - de-magnetization running (vector de-magn_time p0347)
23: [23] Ready - set "infeed operation" signal to "1" (p0864)
31: [31] Ready to power-up - set the "ON/OFF1" signal with 0/1 edge (p0840)
41: [41] Power-on inhibit - set the "ON/OFF1" signal with 0/1 edge (p0840)
42: [42] Power-on inhibit - set "OC/OFF2" signal to "1" (p0844, p0845)
43: [43] Power-on inhibit - set "OC/OFF3" signal to "1" (p0848, p0849)
44: [44] Power-on inhibit - connect 24 V to terminal EP (hardware)
45: [45] Power-on inhibit - remove the cause of the fault, acknowledge the fault
46: [46] Power-on inhibit - exit the commissioning mode (p0009, p0010)
Dependency: Refer to: r0046
Note: RFG: Ramp-function generator
OC: Operating condition
EP: Enable Pulses (pulse enable)

r0002 TB30 operating display / TB30 op_display

TB30 Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Operating display for terminal board 30 (TB30).

The higher the numerical value, the greater the number of conditions that still have to be fulfilled in order to achieve
the "Run" operating state.
Values: 0: [00] Module in cyclic operation
40: [40] Module not in cyclic operation
60: [60] Fault
70: [70] Initialization
80: [80] Reset active

1-24  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0002 TM15 operating display / TM15 op_display

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Operating display for terminal board 15 (TB15).
The higher the numerical value, the greater the number of conditions that still have to be fulfilled in order to achieve
the "Run" operating state.
Values: 0: [00] Module in cyclic operation
40: [40] Module not in cyclic operation
50: [50] Alarm
60: [60] Fault
70: [70] Initialization

r0002 TM17 operating display / TM17 op_display

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Operating display for terminal board 17 (TB17).
The higher the numerical value, the greater the number of conditions that still have to be fulfilled in order to achieve
the "Run" operating state.
Values: 0: [00] Module in cyclic operation
40: [40] Module not in cyclic operation
50: [50] Alarm
60: [60] Fault
70: [70] Initialization

r0002 TM31 operating display / TM31 op_display

TM31 Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Operating display for terminal board 31 (TB31).

The higher the numerical value, the greater the number of conditions that still have to be fulfilled in order to achieve
the "Run" operating state.
Values: 0: [00] Module in cyclic operation
40: [40] Module not in cyclic operation
50: [50] Alarm
60: [60] Fault
70: [70] Initialization

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-25

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0002 TM41 operating display / TM41 op_display

TM41 Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Operating display for terminal board 41 (TB41).
The value provides information about the actual operating state and the conditions necessary to reach the next
operating state.
The higher the numerical value, the greater the number of conditions that still have to be fulfilled in order to achieve
the "Run" operating state.
Values: 0: [00] Operation - everything enabled
10: [10] Operation - set "enable setpoint" signal to "1" (p1142)
12: [12] Operation - RFG frozen, set "RFG start" signal to "1" (p1141)
13: [13] Operation - set "enable ramp-function generator" signal to "1" (p1140)
18: [18] Operation - a fault has occurred and the drive brakes - remove the cause of the fault and acknowledge
the fault
21: [21] Ready - set the "enable operation" signal to "1" (p0852)
31: [31] Ready to power-up - set the "ON/OFF1" signal with 0/1 edge (p0840)
41: [41] Power-on inhibit - set the "ON/OFF1" signal with 1/0 edge (p0840)
42: [42] Power-on inhibit - set "OC/OFF2" signal to "1" (p0844)
43: [43] Power-on inhibit - set "OC/OFF3" signal to "1" (p0848)
45: [45] Power-on inhibit - remove the cause of the fault, acknowledge the fault
46: [46] Power-on inhibit - exit the commissioning mode (p0009, p0010)
Note: RFG: Ramp-function generator
OC: Operating condition

r0002 Infeed operating display / INF op_display

B_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Operating display for the infeed.

The value provides information about the actual operating state and the conditions necessary to reach the next
operating state.
The higher the numerical value, the greater the number of conditions that still have to be fulfilled in order to achieve
the "Run" operating state.
Values: 0: [00] Operation - everything enabled
31: [31] Ready to power-up - pre-charging running (monitoring time p0857)
32: [32] Ready to power-up - set the "ON/OFF1" signal with 0/1 edge (p0840)
41: [41] Power-on inhibit - set "ON/OFF1" signal to "0" (p0840)
42: [42] Power-on inhibit - set "OC/OFF2" signal to "1" (p0844, p0845)
45: [45] Power-on inhibit - remove the cause of the fault, acknowledge the fault
46: [46] Power-on inhibit - exit the commissioning mode (p0009, p0010)
Note: OC: Operating condition

1-26  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0003 BOP access level / BOP access level

CU Can be changed: C1, U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: All groups Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 4 1
Description: Sets the access level for reading (and writing) parameters via BOP20 and AOP.
Values: 1: Standard
2: Extended
3: Expert
4: Service
Note: In access level 1 (standard) all of the parameters are available that are required for the basic operator control func-
tionality (e.g. p1120 = ramp-function generator, ramp-up time).
In access level 2 (extended), parameters are included that are sufficient to use the basic device functions.
In access level 3 (experts), parameters are included that already require expert knowhow (e.g. knowhow about
BICO parameterization).
Parameters belonging to access level 4 (service) can only be modified after entering an appropriate code.

p0004 BOP parameter menu / BOP par_menu

CU Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: All groups Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 99 1
Description: Display filter for BOP20 and AOP for selecting parameters using menu prompting.
Values: 0: All parameters
1: Displays, signals
2: Power module
3: Motor
4: Encoder/position encoder
5: Technology, units
7: Digital inputs/outputs, commands, sequential control
8: Analog inputs/outputs, terminal strip
10: Setpoint channel/ramp-fct generator
12: Functions
13: V/f control
14: Control
15: Data sets
18: Gating unit, modulator
19: Motor identification, power module test
20: Communication
21: Faults, alarms, monitoring functions
25: Closed-loop position control
28: Free function blocks
47: Trace and function generator
50: OEM parameter
90: Topology
95: Safety Integrated
98: Command Data Set (CDS)
99: Drive Data Set (DDS)

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-27

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0007 Backlighting display delay time / Display t_del

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0
Description: Sets the delay time to switch-out background lighting.
If no keys are actuated, then the background lighting automatically switches itself off after this time has expired.
Note: p0007 = 0: Background lighting is always switched on (factory setting).

p0009 Device commissioning parameter filter / Dev comm par_filt

CU Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: All groups Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 30 1
Description: Sets the device and basic drive commissioning.
By appropriately setting this parameter, those parameters are filtered that can be written into in the various commis-
sioning steps.
Values: 0: Ready
1: Device configuration
2: Definition drive type (in preparation)
3: Drive basis configuration
4: Data set basis configuration
29: Device download
30: Parameter reset
Note: The drives can only be powered-up outside the device commissioning (the inverter enabled). In this case, p0009
must be 0 (Ready) and the individual drive objects must have already gone into operation (p0010).
p0009 = 1: Device configuration
At the first commissioning of the devices, after run-up, the device is in the "device configuration" state. To start the
internal automatic first commissioning of the drive unit, p0009 should be set to 0 (Ready) after the ID for the actual
topology (r0098) was transferred into the ID for the target topology (p0099). To do this, it is sufficient to set a single
index value of p0099[x] the same as r0098[x]. Before the device has been completely commissioned, no other
parameter can be changed. After the first commissioning was carried-out, in this state, when required, other basic
device configuration parameters can be adapted (e.g. the basic clock cycle in p0110).
p0009 = 3: Drive basis configuration
In this state, after the device has been commissioned for the first time, basic changes can be made for the individ-
ual drive objects (e.g. sampling rates p0111, p0112, p0115 and the number of data sets p0120, p0130, p0140,
p0170, p0180).
p0009 = 4: Data set basis configuration
In this state, after the device has been commissioned for the first time, for the individual drive objects changes can
be made regarding the assignment of the components (p0121, p0131, p0141, p0151, p0161) to the individual data
sets and the assignment of the power module, motor and encoder to the drive data sets (p0185, and onwards).
p0009 = 29: Device download
If a download is made using the commissioning software, the device is automatically brought into this state. After
the download has been completed, p0009 is automatically set to 0 (ready). It is not possible to manually set p0009
to this value.
p0009 = 30: Parameter reset
In order to bring the complete unit into the "first commissioning" state or to load the parameters saved using p0977,
to start, p0977 must be set to this value. p0976 can then be changed to the required value.

1-28  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0010 Infeed commissioning parameter filter / INF comm par_filt

A_INF, B_INF Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: All groups Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 30 1
Description: Sets the parameter filter to commission an infeed unit.
Setting this parameter filters-out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps.
Values: 0: Ready
1: Quick commissioning
2: Power module commissioning
29: Download
30: Parameter reset
Note: The drive can only be powered-up outside the drive commissioning (inverter enable). To realize this, this parameter
must be set to 0.
For p3900 not equal to 0, at the end of the quick commissioning, this parameter is automatically reset to 0.
Procedure for "parameter reset": Set p0010 = 30 and p0970 = 1.

p0010 Drive, commissioning parameter filter / Drv comm. par_filt

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: All groups Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 95 1
Description: Sets the parameter filter to commission a drive.
Setting this parameter filters-out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps.
Values: 0: Ready
1: Quick commissioning
2: Power module commissioning
3: Motor commissioning
4: Encoder commissioning
5: Technological application/units
15: Data sets
29: Download
30: Parameter reset
95: Safety Integrated commissioning
Note: The drive can only be powered-up outside the drive commissioning (inverter enable). To realize this, this parameter
must be set to 0.
For p3900 not equal to 0, at the end of the quick commissioning, this parameter is automatically reset to 0.
Procedure for "parameter reset": Set p0010 = 30 and p0970 = 1.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-29

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0010 TB30 commissioning parameter filter / TB30 comm.par_filt

TB30 Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: All groups Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 30 0
Description: Sets the parameter filter for commissioning a terminal board 30 (TB30).
Setting this parameter filters-out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps.
For the BOP, this setting also causes the read access operations to be filtered.
Values: 0: Ready
29: Download
30: Parameter reset
Dependency: Refer to: p0970
Note: Procedure for "parameter reset": Set p0010 = 30 and p0970 = 1.

p0010 TM15 commissioning parameter filter / TM15 comm par_filt

TM15 Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: All groups Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 30 0

Description: Sets the parameter filter for commissioning a terminal module 15 (TB15).
Setting this parameter filters-out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps.
For the BOP, this setting also causes the read access operations to be filtered.
Values: 0: Ready
29: Download
30: Parameter reset
Dependency: Refer to: p0970
Note: Only the following values are possible: p0010 = 0, 30
Procedure for "parameter reset": Set p0010 = 30 and p0970 = 1.

p0010 TM17 commissioning parameter filter / TM17 comm par_filt

TM17 Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: All groups Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 30 0
Description: Sets the parameter filter for commissioning a terminal module 17 (TB17).
Setting this parameter filters-out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps.
For the BOP, this setting also causes the read access operations to be filtered.
Values: 0: Ready
29: Download
30: Parameter reset
Dependency: Refer to: p0970
Note: Only the following values are possible: p0010 = 0, 30
Procedure for "parameter reset": Set p0010 = 30 and p0970 = 1.

1-30  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0010 TM31 commissioning parameter filter / TM31 comm par_filt

TM31 Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: All groups Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 30 0
Description: Sets the parameter filter for commissioning a terminal module 31 (TB31).
Setting this parameter filters-out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps.
For the BOP, this setting also causes the read access operations to be filtered.
Values: 0: Ready
29: Download
30: Parameter reset
Dependency: Refer to: p0970
Note: Only the following values are possible: p0010 = 0, 30
Procedure for "parameter reset": Set p0010 = 30 and p0970 = 1.

p0010 TM41 commissioning parameter filter / TM41 comm par_filt

TM41 Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: All groups Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 30 0

Description: Sets the parameter filter for commissioning a terminal module 41 (TB41).
Setting this parameter filters-out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps.
For the BOP, this setting also causes the read access operations to be filtered.
Values: 0: Ready
4: Encoder commissioning
29: Download
30: Parameter reset
Dependency: Refer to: p0970
Note: Procedure for "parameter reset": Set p0010 = 30 and p0970 = 1.

p0015 Macro drive unit / Macro drv unit

CU Can be changed: C1 Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 999999 0
Description: Runs the appropriate ACX file on the CompactFlash Card.
The selected ACX file must be located in the following directory:
... /PMACRO/DEVICE/P15/PMxxxxxx.ACX
Example:
p0015 = 6 --> the file PM000006.ACX is run.
Dependency: The ACX file to be run must be created according to the definition for ACX macros and must be saved in the direc-
tory intended on the CompactFlash Card.
Refer to: p0015, p0700, p1000, p1500

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-31

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0015 Macro drive object / Macro DO

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: C2 Access level: 1
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 999999 0
Description: Runs the appropriate ACX file on the CompactFlash Card.
The selected ACX file must be located in the following directory:
... /PMACRO/<drive object>/P15/PMxxxxxx.ACX
Example:
p0015 = 6 --> the file PM000006.ACX is run.
Dependency: The ACX file to be run must be created according to the definition for ACX macros and must be saved in the direc-
tory intended on the CompactFlash Card.
Refer to: p0700, p1000, p1500

r0018 Control unit firmware version / CU FW_version

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the firmware version of the control unit.

Dependency: Refer to: r0128, r0148, r0158, r0197, r0198
Note: Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.

r0020 Speed setpoint, smoothed / n_set smth

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5020
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]

Description: Displays the actual smoothed speed/velocity setpoint at the input of the speed/velocity controller or V/f characteris-
tic (after the interpolator).
Dependency: Refer to: r0060
Note: Smoothing time constant: 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as process quantity and may only be used as display quantity.
The speed setpoint is available smoothed (r0020) and unsmoothed (r0060).

1-32  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0021 Actual speed, smoothed / n_act smooth

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1580,
4710, 6010
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]

Description: Displays the smooth actual value of the motor speed/velocity.

Dependency: Refer to: r0063
Note: Smoothing time constant: 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as process quantity and may only be used as display quantity.
The value displayed in r0021 is the smoothed value of r0063.

r0024 Infeed line frequency smoothed / INF line_f smooth

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8950,
8960
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]

Description: Displays the smoothed line supply frequency.

Dependency: Refer to: r0066
Note: Smoothing time constant: 300 ms
The signal is not suitable as process quantity and may only be used as display quantity.
The line frequency is available smoothed (r0024) and unsmoothed (r0066).
A positive sign of the frequency is obtained when the line supply phases U, V and W are connected with the correct
phase sequence.
A negative sign of the frequency is obtained when the 3 line phases are interchanged therefore designating a neg-
ative direction of the rotating field of the 3-phase line supply voltage.

r0024 Drive output frequency smoothed / Drv outp_f smooth

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1690,
5300, 5730
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]

Description: Displays the smoothed converter frequency.

Dependency: Refer to: r0066
Note: Smoothing time constant: 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as process quantity and may only be used as display quantity.
The output frequency is available smoothed (r0024) and unsmoothed (r0066).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-33

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0025 Infeed input voltage, smoothed / INF U_input smooth

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8950,
8960
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Veff] - [Veff] - [Veff]

Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the input voltage.

This voltage is present at the line supply connection of the infeed.
Dependency: Refer to: r0072
Note: Smoothing time constant: 300 ms
The signal is not suitable as process quantity and may only be used as display quantity.
The input voltage is available smoothed (r0025) and unsmoothed (r0072).

r0025 Drive, output voltage smoothed / Drv U_outp smooth

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1690,
5730
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Veff] - [Veff] - [Veff]

Description: Displays the smoothed output voltage of the power module.

Dependency: Refer to: r0072
Note: Smoothing time constant: 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as process quantity and may only be used as display quantity.
The output voltage is available smoothed (r0025) and unsmoothed (r0072).

r0026 DC link voltage, smoothed / Vdc smooth

A_INF, SERVO, Can be changed: - Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6730,
6731
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: VOLTAGE_DC Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the DC link voltage.
Dependency: Refer to: r0070
Note: A_INF: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms
SERVO, VECTOR: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as process quantity and may only be used as display quantity.
The DC link voltage is available smoothed (r0026) and unsmoothed (r0070).

1-34  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0026 DC link voltage, smoothed / Vdc smooth

B_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: VOLTAGE_DC Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the DC link voltage.
Dependency: Refer to: r0070
Note: Smoothing time constant: 100 ms (for active line module: 300 ms)
The signal is not suitable as process quantity and may only be used as display quantity.
The DC link voltage is available smoothed (r0026) and unsmoothed (r0070).

r0027 Absolute actual current, smoothed / I_act abs.val.smth

A_INF, SERVO, Can be changed: - Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5730,
6714, 8950
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the smoothed absolute actual current value.

Dependency: Refer to: r0068
Note: A_INF, VECTOR: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms
SERVO: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as process quantity and may only be used as display quantity.
The absolute current actual value is available smoothed (r0027) and unsmoothed (r0068).

r0028 Modulation depth, smoothed / Modulat depth smth

A_INF, SERVO, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5730,
8940, 8950
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]

Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the modulation depth.

Dependency: Refer to: r0074
Note: A_INF: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms
SERVO, VECTOR: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as process quantity and may only be used as display quantity.
The modulation depth is available smoothed (r0028) and unsmoothed (r0074).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-35

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0029 Infeed, smoothed reactive current actual value / INF I_reactiv smth
A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8950
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the reactive current component.
Note: Smoothing time constant: 300 ms
The signal is not suitable as process quantity and may only be used as display quantity.
The reactive current actual value is available smoothed (r0029) and unsmoothed (r0076).

r0029 Drive, smoothed field-generating current actual value / Drv Id_act smooth
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5730
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the smoothed field-generating actual current.

Dependency: Refer to: r0076
Note: SERVO: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
VECTOR: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms
The signal is not suitable as process quantity and may only be used as display quantity.
The field-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0029) and unsmoothed (r0076).

r0030 Active current actual value, smoothed / I_active smooth

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8950
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the active current components.
Dependency: Refer to: r0078
Note: Smoothing time constant: 300 ms
The signal is not suitable as process quantity and may only be used as display quantity.
The active current actual value is available smoothed (r0030) and unsmoothed (r0078).

1-36  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0030 Current actual value, torque-generating, smoothed / Iq_act smooth

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5730
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]
Description: Displays the smoothed torque-generating actual current.
Dependency: Refer to: r0078, r0078
Note: SERVO: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
VECTOR: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms
The signal is not suitable as process quantity and may only be used as display quantity.
The following applies for SERVO:
The torque-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0030 with 100 ms, r0078[1] with p0045) and
unsmoothed (r0078[0]).
The following applies for VECTOR:
The torque-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0030 with 300 ms) and unsmoothed (r0078).

r0031 Actual torque smoothed / M_act smooth

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5730
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]

Description: Displays the smoothed torque/force actual value.

Dependency: Refer to: r0080
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as process quantity and may only be used as display quantity.
The active current actual value is available smoothed (r0031) and unsmoothed (r0080).

r0032 Power factor, smoothed / Power factor smth

A_INF, SERVO, Can be changed: - Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5730,
6714, 8950
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: POWER_P3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [kW] - [kW] - [kW]

Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the active power.

Dependency: Refer to: r0082, r0082
Note: Significance for the drive: Power output at the motor shaft
Significance for the infeed: Power consumed
For A_INF, the following applies:
The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 300 ms) and unsmoothed (r0082).
The following applies for SERVO:
The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms, r0082[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed (r0082[0]).
For VECTOR, the following applies:
The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms) and unsmoothed (r0082).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-37

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0033 Torque utilization, smoothed / M_util smooth

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8012
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the smoothed torque/force utilization as a percentage.
The torque/force utilization is obtained from the required smoothed torque/force referred to the torque/force limit.
Dependency: Refer to: r0081
Note: Smoothing time constant: 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as process quantity and may only be used as display quantity.
The torque utilization is available smoothed (r0033) and unsmoothed (r0081).
For M_set total (r0079) > M_max offset (p1532), the following applies:
- demanded torque = M_set total - M_max offset
- actual torque limit = M_max upper effective (r1538) - M_max offset
For M_set total (r0079) <= M_max offset (p1532), the following applies:
- demanded torque = M_max offset - M_set total
- actual torque limit = M_max offset - M_max lower effective (r1539)
For the actual torque limit = 0, the following applies: r0033 = 100 %
For the actual torque limit < 0, the following applies: r0033 = 0 %

r0035 CO: Motor temperature / Motor temperature

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8016
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]

Description: Displays the actual temperature in the motor.

Note: If neither a temperature sensor nor a PTC thermistor are connected, the temperature of the thermal motor model is
displayed (r0632).

r0036 Power module overload I2t / PM overload I2t

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8014
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]

Description: Displays the power module overload determined using the I2t calculation.
A current reference value is defined for the I2t monitoring of the power module. It represents the current that can be
conducted by the power module without any influence of the switching losses (e.g. the continuously permissible
current of the capacitors, inductances, busbars, etc.).
If the I2t reference current of the power module is not exceeded, then an overload (0 %) is not displayed.
In the other case, the degree of thermal overload is calculated whereby 100% corresponds to the maximum permis-
sible value and results in shutdown (trip) (F30005).
Dependency: Refer to: p0290, p0294

1-38  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0037[0...18] Power module temperatures / PM temperatures

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8014
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Displays the temperatures in the power module.
Index: [0] = Maximum inverter
[1] = Maximum depletion layer
[2] = Maximum rectifier
[3] = Air intake
[4] = Electronics unit in the power module
[5] = Inverter 1
[6] = Inverter 2
[7] = Inverter 3
[8] = Inverter 4
[9] = Inverter 5
[10] = Inverter 6
[11] = Rectifier 1
[12] = Rectifier 2
[13] = Depletion layer 1
[14] = Depletion layer 2
[15] = Depletion layer 3
[16] = Depletion layer 4
[17] = Depletion layer 5
[18] = Depletion layer 6
Dependency: Refer to: p0290

r0038 Power factor, smoothed / CosPhi smooth

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8950
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the smoothed actual power factor.

Note: Smoothing time constant: 100 ms (for active line module and vector drive: 300 ms)
The signal is not suitable as process quantity and may only be used as display quantity.
Significance for the motor: Motor power factor
Significance for the infeed: Power factor at the connection point (p3470, p3471)

p0045 Smoothing time constant, display values / T_smth display

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 50.00 [ms] 1.00 [ms]

Description: Sets the smoothing time constant for the following display values:
r0078[1], r0079[1].

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-39

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0046 CO/BO: Infeed missing enable signals / INF miss enable

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2614,
8934
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays missing enable signals that are preventing the closed-loop infeed control from being commissioned.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 OFF1 enable missing No Yes -
01 OFF2 enable missing No Yes -
03 Enable run missing No Yes -
08 EP terminals enable missing No Yes -
16 OFF1 enable internal missing No Yes -
17 OFF2 enable internal missing No Yes -
Dependency: Refer to: r0002
Note: The value r0046 = 0 indicates that all enable signals for the infeed are present.
Bit 00 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0840 is a 0 signal.
- there is a power-on inhibit.
Bit 01 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0844 or p0845 is a 0 signal.
Bit 03 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0852 is a 0 signal.
Bit 08 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the pulse enable via terminal EP at the line module is missing (X21.3, X21.4).
Bit 16 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- there is an OFF1 fault response. The system is only enable if the fault is removed and was acknowledged and the
power-on inhibit withdrawn with OFF1 = 0.
Bit 17 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- The commissioning mode is selected (p0009 > 0 or p0010 > 0) or there is an OFF2 fault response or the OFF1
signal source (p0840) is changed.

r0046 CO/BO: Missing drive enable signals / Drv miss enable

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2614
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays missing enable signals that are preventing the closed-loop drive control from being commissioned.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 OFF1 enable missing No Yes -
01 OFF2 enable missing No Yes -
02 OFF3 enable missing No Yes -
03 Enable run missing No Yes -
05 STOP2 enable missing No Yes -
06 STOP1 enable missing No Yes -
08 EP terminals enable missing No Yes -
09 Infeed enable missing No Yes -
10 Ramp-function generator enable missing No Yes -
11 Ramp-function generator start missing No Yes -
12 Setpoint enable missing No Yes -

1-40  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

16 OFF1 enable internal missing No Yes -

17 OFF2 enable internal missing No Yes -
18 OFF3 enable internal missing No Yes -
19 Pulse enable internal missing No Yes -
21 STOP2 enable internal missing No Yes -
22 STOP1 enable internal missing No Yes -
27 Demagnetization not completed No Yes -
28 Brake open missing No Yes -
30 Function generator with current input not active active -
31 Jog setpoint active No Yes -
Dependency: Refer to: r0002
Note: The value r0046 = 0 indicates that all enable signals for this drive are present.
Bit 00 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0840 is a 0 signal.
- there is a power-on inhibit.
Bit 01 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0844 or p0845 is a 0 signal.
Bit 02 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0848 or p0849 is a 0 signal.
Bit 03 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0852 is a 0 signal.
Bit 05, bit 06: (being developed)
Bit 08 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the pulse enable via terminal EP at the motor module is missing (X21.3, X21.4).
Bit 09 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0864 is a 0 signal.
Bit 10 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p1140 is a 0 signal.
Bit 11 = 1 (enable signal missing) if the speed setpoint is frozen, because:
- the signal source in p1141 is a 0 signal or
- the speed setpoint is entered from jogging and the two signal sources for jogging, bit 0 (p1055) and bit 1 (p1056)
have a 1 signal.
Bit 12 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p1142 is a 0 signal.
Bit 16 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- there is an OFF1 fault response. The system is only enable if the fault is removed and was acknowledged and the
power-on inhibit withdrawn with OFF1 = 0.
Bit 17 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the commissioning mode is selected (p0009 > 0 or p0010 > 0) or an OFF2 fault response is present.
Bit 18 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- OFF3 has still not be completed or an OFF3 fault response is present.
Bit 19 = 1 (internal pulse enable missing), if:
- synchronization is running between the basic clock cycle, DRIVE-CLiQ clock cycle and application clock cycle.
Bit 21 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
The pulses have been enabled and the speed setpoint has still not been enabled, because:
- the holding brake opening time (p1216) has still not expired.
- The motor has still not been magnetized (induction motor).
Bit 22: Being developed
Bit 27 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- de-magnetizing has still not been completed (only for vector).
Bit 28 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the holding brake is closed or has still not been opened.
Bit 31 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the speed setpoint is entered from jogging 1 or 2.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-41

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0046 CO/BO: Infeed missing enable signals / INF miss enable

B_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays missing enable signals that are preventing the closed-loop infeed control from being commissioned.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 OFF1 enable missing No Yes -
01 OFF2 enable missing No Yes -
16 OFF1 enable internal missing No Yes -
17 OFF2 enable internal missing No Yes -
Dependency: Refer to: r0002
Note: The value r0046 = 0 indicates that all enable signals for the infeed are present.
Bit 00 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0840 is a 0 signal.
- there is a power-on inhibit.
Bit 01 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- the signal source in p0844 or p0845 is a 0 signal.
Bit 16 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- there is an OFF1 fault response. The system is only enable if the fault is removed and was acknowledged and the
power-on inhibit withdrawn with OFF1 = 0.
Bit 17 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:
- The commissioning mode is selected (p0009 > 0 or p0010 > 0) or there is an OFF2 fault response or the OFF1
signal source (p0840) is changed.

r0047 Motor data identification routine and speed controller optimization / MotID and n_opt
VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the actual status for the motor data identification (standstill measurement) and the speed/velocity control-
ler optimization (rotating measurement).
Values: 0: No measurement
120: Vibration test
140: Calculate speed controller setting
150: Measurement, moment of inertia and speed controller optimization
170: Measurement, magnetizing current and saturation characteristic
190: Speed encoder test
200: Rotating measurement selected
210: Rotor position measurement selected
220: identification, leakage inductance
230: Identification, rotor time constant
240: Identification, stator inductance
270: Identification, stator resistance
290: Identification, valve lockout time
300: Standstill measurement selected

1-42  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0050 CO/BO: Command data set CDS effective / CDS effective

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 2
SERVO, TM41, Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: - Function diagram: -
VECTOR
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the effective command data set (CDS).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 CDS effective, bit 0 Off On -
01 CDS effective, bit 1 Off On -
02 CDS effective, bit 2 Off On -
03 CDS effective, bit 3 Off On -
Dependency: Refer to: p0810, p0811, p0812, p0813, r0836
Note: The command data set selected via binector inputs p0810, p0811, p0812 and p0813 is displayed via r0836.

r0051 CO/BO: Drive data set DDS effective / DDS effective

SERVO, TM41, Can be changed: - Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the effective drive data set (DDS).

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DDS eff., bit 0 Off On -
01 DDS eff., bit 1 Off On -
02 DDS eff., bit 2 Off On -
03 DDS eff., bit 3 Off On -
04 DDS eff., bit 4 Off On -
Dependency: Refer to: p0820, p0821, p0822, p0823, p0824, r0837

r0056 CO/BO: Closed-loop control status word 1 / Control_ZSW1

SERVO Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 5492
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the closed-loop control status word 1 (closed-loop control STW1) of the drive.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
01 De-magnetizing completed No Yes -
04 Magnetizing completed No Yes 2701
08 Field weakening active No Yes -
14 Vdc_max controller active No Yes -
15 Vdc_min controller active No Yes -

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-43

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0056 CO/BO: Closed-loop control status word 1 / Control_ZSW1

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 6489,
6492
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the closed-loop control status word 1 (closed-loop control STW1) of the drive.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Initialization completed No Yes -
01 De-magnetizing completed No Yes -
02 Pulse enable present No Yes -
03 Soft starting present No Yes -
04 Magnetizing completed No Yes -
06 Acceleration voltage active No Yes -
07 Frequency negative No Yes -
08 Field weakening active No Yes -
09 Voltage limit active No Yes -
10 Slip limit active No Yes 6310
11 Frequency limit active No Yes -
12 Current limiting controller voltage output No Yes -
active
13 Current limiting controller, freq output active not active active -
14 Vdc_max controller active No Yes 6220,
6320
15 Vdc_min controller active No Yes 6220,
6320

r0060 CO: Speed setpoint before the setpoint filter / n_set before filt.
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 2701,
5020, 6030
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]
Description: Displays the actual speed/velocity setpoint at the input of the speed/velocity controller or V/f characteristic (after the
interpolator).
Dependency: Refer to: r0020
Note: The speed setpoint is available smoothed (r0020) and unsmoothed (r0060).

r0061 CO: Speed actual value motor encoder / n_act mot. encoder
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1580,
4710, 6010
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]

Description: Displays the speed/velocity sensed by the motor encoder (unsmoothed).

1-44  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0062 CO: Speed setpoint after the filter / n_set after filter
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1590,
1750, 5020, 5030, 5210, 6030
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]

Description: Displays the actual speed/velocity setpoint after the setpoint filters.

r0063 CO: Actual speed, smoothed / n_act smooth

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1580,
1590, 4710, 6010, 6040, 8010
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]

Description: Displays the actual smoothed speed/velocity actual value for the speed/velocity control.
Dependency: Refer to: r0021
Note: This value is calculated in sensorless operation and for V/f control.
For closed-loop vector control, the value in r0063 can be smoothed again and displayed in r1445.
The value displayed in r0021 is the smoothed value of r0063.

r0063 CO: Actual speed, smoothed / n_act smooth

TM41 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]

Description: Displays the currently smoothed speed actual value.

Note: For terminal module 41 (TM41), this value is used to interconnect with standard telegram 3 and is always zero.

r0064 CO: Speed controller system deviation / n_ctrl system dev

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5040,
6040
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]
Description: Displays the actual control difference of the speed/velocity controller.
Note: In the servo control mode with active reference model, the system deviation to the P component of the speed/veloc-
ity controller is displayed.

r0065 Slip frequency / f_Slip

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6310,
6730
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]

Description: Displays the slip frequency for induction motors.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-45

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0066 Infeed line frequency / INF f_line

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8950,
8964
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]

Description: Displays the line frequency.

Dependency: Refer to: r0024
Note: The line frequency is available smoothed (r0024) and unsmoothed (r0066).
A positive sign of the frequency is obtained when the line supply phases U, V and W are connected with the correct
phase sequence.
A negative sign of the frequency is obtained when the 3 line phases are interchanged therefore designating a neg-
ative direction of the rotating field of the 3-phase line supply voltage.

r0066 CO: Drive output frequency / Drv f_output

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1690,
5300, 5730, 6310, 6730, 6731
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]

Description: Displays the motor module output frequency.

Dependency: Refer to: r0024
Note: The output frequency is available smoothed (r0024) and unsmoothed (r0066).

r0067[0...1] Permissible absolute infeed current magnitude OK / INF I_abs.val.perm

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the actual permissible absolute line-side current.

Index: [0] = Motor mode
[1] = Regenerative mode
Dependency: The permissible current is either the maximum converter current or the parameterized current limits, whichever is
lower.
Refer to: p3530, p3531

r0067 Maximum drive output current / Drv I_output max

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5722,
6300, 6640, 6724
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the maximum output current of the motor module.

Dependency: The maximum output current is determined by the parameterized current limit and the motor and converter thermal
protection.
Refer to: p0290, p0640

1-46  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0068 CO: Absolute current actual value / I_act abs.val.

A_INF, SERVO, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5730,
6714, 8014, 8950
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays actual absolute current.

Dependency: Refer to: r0027
Note: The calculated RMS value is only applicable for sinusoidal currents.
For DC current, a value is displayed that is too low by sqrt(2).
Absolute current value = sqrt(Iq^2 + Id^2)
The absolute current actual value is available smoothed (r0027) and unsmoothed (r0068).

r0069[0...6] Phase current, actual value / I_Phase act value

A_INF, SERVO, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1630,
5730, 6714, 6731, 8950
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]

Description: Displays the measured actual phase currents as peak value.

Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
[3] = Phase U offset
[4] = Phase V offset
[5] = Phase W offset
[6] = Total U, V, W
Note: In indices 3 ... 5, the offset currents of the 3 phases, which are added to correct the phase currents, are displayed.
The sum of the 3 corrected phase currents is displayed in index 6.

r0070 CO: Actual DC link voltage / Vdc_act

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1774,
5730, 6731, 8940, 8950, 8964
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: VOLTAGE_DC Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the measured actual value of the DC link voltage.
Dependency: Refer to: r0026, r0026
Note: The DC link voltage is available smoothed (r0026) and unsmoothed (r0070).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-47

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0071 Maximum output voltage / U_output max

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6300,
6724
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Veff] - [Veff] - [Veff]

Description: Displays the maximum output voltage.

Dependency: The maximum output voltage depends on the actual DC link voltage (r0070) and the maximum modulation depth
(p1803).
Note: As the (driven) motor load increases, the maximum output voltage drops as a result of the reduction in DC-link volt-
age.

r0072 CO: Infeed, input voltage / INF U_input

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8950
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Veff] - [Veff] - [Veff]

Description: Displays the actual power module input voltage.

Dependency: Refer to: r0025
Note: This value depends on the converter reactive current.
The input voltage is available smoothed (r0025) and unsmoothed (r0072).

r0072 CO: Drive, output voltage / Drv U_output

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1630,
5730, 6730, 6731
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Veff] - [Veff] - [Veff]
Description: Displays the power module output voltage.
Dependency: Refer to: r0025
Note: The output voltage is available smoothed (r0025) and unsmoothed (r0072).

r0073 Maximum modulation depth / Modulat_depth max

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6724
P-Group: Modulation Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the maximum modulation depth.
Dependency: Refer to: p1803

1-48  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0074 CO: Modulat_depth / Modulat_depth

A_INF, SERVO, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5730,
6730, 6731, 8940, 8950
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]

Description: Displays the actual modulation depth.

Dependency: Refer to: r0028
Note: For space vector modulation, 100% corresponds to the maximum output voltage without overcontrol.
Values above 100 % indicate an overcontrol condition - values below 100% have no overcontrol.
The phase voltage (phase-to-phase, RMS) is calculated as follows: (p0074 * p0070) / (sqrt(2)*100 %)
The modulation depth is available smoothed (r0028) and unsmoothed (r0074).

r0075 Reactive current setpoint / Id_set

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8946
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the reactive current setpoint.

Note: The reactive current requirement of a line filter can be covered by the controlled infeed/regenerative feedback. The
magnitude of the reactive current is determined by the capacitance of the line filter (p0221) that is automatically
parameterized when a line filter is selected (p0220). For p0221 = 0, the controller does not generate reactive cur-
rent for a line filter.
Setpoint r0075 includes the reactive current for a line filter that depends on the actual operating point.

r0075 Current setpoint, field-generating / Id_set

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1630,
5714, 5722
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]
Description: Displays the field-generating current setpoint (Id_set).
Note: This value is irrelevant for the V/f control mode.

r0076 Reactive current actual value / I_reactive_act

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1774,
6714, 8946, 8950
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the actual value for the reactive current.

Dependency: Refer to: r0029
Note: The reactive current actual value is available smoothed (r0029) and unsmoothed (r0076).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-49

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0076 Current actual value, field-generating / Id_act

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1630,
1774, 5714, 5730, 6731
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the field-generating current actual value (Id_act).

Dependency: Refer to: r0029
Note: This value is irrelevant for the V/f control mode.
The field-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0029) and unsmoothed (r0076).

r0077 CO: Active current setpoint / Iq_set

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1774,
8940, 8946
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the setpoint for the active current.

r0077 CO: Current setpoint, torque-generating / Iq_set

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1630,
1774, 5714, 6710, 6714, 6719
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]
Description: Displays the torque/force generating current setpoint.
Note: This value is irrelevant for the V/f control mode.

r0078 CO: Active current actual value / Iq_act

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8946,
8950, 1774
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the actual value for the active current.

Dependency: Refer to: r0030
Note: The active current actual value is available smoothed (r0030) and unsmoothed (r0078).

1-50  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0078[0...1] CO: Current actual value, torque-generating / Iq_act

SERVO Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1630,
1774, 5714, 5730
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the torque/force generating current actual value (Iq_act).

Index: [0] = Umsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045
Dependency: Refer to: r0030, p0045
Note: These values are irrelevant for the V/f control mode.
The torque-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0030 with 100 ms, r0078[1] with p0045) and
unsmoothed (r0078[0]).

r0078 CO: Current actual value, torque-generating / Iq_act

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6310,
6714
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the torque-generating current actual value (Iq_act).

Dependency: Refer to: r0030
Note: This value is irrelevant for the V/f control mode.
The torque-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0030 with 300 ms) and unsmoothed (r0078).

r0079[0...1] CO: Torque setpoint total / M_set total

SERVO Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1630,
1710, 5610
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the torque/force setpoint at the output of the speed/velocity controller (before clock cycle interpolation).
Index: [0] = Umsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045

r0079 CO: Torque setpoint total / M_set total

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1710,
6030, 6060, 6710
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]

Description: Displays the torque/force setpoint at the output of the speed/velocity controller (before clock cycle interpolation).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-51

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0080 CO: Torque actual value / M_act

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5730,
6714
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]

Description: Displays the actual torque/force actual value.

Dependency: Refer to: r0031
Note: The active current actual value is available smoothed (r0031) and unsmoothed (r0080).

r0081 CO: Torque utilization / M_Utilization

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8012
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]

Description: Displays the torque/force utilization as a percentage.

The torque/force utilization is obtained from the required smoothed torque/force referred to the torque/force limit.
Dependency: Refer to: r0033
Note: The torque utilization is available smoothed (r0033) and unsmoothed (r0081).

r0082 CO: Active power actual value / P_act

A_INF, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6714,
8050, 8950
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: POWER_P3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [kW] - [kW] - [kW]

Description: Displays the instantaneous active power.

Dependency: Refer to: r0032
Note: For A_INF, the following applies:
The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 300 ms) and unsmoothed (r0082).
For VECTOR, the following applies:
The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms) and unsmoothed (r0082).

r0082[0...2] CO: Actual active power / P_act

SERVO Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: POWER_P3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [kW] - [kW] - [kW]

Description: Displays the instantaneous active power.

Index: [0] = Umsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045
[2] = Power drawn
Dependency: Refer to: r0032
Note: The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms, r0082[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed (r0082[0]).

1-52  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0083 CO: Flux setpoint / Flux setpoint

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5722
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: FLUX_RELATIVE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the flux setpoint.

r0084 CO: Actual flux / Actual flux

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5722,
6730, 6731
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: FLUX_RELATIVE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]

Description: Displays the actual flux.

r0087 Actual power factor / CosPhi act value

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the actual active power factor.

r0088 DC-link voltage setpoint / Vdc setpoint

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8940,
8964
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: VOLTAGE_DC Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]

Description: Displays the setpoint for the DC link voltage.

r0089[0...2] Actual phase voltage / U_phase act. val.

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6719
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]

Description: Displays the actual phase voltage.

Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-53

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0093 CO: Rotor angle electrically normalized / Rot pos el. norm
SERVO Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: ANGLE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°] - [°] - [°]
Description: Displays the normalized electrical rotor position angle.
Note: This angle can be used to adjust the encoders of synchronous motors.

r0094 CO: Transformation angle / Transformat_angle

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: ANGLE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°] - [°] - [°]

Description: Displays the transformation angle.

Note: The transformation angle corresponds to the line supply angle.

r0094 Transformation angle / Transformat_angle

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1580,
4710, 6714, 6730
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: ANGLE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°] - [°] - [°]

Description: Displays the transformation angle.

Note: The transformation angle corresponds to the electrical commutation angle.

p0097 Select drive object type / Select DO type

CU Can be changed: C1 Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 12 0

Description: Executes an automatic device configuration.

In so doing, p0099, p0107 and p0108 are appropriately set.
Values: 0: No selection
1: Drive object type SERVO
2: Drive object type VECTOR
3: Drive object type VECTORMV
12: Drive object type VECTOR parallel circuit
Dependency: Refer to: r0098, p0099
Refer to: A01330
Note: For p0097 = 0, p0099 is automatically set to the factor setting.
The setting p0097 = 1 is not possible for chassis-type power modules as well as for SINAMICS G or SINAMICS
GM.
The setting p0097 = 12 is not possible for booksize power modules.

1-54  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0098[0...5] Actual device topology / Device_act topo

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the automatically detected actual device topology in coded form.
Index: [0] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100
[1] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X101
[2] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X102
[3] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X103
[4] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X104
[5] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X105
Dependency: Refer to: p0097, p0099
Note: Topology coding: abcd efgh hex
a = number of active line modules
b = number of motor modules
c = number of motors
d = number of encoders (or the line supply voltage sensing for active line modules)
e = number of additional encoders (or the line supply voltage sensing for active line modules)
f = number of terminal modules
g = number of terminal boards
h = reserved
if the value 0 is displayed in all indices, then components are not detected via DRIVE-CLiQ.
If a value F hex occurs at a position of the coding (abcd efgh hex), then an overflow has occurred.

p0099[0...5] Device target topology / Device_target topo

CU Can be changed: C1 Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
Description: Sets the device target topology in coded form (see r0098). The setting is made during commissioning.
Index: [0] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100
[1] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X101
[2] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X102
[3] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X103
[4] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X104
[5] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X105
Dependency: The parameter can only be written into for p0097 = 0.
To perform an automatic device configuration run, an index of the device target topology must be set to the value of
the device actual topology in r0098 for acknowledgement. An index of the device actual topology with a value other
than 0 must be selected.
Refer to: p0097, r0098
Refer to: A01330
Note: The parameter can only be set to the values 0, the value of the actual device topology, the value of the actual
device target topology and FFFFFFFF hex.
If the value 0 is displayed in all of the indices, then the system has still not be commissioned.
The value FFFFFFFF hex indicates that the topology was not generated by the automatic device configuration but
was commissioned using the commissioning software (e.g. using parameter download).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-55

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0100 IEC/NEMA mot stds / IEC/NEMA mot stds

SERVO, TM41, Can be changed: C2 Access level: 1
VECTOR Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Defines whether the motor and drive converter power settings (e.g. rated motor power - p0307) are expressed in
[kW] or [hp].
Depending on the selection, the rated motor frequency (p0310) is either set to 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
The following applies for IEC drives: The power factor (p0308) should be parameterized.
The following applies for NEMA drives: The efficiency (p0308) should be parameterized.
Values: 0: IEC motor [50 Hz / kW]
1: NEMA motor [60 Hz / hp]
Dependency: If p0100 is changed, all of the rated motor parameters are reset.
Refer to: r0206, p0210, p0300, p0304, p0305, p0307, p0308, p0309, p0310, p0311, p0312, p0314, p0320, p0322,
p0323, p0335, r0336, r0337, p0338, p1800
Note: The parameter can only be changed for closed-loop vector control (p0107).
The parameter value is not reset when the factory setting is restored (p0010 = 30, p0970).

p0101[0...15] Drive object numbers / DO numbers

CU Can be changed: C1 Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 62 0

Description: The parameter contains the object number via which every drive object can be addressed.
The number of an existing drive object is entered into each index.
The numbers are automatically assigned once and cannot longer be changed as long as the object has not been
deleted.
In the commissioning software, this object number cannot be entered using the Expert list, but is automatically
assigned when inserting an object.
Note: Value = 0: No drive object is defined.

r0102 Number of drive objects / DO quantity

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the total number of available drive objects.

Note: The numbers of the drive objects are in p0101.

1-56  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0103[0...15] Application-specific view / Appl_spec view

CU Can be changed: C1 Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 999 0
Description: The application-specific view of an existing drive object is entered into each index.
Dependency: Refer to: r0103, r0107, p0107
Refer to: F01051
Note: The application-specific views are defined in files on the CompactFlash Card with the following structure:
PDxxxyyy.ACX
xxx: Application-specific view, set using p0103
yyy: Type of drive object (p0107)
Example:
PD052011.ACX
--> "011" stands for the drive object, type SERVO
--> "052" is the view for this drive object set using p0103

r0103 Application-specific view / Appl_spec view

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 2
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the application-specific view of the individual drive object.
Dependency: Refer to: p0103, r0107, p0107
Refer to: F01051

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-57

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0107[0...15] Drive object type / DO type

CU Can be changed: C1 Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 254 0
Description: The type of an existing drive object is entered into each index.
Values: 0: Not a type
1: SINAMICS S
2: SINAMICS G
3: SINAMICS I
4: SINAMICS CX32
5: SINAMICSGM
10: ACTIVE LINE MODULE
11: SERVO
12: VECTOR
13: VECTORMV
20: SMART LINE MODULE
30: BASIC LINE MODULE
100: TB30 (Terminal Board)
200: TM31 (Terminal Module)
201: TM41 (Terminal Module)
202: TM17 High Feature (Terminal Module)
203: TM15 (Terminal Module)
254: CU-LINK
Dependency: Refer to: r0103, p0103, r0107
Refer to: F01051
Caution! If you change this parameter and exit the device commissioning mode, then the complete software will be set up
again and all of the previous drive parameter settings are deleted.
Note: The number (p0101) and the associated drive object type are in the same index.
For SINAMICS S a drive object type can only be changed between SERVO and VECTOR. If you change the
parameter and exit drive start-up (p0009 from 2 to 0) the drive parameters are set up again.

r0107 Drive object type / DO type

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 2
SERVO, TB30, Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
TM15, TM17, TM31,
TM41, VECTOR P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -

Min Max Factory setting

- - -

Description: Displays the type of each drive object.

Values: 10: ACTIVE LINE MODULE
11: SERVO
12: VECTOR
13: VECTORMV
20: SMART LINE MODULE
30: BASIC LINE MODULE
100: TB30 (Terminal Board)
200: TM31 (Terminal Module)
201: TM41 (Terminal Module)
202: TM17 High Feature (Terminal Module)
203: TM15 (Terminal Module)
254: CU-LINK
Dependency: Refer to: r0103, p0103, p0107
Refer to: F01051

1-58  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0108[0...15] Drive object, function module / DO function module

CU_S Can be changed: C1 Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 0000 bin
1111 1111 bin

Description: The function module of an existing drive object is entered into each index.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
29 CAN Not activated Activated -
30 COMMUNICATION BOARD Not activated Activated -
Note: A "function module" is a functional expansion of a drive object that can be activated when commissioning.

r0108 Drive object, function module / DO function module

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the activated function module for the particular drive object.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
15 Parallel circuit configuration Not activated Activated -
Note: A "function module" is a functional expansion of a drive object that can be activated when commissioning.

r0108 Drive object, function module / DO function module

SERVO Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the activated function module for the particular drive object.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
08 Setpoint channel Not activated Activated -
14 Extended brake control Not activated Activated -
16 Technology controller Not activated Activated -
17 Extended messages/monitoring Not activated Activated -
29 CAN Not activated Activated -
Note: A "function module" is a functional expansion of a drive object that can be activated when commissioning.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-59

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0108 Drive object, function module / DO function module

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the activated function module for the particular drive object.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
02 Closed-loop speed/torque control Not activated Activated -
14 Extended brake control Not activated Activated -
15 Parallel circuit configuration Not activated Activated -
16 Technology controller Not activated Activated -
17 Extended messages/monitoring Not activated Activated -
Note: A "function module" is a functional expansion of a drive object that can be activated when commissioning.

r0108 Drive object, function module / DO function module

B_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the activated function module for the particular drive object.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
15 Parallel circuit configuration Not activated Activated -
Note: A "function module" is a functional expansion of a drive object that can be activated when commissioning.

p0110[0...2] DRIVE-CLiQ basis sampling times / DLQ basis clock

CU Can be changed: C1 Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
31.25 [µs] 10000.00 [µs] [0] 125.00 [µs]
[1] 250.00 [µs]
[2] 250.00 [µs]

Description: Setting the basic clock cycles.

The basis clock cycle of the device (e.g. drive unit) is identical with the current controller clock cycle of a DRIVE-
CLiQ communications line. All current controller clock cycles of the same communications line (e.g. current control-
ler clock cycles of the drives) must be identical with the selected basis clock cycle.
The basis clock cycle for individual drives is selected in p0111.
Index: [0] = Bas. clock cycle 0
[1] = Bas. clock cycle 1
[2] = Bas. clock cycle 2
Note: The basis clock cycle can be changed in steps of 1.25 µs.
The values of the basic clock cycles are aligned to the number of drives.
The factory settings should be kept.
After parameters have been changed, they should be saved and a POWER ON carried-out.

1-60  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0111 DRIVE-CLiQ basis sampling time selection / DLQ bas clock eval
A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: C1 Access level: 4
SERVO, TM15, Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
TM17, TM31, TM41,
VECTOR P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -

Min Max Factory setting

0 2 0
Description: Selects the basis clock cycle for this drive.
Values: 0: Bas. clock cycle 0
1: Bas. clock cycle 1
2: Bas. clock cycle 2
Dependency: Refer to: p0110
Note: All of the drives communicating via the same DRIVE-CLiQ socket of the control unit must have the same basic
clock cycle.
After parameters have been changed, they should be saved and a POWER ON carried-out.

p0112 Sampling times pre-setting p0115 / t_sample for p0115

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: C1 Access level: 4
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 5 3

Description: Pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115.

The clock cycles for the current controller/speed controller/flux controller/setpoint channel are pre-assigned as fol-
lows:
SINAMICS S, servo drive:
p0112 = 2: 125 / 250 / 250 / 4000 µs
p0112 = 3: 125 / 125 / 125 / 4000 µs
p0112 = 4: 62.5 / 62.5 / 62.5 / 1000 µs
SINAMICS S, active infeed:
p0112 = 1: 400 / - / - / 1600 µs
p0112 = 2: 250 / - / - / 2000 µs
p0112 = 3: 125 / - / - / 2000 µs
p0112 = 4: 125 / - / - / 1000 µs
p0112 = 5: 125 / - / - / 500 µs
SINAMICS S, basic infeed:
p0112 = 1: 2000 / - / - / 2000 µs
p0112 = 2: 2000 / - / - / 2000 µs
p0112 = 3: 2000 / - / - / 2000 µs
p0112 = 4: 1000 / - / - / 1000 µs
p0112 = 5: 500 / - / - / 500 µs
SINAMICS S/G, vector drive:
p0112 = 1: 400 / 1600 / 1600 / 1600 µs (for a rated pulse frequency of 1.25 kHz)
p0112 = 2: 250 / 1000 / 2000 / 1000 µs
p0112 = 3: 250 / 1000 / 1000 / 1000 µs (for a rated pulse frequency of 2 kHz)
p0112 = 4: 250 / 500 / 1000 / 500 µs
p0112 = 5: 250 / 250 / 1000 / 250 µs
Values: 0: Expert
1: xLow
2: Low
3: Standard
4: High
5: xHigh

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-61

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Dependency: It is not permissible to select a value of p0112 if the associated current controller clock cycle is not identical to the
basic clock cycle.
Refer to: p0110, p0111
Note: When 0 (Expert mode) is selected, the individual sampling times in p0115 can be adjusted.
After parameters have been changed, they should be saved and a POWER ON carried-out.

p0115[0...6] Sampling times for internal control loops / t_sample int ctrl
A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: C1 Access level: 4
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 16000.00 [µs] [0] 125.00 [µs]
[1] 125.00 [µs]
[2] 125.00 [µs]
[3] 4000.00 [µs]
[4] 0.00 [µs]
[5] 0.00 [µs]
[6] 4000.00 [µs]

Description: Sets the sampling times for the control loops.

The default setting is made in p0112 and can only be changed for individual loops in the expert mode (p0112 = 0).
Index: [0] = Current controller
[1] = Speed Controller
[2] = Flux controller
[3] = Setpoint channel
[4] = Pos ctr (beingDev)
[5] = Positioning (being developed)
[6] = Techn. ctrl
Dependency: The sampling times can only be separately set if p0112 is set to 0 (expert mode). The current controller sampling
times must be set so that they are identical to the selected basis clock cycle (p0111 and p0110).
Higher-level controls must be calculated in integral ratios to lower-level controls (e.g. p0115[1] = N * p0115[0];
where N is a whole number).
Refer to: p0110, p0111, p0112
Note: if a control loop does not exist (e.g. positioning), a 0 is assigned to the parameter value.
For function modules that can be activated (e.g. technology controller), the parameters values are pre-assigned.
For the active line module (ALM), the currents and DC link voltage controllers operate with the same sampling time.
For the basic line module (BLM), the DC link voltage measurement operates in the current controller clock cycle.
After parameters have been changed, they should be saved and a POWER ON carried-out.

p0117 Current controller computation deadtime mode / I_ctrl t_dead mode

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 6 6

Description: Sets the mode for the computation deadtime of the current controller.
0: Offset (shifted) clocking, minimum computation deadtime of each drive, automatic setting
1: Clocking at the same time, the deadtime aligns itself to the deadtime of the latest drive, automatic setting
2: Manual setting of the computation deadtime, early transfer
3: Manual setting of the computation deadtime, late transfer
4-6: As for 0-2, however, no early transfers are set for vectors
Dependency: Refer to: p0118
Refer to: A02100

1-62  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Note: Re p0117 = 0:
The times when the setpoints become effective for the individual controls is automatically and individually deter-
mined. Another computation deadtime is set for each control (closed-loop) (p0118). Current is impressed for the
individual controls without any offset with respect to time (improved EMC compatibility).
Re p0117 = 1:
The latest closed-loop control determines when the setpoints for each of the individual controls become active. The
same computation deadtime is set for each control (p0118). Current is impressed (flows) for the individual controls
without any offset with respect to time.
Re p0117 = 2:
The computation deadtime is manually set. The user must optimize the value in p0118.
Re p0117 = 3:
Only for internal Siemens use.
Re p0117 = 4 - 6:
Behavior as for p0117 = 0 - 2, however for vectors, the earliest times are not determined.
The modified computation deadtime mode is not effective until the drive unit is powered-up again.

p0118 Current controller computation deadtime / I_ctrl t_dead

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 2000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
Description: This parameter is preset as a function of the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]) and normally does not have
to be changed.
Dependency: Refer to: p0117
Refer to: A02100
Note: For p0118 <= 0.005 µs, the current controller output is delayed by a complete current controller clock cycle
(p0115[0]).
After p0118 has been changed, we recommend that the current controller is adapted (p1715).

p0120 Power module data sets (PDS) number / PDS quantity

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: C1 Access level: 2
SERVO, TM41, Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: - Function diagram: -
VECTOR
P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 8 1

Description: Sets the number of power module data sets (PDS).

The value corresponds to the number of power modules connected together for a parallel circuit configuration.
Dependency: Refer to: r0107
Note: This parameter is only significant for drive objects A_INFEED and VECTOR with a parallel circuit configuration.

p0121[0...n] Power module component number / LT comp_no

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: C1 Access level: 4
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 199 0

Description: The power module data set is assigned to a power module using this parameter.
This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology.
Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to a power module.
Dependency: Refer to: r0107
Note: For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power module.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-63

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0124[0...15] Detection of main components using LED / Detection LED

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Detects the main components of the drive object selected via the index.

p0124[0...n] Power module detection via LED / LT detection LED

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Detects the power module assigned to this drive and data set.
Note: While p0124 = 1, the READY LED flashes green/orange or red/orange with 2 Hz at the appropriate power module.
For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power module.

r0127[0...n] Power module version EPROM data / PM EPROM version

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the version of the EPROM data of the power module.
Dependency: Refer to: r0147, r0157
Note: For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power module.

r0128[0...n] Power module firmware version / LT FW_version

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the power module firmware version.
Dependency: Refer to: r0018, r0148, r0158, r0197, r0198
Note: Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power module.

p0130 Motor data sets (MDS) number / MDS quantity

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C1 Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 1 1
Description: Sets the number of motor data sets (MDS).
Dependency: This parameter is only relevant for servo and vector drives (see p0107).

1-64  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0131[0...n] Motor component number / Mot comp_no

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C1 Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 199 0
Description: The motor data set is assigned to a motor using this parameter.
This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology.
Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to a motor.
Dependency: This parameter is only relevant for servo and vector drives (see p0107).

p0140 Encoder data sets (EDS) number / EDS quantity

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C1 Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 3 1

Description: Sets the number of encoder data sets (EDS).

Dependency: This parameter is only relevant for servo and vector drives (see p0107).

p0141[0...n] Encoder interface (sensor module) component number / Enc_interf comp_no

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C1 Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: EDS Function diagram: 4704,
8570
P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 199 0

Description: This parameter is used to assign the encoder data set to an encoder evaluation (e.g. SMC).
This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology.
Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to an encoder evaluation.
Dependency: This parameter is only relevant for servo and vector drives (see p0107).
Note: If the encoder evaluation and encoder are integrated (motor with DRIVE-CLiQ), then their component numbers are
identical.
For an SMC, different component numbers are assigned for the SMC (p0141) and the (actual) encoder (p0142).

p0142[0...n] Encoder component number / Encoder comp_no

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C1 Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: EDS Function diagram: 4704
P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 199 0

Description: This parameter is used to assign the encoder data set to an encoder.
This assignment is made using the unique component number that was assigned when parameterizing the topol-
ogy.
Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to an encoder.
Dependency: This parameter is only relevant for servo and vector drives (see p0107).
Note: If the encoder evaluation and encoder are integrated (motor with DRIVE-CLiQ), then their component numbers are
identical.
For an SMC, different component numbers are assigned for the SMC (p0141) and the (actual) encoder (p0142).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-65

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0144[0...n] Voltage sensing module detection via LED / VSM detection LED
A_INF Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: VSMDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Detects the voltage sensing module (VSM) module assigned to this infeed.

p0144[0...n] Sensor module detection via LED / SM detection LED

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: EDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Detects the sensor module assigned to this drive and data set.
Note: While p0144 = 1, the READY LED flashes green/orange or red/orange with 2 Hz at the appropriate sensor module.

r0147[0...n] Voltage sensing module version EPROM data / VSM EEP_version

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: VSMDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the version of the EPROM data of the voltage sensing module (VSM).

r0147[0...n] Sensor module version EPROM data / SM Eep_version

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: EDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the version of the EPROM data of the sensor module.
Dependency: Refer to: r0127, r0157

r0148[0...n] Voltage sensing module, firmware version / VSM FW_version

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: VSMDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the firmware version of the voltage sensing module (VSM).
Dependency: Refer to: r0018, r0128, r0158, r0197, r0198
Note: Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.

1-66  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0148[0...n] Sensor module firmware version / SM FW_version

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: EDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the sensor module firmware version.
Dependency: Refer to: r0018, r0128, r0158, r0197, r0198
Note: Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.

p0151 Terminal module component number / TM comp_no

TM15, TM17, TM31, Can be changed: C1 Access level: 4
TM41 Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: - Function diagram: 9550,
9552
P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 199 0

Description: Sets the component number for the terminal module.

This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology.
Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to a terminal module.

p0154 Terminal module detection via LED / TM detection LED

TM15, TM17, TM31, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
TM41 Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0

Description: Detects the terminal module assigned to this drive and data set.
Note: While p0154 = 1, the READY LED flashes green/orange or red/orange with 2 Hz at the appropriate terminal mod-
ule.

r0157 Terminal module version EPROM data / TM Eep_version

TM15, TM17, TM31, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
TM41 Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the version of the EPROM data of the terminal module.
Dependency: Refer to: r0127, r0147

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-67

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0158 Terminal module firmware version / TM FW_version

TM15, TM17, TM31, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
TM41 Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the terminal module firmware version.
Dependency: Refer to: r0018, r0128, r0148, r0197, r0198
Note: Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.

p0161 Option board, component number / OptBoard comp_no

TB30 Can be changed: C1 Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: - Function diagram: 9100
P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 199 0

Description: Sets the component number for the option board (e.g. terminal board 30).
This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology.
Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to an option board.

p0170 Command Data Set (CDS) number / CDS quantity

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: C1 Access level: 2
SERVO, TM41, Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: - Function diagram: -
VECTOR
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 2 1

Description: Sets the number of command data sets (CDS).

Note: It is possible to toggle between command parameters (BICO parameters) using this data set changeover.

p0180 Drive Data Set (DDS) number / DDS quantity

SERVO, TM41, Can be changed: C1 Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: - Function diagram: 8565
P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 32 1
Description: Sets the number of drive data sets (DDS).
Note: It is possible to toggle between open-loop and closed-loop control parameters using this data set changeover.

1-68  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0186[0...n] Motor data sets (MDS) number / MDS number

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C1 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 99 0
Description: Using the parameter, each drive data set (= index) is assigned the associated motor data set (MDS).
The parameter value therefore corresponds to the number of the assigned motor data set.
Dependency: This parameter is only relevant for servo and vector drives (see p0107).
Note: For servo and vector drives:
The data set basic commissioning can only be exited if all of the drive data sets are assigned an existing motor
parameter data set.
A value of 99 means that no encoder has been assigned to this drive data set (not configured).

p0187[0...n] Encoder 1 encoder data set number / Enc 1 EDS number

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C1 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 1580,
8570
P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 99 99

Description: Using the parameter, each drive data set (= index) is assigned the associated encoder data (EDS) for encoder 1.
The parameter value therefore corresponds to the number of the assigned encoder data set.
Example:
Encoder data set 0 should be assigned to encoder 1 in drive data set 2.
--> p0187[2] = 0
Note: A value of 99 means that no encoder has been assigned to this drive data set (not configured).
The same value must be entered for all of the indices.

p0188[0...n] Encoder 2 encoder data set number / Enc 2 EDS number

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C1 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 1580,
8570
P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 99 99
Description: Using the parameter, each drive data set (= index) is assigned the associated encoder data (EDS) for encoder 2.
The parameter value therefore corresponds to the number of the assigned encoder data set.
Note: A value of 99 means that no encoder has been assigned to this drive data set (not configured).
The same value must be entered for all of the indices.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-69

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0189[0...n] Encoder 3 encoder data set number / Enc 3 EDS number

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C1 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 1580,
8570
P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 99 99

Description: Using the parameter, each drive data set (= index) is assigned the associated encoder data (EDS) for encoder 3.
The parameter value therefore corresponds to the number of the assigned encoder data set.
Note: A value of 99 means that no encoder has been assigned to this drive data set (not configured).
The same value must be entered for all of the indices.

r0192 Power module properties / PM properties

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the properties supported by the power module.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Edge modulation possible No Yes -
01 Free telegram can be selected No Yes -
02 Smart mode possible for active line module No Yes -
03 Safety Integrated possible for VECTOR No Yes -
07 SERVO: Pulse frequency changeover DDS- No Yes -
dependent

r0194[0...n] VSM properties / VSM properties

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: VSMDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the properties supported by the voltage sensing module.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Reserved No Yes -

r0197 Loader 1 version / Loader 1 version

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the version of loader 1 (first level loader).

Dependency: Refer to: r0018, r0128, r0148, r0158, r0198
Note: Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.

1-70  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0198 Loader 2 version / Loader 2 version

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the version of loader 2 (second level loader).
Dependency: Refer to: r0018, r0128, r0148, r0158, r0197
Note: Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.

p0199[0...23] Drive object name / DO name

All objects Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0

Description: Freely assignable name for a drive object.

In the commissioning software, this name cannot be entered using the expert list, but is specified in the configura-
tion assistant. The object name can be subsequently modified in the Project Navigator using standard Windows
resources.

r0200[0...n] Power module, actual code number / PM code no. actual

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the unique code number of the power module.

Note: r0200 = 0: No power module found
For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power module.

p0201[0...n] Power module code number / PM code number

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0

Description: Sets the actual code number from r0200 to acknowledge the power module being used.
When commissioned for the first time, the code number is automatically transferred from r0200 into p0201.
Note: The parameter is used to identify when the drive is being commissioned for the first time.
The power module commissioning can only be exited (p0201 = r0200), if the actual and acknowledged code num-
bers are identical (p0010 = 2).
For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power module.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-71

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0203[0...n] Actual power module type / PM actual type

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Integer16 Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the type of power module found.
Values: 2: MICROMASTER 440
3: MICROMASTER 411
4: MICROMASTER 410
5: MICROMASTER 436
6: MICROMASTER 440 PX
7: MICROMASTER 430
100: SINAMICS S
150: SINAMICS G
200: SINAMICS GM
Note: For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power module.

r0204[0...n] Power module properties / PM properties

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the hardware properties of the power module.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DC/AC device AC/AC device DC/AC device -
01 RFI filter available No Yes -
02 Active line module available No Yes -
04 Basic line module available with thyristor No Yes -
bridge
05 Basic line module available with diode No Yes -
bridge
12 Safe brake control (SBC) supported Yes No -
Note: For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power module.

1-72  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0205 Power module application / PM application

VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 7 6
Description: The overload conditions of the load duty cycles are valid under the prerequisite that before and after the overload
condition, the drive converter is operated with its base load current - this is based on a load duty cycle of 300 s.
The following applies for chassis drive units:
The base load current for a slight overload is based on a duty cycle of 110% for 60 s or 150% for 10 s.
The base load current for a high overload is based on a duty cycle of 150% for 60 s or 160% for 10 s.
The following applies for booksize drive units:
Only the setting p0205 = 0 can be selected. In this case, for the base load current, there is a load duty cycle of
150% for 60 s or 176% for 30 s.
Values: 0: Load duty cycle with high overload condition for vector drives
1: Load duty cycle with slight overload condition for vector drives
6: S1 duty cycle for servo drives (feed drive)
7: S6 duty cycle for servo drives (spindle drive)
Note: When the parameter is changed, all of the motor parameters and the control type are pre-assigned according to the
selected application. The parameter has not influence when calculating the thermal overload.
p0205 can only be changed to the settings that are saved in the power module EEPROM.
Its value is not reset when factory values are restored (see p0010 = 30, p0970).

r0206[0...4] Rated power module power / PM P_rated

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 2
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: POWER_P3 Unit selection: p0100
Min Max Factory setting
- [kW] - [kW] - [kW]
Description: Displays the rated power module power for various load duty cycles.
Index: [0] = Rating plate
[1] = Load duty cycle with high overload condition
[2] = Load duty cycle with slight overload condition
[3] = S1 load duty cycle
[4] = S6 load duty cycle
Dependency: The value is displayed in [kW] or [hp].
Refer to: p0100, p0205

r0207[0...4] Rated power module current / PM I_rated

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 2
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8014
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]
Description: Displays the rated power module power for various load duty cycles.
Index: [0] = Rating plate
[1] = Load duty cycle with high overload condition
[2] = Load duty cycle with slight overload condition
[3] = S1 load duty cycle
[4] = S6 load duty cycle
Dependency: Refer to: p0205

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-73

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0208 Rated power module line supply voltage / PM U_rated

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 2
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Veff] - [Veff] - [Veff]
Description: Displays the rated line supply voltage of the power module.
r0208 = 400: 380 - 480 V +/-10 %
r0208 = 500: 500 -600 V +/-10 %
r0208 = 690: 660 - 690 V +/-10 %
The following applies for basic line modules:
r0208 = 690: 500 - 690 V +/-10 %

r0209[0...4] Power module, maximum current / PM I_max

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 2
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8950
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the maximum output current of the power module.

Index: [0] = Catalog
[1] = Load duty cycle with high overload condition
[2] = Load duty cycle with slight overload condition
[3] = S1 load duty cycle
[4] = S6 load duty cycle
Dependency: Refer to: p0205

p0210 Drive unit line supply voltage / Supply voltage

A_INF Can be changed: C2 Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8960
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
100 [Veff] 1000 [Veff] 400 [Veff]
Description: Sets the drive unit supply voltage.
The value corresponds to the rms value of the phase-to-phase rated line supply voltage.
Dependency: Refer to: p3400
Warning! If the infeed is continually in the controlled mode with high DC link voltages (p3510 > 660 V), depending on the par-
ticular application, this can damage the connected motors that have not been specified for these high voltages.
Before an active infeed with a line supply voltage p0210 > 415 V goes into pulsed operation it must be ensured that
all of the components connected to the DC link can be permanently operated with DC link voltages exceeding 660
V.
Controlled operation of booksize power modules for p0210 > 415 V is possible if the maximum steady-state DC link
voltage (p0280) is increased as follows: p0280 >= 1.5 * p0210 and p0280 > 660 V.
In this case, the setpoint of the DC link voltage p3510 is not automatically adapted. We recommend p3510 = 1.5 *
p0210. Closed-loop voltage controlled operation is active with p3400.0 = 0 and p3400.3 = 1.
Notice: For p0210 > 415 V for booksize power modules with a supply voltage of 3-ph. 380 ... 480 V, the smart mode is auto-
matically activated (p3400.0 = 1). In this case, the smart mode cannot be de-activated. This is because in the volt-
age controlled mode, the maximum steady-state DC link voltage (p0280) would be exceeded.

1-74  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Note: When pre-assigning the setpoint for the DC link voltage (p3510), the following is generally valid:
p3510 = 1.5 * p0210.
For booksize power modules with supply voltage of 3-ph. 380 ... 480 V AC, the following applies:
380 V <= p0210 <= 400 V --> default setpoint for the DC link voltage: p3510 = 600 V
401 V <= p0210 <= 480 V --> default setpoint for the DC link voltage: p3510 = 625 V

p0210 Drive unit line supply voltage / Supply voltage

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: VOLTAGE_DC Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 [V] 1200 [V] 600 [V]

Description: Sets the drive unit supply voltage.

AC/AC drive units: The RMS value of the phase-to-phase line supply voltage should be entered.
DC/AC drive units: The rated DC voltage of the supply busbars should be entered.
Dependency: For VECTOR (p0107) the following applies:
Set p1254 to 0 (automatic detection of the Vdc switch-in levels).
The switch-in thresholds of the Vdc_max controller are then directly determined using p0210.
Cautiont: If the line supply voltage is higher than the entered value, the Vdc controller may be automatically de-activated in
some cases to prevent the motor from accelerating. In this case, an appropriate alarm is output.
Note: For VECTOR (p0107) the following applies:
If the line supply voltage is higher than the parameterized value, then the DC link voltage controller could be auto-
matically de-activated in order to prevent the drive accelerating.
Setting ranges for p0210 as a function of the rated power module voltage:
V_rated = 400 V:
- p0210 = 380 ... 480 V (AC/AC), 510 ... 650 V (DC/AC)
V_rated = 500 V:
- p0210 = 500 ... 575 V (AC/AC), 675 ... 810 V (DC/AC)
V_rated = 690 V:
- p0210 = 660 ... 690 V (AC/AC), 890 ... 1035 V (DC/AC)
The pre-charging switch-in threshold for the DC link voltage (Vdc) is calculated from p0210:
Vdc_pre = p0210 * 0.82 * 1.35 (AC/AC)
Vdc_pre = p0210 * 0.82 (DC/AC)
The undervoltage thresholds for the DC link voltage (Vdc) are calculated from p0210 as a function of the rated
power module voltage:
V_rated = 400 V:
- V_min = p0210 * 0.78 (AC/AC), p0210 * 0.66 (DC/AC)
V_rated = 500 V:
- V_min = p0210 * 0.76 (AC/AC)
V_rated = 690 V:
- V_min = p0210 * 0.74 (AC/AC), p0210 * 0.63 (DC/AC)

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-75

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0210 Drive unit line supply voltage / Supply voltage

B_INF Can be changed: C2 Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
100 [Veff] 1000 [Veff] 400 [Veff]
Description: Sets the drive unit supply voltage.
The value corresponds to the rms value of the phase-to-phase rated line supply voltage.

p0211 Rated line freq / Rated line freq

A_INF Can be changed: C2 Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
10 [Hz] 100 [Hz] 50 [Hz]

Description: Sets the rated line frequency for the infeed.

p0220 Infeed line filter type / INF line filt type

A_INF Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 8964
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 19 0

Description: Sets the line filter type for the active line module (ALM).
For booksize units, parameters p0221 and p0222 are pre-assigned using the filter type. The reactor parameters
p0223 and p0224 are pre-assigned using the rated drive converter power.
For chassis units, parameters p0221 to p0224 (including the reactor parameter) are pre-assigned using the filter
type.
Values: 0: No line filter
1: Line filter booksize 400 V 16 kW
2: Line filter booksize 400 V 36 kW
3: Line filter booksize 400 V 55 kW
4: Line filter booksize 400 V 80 kW
5: Line filter booksize 400 V 120 kW
10: Line filter chassis unit F 400 V 110 kW 132 kW
11: Line filter chassis unit G 400 V 160 kW 200 kW
12: Line filter chassis unit G 400 V 250 kW
13: Line filter chassis unit H 400 V 315 kW 400 kW 450 kW
14: Line filter chassis unit J 400 V 560 kW 800 kW
15: Line filter chassis unit F 690 V 132 kW
16: Line filter chassis unit G 690 V 315 kW
17: Line filter chassis unit H 690 V 450 kW 560 kW
18: Line filter chassis unit J 690 V 710 kW
19: Line filter chassis unit J 690 V 1000 kW 1100 kW

1-76  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0221 Infeed filter capacitance / INF C_filter

A_INF Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8950
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: CAPACITY_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µF] 100000.00 [µF] 0.00 [µF]
Description: Sets the filter capacitance of the line filter (connected in a delta configuration).
Note: When a Siemens line filter is used (p0220) this parameter is automatically preset with the correct value.
For a parallel circuit configuration, the value corresponds to the capacitance for a power module.

p0222 Infeed filter resistance / INF R_filter

A_INF Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8950
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: RESISTANCE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [Ohm] 100.00000 [Ohm] 0.00000 [Ohm]
Description: Sets the filter resistance in series with the filter capacitance.
Note: When a Siemens line filter is used (p0220) this parameter is automatically preset with the correct value.
For a parallel circuit configuration, the value corresponds to the resistance for a power module.

p0223 Infeed inductance between filter and power module / INF L filter/PM
A_INF Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8950
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: INDUCTANCE_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.001 [mH] 1000.000 [mH] 2.100 [mH]
Description: Sets the inductance between the filter and power module.
Note: When a Siemens line filter is used (p0220) this parameter is automatically preset with the correct value.
For a parallel circuit configuration, the value corresponds to the inductance for a power module.

p0224 Infeed resistance between filter and power module / INF R filter/PM
A_INF Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8950
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: RESISTANCE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [Ohm] 100.00000 [Ohm] 0.00100 [Ohm]
Description: Sets the resistance between the filter and power module
Note: When a Siemens line filter is used (p0220) this parameter is automatically preset with the correct value.
For a parallel circuit configuration, the value corresponds to the resistance for a power module.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-77

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0225 Infeed inductance between line supply and filter / INF L line/filter
A_INF Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8950
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: INDUCTANCE_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.001 [mH] 1000.000 [mH] 0.001 [mH]
Description: Sets the inductance between line supply and filter.
Note: When a Siemens line filter is used (p0220) this parameter is automatically preset with the correct value.
The value must be appropriately increased if an additional inductance (reactor or transformer is installed in front of
the filter.

p0226 Infeed resistance between line supply and filter / INF R line/filter
A_INF Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8950
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: RESISTANCE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Ohm] 100.00 [Ohm] 0.00 [Ohm]

Description: Sets the resistance between the line supply and filter.
Note: When a Siemens line filter is used (p0220) this parameter is automatically preset with the correct value.
The value must be appropriately increased if an additional resistor is installed in front of the filter.

p0227 Infeed DC-link capacitance, total / INF C total

A_INF Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8950
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: CAPACITY_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.001 [mF] 1000.000 [mF] 0.700 [mF]

Description: Sets the total DC link capacitance.

Note: The total DC link capacitance of a DC link group comprises the sum of the sub-capacitances of all motor/infeed
modules and the additional DC link capacitors.

p0230 Drive filter type, motor side / Drv filt type

VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4 0

Description: Sets the type of the filter at the motor side.

Values: 0: No filter
1: Motor reactor
2: dv/dt filter
3: Sinusoidal filter, Siemens
4: Sinusoidal filter, third-party

1-78  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Dependency: The following parameters are influenced using p0230:

p0230 = 1:
--> p0233 (power module, motor reactor) = filter inductance
p0230 = 3:
--> p0233 (power module, motor reactor) = filter inductance
--> p0234 (power module sinusoidal filter capacitance) = filter capacitance
--> p0290 (power module overload response) = inhibit pulse frequency reduction
--> p1082 (maximum speed) = Fmax filter / pole pair number
--> p1800 (pulse frequency) >= nominal pulse frequency of the filter
--> p1802 (modulator modes) = space vector modulation without overcontrol
p0230 = 4:
--> p0290 (power module overload response) = inhibit pulse frequency reduction
--> p1802 (modulator modes) = space vector modulation without overcontrol
The user must set the following parameters according to the data sheet of the sinusoidal filter and also the user
must check whether they are permitted.
--> p0233 (power module, motor reactor) = filter inductance
--> p0234 (power module sinusoidal filter capacitance) = filter capacitance
--> p1082 (maximum speed) = Fmax filter / pole pair number
--> p1800 (pulse frequency) >= nominal pulse frequency of the filter
Refer to: p0233, p0234, p0290, p1082, p1800, p1802
Note: if a filter type cannot be selected, then this filter type is not permitted for the motor module.
p0230 = 2:
Chassis-type power modules with dv/dt filter may only be operated with a maximum pulse frequency of p1800 = 2.5
kHz. This means that the output frequency is restricted to 200 Hz.
p0230 = 3:
Sinusoidal filters with a rated pulse frequency of 1.25 or 2.5 kHz should only be operated with a current controller
sampling rate p0115[0] = 400 µs, sinusoidal filters with a rated pulses frequency of 2 or 4 kHz with p0115[0] = 250
µs.
The sinusoidal filter cannot be selected if the current controller sampling rate hasn't been appropriately set.

p0233 Power module motor reactor / PM mot reactor

VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: INDUCTANCE_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [mH] 1000.000 [mH] 0.000 [mH]
Description: Enter the inductance of a filter connected at the power module output.
Dependency: The parameter is automatically pre-assigned when selecting a filter via p0230.
Refer to: p0230

p0234 Power module sinusoidal filter capacitance / PM sine filter C

VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: CAPACITY_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [µF] 1000.000 [µF] 0.000 [µF]
Description: Enters the capacitance of a sinusoidal filter connected at the power module output.
Dependency: The parameter is automatically pre-assigned when selecting a filter via (p0230).
Refer to: p0230
Note: The parameter value includes the sum of all of the capacitances of a phase connected in series (phase - ground).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-79

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0251[0...n] Operating hours counter, power module fan / PM fan t_oper

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: T Access level: 4
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4294967295 0
Description: Displays the power module fan operating hours.
The number of hours operated can only be reset to 0 in this parameter (e.g. after a fan has been replaced).
Dependency: Refer to: p0252

p0252 Maximum operating time, power module fan / PM fan t_oper max
A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: T Access level: 4
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 50000 40000
Description: Sets the maximum operating time of the power module fan.
The pre-alarm (warning) is output 500 hours before this set value.
The monitoring is de-activated with p0252 = 0.
Dependency: Refer to: p0251

p0280 DC link voltage maximum steady-state / Vdc_max stat

A_INF Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8940,
8964
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: VOLTAGE_DC Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
270 [V] 1500 [V] 660 [V]

Description: Sets the maximum steady-state DC link voltage. When the DC link voltage setpoint reaches the threshold, alarm
A06800 is output.
The percentage setpoint for the DC link voltage in p3510 is limited to the value in p0280.
The voltage can be increased (boosted) using the modulation depth reserve controller. The modulation depth
reserve (p3480) can be too low if p0210 (drive unit supply voltage) was incorrectly parameterized, a line overvolt-
age condition is present or a high reactive current is required.
Dependency: Refer to: A06800
Warning! Before increasing the voltage limit for pulsed operation of a controlled infeed with line supply voltages p0210 > 415
V it should be checked whether the motors, connected to the DC link, are specified for the higher motor voltages.
Caution! All motors connected to the DC link must be rated for the maximum DC-link voltage set in this parameter.
Note: A brief, dynamic increase of the DC link voltage does not result in an alarm.

1-80  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0281 Line supply overvoltage, warning threshold / U_LineAlrmThrsh up

A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8960
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
100 [%] 200 [%] 110 [%]
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for a line supply overvoltage condition.
The setting is made as a percentage of the drive unit supply voltage (p0210).
Dependency: Refer to: p0211, p0221, p0222, p0223, p0224, p0225, p0226
Note: If synchronizing voltages are not detected, the line supply voltage is estimated using a model. It is therefore impor-
tant to ensure that drive unit data is correctly specified.

p0282 Line supply undervoltage, alarm threshold / U_LineAlrmThrshLow

A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8960
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
10 [%] 100 [%] 85 [%]

Description: Sets the alarm threshold for a line undervoltage condition.

The setting is made as a percentage of the drive unit supply voltage (p0210).
Dependency: Refer to: p0222, p0224, p0225, p0226, p3421, p3422
Refer to: A06105
Note: If synchronizing voltages are not detected, the line supply voltage is estimated using a model. It is therefore impor-
tant to ensure that drive unit data is correctly specified.

p0283 Line supply undervoltage, shutdown (trip) threshold / U_line trip_thresh

A_INF Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8960
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
10 [%] 100 [%] 75 [%]

Description: Sets the trip threshold for the line supply undervoltage.
The setting is made as a percentage of the drive unit supply voltage (p0210).
Dependency: Refer to: p0282
Refer to: F06100

p0284 Line supply frequency exceeded, alarm threshold / f_LineAlrmThrsh up

A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8964
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
100.0 [%] 300.0 [%] 110.0 [%]

Description: Sets the alarm threshold for an excessively high line frequency.
Dependency: Set as a percentage of the rated line frequency.
Refer to: p0211

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-81

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0285 Line supply frequency fallen below, alarm threshold / f_LineAlrmThrshLow

A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8964
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 100.0 [%] 90.0 [%]
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for an excessively low line frequency.
Dependency: Set as a percentage of the rated line frequency.
Refer to: p0211

p0287[0...1] Ground fault monitoring, thresholds / Grnd fault, thresh

A_INF, SERVO, Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 100.0 [%] [0] 6.0 [%]
[1] 16.0 [%]

Description: Sets the shutdown threshold for the ground fault monitoring.
The setting is made as a percentage of the maximum power module current (r0209).
Index: [0] = Threshold for pulse inhibit
[1] = Threshold for pulse enable
Note: The ground fault monitoring is de-activated by initially setting index 1 to 0 and then by setting index 0 to 0.

r0289 Maximum power module output current / PM I_output max

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the actual, maximum output current of the power module taking into account de-rating factors.

1-82  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0290 Power module overload response / PM overld response

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 8014
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
Description: Sets the response to a thermal overload condition of the power module.
The following quantities can result in a response to thermal overload:
- heatsink temperature (r0037.0)
- chip temperature (r0037.1)
- power module overload I2T (r0036)
Possible measures to avoid thermal overload:
- reduce the output current (closed-loop speed/velocity or torque/force control) or the output frequency (V/f control).
- reduce the pulse frequency (only for closed-loop vector control).
A reduction, if parameterized, is always realized after an appropriate alarm is output.
Values: 0: Reduce output current or output frequency
1: No reduction, shutdown when overload threshold is reached
2: Reduce the output current or output and pulse frequency (not using I2t)
3: Reduce the pulse frequency (not using I2t)
Dependency: If a sinusoidal filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3, 4), then only responses can be selected without
pulse frequency reduction (p0290 = 0, 1).
If a fault or alarm is present, then r2135.13 or r2135.15 is set.
Refer to: r0036, r0037, r0108, p0230, r2135
Refer to: A05000, A05001, A07805
Cautiont: If the thermal overload of the power module is not sufficiently reduced by the actions taken, the drive is always shut
down. This means that the power module is always protected independent of the setting of this parameter.
Note: The setting p0290 = 0, 2 is only practical if the load decreases with decreasing speed (e.g. for applications with vari-
able torque such as for pumps and fans).
For p0290 = 2, 3, the I2t overload detection of the power module does not influence the responses.

p0294 Power module alarm with I2t overload / PM I2t alrm thresh
A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8014
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
10.0 [%] 100.0 [%] 95.0 [%]

Description: Sets the alarm threshold for the I2t power module overload.
Drive:
If this threshold is exceeded, an overload alarm is generated and the system responds as parameterized in p0290.
Infeed:
When the threshold value is exceeded, only an overload alarm is output.
Dependency: Refer to: r0036, p0290
Refer to: A07805
Note: The I2t fault threshold is 100 %. If this value is exceeded, fault F30005 is output.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-83

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0295 Fan run-on time / Fan run-on time

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [s] 600 [s] 0 [s]
Description: Sets the run-on time of the fan after the power module is powered-down.

r0296 DC link voltage undervoltage threshold / Vdc U_lower_thresh

A_INF, B_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: VOLTAGE_DC Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: If the DC link voltage falls below the threshold specified here, the drive unit is tripped due to a DC link undervoltage
condition.

r0297 DC link voltage overvoltage threshold / Vdc U_upper_thresh

A_INF, B_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: VOLTAGE_DC Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]

Description: If the DC link voltage exceeds the threshold specified here, the drive unit is tripped due to DC link overvoltage.

p0300[0...n] Mot type selection / Mot type selection

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: MDS Function diagram: 6310
P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 10000 0

Description: Selects the motor type or start command to download motor parameters from the integrated encoder evaluation
with p0300 = 10000.
The first digit of the parameter value (for p0300 < 10000) always defines the general motor type and corresponds to
the unlisted motor belonging to a motor list:
1 = Rotating induction motor
2 = Rotating synchronous motor (only for servo drives)
3 = Linear induction motor (reserved)
4 = Linear synchronous motor (reserved)
7 = SIEMOSYN motor (only for vector drives)
8 = Reluctance motor (only for vector drives)
The type information must be entered to filter motor-specific parameters and to optimize the operating characteris-
tics and behavior. For example, for synchronous motors, power factor (p0308) is neither used nor displayed (in the
BOP/AOP).

1-84  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Values: 0: No motor selected

1: Induction motor (rotating)
2: Synchronous motor (rotating, permanent-magnet)
7: SIEMOSYN motor
8: Reluctance motor
11: 1LA1 standard induction motor
15: 1LA5 standard induction motor
16: 1LA6 standard induction motor
17: 1LA7 standard induction motor
18: 1LA8 standard induction motor
102: 1PH2 induction motor
104: 1PH4 induction motor
107: 1PH7 induction motor
134: 1PM4 induction motor
136: 1PM6 induction motor
206: 1FT6 synchronous motor
236: 1FK6 synchronous motor
237: 1FK7 synchronous motor
10000: Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ
Dependency: When the motor type is changed, the code number in p0301 may be reset to 0
Refer to: p0301
Note: For p0300 = 10000, the motor parameters are automatically downloaded if the motor has integrated encoder evalu-
ation. The input is ineffective if there is no integrated encoder sensing.
If a motor type has not been selected (p0300 = 0), then the drive commissioning routine cannot be exited.
A motor type with a value above p0300 >= 100 describes motors for which a motor parameter list exists.
Motor types with a value below p0300 < 100 correspond to the selection of an unlisted motor. When appropriately
selected, this means that the motor parameters are pre-assigned the settings for an unlisted motor.
If a catalog motor is selected (p0300 >= 100) and an associated motor code number (p0301), then the parameters,
that are associated if this list, cannot be changed (write protection). The write protection is canceled if the motor
type p0300 is set to a non-Siemens motor that matches p0301 (e.g. p0300 = 2 for p0301 = 2xxxx).
This also applies to the parameters of the integrated encoder sensing. In this case p0300 can only be set to p0300
= 10000 (read motor parameters) or to the corresponding non-Siemens motor (first digit of the motor code number)
in order to be able to cancel the write protection.

p0301[0...n] Motor code number selection / Mot code No. sel

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0

Description: The parameter is used to select a motor from a motor parameter list.
When changing the code number (with the exception to the value 0), all of the motor parameters are pre-assigned
from the internally available parameter lists.
Dependency: Only code numbers for motor types can be selected that correspond to the motor type selected in p0300.
Refer to: p0300
Note: The motor code number can only be changed if the matching list motor was first selected in p0300.
If the motor has its own integrated encoder evaluation, then p0301 cannot be changed. In this case, p0301 is auto-
matically written to the code number of the motor parameter read-in (r0302) if p0300 is set to 10000.
When selecting a list motor (p0300 >= 100), drive commissioning can only be exited if a code number is selected.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-85

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0302[0...n] Motor code number of integrated encoder evaluation / Motor code int enc
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the motor code number of the motor data stored in the integrated encoder evaluation.
Note: Drive commissioning can only be exited if the code number that was downloaded (r0302) matches the stored code
number (p0301). If the numbers differ, then the motor data set should be re-loaded using p0300 = 10000.
The motor data are always expected from the first encoder that is assigned to the drive data sets (refer to p0187 =
encoder 1) data set number.

p0304[0...n] Rated motor voltage / Mot U_rated

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 6300,
6724
P-Group: Motor Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [Veff] 20000 [Veff] 0 [Veff]

Description: Sets the rated motor voltage (rating plate).

Note: The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). For synchronous motors (p0300 =
2xx), the parameter can be optionally input.
For servo drives, the following applies:
For synchronous motors, the parameter is of no significance from a control-related perspective.
For vector drives, the following applies:
if the rated voltage is entered for synchronous motors during the commissioning phase, then the stator leakage
inductance (p0356, p0357) can be more accurately calculated (refer to p0340 and p03900).

p0305[0...n] Rated motor current / Mot I_rated

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 6300
P-Group: Motor Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Aeff] 10000.00 [Aeff] 0.00 [Aeff]
Description: Sets the rated motor current (rating plate).
Notice: For vector drives (refer to p0107):
If the rated motor current exceeds twice the maximum drive converter current (r0209), then the maximum current is
reduced due to the current harmonics that increase overproportionally (r0067).
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).

1-86  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0307[0...n] Rated motor power / Mot P_rated

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: POWER_P3 Unit selection: p0100
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [kW] 10000.00 [kW] 0.00 [kW]
Description: Sets the rated motor power (rating plate).
Dependency: IEC drives (p0100 = 0): Units, kW
NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): Units, hp
Refer to: p0100
Note: The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).

p0308[0...n] Rated motor power factor / Mot CosPhi_rated

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 1.000 0.000
Description: Sets the rated motor power factor cos phi (rating plate).
For a parameter value of 0.000, the power factor is internally calculated and displayed in r0332.
Dependency: This parameter is only available for IEC motors (p0100 = 0).
Refer to: p0100, p0309, r0332
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).

p0309[0...n] Rated motor efficiency / Mot eta_rated

VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 99.9 [%] 0.0 [%]

Description: Sets the rated motor efficiency (rating plate).

For a parameter value of 0.0, the power factor is internally calculated and displayed in r0332.
Dependency: This parameter is only available for NEMA motors (p0100 = 1).
Refer to: p0100, p0308, r0332
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-87

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0310[0...n] Rated motor frequency / Mot f_rated

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 6300
P-Group: Motor Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Hz] 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: Sets the rated motor frequency (rating plate).
Dependency: The number of pole pairs (r0313) is automatically re-calculated when the parameter is changed (together with
p0311), if p0314 = 0.
Only for vector drives (refer to p0107):
The rated frequency is restricted to values between 1.00 Hz and 650.00 Hz.
Refer to: p0311, r0313, p0314
Note: The parameter is automatically pre-assigned for induction motors from the motor list (p0301).
For synchronous motors, the parameter is not required and must therefore be pre-assigned zero. For p0310 = 0, it
is not possible to calculate the pole pair; instead, it must be entered in p0314.

p0311[0...n] Rated motor speed / Mot n_rated

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [1/min] 210000.0 [1/min] 0.0 [1/min]

Description: Sets the rated motor speed/velocity (rating plate).

For vector drives (refer to p0107):
For p0311 = 0, the rated motor slip of induction motors is internally calculated and displayed in r0330.
It is especially important to correctly enter the rated motor speed for closed-loop vector control and slip compensa-
tion for V/f control.
Dependency: The following applies for rotating motors:
If p0311 is changed and for p0314 = 0, the pole pair (r0313) is re-calculated automatically.
The following applies for linear motors:
The pole pair width is set in p0315.
Refer to: p0310, r0313, p0314
Note: The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).

p0312[0...n] Rated motor torque / Mot M_rated

SERVO Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 100000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the motor rated torque/force (rating plate).
Note: The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).

1-88  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0313[0...n] Motor pole pair number, actual (or calculated) / Mot PolePairNo act
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: MDS Function diagram: 5300
P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the number of motor pole pairs. The value is used for internal calculations.
Values:
r0313 = 1: 2-pole motor
r0313 = 2: 4-pole motor
etc.
Dependency: For p0314 > 0, the entered value is displayed in r0313.
For p0314 = 0, the pole pair number is automatically calculated from the rated frequency (p0310) and the rated
speed (p0311).
Refer to: p0310, p0311, p0314
Note: For the automatic calculation, the pole pair number is set to the value of 2 if the rated speed or the rated frequency
is zero.

p0314[0...n] Motor pole pair number / Mot pole pair No.

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 127 0

Description: Sets the motor pole pair number.

Values:
p0314 = 1: 2-pole motor
p0314 = 2: 4-pole motor
etc.
Dependency: For p0314 = 0, the pole pair number is automatically calculated from the rated frequency (p0310) and the rated
speed (p0311) and displayed in r0313.
Notice: For induction motors, the value need only be input if the rated data of a generator is entered therefore resulting in a
negative rated slip. In this case, the number of pole pairs in r0313 is too low by 1 and must be manually corrected.

p0315[0...n] Motor pole pair width / MotPolePair width

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: LENGTH_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1.00 [mm] 1000.00 [mm] 30.00 [mm]

Description: Sets the pole pair width of the linear motor.

Note: The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-89

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0316[0...n] Motor torque constant / Mot kT

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: Unit selection: -
TORQUE_PER_CURR
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm/A] 100.00 [Nm/A] 0.00 [Nm/A]

Description: Sets the torque/force constant of the synchronous motor.

p0316 = 0: The torque/force constant is calculated from the motor data.
p0316 > 0: The selected value is used as torque/force constant.
Dependency: Refer to: r0334
Note: The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).
This parameter is not used for induction motors (p0300 = 1xx).

p0317[0...n] Motor voltage constant / Mot kE

SERVO Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Veff] 10000.0 [Veff] 0.0 [Veff]

Description: Sets the voltage constant for synchronous motors.

Units for rotating synchronous motors: Vrms/(1000 RPM), phase-to-phase
Units for linear synchronous motors: Vrms s/m, phase
Note: The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).
This parameter is not used for induction motors (p0300 = 1xx).

p0318[0...n] Motor stall current / Mot I_standstill

SERVO Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Aeff] 10000.00 [Aeff] 0.00 [Aeff]

Description: Sets the stall current for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
Note: The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).
This parameter is not used for induction motors (p0300 = 1xx).
This parameter value is not evaluated from a control-related perspective.

p0319[0...n] Motor stall torque / Mot M_standstill

SERVO Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Nm] 100000.0 [Nm] 0.0 [Nm]

Description: Sets the stall (standstill) torque/force for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx, 4xx).
Note: The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).
This parameter is not used for induction motors (p0300 = 1xx).
This parameter value is not evaluated from a control-related perspective.

1-90  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0320[0...n] Motor rated magnetization current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rated

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 5722
P-Group: Motor Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [Aeff] 5000.000 [Aeff] 0.000 [Aeff]
Description: Induction motors:
Sets the rated motor magnetizing current.
For p0320 = 0.000 the magnetizing current is internally calculated and displayed in r0331.
Synchronous motors:
Sets the rated motor short-circuit current.
Note: The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).

p0322[0...n] Maximum motor speed / Mot n_max

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [1/min] 210000.0 [1/min] 0.0 [1/min]

Description: Sets the maximum motor speed/velocity.

Dependency: Refer to: p1082
Note: The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).

p0323[0...n] Maximum motor current / Mot I_max

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 5722
P-Group: Motor Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Aeff] 20000.00 [Aeff] 0.00 [Aeff]

Description: Set the maximum permissible motor current (e.g. de-magnetizing current for synchronous motors).
Note: The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).
For induction motors, the parameter has not effect if p0323 is set to 0.
For synchronous motors, a value must always be entered for the maximum motor current.
p0323 is a motor data. The user-selectable current limit is entered into p0640.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-91

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0325[0...n] Rotor position identification current, 1st phase / RotPosID 1st phase
SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [Aeff] 10000.000 [Aeff] 0.000 [Aeff]
Description: Sets the current for the 1st phase of the two-stage technique for rotor position identification.
The current of the 2nd phase is set in p0329.
A two-stage technique is selected with p1980 = 4, 5.
Dependency: Refer to: p0329, p1980, p1981, p1982, p1983, r1984, r1985, r1987, p1990
Refer to: F07995
Notice: When the motor code (p0301) is changed, it is possible that p0325 is not pre-assigned.
p0325 can be pre-assigned using p0340 = 3.
Note: The value is automatically pre-assigned for the following events:
- For p0325 = 0 and automatic calculation of the closed-loop control parameters (p0340 = 1, 2, 3).
- for quick commissioning (p3900 = 1, 2, 3).

p0326[0...n] Stall torque correction factor / Mot M_stallCorrFac

SERVO Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
5 [%] 300 [%] 60 [%]

Description: Sets the correction factor for the stall torque/force at a 600 V DC link voltage.
Note: The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).

p0327[0...n] PE spindle, optimum load angle / Mot load angle opt

SERVO Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 5722
P-Group: Motor Units group: ANGLE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [°] 135.0 [°] 90.0 [°]
Description: Sets the optimum load angle for synchronous motors with reluctance torque (e.g. 1FE ... motors).
This parameter has no significance for induction motors.
Note: For synchronous motors without reluctance torque, a angle of 90 degrees must be set.
The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).

p0328[0...n] PE spindle, reluctance torque constant / Mot kT_reluctance

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: INDUCTANCE_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [mH] 1000.00 [mH] 0.00 [mH]

Description: Sets the reluctance torque constant for synchronous motors with reluctance torque (e.g. 1FE ... motors).
This parameter has no significance for induction motors.
Note: For synchronous motors without reluctance torque, the value 0 must be set.
The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).

1-92  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0329[0...n] Rotor position identification current / Mot rotor pos id I

SERVO Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Aeff] 10000.00 [Aeff] 0.00 [Aeff]
Description: Sets the current for the rotor position identification routine.
For a two-stage technique, the current is set for the second phase.
Dependency: Refer to: p0325, p1980, p1981, p1982, p1983, r1984, r1985, r1987, p1990
Refer to: F07995
Note: The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).

r0330[0...n] Rated motor slip / Mot slip_rated

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
Description: Displays the rated motor slip.
Dependency: The rated slip is calculated from the rated frequency, rated speed and number of pole pairs.
Refer to: p0310, p0311, r0313
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).

r0331[0...n] Motor magnetizing current/short-circuit current (actual) / Mot I_mag_ratedAct

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 5722,
6722, 6724
P-Group: Motor Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Induction motor:

Displays the rated magnetizing current from p0320.
For p0320 = 0, the internally calculated magnetizing current is displayed.
Synchronous motor:
Displays the rated shirt-circuit current from p0320.
Dependency: If p0320 was not entered, then the parameter is calculated from the rating plate parameters.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-93

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0332[0...n] Rated motor power factor / Mot CosPhi_rated

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the rated power factor for induction motors.
For IEC motors, the following applies (p0100 = 0):
For p0308 = 0, the internally-calculated power factor is displayed.
For p0308 > 0, this value is displayed.
For NEMA motors, the following applies (p0100 = 1):
For p0309 = 0, the internally-calculated power factor is displayed.
For p0309 > 0, this value is converted into the power factor and displayed.
Dependency: If p0308 is not entered, the parameter is calculated from the rating plate parameters.
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).

r0333[0...n] Rated motor torque / Mot M_rated

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the motor rated torque/force.
Note: For induction and reluctance motors, r0333 is calculated from p0307 and p0311.
For synchronous motors, r0333 is calculated from p0305, p0316, p0327 and p0328. The result can deviate from the
input in p0312. If p0316 = 0, then r0333 = p0312 is displayed.

r0334[0...n] Motor-torque constant, actual / Mot kT act

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: Unit selection: -
TORQUE_PER_CURR
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm/A] - [Nm/A] - [Nm/A]

Description: Displays the torque/force constant of the synchronous motor used.

Dependency: Refer to: p0316
Note: This parameter is not used for induction motors (p0300 = 1xx).
For synchronous motors, parameter r0334 = p0316 is displayed. if p0316 = 0, r0334 is calculated from p0305 and
p0312.

1-94  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0335[0...n] Motor cooling type / Motor cooling type

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 6 0
Description: Sets the motor cooling system used.
Values: 0: Non-ventilated
1: Forced-ventilated
2: Water cooling
4: Non-ventilated and internal fan
5: Forced-ventilated and internal fan
6: Water cooling and internal fan
Note: The parameter influences the thermal 3-mass motor model.
1LA1 and 1LA8 motors are characterized by the fact that they have an internal rotor fan.
The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).

r0336[0...n] Rated motor frequency (actual) / Mot f_rated act

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]

Description: Displays the rated frequency of the motor.

For p0310 > 0, this value is displayed.
Dependency: Refer to: p0311, p0314
Note: For p0310 = 0 or for synchronous motors, the rated motor frequency r0336 is calculated from the rated speed and
the pole pair number.
For p0310 > 0, this value is displayed (not for synchronous motors).

r0337[0...n] Rated motor EMF / Mot EMF_rated

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Veff] - [Veff] - [Veff]

Description: Displays the rated EMF of the motor.

Note: EMF: Electromagnetic force

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-95

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0338[0...n] Motor limit current / Mot I_limit

SERVO Can be changed: C2 Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Aeff] 10000.00 [Aeff] 0.00 [Aeff]
Description: Sets the motor limit current for synchronous motors (for a 600 V DC link voltage).
Using this current, the maximum torque is achieved at the rated speed (voltage limit characteristic).
Note: The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).

r0339[0...n] Rated motor voltage / Mot V_rated

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Veff] - [Veff] - [Veff]
Description: Displays the rated motor voltage
Note: For induction motors (p0300 = 1xx) the parameter is set to p0304.
For synchronous motors, parameter r0339 = p0304 is displayed. If p0304 = 0, then r0339 is calculated from p0305
and p0316.

p0340 Automatic calculation, control parameters / Calc auto par

A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0

Description: Setting to reset and automatically calculate filter and control (closed-loop) parameters.
Values: 0: No calculation
1: Complete re-calculation of control parameters with commissioning data
2: Resets control parameters
Notice: The following parameters are influenced using p0340:
p0340 = 1:
--> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 2
--> p3421 = p0223 + p0225
--> p3422 = p0227
p0340 = 2:
--> p3560, p3562, p3564, p3603, p3615 and p3617 are reset to the factory setting.
Note: When existing the quick commissioning using p3900 > 0, p0340 is automatically set to 1.
At the end of the calculations, p0340 is automatically set to 0.

1-96  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0340[0...n] Automatic calculation of motor/control parameters / Calc auto par

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 5 0
Description: Setting to automatically calculate motor parameters and V/f open-loop and closed-loop control parameters from the
rating plate data.
Values: 0: No calculation
1: Complete calculation
2: Calculation of equivalent circuit diagram parameters
3: Calculation of closed-loop control parameters
4: Calculation of controller parameters
5: Calculation of technological limits and threshold values
Notice: The following parameters are influenced using p0340:
The parameters designated with (*) are, for list motors (p0300 > 100) not overwritten.
SERVO:
p0340 = 1:
--> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5
--> p0341 (*)
--> p0342, p0344, p0640, p1082, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003
p0340 = 2:
--> p0350 (*), p0354 (*), p0356 (*), p0358 (*), p0360 (*)
--> p0625 (matching p0350)
p0340 = 3:
--> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 4, 5
--> p0325 (is only calculated for p0325 = 0)
--> p0348 (*) (is only calculated for p0348 = 0)
--> p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445 (only for 1FT6, 1FK6, 1FK7 motors)
--> p0492, p1082, p1980, p1319, p1326, p1327, p1612, p1752, p1755
p0340 = 4:
--> p1460, p1462, p1463, p1464, p1465, p1470, p1472, p1590, p1592, p1715, p1717
--> p1461 (for p0348 > p0322, p1461 is set to 100 %)
--> p1463 (for p0348 > p0322, p1463 is set to 400 %)
p0340 = 5:
--> p1037, p1038, p1520, p1521, p1530, p1531, p2140, p2142, p2150, p2162, p2163, p2164, p2175, p2177, p2194

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-97

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

VECTOR:
p0340 = 1:
--> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5
--> p0341 (*)
--> p0342, p0344, p0640, p1082, p1654, p1825, p1828, p1829, p1830, p1831, p1832, p1905, p2000, p2001,
p2002, p2003
p0340 = 2:
--> p0350 (*), p0352, p0354 (*), p0356 (*), p0358 (*), p0360 (*)
--> p0625 (matching p0350)
p0340 = 3:
--> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 4, 5
--> p0346, p0347, p0492, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327, p1582, p1584, p1616,
p1744, p1755, p1756, p2178
p0340 = 4:
--> p1290, p1292, p1293, p1299, p1338, p1339, p1340, p1341, p1345, p1346, p1460, p1461, p1462, p1463,
p1464, p1465, p1470, p1472, p1590, p1592, p1715, p1717, p1740, p1760, p1761, p1764, p1767, p1781, p1783,
p1785, p1786
p0340 = 5:
--> p1037, p1038, p1520, p1521, p1530, p1531, p1802, p1803, p2140, p2142, p2150, p2162, p2163, p2164,
p2175, p2177, p2194
Note: p0340 = 1 contains the calculations of p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5 without overwriting the motor parameters from the Sie-
mens motor lists (p0301 > 0).
p0340 = 2 calculates the motor parameters (p0350 ... p0360), but only if it does involve a Siemens catalog motor
(p0301 = 0).
p0340 = 3 contains the calculations of p0340 = 4, 5.
p0340 = 4 only calculates the controller parameters.
p0340 = 5 only calculates the controller limits.
When existing the quick commissioning using p3900 > 0, p0340 is automatically set to 1.
At the end of the calculations, p0340 is automatically set to 0.
If the STARTER commissioning software (start-up tool) writes a 3 into p0340 when "downloading into the target
device", then this corresponds to a "complete calculation of the motor/control parameters without equivalent circuit
diagram data". The same calculations are carried-out as for p0340 = 1, however, without the equivalent circuit dia-
gram parameters of the motor (refer to p0340 = 2), the motor moment of inertia (p0341) and the motor weight
(p0344).

p0341[0...n] Motor moment of inertia / Mot M_mom of inert

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 5210
P-Group: Motor Units group: INERTIA Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [kgm²] 100000.00000 [kgm²] 0.00000 [kgm²]

Description: Sets the motor moment of inertia/mass (without load).

Dependency: This means that together with p0342, the rated starting time of the motor is calculated.
Refer to: p0342, r0345
Note: The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).
SERVO:
p0341 * p0342 + p1498 influence the speed/torque pre-control in sensorless operation.
VECTOR:
The product p0341 * p0342 is taken into account when automatically calculating the speed controller (p0340 = 4).

1-98  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0342[0...n] Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia / Mot MomInert Ratio
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 5210
P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1.000 10000.000 1.000
Description: Sets the ratio between the total moment of inertia/mass (load + motor) and the intrinsic motor moment of iner-
tia/mass (no load).
Dependency: This means that together with p0341, the rated starting (accelerating time) of the motor is calculated for a vector
drive.
Refer to: p0341, r0345, p1498
Note: SERVO:
p0341 * p0342 + p1498 influence the speed/torque pre-control in sensorless operation.
VECTOR:
The product p0341 * p0342 is taken into account when automatically calculating the speed controller (p0340 = 4).

p0344[0...n] Motor weight / Motor weight

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: MASS Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [kg] 50000.0 [kg] 0.0 [kg]

Description: Sets the motor weight.

The following applies for vector drives (refer to p0107):
The parameter influences the thermal 3 mass model of the induction motor.
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).

r0345[0...n] Nominal motor starting time / Mot t_start_rated

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [s] - [s] - [s]

Description: Displays the rated motor starting time. This time corresponds to the time from standstill up to reaching the motor
rated speed/velocity and the acceleration with motor rated torque/force (r0333).
Dependency: Refer to: r0313, r0333, r0336, p0341, p0342

p0346[0...n] Motor excitation build-up time / Mot t_excitation

VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 20.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the excitation build-up time of the motor.
This involves the delay time between enabling the pulses and enabling the ramp-function generator. The induction
motor is magnetized during this time.
Note: The parameter is calculated using p0340 = 1, 3.
For induction motors, the result depends on the rotor time constant (r0384).
If this time is excessively reduced, this can result in an inadequate magnetization of the induction motor.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-99

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0347[0...n] Motor de-excitation time / Mot t_de-excitat.

VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 20.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the de-magnetizing time (for induction motors) after the inverter pulses have been cancelled.
The inverter pulses cannot be switched-in (enabled) within this delay time.
Note: The parameter is calculated using p0340 = 1, 3.
For induction motors, the result depends on the rotor time constant (r0384).
if this time is shortened too much, then this can result in an inadequate de-magnetization of the induction motor
and in an overcurrent condition when the pulses are subsequently enabled (only when the flying restart function is
activated and the motor is rotating).
After a normal stopping process, the delay time is not active - i.e. after OFF1, OFF3 or JOG

p0348[0...n] Speed at the start of field weakening Vdc = 600 V / Mot n_field weaken
SERVO Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 5722
P-Group: Motor Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [1/min] 210000.0 [1/min] 0.0 [1/min]

Description: Sets the speed/velocity at the start of field weakening for a DC link voltage of 600 V.
Dependency: Refer to: p0320, r0331
Note: The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).

p0350[0...n] Motor stator resistance, cold / Mot R_stator cold

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: RESISTANCE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [Ohm] 2000.00000 [Ohm] 0.00000 [Ohm]

Description: Sets the stator resistance of the motor at ambient temperature p0625.
Dependency: Refer to: p0625
Note: The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).
The motor identification routine determines the stator resistance from the total stator resistance minus the cable
resistance (p0352).

p0352[0...n] Cable resistance (component of the stator resistance) / Mot R_cable cold
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: RESISTANCE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [Ohm] 120.00000 [Ohm] 0.00000 [Ohm]

Description: Resistance of the power cable between the motor module and motor.
Note: The parameter influences the temperature adaptation of the stator resistance.
The motor identification routine does not change the cable resistance. This is subtracted from the total measured
stator resistance in order to calculate the stator resistance (p0350, p0352).

1-100  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0353[0...n] Motor series inductance / Mot L_series

SERVO Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: INDUCTANCE_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [mH] 1000000.000 [mH] 0.000 [mH]
Description: Sets the series inductance.
Note: For the automatic calculation with p0340 = 1 or 3, the calculation of p0348 is influenced by p0353 if p0348 was 0.
For the automatic calculation with p0340 = 1, 3 or 4, the calculation of p1715 is influenced by p0353.

p0354[0...n] Motor rotor resistance, cold / Mot R_rotor cold

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: RESISTANCE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [Ohm] 300.00000 [Ohm] 0.00000 [Ohm]
Description: Sets the the rotor/secondary section resistance of the motor at the ambient temperature p0625.
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identifica-
tion routine (p1910).
Dependency: Refer to: p0625
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).

p0356[0...n] Motor stator leakage inductance / Mot L_stator leak.

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: INDUCTANCE_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [mH] 1000.00000 [mH] 0.00000 [mH]

Description: Induction motor: Sets the rotor leakage inductance of the motor.
Synchronous motor: Sets the stator quadrature axis inductance of the motor.
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identifica-
tion routine (p1910).
Note: The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).

p0357[0...n] Motor stator inductance, d axis / Mot L_stator_d

VECTOR Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: INDUCTANCE_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [mH] 1000.00000 [mH] 0.00000 [mH]

Description: Sets the stator direct axis inductance of the motor for synchronous motors.
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identifica-
tion routine (p1910).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-101

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0358[0...n] Motor rotor leakage inductance / Mot L_rotor leak.

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: INDUCTANCE_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [mH] 1000.00000 [mH] 0.00000 [mH]
Description: Sets the rotor/secondary section leakage inductance of the motor.
The value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or determined using the motor identifica-
tion routine (p1910).
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).

p0360[0...n] Motor magnetizing inductance / Mot L_main

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: INDUCTANCE_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [mH] 10000.00000 [mH] 0.00000 [mH]

Description: Sets the magnetizing inductance of the motor.

This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identifica-
tion routine (p1910).
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).

p0362[0...n] Saturation characteristic flux 1 / Mot saturat.flux 1

VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
25.0 [%] 300.0 [%] 60.0 [%]

Description: The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the first flux value of the saturation characteristic as a [%] referred to the rated motor voltage (p0304).
Dependency: The following applies for the flux values:
p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
Refer to: p0366
Note: p0362 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux.

p0363[0...n] Saturation characteristic flux 2 / Mot saturat.flux 2

VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
25.0 [%] 300.0 [%] 85.0 [%]

Description: The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the second flux value of the saturation characteristic as a [%] referred to the rated motor voltage (p0304).

1-102  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Dependency: The following applies for the flux values:

p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
Refer to: p0367
Note: p0363 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux.

p0364[0...n] Saturation characteristic flux 3 / Mot saturat.flux 3

VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
25.0 [%] 300.0 [%] 115.0 [%]
Description: The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 3rd value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the third flux value of the saturation characteristic as a [%] referred to the rated motor voltage (p0304).
Dependency: The following applies for the flux values:
p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
Refer to: p0368
Note: p0364 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux.

p0365[0...n] Saturation characteristic flux 4 / Mot saturat.flux 4

VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
25.0 [%] 300.0 [%] 125.0 [%]
Description: The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 4th value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the fourth flux value of the saturation characteristic as a [%] referred to the rated motor voltage (p0304).
Dependency: The following applies for the flux values:
p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
Refer to: p0369
Note: p0365 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux.

p0366[0...n] Saturation characteristic I_mag 1 / Mot sat. I_mag 1

VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
25.0 [%] 500.0 [%] 50.0 [%]

Description: The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (magnetizing current) for the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the first magnetizing current of the saturation characteristic as a [%] referred to the rated magnetizing current
(p0331).
Dependency: The following applies for the magnetizing currents:
p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
Refer to: p0362

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-103

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0367[0...n] Saturation characteristic I_mag 2 / Mot sat. I_mag 2

VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
25.0 [%] 500.0 [%] 75.0 [%]
Description: The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (magnetizing current) for the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the second magnetizing current of the saturation characteristic as a [%] referred to the rated magnetizing cur-
rent (p0331).
Dependency: The following applies for the magnetizing currents:
p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
Refer to: p0363

p0368[0...n] Saturation characteristic I_mag 3 / Mot sat. I_mag 3

VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
25.0 [%] 500.0 [%] 150.0 [%]

Description: The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (magnetizing current) for the 3rd value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the third magnetizing current of the saturation characteristic as a [%] referred to the rated magnetizing current
(p0331).
Dependency: The following applies for the magnetizing currents:
p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
Refer to: p0364

p0369[0...n] Saturation characteristic I_mag 4 / Mot sat. I_mag 4

VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
25.0 [%] 500.0 [%] 210.0 [%]

Description: The saturation characteristics (flux as a function of the magnetizing current) is defined using 4 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (magnetizing current) for the 4th value pair of the characteristic.
Sets the fourth magnetizing current of the saturation characteristic as a [%] referred to the rated magnetizing cur-
rent (p0331).
Dependency: The following applies for the magnetizing currents:
p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
Refer to: p0365

1-104  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0370[0...n] Motor stator resistance, cold / Mot R_stator cold

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: RESISTANCE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Ohm] - [Ohm] - [Ohm]
Description: Displays the motor stator resistance at an ambient temperature p0625. The value does not include the cable resis-
tance.
Dependency: Refer to: p0625

r0372[0...n] Cable resistance / Mot R_cable

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: RESISTANCE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Ohm] - [Ohm] - [Ohm]

Description: Displays the cable resistance between the motor module and motor.
Dependency: Refer to: p0352

r0373[0...n] Motor rated stator resistance / Mot R_stator rated

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: RESISTANCE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Ohm] - [Ohm] - [Ohm]

Description: Displays the rated motor stator resistance at rated temperature (sum from p0625 and p0627).
Dependency: Refer to: p0627
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).

r0374[0...n] Motor rotor resistance, cold / Mot R_rotor cold

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: RESISTANCE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Ohm] - [Ohm] - [Ohm]

Description: Displays the rotor/secondary section resistance of the motor for the ambient temperature p0625.
Dependency: Refer to: p0625
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).

r0376[0...n] Rated motor rotor resistance / Mot R_rotor rated

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: RESISTANCE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Ohm] - [Ohm] - [Ohm]

Description: Displays the rated (nominal) rotor/secondary section resistance of the motor at the rated temperature (sum of
p0625 and p0628).
Dependency: Refer to: p0628
Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-105

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0377[0...n] Motor leakage inductance, total / Mot L_leak total

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 6640
P-Group: Motor Units group: INDUCTANCE_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Induction motor:
Displays the stator leakage inductance of the motor including the series inductance (p0353) for servo drives or the
motor reactor (p0233) for vector drives.
Synchronous motor:
Displays the stator quadrature axis inductance including the series inductance (p0353) for servo drives or the motor
reactor (p0233) for vector drives.

r0378[0...n] Motor stator inductance, d axis / Mot L_stator_d

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: INDUCTANCE_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]

Description: Displays the stator direct-axis inductance of the synchronous motor.

r0382[0...n] Motor main inductance, transformed / Mot L_main trans

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: INDUCTANCE_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]

Description: Displays the magnetizing inductance of the motor.

Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).

r0384[0...n] Motor rotor time constant / Mot T_rotor

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 6722
P-Group: Motor Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]

Description: Displays the rotor time constant.

Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors.
The value is calculated from the sum of the inductances on the rotor side (p0358, p0360) divided by the rotor resis-
tance (p0354). The temperature adaptation of the rotor resistance is not taken into account.

1-106  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0386[0...n] Motor stator leakage time constant / Mot T_stator leak

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the stator leakage time constant.
Note: The value is calculated from the sum of all leakage inductances (p0233*, p0353**, p0356, p0358) divided by the
sum of all motor resistances (p0350, p0352*, p0354).
The temperature adaptation of the resistances is not taken into account.
* only applies for VECTOR (r0107).
** only applies for SERVO (r0107).

p0391[0...n] Current controller adaptation, lower starting point / I_adapt pt. lower
SERVO Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 5714
P-Group: Motor Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Aeff] 6000.00 [Aeff] 0.00 [Aeff]

Description: Sets the lower starting point of the current-dependent current controller adaptation.
Dependency: Refer to: p0392, p0393, p1715
Note: For p0393 = 100 %, the current controller adaptation is disabled and p1715 is effective over the entire range.
The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).

p0392[0...n] Current controller adaptation, upper starting point / I_adapt pt. upper
SERVO Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 5714
P-Group: Motor Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Aeff] 6000.00 [Aeff] 0.00 [Aeff]

Description: Sets the upper starting point of the current-dependent current controller adaptation.
Dependency: Refer to: p0391, p0393, p1715
Note: For p0393 = 100 %, the current controller adaptation is disabled and p1715 is effective over the entire range.
The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).

p0393[0...n] Current controller adaptation, P gain, scaling upper / I_adapt Kp upper

SERVO Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 5714
P-Group: Motor Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]

Description: Sets the factor for the current controller P gain after the adaptation range (currents greater than p0392). The value
is referred to p1715.
Dependency: Refer to: p0391, p0392, p1715
Note: For p0393 = 100 %, the current controller adaptation is disabled and p1715 is effective over the entire range.
The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-107

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0395[0...n] Stator resistance, actual / R_stator active

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 6300,
6730, 6731
P-Group: Motor Units group: RESISTANCE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Ohm] - [Ohm] - [Ohm]

Description: Displays the actual stator resistance (phase value).

The parameter is influenced by the temperature model and includes the temperature-independent cable resistance.

r0396[0...n] Rotor resistance, actual / R_rotor active

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 6730
P-Group: Motor Units group: RESISTANCE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Ohm] - [Ohm] - [Ohm]

Description: Displays the actual rotor/secondary section resistance (phase value).

The parameter is influenced by the temperature model.
Note: This parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).

p0400[0...n] Enc type selection / Enc type selection

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: EDS Function diagram: 1580,
4704, 6004
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 10000 0

Description: Selects the encoder from the list of encoder types supported.
Values: 0: No encoder
1001: Resolver 1 speed
1002: Resolver 2 speed
1003: Resolver 3 speed
1004: Resolver 4 speed
2001: 2048, 1 Vpp, A/B C/D R
2002: 2048, 1 Vpp, A/B R
2003: 256, 1 Vpp, A/B R
2004: 400, 1 Vpp, A/B R
2005: 512, 1 Vpp, A/B R
2050: Encoder with EnDat interface
2051: 2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, Multiturn 4096
2052: 32, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, Multiturn 4096
2053: 512, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, Multiturn 4096
2151: 16000 nm, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, resolution 100 nm
3001: 1024 HTL A/B R at X521/X531
3002: 1024 TTL A/B R at X521/X531
3003: 2048 HTL A/B R at X521/X531
3020: 2048 TTL A/B R at X520
9999: User-defined
10000: Identify encoder
Note: The connected encoder can be identified by p0400 = 10000. The requires that the encoder supports this function
and is possible in the following cases: Motor (encoder) with DRIVE-CLiQ, encoder with EnDat interface. If an iden-
tification is not possible, then p0400 is set to 0.
The encoder data (e.g. pulse number p0408) can only be changed when p0400 = 9999.

1-108  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0404[0...n] Encoder configuration effective / Enc configuration

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: EDS Function diagram: 4704,
6004
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 0000 0000 1111 1111 1111 1111 0000 bin
1111 1111 bin

Description: Settings for the basic encoder properties.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Linear encoder No Yes -
01 Absolute value encoder No Yes -
02 Multiturn encoder No Yes -
03 Track A/B square-wave No Yes -
04 Track A/B sinusoidal No Yes -
05 Track C/D No Yes -
06 Hall sensor No Yes -
08 EnDat encoder No Yes -
09 SSI encoder No Yes -
12 Equidistant zero mark No Yes -
13 Irregular zero mark No Yes -
14 Distance-coded zero mark No Yes -
15 Commutation with zero mark No Yes -
16 Acceleration No Yes -
20 Voltage level 5 V No Yes -
21 Voltage level 24 V No Yes -
22 Remote sense (only SMC30) No Yes -
23 Resolver excit. No Yes -
Note: ZM: Zero mark
SMC: Sensor Module Cabinet
If a technique to determine the commutation information/data has not been selected (e.g. track C/D, Hall sensor),
and the encoder pulse number is an integer multiple of the pole number, then the following applies:
The track A/B is adjusted to match the magnetic position of the motor.
Bit 12 (equidistant zero mark):
The zero marks occur at regular intervals (e.g. rotary encoder with 1 zero mark per revolution). The bit activates the
monitoring of the zero mark clearance (p0425).
Bit 13 (irregular zero mark):
The zero marks occur at irregular intervals (e.g. a linear scale with only 1 zero mark in the traversing range). The
zero mark clearance is not monitored.
Bit 14 (clearance-coded zero mark):
The distance (clearance) between two or several consecutive zero marks allows the absolute position to be calcu-
lated.
(being developed)

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-109

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0405[0...n] Square-wave signal encoder A/B track / Enc sq-wave A/B

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: EDS Function diagram: 4704,
6004
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 bin 0000 bin

Description: Settings for the track A/B of a square-wave encoder. For encoders with square-wave form, p0404.3 must also be 1.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Signal Unipolar Bipolar -
01 Level HTL TTL -
02 Track monitoring None A/B <> -A/B -
03 Zero pulse 24 V unipolar Same as A/B track -

p0407[0...n] Linear encoder scale / Enc scale

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: EDS Function diagram: 4704,
6004
P-Group: Encoder Units group: LENGTH_M9 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [nm] 250000000 [nm] 16000 [nm]
Description: Sets the scale for a linear encoder.
Note: The lowest permissible value is 250 nm.

p0408[0...n] Rotary encoder pulse No. / Encoder pulse No.

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: EDS Function diagram: 4704,
6004
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 16777215 2048

Description: Sets the number of pulses for a rotary encoder.

Note: The number of pole pairs for a resolver is entered here.
The smallest permissible value is 1 pulse.

p0408 Rotary encoder pulse No. / Encoder pulse No.

TM41 Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9674
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1000 8192 2048

Description: Sets the number of pulses for a rotary encoder.

1-110  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0410[0...n] Encoder inversion actual value / Enc inv act value

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: EDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 0011 bin 0000 bin
Description: Setting to invert actual values.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Invert speed actual value No Yes 4710,
6010
01 Invert position actual value No Yes 4704
Note: The inversion influences the following parameters:
Bit 00: r0061, r0063 (exception: sensorless closed-loop control), r0094
Bit 01: r0482, r0483

p0418[0...n] Fine resolution Gx_XIST1 (in bits) / Enc fine Gx_XIST1

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: EDS Function diagram: 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
2 18 11
Description: Sets the fine resolution in bits of incremental position actual values for the PROFIBUS encoder interface.
Note: The parameter applies for the following process data:
- Gx_XIST1
- Gx_XIST2 for reference mark or flying measurement

p0418 Fine resolution Gx_XIST1 (in bits) / Enc fine Gx_XIST1

TM41 Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: - Function diagram: 9674
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
2 18 11

Description: Sets the fine resolution in bits of incremental position actual values for the PROFIBUS encoder interface.

p0419[0...n] Fine resolution absolute value Gx_XIST2 (in bits) / Enc fine Gx_XIST2
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: EDS Function diagram: 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
2 18 9

Description: Sets the fine resolution in bits of absolute position actual values for the PROFIBUS encoder interface.
Note: This parameter applies to process data Gx_XIST2 when reading the absolute value.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-111

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0421[0...n] Absolute encoder rotary multi-turn resolution / Enc abs multiturn

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: EDS Function diagram: 4704,
6004
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 4096

Description: Sets the number of rotations that can be resolved for a rotary absolute encoder.

p0422[0...n] Absolute value encoder linear measuring step resolution / Enc abs meas step
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: EDS Function diagram: 4704,
6004
P-Group: Encoder Units group: LENGTH_M9 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [nm] 4294967295 [nm] 8192 [nm]

Description: Sets the resolution of the absolute position for a linear absolute encoder.
Note: The serial protocol of an absolute encoder provides the position with a certain resolution , e.g. 100 nm. This value
must be entered here.

p0423[0...n] Absolute value encoder rotary single-turn resolution / Enc abs singleturn
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: EDS Function diagram: 4704,
6004
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1073741823 8192
Description: Sets the number of measuring steps per revolution for a rotary absolute value encoder. The resolution refers to the
absolute position.

p0424[0...n] Encoder, linear zero mark distance / Enc lin dist ZM

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: EDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: LENGTH_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [mm] 65535 [mm] 20 [mm]
Description: Sets the distance between two zero marks for a linear encoder. This information is used for zero mark monitoring.
Note: For distance-coded zero marks, this means the basic distance.

p0425[0...n] Encoder, rotary zero mark distance / Enc rot dist ZM

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: EDS Function diagram: 4704,
6004, 8570
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 16777215 2048

Description: Sets the distance in pulses between two zero marks for a rotary encoder. This information is used for zero mark
monitoring.
Note: For distance-coded zero marks, this means the basic distance.

1-112  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0430[0...n] Sensor module configuration / SM configuration

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: EDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1110 0000 0000 1010 0000 0000 1110 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 bin 0000 0000 0000 bin

Description: Sets the configuration of the sensor module.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
17 Burst oversampling No Yes -
19 Safety position actual value sensing No Yes -
29 Phase correction No Yes -
30 Amplitude correction No Yes -
31 Offset correction No Yes -

p0431[0...n] Commutation angle offset / Com_offset

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: EDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: ANGLE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-180.00 [°] 180.00 [°] 0.00 [°]
Description: Sets the commutation angular offset.

p0432[0...n] Gearbox factor, numerator / Gearb_fact numer

VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: EDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 10000 1
Description: Enters the numerator for the gearbox factor of the encoder evaluation.
The gearbox factor specifies the speed ratio between the encoder shaft and motor shaft.
Note: Negative gearbox factors should be implemented with p0410.

p0433[0...n] Gearbox factor, denominator / Gearb_fact denom

VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: EDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 10000 1
Description: Enters the denominator for the gearbox factor of the encoder evaluation.
The gearbox factor specifies the speed ratio between the encoder shaft and motor shaft.
Note: Negative gearbox factors should be implemented with p0410.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-113

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0440[0...n] Copy encoder serial number / Copy enc ser_no

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Data set: EDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Copies the actual serial number of the encoder belong to this encoder data set to p0441 ... p0445.
Example:
For p0440[0] = 1, the serial number of the encoder belonging EDS 0 is copied to p0441[0] ... p0445[0].
Values: 0: No action
1: Transfer serial number
Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464, p1990
Refer to: F07414
Note: For encoders with serial number, encoder replacement is monitored in order to request angular commutation cali-
bration (adjustment) for motor encoders and absolute calibration for direct measuring systems with absolute value
data. The serial number, which from then onwards is used for monitoring purposes, can be transferred using p0440.
In the following cases, copying is automatically started in the following cases:
1.) When commissioning 1FT6, 1FK6, 1FK7 motors.
2.) When writing into p0431.
3.) For p1990 = 1.
p0440 is automatically set to 0 when the copying has been completed.
In order to permanently accept the copied values, it is necessary to save in a non-volatile fashion (p0977).

p0441[0...n] Encoder commissioning serial number part 1 / Enc comm ser_no 1

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: EDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex

Description: Serial number part 1 of the encoder for the commissioning.

Dependency: Refer to: p0440, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Refer to: F07414

p0442[0...n] Encoder commissioning serial number part 2 / Enc comm ser_no 2

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: EDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex

Description: Serial number part 2 of the encoder for the commissioning.

Dependency: Refer to: p0440, p0441, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Refer to: F07414

1-114  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0443[0...n] Encoder commissioning serial number part 3 / Enc comm ser_no 3

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: EDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
Description: Serial number part 3 of the encoder for the commissioning.
Dependency: Refer to: p0440, p0441, p0442, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Refer to: F07414

p0444[0...n] Encoder commissioning serial number part 4 / Enc comm ser_no 4

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: EDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
Description: Serial number part 4 of the encoder for the commissioning.
Dependency: Refer to: p0440, p0441, p0442, p0443, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Refer to: F07414

p0445[0...n] Encoder commissioning serial number part 5 / Enc comm ser_no 5

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: EDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
Description: Serial number part 5 of the encoder for the commissioning.
Dependency: Refer to: p0440, p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Refer to: F07414

r0451[0...2] Commutation angle factor / Enc commut_factor

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 4710
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the relationship between the electrical and mechanical rotor positions.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3

r0455[0...2] Encoder configuration recognized / Enc config act

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the detected encoder configuration.

In this case, the encoder must automatically support the function (e.g. encoder with EnDat interface).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-115

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Index: [0] = Encoder 1

[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Linear encoder No Yes -
01 Absolute value encoder No Yes -
02 Multiturn encoder No Yes -
03 Track A/B square-wave No Yes -
04 Track A/B sinusoidal No Yes -
05 Track C/D No Yes -
06 Hall sensor No Yes -
08 EnDat encoder No Yes -
09 SSI encoder No Yes -
12 Equidistant zero mark No Yes -
13 Irregular zero mark No Yes -
14 Distance-coded zero mark No Yes -
15 Commutation with zero mark No Yes -
16 Acceleration No Yes -
20 Voltage level 5 V No Yes -
21 Voltage level 24 V No Yes -
22 Remote sense (only SMC30) No Yes -
23 Resolver excit. No Yes -
Dependency: Refer to: p0404
Note: ZM: Zero mark
This parameter is only used for diagnostics.

r0456[0...2] Encoder configuration supported / Enc config supp

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Contains the encoder configuration supported by the sensor module.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Linear encoder No Yes -
01 Absolute value encoder No Yes -
02 Multiturn encoder No Yes -
03 Track A/B square-wave No Yes -
04 Track A/B sinusoidal No Yes -
05 Track C/D No Yes -
06 Hall sensor No Yes -
08 EnDat encoder No Yes -
09 SSI encoder No Yes -
12 Equidistant zero mark No Yes -
13 Irregular zero mark No Yes -
14 Distance-coded zero mark No Yes -
15 Commutation with zero mark No Yes -
16 Acceleration No Yes -
20 Voltage level 5 V No Yes -
21 Voltage level 24 V No Yes -
22 Remote sense (only SMC30) No Yes -
23 Resolver excit. No Yes -
Dependency: Refer to: p0404
Note: ZM: Zero mark
This parameter is only used for diagnostics.

1-116  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0458[0...2] Sensor module properties / SM properties

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Sets the sensor module configuration.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Encoder data available No Yes -
01 Motor data available No Yes -
02 KTY84 connection available No Yes -
03 PTC connection available No Yes -
04 Module temperature available No Yes -
05 Absolute encoder: p0408 and p0421 not No Yes -
power of two
16 Rotor position identification No Yes -
17 Burst oversampling No Yes -
19 Safety position actual value sensing No Yes -
29 Phase correction No Yes -
30 Amplitude correction No Yes -
31 Offset correction No Yes -

r0460[0...2] Encoder serial number part 1 / Enc ser_no 1

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the actual serial number part 1 of the appropriate encoder.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464

r0461[0...2] Encoder serial number part 2 / Enc ser_no 2

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the actual serial number part 2 of the appropriate encoder.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0462, r0463, r0464

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-117

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0462[0...2] Encoder serial number part 3 / Enc ser_no 3

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the actual serial number part 3 of the appropriate encoder.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0463, r0464

r0463[0...2] Encoder serial number part 4 / Enc ser_no 4

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the actual serial number part 4 of the appropriate encoder.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0464

r0464[0...2] Encoder serial number part 5 / Enc ser_no 5

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the actual serial number part 5 of the appropriate encoder.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463

r0479[0...2] CO: Diagnostics encoder position actual value Gn_XIST1 / Diag Gn_XIST1
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Integer32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 according to PROFIdrive for diagnostics. In contrast to
p0482, the value is updated in each DRIVE-CLiQ basic clock cycle and displayed with sign.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3

1-118  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0479 CO: Diagnostics encoder position actual value Gn_XIST1 / Diag Gn_XIST1
TM41 Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Integer32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9674
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 according to PROFIdrive for diagnostics. In contrast to
p0482, the value is updated in each DRIVE-CLiQ basic clock cycle and displayed with sign.

p0480[0...2] CI: Signal source for encoder control word Gn_STW / Enc S_Src Gn_STW
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1580,
4720
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for the encoder control word Gn_STW according to PROFIdrive.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3

r0481[0...2] CO: Encoder status word Gn_ZSW / Enc Gn_ZSW

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 4704,
4730, 6004
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the encoder status word Gn_ZSW according to PROFIdrive.

Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Function 1 active No Yes -
01 Function 2 active No Yes -
02 Function 3 active No Yes -
03 Function 4 active No Yes -
04 Value 1 Does not exist Displayed in r0483 -
05 Value 2 Does not exist Displayed in r0483 -
06 Value 3 Does not exist Displayed in r0483 -
07 Value 4 Does not exist Displayed in r0483 -
08 Measuring probe 1 deflected No Yes -
09 Measuring probe 2 deflected No Yes -
11 Encoder fault acknowledge active No Yes -
13 Absolute value cyclically No Displayed in r0483 -
14 Parking encoder active No Yes -
15 Encoder error None Displayed in r0483 -

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-119

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0481 CO: Encoder status word Gn_ZSW / Enc Gn_ZSW

TM41 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the encoder status word Gn_ZSW according to PROFIdrive.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Function 1 active No Yes -
01 Function 2 active No Yes -
02 Function 3 active No Yes -
03 Function 4 active No Yes -
04 Value 1 Does not exist Displayed in r0483 -
05 Value 2 Does not exist Displayed in r0483 -
06 Value 3 Does not exist Displayed in r0483 -
07 Value 4 Does not exist Displayed in r0483 -
08 Measuring probe 1 deflected No Yes -
09 Measuring probe 2 deflected No Yes -
11 Encoder fault acknowledge active No Yes -
13 Absolute value cyclically No Displayed in r0483 -
14 Parking encoder active No Yes -
15 Encoder error None Displayed in r0483 -
Note: For terminal module 41 (TM41), this value is used to interconnect with standard telegram 3 and is always zero.

r0482[0...2] CO: Encoder actual position value Gn_XACT1 / Enc Gn_XIST1

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1580,
2450, 3090, 4704, 4740
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 according to PROFIdrive.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3

r0482 CO: Encoder actual position value Gn_XACT1 / Enc Gn_XIST1

TM41 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9674
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 according to PROFIdrive.

r0483[0...2] CO: Encoder actual position value Gn_XACT2 / Enc Gn_XIST2

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1580,
2450, 4704, 6004
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST2 according to PROFIdrive.

1-120  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Index: [0] = Encoder 1

[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Note: If Gx_ZSW.14 = 0 and GxZSW.15 = 1 (r0481), then an error code with the following significance is located in
Gx_XIST2 (r0483):
1: Encoder error
2: Reserved
3: Reserved
4: Abort, reference mark search
5: Abort, retrieve reference value
6: Abort, flying measurement
7: Abort, retrieve measured value
8: Abort, absolute value transfer
3841: Function not supported

r0483 CO: Encoder actual position value Gn_XACT2 / Enc Gn_XIST2

TM41 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST2 according to PROFIdrive.
Note: For terminal module 41 (TM41), this value is used to interconnect with standard telegram 3 and is always zero.

r0487[0...2] Diagnostic encoder control word Gn_STW / Enc Gn_STW

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1580,
4704, 4720, 4740
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the encoder control word Gn_STW according to PROFIdrive for diagnostics.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Request function 1 No Yes -
01 Request function 2 No Yes -
02 Request function 3 No Yes -
03 Request function 4 No Yes -
04 Request command bit 0 No Yes -
05 Request command bit 1 No Yes -
06 Request command bit 2 No Yes -
07 mode Reference marks Meas. on-the-fly -
13 Request absolute value cyclic No Yes -
14 Request parking encoder No Yes -
15 Request acknowledge encoder fault No Yes -
Note: The signal source for the encoder control word is set with p0480.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-121

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0488[0...2] Measuring probe 1 input terminal / Meas probe 1 input

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 4740
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 6 0
Description: Sets the input terminal to connect probe 1.
Values: 0: No probe
1: DI/DO 9 (X122.8)
2: DI/DO 10 (X122.10)
3: DI/DO 11 (X122.11)
4: DI/DO 13 (X132.8)
5: DI/DO 14 (X132.10)
6: DI/DO 15 (X132.11)
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: p0489, p0490, p0728
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
The terminal must be set as input (p0728).
Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive.

p0489[0...2] Measuring probe 2 input terminal / Meas probe 2 input

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 4740
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 6 0

Description: Sets the input terminal to connect probe 2.

Values: 0: No probe
1: DI/DO 9 (X122.8)
2: DI/DO 10 (X122.10)
3: DI/DO 11 (X122.11)
4: DI/DO 13 (X132.8)
5: DI/DO 14 (X132.10)
6: DI/DO 15 (X132.11)
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: p0488, p0490, p0728
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
The terminal must be set as input (p0728).
Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive.

1-122  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0490 Invert measuring probe or equivalent zero mark / Meas. probe invert
CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 4740
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin 0000 bin
Description: Setting to invert the digital input signals to connect a measuring probe or an equivalent zero mark.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
09 DI/DO 9 (X122.8) Not inverted Inverted -
10 DI/DO 10 (X122.10) Not inverted Inverted -
11 DI/DO 11 (X122.11) Not inverted Inverted -
13 DI/DO 13 (X132.8) Not inverted Inverted -
14 DI/DO 14 (X132.10) Not inverted Inverted -
15 DI/DO 15 (X132.11) Not inverted Inverted -
Dependency: Refer to: p0488, p0489, p0495, p0728
Note: The terminal must be set as input.
When the measuring probe or the equivalent zero mark is inverted, this has no effect on the status displays of the
digital inputs (r0721, r0722, r0723).
DI: Digital input, DO: Digital output

p0491 Motor encoder fault response: ENCODER / Fault resp ENCODER

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
Description: Sets the behavior for the ENCODER fault response (motor encoder).
This means, for example, if an encoder fault occurs, sensorless operation can be automatically selected with a
shutdown behavior that can be selected.
Values: 0: Encoder fault results in OFF2
1: Encoder fault results in sensorless operation and operation continues
2: Encoder fault results in sensorless operation and OFF1
3: Encoder fault results in sensorless operation and OFF3
Dependency: The following parameters are relevant for sensorless operation.
Refer to: p0341, p0342, p1470, p1472, p1517, p1612, p1755
Note: For a value 1, 2, 3, the following applies:
Encoderless operation must have been commissioned.
Refer to the status display "sensorless operation due to a fault" (BO: r1407.13).

p0492 Maximum speed difference for each sampling cycle for square-wave encoders /
n_dif_max/samp_cyc
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [1/min] 210000.0 [1/min] 0.0 [1/min]

Description: Maximum permissible speed/velocity difference between two computation cycles when evaluating square-wave
encoders.
When the value is exceeded, depending on p0491, either sensorless closed-loop speed/torque control is selected
or the drive is powered-down.
Note: For a value of 0.0, the speed change monitoring is disabled.
When half of the parameter value is exceeded, an alarm is already generated and the speed limiting is limited to
this.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-123

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0495[0...2] Equivalent zero mark, input terminal / Zero mark input

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 4735
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 6 0
Description: Selects the input terminal for connecting an equivalent zero mark (external encoder zero mark).
Values: 0: No equivalent zero mark (evaluation of the encoder zero mark)
1: DI/DO 9 (X122.8)
2: DI/DO 10 (X122.10)
3: DI/DO 11 (X122.11)
4: DI/DO 13 (X132.8)
5: DI/DO 14 (X132.10)
6: DI/DO 15 (X132.11)
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency: Refer to: p0490
Note: Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive.
The terminal must be set as input.
For p0495 = 0 (factory setting), the encoder zero mark is evaluated as zero mark.
For p0495 > 0, the following applies:
Depending on the direction of motion, the positive or negative edge at the appropriate input is evaluated.
- increasing position actual values (r0482) --> the 0/1 edge is evaluated.
- decreasing position actual values (r0482) --> the 1/0 edge is evaluated.
Only one zero mark is supported. If function 2, 3 or 4 is selected, this results in an error message in Gn_ZSW.
The inversion of the inputs via p0490 affects the function "referencing with equivalent zero mark". This is the reason
that the edge evaluation is interchanged as a function of the direction of motion.
An input can only be assigned to one encoder as measuring probe 1, 2 or equivalent zero mark. Exception: The
same encoder can be simultaneously used as measuring probe and equivalent zero mark as both functions cannot
be simultaneously requested.

p0496[0...2] Encoder diagnostic signal selection / Enc diag selection

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 42 0

Description: Selects the trace signal to be output in r0497, r0498 and r0499 for encoder diagnostics.
Values: 0: not active
1: r0497: Mechanical revolution
10: r0498: Raw value, track A, r0499: Raw value, track B
11: r0498: Fine position X (-A/2), r0499: Fine position Y (-B/2)
12: r0498: Fine pos phi, r0499: -
13: r0498: Offset correction X; r0499: Offset correction Y
14: r0498: Phase correction X; r0499: Amplitude correction Y
20: r0498: Raw value, track C, r0499: Raw value track D
21: r0498: CD position X (-D/2), r0499: CD position Y (C/2)
22: r0498: CD position phi, r0499: Cd position phi - mechanical revolution
23: r0497: Zero mark status
30: r0497: Absolute position serial
40: r0498: Raw temperature, r0499: Temperature in 0.1 °C
41: r0498: Resistance in 0.1 Ohm, r0499: Temperature in 0.1 °C
42: r0497: Resistance 2500 Ohm

1-124  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Index: [0] = Encoder 1

[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Note: Re p0496 = 1: 360 ° <--> 2^32
Re p0496 = 10, 20 (resolver): 2900 mV <--> 26214 dec
Re p0496 = 10, 20 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 21299 dec
Re p0496 = 11, 21 (resolver): 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec, internal processor offset is corrected
Re p0496 = 13 (resolver): 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec
Re p0496 = 11, 21 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 10650 dec, internal processor offset is corrected
Re p0496 = 13 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 10650 dec
Re p0496 = 12: 180 ° fine position <--> 32768 dec
Re p0496 = 14: 100 % <--> 16384 dec
Re p0496 = 22: 180 ° <--> 32768 dec
Re p0496 = 23: Encoder zero mark <--> MSB set (detected during the zero mark or at least 1 current controller
clock cycle)
Re p0496 = 30: Rotary: 1 Single-turn measuring step <--> 1 dec, linear: 1 measuring step <--> 1 dec
Re p0496 = 40: r0498 <--> (R_KTY/1 kOhm - 0.9) * 32768
Re p0496 = 42: 2500 Ohm <--> 2^32

r0497[0...2] Encoder diagnostic signal double word / Enc diag DW

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Trace signal for encoder diagnostics (double word representation). The output signal is selected in p0496.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3

r0498[0...2] Encoder diagnostic signal word low / Enc diag word low
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Trace signal for encoder diagnostics (low component). The output signal is selected in p0496.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3

r0499[0...2] Encoder diagnostic signal word high / Enc diag word high
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Trace signal for encoder diagnostics (high component). The output signal is selected in p0496.
Index: [0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-125

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0500 Technology application / Techn application

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Applications Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 102 100
Description: Sets the technology application.
The parameter influences the calculation of open-loop and closed-loop control parameters that is e.g. initiated using
p0578.
The calculation of the following parameters depends on p0500 (only for servo drives): p1520, p1521, p1530, p1531
Values: 0: Standard drive (VECTOR)
1: Pumps and fans
100: Standard drive (SERVO)
101: Feed drive (limit current limitation)
102: Spindle drive (rated current limitation)
Note: The calculation of parameters, dependent on the technological application can be called-up as follows:
- when exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 > 0
- when writing p0340 = 1, 3, 5
- when writing p0578 = 1

p0528 Units system for controller gains / Units for Kp

SERVO, TM41, Can be changed: C2 Access level: 4
VECTOR Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Applications Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: For controller gains, changes-over the units system between physical and referred (without dimensions) represen-
tation types.
Values: 0: Physical representation
1: No dimensions (referred) representation type
Note: Controller gain factors are always saved as physical units.
For VECTOR (r0107) the following applies:
The parameter is pre-assigned a value of 1. The parameter cannot be changed.

p0578[0...n] Calculate parameters that are dependent on the technology/units / Calc techn par
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Applications Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0

Description: This parameter is used to calculate all parameters that depend on the technology of the application (p0500).
All of the parameters are calculated that can also be determined using p0430 = 5.
Values: 0: No calculation
1: Complete parameterization
Note: At the end of the calculations, p0578 is automatically set to 0.

1-126  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0580 Measuring probe, input terminal / Meas probe term

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 6 0
Description: Sets the input terminal for the measuring probe for speed actual value measurement.
Values: 0: No probe
1: DI/DO 9 (X122.8)
2: DI/DO 10 (X122.10)
3: DI/DO 11 (X122.11)
4: DI/DO 13 (X132.8)
5: DI/DO 14 (X132.10)
6: DI/DO 15 (X132.11)
Dependency: Refer to: p0581, p0728
Refer to: A07350
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
The terminal must be set as input (p0728).

p0581 Meas probe, edge / Meas probe, edge

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Sets the edge to evaluate the measuring probe signal for speed actual value measurement.
0: 0/1 edge
1: 1/0 edge
Dependency: Refer to: p0580

p0582 Measuring probe, pulses per revolution / Meas probe pulses

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 8 1

Description: Sets the number of pulses per revolution (e.g. for disks with holes).

p0583 Measuring probe, maximum measuring time / Meas probe t_max

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [s] 10 [s] 10 [s]

Description: Sets the maximum measuring time for the measuring probe.
If a new pulse is not received before the maximum measuring time has expired, then the speed actual value in
r0586 is set to zero. This timer stage is re-started with the next pulse.
Dependency: Refer to: r0586

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-127

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0586 CO: Measuring probe, speed actual value / Meas probe n_act
SERVO Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]
Description: Displays the speed actual value measured using the BERO.
Dependency: Refer to: p0583

r0587 CO: Measuring probe, measuring time measured / Meas probe t_meas
SERVO Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the time between the last two BERO pulses.
The measuring time is specified as 32-bit value with a resolution of 1/48 µs.
If a new pulse is not received before the maximum measured time in p0583 expires, then r0587 is set to the maxi-
mum measuring time.

r0588 CO: Measuring probe, pulse counter / Meas probe P_count

SERVO Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the number of measuring pulses that have occurred (been received) up until now.
Note: After reaching 4294967295 (2^32 - 1), the counter starts again at 0.

r0589 Measuring probe, delay time / Meas probe t_delay

SERVO Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the time since the last measuring pulse was detected.
The delay time is specified as 32-bit value with a resolution of 1/48 µs.
When a measuring pulse occurs (is received) the delay time is reset and is limited to the maximum measuring time
in p0583.

p0600[0...n] Motor temperature sensor for monitoring / Mot temp_sensor

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: MDS Function diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 11 1

Description: Sets the sensor to monitor the motor temperature.

1-128  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Values: 0: No sensor
1: Temperature sensor via encoder 1
2: Temperature sensor via encoder 2
3: Temperature sensor via encoder 3
10: Temperature sensor via a BICO interconnection
11: Temperature sensor via motor module
Dependency: Refer to: p0601, p0603
Note: For a value = 0, for synchronous motors, the temperature monitoring function is disabled.
For a value = 10, the BICO interconnection should be executed via p0603.

p0601[0...n] Motor temperature sensor type / Mot temp_sensortyp

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: MDS Function diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 2

Description: Sets the sensor type for the motor temperature monitoring.
Values: 0: No sensor available
1: PTC thermistor
2: KTY84
3: KTY84 and PTC (only for temperature sensor via encoder)
Dependency: Refer to: p0600
Note: PTC thermistor (p0601 = 1): Trip resistance = 1650 Ohm.
The temperature sensor for the temperature evaluation is set in p0600.
For p0600 = 10 (temperature sensor via a BICO interconnection), the setting in p0601 has no significance.

p0602 Power module number, temperature sensor for parallel circuit configuration /
Mot temp_PM number
VECTOR (Parallel) Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 10 0
Description: Sets the power module number to which the temperature sensor is connected. The value corresponds to the power
module data set number (Power Data Set, PDS) of the power module. The number power module data sets is
defined in parameter p0120.

p0603 CI: Motor temperature / Mot temperature

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to evaluate the motor temperature via a BICO interconnection.
Dependency: Refer to: p0600
Note: KTY temperature sensor: Valid temperature range -48 °C ... 248 °C.
PTC temperature sensor:
For the -50 °C, the following applies: Motor temperature < nominal response temperature of the PTC.
For the 250 °C, the following applies: Motor temperature >= nominal response temperature of the PTC.
Note:
When using a terminal module 31 (TM31), the following applies:
- the sensor type used is set using p4100.
- the temperature signal is interconnected using CO: r4105.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-129

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0604[0...n] Motor overtemperature alarm threshold / Mot TempAlrmThresh

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [°C] 200.0 [°C] 120.0 [°C]
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for monitoring the motor temperature.
Note: The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).

p0605[0...n] Motor overtemperature fault threshold / MotTempFaultThresh

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [°C] 200.0 [°C] 155.0 [°C]

Description: Sets the fault threshold to monitor the motor temperature.

Note: The parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).

p0606[0...n] Motor overtemperature timer / Mot TempTimeStage

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 600.000 [s] 240.000 [s]
Description: Sets the timer stage for the alarm threshold for the motor temperature monitoring function.
This timer stage is started when the temperature alarm threshold (p0604) is exceeded.
If the timer stage expires before the temperature in the meantime falls below the alarm threshold, the fault F07011
is output.
If the temperature fault threshold (p0605) is prematurely exceeded before the timer stage has expired, then fault
F07011 is immediately output.
Dependency: Refer to: p0604, p0605
Refer to: F07011, A07910
Note: KTY sensor: When setting the minimum value, the timer is disabled and a fault is not output until p0605 is
exceeded.
PTC sensor: The timer minimum value has no particular significance.

p0607[0...n] Temperature sensor fault timer / Sensor fault time

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 600.000 [s] 0.100 [s]
Description: Sets the timer stage between the output of alarm and fault for a temperature sensor fault.
If there is a sensor fault, this timer stage is started. If the sensor fault is still present after the timer stage has
expired, a corresponding fault message is output.
Note: If the motor is an induction motor, the timer is switched off when setting the minimum value and no alarm is output.
Temperature monitoring is then based on the thermal model.

1-130  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0610[0...n] Response to motor overtemperature condition / Mot temp response

VECTOR Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: MDS Function diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 2
Description: Sets the system response when the motor temperature reaches the alarm threshold.
Values: 0: No response, only alarm, no reduction of I_max
1: Alarm and reduction of I_max and fault (F07011)
2: Alarm and fault (F07011), no reduction of I_max
Dependency: Refer to: p0601, p0604, p0605
Note: the I_max reduction is not executed for PTC (p0601 = 1).
The I_max reduction results in a lower output frequency.

p0620[0...n] Thermal adaptation, stator and rotor resistance / Mot therm_adapt R

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 2

Description: Sets the thermal adaptation of the stator/primary section resistance and rotor/secondary section resistance accord-
ing to r0395 and r0396.
Values: 0: No thermal adaptation of stator and rotor resistances
1: Resistances are adapted according to the temperatures of the thermal model
2: Resistances are adapted to the measured stator winding temperature.
Note: For p0620 = 1, the following applies:
The stator resistance is adapted using the temperature in r0035 and the rotor resistance together with the model
temperature in r0633.
For p0620 = 2, the following applies:
The stator resistance is adapted using the temperature in r0035. The rotor temperature to adapt the rotor resistance
is calculated as follows from the stator temperature (r0035).
theta_R = (r0628 + r0625) / (r0627 + r0625) * r0035

p0621[0...n] Temperature identification after restart / Temp_ident restart

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0

Description: Configuration of the temperature identification after powering-up again. If the identification is selected, when power-
ing-up for the first time after the system run-up, the stator resistance is measured and from this the temperature
determined. The thermal model is then suitably initialized.
Values: 0: No temperature identification
1: Temperature identification after restart
2: Temperature identification after each power-up

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-131

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0622[0...n] Motor excitation time for temperature identification after restart / Temp Id excit.
VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 20.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the excitation time of the motor during the temperature identification after powering-up again (restart).

r0623 Stator resistance after temperature identification / Temp Id resist.

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: RESISTANCE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Ohm] - [Ohm] - [Ohm]
Description: Displays the identified stator resistance after the temperature identification run.

p0625[0...n] Motor ambient temperature / Mot T_ambient

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-40 [°C] 80 [°C] 20 [°C]
Description: Defines the ambient temperature of the motor to calculate the temperature model.
Note: The parameters for stator and rotor resistance (p0350, p0354) refer to this temperature.

p0626[0...n] Motor overtemperature, stator core / Mot T_over core

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: TEMPERATURE_K Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
20 [K] 200 [K] 50 [K]

Description: Defines the rated overtemperature of the stator core referred to the ambient temperature.
Dependency: Refer to: p0625

p0627[0...n] Motor overtemperature, stator winding / Mot T_over stator

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: TEMPERATURE_K Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
20 [K] 200 [K] 80 [K]
Description: Defines the rated overtemperature of the stator winding referred to the ambient temperature.
Dependency: Refer to: p0625

1-132  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0628[0...n] Rotor winding overtemperature / Mot T_over rotor

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: TEMPERATURE_K Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
20 [K] 200 [K] 100 [K]
Description: Defines the rated overtemperature of the squirrel cage rotor referred to ambient temperature.
Dependency: Refer to: p0625

r0630[0...n] Motor temperature model ambient temperature / MotTMod T_amb.

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]

Description: Displays the ambient temperature of the motor temperature model.

r0631[0...n] Motor temperature model, stator core temperature / MotTMod T_iron

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]

Description: Displays the stator core temperature of the motor temperature model.

r0632[0...n] Motor temperature model, stator winding temperature / MotTMod T_copper

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]

Description: Displays the stator winding temperature of the motor temperature model.

r0633[0...n] Motor temperature model, rotor temperature / MotTMod T_rotor

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]

Description: Displays the rotor temperature of the motor temperature model.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-133

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0640[0...n] Current limit / Current limit

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5722,
6640
P-Group: Motor Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Aeff] 10000.00 [Aeff] 0.00 [Aeff]

Description: Sets the current limit.

Dependency: Refer to: r0209, p0323
Note: p0640 is limited to r0209 and p0323. The limit to p0323 is not realized if a value of zero is entered there.
The resulting current limit is displayed in r0067. r0067 may be reduced by the thermal model of the motor module.
The torque and power limits (p1520, p1521, p1530, p1531) matching the current limit are automatically calculated
when exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 > 0 or using the automatic parameterization with p0340 = 3, 5.
p0640 is pre-assigned as follows using the automatic parameterization (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0):
- for induction motors: p0640 = 1.5 * p0305
- for synchronous motors (only for servo drives, refer to p0107): p0640 = p0338
The parameter is therefore also limited to the maximum converter current (r0209) and the maximum motor current
(p0323). Limiting to p0323 is only realized if p0323 > 0.
The following applies for vector drives (refer to p0107): p0640 is limited to 4.0 * p0305.

p0643[0...n] Overvoltage protection for synchronous motors / Overvolt_protect

SERVO Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Sets the overvoltage protection for synchronous motors in the field-weakening range.
Values: 0: No measure
1: Voltage Protection Module (VPM)
Dependency: Refer to: p0316, p1082, p9601, p9801
Refer to: F07432
Note: In the field-weakening range, synchronous motors can, when a fault condition exists, generate high DC link volt-
ages. The following possibilities exist to protect the drive system from being destroyed due to overvoltage:
- limit the maximum speed (p1082) without any additional protection.
The maximum speed without protection is calculated from p1082 = 9590/p0316.
- use a voltage protection module (VPM) in conjunction with the function "safe standstill" (p9601, p9801).
When a fault condition exists, the VPM short-circuits the motors. During the short-circuit, the pulses must be can-
celled - this means that the terminals for the safe standstill must be connected to the VPM.

1-134  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0650[0...n] Actual motor operating time / t_motor actual

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4294967295 0
Description: Displays the motor operating time for the appropriate drive.
The motor operating time counter is started when the pulses are enabled. When the pulse enable is withdrawn, the
counter is held and the value saved. The persistence is in the NVRAM - this means that if the module is equipped
with an NVRAM, the value is saved in a non-volatile fashion; otherwise not.
If p0651 is at 0, the counter is de-activated.
Display in hours.
Dependency: Refer to: p0651
Refer to: F01590
Note: The value in p0650 can only be reset to 0.

p0651[0...n] Motor operating time service interval / t_motor service

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 99999 0

Description: Sets the service/maintenance intervals for the appropriate drive.

If the selected motor operating time is reached (p0650), then the appropriate fault is output.
Display in hours.
Dependency: Refer to: p0650
Refer to: F01590
Note: For p0651 = 0 [h], the motor operating time counter is disabled.

p0700[0...n] Macro binector input (BI) / Macro BI

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 1
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 999999 0

Description: Runs the appropriate ACX file on the CompactFlash Card.

The binector inputs (BI) of the appropriate command data set (CDS) are appropriately interconnected.
The selected ACX file must be located in the following directory:
... /PMACRO/<drive object>/P700/PMxxxxxx.ACX
Example:
p0700 = 6 --> the file PM000006.ACX is run.
Dependency: The ACX file to be run must be created according to the definition for ACX macros and must be saved in the direc-
tory intended on the CompactFlash Card.
Refer to: p0015, p1000, p1500
Note: BI: Binector input

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-135

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0721 CU digital inputs, terminal actual value / CU DI actual value

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1510,
2100, 2120, 2130, 2131, 2132,
2133
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the actual value at the digital inputs.

This means that the actual input signal can be checked at terminal DI x or DI/DO x prior to switching from the simu-
lation mode (p0795.x = 1) to terminal mode (p0795.x = 0). The input signal at terminal DI x is displayed in bit x of
r0721.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X122.1) Low High -
01 DI 1 (X122.2) Low High -
02 DI 2 (X122.3) Low High -
03 DI 3 (X122.4) Low High -
04 DI 4 (X132.1) Low High -
05 DI 5 (X132.2) Low High -
06 DI 6 (X132.3) Low High -
07 DI 7 (X132.4) Low High -
08 DI/DO 8 (X122.7) Low High -
09 DI/DO 9 (X122.8) Low High -
10 DI/DO 10 (X122.10) Low High -
11 DI/DO 11 (X122.11) Low High -
12 DI/DO 12 (X132.7) Low High -
13 DI/DO 13 (X132.8) Low High -
14 DI/DO 14 (X132.10) Low High -
15 DI/DO 15 (X132.11) Low High -
Note: DI: Digital input
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
If a DI/DO is parameterized as output (p0728.x = 1), then r0721.x = 0 is displayed.

r0722 CO/BO: CU digital inputs, status / CU DI status

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1510,
2100, 2120, 2130, 2131, 2132,
2133
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the status of the digital inputs.

1-136  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP

00 DI 0 (X122.1) Low High -
01 DI 1 (X122.2) Low High -
02 DI 2 (X122.3) Low High -
03 DI 3 (X122.4) Low High -
04 DI 4 (X132.1) Low High -
05 DI 5 (X132.2) Low High -
06 DI 6 (X132.3) Low High -
07 DI 7 (X132.4) Low High -
08 DI/DO 8 (X122.7) Low High -
09 DI/DO 9 (X122.8) Low High -
10 DI/DO 10 (X122.10) Low High -
11 DI/DO 11 (X122.11) Low High -
12 DI/DO 12 (X132.7) Low High -
13 DI/DO 13 (X132.8) Low High -
14 DI/DO 14 (X132.10) Low High -
15 DI/DO 15 (X132.11) Low High -
Dependency: Refer to: r0723
Note: DI: Digital input
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output

r0723 BO: CU digital inputs, status inverted / CU DI status inv

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1510,
2100, 2120, 2130, 2131 2132,
2133
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the inverted status of the digital inputs.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X122.1) Low High -
01 DI 1 (X122.2) Low High -
02 DI 2 (X122.3) Low High -
03 DI 3 (X122.4) Low High -
04 DI 4 (X132.1) Low High -
05 DI 5 (X132.2) Low High -
06 DI 6 (X132.3) Low High -
07 DI 7 (X132.4) Low High -
08 DI/DO 8 (X122.7) Low High -
09 DI/DO 9 (X122.8) Low High -
10 DI/DO 10 (X122.10) Low High -
11 DI/DO 11 (X122.11) Low High -
12 DI/DO 12 (X132.7) Low High -
13 DI/DO 13 (X132.8) Low High -
14 DI/DO 14 (X132.10) Low High -
15 DI/DO 15 (X132.11) Low High -
Dependency: Refer to: r0722
Note: DI: Digital input
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-137

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0728 CU, set input or output / CU DI or DO

CU Can be changed: T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1510,
2130, 2131, 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin 0000 bin

Description: Sets the bidirectional digital inputs/outputs as an input or output.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
08 DI/DO 8 (X122.7) Input Output -
09 DI/DO 9 (X122.8) Input Output -
10 DI/DO 10 (X122.10) Input Output -
11 DI/DO 11 (X122.11) Input Output -
12 DI/DO 12 (X132.7) Input Output -
13 DI/DO 13 (X132.8) Input Output -
14 DI/DO 14 (X132.10) Input Output -
15 DI/DO 15 (X132.11) Input Output -
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output

p0738 BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 8 / CU S_src DI/DO 8
CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1510,
2130
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 8 (X122.7).

Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.8 = 1).

p0739 BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 9 / CU S_src DI/DO 9
CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2130
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 9 (X122.8).

Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.9 = 1).

p0740 BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 10 / CU S_src DI/DO 10
CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2131
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 10 (X122.10).

Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as output (p0728.10 = 1).

1-138  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0741 BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 11 / CU S_src DI/DO 11
CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1510,
2131
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 11 (X122.11).

Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.11 = 1).

p0742 BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 12 / CU S_src DI/DO 12
CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1510,
2132
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 12 (X132.7).

Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.12 = 1).

p0743 BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 13 / CU S_src DI/DO 13
CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2132
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 13 (X132.8).

Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.13 = 1).

p0744 BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 14 / CU S_src DI/DO 14
CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2133
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 14 (X132.10).

Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.14 = 1).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-139

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0745 BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 15 / CU S_src DI/DO 15
CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1510,
2133
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 15 (X132.11).

Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.15 = 1).

r0747 CU, digital outputs status / CU DO status

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2130,
2131, 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the status of digital outputs.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
08 DI/DO 8 (X122.7) Low High -
09 DI/DO 9 (X122.8) Low High -
10 DI/DO 10 (X122.10) Low High -
11 DI/DO 11 (X122.11) Low High -
12 DI/DO 12 (X132.7) Low High -
13 DI/DO 13 (X132.8) Low High -
14 DI/DO 14 (X132.10) Low High -
15 DI/DO 15 (X132.11) Low High -
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Inversion using p0748 has been taken into account.
The setting of the DI/DO as either input or output is of no significance (p0728).

p0748 CU, invert digital outputs / CU DO invert

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2130,
2131, 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin 0000 bin

Description: Setting to invert the signals at the digital outputs.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
08 DI/DO 8 (X122.7) Not inverted Inverted -
09 DI/DO 9 (X122.8) Not inverted Inverted -
10 DI/DO 10 (X122.10) Not inverted Inverted -
11 DI/DO 11 (X122.11) Not inverted Inverted -
12 DI/DO 12 (X132.7) Not inverted Inverted -
13 DI/DO 13 (X132.8) Not inverted Inverted -
14 DI/DO 14 (X132.10) Not inverted Inverted -
15 DI/DO 15 (X132.11) Not inverted Inverted -
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output

1-140  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0771[0...2] CI: Test sockets signal source / TestSktsSigSrce

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the signal to be output at the test sockets.
Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency: Can only be set when p0776 = 99.
Refer to: r0772, r0774, p0776, p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780, p0783, p0784, r0786

r0772[0...2] Test sockets output signal / TestSktsSignalVal

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]

Description: Displays the actual value of the signal to be output.

Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency: Refer to: p0771, r0772, r0774, p0776, p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780, p0783, p0784, r0786

r0774[0...2] Test sockets output voltage / TestSkts U_output

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals Units group: VOLTAGE_DC Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the actual output voltage for the test sockets.
Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency: Refer to: p0771, r0772, p0776, p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780, p0783, p0784, r0786

p0776[0...2] Test socket mode / Test skt mode

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
96 99 99

Description: Sets the mode for the test sockets.

Values: 96: Physical address (32-bit integer signal, unsigned)
97: Physical address (32-bit integer signal)
98: Physical address (32-bit floating-point signal)
99: BICO signal
Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency: Refer to: p0771, r0772, r0774, p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780, p0783, p0784, r0786, p0788, p0789, r0790

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-141

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0777[0...2] Test socket characteristic value x1 / Test skt char x1

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-100000.00 [%] 100000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: The normalization characteristic for the test sockets is defined using two points. This parameter specifies the x
coordinate (percentage) of the first point on the characteristic.
Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency: Can only be set when p0776 = 99.
Refer to: p0778, p0779, p0780, r0786
Note: The value 0.00 % corresponds to 2.49 V.

p0778[0...2] Test socket characteristic value y1 / Test skt char y1

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals Units group: VOLTAGE_DC Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [V] 4.98 [V] 2.49 [V]

Description: The normalization characteristic for the test sockets is defined using two points. This parameter specifies the y
coordinate (output voltage) of the first point on the characteristic.
Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency: Can only be set when p0776 = 99.
Refer to: p0777, p0779, p0780, r0786

p0779[0...2] Test socket characteristic value x2 / Test skt char x2

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-100000.00 [%] 100000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: The normalization characteristic for the test sockets is defined using two points. This parameter specifies the x
coordinate (percentage) of the second point on the characteristic.
Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency: Can only be set when p0776 = 99.
Refer to: p0777, p0778, p0780, r0786
Note: The value 100.00 % corresponds to 4.98 V.

1-142  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0780[0...2] Test socket characteristic value y2 / Test skt char y2

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals Units group: VOLTAGE_DC Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [V] 4.98 [V] 4.98 [V]
Description: The normalization characteristic for the test sockets is defined using two points. This parameter specifies the y
coordinate (output voltage) of the second point on the characteristic.
Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency: Can only be set when p0776 = 99.
Refer to: p0777, p0778, p0779, r0786

p0783[0...2] Test sockets offset / Test skt offset

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals Units group: VOLTAGE_DC Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-4.98 [V] 4.98 [V] 0.00 [V]
Description: Sets an additional offset for the test sockets.
Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2

p0784[0...2] Test socket limit on/off / TestSktLim on/off

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Sets the limit for a signal to be output via test sockets.
Values: 0: Limiting off
1: Limiting on
Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Note: Limiting on:
If signals are output outside the permissible measuring range, the signal is limited to 4.98 V or to V.
Limiting off:
If signals are output outside the permissible measuring range, this causes signal overflow. In the case of signal
overflow, the signal jumps from 0 V to 4.98 V or from 4.98 V to 0 V.

r0786[0...2] Test socket normalization per volt / TestSktNorm/Volt

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the normalization of the signal to be output. A change in the output voltage by 1 volt corresponds to the
value in this parameter. The units are determined by the interconnected test signal.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-143

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency: Refer to: p0771, r0772, r0774, p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780, p0783, p0784
Note: Example:
r0786[0] = 1500.0 and the measuring signal is r0063 (CO: Smoothed speed actual value [RPM]).
A change of 1 V at the output of test socket T0 corresponds to 1500.0 [RPM].

p0788[0...2] Test sockets physical address / Test skt PhyAddr

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex

Description: Sets the physical address to output signals via the test sockets.
Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency: Changes only become effective if p0776 does not equal 99.
Refer to: p0789, r0790

p0789[0...2] Test sockets physical address gain / TestSktPhyAddrGain

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-340.2823466E36 340.2823466E36 1.00000

Description: Sets the gain of a signal output of a physical address via test sockets.
Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency: Changes only become effective if p0776 does not equal 99.
Refer to: p0788

r0790[0...2] Test sockets physical address signal value / TestSktsPhyAddrVal

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the actual value of a signal determined via a physical address.
Index: [0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency: Only effective when p0776 = 97 or p0776 = 96.
Refer to: p0788

1-144  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0795 CU digital inputs simulation mode / CU DI simulation

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1510,
2100, 2120, 2130, 2131, 2132,
2133
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin 0000 bin

Description: Sets the simulation mode for digital inputs.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X122.1) Terminal eval. Simulation -
01 DI 1 (X122.2) Terminal eval. Simulation -
02 DI 2 (X122.3) Terminal eval. Simulation -
03 DI 3 (X122.4) Terminal eval. Simulation -
04 DI 4 (X132.1) Terminal eval. Simulation -
05 DI 5 (X132.2) Terminal eval. Simulation -
06 DI 6 (X132.3) Terminal eval. Simulation -
07 DI 7 (X132.4) Terminal eval. Simulation -
08 DI/DO 8 (X122.7) Terminal eval. Simulation -
09 DI/DO 9 (X122.8) Terminal eval. Simulation -
10 DI/DO 10 (X122.10) Terminal eval. Simulation -
11 DI/DO 11 (X122.11) Terminal eval. Simulation -
12 DI/DO 12 (X132.7) Terminal eval. Simulation -
13 DI/DO 13 (X132.8) Terminal eval. Simulation -
14 DI/DO 14 (X132.10) Terminal eval. Simulation -
15 DI/DO 15 (X132.11) Terminal eval. Simulation -
Dependency: The setpoint for the input signals is specified using p0796.
Refer to: p0796
Note: DI: Digital input
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977).

p0796 CU digital inputs simulation mode setpoint / CU DI simul setpt

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1510,
2100, 2120, 2130, 2131, 2132,
2133
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin 0000 bin

Description: Sets the setpoint for the input signals in the digital input simulation mode.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-145

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP

00 DI 0 (X122.1) Low High -
01 DI 1 (X122.2) Low High -
02 DI 2 (X122.3) Low High -
03 DI 3 (X122.4) Low High -
04 DI 4 (X132.1) Low High -
05 DI 5 (X132.2) Low High -
06 DI 6 (X132.3) Low High -
07 DI 7 (X132.4) Low High -
08 DI/DO 8 (X122.7) Low High -
09 DI/DO 9 (X122.8) Low High -
10 DI/DO 10 (X122.10) Low High -
11 DI/DO 11 (X122.11) Low High -
12 DI/DO 12 (X132.7) Low High -
13 DI/DO 13 (X132.8) Low High -
14 DI/DO 14 (X132.10) Low High -
15 DI/DO 15 (X132.11) Low High -
Dependency: The simulation of a digital input is selected using p0795.
Refer to: p0795
Note: DI: Digital input
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977).

p0799 CU inputs/outputs, sampling time / CU DI/DO t_sample

CU Can be changed: C1 Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 2100,
2120, 2130, 2131, 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands Units group: TIME_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 5000.00 [µs] 4000.00 [µs]

Description: Sets the sampling time for the inputs and outputs.
Dependency: The parameter can only be modified for p0009 = 3, 29.
The sampling times can only be set as an integer multiple of the basic sampling time (p0110, p0111).
Refer to: p0009, p0110, p0111
Note: The modified sampling time is not effective until the drive unit is powered-up again.

p0806 BI: Inhibit master control / PcCtrl inhibit

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: T Access level: 3
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source to block the master control.

Dependency: Refer to: r0807
Note: The master control is used from the commissioning software (drive control panel) and from the advanced operator
panel (AOP, local mode).

1-146  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0807 BO: Master control active / PcCtrl active

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 2
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays what has the master control.
The drive can be controlled via the BICO interconnection or from external (e.g. the commissioning software).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Master control active No Yes 5030
Dependency: Refer to: p0806
Note: Bit 0 = 0: BICO interconnection active
Bit 0 = 1: Master control for PC/AOP
The master control is used from the commissioning software (drive control panel) and from the advanced operator
panel (AOP, local mode).

p0809[0...2] Copy command data set CDS / Copy CDS

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: T Access level: 2
SERVO, TM41, Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: - Function diagram: -
VECTOR
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 15 0
Description: Copies one command data set (CDS) into another.
Index: [0] = Source Command Data Set
[1] = Target command data set
[2] = Start copying
Note: Procedure:
1. In Index 0, enter which command data set should be copied.
2. In Index 1, enter the command data set that is to be copied into.
3. Start copying: Set index 2 from 0 to 1.
p0809[2] is automatically set to 0 when copying is completed.

p0810 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 0 / CDS select., bit 0
A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: T Access level: 3
TM41, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2578,
8920
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source to select the command data set bit 0 (CDS bit 0).
Dependency: Refer to: r0050, p0811, p0812, p0813, r0836
Note: Command data sets are selected using the binector inputs p0810, p0811, p0812 and p0813.
For a command data set, selected using the binector inputs, is displayed in r0836.
The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050.
A command data set can be copied using p0809.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-147

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0811 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 1 / CDS select., bit 1
A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: T Access level: 3
TM41, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2578
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select the command data set bit 1 (CDS bit 1).
Dependency: Refer to: r0050, p0810, p0812, p0813, r0836
Note: Command data sets are selected using the binector inputs p0810, p0811, p0812 and p0813.
For a command data set, selected using the binector inputs, is displayed in r0836.
The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050.
A command data set can be copied using p0809.

p0812 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 2 / CDS select., bit 2
A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: T Access level: 3
TM41, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2578
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source to select the command data set bit 2 (CDS bit 2).
Dependency: Refer to: r0050, p0810, p0811, p0813, r0836
Note: Command data sets are selected using the binector inputs p0810, p0811, p0812 and p0813.
For a command data set, selected using the binector inputs, is displayed in r0836.
The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050.
A command data set can be copied using p0809.

p0813 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 3 / CDS select., bit 3
A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: T Access level: 3
TM41, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2578
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select the command data set bit 3 (CDS bit 3).
Dependency: Refer to: r0050, p0810, p0811, p0812, r0836
Note: Command data sets are selected using the binector inputs p0810, p0811, p0812 and p0813.
For a command data set, selected using the binector inputs, is displayed in r0836.
The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050.
A command data set can be copied using p0809.

p0819[0...2] Copy drive data set DDS / Copy DDS

SERVO, TM41, Can be changed: C2 Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: - Function diagram: 8565
P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 31 [0] 0
[1] 0
[2] 0
Description: Copies a drive data set (DDS) into another.

1-148  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Index: [0] = Source drive data set

[1] = Target drive data set
[2] = Start copying
Note: Procedure:
1. In Index 0, enter which drive data set is to be copied.
2. In Index 1, enter the drive data set data that is to be copied into.
3. Start copying: Set index 2 from 0 to 1.
p0819[2] is automatically set to 0 when copying is completed.

p0820[0...n] BI: Drive data set selection DDS bit 0 / DDS select., bit 0
SERVO, TM41, Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 8565
P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source to select the drive data set, bit 0 (DDS, bit 0).
Dependency: Refer to: r0051, r0837

p0821[0...n] BI: Drive data set selection DDS bit 1 / DDS select., bit 1
SERVO, TM41, Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 8565
P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source to select the drive data set, bit 1 (DDS, bit 1).
Dependency: Refer to: r0051, r0837

p0822[0...n] BI: Drive data set selection DDS bit 2 / DDS select., bit 2
SERVO, TM41, Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 8565
P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source to select the drive data set, bit 2 (DDS, bit 2).
Dependency: Refer to: r0051, r0837

p0823[0...n] BI: Drive data set selection DDS bit 3 / DDS select., bit 3
SERVO, TM41, Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 8565
P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source to select the drive data set, bit 3 (DDS, bit 3).
Dependency: Refer to: r0051, r0837

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-149

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0824[0...n] BI: Drive data set selection DDS bit 4 / DDS select., bit 4
SERVO, TM41, Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 8565
P-Group: Data sets Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select the drive data set, bit 4 (DDS, bit 4).
Dependency: Refer to: r0051, r0837

r0836 CO/BO: Command data set CDS selected / CDS selected

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 2
SERVO, TM41, Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: - Function diagram: 1530,
VECTOR 2578
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the command data set (CDS) selected using p0810 ... p0813.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 CDS selection bit 0 Off On -
01 CDS selection bit 1 Off On -
02 CDS selection bit 2 Off On -
03 CDS selection bit 3 Off On -
Dependency: Refer to: r0050, p0810, p0811, p0812, p0813
Note: The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050.

r0837 CO/BO: Drive data set DDS selected / DDS selected

SERVO, TM41, Can be changed: - Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: - Function diagram: 8565
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the drive data set (DDS) selected using p0820 ... p0824.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DDS selection bit 0 Off On -
01 DDS selection bit 1 Off On -
02 DDS selection bit 2 Off On -
03 DDS selection bit 3 Off On -
04 DDS selection bit 4 Off On -
Dependency: Refer to: r0051, p0820, p0821, p0822, p0823, p0824

p0840[0...n] BI: ON/OFF1 / ON/OFF1

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: T Access level: 3
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2501,
8920
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 0 (ON/OFF1).
Recommenda- When the signal source is set, this does not trigger a response - but only a signal change of the source.
tion:

1-150  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Note: For drives with closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20, 21), the following applies:
Bit 0 = 0: OFF1 (braking with the ramp-function generator, then pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit)
For drives with closed-loop torque control (p1300 = 22, 23), the following applies:
Bit 0 = 0: Immediate pulse cancellation
For drives with closed-loop torque control (activated using p1501), the following applies:
Bit 0 = 0: No dedicated braking response, but pulse cancellation when standstill is detected (p1226, p1227)
For drives with closed-loop speed/torque control, the following applies:
Bit 0 = 0/1: ON (pulses can be enabled)
For active infeed units, the following applies:
Bit 0 = 0: OFF1 (reduce Vdc along the ramp, then pulse cancellation and pre-charging contactor/line contactor
open)
Bit 0 = 0/1: ON (pre-charging contactor/line contactor closed, pulses can be enabled)
For passive infeed units (basic line module) the following applies:
Bit 0 = 0: OFF1 (pre-charging contactor/line contactor open)
Bit 0 = 0/1: ON (pre-charging contactor/line contactor closed)
r0863.1 of a drive can also be selected as signal source.

p0840 BI: ON/OFF1 / ON/OFF1

TM41 Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 0 (ON/OFF1).
Note: Bit 0 = 0: OFF1 (pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit)
Bit 0 = 0/1: ON (pulses can be enabled)

p0844[0...n] BI: 1. OFF2 / 1. OFF2

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: T Access level: 3
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2501,
8920
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the 1st OC/OFF2.
The AND logic operation of the 1st OC/OFF2 and 2nd OC/OFF2 results in control word 1, bit 1 (OC/OFF2).
Note: For drives, the following applies:
Bit 1 = 0: OFF2 (immediate pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit)
Bit 1 = 1: No OFF2 (enable is possible)
For infeed units, the following applies:
Bit 1 = 0: OFF2 (immediate pulse cancellation for active infeed units, pre-charging contactor/line contactor open
and power-on inhibit)
Bit 1 = 1: No OFF2 (enable is possible)
OC: Operating condition

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-151

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0844 BI: OFF2 / OFF2

TM41 Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for control word 1, bit 1 (OC/OFF2).
Note: Bit 1 = 0: OFF2 (immediate pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit)
Bit 1 = 1: No OFF2 (enable is possible)
OC: Operating condition

p0845[0...n] BI: 2. OFF2 / 2. OFF2

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: T Access level: 3
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2501,
8920
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for the 2nd OC/OFF2.

The AND logic operation of the 1st OC/OFF2 and 2nd OC/OFF2 results in control word 1, bit 1 (OC/OFF2).
Note: For drives, the following applies:
Bit 1 = 0: OFF2 (immediate pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit)
Bit 1 = 1: No OFF2 (enable is possible)
For infeed units, the following applies:
Bit 1 = 0: OFF2 (immediate pulse cancellation for active infeed units, pre-charging contactor/line contactor open
and power-on inhibit)
Bit 1 = 1: No OFF2 (enable is possible)
OC: Operating condition

p0848[0...n] BI: 1. OFF3 / 1. OFF3

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2501
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for the 1st OC/OFF3.

The AND logic operation of the 1st OC/OFF3 and 2nd OC/OFF3 results in control word 1, bit 2 (OC/OFF3).
Note: Bit 2 = 0: OFF3 (braking along the OFF3 ramp (p1135), then pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit)
Bit 2 = 1: No OFF3 (enable is possible)
OC: Operating condition

1-152  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0848 BI: OFF3 / OFF3

TM41 Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for control word 1, bit 2 (OC/OFF3).
Note: Bit 2 = 0: OFF3 (pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit)
Bit 2 = 1: No OFF3 (enable is possible)
OC: Operating condition

p0849[0...n] BI: 2. OFF3 / 2. OFF3

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2501
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for the 2nd OC/OFF3.

The AND logic operation of the 1st OC/OFF3 and 2nd OC/OFF3 results in control word 1, bit 2 (OC/OFF3).
Note: Bit 2 = 0: OFF3 (braking along the OFF3 ramp (p1135), then pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit)
Bit 2 = 1: No OFF3 (enable is possible)
OC: Operating condition

p0852[0...n] BI: Enable operation / Enable operation

A_INF, SERVO, Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2442,
2443, 2501, 8920
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 3 (enable operation)
Note: Bit 3 = 0: Inhibit operation (cancel pulses)
Bit 3 = 1: Enable operation (pulses can be enabled)

p0852 BI: Enable operation / Enable operation

TM41 Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 3 (enable operation)
Note: Bit 3 = 0: Inhibit operation (cancel pulses)
Bit 3 = 1: Enable operation (pulses can be enabled)

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-153

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0854[0...n] BI: Master ctrl by PLC / Master ctrl by PLC

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: T Access level: 3
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2501,
2442, 2443, 8920
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 10 (PLC control).
Note: Bit 10 = 0: PLC has no master control
Bit 10 = 1: Master ctrl by PLC

p0855[0...n] BI: Unconditionally release holding brake / Uncond. open brake

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2701
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for the command "unconditionally open holding brake".

p0856[0...n] BI: Enable speed controller / Enable n_ctrl

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2501
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for the command "enable speed controller" (r0898.12).
Dependency: Refer to: r0898
Note: 0 signal: Set the I component and speed controller output to zero.
1 signal: Enable the speed controller.

p0857 Power module monitoring time / PM t_monit

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: T Access level: 2
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 2610,
8932, 8964
P-Group: Commands Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
2000.0 [ms] 60000.0 [ms] 6000.0 [ms]

Description: Sets the monitoring time for the power module.

The monitoring time is started after an 0/1 edge of the ON/OFF1 command. If the power module does not output a
READY feedback signal within this time, then the appropriate message is output.
The monitoring time includes, if required, the time to pre-charge the DC link and the de-bounce time of the contac-
tors.
Dependency: Refer to: F06000, F07802
Note: The pre-assignment (default) value and the maximum value of this parameter are dependent on the power rating
class and the type of construction (design) of the power module.

1-154  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0860 BI: Line contactor, feedback signal / Line contact feedb

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: T Access level: 3
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 8932,
8934
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 863.1

Description: Sets the signal source for the feedback signal from the line contactor.
Recommenda- For activated monitoring (BI: p0860 not equal to r0863.1) to control the line line contactor, the signal BO: r0863.1 of
tion: the particular drive object should be used.
Dependency: Refer to: p0861, r0863
Refer to: F07300
Notice: The line contactor monitoring is de-activated if the control signal of the particular drive object is set as the signal
source for the feedback signal of the line contactor (BI: p0860 = r0863.1).
Note: The state of the line contactor is monitored depending on signal BO: r0863.1.
For activated monitoring (BI: p0860 not equal to r0863.1), fault F07300 is then also output if the contactor is closed
before it is controlled using r0863.1.

p0861 Line contactor monitoring time / LineContact. t_mon

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: T Access level: 2
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8932
P-Group: Commands Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 5000 [ms] 100 [ms]

Description: Sets the monitoring time of the line contactor.

This time starts each time that the line contactor switches (r0863.1). If a feedback signal is not received from the
line contactor within the time, a message is output.
Dependency: Refer to: p0860, r0863
Refer to: F07300
Note: The monitoring function is disabled for the factory setting of p0860.

p0862 Power module ON delay / PM t_on

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: T Access level: 3
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 2610,
8932
P-Group: Commands Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 65000 [ms] 0 [ms]

Description: Sets the delay time for the control command of the power module and a line contactor, if used.
Note: This means that it is possible to realize a shifted (delayed) pre-charging or power-on using a single ON command.
When the infeed units are active, before the line contactor is closed, an offset adjustment of the current measure-
ment is carried-out for a duration of 120 ms (p3491).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-155

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0863 CO/BO: Drive coupling status word/control word / CoupleZSW/STW

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 2
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1774,
2610, 8932, 8934
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the status and control words of the drive coupling.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Infeed operation No Yes -
01 Energize line contactor No Yes -
Dependency: Refer to: p0864
Note: Bit 0 signals that the infeed is ready.
Bit 1 is used to control an external line contactor.
When transferring the operating message/signal via BO: r0863.0 allows several drives to start (run-up) staggered
over time when they are simultaneously powered-up.
To realize this, the following connections/interconnections are required:
Drive 1: BI: p0864 with BO: Interconnect r0863.0 of the infeed
Drive 2: BI: p0864 with BO: Interconnect r0863.0 from drive 1
Drive 3: BI: p0864 with BO: Interconnect r0863.0 from drive 2, etc.
The first drive only transfers the operating signal to the next drive after it has reached its ready condition.

p0864 BI: Infeed operation / INF operation

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1774,
2610
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for the signal "infeed operation" (BO: r0863.0).
Dependency: Refer to: r0863
Note: The sequential control of a servo/vector drive requires the signal "infeed operation" (BO: r0863.0).

r0898 CO/BO: Control word sequential control infeed / STW seq_ctrl INF
A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 8920
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays control word 1 of the infeed.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 ON/OFF1 No Yes -
01 OC / OFF2 No Yes -
03 Enable operation No Yes -
05 Inhibit motoring operation No Yes -
06 Inhibit regenerating No Yes -
10 Master ctrl by PLC No Yes -
Note: OC: Operating condition

1-156  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0898 CO/BO: Control word sequential control / STW seq ctrl

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1530,
2501
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the control word for the sequential control.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 ON/OFF1 No Yes -
01 OC / OFF2 No Yes -
02 OC / OFF3 No Yes -
03 Enable operation No Yes -
04 Enables the ramp-function generator No Yes -
05 Freeze ramp-function generator Yes No -
06 Enable speed setpoint No Yes -
07 Command, open brake No Yes -
08 Jog 1 No Yes -
09 Jog 2 No Yes -
10 Master ctrl by PLC No Yes -
12 Speed controller enable No Yes -

r0898 CO/BO: Control word sequential control / STW seq ctrl

TM41 Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1530
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the control word for the sequential control.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 ON/OFF1 No Yes -
01 OC / OFF2 No Yes -
02 OC / OFF3 No Yes -
03 Enable operation No Yes -
04 Enables the ramp-function generator No Yes -
05 Start ramp-function generator No Yes -
06 Enable speed setpoint No Yes -
07 Acknowledge fault No Yes -
13 Enable zero mark No Yes -
Note: OC: Operating condition

r0898 CO/BO: Control word sequential control infeed / STW seq_ctrl INF
B_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays control word 1 of the infeed.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 ON/OFF1 No Yes -
01 OC / OFF2 No Yes -
10 Master ctrl by PLC No Yes -
Note: OC: Operating condition

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-157

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0899 CO/BO: Status word sequential control infeed / ZSW seq_ctrl INF
A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 8926
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status word of the infeed sequential control.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Ready to power up No Yes -
01 Ready No Yes -
02 Operation enabled No Yes -
04 No OFF2 active OFF2 active OFF2 inactive -
06 Power-on inhibit No Yes -
09 Control from the PLC No Yes -
11 Pre-charging compl No Yes -
12 Line contactor closed No Yes 8934
Note: Re bit 12:
The feedback signal of a line contactor (auxiliary contact) can be interconnected via BI: p0860.

r0899 CO/BO: Status word sequential control / ZSW seq ctrl

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1530,
2503
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status word of the sequential control.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Ready to power up No Yes -
01 Ready No Yes -
02 Operation enabled No Yes -
04 No coasting active OFF2 active OFF2 inactive -
05 No fast stop active OFF3 active OFF3 inactive -
06 Power-on inhibit active No Yes -
09 Control from the PLC No Yes -
11 Pulses enabled No Yes -
12 Holding brake open No Yes -
13 Command, close holding brake No Yes -
14 Pulse enable from the brake control No Yes -
15 Setpoint enable from the brake control No Yes -
Note: Bits 0, 1, 2, 4, 5, 6 and 9 are used for status word 1 of the PROFIdrive profile.

1-158  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0899 CO/BO: Status word sequential control / ZSW seq ctrl

TM41 Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1530
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status word of the sequential control.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Ready to power up No Yes -
01 Ready No Yes -
02 Operation enabled No Yes -
06 Power-on inhibit No Yes -
08 Actual value in tolerance No Yes -
09 Control from the PLC No Yes -
13 Zero mark enabled No Yes -
14 Tracks A/B enabled No Yes -
15 Interface encoder emulation enabled No Yes -
Note: Bits 0, 1, 2 and 6 are used for status word 1 of the PROFIdrive profile.

r0899 CO/BO: Status word sequential control infeed / ZSW seq_ctrl INF
B_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the status word of the infeed sequential control.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Ready to power up No Yes -
01 Ready No Yes -
02 Operation enabled No Yes -
04 No OFF2 active OFF2 active OFF2 inactive -
06 Power-on inhibit No Yes -
09 Control from the PLC No Yes -
11 Pre-charging compl No Yes -
12 Line contactor controlled (energized) No Yes -
Note: Bits 0, 1, 2, 4, 5, 6 and 9 are used for status word 1 of the PROFIdrive profile.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-159

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0915[0...29] TM15 PROFIBUS PZD setpoint assignment / TM15 PB PZD setpt

TM15 Can be changed: T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4273 [0] 4201
[1] 4204
[2] 4205
[3] 4211
[4] 4212
[5] 4213
[6] 0
[7] 0
[8] 0
[9] 0
[10] 0
[11] 0
[12] 0
[13] 0
[14] 0
[15] 0
[16] 0
[17] 0
[18] 0
[19] 0
[20] 0
[21] 0
[22] 0
[23] 0
[24] 0
[25] 0
[26] 0
[27] 0
[28] 0
[29] 0

Description: Is used to assign the process data received the PROFIBUS master (PZD, setpoints).

1-160  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Values: 0: ZERO
4201: r4201 (system time for synchronization)
4204: r4204 (control digital output 0 ... 15)
4205: r4205 (control digital output 16 ... 23)
4211: r4211 (edge mode digital input 0 ... 7)
4212: r4212 (edge mode digital input 8 ... 15)
4213: r4213 (edge mode digital input 16 ... 23)
4250: r4250 (set/resetting time, digital output 0)
4251: r4251 (set/resetting time, digital output 1)
4252: r4252 (set/resetting time, digital output 2)
4253: r4253 (set/resetting time, digital output 3)
4254: r4254 (set/resetting time, digital output 4)
4255: r4255 (set/resetting time, digital output 5)
4256: r4256 (set/resetting time, digital output 6)
4257: r4257 (set/resetting time, digital output 7)
4258: r4258 (set/resetting time, digital output 8)
4259: r4259 (set/resetting time, digital output 9)
4260: r4260 (set/resetting time, digital output 10)
4261: r4261 (set/resetting time, digital output 11)
4262: r4262 (set/resetting time, digital output 12)
4263: r4263 (set/resetting time, digital output 13)
4264: r4264 (set/resetting time, digital output 14)
4265: r4265 (set/resetting time, digital output 15)
4266: r4266 (set/resetting time, digital output 16)
4267: r4267 (set/resetting time, digital output 17)
4268: r4268 (set/resetting time, digital output 18)
4269: r4269 (set/resetting time, digital output 19)
4270: r4270 (set/resetting time, digital output 20)
4271: r4271 (set/resetting time, digital output 21)
4272: r4272 (set/resetting time, digital output 22)
4273: r4273 (set/resetting time, digital output 23)
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
[16] = PZD 17
[17] = PZD 18
[18] = PZD 19
[19] = PZD 20
[20] = PZD 21
[21] = PZD 22
[22] = PZD 23
[23] = PZD 24
[24] = PZD 25
[25] = PZD 26
[26] = PZD 27
[27] = PZD 28
[28] = PZD 29
[29] = PZD 30

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-161

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Note: Example:
The telegram for the setpoints should have the following process data (PZD) and assignments:
PZD 1 (r4201), PZD 2 (r4204), PZD 3 (r4250)
The setpoint assignment must be realized as follows:
p0915[0] = 4201 - 16 bit
p0915[1] = 4204 - 16 bit
p0915[2] = 4250 - 16 bit
p0915[3] = 0
...
p0915[29] = 0

p0915[0...35] TM17 PROFIBUS PZD setpoint assignment / TM17 PB PZD setpt

TM17 Can be changed: T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4265 [0] 4201
[1] 4204
[2] 4211
[3] 4212
[4] 0
[5] 0
[6] 0
[7] 0
[8] 0
[9] 0
[10] 0
[11] 0
[12] 0
[13] 0
[14] 0
[15] 0
[16] 0
[17] 0
[18] 0
[19] 0
[20] 0
[21] 0
[22] 0
[23] 0
[24] 0
[25] 0
[26] 0
[27] 0
[28] 0
[29] 0
[30] 0
[31] 0
[32] 0
[33] 0
[34] 0
[35] 0

Description: Is used to assign the process data received the PROFIBUS master (PZD, setpoints).

1-162  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Values: 0: ZERO
4201: r4201 (system time for synchronization)
4204: r4204 (control digital output 0 ... 15)
4211: r4211 (edge mode digital input 0 ... 7)
4212: r4212 (edge mode digital input 8 ... 15)
4250: r4250 (set/resetting time, digital output 0)
4251: r4251 (set/resetting time, digital output 1)
4252: r4252 (set/resetting time, digital output 2)
4253: r4253 (set/resetting time, digital output 3)
4254: r4254 (set/resetting time, digital output 4)
4255: r4255 (set/resetting time, digital output 5)
4256: r4256 (set/resetting time, digital output 6)
4257: r4257 (set/resetting time, digital output 7)
4258: r4258 (set/resetting time, digital output 8)
4259: r4259 (set/resetting time, digital output 9)
4260: r4260 (set/resetting time, digital output 10)
4261: r4261 (set/resetting time, digital output 11)
4262: r4262 (set/resetting time, digital output 12)
4263: r4263 (set/resetting time, digital output 13)
4264: r4264 (set/resetting time, digital output 14)
4265: r4265 (set/resetting time, digital output 15)
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
[16] = PZD 17
[17] = PZD 18
[18] = PZD 19
[19] = PZD 20
[20] = PZD 21
[21] = PZD 22
[22] = PZD 23
[23] = PZD 24
[24] = PZD 25
[25] = PZD 26
[26] = PZD 27
[27] = PZD 28
[28] = PZD 29
[29] = PZD 30
[30] = PZD 31
[31] = PZD 32
[32] = PZD 33
[33] = PZD 34
[34] = PZD 35
[35] = PZD 36

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-163

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Note: Example:
The telegram for the setpoints should have the following process data (PZD) and assignments:
PZD 1 (r4201), PZD 2 (r4204), PZD 3 (r4250), PZD 4 (r4250)
The setpoint assignment must be realized as follows:
p0915[0] = 4201 - 16 bit
p0915[1] = 4204 - 16 bit
p0915[2] = 4250 - 32 bit - specified twice one after the other
p0915[3] = 4250 -32 bit
p0915[4] = 0
...
p0915[35] = 0

p0916[0...29] TM15 PROFIBUS PZD actual value assignment / TM15 PB PZD actVal
TM15 Can be changed: T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4373 [0] 4301
[1] 4304
[2] 4305
[3] 4311
[4] 4312
[5] 4313
[6] 0
[7] 0
[8] 0
[9] 0
[10] 0
[11] 0
[12] 0
[13] 0
[14] 0
[15] 0
[16] 0
[17] 0
[18] 0
[19] 0
[20] 0
[21] 0
[22] 0
[23] 0
[24] 0
[25] 0
[26] 0
[27] 0
[28] 0
[29] 0

Description: Is used to assign the process data to be set to the PROFIBUS master (PZD, actual values).

1-164  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Values: 0: ZERO
4301: r4301 (module synchronization)
4304: r4304 (status digital input 0 ... 15)
4305: r4305 (status digital input 16 ... 23)
4311: r4311 (edge status digital input 0 ... 7)
4312: r4312 (edge status digital input 8 ... 15)
4313: r43131 (edge status digital input 16 ... 23)
4350: r4350 (edge times digital input 0)
4351: r4351 (edge times digital input 1)
4352: r4352 (edge times digital input 2)
4353: r4353 (edge times digital input 3)
4354: r4354 (edge times digital input 4)
4355: r4355 (edge times digital input 5)
4356: r4356 (edge times digital input 6)
4357: r4357 (edge times digital input 7)
4358: r4358 (edge times digital input 8)
4359: r4359 (edge times digital input 9)
4360: r4360 (edge times digital input 10)
4361: r4361 (edge times digital input 11)
4362: r4362 (edge times digital input 12)
4363: r4363 (edge times digital input 13)
4364: r4364 (edge times digital input 14)
4365: r4365 (edge times digital input 15)
4366: r4366 (edge times digital input 16)
4367: r4367 (edge times digital input 17)
4368: r4368 (edge times digital input 18)
4369: r4369 (edge times digital input 19)
4370: r4370 (edge times digital input 20)
4371: r4371 (edge times digital input 21)
4372: r4372 (edge times digital input 22)
4373: r4373 (edge times digital input 23)
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
[16] = PZD 17
[17] = PZD 18
[18] = PZD 19
[19] = PZD 20
[20] = PZD 21
[21] = PZD 22
[22] = PZD 23
[23] = PZD 24
[24] = PZD 25
[25] = PZD 26
[26] = PZD 27
[27] = PZD 28
[28] = PZD 29
[29] = PZD 30

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-165

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Note: Example:
The telegram for the actual values should have the following process data (PZD) and assignments:
PZD 1 (r4301), PZD 2 (r4304), PZD 3 (r4350)
The actual value assignment must be implemented as follows:
p0916[0] = 4301 - 16 bit
p0916[1] = 4304 - 16 bit
p0916[2] = 4350 - 16 bit
p0916[3] = 0
...
p0916[29] = 0

p0916[0...35] TM17 PROFIBUS PZD actual value assignment / TM17 PB PZD actVal
TM17 Can be changed: T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4365 [0] 4301
[1] 4304
[2] 4311
[3] 4312
[4] 0
[5] 0
[6] 0
[7] 0
[8] 0
[9] 0
[10] 0
[11] 0
[12] 0
[13] 0
[14] 0
[15] 0
[16] 0
[17] 0
[18] 0
[19] 0
[20] 0
[21] 0
[22] 0
[23] 0
[24] 0
[25] 0
[26] 0
[27] 0
[28] 0
[29] 0
[30] 0
[31] 0
[32] 0
[33] 0
[34] 0
[35] 0

Description: Is used to assign the process data to be set to the PROFIBUS master (PZD, actual values).

1-166  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Values: 0: ZERO
4301: r4301 (module synchronization)
4304: r4304 (status digital input 0 ... 15)
4311: r4311 (edge status digital input 0 ... 7)
4312: r4312 (edge status digital input 8 ... 15)
4350: r4350 (edge times digital input 0)
4351: r4351 (edge times digital input 1)
4352: r4352 (edge times digital input 2)
4353: r4353 (edge times digital input 3)
4354: r4354 (edge times digital input 4)
4355: r4355 (edge times digital input 5)
4356: r4356 (edge times digital input 6)
4357: r4357 (edge times digital input 7)
4358: r4358 (edge times digital input 8)
4359: r4359 (edge times digital input 9)
4360: r4360 (edge times digital input 10)
4361: r4361 (edge times digital input 11)
4362: r4362 (edge times digital input 12)
4363: r4363 (edge times digital input 13)
4364: r4364 (edge times digital input 14)
4365: r4365 (edge times digital input 15)
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
[16] = PZD 17
[17] = PZD 18
[18] = PZD 19
[19] = PZD 20
[20] = PZD 21
[21] = PZD 22
[22] = PZD 23
[23] = PZD 24
[24] = PZD 25
[25] = PZD 26
[26] = PZD 27
[27] = PZD 28
[28] = PZD 29
[29] = PZD 30
[30] = PZD 31
[31] = PZD 32
[32] = PZD 33
[33] = PZD 34
[34] = PZD 35
[35] = PZD 36

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-167

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Note: Example:
The telegram for the actual values should have the following process data (PZD) and assignments:
PZD 1 (r4301), PZD 2 (r4304), PZD 3 (r4350), PZD 4 (r4350)
The setpoint assignment must be realized as follows:
p0916[0] = 4301 - 16 bit
p0916[1] = 4304 - 16 bit
p0916[2] = 4350 - 32 bit - specified twice one after the other
p0916[3] = 4350 -32 bit
p0916[4] = 0
...
p0916[35] = 0

p0918 PROFIBUS address / PROFIBUS address

CU Can be changed: T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1520,
2410
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 126 126

Description: Displays or sets the PROFIBUS address for PROFIBUS interface X126 on the control unit. The address can be set
as follows:
1) Using the DIP power-up the control unit.
--> p0918 can then only be read and displays the selected address.
--> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
2) Using p0918
--> only if all of the DIP switches - from S1 to S7 - are either set to ON or OFF.
--> a change becomes immediately effective
Note: Permissible PROFIBUS addresses: 1 ... 126
Address 126 is intended for commissioning.
Every change of the DIP switch only becomes effective after a POWER ON.

p0922 PROFIBUS PZD telegram selection / PB PZD telegr_eval

A_INF, B_INF Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1520,
2420, 2460, 2470
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
370 999 999

Description: Sets the send and receive telegram for PROFIBUS.

Either a manufacturer-specific telegram 370 can be selected or a telegram can be freely configured.
Values: 370: SIEMENS telegram 370 for the infeed
999: Free telegram configuration with BICO
Dependency: Refer to: F01505, F01506
Note: If a value is not equal to 999, a telegram is set and the automatically set interconnections in the telegram are inhib-
ited.
The inhibited interconnections can only be changed again if a value of 999 was set.

1-168  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0922 PROFIBUS PZD telegram selection / PB PZD telegr_eval

SERVO Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1520,
2420, 2460, 2470
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
2 999 999

Description: Sets the send and receive telegram for PROFIBUS.

Either standard telegrams according to PROFIdrive, manufacturer-specified telegrams or telegrams that can be
freely configured can be selected.
Values: 2: Standard telegram 2
3: Standard telegram 3
4: Standard telegram 4
5: Standard telegram 5
6: Standard telegram 6
102: SIEMENS telegram 102
103: SIEMENS telegram 103
105: SIEMENS telegram 105
106: SIEMENS telegram 106
999: Free telegram configuration with BICO
Dependency: Refer to: p2038
Refer to: F01505, F01506
Note: For p0922 = 100 ... 199, p2038 is automatically set to 1 and p2038 can no longer be changed. This means that for
these telegrams, the "SIMODRIVE 611 universal" interface mode is set and cannot be changed.

If a value is not equal to 999, a telegram is set and the automatically set interconnections in the telegram are inhib-
ited.
The inhibited interconnections can only be changed again if a value of 999 was set.

p0922 PROFIBUS PZD telegram selection / PB PZD telegr_eval

VECTOR Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1520,
2420, 2460, 2470
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 999 999

Description: Sets the send and receive telegram for PROFIBUS.

Either a standard telegram 1 according to PROFIdrive can be selected or a telegram can be freely configured.
Values: 1: Standard telegram 1
999: Free telegram configuration with BICO
Dependency: Refer to: F01505, F01506
Note: If a value is not equal to 999, a telegram is set and the automatically set interconnections in the telegram are inhib-
ited.
The inhibited interconnections can only be changed again if a value of 999 was set.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-169

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0922 PROFIBUS PZD telegram selection / PB PZD telegr_eval

TM41 Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1520,
2420, 2460, 2470
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
3 999 999

Description: Sets the send and receive telegram for PROFIBUS.

Either a standard telegram 3 according to PROFIdrive can be selected or a telegram can be freely configured.
Values: 3: Standard telegram 3
999: Free telegram configuration with BICO
Dependency: Refer to: F01505, F01506
Note: If a value is not equal to 999, a telegram is set and the automatically set interconnections in the telegram are inhib-
ited.
The inhibited interconnections can only be changed again if a value of 999 was set.

p0925 PROFIBUS clock synchronous sign-of-life tolerance / Master SoL_tol

SERVO, TM41 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 2410
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 1
Description: Number of tolerated consecutive sign-of-life errors of the clock synchronous PROFIBUS master. The sign-of-life
signal is normally received in PZD4 (control word 2) from the master.
Dependency: Refer to: p2045, r2065
Refer to: F01912
Note: The sign-of-life monitoring is disabled for p0925 = 65535.

r0930 PROFIBUS operating mode / PB operating mode

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the operating mode.

1: Closed-loop speed controlled operation with ramp-function generator
3: Closed-loop speed controlled operation without ramp-function generator

r0944 Counter for fault buffer changes / Fault buff change

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays fault buffer changes. This counter is incremented every time the fault buffer changes.
Recommenda- Used to check whether the fault buffer has been read out consistently.
tion:
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109

1-170  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0945[0...63] Fault code / Fault code

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1750,
8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the numbers of faults that have occurred.

Dependency: Refer to: r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136
Note: Fault buffer structure (general principle):
r0945[0], r0949[0], r0948[0], r2109[0] --> actual fault case, fault 1
...
r0945[7], r0949[7], r0948[7], r2109[7] --> actual fault case, fault 8
r0945[8], r0949[8], r0948[8], r2109[8] --> 1st acknowledged fault case, fault 1
...
r0945[15], r0949[15], r0948[15], r2109[15] --> 1st acknowledged fault case, fault 8
...
r0945[56], r0949[56], r0948[56], r2109[56] --> 7th acknowledged fault case, fault 1
...
r0945[63], r0949[63], r0948[63], r2109[63] --> 7th acknowledged fault case, fault 8

r0946[0...65534] Fault code list / Fault code list

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Lists the fault codes stored in the drive unit.

Dependency: The parameter assigned to the fault code is entered in r0951 under the same index.
Refer to: r0951

r0947[0...63] Fault number / Fault number

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1750,
8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: This parameter is identical to r0945.

r0948[0...63] Fault time received in milliseconds / t_fault recv ms

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1750,
8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]

Description: Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the fault occurred.
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0949, r2109, r2114, r2130, r2133, r2136

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-171

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0949[0...63] Fault value / Fault value

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1750,
8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays additional information about the fault that occurred (as integer number).
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136

r0951[0...65534] Fault number list / Fault number list

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Lists parameters assigned to a fault.

Dependency: Refer to: r0946

p0952 Fault cases, counter / Fault cases No.

All objects Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1710,
8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0

Description: Number of fault situations that have occurred since the last reset.
Dependency: The fault buffer is deleted (cleared) by setting p0952 to 0.
Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136

r0963 PROFIBUS baud rate / PROFIBUS baud rate

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Values: 0: 9.6 kbit/s

1: 19.2 kbit/s
2: 93.75 kbit/s
3: 187.5 kbit/s
4: 500 kbit/s
6: 1.5 Mbit/s
7: 3 Mbit/s
8: 6 Mbit/s
9: 12 Mbit/s
10: 31.25 kbit/s
11: 45.45 kbit/s
255: Unknown

1-172  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0964[0...6] Device identification / Device ident.

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the device identification.
Index: [0] = Company (Siemens = 42)
[1] = Device type
[2] = Firmware version
[3] = Firmware date (year)
[4] = Firmware date (day/month)
[5] = Number of drive objects
[6] = Firmware patch/hot fix
Note: Example:
r0964[0] = 42 --> SIEMENS
r0964[1] = 5000 --> SINAMICS S CU320
r0964[1] = 5200 --> SINAMICS G CU320
r0964[2] = 102 --> first part of the firmware version V01.02 (second part, refer under index 6)
r0964[3] = 2003 --> year 2003
r0964[4] = 1401 --> 14th of January
r0964[5] = 4 --> 4 drive objects
r0964[6] = 600 --> second part, firmware version (complete version: V01.02.06.00)

r0965 PROFIBUS profile number / PB profile number

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the PROFIBUS profile number and profile version. Constant value = 0303 hex.
Byte 1: Profile number = 03 hex = PROFIdrive profile 3
Byte 2: Profile version = 03 hex = Version 3

p0969 System runtime relative / t_System relative

CU Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1750,
8060
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 4294967295 [ms] 0 [ms]

Description: Displays the system runtime in ms since the last power ON.
Note: The value in p0969 can only be reset to 0.
The value overflows after approx. 49 days.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-173

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0970 Reset infeed parameter / INF par reset

A_INF, B_INF Can be changed: C2 Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Factory settings Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 100 0
Description: The parameter is used to initiate that the parameters of an individual infeed unit are reset.
The parameters of the basic commissioning (refer to p0009) are in this case not reset (p0107, p0108, p0121,
p0170). These can only be reset using the factory setting of the complete drive unit (p0976).
The sampling times (p0111, p0112, p0115) are only not reset if this results in a conflict with the basic clock cycle
(p0110).
Values: 0: not active
1: Starts a parameter reset
100: Starts a BICO interconnection reset
Note: A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset).
At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0.

p0970 Reset drive parameters / Drive par reset

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Factory settings Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 100 0
Description: The parameter is used to initiate that the parameters of an individual drive unit are reset.
Parameters p0100, p0205 (only for VECTOR) and the parameters of the basic drive commissioning (p0009) are not
reset (p0107, p0108, p0111, p0112, p0115, p0121, p0130, p0131, p0140, p0141, p0142, p0170, p0186 ... p0189).
These can only be reset using the factory setting of the complete drive unit (p0976).
Values: 0: not active
1: Starts a parameter reset
100: Starts a BICO interconnection reset
Note: A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset).
At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0.

p0970 TB30 reset parameters / TB30 par reset

TB30 Can be changed: C2 Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Factory settings Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 100 0

Description: The parameter is used to initiate that the parameters are reset on terminal board 30 (TB30).
The sampling time p4099 is not reset if in so doing a conflict occurs with the basic clock cycle.
Parameter p0161 is not reset. It is only reset if the entire drive unit is reset to the factory settings (p0976).
Values: 0: not active
1: Starts a parameter reset
100: Starts a BICO interconnection reset
Note: A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset).
At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0.

1-174  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0970 TM15 reset parameter / TM15 par reset

TM15 Can be changed: C2 Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Factory settings Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 100 0
Description: The parameter is used to initiate that the parameters are reset on terminal module 15 (TB15).
Parameter p0151 is not reset. It is only reset if the entire drive unit is reset to the factory settings (p0976).
Values: 0: not active
1: Starts a parameter reset
100: Starts a BICO interconnection reset
Dependency: Refer to: p0010
Note: A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset).
At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0.

p0970 TM17 reset parameter / TM17 par reset

TM17 Can be changed: C2 Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Factory settings Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 100 0

Description: The parameter is used to initiate that the parameters are reset on terminal module 17 (TB17).
Parameter p0151 is not reset. It is only reset if the entire drive unit is reset to the factory settings (p0976).
Values: 0: not active
1: Starts a parameter reset
100: Starts a BICO interconnection reset
Dependency: Refer to: p0010
Note: A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset).
At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0.

p0970 TM31 reset parameters / TM31 par reset

TM31 Can be changed: C2 Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Factory settings Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 100 0

Description: The parameter is used to initiate that the parameters are reset on terminal module 31 (TB31).
The sampling time p4099 is not reset if in so doing a conflict occurs with the basic clock cycle.
Parameter p0151 is not reset. It is only reset if the entire drive unit is reset to the factory settings (p0976).
Values: 0: not active
1: Starts a parameter reset
100: Starts a BICO interconnection reset
Dependency: Refer to: p0010
Note: A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset).
At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-175

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0970 TM41 reset parameters / TM41 par reset

TM41 Can be changed: C2 Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Factory settings Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 100 0
Description: The parameter is used to initiate that the parameters are reset on terminal module 41 (TB41).
Parameter p0151 is not reset. It is only reset if the entire drive unit is reset to the factory settings (p0976).
Values: 0: not active
1: Starts a parameter reset
100: Starts a BICO interconnection reset
Dependency: Refer to: p0010
Note: A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset).
At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0.

p0971 Save drive object parameters / Save drv_obj

All objects Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0

Description: Saves the parameters of the particular drive object in the non-volatile memory (CompactFlash Card).
Values: 0: not active
1: Save drive object
Dependency: Refer to: p0977
Cautiont: The control unit power supply may only be powered-down after data has been saved (i.e. after data save has been
started, wait until the parameter again has the value 0).
Note: Starting from the particular drive object, the following parameters are saved:
CU3xx: Device-specific parameters and PROFIBUS device parameters.
Other objects: Parameters of the actual object and PROFIBUS device parameters.

r0975[0...10] Drive object identification /

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the identification of the drive object.
Index: [0] = Company (Siemens = 42)
[1] = Drive object type
[2] = Firmware version
[3] = Firmware date (year)
[4] = Firmware date (day/month)
[5] = PROFIdrive drive object, type class
[6] = PROFIdrive drive object, sub-type Class 1
[7] = Reserved
[8] = Reserved
[9] = Reserved
[10] = Firmware patch/hot fix

1-176  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Note: Example:
r0975[0] = 42 --> SIEMENS
r0975[1] = 11 --> SERVO drive object type
r0975[2] = 102 --> first part, firmware version V01.02 (second part, refer to index 10)
r0975[3] = 2003 --> year 2003
r0975[4] = 1401 --> 14th of January
r0975[5] = 1 --> PROFIdrive drive object, type class
r0975[6] = 9 --> PROFIdrive drive object sub-type class 1
r0975[7] = 0 (reserved)
r0975[8] = 0 (reserved)
r0975[9] = 0 (reserved)
r0975[10] = 600 --> second part, firmware version (complete version: V01.02.06.00)

p0976 Reset and load all parameters / Reset load all par
CU Can be changed: C1 Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Factory settings Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 100 0
Description: Resets or downloads all parameters of the drive system.
Values: 0: not active
1: Starts to reset all parameters to factory setting
2: Starts to download parameters saved in a non-volatile fashion with p0977 = 1
3: Start to download the volatile parameters from RAM
10: Starts to download parameters saved in a non-volatile fashion with p0977 = 10
11: Starts to download parameters saved in a non-volatile fashion with p0977 = 11
12: Starts to download parameters saved in a non-volatile fashion with p0977 = 12
20: Starts to download Siemens internal setting 20
21: Starts to download Siemens internal setting 21
22: Starts to download Siemens internal setting 22
23: Starts to download Siemens internal setting 23
24: Starts to download Siemens internal setting 24
25: Starts to download Siemens internal setting 25
26: Starts to download Siemens internal setting 26
100: Starts to reset all BICO interconnections
Note: After all of the parameters have been reset to their factory setting, the system must commissioned for the first time
again.
Resetting or loading is realized in the non-volatile memory.
Procedure:
1. Set p0009 = 30 (parameter reset).
2. Set p0976 to "required value". A new system run-up is started.
p0009 is automatically set to 0 after this has been carried-out.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-177

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p0977 Save all parameters / Save all par

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 26 0
Description: Saves all parameters of the drive system to the non-volatile memory (CompactFlash Card).
Values: 0: not active
1: Saves all parameters loaded at POWER ON in a non-volatile fashion
10: Saves all parameters in a non-volatile fashion, downloaded with p0976 = 10 as option
11: Saves all parameters in a non-volatile fashion, downloaded with p0976 = 11 as option
12: Saves all parameters in a non-volatile fashion, downloaded with p0976 = 12 as option
20: Saves all parameters as setting 20 in a non-volatile fashion (reserved)
21: Saves all parameters as setting 21 in a non-volatile fashion (reserved)
22: Saves all parameters as setting 22 in a non-volatile fashion (reserved)
23: Saves all parameters as setting 23 in a non-volatile fashion (reserved)
24: Saves all parameters as setting 24 in a non-volatile fashion (reserved)
25: Saves all parameters as setting 25 in a non-volatile fashion (reserved)
26: Saves all parameters as setting 26 in a non-volatile fashion (reserved)
Dependency: Refer to: p0976
Cautiont: The control unit power supply may only be powered-down after data has been saved (i.e. after data save has been
started, wait until the parameter again has the value 0).
Note: Parameters saved with p0977 = 10, 11 or 12 can be downloaded again with p0976 = 10, 11 or 12.

p0978[0...15] List of drive objects / List of the DO

CU Can be changed: C1 Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 62 [0] 1
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
[4] 0
[5] 0
[6] 0
[7] 0
[8] 0
[9] 0
[10] 0
[11] 0
[12] 0
[13] 0
[14] 0
[15] 0

Description: This parameter is an image of p0101 in conformance with PROFIdrive.

Parameters p0101 and p0978 contain the following information:
1) The same number of drive objects
2) The same drive objects
In this sense, they are consistent.
Difference between p0101 and p0978:
p0978 can be re-sorted and a zero inserted in order to identify those drive objects that participate in the PZD
exchange and to define their sequence in the PZD exchange. Drive objects that are listed after the first zero, are
excluded from the process data exchange.
Dependency: Refer to: p0101, p0971, p0977

1-178  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Note: p0978 cannot be changed when the drive system is first commissioned. The reason for this is that at this time the
actual topology has still not been acknowledged (p0099 is still not equal to r0098 and p0009 is set to 0).
If p0978 is changed, it only becomes effective after our OFF/ON or after the module/board has been reset. To do
this, this change to p0978 must first be saved in a non-volatile fashion using either p0971 or p0977.

r0979[0...30] Encoder format PROFIdrive / Encoder format

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the actual position encoder used according to PROFIdrive.

Index: [0] = Header
[1] = Type, encoder 1
[2] = Resolution encod 1
[3] = Shift factor G1_XACT1
[4] = Shift factor G1_XACT2
[5] = Distinguishable revolutions encoder 1
[6] = Reserved
[7] = Reserved
[8] = Reserved
[9] = Reserved
[10] = Reserved
[11] = Type, encoder 2
[12] = Resolution encod 2
[13] = Shift factor G2_XACT1
[14] = Shift factor G2_XACT2
[15] = Distinguishable revolutions encoder 2
[16] = Reserved
[17] = Reserved
[18] = Reserved
[19] = Reserved
[20] = Reserved
[21] = Type, encoder 3
[22] = Resolution encod 3
[23] = Shift factor G3_XACT1
[24] = Shift factor G3_XACT2
[25] = Distinguishable revolutions encoder 3
[26] = Reserved
[27] = Reserved
[28] = Reserved
[29] = Reserved
[30] = Reserved
Note: Information on the individual indices should be taken from the PROFIdrive Profile Drive Technology.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-179

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0979[0...10] Encoder format PROFIdrive / Encoder format

TM41 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 4704
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the actual position encoder used according to PROFIdrive.
Index: [0] = Header
[1] = Type, encoder 1
[2] = Resolution encod 1
[3] = Shift factor G1_XACT1
[4] = Shift factor G1_XACT2
[5] = Distinguishable revolutions encoder 1
[6] = Reserved
[7] = Reserved
[8] = Reserved
[9] = Reserved
[10] = Reserved
Note: Information on the individual indices should be taken from the PROFIdrive Profile Drive Technology.

r0980[0...99] List of existing parameters 1 / List avail par 1

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the parameters that exist for this drive.

Dependency: Refer to: r0981, r0989
Note: The existing parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In
a long list, index 99 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
This list completely comprises the following parameters:
r0980[0...99], r0981[0...99] ... r0989[0...99]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be
read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).

r0981[0...99] List of existing parameters 2 / List avail par 2

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the parameters that exist for this drive.

Dependency: Refer to: r0980, r0989
Note: The existing parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In
a long list, index 99 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
This list completely comprises the following parameters:
r0980[0...99], r0981[0...99] ... r0989[0...99]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be
read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).

1-180  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0989[0...99] List of existing parameters 10 / List avail par 10

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the parameters that exist for this drive.
Dependency: Refer to: r0980, r0981
Note: The existing parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here.
This list completely comprises the following parameters:
r0980[0...99], r0981[0...99] ... r0989[0...99]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be
read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).

r0990[0...99] List of modified parameters 1 / List changed par 1

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays those parameters with a value other than the factory setting for this drive.
Dependency: Refer to: r0991, r0999
Note: Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a
long list, index 99 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
This list completely comprises the following parameters:
r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be
read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).

r0991[0...99] List of modified parameters 2 / List changed par 2

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays those parameters with a value other than the factory setting for this drive.
Dependency: Refer to: r0990, r0999
Note: Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a
long list, index 99 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
This list completely comprises the following parameters:
r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be
read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-181

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r0999[0...99] List of modified parameters 10 / List changd par10

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays those parameters with a value other than the factory setting for this drive.
Dependency: Refer to: r0990, r0991
Note: Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here.
This list completely comprises the following parameters:
r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be
read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).

p1000[0...n] Macro connector inputs (CI) for speed setpoints / Macro CI n_set
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 999999 0

Description: Runs the appropriate ACX file on the CompactFlash Card.

The connector inputs (CI) for the speed setpoints of the appropriate command data set (CDS) are appropriately
interconnected.
The selected ACX file must be located in the following directory:
... /PMACRO/<drive object>/P1000/PMxxxxxx.ACX
Example:
p1000 = 6 --> the file PM000006.ACX is run.
Dependency: The ACX file to be run must be created according to the definition for ACX macros and must be saved in the direc-
tory intended on the CompactFlash Card.
Refer to: p0015, p0700, p1500
Note: CI: Connector input

p1001[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 1 / n_set_fixed 1

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min]
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 1.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197

p1002[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 2 / n_set_fixed 2

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min]

Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 2.

Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197

1-182  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1003[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 3 / n_set_fixed 3

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min]
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 3.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197

p1004[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 4 / n_set_fixed 4

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min]

Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 4.

Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197

p1005[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 5 / n_set_fixed 5

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min]
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 5.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197

p1006[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 6 / n_set_fixed 6

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min]

Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 6.

Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197

p1007[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 7 / n_set_fixed 7

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min]
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 7.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-183

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1008[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 8 / n_set_fixed 8

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min]
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 8.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197

p1009[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 9 / n_set_fixed 9

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min]

Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 9.

Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197

p1010[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 10 / n_set_fixed 10

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min]
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 10.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197

p1011[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 11 / n_set_fixed 11

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min]

Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 11.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197

p1012[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 12 / n_set_fixed 12

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min]
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 12.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197

1-184  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1013[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 13 / n_set_fixed 13

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min]
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 13.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197

p1014[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 14 / n_set_fixed 14

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min]

Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 14.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197

p1015[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 15 / n_set_fixed 15

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min]
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 15.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197

p1020[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 0 / n_set_fixed Bit 0

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2505
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source to select the speed/velocity fixed setpoint.
Dependency: Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets a value for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
Refer to: p1021, p1022, p1023, r1197
Note: If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).

p1021[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 1 / n_set_fixed Bit 1

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2505
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select the speed/velocity fixed setpoint.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-185

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Dependency: Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets a value for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
Refer to: p1020, p1022, p1023, r1197
Note: If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).

p1022[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 2 / n_set_fixed Bit 2

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2505
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source to select the speed/velocity fixed setpoint.
Dependency: Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets a value for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1023, r1197
Note: If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).

p1023[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 3 / n_set_fixed Bit 3

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2505
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select the speed/velocity fixed setpoint.
Dependency: Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets a value for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, r1197
Note: If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).

r1024 CO: Fixed speed setpoint effective / n_set_fixed eff

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1550,
3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]

Description: Displays the selected and effective fixed speed/velocity setpoint.

This setpoint is the output value for the fixed speed/velocity setpoints and must be appropriately interconnected
(e.g. with the main setpoint).
Recommenda- Interconnect the signal with main setpoint (p1070).
tion:
Dependency: Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets a value for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
Refer to: p1070, r1197
Note: If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).

1-186  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1030[0...n] Motorized potentiometer, configuration / Mop configuration

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3020
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 0111 bin 0110 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the motorized potentiometer.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Data save active No Yes -
01 Ramp-function generator active No Yes -
02 Initial rounding-off active No Yes -
Note: Re bit 01:
0: Without ramp-function generator in the automatic mode (ramp-up/ramp-down time = 0).
1: With ramp-function generator in the automatic mode.
Re bit 02:
0: Without initial rounding-off
1: With initial rounding-off. The selected ramp-up/down time is correspondingly exceeded. The initial rounding-off is
a sensitive way of specifying small changes (progressive reaction when keys are pressed).

p1035[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer, setpoint, raise / Mop raise

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2442,
2505
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source to increase the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer
Dependency: Refer to: p1036

p1035 BI: Enable zero marks / Enable zero marks

TM41 Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source to enable the zero mark pulses.

p1036[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer, lower setpoint / Mop lower

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2442,
2505
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source to reduce the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer.
Dependency: Refer to: p1035

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-187

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1037[0...n] Motorized potentiometer, maximum speed / Mop n_max

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min]
Description: Sets the maximum speed/velocity for the motorized potentiometer.
Note: This parameter is automatically pre-assigned in the commissioning phase.
The setpoint output from the motorized potentiometer is limited to this value.

p1038[0...n] Motorized potentiometer, minimum speed / Mop n_min

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min]
Description: Sets the minimum speed/velocity for the motorized potentiometer.
Note: This parameter is automatically pre-assigned in the commissioning phase.
The setpoint output from the motorized potentiometer is limited to this value.

p1039[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer, inversion / Mop inversion

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to invert the maximum or minimum speed/velocity for the motorized potentiometer.
Dependency: Refer to: p1037, p1038
Note: The inversion is only active during "motorized potentiometer raise" or "motorized potentiometer lower".

p1040[0...n] Motorized potentiometer, starting value / Mop start value

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min]
Description: Sets the starting value for the motorized potentiometer. This starting value becomes effective after the drive has
been powered-up.
Dependency: Only effective if p1030.0 = 0.
Refer to: p1030

1-188  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1041[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer, manual/automatic / Mop manual/auto

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to change over from manual to automatic when using a motorized potentiometer.
In the manual mode, the setpoint is changed using two signals - raise and lower. In the automatic mode, the set-
point must be interconnected via a connector input.
Dependency: Refer to: p1030, p1035, p1036, p1042
Note: The effectiveness of the internal ramp-function generator can be set in automatic mode.

p1042[0...n] CI: Motorized potentiometer, automatic setpoint / Mop auto setpoint

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for the setpoint of the motorized potentiometer in the automatic mode.
Dependency: Refer to: p1041

p1043[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer, accept setpoint / Mop accept set val
SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for the setting command to accept the setting value for the motorized potentiometer.
Dependency: Refer to: p1044

p1044[0...n] CI: Motorized potentiometer, setting value / Mop setting value

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for the setting value for the motorized potentiometer.
Dependency: Refer to: p1043
Note: The value becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting command.

r1045 CO: Motorized potentiometer, speed setpoint in front of the ramp-function generator
/ Mop n_set bef. RFG
SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]

Description: Sets the effective setpoint in front of the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-189

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1047[0...n] Motorized potentiometer, ramp-up time / Mop ramp-up time

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 1000.000 [s] 10.000 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-up time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer.
The setpoint is changed from the zero up to the speed/velocity limit (p1082) within this time (if no initial rounding-off
has been activated).
Dependency: Refer to: p1030, p1048, p1082
Note: When the initial rounding-off is activated (p1030.2) the ramp-up time is correspondingly extended.

p1048[0...n] Motorized potentiometer, ramp-down time / Mop ramp-down time

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 1000.000 [s] 10.000 [s]

Description: Sets the ramp-down time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer.
The setpoint is changed from the speed/velocity limit (p1082) to zero within this time (if no initial rounding-off has
been activated).
Dependency: Refer to: p1030, p1047, p1082
Note: The deceleration time is extended corresponding to the activated initial rounding-off (p1030.2).

r1050 CO: Motorized potentiometer, setpoint after the ramp-function generator /

Mop setp after RFG
SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1550,
3020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]
Description: Sets the effective setpoint after the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator.
This setpoint is the output value of the motorized potentiometer and must be appropriately interconnected onwards
(e.g. with the main setpoint).
Recommenda- Interconnect the signal with main setpoint (p1070).
tion:
Dependency: Refer to: p1070

p1055[0...n] BI: Jog bit 0 / Jog bit 0

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2501,
3030
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for jog 1.

Recommenda- When the signal source is set, this does not trigger a response - but only a signal change of the source.
tion:
Dependency: Refer to: p1058

1-190  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1056[0...n] BI: Jog bit 1 / Jog bit 1

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2501,
3030
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for jog 2.

Recommenda- When the signal source is set, this does not trigger a response - but only a signal change of the source.
tion:
Dependency: Refer to: p1059

p1058[0...n] Jog 1 speed setpoint / Jog 1 n_set

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3030
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min]

Description: Sets the speed/velocity for jog 1. Jogging is level-triggered and allows the motor to be incrementally moved.
Dependency: Refer to: p1055, p1056

p1059[0...n] Jog 2 speed setpoint / Jog 2 n_set

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3030
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min]

Description: Sets the speed/velocity for jog 2. Jogging is level-triggered and allows the motor to be incrementally moved.
Dependency: Refer to: p1055, p1056

p1070[0...n] CI: Main setpoint / Main setpoint

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 1550,
3030
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1024[0]

Description: Sets the signal source for the main setpoint.

Examples:
r1024: Fixed speed setpoint effective
r1050: Motorized potentiometer, setpoint after the ramp-function generator
Dependency: Refer to: p1071, r1073, r1078

p1071[0...n] CI: Main setpoint scaling / Main setpt scal

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 3030
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the main setpoint.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-191

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1073 CO: Main setpoint effective / Main setpoint eff

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 3030
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]
Description: Displays the effective main setpoint. The value shown is the main setpoint after scaling.

p1075[0...n] CI: Suppl setpoint / Suppl setpoint

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 1550,
3030
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for the supplementary setpoint.

Dependency: Refer to: p1076, r1077, r1078

p1076[0...n] CI: Supplementary setpoint scaling / Suppl setpt scal

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 3030
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the supplementary setpoint.

r1077 CO: Supplementary setpoint effective / Suppl setpoint eff

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 3030
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]

Description: Displays the effective supplementary setpoint. The value shown is the additional setpoint after scaling.

r1078 CO: Total setpoint effective / Total setpoint eff

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 3030
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]

Description: Displays the total effective setpoint. The value indicates the sum of the effective main setpoint and supplementary
setpoint.

1-192  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1080[0...n] Minimum speed / Minimum speed

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 1
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [1/min] 19500.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min]
Description: Sets the lowest possible speed/velocity. This value is not fallen below in operation.
Note: The parameter value applies for both motor directions of rotation.
In exception cases, the motor can operate below this value (e.g. when reversing).

p1082[0...n] Maximum speed / Maximum speed

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3050,
3060, 3070, 5300
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 1500.000 [1/min]

Description: Sets the highest possible speed/velocity.

The value in p1082 is calculated, during the commissioning phase, dependent on the motor and drive unit and can
only be equal to or less than the value in p0322 (maximum motor speed).
Dependency: If a sinusoidal filter (p0230 = 3) is parameterized as output filter, then the maximum speed is limited corresponding
to the maximum permissible filter output frequency (refer to the filter data sheet).
Refer to: p0115, p0230, r0313, p0322, r0336
Note: The parameter applies for both motor directions.

p1083[0...n] CO: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min]

Description: Sets the maximum speed/velocity for the positive direction.

r1084 Speed limit positive effective / n_limit pos eff

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 3050,
5030, 5210, 6640, 8010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]

Description: Displays the effective positive speed/velocity limit.

p1085[0...n] CI: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1083[0]

Description: Sets the signal source for the speed/velocity limit of the positive direction.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-193

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1086[0...n] CO: Speed limit negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min] -210000.000 [1/min]
Description: Sets the speed/velocity limit for the negative direction (of rotation).

r1087 Speed limit negative effective / n_limit neg eff

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 3050,
5030, 5210, 6640, 8010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]

Description: Displays the effective negative speed/velocity limit.

p1088[0...n] CI: Speed limit negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1086[0]

Description: Sets the signal source for the speed/velocity limit of the negative direction.

p1091[0...n] Skip speed 1 / Skip speed 1

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min]

Description: Sets the skip speed/velocity 1.

Dependency: Refer to: p1092, p1093, p1094, p1101
Note: The skip (suppression) speeds can be used to prevent the effects of mechanical resonance.

p1092[0...n] Skip speed 2 / Skip speed 2

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min]

Description: Sets the skip speed/velocity 2.

Dependency: Refer to: p1091, p1093, p1094, p1101

1-194  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1093[0...n] Skip speed 3 / Skip speed 3

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min]
Description: Sets the skip speed/velocity 3.
Dependency: Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1094, p1101

p1094[0...n] Skip speed 4 / Skip speed 4

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min]

Description: Sets the skip speed/velocity 4.

Dependency: Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1101

p1101[0...n] Skip speed bandwidth / Skip_n bandwidth

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [1/min] 210000.000 [1/min] 0.000 [1/min]
Description: Sets the bandwidth for the skip speeds/velocities 1 to 4.
Dependency: Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1094
Note: The setpoint (reference) speeds are skipped (suppressed) in the range of the skip speed +/-p1101.
Steady-state operation is not possible in the skipped (suppressed) speed range. The skip (suppression) range is
skipped.
Example:
p1091 = 600 and p1101 = 20 --> setpoint speeds of between 580 and 620 [RPM] are skipped.

p1110[0...n] BI: Inhibit negative direction / Inhibit negative

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2505
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source to disable the negative direction.

Dependency: Refer to: p1111

p1111[0...n] BI: Inhibit positive direction / Inhibit positive

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2505
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source to disable the positive direction.

Dependency: Refer to: p1110

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-195

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1112 CO: Speed setpoint after minimum limiting / n_set n. min_lim

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]
Description: Displays the speed / velocity setpoint after the minimum limiting.
Dependency: Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1094, p1101

p1113[0...n] BI: Direction reversal / Direction reversal

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2442,
2505
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source to reverse the motor direction (of rotation).
Dependency: Refer to: r1198

r1114 CO: Setpoint after the direction of rotation limit / Setpt after limit
SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1550,
3040, 3050
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]

Description: Displays the speed/velocity setpoint after the changeover and limiting the direction.

p1115 Ramp-function generator selection / RFG selection

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1550,
3080
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0

Description: Sets the ramp-function generator type.

Values: 0: Basic ramp-function generator
1: Extended ramp-function generator
Note: Another ramp-function generator type can only be selected when the motor is at a standstill.

r1119 CO: Ramp-function generator setpoint at the input / RFG setpt at input
SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1550,
1750, 3050, 3060, 3070, 8010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]

Description: Displays the setpoint at the input of the ramp-function generator.

Note: The setpoint is influenced by other functions, e.g. skip (suppressed) speeds, minimum and maximum limits.

1-196  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1120[0...n] Ramp-function generator ramp-up time / RFG ramp-up time

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 1
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3060,
3070
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 999999.000 [s] 10.000 [s]

Description: The drive is accelerated from standstill (setpoint = 0) up to the maximum speed/velocity (p1082) in this time.
Dependency: Refer to: p1082

p1121[0...n] Ramp-function generator ramp-down time / RFG ramp-down time

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3060,
3070
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 999999.000 [s] 10.000 [s]

Description: The drive is decelerated from the maximum speed / velocity (p1082) down to standstill (setpoint = 0) in this time.
Dependency: Refer to: p1082

p1122[0...n] BI: Bypass ramp-function generator / Bypass RFG

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2505
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for bypassing the ramp generator (ramp-up and ramp-down times = 0).
Note: For VECTOR in sensorless operation, it is not permissible that the ramp-function generator is bypassed.

p1130[0...n] Ramp-function generator initial rounding-off time / RFG t_start_round

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3070
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 0.000 [s]

Description: Sets the initial rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator. The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down.
Note: Rounding-off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system.

p1131[0...n] Ramp-function generator final rounding-off time / RFG t_end_delay

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3070
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 0.000 [s]

Description: Sets the final rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator. The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down.
Note: Rounding-off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-197

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1134[0...n] Ramp-function generator rounding-off type / RFG round-off type

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3070
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Sets the smoothed response to the OFF1 command or the reduced setpoint for the extended ramp-function gener-
ator.
Values: 0: Cont. smoothing
1: Discontininuous smoothing
Dependency: No effect, up to initial rounding-off time p1130) > 0 s.
Note: Rounding-off is always active for continuous smoothing. Overshoots may occur.

p1135[0...n] OFF3 ramp-down time / RFG OFF3 t_ramp-dn

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3060,
3070
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 600.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-down time from the maximum speed down to zero speed for the OFF3 command.
Note: This time can be exceeded if the DC-link voltage reaches its maximum value.

p1136[0...n] OFF3 initial rounding-off time / RFGOFF3 t_strt_rnd

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3070,
3080
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 0.000 [s]

Description: Sets the initial rounding-off time for OFF3 for the extended ramp generator.

p1137[0...n] OFF3 final rounding-off time / RFG OFF3 t_end_del

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3070
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 30.000 [s] 0.000 [s]

Description: Sets the final rounding-off time for OFF3 for the extended ramp generator.

1-198  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1140[0...n] BI: Enables the ramp-function generator / Enable RFG

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2442,
2443, 2501
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 4 (operating condition/disable ramp-function generator).
Dependency: Refer to: p1141, p1142
Note: Bit 4 = 0: Inhibits the ramp-function generator (the ramp-function generator output is set to zero)
Bit 4 = 1: Operating condition (the ramp-function generator can be enabled)

p1140 BI: Enables the ramp-function generator / Enable RFG

TM41 Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 4 (operating condition/disable ramp-function generator).
Dependency: Refer to: p1141, p1142
Note: Bit 4 = 0: Inhibits the ramp-function generator (the ramp-function generator output is set to zero)
Bit 4 = 1: Operating condition (the ramp-function generator can be enabled)

p1141[0...n] BI: Start ramp-function generator / Start RFG

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2442,
2443, 2501
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 5 (enables ramp-function generator/ stops ramp-function generator)
Dependency: Refer to: p1140, p1142
Note: Bit 5 = 0: Stop the ramp-function generator (the ramp-function generator output is frozen)
Bit 5 = 1: Enables the ramp-function generator

p1141 BI: Start ramp-function generator / Start RFG

TM41 Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 5 (enables ramp-function generator/ stops ramp-function generator)
Dependency: Refer to: p1140, p1142
Note: Bit 5 = 0: Stop the ramp-function generator (the ramp-function generator output is frozen)
Bit 5 = 1: Enables the ramp-function generator

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-199

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1142[0...n] BI: Enable speed setpoint / Enable n_set

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2442,
2443, 2501
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 6 (enables setpoint/disable setpoint).
Dependency: Refer to: p1140, p1141
Note: Bit 6 = 0: Inhibits the setpoint (the ramp-function generator input is set to zero)
Bit 6 = 1: Enables the setpoint

p1142 BI: Enable speed setpoint / Enable n_set

TM41 Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 6 (enables setpoint/disable setpoint).
Dependency: Refer to: p1140, p1141
Note: Bit 6 = 0: Inhibits the setpoint (the ramp-function generator input is set to zero)
Bit 6 = 1: Enables the setpoint

p1143[0...n] BI: Ramp-function generator, accept setting value / Accept RFG set val
SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 3070
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for accepting the setting value of the ramp-function generator.
Dependency: The signal source for the ramp-function generator setting value is set using parameters.
Refer to: p1144
Note: 0/1 signal:
The ramp-function generator output is immediately (without delay) set to the setting value of the ramp-function gen-
erator.
1 signal:
The setting value of the ramp-function generator is effective.
1/0 signal:
The input value of the ramp-function generator is effective. The ramp-function generator output is adapted to the
input value using the ramp-up time or the ramp-down time.
0 signal:
The input value of the ramp-function generator is effective.

1-200  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1144[0...n] CI: Ramp-function generator setting value / RFG setting value

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 3070
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the ramp-function generator setting value.
Dependency: The signal source for accepting the setting value is set using parameters.
Refer to: p1143

p1145[0...n] Ramp-function generator tracking intensity. / RFG track intens

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3080
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 50.0 1.3
Description: Sets the ramp-function generator tracking.
The output value of the ramp-function generator is tracked (corrected) corresponding to the maximum possible
drive acceleration. The reference value is the deviation at the speed/velocity controller input that is necessary to
ensure that the motor runs-up at the torque/force limit.
Recommenda- p1145 = 0.0:
tion: This value de-activates the ramp-function generator tracking.
p1145 = 0.0 ... 1.0:
Generally, these values are not practical. They cause the motor to accelerate below its torque limit. The lower the
selected value, the greater the margin between the controller and torque limit at run-up.
p1145 > 1.0:
The greater the value, the higher the permissible deviation between the speed setpoint and speed actual value.
Note: In the V/f mode, the ramp-function generator tracking is not active.
For SERVO with V/f operation, the following applies:
The complete ramp-function generator is not active, i.e. ramp-up and ramp-down time = 0.

p1148[0...n] Ramp-function generator, tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down active /

RFG tol HL/RL act
SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3060,
3070
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [1/min] 1000.00 [1/min] 19.80 [1/min]

Description: Sets the tolerance value for the status of the ramp-function generator (ramp-up active, ramp-down active).
If the input of the ramp-function generator does not change in comparison to the output by more than the entered
tolerance time, then the status bits "ramp-up active" and "ramp-down active" are not influenced.
Dependency: Refer to: r1199

r1150 CO: Ramp-function generator speed setpoint at the output / RFG n_set at outp
SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1550,
3060, 3070, 3080
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]
Description: Displays the setpoint at the output of the ramp-function generator.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-201

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1152 BI: Setpoint 2 enable / Setpt 2 enable

SERVO (Extended Can be changed: T Access level: 3
brk), VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2711
(Extended brk)
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 899.15
Description: Sets the signal source for "setpoint 2 enable".

p1155[0...n] CI: Speed controller speed setpoint 1 / n_ctrl n_set 1

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 1550,
3080
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for the speed/velocity setpoint 1 of the speed/velocity controller.
Dependency: The effectiveness of this setpoint depends on, e.g. STW1.4 and STW1.6.
Refer to: r0898, p1140, p1142, p1160, r1170

p1155 CI: Incremental encoder emulation speed setpoint 1 / Enc_emulat n_set 1

TM41 Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9674
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for speed setpoint 1 of the incremental encoder emulation.
Dependency: The effectiveness of this setpoint depends on control word 1 (STW1).
Refer to: r0898

p1160[0...n] CI: Speed controller speed setpoint 2 / n_ctrl n_set 2

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 1550,
3080
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for the speed/velocity setpoint 2 of the speed/velocity controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p1155, r1170

r1169 CO: Speed controller, speed setpoints 1 and 2 / n_ctrl n_set 1/2
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]

Description: Displays the speed/velocity setpoint after the addition of the speed/velocity setpoint 1 (p1155) and the speed/veloc-
ity setpoint 2 (p1160).
Dependency: Refer to: p1155, p1160

1-202  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1170 CO: Speed controller, setpoint sum / n_ctr setp sum

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1550,
1590, 3080, 5020
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]

Description: Displays the speed/velocity setpoint after selecting the ramp-function generator and adding the speed/velocity set-
point 1 (p1155) and speed/velocity setpoint 2 (p1160).
Dependency: Refer to: r1150, p1155, p1160

p1189[0...n] Speed setpoint configuration / n_ctrl config

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3080
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 0011 bin 0011 bin

Description: Sets the configuration for the speed/velocity setpoint.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Interpolation ramp-fct gen/speed controller No Yes 3080
active
01 Interpol. op-loop ctrl /speed controller active No Yes 3080

p1189 Incremental encoder emulation configuration / Enc_emulat config

TM41 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 9674
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 0010 bin 0010 bin

Description: Sets the configuration for the incremental encoder emulation.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
01 Interpol. op-loop ctrl /speed controller active No Yes 9674

p1190 CI: DSC position deviation XERR / DSC XERR

SERVO Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1550,
3090
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for the position deviation XERR for DSC (position controller output of the higher-level con-
trol).
Dependency: Clock synchronous PROFIBUS must be active.
The position controller gain factor (KPC), the position deviation (XERR) and the speed setpoint (N_SOLL_B) must
be included in the setpoint telegram.
At least the encoder interface (Gx_XIST1) must be included in the actual value telegram.
The position actual value used for the internal position controller can be selected using p1192.
Refer to: p1191, p1192
Note: DSC: Dynamic servo control

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-203

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1191 CI: DSC position controller gain KPC / DSC KPC

SERVO Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1550,
3090
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for the position controller gain KPC for DSC.
Dependency: Refer to: p1190
Note: DSC: Dynamic servo control

p1192[0...n] DSC enc selection / DSC enc selection

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3090
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 3 1

Description: Sets the number of the encoder used for DSC.

Values: 1: Encoder 1 (motor encoder)
2: Encoder 2
3: Encoder 3
Note: DSC: Dynamic servo control
Value 1 corresponds to encoder 1 (motor encoder); the encoder data set is assigned via p0187.
Value 2 corresponds to encoder 2; the encoder data set is assigned via p0188.
Value 3 corresponds to encoder 3; the encoder data set is assigned via p0189.

p1193[0...n] DSC encoder adaptation factor / DSC encodAdaptFact

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3090
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 1000000.000 1.000
Description: Sets the factor to adapt the encoder when using either encoder 2 or 3 for DSC.
The factor sets the ratio of the pulse difference between the motor encoder and the selected encoder for the same
distance moved through. This factor takes into account gear ratios, differences in the number of encoder pulses,
etc.
Dependency: Refer to: p1192
Note: Example:
Encoder 1: Motor encoder with 2048 pulses/revolution, ballscrew with 10 mm/revolution pitch
Encoder 2: Linear scale with 20 µm grid division as direct measuring system
p1193 = number of pulses, encoder 1 per motor revolution / number of pulses, encoder 2 per motor revolution
p1193 = 2048 / (10 mm / 20 µm) = 4.096

1-204  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1197 Fixed speed setpoint, actual number / n_set_fixed No act

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the number of the selected fixed speed/velocity setpoint.
Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023
Note: If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).

r1198 CO/BO: Control word setpoint channel / STW setpoint chan

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1530,
2505
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the control word for the setpoint channel.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Fixed setp. bit 0 No Yes -
01 Fixed setp. bit 1 No Yes -
02 Fixed setp. bit 2 No Yes -
03 Fixed setp. bit 3 No Yes -
05 Inhibit negative direction No Yes -
06 Inhibit positive direction No Yes -
11 Direction reversal No Yes -
13 Motorized potentiometer, raise No Yes -
14 Motorized potentiometer, lower No Yes -
15 Bypass ramp-function generator No Yes -

r1199 CO/BO: Ramp-function generator status word / RFG ZSW

SERVO (Setp), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1550,
3080, 8010
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the status word for the ramp-function generator (RFG).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Ramp-up active No Yes -
01 Ramp-down active No Yes -
02 Ramp-function generator active No Yes -
03 Ramp-function generator set No Yes -
04 Ramp-function generator held No Yes -
05 Ramp-function generator tracking active No Yes -
06 Maximum limit active No Yes -
Note: Re bit 02:
The bit is an OR logic operation - bit 00 and bit 01.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-205

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1200[0...n] FlyRest oper mode / FlyRest oper mode

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 1690
P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 6 0
Description: Sets the operating mode for flying restart.
The flying restart allows the drive converter to be powered-up while the motor is still rotating. In so doing, the drive
converter output frequency is changed until the actual motor speed/velocity is found.. The motor then accelerates
up to the setpoint at the ramp generator setting.
Values: 0: FlyRestart inactive
1: Flying restart is always active (start in the setpoint direction)
2: Flying restart is active after power-on, fault, OFF2 (start in the setpoint direction)
3: Flying restart is active after fault, OFF2 (start in the setpoint direction)
4: Flying restart is always active (start only in the setpoint direction)
5: Flying restart is active after power-on, fault, OFF2 (start only in the setpoint direction)
6: Flying restart is active after fault,OFF2 (start only in the setpoint direction)
Dependency: A differentiation is made between flying restart for V/f control and for vector control (p1300).
Flying restart, V/f control: p1202, p1203, r1204
Flying restart for closed-loop vector control: p1202, p1203, r1205
Notice: The "flying restart" function must be used in cases where the motor is possibly still running (e.g. after a brief line
supply interruption) or is being driven by the load. The system might otherwise shut down as a result of overcurrent.
It does not make sense to use "flying restart" together with the "motor holding brake function" (p1215 > 0) because
then the flying restart will always be realized with the motor stationary.
Note: The flying restart takes, as a maximum, twice as long as the motor excitation time (p0346).
For p1200 = 2, 5, the following applies:
The "power-on" is the first power-on operation after the drive system has run-up. This is practical for motors with a
high-inertia load.
For p1200 = 1, 2, 3, the following applies: The search is made in both directions.
For p1200 = 4, 5, 6, the following applies: Search performed in the setpoint direction only.

p1202[0...n] FlyRest srch curr / FlyRest srch curr

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
10 [%] 400 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets the search current for the "flying restart" function. The value is referred to the motor magnetizing current.
Dependency: Refer to: r0331
Note: Reducing the search current can improve the flying restart performance (if the system moment of inertia is not very
high).

p1203[0...n] Flying restart search rate factor / FlyRst v_Srch Fact

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
10 [%] 400 [%] 100 [%]

Description: The value influences the rate at which the output frequency is changed during a flying restart . A higher value
results in a longer search time.
Notice: For vector control, a value that is too low or too high can cause flying restart to become unstable.

1-206  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1204 CO/BO: Flying restart, V/F control status / FlyRestrt Uf stat

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status for checking and monitoring flying restart states in the V/f control mode.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Current impressed No Yes -
01 No current flow No Yes -
02 Voltage input No Yes -
03 Voltage reduced No Yes -
04 Start ramp-function generator No Yes -
05 Wait for execution No Yes -
06 Slope filter act No Yes -
07 Positive gradient No Yes -
08 Current < threshld No Yes -
09 Current minimum No Yes -
10 Search in the positive direction No Yes -
11 Stop after positive direction No Yes -
12 Stop after negative direction No Yes -
13 No result No Yes -

r1205 CO/BO: Flying restart, vector control status / FlyRestrtVectStat

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the status for checking and monitoring flying restart states in the vector control mode.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Save the angle of the speed adaptation cir- No Yes -
cuit
01 Set speed adaptation circuit gain to 0 No Yes -
02 Enable Isd channel No Yes -
03 Speed control switched-in No Yes -
04 Quadrature arm switched-in No Yes -
05 Special transformation active No Yes -
06 Set I comp of the speed adaptation circuit to No Yes -
0
07 Current control on No Yes -
08 Isd_set = 0 A No Yes -
09 Reserved No Yes -
10 Search in the positive direction No Yes -
11 Search Started No Yes -
12 Current impressed No Yes -
13 Search interrupted No Yes -
14 Deviation of the speed adaptation circuit = 0 No Yes -
15 Speed control activated No Yes -

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-207

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1210 Automatic restart, mode / AR mode

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 6 0
Description: Sets the automatic restart mode (AR).
Values: 0: Disables automatic restart
1: Acknowledges all faults without restarting
4: Automatic restart after line supply failure, no additional start attempts
6: Restart after any fault with additional start attempts
Dependency: The automatic restart requires an active ON command, e.g. that is available at a digital input.
If, for p1210 = 4, 6 there is no active ON command, then the automatic restart is interrupted.
Refer to: p0840, p0857
Refer to: F30003
Cautiont: A change is only accepted and made if the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1).
For p1210 > 1, the motor is automatically started.
Note: For brief line supply failures, the motor shaft can still be rotating when restarting. In order to restart while the motor
shaft is still rotating, the "flying restart" function should be activated using p1200.
For p1210 = 4, an automatic restart is only carried-out if only fault F30003 has occurred at the motor module.
For p1210 = 1, fault F07320 is not generated if the one and only acknowledgement attempt was not successful
because there is a permanent fault condition.

p1211 Automatic restart, start attempts / AR start attempts

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 10 3

Description: Sets the absolute number of start attempts for the automatic restart function when any faults are automatically
acknowledged (p1210 = 6).
Dependency: This parameter setting is active for p1210 = 6.
Refer to: p1210, r1214
Cautiont: A change is only accepted and made if the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1).
Note: A start attempt begins after the fault has been acknowledged and the line supply voltage is available. The start
attempt is exited if the motor was magnetized and an additional delay time of 1 s has expired.
If a fault occurs between the start of the delay time up to the end of the magnetizing time, then the fault is acknowl-
edged and after the delay time p1212 has expired, a new start attempt is initiated. Fault F07320 is output if the
number of parameterized start attempts has been reached. After a successful start attempt, i.e. a fault/error has not
occurred up to the end of the magnetizing phase, the start counter is again reset. For a fault that has re-occurred -
the parameterized number of start attempts is again available.

1-208  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1212 Automatic restart, delay time start attempts / WEA t_wait start
VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.5 [s] 600.0 [s] 1.0 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time up to restart. The delay time is also effective between two starting attempts.
Dependency: This parameter setting is active for p1210 = 1, 4, 6.
Refer to: p1210, r1214
Cautiont: A change is only accepted and made if the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1).
Note: The faults are automatically acknowledged after half of the waiting time has expired.

p1213 Automatic restart, monitoring time line supply return / WEA t_mon line sup
VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [s] 1999.0 [s] 0.0 [s]
Description: Sets the monitoring time of the automatic restart (AR).
Dependency: Refer to: p1210, r1214
Cautiont: A change is only accepted and made if the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1).
Note: The monitoring time starts when the faults are detected. If the automatic acknowledgements are not successful, the
monitoring time runs again. If, after the monitoring time has expired, the drive has still not successfully restarted
(the motor must have been magnetized), then fault F07320 is output.
The monitoring is de-activated with p1213 = 0. If p1213 is set lower than the sum of p1212 and the magnetization
time r346, then fault F07320 is generated at each restart.

r1214 CO/BO: Automatic restart, status / AR status

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Automatic restart (AR) status word.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Initialization No Yes -
01 Wait for alarm No Yes -
02 Auto restart act. No Yes -
04 Acknowledge alarms No Yes -
05 Restart No Yes -
06 Wait time running No Yes -
07 Fault No Yes -
12 Start count. bit 0 Off On -
13 Start count. bit 1 Off On -
14 Start count. bit 2 Off On -
15 Start count. bit 3 Off On -

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-209

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1215 Motor holding brake configuration / Brake config

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 2701
P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
Description: Sets the holding brake configuration.
Values: 0: No motor holding brake being used
1: Motor holding brake acc. to sequential control
2: Motor holding brake always open
3: Motor holding braking can be parameterized via BICO just like the sequential control, brake connection
Dependency: Refer to: p1216, p1217, p1226, p1227
Note: If the configuration is set to "no holding brake present" at run-up, then the motor holding brake will be automatically
identified. If a motor holding brake is detected, the configuration is set to "motor holding brake as for sequential con-
trol".
if an external motor holding brake is being used, then p1215 should be set to 3 and r0899.12 should be intercon-
nected as control signal.
When the function module "extended brake control" is activated (r0108.14 = 1), r1229.1 should be interconnected
as control signal.
The parameter can only be set to zero when the pulses are inhibited.

p1216 Motor holding brake, opening time / Brake t_open

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 2701
P-Group: Functions Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 100 [ms]

Description: Sets the time to open the motor holding brake.

After controlling the holding brake (opens), the speed/velocity setpoint remains at zero for this time. After this, the
speed/velocity setpoint is enabled.
Recommenda- This time should be set longer than the actual opening time of the brake. This ensures that the drive cannot accel-
tion: erate when the brake is applied.
Dependency: Refer to: p1215, p1217

p1217 Motor holding brake closing time / Brake t_close

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 2701
P-Group: Functions Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 100 [ms]

Description: Sets the time to apply the motor holding brake.

After OFF1 or OFF3 and the holding brake is controlled (the brake closes), then the drive remains closed-loop con-
trolled for this time stationary with a speed setpoint/velocity setpoint of zero. The pulses are cancelled when the
time expires.
Recommenda- This time should be set longer than the actual closing time of the brake. This ensures that the pulses are only can-
tion: celed after the brake has closed.
Dependency: Refer to: p1215, p1216, p1226, p1227
Notice: If the selected closing time is too short with respect to the actual closing time of the brake, then the load can sag.
If the closing time is selected to be too long with respect to the actual closing time of the brake, the control works
against the brake and therefore reduces its lifetime.

1-210  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1218[0...1] BI: Open motor holding brake / Open brake

SERVO (Extended Can be changed: T Access level: 2
brk), VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2707
(Extended brk)
P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for a conditional opening of the motor holding brake.
Note: [0]: Signal, open brake, AND logic operation, input 1
[1]: Signal, open brake, AND logic operation, input 2

p1219[0...3] BI: Immediately close motor holding brake / Close brake

SERVO (Extended Can be changed: T Access level: 2
brk), VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2707
(Extended brk)
P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - [0] 0
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 1229.9

Description: Sets the signal source for an unconditional (immediate) closing of the motor holding brake.
Dependency: Refer to: p1275
Note: [0]: Signal, immediately close brake, inversion via p1275.0
[1]: Signal, immediately close brake, inversion via p1275.1
[2]: Signal, immediately close brake
[3]: Signal, immediately close brake - refer to the factory setting
These four signals form an OR logic operation.

p1220 CI: Open motor holding brake, signal source, threshold / Open brake thresh
SERVO (Extended Can be changed: T Access level: 2
brk), VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2707
(Extended brk)
P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for the command "open brake".
Dependency: Refer to: p1221, r1229, p1277

p1221 Open motor holding brake, threshold / Open brake thresh

SERVO (Extended Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
brk), VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 2707
(Extended brk)
P-Group: Functions Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the threshold value for the command "open brake".
Dependency: Refer to: p1220, r1229, p1277

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-211

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1222 BI: Motor holding brake, feedback signal, brake closed / Brake feedb closed
SERVO (Extended Can be changed: T Access level: 2
brk), VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2711
(Extended brk)
P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the feedback signal "brake closed".
For motor holding brakes with feedback signal, the signal "brake closed" can be activated using p1275.5 = 1.
Dependency: Refer to: p1223, p1275
Note: 1 signal: Brake closed.
When braking with 1 feedback signal, the inverted feedback signal is connected to the BICO input for the second
feedback signal (p1223).

p1223 BI: Motor holding brake, feedback signal, brake open / Brake feedb open
SERVO (Extended Can be changed: T Access level: 2
brk), VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2711
(Extended brk)
P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for the feedback signal "brake open".
For motor holding brakes with feedback signal, the signal "brake open" can be activated using p1275.5 = 1.
Dependency: Refer to: p1222, p1275
Note: 1 signal: Brake open.
When braking with 1 feedback signal, the inverted feedback signal is connected to the BICO input for the second
feedback signal (p1222).

p1224[0...3] BI: Close motor holding brake at standstill / Brk close standst
SERVO (Extended Can be changed: T Access level: 2
brk), VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2704
(Extended brk)
P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for close brake at standstill.

Dependency: Refer to: p1275
Note: [0]: Signal, close brake at standstill, inversion via p1275.2
[1]: Signal, close brake at standstill, inversion via p1275.3
[2]: Signal, close brake at standstill
[3]: Signal, close brake at standstill
These four signals form an OR logic operation.

p1225 CI: Standstill detection, threshold value / Standstill thresh

SERVO (Extended Can be changed: T Access level: 2
brk), VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2704
(Extended brk)
P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 63[0]

Description: Sets the signal source "threshold value" for the standstill identification.
Dependency: Refer to: p1226, p1228, r1229

1-212  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1226 Threshold for zero speed detection / n_standst n_thresh

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 2701
P-Group: Functions Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [1/min] 210000.0 [1/min] 20.0 [1/min]
Description: Sets the speed/velocity threshold for the standstill identification.
Acts on the actual value and setpoint monitoring.
When braking with OFF1 or OFF3, when the threshold is fallen below, standstill is identified.
The following applies when the brake control is activated:
When the threshold is fallen below, the brake control is started and the system waits for the brake closing time in
p1217. The pulses are then canceled.
if the brake control is not activated, the following applies:
When the threshold is fallen below, the pulses are cancelled and the drive coasts down.
Dependency: Refer to: p1215, p1216, p1217, p1227
Note: Standstill is detected if the actual speed drops below the speed threshold in p1226 or if the monitoring time (p1227)
- started when speed setpoint <= speed threshold (p1226) - has expired.
The actual value sensing is subject to measuring noise. For this reason, standstill cannot be detected if the speed
threshold is too low.

p1227 Zero speed detection monitoring time / n_standst t_monit

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 2701
P-Group: Functions Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 300.000 [s] 4.000 [s]
Description: Sets the monitoring time for the standstill identification.
When braking with lOFF1 or OFF3, standstill is identified after this time has expired.
After this, the brake control is started, the system waits for the closing time in p1217 and then the pulses are can-
celled.
Dependency: Refer to: p1215, p1216, p1217, p1226
Note: Standstill is detected if the actual speed drops below the speed threshold in p1226 or if the monitoring time (p1227)
- started when speed setpoint <= speed threshold (p1226) - has expired.
For p1227 = 300.000 s, the following applies:
The monitoring is deactivated.
This is the pre-setting (default setting) for SINAMICS G.
For p1227 = 0.000 s, the following applies:
With OFF1 or OFF3 and a ramp-down time = 0, the pulses are immediately cancelled and the motor "coasts" down.

p1228 Pulse cancellation delay time / Pulse canc t_del

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 2701,
2704
P-Group: Functions Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 10.000 [s] 0.000 [s]

Description: Sets the delay time for pulse cancellation.

After OFF1 or OFF3 and zero speed detection, the system waits for this time to expire and the pulses are then can-
celed.
Dependency: Refer to: p1226, p1227

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-213

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1229 CO/BO: Motor holding brake status word / Brake ZSW

SERVO (Extended Can be changed: - Access level: 2
brk), VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
(Extended brk)
P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status word for the motor holding brake.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
01 Command, open brake (continuous signal) No Yes 2711
03 Pulse enable, expanded brake control No Yes 2711
04 Brake does not open No Yes 2711
05 Brake does not close No Yes 2711
06 Brake threshold exceeded No Yes 2707
07 Brake threshold fallen below No Yes 2704
08 Brake monitoring time expired No Yes 2704
09 Pulse or speed controller inhibited No Yes 2707
10 Brake OR logic operation result No Yes 2707
11 Brake AND logic operation result No Yes 2707

p1240 Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration / Vdc_ctrl config

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 6 0

Description: Sets the configuration of the controller or monitoring for the DC link voltage (Vdc).
Values: 0: Inhib Vdc ctrl
1: Enables Vdc_max controller
2: Enables Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering)
3: Enables Vdc_min controller and Vdc_max controller
4: Activates Vdc_max monitoring
5: Activates Vdc_min monitoring
6: Activates Vdc_min monitoring and Vdc_max monitoring
Dependency: Refer to: p1244, p1248, p1250
Note: p1240 = 1, 3:
When the upper DC link voltage threshold is reached (p1244), then the following applies:
- the Vdc_max controller limits the regenerative energy in order that the DC link voltage is kept below the maximum
DC link voltage when braking.
- when other drives regenerate into the DC link, then the Vdc_max controller causes the motor to accelerate.
p1240 = 2, 3:
When the lower DC link voltage threshold is reached (p1244), the following applies:
- the Vdc_min controller limits the energy taken from the DC link in order to keep the DC link voltage above the min-
imum DC link voltage when accelerating.
- the motor is braked in order to use its kinetic energy to buffer the DC link.
p1240 = 4, 5, 6:
When the threshold in p1244 or p1268 is reached, the DC link voltage monitoring initiates a fault with a response
and therefore reduces additional negative effects on the DC link voltage.

1-214  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1240[0...n] Vdc controller configuration / Vdc_ctrl config

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 1
Description: Sets the controller configuration of the DC link voltage (Vdc controller) in the closed-loop control mode.
Values: 0: Inhib Vdc ctrl
1: Enables Vdc_max controller
2: Enables Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering)
3: Enables Vdc_min controller and Vdc_max controller
Recommenda- If fault F07403 is output, then proceed as follows:
tion: - increase the dynamic factor (p1247).
- if this fault is still output: Increase the switch-on level (p1245).
Dependency: Refer to: p1245
Refer to: F07403
Notice: An excessively high value in p1245 can possibly negatively influence the normal operation of the drive.
Note: p1240 = 1, 3:
When the DC link voltage limit, specified for the motor module is reached, the following applies:
- the Vdc_max controller limits the regenerative energy in order that the DC link voltage is kept below the maximum
DC link voltage when braking.
- the ramp-down times are automatically increased.
p1240 = 2, 3:
When the switch-in threshold of the Vdc_min controller is reached (p1245), the following applies:
- the Vdc_min controller limits the energy taken from the DC link in order to keep the DC link voltage above the min-
imum DC link voltage when accelerating.
- the motor is braked in order to use its kinetic energy to buffer the DC link.

r1242 Vdc_min controller switch-in level / Vdc_max on_level

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions Units group: VOLTAGE_DC Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]

Description: Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller.

If p1254 = 0 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = off), then the following applies:
AC/AC drive units: r1242 = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * V_line supply = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * p0210 (supply voltage)
DC/AC drive units: r1242 = 1.15 * Vdc = 1.15 * p0210 (supply voltage)
If p1254 = 1 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = on), then the following applies:
r1242 = Vdc_max - 50.0 V (Vdc_max: overvoltage threshold of the power module)

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-215

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1243[0...n] Vdc_max controller dynamic factor / Vdc_max dyn_factor

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 [%] 1000 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets the dynamic factor for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc_max controller).
100 % means that p1250, p1251 and p1252 (gain, integral-action time and derivative-action time) are used corre-
sponding to their basic settings and based on a theoretical controller optimization.
If subsequent optimization is required, then this can be realized using the dynamic factor. In this case p1250,
p1251, p1252 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1243.
If several modules are connected to the DC link, then the dynamic factor must be increased corresponding to the
ratio of the additional capacitances to the capacitance of the module involved.
Note: The pre-setting of the dynamic factor is based on the power modules connected at DRIVE-CLiQ. It is assumed that
the power module, connected via DRIVE-CLiQ is also electrically connected to the DC link. If this is not the case,
then the dynamic factor must be optimized manually.

p1244 DC link voltage threshold, upper / Vdc upper thresh

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: VOLTAGE_DC Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
400 [V] 800 [V] 750 [V]

Description: Sets the upper threshold for the DC link voltage.

For p1240 = 1, 3, this threshold is used as limit setpoint for the Vdc_max controller.
For p1240 = 4, 6, for DC link voltages above this threshold, an appropriate fault is output.
Dependency: Refer to: p1240, p1248, p1250

p1245[0...n] Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min on_level

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
65 [%] 115 [%] 76 [%]
Description: Sets the switch-in level for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering).
The value is obtained as follows:
AC/AC drive units: p1245[V] = p1245[%] * sqrt(2) * p0210
DC/AC drive units: p1245[V] = p1245[%] * p0210
Dependency: Refer to: p0210
Warning! An excessively large value may adversely influence normal drive operation.

r1246 Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min on_level

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions Units group: VOLTAGE_DC Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]

Description: Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering)

1-216  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1247[0...n] Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min dyn_factor

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 [%] 10000 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets the dynamic factor for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering).
100 % means that p1250, p1251 and p1252 (gain, integral-action time and derivative-action time) are used corre-
sponding to their basic settings and based on a theoretical controller optimization.
If subsequent optimization is required, then this can be realized using the dynamic factor. In this case p1250,
p1251, p1252 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1247.
If several modules are connected to the DC link, then the dynamic factor must be increased corresponding to the
ratio of the additional capacitances to the capacitance of the module involved.
Note: The pre-setting of the dynamic factor is based on the power modules connected at DRIVE-CLiQ. It is assumed that
the power module, connected via DRIVE-CLiQ is also electrically connected to the DC link. If this is not the case,
then the dynamic factor must be optimized manually.

p1248 DC link voltage threshold, lower / Vdc lower thresh

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: VOLTAGE_DC Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
100 [V] 700 [V] 450 [V]

Description: Sets the lower threshold for the DC link voltage.

For p1240 = 2, 3, this threshold is used as limit setpoint for the Vdc_min controller.
For p1240 = 5, 6, for DC link voltages below this threshold, an appropriate fault is output.
Dependency: Refer to: p1240, p1244, p1250

p1250 Vdc controller proportional gain / Vdc_ctrl Kp

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions Units group: Unit selection: p0528
GAIN_VOLTAGE_CTRL
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [A/V] 10.00 [A/V] 1.00 [A/V]
Description: Sets the proportional gain for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).
Dependency: Refer to: p1240, p1244, p1248

p1250[0...n] Vdc controller proportional gain / Vdc_ctrl Kp

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 100.00 1.00

Description: Sets the proportional gain for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).
Dependency: The effective proportional gain is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor).
Note: The gain factor is proportional to the capacitance of the DC link. The parameter is preset to a value that is optimally
adapted to the capacitance of the individual motor module. The capacitances of the other power modules, which
are connected to the DC link, can be taken into account using the dynamic factor (p1247 or p1243).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-217

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1251[0...n] Vdc controller integral action time / Vdc_ctrl Tn

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral action time for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).
Dependency: The effective integral action time is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor).
Note: An integral action time is normally not required for single axis drives. For multi-axis drives on the other hand, it may
be possible to compensate for interference from other axes using the integral action time (integral component) . An
integral action time of 0 (default) de-activates the controller.

p1252[0...n] Vdc controller derivative-action time / Vdc_ctrl t_deriv.

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 0 [ms]

Description: Sets the derivative-action time constant for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).
Dependency: The effective derivative action time is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor).
Note: During controlled operation this parameter has no effect.

p1254 Vdc_max controller automatic ON level detection / Vdc_max SenseOnLev

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 1

Description: Activates/de-activates the automatic sensing of the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller.
Values: 0: Automatic detection disabled
1: Automatic detection enabled

p1255[0...n] Vdc_min controller time threshold / Vdc_min t_thresh

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 10000.000 [s] 0.000 [s]

Description: Sets the time threshold for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering). If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the
required response can be parameterized .
Prerequisite: p1256 = 1.
Dependency: Refer to: F07406

1-218  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1256[0...n] Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min response

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Sets the response for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
Values: 0: Buffer Vdc up to possible failure with undervoltage., n<p1257 -> F7405
1: Buffer Vdc up to possible failure with undervoltage, n<p1257 -> F7405, t>p1255 -> F7406
Dependency: Refer to: F07405, F07406

p1257[0...n] Vdc_min controller speed threshold / Vdc_min n_thresh

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [1/min] 210000.0 [1/min] 50.0 [1/min]

Description: Sets the speed threshold for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering). If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the
required response can be parameterized .

r1258 CO: Vdc controller output / Vdc_ctrl output

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the actual output of the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller)

p1275 Motor holding brake control word / Brake STW

SERVO (Extended Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
brk), VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
(Extended brk)
P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 0010 1111 bin 0000 bin

Description: Sets the control word for the motor holding brake.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Inverting BI: 1219[0] No Yes 2707
01 Inverting BI: 1219[1] No Yes 2707
02 Inverting BI: 1224[0] No Yes 2704
03 Inverting BI: 1224[1] No Yes 2704
05 Brake with feedback No Yes 2711

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-219

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1276 Motor holding brake, standstill detection, bypass / Brk standst bypass
SERVO (Extended Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
brk), VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 2704
(Extended brk)
P-Group: Functions Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 300.000 [s] 300.000 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time for closing the brake at standstill.
After this time has expired, if the "close brake at standstill" or OFF1/OFF3 is present, the brake is closed and the
pulses are cancelled.
For p1276 = 300.000 s, the timer is de-activated - this means that the timer output is always zero.

p1277 Motor holding brake, braking threshold delay exceeded / Del thresh exceed.
SERVO (Extended Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
brk), VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 2707
(Extended brk)
P-Group: Functions Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 300.000 [s] 0.000 [s]

Description: Sets the delay time for the signal "braking threshold exceeded" (BO: r1229.6).
Dependency: Refer to: p1220, p1221, r1229

p1279[0...3] BI: Motor holding brake, OR/AND logic operation / MHB OR AND
SERVO (Extended Can be changed: T Access level: 2
brk), VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2707
(Extended brk)
P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for the OR/AND logic operation.
Dependency: Refer to: r1229
Note: [0]: OR logic operation, input 1 --> the result is displayed in r1229.10.
[1]: OR logic operation, input 2 --> the result is displayed in r1229.10.
[2]: AND logic operation, input 1 --> the result is displayed in r1229.11.
[3]: AND logic operation, input 2 --> the result is displayed in r1229.11.

p1280[0...n] Vdc controller configuration (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl config

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 1690,
6320
P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 1

Description: Sets the configuration of the controller for the DC link voltage (Vdc controller) in the V/f operating mode.
Values: 0: Inhib Vdc ctrl
1: Enables Vdc_max controller
2: Enables Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering)
3: Enables Vdc_min controller and Vdc_max controller

1-220  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1282 Vdc_max controller switch-in level (V/f) / Vdc_max on_level

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions Units group: VOLTAGE_DC Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller.
If p1294 = 0 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = off), then the following applies:
AC/AC drive units: r1282 = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * V_line supply = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * p0210 (supply voltage)
DC/AC drive units: r1282 = 1.15 * Vdc = 1.15 * p0210 (supply voltage)
If p1294 = 1 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = on), then the following applies:
r1282 = Vdc_max - 50.0 V (Vdc_max: overvoltage threshold of the power module)

p1283[0...n] Vdc_max controller dynamic factor (V/f) / Vdc_max dyn_factor

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 [%] 10000 [%] 100 [%]

Description: Sets the dynamic factor for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc_max controller).
100 % means that p1290, p1291 and p1292 (gain, integral-action time and derivative-action time) are used corre-
sponding to their basic settings and based on a theoretical controller optimization.
If subsequent optimization is required, then this can be realized using the dynamic factor. In this case p1290,
p1291, p1292 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1283.
If several modules are connected to the DC link, then the dynamic factor must be increased corresponding to the
ratio of the additional capacitances to the capacitance of the module involved.
Note: The pre-setting of the dynamic factor is based on the power modules connected at DRIVE-CLiQ. It is assumed that
the power module, connected via DRIVE-CLiQ is also electrically connected to the DC link. If this is not the case,
then the dynamic factor must be optimized manually.

p1285[0...n] Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) (V/f) / Vdc_min on_level
VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
65 [%] 115 [%] 76 [%]
Description: Sets the switch-in level for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering).
The value is obtained as follows:
AC/AC drive units: p1285[V] = p1245[%] * sqrt(2) * p0210
DC/AC drive units: p1285[V] = p1245[%] * p0210

r1286 Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) (V/f) / Vdc_min on_level
VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions Units group: VOLTAGE_DC Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]

Description: Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering)

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-221

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1287[0...n] Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) (V/f) / Vdc_min dyn_factor
VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 [%] 10000 [%] 100 [%]
Description: Sets the dynamic factor for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering).
100 % means that p1290, p1291 and p1292 (gain, integral-action time and derivative-action time) are used corre-
sponding to their basic settings and based on a theoretical controller optimization.
If subsequent optimization is required, then this can be realized using the dynamic factor. In this case p1290,
p1291, p1292 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1287.
If several modules are connected to the DC link, then the dynamic factor must be increased corresponding to the
ratio of the additional capacitances to the capacitance of the module involved.
Note: The pre-setting of the dynamic factor is based on the power modules connected at DRIVE-CLiQ. It is assumed that
the power module, connected via DRIVE-CLiQ is also electrically connected to the DC link. If this is not the case,
then the dynamic factor must be optimized manually.

p1290[0...n] Vdc controller proportional gain (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl Kp

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 100.00 1.00

Description: Sets the proportional gain for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).
Note: The gain factor is proportional to the capacitance of the DC link. The parameter is preset to a value that is optimally
adapted to the capacitance of the individual motor module. The capacitances of the other power modules, which
are connected to the DC link, can be taken into account using the dynamic factor (p1287 or p1283).

p1291[0...n] Vdc controller integral action time (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl Tn

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 40 [ms]

Description: Sets the integral action time for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).

p1292[0...n] Vdc controller derivative-action time (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl t_deriv.

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 10 [ms]

Description: Sets the derivative-action time constant for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).

1-222  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1293[0...n] Vdc controller output limit (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl outp_lim

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Hz] 600.0 [Hz] 10.0 [Hz]
Description: Sets the output limit for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).

p1294 Vdc_max controller automatic detection ON signal level (V/f) / Vdc_max SenseOnLev
VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 1
Description: Activates/de-activates the automatic sensing of the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller.
Values: 0: Automatic detection disabled
1: Automatic detection enabled

p1295[0...n] Vdc_min controller time threshold (V/f) / Vdc_min t_thresh

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 10000.000 [s] 0.000 [s]

Description: Sets the time threshold for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering). If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the
required response can be parameterized .
Prerequisite: p1296 = 1.

p1296[0...n] Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) (V/f / Vdc_min response

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Sets the response for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
Values: 0: Buffer Vdc up to possible failure with undervoltage., n<p1257 -> F7405
1: Buffer Vdc up to possible failure with undervoltage, n<p1257 -> F7405, t>p1255 -> F7406

p1297[0...n] Vdc_min controller speed threshold (V/f) / Vdc_min n_thresh

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [1/min] 210000.0 [1/min] 50.0 [1/min]
Description: Sets the speed threshold for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering). If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the
required response can be parameterized .

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-223

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1298 CO: Vdc controller output (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl output

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]
Description: Displays the actual output of the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller)

p1300[0...n] Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode / Control mode

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 1590,
1690, 5060, 6300
P-Group: V/f control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 23 21

Description: Sets the open and closed loop control type of a drive.
Values: 0: V/f control with linear characteristic
1: V/f control with linear characteristic and FCC
2: V/f control with parabolic characteristic
3: V/f control with parameterizable characteristic
5: V/f control for drives requiring a precise frequency (e.g. textiles)
6: V/f control for drives requiring a precise frequency with FCC
19: V/f control with independent voltage setpoint
20: Speed control (sensorless)
21: Speed control (with encoder)
22: Torque control (sensorless)
23: Torque control (with encoder)
Dependency: Closed-loop speed control can be selected if, as operating mode (refer to p0108), at least closed-loop speed control
was selected.
Closed-loop torque control can only be selected if, as operating mode, at least the closed-loop torque/force control
was selected.
Only operation with V/f characteristic is possible if the rated motor speed is not entered (p0311).
Closed-loop speed or torque control (with encoder) cannot be selected if the encoder type is not entered (p0400).
For vector drives (refer to p0107):
A synchronous motor can only be operated in a V/f control mode (p1300 < 20).
Refer to: r0108, p0300, p0311, p0400, p1501
Note: Closed-loop speed or torque control (with encoder) cannot be selected if the encoder type is not entered (p0400).
The closed-loop torque control can only be changed over in operation (p1300 = 20 or 21) by selecting the closed-
loop speed control (p1501). At the changeover, the setting of p1300 does not change. In this case, the actual state
is displayed in r1407, bit 2 and bit 3.
In the servo control mode the following applies:
Only p1300 = 20, 21, 23 can be set.
For closed-loop vector control, the following applies:
Closed-loop speed control can be selected if, as operating mode (p0108), at least closed-loop speed control was
selected.
Closed-loop torque control can be selected if, as operating mode, at least the closed-loop torque/force control was
selected.
Only operation with V/f characteristic is possible if the rated motor speed is not entered (p0311).
A synchronous motor can only be operated in a V/f control mode (p1300 < 20).
During operation (the pulses enabled) the open-loop/closed-loop control mode cannot be changed by changing-
over drive data sets.

1-224  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1310[0...n] Voltage boost permanent / U_boost perm

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 1690,
6300
P-Group: V/f control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 250.0 [%] 50.0 [%]

Description: Defines the voltage boost as a [%] referred to the rated motor current (p0305).
The magnitude of the permanent voltage boost is reduced with increasing frequency so that at the rated motor fre-
quency, the rated motor voltage is present.
The magnitude of the boost in Volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows:
Voltage boost [V] = p0305 (rated motor current [A]) x p0350 (stator/primary section resistance [ohm]) x p1310 (per-
manent voltage boost [%]) / 100 %
At low output frequencies, there is only a low output voltage in order to maintain the motor flux. However, the output
voltage can be too low in order to achieve the following:
- magnetize the induction motor.
- hold the load.
- compensate for losses in the system.
This is the reason that the output voltage can be increased using p1310.
The voltage boost can be used for both linear as well as square-law V/f characteristics and is calculated as follows:
Voltage boost = p0305 (rated motor current x p0350 (stator/primary section resistance) x p1310 (permanent voltage
boost)
Dependency: Setting in p0640 (motor overload factor [%] limits the boost.
For closed-loop vector control, the permanent voltage boost (p1310) has no effect as the drive converter automati-
cally sets the optimum operating conditions.
Refer to: p1300, p1311, r1315
Notice: The voltage boost increases the motor temperature (particularly at zero speed).
Note: The voltage boost is only effective for V/f control (p1300).
The boost values are combined with one another if the permanent voltage boost (p1310) is used in conjunction with
other boost parameters (acceleration boost (p1311)).
However, these parameters are assigned the following priorities: p1310 > p1311

p1311[0...n] Voltage boost at acceleration / U_boost accelerate

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 1690,
6300
P-Group: V/f control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 250.0 [%] 0.0 [%]

Description: p1311 only results in a voltage boost when ramping-up and generates a supplementary torque/force for accelerat-
ing.
The voltage boost becomes effective for a positive setpoint increase and disappears as soon as the setpoint has
been reached.
The magnitude of the boost in volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows:
Voltage boost [V] = p0305 (rated motor current [A]) x p0350 (stator/primary section resistance [ohm]) x p1310 (per-
manent voltage boost [%]) / 100 %
Dependency: Setting in p0640 (motor overload factor [%] limits the boost.
Refer to: p1300, p1310, r1315
Notice: The voltage boost results in a higher motor temperature increase.
Note: The voltage boost when accelerating can improve the response to small, positive setpoint changes.
Prioritization of the voltage boosts: refer to p1310

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-225

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1315 Voltage boost total / U_boost total

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6300
P-Group: V/f control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Veff] - [Veff] - [Veff]
Description: Displays the total resulting voltage boost in volt (p1310 + p1311).

p1317[0...n] V/f control diagnostics activation / Uf diagn act

SERVO Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5730
P-Group: V/f control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Activates the V/f control with linear characteristic for diagnostic purposes.
0: Operation as set in p1300.
1: Activates the V/f control.
Values: 0: Off (p1300 eff)
1: On
Dependency: Refer to: p1318, p1319, p1326, p1327

p1318[0...n] V/f control ramp-up/ramp-down time / Uf t_rmp-up_rmp-dn

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5300
P-Group: V/f control Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 999999.000 [s] 10.000 [s]

Description: Sets the ramp-up and ramp-down time for the V/f control.
The ramp-function generator requires this time to reach the maximum speed (p1082) from zero.
Dependency: Refer to: p1317, p1319, p1326, p1327
Note: This ramp is used for stall protection and operates independently of any ramp-function generator that might have
been configured.

p1319[0...n] V/f control voltage at zero frequency / Uf U at f=0 Hz

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5300
P-Group: V/f control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Veff] 25.0 [Veff] 0.0 [Veff]

Description: The linear characteristic for the V/f control is defined by 0 Hz / p1319 and p1326 / p1327.
This parameter specifies the voltage for a frequency of 0 Hz.
Dependency: Activates the V/f control using p1317.
Refer to: p1317, p1326, p1327
Note: Linear interpolation is carried-out between the points 0 Hz / p1319 and p1326 / p1327.

1-226  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1320[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic frequency 1 / Uf char f1

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6300
P-Group: V/f control Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Hz] 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: The programmable characteristic for the V/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the first point along the characteristic.
Dependency: Selects the freely programmable characteristic using p1300 = 3.
Refer to: p1300, p1310, p1311, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327
Note: Linear interpolation is carried-out between the points 0 Hz / p1310, p1320 / p1321 ... p1326 / p1327.
The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable V/Hz characteristic.

p1321[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic voltage 1 / Uf char U1

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6300
P-Group: V/f control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Veff] 10000.0 [Veff] 0.0 [Veff]

Description: The programmable characteristic for the V/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the first point along the characteristic.
Dependency: Selects the freely programmable characteristic using p1300 = 3.
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327
Note: Linear interpolation is carried-out between the points 0 Hz / p1310, p1320 / p1321 ... p1326 / p1327.
The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable V/Hz characteristic.

p1322[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic frequency 2 / Uf char f2

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6300
P-Group: V/f control Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Hz] 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: The programmable characteristic for the V/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the second point along the characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327

p1323[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic voltage 2 / Uf char U2

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6300
P-Group: V/f control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Veff] 10000.0 [Veff] 0.0 [Veff]
Description: The programmable characteristic for the V/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the second point along the characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-227

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1324[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic frequency 3 / Uf char f3

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6300
P-Group: V/f control Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Hz] 3000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]
Description: The programmable characteristic for the V/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the third point along the characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1325, p1326, p1327

p1325[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic voltage 3 / Uf char U3

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6300
P-Group: V/f control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Veff] 10000.0 [Veff] 0.0 [Veff]
Description: The programmable characteristic for the V/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the third point along the characteristic.
Dependency: Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1326, p1327

p1326[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic frequency 4 / Uf char f4

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5300,
6300
P-Group: V/f control Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Hz] 10000.00 [Hz] 0.00 [Hz]

Description: In the servo control mode the following applies:

The linear characteristic for the V/f control is defined by 0 Hz / p1319 and p1326 / p1327.
For closed-loop vector control, the following applies:
The programmable characteristic for the V/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the fourth point along the characteristic.
Dependency: In the servo control mode the following applies:
Activates the V/f control using p1317.
For closed-loop vector control, the following applies:
Selects the freely programmable characteristic using p1300 = 3.
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1317, p1319, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1327
Note: In the servo control mode the following applies:
Linear interpolation is carried-out between the points 0 Hz / p1319 and p1326 / p1327.
For closed-loop vector control, the following applies:
Linear interpolation is carried-out between the points 0 Hz / p1310, p1320 / p1321 ... p1326 / p1327.
The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable V/Hz characteristic.

1-228  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1327[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic voltage 4 / Uf char U4

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5300,
6300
P-Group: V/f control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Veff] 10000.0 [Veff] 0.0 [Veff]

Description: In the servo control mode the following applies:

The linear characteristic for the V/f control is defined by 0 Hz / p1319 and p1326 / p1327.
For closed-loop vector control, the following applies:
The programmable characteristic for the V/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the fourth point along the characteristic.
Dependency: In the servo control mode the following applies:
Activates the V/f control using p1317.
For closed-loop vector control, the following applies:
Selects the freely programmable characteristic using p1300 = 3.
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1317, p1319, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326
Note: In the servo control mode the following applies:
Linear interpolation is carried-out between the points 0 Hz / p1319 and p1326 / p1327.
For closed-loop vector control, the following applies:
Linear interpolation is carried-out between the points 0 Hz / p1310, p1320 / p1321 ... p1326 / p1327.
The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable V/Hz characteristic.

p1330[0...n] CI: V/Hz control independent voltage setpoint / Uf U_set independ.

VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: V/f control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for the voltage setpoint for V/f control with an independent voltage setpoint (p1300 = 19).
Dependency: Selects the V/f control with independent voltage setpoint via p1300 = 19.
Refer to: p1300

p1335[0...n] Slip compensation, scaling / Slip comp scal

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 1690,
6310
P-Group: V/f control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 600.0 [%] 0.0 [%]

Description: Sets the setpoint for slip compensation in [%] referred to r0330 (motor rated slip).
p1335 = 0.0 %: Slip compensation de-activated.
p1335 = 100.0 %: Slip is fully compensated.
Dependency: Prerequisite for a precise slip compensation for p1335 = 100 % are the precise motor parameters (p0350 ... p0360).
If the parameters are not precisely known, a precise compensation can be achieved by varying p1335.
Note: The purpose of slip compensation is to maintain a constant motor speed regardless of the applied load. The fact
that the motor speed decreases with increasing load is a typical characteristic of induction motors.
For synchronous motors, this effect does not occur and the parameter has no effect in this case.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-229

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1336[0...n] Slip compensation limit value / Slip comp lim val

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6310
P-Group: V/f control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 600.00 [%] 250.00 [%]
Description: Sets the limit value for slip compensation in [%] referred to r0330 (motor rated slip).

r1337 Actual slip compensation / Slip comp act.val.

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6310
P-Group: V/f control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the actual compensated slip [%] referred to r0330 (rated motor slip).
Dependency: p1335 > 0 %: Slip compensation active.
Refer to: p1335

p1338[0...n] V/f mode resonance damping gain / Uf Res_damp gain

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 1690,
6310
P-Group: V/f control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 100.00 0.00

Description: Sets the controller gain for resonance damping for V/f control.
Dependency: Refer to: p1300, p1339
Note: The resonance damping function dampens active current oscillations that frequency occur under no-load condi-
tions.
The resonance damping is active in a range of approximately 5 ... 70 % of the rated motor frequency (p0310).

p1339[0...n] V/f mode resonance damping filter time constant / Uf Res_damp T

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6310
P-Group: V/f control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1.00 [ms] 1000.00 [ms] 20.00 [ms]

Description: Sets the filter time constant of the controller for resonance damping with V/f control.
Dependency: Refer to: p1300, p1338

1-230  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1340[0...n] I_max frequency controller proportional gain / I_max_ctrl Kp

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 1690
P-Group: V/f control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 0.500 0.000
Description: Proportional gain of the I_max voltage controller.
The I_max controller reduces the drive converter/inverter output current if the maximum current (r0067) is
exceeded.
In the V/f operating modes (refer to p1300) for the I_max control, one controller is used that acts on the output fre-
quency and one controller that acts on the output voltage. The frequency controller reduces the current by decreas-
ing the converter output frequency. The frequency is reduced down to a minimum value (equaling twice rated slip).
If the overcurrent condition cannot be successfully resolved using this measure, then the drive converter output
voltage is reduced using the I_max voltage controller. Once the overcurrent condition has been resolved, the drive
is accelerated along the ramp set in p1120 (ramp-up time).
Dependency: In the V/f modes (p1300) for textile applications and for external voltage setpoints, only the I_max voltage controller
is used.
Notice: If the I_max controller is de-activated, please note that the output current, when the maximum current is exceeded
(r0067), is now no longer reduced. However, overcurrent alarms are generated. The drive is shut down if the over-
current limit (r0209) is exceeded.
Note: p1341 = 0: I_max frequency controller de-activated.

p1341[0...n] I_max frequency controller integral action time / I_max_ctrl Tn

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 1690
P-Group: V/f control Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 50.000 [s] 0.300 [s]

Description: Sets the integral action time for the I_max frequency controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p1340

r1343 I_max controller frequency output / I_max_ctrl f_outp

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1690
P-Group: V/f control Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]

Description: Displays the effective frequency limit.

Dependency: Refer to: p1340

r1344 I_max controller voltage output / I_max_ctrl U_outp

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1690
P-Group: V/f control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Veff] - [Veff] - [Veff]

Description: Displays the amount by which the converter output voltage is reduced.
Dependency: Refer to: p1340

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-231

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1345[0...n] I_max voltage controller proportional gain / I_max_U_ctrl Kp

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 1690
P-Group: V/f control Units group: Unit selection: -
GAIN_CURRENT_CTRL
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [V/A] 100000.000 [V/A] 0.000 [V/A]

Description: Sets the proportional gain for the I_max voltage controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p1340

p1346[0...n] I_max voltage controller integral action time / I_max_U_ctrl Tn

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 1690
P-Group: V/f control Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 50.000 [s] 0.030 [s]

Description: Sets the integral action time for the I_max voltage controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p1340
Note: p1346 = 0: I_max voltage controller de-activated.

p1350[0...n] Soft starting / Soft starting

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 1690
P-Group: V/f control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0

Description: Sets whether the voltage is continuously increased during the magnetizing phase (p1350 = 1, On) or whether it
jumps directly to the voltage boost (p1350 = 0, Off).
Values: 0: Off
1: On
Note: The settings for this parameter have the following advantages and disadvantages:
0 = off (jump directly to voltage boost)
Advantage: Flux is established quickly -> torque is quickly available
Disadvantage: The motor can move while it is being magnetized
1 = on (voltage is continually established)
Advantage: The motor is unlikely to rotate
Disadvantage: Flux establishes itself more slowly -> delay until torque is available

1-232  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1400[0...n] Speed control configuration / n_ctrl config

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 1590,
5490
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin 0000 0001 1010 0000 bin

Description: Sets the configuration for the speed/velocity control.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
04 Torque limiting motoring/regenerating active No Yes -
05 Kp/Tn adaptation active No Yes -
07 Interpolation speed controller pre-control No Yes -
active
08 Interpolation torque setpoint active No Yes -
10 Speed pre-control To setp. filter 2 For balancing -
11 Sensorless oper. speed actual value start- 0.0 Setpoint -
ing value
12 Sensorless operation changeover When accelerating Steady-state -
13 Motor/generator dependent on Actual speed value Speed setpoint -
Note: Re bit 07:
The interpolator is only effective for clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS operation and has, when the dynamic
servo control (DSC) is active, and additional deadtime of one speed controller clock cycle.

p1400[0...n] Speed control configuration / n_ctrl config

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6490
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin 1000 0000 0010 0001 bin

Description: Sets the configuration for the closed-loop speed control.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Automatic Kp/Tn adaptation active No Yes -
01 Sensorless closed-loop vector ctrl freeze I No Yes -
comp
02 Acceleration pre-control source Internal (n_set) External (p1495) 6031
03 Reference model speed setpoint, I compo- Off On -
nent
05 Kp/Tn adaptation active No Yes -
06 Free Tn adaptation active No Yes -
14 Torque pre-control For n_ref ctr enab Always active -
15 Sensorless closed-loop vector ctrl speed No Yes -
prectrl
Note: Re bit 01:
When the bit is set, the I component of the speed controller is kept when changing into the open-loop controlled
mode.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-233

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1401[0...n] Flux control configuration / F_ctrl config

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6491,
6722
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 0111 bin 0110 bin

Description: Sets the configuration for flux setpoint control

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Flux setpoint soft starting active No Yes -
01 Flux setpoint differentiation active No Yes -
02 Flux build-up control active No Yes -

p1404[0...n] Sensorless operation changeover speed / Sensorl op n_chgov

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 1590,
5060
P-Group: Control Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [1/min] 210000.0 [1/min] 210000.0 [1/min]

Description: Sets the speed/velocity to change over between operation with and without encoder. Above this speed/velocity, the
drive system is automatically operated in the sensorless mode.
Note: The changeover speed applies when changing over between operation with and without encoder.
Separate speed controllers should be set when operating with and without encoder.
Operation with encoder: p1460 (Kp), p1462 (Tn), p1461, p1463, p1457, p1458 (parameters for speed controller
adaptation)
Operation without encoder (sensorless operation): p1470 (Kp), p1472 (Tn)

r1406 CO/BO: Control word speed controller / STW n_ctrl

SERVO Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1530,
2520
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the control word of the speed/velocity controller.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
08 Travel to fixed endstop active No Yes -
12 Torque control active No Yes -

r1406 CO/BO: Control word speed controller / STW n_ctrl

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the control word of the speed controller.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
04 Holds speed controller I component No Yes -
05 Sets speed controller I component No Yes -
11 Enables droop No Yes 6030
12 Torque control active No Yes -

1-234  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1407 CO/BO: Status word speed controller / ZSW n_ctrl

SERVO Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1530,
2522
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the status word of the speed/velocity controller.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 V/f control active No Yes -
01 Sensorless operation active No Yes -
02 Torque control active No Yes -
04 DSC active No Yes -
05 Speed controller I component held No Yes -
06 Speed controller I component set No Yes -
07 Torq limit reached No Yes 5610
08 Upper torque limit active No Yes 5610
09 Lower torque limit active No Yes 5610
11 Speed setpoint limited No Yes -
13 Sensorless operation due to a fault No Yes -

r1407 CO/BO: Status word speed controller / ZSW n_ctrl

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1530,
2522
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the status word of the speed controller.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 V/f control active No Yes -
01 Sensorless operation active No Yes -
02 Torque control active No Yes 6030
03 Speed control active No Yes 6040
05 Speed controller I component held No Yes 6040
06 Speed controller I component set No Yes 6040
07 Torq limit reached No Yes 6060
08 Upper torque limit active No Yes -
09 Lower torque limit active No Yes -
10 Droop enabled No Yes 6030
11 Speed setpoint limited No Yes 6030
12 Ramp-function generator set No Yes -
13 Sensorless operation due to a fault No Yes -

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-235

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1408 CO/BO: Closed-loop control status word 3 / Control ZSW3

SERVO Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 5040,
5493
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays closed-loop control status word 3 (closed-loop control STW3).

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Cl-loop curr ctrl not active active -
04 Limit Vd not active active -
05 Limit Vq not active active -
06 Positive limiting Iq not active active -
07 Negative limiting Iq not active active -
08 Limit iq_set not active active -
09 Limit id_set not active active -
Note: The selected current limit is taken into account by the upstream torque limiting; this is the reason that bits 6, 7 and
8 are only set for overshoots due to the current setpoint filter.

r1408 CO/BO: Closed-loop control status word 3 / Control ZSW3

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 6493
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays closed-loop control status word 3 (closed-loop control STW3).

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Current ctrl act not active active -
01 Id control, I-component limiting not active active -
03 Voltage limiting not active active -
10 Speed adaptation, limiting not active active -
11 Speed adaptation, speed deviation In tolerance Out tolerance 6719
12 Motor stalled No Yes 6719

p1412[0...n] Speed setpoint filter, deadtime / n_set deadtime

TM41 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 9674
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [ms] 1.000 [ms] 0.000 [ms]

Description: Sets the delay of the speed setpoint for the incremental encoder emulation.

1-236  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1414[0...n] Speed setpoint filter activation / n_set_filt active

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5020
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 0011 bin 0000 bin
Description: Activates the speed /velocity setpoint filters 1 and 2.
Recommenda- If only one filter is required, filter 1 should be activated and filter 2 deactivated, to avoid excessive processing time.
tion:
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Activate filter 1 No Yes -
01 Activate filter 2 No Yes -
Dependency: The speed setpoint filter is parameterized using p1415 ... p1420 and p1421 ... p1426.

p1414[0...n] Speed setpoint filter activation / n_set_filt active

TM41 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 9674
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 0001 bin 0000 bin

Description: Activates speed setpoint filter 1 for the incremental encoder emulation.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Activate filter 1 No Yes 9674
Dependency: The speed setpoint filter can be parameterized using p1417 and p1418.
Refer to: p1417, p1418

p1415[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 1 type / n_set_filt 1 typ

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5020
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0
Description: Sets the type for the speed/velocity setpoint filter 1.
Values: 0: Low pass: PT1
1: Low pass: PT2
2: General 2nd-order filter
Dependency: PT1 low pass: p1416
PT2 low pass: p1417, p1418
General filter: p1417 - p1420

p1416[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 1 time constant / n_set_filt 1 T

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5020,
6030
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 5000.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]

Description: Sets the time constant for the speed/velocity setpoint filter 1 (PT1).
Dependency: Refer to: p1414, p1415
Note: For SERVO (p0107) the following applies:
This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is set as a PT1 low pass.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-237

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1417[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 1 denominator natural frequency / n_set_filt 1 fn_n

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5020
P-Group: Control Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 2000.0 [Hz]
Description: Sets the denominator natural frequency for the speed/velocity setpoint filter 1 (PT2, general filter).
Dependency: Refer to: p1414, p1415
Note: This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is parameterized as a PT2 low pass or as general filter.
The filter is only effective if the natural frequency is less than half of the sampling frequency.

p1417[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 1 denominator natural frequency / n_set_filt 1 fn_n

TM41 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 9674
P-Group: Control Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 2000.0 [Hz]

Description: Sets the denominator natural frequency for the speed setpoint filter 1 (PT2) of the incremental encoder emulation.
Dependency: Refer to: p1414
Note: This parameter is only effective if the speed setpoint filter in p1414 is activated.
The filter is only effective if the natural frequency is less than half of the sampling frequency.

p1418[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 1 denominator damping / n_set_filt 1 D_n

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5020
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.050 10.000 0.700
Description: Sets the denominator damping for the speed/velocity setpoint filter 1 (PT2, general filter).
Dependency: Refer to: p1414, p1415
Note: This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is parameterized as a PT2 low pass or as general filter.

p1418[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 1 denominator damping / n_set_filt 1 D_n

TM41 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 9674
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.050 1.000 0.700
Description: Sets the denominator damping for the speed setpoint filter 1 (PT2) of the incremental encoder emulation.
Dependency: Refer to: p1414
Note: This parameter is only effective if the speed setpoint filter in p1414 is activated.

1-238  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1419[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 1 numerator natural frequency / n_set_filt 1 fn_z

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5020
P-Group: Control Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 2000.0 [Hz]
Description: Sets the numerator natural frequency for the speed/velocity setpoint filter 1 (general filter).
Dependency: Refer to: p1414, p1415
Note: This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is set as a general filter.
The filter is only effective if the natural frequency is less than half of the sampling frequency.

p1420[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 1 numerator damping / n_set_filt 1 D_z

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5020
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 10.000 0.700

Description: Sets the numerator damping for the speed/velocity setpoint filter 1 (general filter).
Dependency: Refer to: p1414, p1415
Note: This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is set as a general filter.

p1421[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 2 type / n_set_filt 2 typ

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5020
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0

Description: Sets the type for the speed/velocity setpoint filter 2.

Values: 0: Low pass: PT1
1: Low pass: PT2
2: General 2nd-order filter
Dependency: PT1 low pass: p1422
PT2 low pass: p1423, p1424
General filter: p1423 - p1426

p1422[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 2 time constant / n_set_filt 2 T

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5020
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 5000.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]

Description: Sets the time constant for the speed/velocity setpoint filter 2 (PT1).
Dependency: Refer to: p1414, p1421
Note: This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is set as a PT1 low pass.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-239

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1423[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 2 denominator natural frequency / n_set_filt 2 fn_n

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5020
P-Group: Control Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 2000.0 [Hz]
Description: Sets the denominator natural frequency for the speed/velocity setpoint filter 2 (PT2, general filter).
Dependency: Refer to: p1414, p1421
Note: This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is parameterized as a PT2 low pass or as general filter.
The filter is only effective if the natural frequency is less than half of the sampling frequency.

p1424[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 2 denominator damping / n_set_filt 2 D_n

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5020
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.050 10.000 0.700

Description: Sets the denominator damping for the speed/velocity setpoint filter 2 (PT2, general filter).
Dependency: Refer to: p1414, p1421
Note: This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is parameterized as a PT2 low pass or as general filter.

p1425[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 2 numerator natural frequency / n_set_filt 2 fn_z

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5020
P-Group: Control Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 2000.0 [Hz]

Description: Sets the numerator natural frequency for the speed/velocity setpoint filter 2 (general filter).
Dependency: Refer to: p1414, p1421
Note: This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is set as a general filter.
The filter is only effective if the natural frequency is less than half of the sampling frequency.

p1426[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 2 numerator damping / n_set_filt 2 D_z

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5020
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 10.000 0.700
Description: Sets the numerator damping for the speed/velocity setpoint filter 2 (general filter).
Dependency: Refer to: p1414, p1421
Note: This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is set as a general filter.

1-240  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1428[0...n] Speed pre-control balancing deadtime / n_pre bal t_dead

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5030,
6031
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 2.0 0.0

Description: Sets the deadtime to balance the speed/velocity setpoint for active torque/force pre-control.
The selected multiplier refers to the speed/velocity controller clock cycle (deadtime= p1428 * p0115[1]).
Dependency: In conjunction with p1429, this parameter can simulate the characteristics of how the torque is established (dynamic
response of closed current control loop).
For VECTOR (r0107) the following applies:
The parameter is only effective if the acceleration model is supplied using external acceleration signals (p1400.2 =
1). For p1400.2 = 0, a fixed deadtime is used.
Refer to: p1429, p1511

p1429[0...n] Speed pre-control balancing time constant / n_prectrl bal T

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5030,
6031
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 10000.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the time constant (PT1) for balancing the speed/velocity setpoint for the active torque/force pre-control.
Dependency: In conjunction with p1428, this parameter can simulate the characteristics of how torque is established (dynamic
response of the closed current control loop).
For VECTOR (r0107) the following applies:
The parameter is only effective if the acceleration model is supplied using external acceleration signals (p1400.2 =
1). For p1400.2 = 0, time constant p1442 (or p1452 for sensorless closed-loop vector control) is used.
Refer to: p1428, p1511

p1430[0...n] CI: Speed pre-control / n_pre-control

SERVO Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 1550,
1590, 5020
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for the speed/velocity pre-control channel (speed/velocity pre-control or torque/force pre-
control).

r1432 CO: Speed pre-control after balancing / n_prectr after sym

SERVO Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5030
P-Group: Control Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]

Description: Displays the speed/velocity pre-control value after the balancing for the torque/force build-up (emulates the closed
current control loop).
Dependency: Balancing can be parameterized with p1428 and/or p1429.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-241

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1433[0...n] Speed controller reference model natural frequency / n_ctrl RefMod fn

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5030,
6031
P-Group: Control Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Hz] 8000.0 [Hz] 0.0 [Hz]

Description: Sets the natural frequency of a PT2 element for the reference model of the speed/velocity controller.
Recommenda- The reference model is correctly set when the characteristics of p1429 (reference model output) and p1445 (actual
tion: speed value) are virtually identical when the I-component of the speed controller is disabled.
Dependency: Together with p1434 and p1435, the characteristics (in the time domain) of the closed-loop speed control (P) can be
emulated.
For VECTOR (r0107) the following applies:
The reference model is activated with p1400.3 = 1.
Refer to: p1434, p1435

p1434[0...n] Speed controller reference model damping / n_ctrl RefMod D

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5030,
6031
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 5.000 1.000
Description: Sets the damping of a PT2 element for the reference model of the speed/velocity controller.
Recommenda- The reference model is correctly set when the characteristics of p1429 (reference model output) and p1445 (actual
tion: speed value) are virtually identical when the I-component of the speed controller is disabled.
Dependency: In conjunction with p1433 and p1435, the characteristics (in time) of the P-controlled speed control loop can be sim-
ulated.
For VECTOR (r0107) the following applies:
The reference model is activated with p1400.3 = 1.
Refer to: p1433, p1435

p1435[0...n] Speed controller reference model deadtime / n_ctrRefMod t_dead

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5030,
6031
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 2.00 0.00

Description: Sets the "fractional" deadtime for the reference model of the speed/velocity controller.
This parameter emulates the computation deadtime of the proportionally controlled speed/velocity control loop.
The selected multiplier refers to the speed/velocity controller clock cycle (deadtime= p1435 * p0115[1]).
Recommenda- The reference model is correctly set when the characteristics of p1429 (reference model output) and p1445 (actual
tion: speed value) are virtually identical when the I-component of the speed controller is disabled.
Dependency: In conjunction with p1433 and p1434, the characteristics (in time) of the P-controlled speed control loop can be sim-
ulated.
For VECTOR (r0107) the following applies:
The reference model is activated with p1400.3 = 1.
Refer to: p0115, p1433, p1434

1-242  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1436 CO: Speed controller reference model speed setpoint output / n_set RefMod outpt
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5030,
6031
P-Group: Control Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]

Description: Displays the speed/velocity setpoint at the output of the reference model.
Dependency: For VECTOR (r0107) the following applies:
The reference model is activated with p1400.3 = 1.

p1437[0...n] CI: Speed controller, reference model I component input / n_ctrRefMod I_comp
VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1436[0]

Description: Sets the signal source for speed setpoint for the integral component of the speed controller.
Dependency: The reference model is activated with p1400.3 = 1.
Refer to: p1400
Cautiont: In should be ensured that a speed setpoint is selected as signal source that corresponds to the setpoint for the P
component of the speed controller.

r1438 CO: Speed controller, speed setpoint / n_ctrl n_set

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1550,
1590, 3080, 5030, 5040, 5060,
5210, 5300, 6040
P-Group: Control Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]
Description: Displays the speed/velocity setpoint after setpoint limiting for the P component of the speed/velocity controller.
For V/f operation, the value that is displayed is of no relevance.
Dependency: Refer to: r1439
Note: In the standard state (the reference model is de-activated), r1438 = r1439.

r1439 Speed setpoint, I component / n_set I_comp

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5030,
5040, 6031
P-Group: Control Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]

Description: Displays the speed/velocity setpoint for the I component of the speed/velocity controller (output of the reference
model after the setpoint limiting).
Dependency: Refer to: r1438
Note: In the standard state (the reference model is de-activated), r1438 = r1439.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-243

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1441[0...n] Actual speed smoothing time / n_act T_smooth

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 4710,
6010
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 20.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]

Description: Sets the smoothing time constant (PT1) for the speed/velocity actual value.
Dependency: Refer to: r0063
Note: The speed actual value should be smoothed for encoders with a low pulse number or for resolvers.
After this parameter has been changed, we recommend that the speed controller is adapted and/or the speed con-
troller settings checked Kp (p1460) and Tn (p1462).

p1442[0...n] Actual speed smoothing time / n_act T_smooth

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6040
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 32000.00 [ms] 4.00 [ms]

Description: Sets the smoothing time for the actual speed value for closed-loop control with encoder.
Note: The smoothing must be increased if there is gear backlash. For longer smoothing times, the integral action time of
the speed controller must also be increased (e.g. using p0340 = 4).

r1444 Speed controller, speed setpoint steady-state (static) / n_ctrl n_set stat
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5030
P-Group: Control Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]

Description: Displays the sum of all speed/velocity setpoints that are present.
The following sources are available for the displayed setpoint:
- setpoint at the ramp-function generator input (r1119).
- speed/velocity setpoint 1 (p1155).
- speed/velocity setpoint 2 (p1160).
- speed/velocity setpoint for speed/velocity pre-control /(p1430).
- setpoint from DSC (for DSC active).
- setpoint via PC (for master control active, p3983).
Dependency: Refer to: r1119, p1155, p1160, p1430

r1445 CO: Actual speed, smoothed / n_act smooth

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6040
P-Group: Control Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]

Description: Displays the smoothed actual speed for speed control.

1-244  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1452[0...n] Speed actual value smoothing time (SLVC) / n_act T_smoothSLVC

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6040
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 32000.00 [ms] 10.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time for the actual speed for sensorless closed-loop speed control.
Note: The smoothing must be increased if there is gear backlash. For longer smoothing times, the integral action time of
the speed controller must also be increased (e.g. using p0340 = 4).

r1454 CO: Speed controller system deviation I component / n_ctrl sys_dev Tn

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5040
P-Group: Control Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]

Description: Displays the system deviation of the I component of the speed/velocity controller.
When the reference model is inactive ((1433 = 0 Hz), this parameter corresponds to the system deviation of the
complete PI controller (r1454 = r0064).

p1455[0...n] CI: Speed controller P gain adaptation signal / n_ctrl Adpt_sig Kp

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 5050,
6050
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the source for the adaptation signal to additionally adapt the P gain of the speed/velocity controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p1456, p1457, p1458, p1459

p1456[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation lower starting point / n_ctrl AdaptKpLow.
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5050,
6050
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 400.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the lower starting point of the adaptation range for the additional adaptation of the P gain of the speed/velocity
controller. The values are in % and refer to the set source of the adaptation signal.
Dependency: Refer to: p1455, p1457, p1458, p1459

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-245

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1457[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation upper starting point / n_ctrl AdaptKp up.
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5050,
6050
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 400.00 [%] 0.00 [%]

Description: Sets the upper starting point of the adaptation range for the additional adaptation of the P gain of the speed/velocity
controller. The values are in % and refer to the set source of the adaptation signal.
Dependency: Refer to: p1455, p1456, p1458, p1459

p1458[0...n] Adaptation factor, lower / Adapt_factor lower

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5050,
6050
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the adaptation factor before the adaptation range (0 % ... p1456) to additionally adapt the P gain of the
speed/velocity controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p1455, p1456, p1457, p1459

p1459[0...n] Adaptation factor, upper / Adapt_factor upper

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5050,
6050
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]

Description: Sets the adaptation factor after the adaptation range (> p1457) to additionally adapt the P gain of the speed/velocity
controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p1455, p1456, p1457, p1458

p1460[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation speed, lower / n_ctrl Kp n lower

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5040,
6040
P-Group: Control Units group: GAIN_SPEED_CTRL Unit selection: p0528
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [Nms/rad] 999999.000 [Nms/rad] 0.300 [Nms/rad]

Description: Sets the P gain of the speed/velocity controller before the adaptation speed range/velocity range (0 ... p1464). This
value corresponds to the basic setting of the P gain of the speed/velocity controller without adaptation (p1461 = 100
%).
Dependency: For VECTOR (r0107) the following applies:
For p0528 = 1, the speed controller gain is represented without any dimensions.
Refer to: p1461, p1464, p1465
Note: SERVO:
When automatically calculating the speed controller, only the motor moment of inertia is taken into account (p0341).
For higher load moments of inertia (p0342 > 1 or p1498 > 0) we recommend that the speed controller gain is
checked.

1-246  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1461[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation speed, upper / n_ctrl Kp n upper

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5050,
6050
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [%] 200000.000 [%] 100.000 [%]

Description: Sets the P gain of the speed/velocity controller for the upper adaptation speed range/velocity range (> p1465). The
entry is made referred to the P gain for the lower adaptation speed range/velocity range of the speed/velocity con-
troller (% referred to p1460).
Dependency: Refer to: p1460, p1464, p1465
Note: SERVO:
When automatically calculating the speed controller, only the motor moment of inertia is taken into account (p0341).
For higher load moments of inertia (p0342 > 1 or p1498 > 0) we recommend that the speed controller gain is
checked.

p1462[0...n] Speed controller integral action time adaptation speed, lower / n_ctrl Tn n lower
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5040,
5050, 6040, 6050
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 100000.00 [ms] 20.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the integration action time of the speed/velocity controller before the adaptation speed range/velocity range (0
... p1464). This value corresponds to the basic setting of the integral action time of the speed/velocity controller
without adaptation (p1461 = 100 %).
Dependency: Refer to: p1463, p1464, p1465

p1463[0...n] Speed controller integral action time adaptation speed, upper / n_ctrl Tn n upper
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5050,
6050
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the integral action time of the speed/velocity controller after the adaptation speed range/velocity range (>
p1465). The entry is made referred to the integral action time for the lower adaptation speed range/velocity range of
the speed/velocity controller (% referred to p1462).
Dependency: Refer to: p1462, p1464, p1465

p1464[0...n] Speed controller adaptation speed, lower / n_ctrl n lower

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5050,
6050
P-Group: Control Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [1/min] 210000.00 [1/min] 0.00 [1/min]

Description: Sets the lower adaptation speed/velocity of the speed/velocity controller. No adaptation is effective below this
speed/velocity.
Dependency: Refer to: p1460, p1461, p1462, p1463, p1465

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-247

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1465[0...n] Speed controller adaptation speed, upper / n_ctrl n upper

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5050,
6050
P-Group: Control Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [1/min] 210000.00 [1/min] 210000.00 [1/min]

Description: Sets the upper adaptation speed/velocity of the speed/velocity controller. No adaptation is effective above this
speed/velocity. For P gain, p1460 * p1461 is effective. For the integral action time, p1462 * p1463 is effective.
Dependency: Refer to: p1460, p1461, p1462, p1463, p1464

p1466[0...n] CI: Speed controller P-gain scaling / n_ctrl Kp Scal

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 5050,
6050
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the P gain of the speed/velocity controller. This also makes the effective P
gain (including adaptations) scalable.

r1468 Speed controller P-gain effective / n_ctrl Kp eff

SERVO Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 3080,
5040, 5210
P-Group: Control Units group: GAIN_SPEED_CTRL Unit selection: p0528
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nms/rad] - [Nms/rad] - [Nms/rad]
Description: Displays the effective P gain of the speed/velocity controller.

r1468 CO: Speed controller P-gain effective / n_ctrl Kp eff

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6040
P-Group: Control Units group: GAIN_SPEED_CTRL Unit selection: p0528
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nms/rad] - [Nms/rad] - [Nms/rad]
Description: Displays the effective P gain of the speed controller.
Dependency: For p0528 = 1, the speed controller gain is represented without any dimensions. In this case, connector output sig-
nal r1468 is increased by a factor of 100 in order to improve the resolution.

r1469 Speed controller integral action time effective / n_ctrl Tn eff

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5040,
6040
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]

Description: Displays the effective integral action time of the speed/velocity controller.

1-248  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1470[0...n] Speed controller sensorless operation P-gain / n_ctrl SLVC Kp

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5210,
6040,, 6050
P-Group: Control Units group: GAIN_SPEED_CTRL Unit selection: p0528
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [Nms/rad] 999999.000 [Nms/rad] 0.300 [Nms/rad]

Description: Sets the P gain for sensorless operation for the speed/velocity controller.
Dependency: For VECTOR (r0107) the following applies:
For p0528 = 1, the speed controller gain is represented without any dimensions.
Note: SERVO:
When automatically calculating the speed controller, only the motor moment of inertia is taken into account (p0341).
For higher load moments of inertia (p0342 > 1 or p1498 > 0) we recommend that the speed controller gain is
checked.
VECTOR:
The product p0341 * p0342 is taken into account when automatically calculating the speed controller (p0340 = 4).

p1472[0...n] Speed controller sensorless operation integral action time / n_ctrl SLVC Tn
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5210,
6040, 6050
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 100000.0 [ms] 20.0 [ms]

Description: Set the integral action time for sensorless operation for the speed/velocity controller.

p1476[0...n] BI: Speed controller hold integrator / n_ctrl integ stop

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 5040
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source to hold the integrator for the speed/velocity controller.

p1477[0...n] BI: Speed controller set integrator value / n_ctrl integ set
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 5040,
5210
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for setting the integrator setting value (p1478).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-249

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1478[0...n] CI: Speed controller integrator setting value / n_ctr integ_setVal

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 5040,
5210
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for the integrator setting value for the speed/velocity controller.
The signal to set this integrator setting value is interconnected via p1477.
Dependency: For VECTOR (r0107) the following applies:
The setting value of the speed controller integrator is weighted with the scaling factor of the signal source in p1479.

p1479[0...n] CI: Speed controller integrator setting value scaling / n_ctrl I_val scal
VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the integrator setting value (p1478) of the speed controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p1478

r1480 CO: Speed controller PI torque output / n_ctrl PI_output

SERVO Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1590,
5040, 5060, 5210
P-Group: Control Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]

Description: Displays the torque/force setpoint at the output of the PI speed/velocity controller.

r1481 CO: Speed controller P torque output / n_ctrl P_output

SERVO Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5040,
5210
P-Group: Control Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]

Description: Displays the torque/force setpoint at the output of the P speed/velocity controller.

r1482 CO: Speed controller I torque output / n_ctrl I_output

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5040,
5210, 6040
P-Group: Control Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]

Description: Displays the torque/force setpoint at the output of the I speed/velocity control.

1-250  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1488[0...n] Droop input source / Droop input,source

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6030
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
Description: Sets the source for droop feedback.
Values: 0: Droop feedback not connected
1: Droop from torque setpoint
2: Droop from speed controller output
3: Droop from integral output, speed controller
Dependency: Refer to: p1489, r1490, p1492

p1489[0...n] Droop feedback scaling / Droop scaling

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6030
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 0.500 0.050

Description: Sets the scaling for the droop feedback

Dependency: Refer to: p1488, r1490, p1492
Note: Example:
A value of 0.05 means that for a torque equal to the rated motor torque, the rated motor speed is reduced by 5 %.

r1490 CO: Droop feedback speed reduction / Droop n_reduction

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6030
P-Group: Control Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]
Description: Displays the output signal of the droop calculation. The droop feedback result is subtracted from the speed setpoint
when activated (p1492).
Dependency: Refer to: p1488, p1489, p1492

p1492[0...n] BI: Droop feedback enable / Enables droop

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Enables the droop to be applied to the speed/velocity setpoint.

Dependency: Refer to: p1488, p1489, r1490
Note: Even when not enabled, the droop speed is calculated but not subtracted from the setpoint speed. This makes it
possible to subtract the result of this calculation from the speed of another drive.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-251

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1494[0...n] Speed controller integrator feedback time constant / n_ctr integ_fdbk T

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5040,
5210
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 1000.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]

Description: Sets the time constant of the PT1 filter for integrator feedback.
The integrator of the speed/velocity controller is re-parameterized to become a PT1 filter through a feedback ele-
ment (1st Order low pass filter characteristics).
The following applies:
p1494 < 0.25 (2 * p0115[1]) --> the PT1 filter is not active - the pure integrator is effective.
p1494 >= 0.25 (2 * p0115[1]) --> the PT1 filter is active and has replaced the pure integrator.
Note: Applications:
Motion at zero setpoint and dominant stiction can be suppressed but this has a negative impact on the remaining
setpoint-actual value difference. This can be used, for example, to avoid oscillation of a position-controlled axis at
standstill (stick-slip effect) or overshoot when traversing (moving) in micrometer steps.
Also prevents tension/stressing for axes that are mechanically and rigidly coupled with one another (e.g. for syn-
chronous spindles, master - slave axes).

p1495[0...n] CI: Acceleration pre-controlling, speed change each 1 s / a_prectrl dn/1s

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 6031
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed change per second for the acceleration pre-control.
Dependency: The signal source for the acceleration is activated with p1400.2 = 1.
For p1400.2 = 0, the acceleration pre-control is calculated from the speed setpoint change from r0062.
For p1400.2 = 0 and activate reference model (p1400.3 = 1) the acceleration pre-control is switched-out.
Refer to: p1400, p1496

p1496[0...n] Acceleration pre-control scaling / a_before scaling

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 10000.0 [%] 0.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the acceleration pre-control of the speed/velocity controller.
Dependency: When the reference model is activate (p1400.3 = 1) and for an internal acceleration pre-control (p1400.2 = 0), the
acceleration pre-control is switched-out (disabled). The reference model (p1400.3 = 1) and external acceleration
pre-control (p1400.2 = 1) can be operated together.
Refer to: p0341, p0342
Note: The acceleration pre-control may not be used if the speed setpoint manifests significant ripple (e.g. analog setpoint)
and the rounding-off in the speed ramp-function generator is disabled.
We also recommend that the pre-control mode is not used if there is gearbox backlash.

1-252  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1498[0...n] Load moment of inertia / Load mom of inert

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: INERTIA Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00000 [kgm²] 100000.00000 [kgm²] 0.00000 [kgm²]
Description: Sets the load moment of inertia.
Note: (p0341 * p0342) + p1498 influence the speed-torque pre-control in sensorless operation.

p1499[0...n] Accelerating for torque control, scaling / a for M_ctrl scal

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 400.0 [%] 100.0 [%]

Description: Sets the scaling for the acceleration integrator at low speeds (only for sensorless torque control).
Dependency: Refer to: p0341, p0342

p1500[0...n] Macro connector inputs (CI) for torque setpoints / Macro CI M_set
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 999999 0
Description: Runs the appropriate ACX file on the CompactFlash Card.
The connector inputs (CI) for the torque setpoints of the appropriate command data set (CDS) are appropriately
interconnected.
The selected ACX file must be located in the following directory:
... /PMACRO/<drive object>/P1500/PMxxxxxx.ACX
Example:
p1500 = 6 --> the file PM000006.ACX is run.
Dependency: The ACX file to be run must be created according to the definition for ACX macros and must be saved in the direc-
tory intended on the CompactFlash Card.
Refer to: p0015, p0700, p1000
Note: CI: Connector input

p1501[0...n] BI: Change over between closed-loop speed/torque control / Changeov n/M_ctrl
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2520,
5060, 6060
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for toggling between speed and torque control.
Dependency: The input connectors to enter the torque are provided using p1511, p1512 and p1513.
Refer to: p1300
Cautiont: If the closed-loop torque control is activated (p1300) and a change is made to closed-loop torque control (p1501),
OFF1 (p0840) does not have its own braking response but pulse cancellation when standstill is detected (p1226,
p1227).
Note: 1 signal: Speed control
0 signal: Torque Control

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-253

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1503[0...n] CI: Torque setpoint / M_set

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the torque setpoint for torque control.
Note: A change is made to closed-loop torque control if, in p1300, closed-loop torque control was selected or if the selec-
tion was made using the changeover source in p1501.
it is also possible to change over in operation using p1501.

r1508 CO: Torque setpoint before supplementary torque / M_set bef. M_suppl
VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6060,
6722
P-Group: Control Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]

Description: Displays the torque setpoint before entering the supplementary torque.
For closed-loop speed control, r1508 corresponds to the speed controller output; for closed-loop torque control,
r1508 corresponds to the torque setpoint of the signal source assigned in p1503.

r1509 CO: Torque setpoint before torque limiting / M_set before M_lim
SERVO Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1590,
5060, 5610
P-Group: Control Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the complete torque/force setpoint before the torque/force limiting (sum from the controller output, supple-
mentary torque/force and if required the pre-control torque/force, sensorless operation).
In the closed-loop speed/velocity controlled mode, p1509 = p1480 + r1515 + pre-controlled torque/force, sensorless
operation.
p1509 and p1515 are identical for closed-loop torque/force control.

p1511[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 1 / M_suppl 1

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 5060,
6060
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for supplementary torque/force 1.

1-254  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1512[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 1 scaling / M_suppl 1 scal

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 5060,
6060
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for scaling supplementary torque/force 1.

p1513[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 2 / M_suppl 2

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 5060,
6060
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for supplementary torque/force 2.

p1514[0...n] Supplementary torque 2 scaling / M_suppl 2 scal

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-2000.0 [%] 2000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]

Description: Sets the scaling for supplementary torque 2.

r1515 Supplementary torque total / M_suppl total

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 2
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5040,
5060
P-Group: Control Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]

Description: Displays the total supplementary torque/force.

The displayed value is the sum of supplementary torque values 1 and 2 (p1515 = p1511 * p1512 + p1513).

p1517[0...n] Accelerating torque smoothing time constant / M_accel T_smooth

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5210
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 100.00 [ms] 4.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant of the accelerating torque/force for sensorless operation.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-255

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1518 CO: Accelerating torque / Accel_torque

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6060
P-Group: Control Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the accelerating torque for pre-control of the speed controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p0341, p0342, p1496

p1520[0...n] CO: Torque limit, upper/motoring / M_max upper/mot

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5620,
5630, 6630
P-Group: Control Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-100000.00 [Nm] 1000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]

Description: Sets the fixed upper or torque/force limit when motoring.

Dependency: p1400 bit 4 = 0: top / bottom
p1400 bit 4 = 1: motoring / regenerating
The factory setting depends on p0500.
p0500 = 101 --> set to the maximum value
Otherwise --> set to the rated value
Refer to: p1521, p1522, p1523, p1532, r1538, r1539
Note: For vector drives (refer to p0107):
The torque limit is limited to 400% of the rated motor torque.

p1521[0...n] CO: Torque limit, lower/regenerative / M_max lower/regen

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5620,
5630, 6630
P-Group: Control Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-100000.00 [Nm] 1000000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]

Description: Sets the fixed lower or torque/force limit when regenerating.

Dependency: p1400 bit 4 = 0: top / bottom
p1400 bit 4 = 1: motoring / regenerating
The factory setting depends on p0500.
p0500 = 101 --> set to the maximum value
Otherwise --> set to the rated value
Refer to: p1520, p1522, p1523, p1532
Note: For vector drives (refer to p0107):
The torque limit is limited to 400% of the rated motor torque.

1-256  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1522[0...n] CI: Torque limit, upper/motoring / M_max upper/mot

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 1610,
5620, 5630, 6630
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1520[0]

Description: Sets the signal source for the upper or torque/force limit when motoring.
Dependency: p1400 bit 4 = 0: top / bottom
p1400 bit 4 = 1: motoring / regenerating
Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1523, p1532

p1523[0...n] CI: Torque limit, lower/regenerative / M_max lower/regen

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 1610,
5620, 5630, 6630
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1521[0]

Description: Sets the signal source for the lower or torque/force limit when regenerating.
Dependency: p1400 bit 4 = 0: top / bottom
p1400 bit 4 = 1: motoring / regenerating
Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1522, p1532

p1524[0...n] CO: Torque limit, upper/motoring, scaling / M_max up/mot scal

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5620,
5630, 6630
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-2000.0 [%] 2000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]

Description: Sets the scaling for the upper torque limit or the motoring torque limit when motoring.
Dependency: p1400 bit 4 = 0: top / bottom
p1400 bit 4 = 1: motoring / regenerating
Note: This parameter can be freely interconnected.
The value has the above significance if it is interconnected from connector input p1528.

p1525[0...n] CO: Torque limit, lower/regenerating scaling / M_max low/gen scal

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5620,
5630, 6630
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-2000.0 [%] 2000.0 [%] 100.0 [%]

Description: Sets the scaling for the lower torque limit or the torque limit when regenerating.
Dependency: p1400 bit 4 = 0: top / bottom
p1400 bit 4 = 1: motoring / regenerating
Note: This parameter can be freely interconnected.
The value has the above significance if it is interconnected from connector input p1528.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-257

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1526 Torque limit, upper/motoring without offset / M_max up. w/o offs
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5620,
5630, 6630, 6640
P-Group: Control Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]

Description: Displays the upper torque/force limit of all torque/force limits without offset.
Dependency: p1400 bit 4 = 0: top / bottom
p1400 bit 4 = 1: motoring / regenerating
Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1522, p1523, p1528, p1529

r1527 Torque limit, lower/regenerative without offset / M_max low w/o offs
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5620,
5630, 6630, 6640
P-Group: Control Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]

Description: Displays the lower torque/force limit of all torque/force limits without offset.
Dependency: p1400 bit 4 = 0: top / bottom
p1400 bit 4 = 1: motoring / regenerating
Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1522, p1523, p1528, p1529

p1528[0...n] CI: Torque limit, upper/motoring, scaling / M_max up/mot scal

SERVO Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 1610,
5620, 5630
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the upper or motoring torque/force limit in p1522.
Dependency: p1400 bit 4 = 0: top / bottom
p1400 bit 4 = 1: motoring / regenerating

p1528[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper scaling / M_max upper scal

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 6630
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1524[0]

Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the upper torque limit in p1522.

1-258  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1529[0...n] CI: Torque limit, lower/regenerating scaling / M_max low/gen scal

SERVO Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 1610,
5620, 5630
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the lower or torque/force limit in p1523 when regenerating.
Dependency: p1400 bit 4 = 0: top / bottom
p1400 bit 4 = 1: motoring / regenerating

p1529[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 6630
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1525[0]

Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the lower torque limit in p1523.

p1530[0...n] Power limit, motoring / P_max mot

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5640,
6640
P-Group: Control Units group: POWER_P3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [kW] 10000.00 [kW] 0.00 [kW]

Description: Sets the power limit when motoring.

Dependency: The factory setting depends on p0500.
p0500 = 101 --> set to the maximum value
Otherwise --> set to the rated value
Refer to: p1531
Note: For vector drives (refer to p0107):
The power limit is limited to 300% rated motor power.

p1531[0...n] Power limit, regenerating / P_max gen

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5640,
6640
P-Group: Control Units group: POWER_P3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-10000.00 [kW] -0.01 [kW] -0.01 [kW]

Description: Sets the regenerative power limit.

Dependency: The factory setting depends on p0500.
p0500 = 101 --> set to the maximum value
Otherwise --> set to the rated value
Refer to: p1530
Note: For vector drives (refer to p0107):
The power limit is limited to 300% rated motor power.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-259

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1532[0...n] Torque limit, offset / M_max offset

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5620,
5630, 8012
P-Group: Control Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-100000.00 [Nm] 100000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]

Description: Sets the torque/force offset for the torque/force limit.

Dependency: Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1522, p1523, p1528, p1529

r1533 Current limit, torque-generating, total / Iq_max total

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5640,
5722, 6640
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the maximum torque/force generating current as a result if all current limits.

r1534 CO: Torque limit, upper total / M_max upper total

SERVO Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1610,
5620, 5630, 5640
P-Group: Control Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the upper torque/force limit of all torque/force limits.
Dependency: Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1522, p1523, p1528, p1529, p1532

r1535 CO: Torque limit, lower total / M_max lower total

SERVO Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1610,
5620, 5630, 5640
P-Group: Control Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]

Description: Displays the lower torque/force limit of all torque/force limits.

Dependency: Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1522, p1523, p1528, p1529, p1532

r1536 Torque limit, torque-generating, maximum / Isq_max

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6640,
6710
P-Group: Control Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]
Description: Displays the maximum limit for the torque-generating current component.

1-260  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1537 Torque limit, torque-generating, minimum / Isq_min

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6640,
6710
P-Group: Control Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the minimum limit for the torque-generating current component.

r1538 CO: Upper effective torque limit / M_max upper eff

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 2
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1590,
1610, 1750, 5610, 5650, 5714,
6040, 6060, 6640, 8012
P-Group: Control Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]

Description: Displays the actually effective upper torque/force limit.

Note: The effective upper torque limit is reduced with respect to the upper torque limit p1520, if the current limit p0640 is
reduced or the rated magnetizing current of the induction motor p0320 is increased.
For vector drives (refer to p0107), this is possibly the case for rotating measurements (refer to p1960).
The torque limit P1520 can be re-calculated using p0340 = 1, 3 or 5.

r1539 CO: Lower effective torque limit / M_max lower eff

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 2
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1590,
1610, 1750, 5610, 5650, 5714,
6040, 6060, 6640, 8012
P-Group: Control Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the actually effective lower torque/force limit.
Note: The effective lower torque limit is reduced with respect to the selected lower torque limit p1521 if the current limit
p0640 is reduced or the rated magnetizing current of the induction motor p0320 is increased.
For vector drives (refer to p0107), this is possibly the case for rotating measurements (refer to p1960).
The torque limit P1520 can be re-calculated using p0340 = 1, 3 or 5.

p1540[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper scaling / M_max upper scal

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 6060
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the upper torque limiting to limit the speed controller output.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-261

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1541[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 6060
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the lower torque limiting to limit the speed controller output.

p1542[0...n] CI: Travel to a fixed endstop, torque reduction / TfS M_red

SERVO Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 5610
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the torque/force reduction when traversing to a fixed endstop. This value is converted into
a factor and is interconnected to the scaling of the torque/force limits.
Dependency: Refer to: p1528, p1529, r1543, p1544, p1545

r1543 CO: Travel to fixed endstop, torque scaling / TfS M scal

SERVO Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5610
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]

Description: Displays the internally converted factor to interconnect to the scaling of the torque/force limits.
Dependency: Refer to: p1528, p1529, p1542, p1544, p1545

p1544 Travel to a fixed endstop, torque de-rating evaluation / TfS M_red eval
SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5610
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [%] 65535 [%] 100 [%]

Description: Sets the evaluation for the torque/force reduction when traversing to a fixed endstop.
Dependency: Refer to: p1528, p1529, p1542, r1543, p1545
Note: 4000 hex (16384 dec) in the MOMRED control word corresponds to a reduction by the percentage specified in this
parameter.

p1545[0...n] BI: Activates travel to a fixed endstop / TfS activation

SERVO Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2444,
2520
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source to activate/de-activate the "travel to fixed endstop" function
1: Travel to fixed endstop is active
0: Travel to fixed endstop is inactive
Dependency: Refer to: p1542, r1543, p1544

1-262  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1546 Speed threshold, motoring/regenerating / n_thresh mot/regen

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Functions Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [1/min] 210000.0 [1/min] 20.0 [1/min]
Description: Sets the speed/velocity threshold for the motoring/regenerating limit.
For speeds/velocities where the absolute value is less than p1546, then the following applies:
- for p1400.13 = 0: Motoring limit (speed/velocity threshold is compared to the speed/velocity actual value).
- for p1400.13 = 1: Regenerative limiting (speed/velocity threshold is compared to the speed/velocity setpoint).

r1547[0...1] Torque limit for speed controller output / M_max outp n_ctrl
VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]

Description: Displays the torque limit to limit the speed controller output.
Index: [0] = Upper limit
[1] = Lower limit

r1548[0...1] Stall current limit, torque-generating, maximum / Isq_max stall

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the limit for the torque-generating current component using the stall calculation, the current limit of the
motor module as well as the parameterization in p0640.
Index: [0] = Upper limit
[1] = Lower limit

p1570[0...n] CO: Flux setpoint / Flux setpoint

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6722
P-Group: Control Units group: FLUX_RELATIVE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
50.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the flux setpoint referred to rated motor flux.
Note: For p1570 > 100 %, the flux setpoint increases as a function of the load from 100 % (no-load operation) to the set-
ting in p1570 (above rated motor torque).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-263

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1574[0...n] Voltage reserve dynamic / U_reserve dyn

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6723,
6724
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [Veff] 150 [Veff] 10 [Veff]

Description: Sets a dynamic voltage reserve.

Note: Increasing the reserve reduces the steady-state maximum output voltage (r0071).

p1580[0...n] Efficiency optimization / Efficiency opt.

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6722
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [%] 100 [%] 0 [%]

Description: Sets the efficiency optimization. When optimizing the efficiency, the flux setpoint of the closed-loop control is
adapted as a function of the load.
For p1580 = 100 %, under no-load operating conditions, the flux setpoint is reduced to 50 % of the rated motor flux.
Note: It only makes sense to activate this function if the dynamic response requirements of the speed controller are low.
In order to avoid oscillations, if required, the speed controller parameters should be adapted (increase Zn, reduce
Kp).
Further, the smoothing time of the flux setpoint filter (p1582) should be increased.

p1582[0...n] Flux setpoint smoothing time / Flux setp T_smth

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6722
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
4 [ms] 5000 [ms] 15 [ms]

Description: Sets the smoothing time for the flux setpoint.

r1583 Flux setpoint smoothed / Flux setp smooth

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6722,
6723
P-Group: Control Units group: FLUX_RELATIVE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]

Description: Displays the smoothed flux setpoint. The value is referred to the rated motor flux.

1-264  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1584[0...n] Flux setpoint smoothing time for field-weakening operation / Flx setp T_smth Fs
VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6722
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 20000 [ms] 0 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time for the flux setpoint in the field-weakening range
Recommenda- Smoothing should be especially used if there is no regenerative feedback into the line supply. This means that the
tion: DC link voltage can quickly increase in regenerative operation
Note: Only the flux setpoint rise is smoothed

r1589 Field-weakening current, pre-control value / FieldWkCurrPrectrl

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6724
P-Group: Control Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the pre-control value for the field weakening current.

p1590[0...n] Flux controller P gain / Flux controller Kp

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5722
P-Group: Control Units group: GAIN_FLUX_CTRL Unit selection: p0528
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [A/Vs] 999999.0 [A/Vs] 10.0 [A/Vs]

Description: Sets the proportional gain of the flux controller.

Note: For synchronous motors, this parameters has no effect.
The value is automatically pre-assigned dependent on the motor when the drive system is first commissioned.
When calculating controller parameter (p0340 = 4), this value is re-calculated.

p1592[0...n] Flux controller integral.action time / Flux controller Tn

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5722
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 10000 [ms] 30 [ms]

Description: Sets the integral action time of the flux controller.

Note: For synchronous motors, this parameters has no effect.
The value is automatically pre-assigned dependent on the motor when the drive system is first commissioned.
When calculating controller parameter (p0340 = 4), this value is re-calculated.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-265

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1593 Field weakening controller output / Field_ctrl output

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6724
P-Group: Control Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]
Description: Displays the output of the field weakening controller.

p1594[0...n] Field-weakening controller, P gain / Field_ctrl Kp

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: C2, U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6724
P-Group: Control Units group: Unit selection: -
GAIN_VOLTAGE_CTRL
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [A/V] 1000.00 [A/V] 0.00 [A/V]

Description: Sets the P gain of the field-weakening controller.

p1596[0...n] Field weakening controller integral-action time / Field_ctrl Tn

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6723,
6724
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
10 [ms] 10000 [ms] 50 [ms]

Description: Sets the integral-action time of the field-weakening controller.

r1597 Field weakening controller output / Field_ctrl output

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6723
P-Group: Control Units group: FLUX_RELATIVE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]

Description: Displays the output of the field weakening controller. The value is referred to the rated motor flux.

r1598 CO: Total flux setpoint / Flux setpt total

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6714,
6723
P-Group: Control Units group: FLUX_RELATIVE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]

Description: Displays the effective flux setpoint. The value is referred to the rated motor flux.

1-266  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1610[0...n] Torque setpoint static (SLVC) / M_set static

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 50.0 [%]
Description: Sets the static torque setpoint for sensorless vector control (SLVC). This parameter is entered as a percentage
referred to the rated motor torque (r0333).
For sensorless closed-loop vector control, when the motor model is shut down, an absolute current is impressed.
p1610 represents the maximum load that occurs at a constant setpoint speed.
Notice: p1610 should always be set to at least 10 % higher than the maximum steady-state load that can occur.
Note: For p1610 = 0%, a current setpoint is calculated that corresponds to the no-load case (rated magnetizing current).
For p1610 = 100 %, a current setpoint is calculated that corresponds to the rated motor torque.

p1611[0...n] Supplementary accelerating torque (SLVC) / M_suppl_accel

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6722
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 0.0 [%]

Description: Enters the dynamic torque setpoint for the low-speed range for sensorless vector control (SLVC). This parameter is
entered as a percentage referred to the rated motor torque (r0333).
Note: When accelerating and braking p1611 is added to p1610 and the resulting total torque is converted into an appro-
priate current setpoint and controlled.
For pure accelerating torques, it is always favorable to use the torque pre-control of the speed controller (p1496).

p1612[0...n] Current setpoint, open-loop control, sensorless / I_setCtrSensorless

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Aeff] 500.00 [Aeff] 0.00 [Aeff]

Description: Sets the current setpoint for controlled (open-loop) sensorless operation.

p1616[0...n] Current setpoint smoothing time / I_set T_smooth

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6722
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
4 [ms] 10000 [ms] 40 [ms]

Description: Sets the smoothing time for the current setpoint.

The current setpoint is generated from p1610 and p1611.
Note: This parameter is only effective in the range where current is impressed for sensorless vector control.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-267

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1623 Field-generating current setpoint (steady-state) / Id_set stationary

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6723
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]
Description: Displays the steady-state field generating current setpoint (Id_set).

r1624 Field-generating current setpoint, total / Id_set total

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6640,
6723, 6724
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the limited field-generating current setpoint (Id_set).

This value comprises the steady-state field-generating current setpoint r1623 and a dynamic component that is only
set when changes are made to the flux setpoint.

r1650 Current setpoint torque-generating before filter / Iq_set before filt

SERVO Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 5710
P-Group: Control Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the torque/force generating current setpoint Iqset after the torque/force limits and the clock cycle interpola-
tion is front of the current setpoint filters.

r1651 CO: Torque setpoint, function generator / M_set FG

SERVO Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm]
Description: Displays the torque/force setpoint of the function generator.

p1654[0...n] Current setpoint torque-generating smoothing time / Isq_set T_smooth

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6710
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.1 [ms] 20.0 [ms] 4.8 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant for the setpoint of the torque-generating current components.
Note: The smoothing time does not become effective until the field-weakening range is reached.

1-268  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1655[0...1] CI: Current setpoint filter natural frequency tuning / I_set_filt f_n
VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 6710
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for tuning the natural frequency of the current setpoint filter.
Index: [0] = Filter 1
[1] = Filter 2
Note: [0] = Filter 1
[1] = Filter 2

p1656[0...n] Activates current setpoint filter / I_set_filt active

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5710
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 000F hex 0001 hex

Description: Activates current setpoint filters 1 to 4.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Filter 1 not active active -
01 Filter 2 not active active -
02 Filter 3 not active active -
03 Filter 4 not active active -
Dependency: The current setpoint filters are parameterized with p1656 to p1676.
Note: If not all of the filters are required, then the filters should be used consecutively starting from filter 1.

p1656[0...n] Activates current setpoint filter / I_set_filt active

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6710
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 0003 hex 0001 hex

Description: Activates current setpoint filters 1 to 2.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Filter 1 not active active -
01 Filter 2 not active active -
Dependency: The current setpoint filters are parameterized with p1656 to p1666.
Note: If not all of the filters are required, then the filters should be used consecutively starting from filter 1.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-269

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1657[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 type / I_set_filt 1 Typ

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5710,
6710
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 2 1

Description: Sets the current setpoint filter 1 as low pass (PT2) or as extended general 2nd-order filter.
Values: 1: Low pass: PT2
2: General 2nd-order filter
Dependency: The current setpoint filters are parameterized with p1656 to p1676.
Note: For an extended general 2nd order filter, by inserting the same natural frequency in both the numerator and in the
denominator, i.e. bandstop frequency, a bandstop filter is implemented. If the numerator damping of zero is
selected, the bandstop frequency is completely suppressed. The numerator damping can be determined from the
equation for the 3 dB bandwidth: f_3dB bandwidth = 2 * D_numerator * f_bandstop frequency.

p1658[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 denominator natural frequency / I_set_filt 1 fn_n

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5710,
6710
P-Group: Control Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 1999.0 [Hz]
Description: Sets the denominator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 1 (PT2, general filter).
Dependency: The current setpoint filters are parameterized with p1656 to p1676.

p1659[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 denominator damping / I_set_filt 1 D_n

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5710,
6710
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.001 10.000 0.700

Description: Sets the denominator damping for current setpoint filter 1.

Dependency: The current setpoint filters are parameterized with p1656 to p1676.

p1660[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 numerator natural frequency / I_set_filt 1 fn_z

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5710,
6710
P-Group: Control Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 1999.0 [Hz]

Description: Sets the numerator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 1 (general filter).
Dependency: The current setpoint filters are parameterized with p1656 to p1676.

1-270  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1661[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 numerator damping / I_set_filt 1 D_z

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5710,
6710
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 10.000 0.700

Description: Sets the numerator damping for current setpoint filter 1.

Dependency: The current setpoint filters are parameterized with p1656 to p1676.

p1662[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 type / I_set_filt 2 Typ

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5710,
6710
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 2 1

Description: Sets the current setpoint filter 2 as low pass (PT2) or as extended general 2nd-order filter.
Values: 1: Low pass: PT2
2: General 2nd-order filter
Dependency: The current setpoint filters are parameterized with p1656 to p1676.
Note: For an extended general 2nd order filter, by inserting the same natural frequency in both the numerator and in the
denominator, i.e. bandstop frequency, a bandstop filter is implemented. If the numerator damping of zero is
selected, the bandstop frequency is completely suppressed. The numerator damping can be determined from the
equation for the 3 dB bandwidth: f_3dB bandwidth = 2 * D_numerator * f_bandstop frequency.

p1663[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 denominator natural frequency / I_set_filt 2 fn_n

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5710,
6710
P-Group: Control Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 1999.0 [Hz]

Description: Sets the denominator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 2 (PT2, general filter).
Dependency: The current setpoint filters are parameterized with p1656 to p1676.

p1664[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 denominator damping / I_set_filt 2 D_n

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5710,
6710
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.001 10.000 0.700

Description: Sets the denominator damping for current setpoint filter 2.

Dependency: The current setpoint filters are parameterized with p1656 to p1676.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-271

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1665[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 numerator natural frequency / I_set_filt 2 fn_z

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5710,
6710
P-Group: Control Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 1999.0 [Hz]

Description: Sets the numerator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 2 (general filter).
Dependency: The current setpoint filters are parameterized with p1656 to p1676.

p1666[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 numerator damping / I_set_filt 2 D_z

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5710,
6710
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 10.000 0.700

Description: Sets the numerator damping for current setpoint filter 2.

Dependency: The current setpoint filters are parameterized with p1656 to p1676.

p1667[0...n] Current setpoint filter 3 type / I_set_filt 3 Typ

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5710
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 2 1

Description: Sets the current setpoint filter 3 as low pass (PT2) or as extended general 2nd-order filter.
Values: 1: Low pass: PT2
2: General 2nd-order filter
Dependency: The current setpoint filters are parameterized with p1656 to p1676.

p1668[0...n] Current setpoint filter 3 denominator natural frequency / I_set_filt 3 fn_n

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5710
P-Group: Control Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 1999.0 [Hz]

Description: Sets the denominator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 3 (PT2, general filter).
Dependency: The current setpoint filters are parameterized with p1656 to p1676.

p1669[0...n] Current setpoint filter 3 denominator damping / I_set_filt 3 D_n

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5710
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.001 10.000 0.700
Description: Sets the denominator damping for current setpoint filter 3.
Dependency: The current setpoint filters are parameterized with p1656 to p1676.

1-272  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1670[0...n] Current setpoint filter 3 numerator natural frequency / I_set_filt 3 fn_z

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5710
P-Group: Control Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 1999.0 [Hz]
Description: Sets the numerator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 3 (general filter).
Dependency: The current setpoint filters are parameterized with p1656 to p1676.

p1671[0...n] Current setpoint filter 3 numerator damping / I_set_filt 3 D_z

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5710
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 10.000 0.700

Description: Sets the numerator damping for current setpoint filter 3.

Dependency: The current setpoint filters are parameterized with p1656 to p1676.

p1672[0...n] Current setpoint filter 4 type / I_set_filt 4 Typ

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5710
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 2 1
Description: Sets the current setpoint filter 4 as low pass (PT2) or as extended general 2nd-order filter.
Values: 1: Low pass: PT2
2: General 2nd-order filter
Dependency: The current setpoint filters are parameterized with p1656 to p1676.

p1673[0...n] Current setpoint filter 4 denominator natural frequency / I_set_filt 4 fn_n

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5710
P-Group: Control Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 1999.0 [Hz]

Description: Sets the denominator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 4 (PT2, general filter).
Dependency: The current setpoint filters are parameterized with p1656 to p1676.

p1674[0...n] Current setpoint filter 4 denominator damping / I_set_filt 4 D_n

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5710
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.001 10.000 0.700

Description: Sets the denominator damping for current setpoint filter 4.

Dependency: The current setpoint filters are parameterized with p1656 to p1676.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-273

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1675[0...n] Current setpoint filter 4 numerator natural frequency / I_set_filt 4 fn_n

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5710
P-Group: Control Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.5 [Hz] 16000.0 [Hz] 1999.0 [Hz]
Description: Sets the numerator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 4 (general filter).
Dependency: The current setpoint filters are parameterized with p1656 to p1676.

p1676[0...n] Current setpoint filter 4 numerator damping / I_set_filt 4 D_z

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5710
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 10.000 0.700

Description: Sets the numerator damping for current setpoint filter 4.

Dependency: The current setpoint filters are parameterized with p1656 to p1676.

p1699 Filter data transfer / Filt data transfer

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Activates data transfer for parameter changes for the filter.
p1699 = 0:
The new filter data are immediately transferred.
p1699 = 1:
The new filter data are only transferred when this parameter is reset.
Dependency: Refer to: p1414, p1415, p1416, p1417, p1418, p1419, p1420, p1421, p1422, p1423, p1424, p1425, p1426, p1656,
p1657, p1658, p1659, p1660, p1661, p1662, p1663, p1664, p1665, p1666, p1667, p1668, p1669, p1670, p1671,
p1672, p1673, p1674, p1675, p1676

p1701[0...n] Current controller reference model deadtime / I_ctrRefMod t_dead

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5714
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 1.0 1.0

Description: Sets the fractional deadtime for the current controller reference model.
This parameter emulates the computation deadtime of the proportionally controlled current control loop.
Note: Deadtime = p1701 * p0115[0]

1-274  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1703[0...n] Isq current controller pre-control scaling / Isq_ctr_prectrScal

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 70.0 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling of the dynamic current controller pre-control for the torque/force-generating current component Isq.

p1715[0...n] Current controller P gain / I_ctrl Kp

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5714,
6714
P-Group: Control Units group: Unit selection: p0528
GAIN_CURRENT_CTRL
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [V/A] 100000.000 [V/A] 0.000 [V/A]

Description: Sets the proportional gain of the current controller for the lower adaptation current range. This value is automatically
preset using p3900 or p0340 when commissioning has been completed.
Dependency: p0391, p0392 and p0393 are only available for SERVO.
Refer to: p0391, p0392, p0393
Note: For p0393 = 100 %, the current controller adaptation is disabled and p1715 is effective over the entire range.

p1717[0...n] Current controller integral-action time / I_ctrl Tn

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 5714,
6714
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 1000.00 [ms] 2.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral-action time of the current controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p1715

r1718 CO: Isq controller output / Isq_ctrl outp

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6714
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Veff] - [Veff] - [Veff]

Description: Displays the actual output of the Isq current controller (torque/force generating current, PI controller). The value
contains the proportional and integral components of the PI controller.

r1719 Isq controller integral component / Isq_ctrl I_comp

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Veff] - [Veff] - [Veff]

Description: Displays the integral component of the Isq current controller (torque/force-generating current, PI controller).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-275

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1723 CO: Isd controller output / Isd_ctrl output

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6714
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Veff] - [Veff] - [Veff]
Description: Displays the actual output of the Isd current controller (flux-generating current, PI controller). The value contains the
proportional and integral components of the PI controller.

r1724 Isd controller integral component / Isd_ctrl I_comp

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Veff] - [Veff] - [Veff]

Description: Displays the integral component of the Isd current controller (flux-generating current, PI controller).

r1725 Isd controller integral component limit / Isd_ctrl I_limit

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Veff] - [Veff] - [Veff]

Description: Displays the limit value for the integral component of the Isd current controller.

p1726[0...n] Quadrature arm decoupling, scaling / Transv_decpl scal

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 75.0 [%]

Description: Sets the scaling of the quadrature arm decoupling

Note: This parameter is ineffective for sensorless vector control. In this case, p1727 is always used.

p1727[0...n] Quadrature arm decoupling at voltage limit, scaling / TrnsvDecplVmaxScal

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 200.0 [%] 50.0 [%]

Description: Sets the the scaling of quadrature arm decoupling when the voltage limit is reached.

1-276  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1728 Decoupling voltage / U_Decoupling

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Veff] - [Veff] - [Veff]
Description: Displays the actual output of the quadrature channel de-coupling for the d axis.

r1729 Decoupling voltage / U_Decoupling

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Veff] - [Veff] - [Veff]
Description: Displays the actual output of the quadrature channel de-coupling for the q axis.

r1732 Direct-axis voltage setpoint / U_direct-axis_set

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1630,
5714, 5730, 6714
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Veff] - [Veff] - [Veff]

Description: Displays the direct-axis voltage setpoint Ud.

r1733 Quadrature-axis voltage setpoint / U_quad_set

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1630,
5714, 5730, 6714, 6731
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Veff] - [Veff] - [Veff]

Description: Displays the quadrature-axis component of voltage setpoint Uq.

p1740[0...n] Gain resonance damping for sensorless closed loop control / Gain res_damp
VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 10.000 0.025

Description: Defines the gain of the controller for resonance damping for operation with sensorless vector control in the range
that current is impressed.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-277

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1744[0...n] Motor model speed threshold stall detection / MotMod n_thr stall
VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [1/min] 210000.00 [1/min] 100.00 [1/min]
Description: Sets the speed threshold value to detect a stalled motor.
If the adaptation controller output exceeds the parameterized speed difference, then bit 11 in status word p1408 is
set.
Dependency: If a stalled drive is detected (p1408.11 set), fault 7902 is output after the delay time in p2178.
Refer to: p2178
Note: Speed monitoring is only effective in operation with a speed encoder (refer to p1300).

p1745[0...n] Motor model error threshold stall detection / MotMod ThreshStall

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 1000.0 [%] 5.0 [%]

Description: Sets the fault threshold in order to detect a motor that has stalled.
If the error signal (r1746) exceeds the parameterized error threshold, then bit 12 in status word p1408 is set.
Dependency: If a stalled drive is detected (p1408.12 set), fault 7902 is output after the delay time set in P2178.
Refer to: p2178
Note: Monitoring is only effective in the low-speed range (below p1755 * p1756).

r1746 Motor model error signal stall detection / MotMod sig stall
VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]

Description: Signal to initiate stall detection

Note: The signal is not calculated while magnetizing and only in the low speed range (below p1755 * p1756).

p1750[0...n] Motor model configuration / MotMod config

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 0111 bin 0000 bin

Description: Sets the configuration of the motor model.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Controlled start No Yes -
01 Controlled through 0 Hz No Yes -
02 Set motor model No Yes -

1-278  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1751 Motor model status / MotMod status

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status of the motor model.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Controlled operation not active active -
01 Set ramp-function generator not active active -
02 Stop RsLh adaptation No Yes -
03 Feedback not active active -
04 Encoder operation not active active -
05 Holding angle No Yes -
06 Acceleration criteria not active active -
12 Rs adaptation waits No Yes -
13 Motor operation No Yes -
14 Stator frequency sign Negative Positive -
15 Torque sign Regenerative mode Motor mode -

p1752[0...n] Motor model changeover speed operation with encoder / MotMod n_chgov enc
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [1/min] 210000.0 [1/min] 210000.0 [1/min]

Description: Sets the speed/velocity to change over the motor model for operation with encoder.
Dependency: Refer to: p1756

p1755[0...n] Motor model changeover speed sensorless operation / MotMod n_chgSnsorl

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [1/min] 210000.0 [1/min] 210000.0 [1/min]

Description: Sets the speed/velocity to change over the motor model to sensorless operation (without encoder).
Dependency: Refer to: p1756
Note: The changeover speed applies for the changeover between open-loop and closed-loop control mode.

p1756 Motor model changeover speed hysteresis / MotMod n_chgov.Hys

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 90.0 [%] 5.0 [%]

Description: Sets the hysteresis for the changeover speed/velocity of the motor model.
Dependency: Refer to: p1752, p1755
Note: The value is entered relative to p1404, p1752 or p1755.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-279

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1758[0...n] Motor model changeover delay time, closed/open-loop control / MotMod t cl_op
VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
100 [ms] 2000 [ms] 1000 [ms]
Description: Sets the minimum time for falling below the changeover speed/velocity when changing from closed-loop controlled
operation to open-loop controlled operation.
Dependency: Refer to: p1755, p1756

p1759[0...n] Motor model changeover delay time open/closed loop control / MotMod t op_cl
VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 2000 [ms] 0 [ms]

Description: Sets the minimum time for exceeding the changeover speed/velocity when changing from open-loop controlled
operation to closed-loop controlled operation.
Dependency: Refer to: p1755, p1756

p1760[0...n] Motor model with encoder speed adaptation Kp / MotMod wE n_ada Kp

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: p0528
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 100000.000 1000.000

Description: Sets the proportional gain of the controller for speed adaptation with encoder

p1761[0...n] Motor model with encoder speed adaptation Tn / MotMod wE n_ada Tn

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 4 [ms]

Description: Sets the integral-action time of the controller for speed adaptation with encoder

r1762 Motor model deviation, imaginary / MotMod dev imag

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the imaginary part of the complex projection of the differential current vector (measured minus estimated)
on the estimated flux vector.

1-280  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1763 Motor model deviation real / MotMod dev real

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the real part of the complex projection of the differential current pointer (measured minus estimated) on
the estimated flow pointer.

p1764[0...n] Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Kp / MotMod woE n_adaKp
VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6730
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: p0528
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 100000.000 1000.000

Description: Sets the proportional gain of the controller for speed adaptation without encoder.

r1765 Motor model, speed adaptation Kp effective / MotM n_ada Kp act

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the effective proportional gain of the controller for the speed adaptation.

p1767[0...n] Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Tn / MotMod woE n_adaTn
VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6730
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 [ms] 200 [ms] 4 [ms]

Description: Sets the integral action time of the controller for speed adaptation without encoder

r1768 Motor model, speed adaptation Vi effective / MotM n_ada Vi act

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the effective gain of the integral component of the controller for speed adaptation.

r1770 Motor model speed adaptation proportional component / MotMod n_adapt Kp

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6730
P-Group: Control Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]

Description: Displays the P component of the controller for speed adaptation.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-281

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1771 Motor model speed adaptation I comp. / MotMod n_adapt Tn

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6730
P-Group: Control Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]
Description: Displays the I component of the controller for speed adaptation.

p1774[0...n] Motor model, offset voltage compensation / MotMod woE n_adaTn

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-5.000 [V] 5.000 [V] 0.000 [V]
Description: Sets the offset voltage in the alpha direction; this compensates the offset voltages of the drive converter/inverter at
low speeds.
Note: The value is pre-set during the rotating measurement.

p1775[0...n] Motor model, offset voltage compensation / MotMod woE n_adaTn

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-5.000 [V] 5.000 [V] 0.000 [V]

Description: Sets the offset voltage in the beta direction; this compensates the offset voltages of the drive converter/inverter.
Note: The value is pre-set during the rotating measurement.

r1778 Motor model flux angle difference / MotMod ang. diff.

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
(n/M) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: ANGLE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°] - [°] - [°]

Description: Displays the difference between the motor model flux angle and the transformation angle.

r1779 Motor model absolute flux / MotMod abs flux

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]

Description: Displays the absolute value of the flux of the motor model.

1-282  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1780[0...n] Motor model configuration adaptation / MotMod config adap

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 0001 1110 bin 0001 1100 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the adaptation circuit of the motor model:
Induction motor: Rs, Lh and offset compensation.
Permanent-magnet synchronous motor: kT
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
01 Select motor model IM Rs adaptation No Yes -
02 Select motor model IM Lh adaptation No Yes -
03 Select motor model PESM KT adaptation No Yes -
04 Select motor model, offset adaptation No Yes -

p1781[0...n] Motor model IM Rs adaptation integral action time / MotMod Rs Tn

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: p0528
Min Max Factory setting
10 [ms] 10000 [ms] 100 [ms]

Description: Sets the integral action time for the Rs adaptation of the motor model of the induction motor.

r1782 Motor model IM Rs adaptation correction value / MotMod Rs corr

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: RESISTANCE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Ohm] - [Ohm] - [Ohm]

Description: Displays the correction value for the Rs adaptation of the motor model for the induction motor.

p1783[0...n] Motor model IM Rs adaptation Kp / MotMod Rs Kp

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 1.000 0.100

Description: Sets the proportional gain for the Rs adaptation of the motor model of the induction motor.

p1785[0...n] Motor model IM Lh adaptation Kp / MotMod Lh Kp

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 1.000 0.100

Description: Sets the proportional gain for the Lh adaptation of the motor model of the induction motor.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-283

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1786[0...n] Motor model IM Lh adaptation integral action time / MotMod Lh Tn

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: p0528
Min Max Factory setting
10 [ms] 10000 [ms] 100 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral action time for the Lh adaptation of the motor model of the induction motor.

r1787 Motor model IM Lh adaptation correction value / MotMod Lh corr

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: INDUCTANCE_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the correction value for the Lh adaptation of the motor model for the induction motor.

r1789 Motor model IM Rs adaptation switch-on frequency / MotMod Rs f_on

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
Description: Displays the power-on stator frequency for the Rs adaptation of the induction motor.

r1790 Motor model IM Rs adaptation switch-on slip / MotMod Rs fslip

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
Description: Displays the power-on slip frequency for the Rs adaptation of the induction motor.

r1791 Motor model IM Lh adaptation switch-on frequency / MotMod Lh f_on

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
Description: Displays the power-on stator frequency / primary section frequency for the Lh adaptation of the induction motor.

r1792 Motor model IM Lh adaptation switch-on slip / MotMod Lh fslip

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]
Description: Displays the power-on slip frequency for the Lh adaptation of the induction motor.

1-284  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1795[0...n] Motor model PESM kT adaptation integral action time / MotMod kT Tn

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6731
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: p0528
Min Max Factory setting
10 [ms] 10000 [ms] 100 [ms]
Description: Sets the integral action time for the kT adaptation of the motor model for the synchronous motor.

r1797 Motor model PESM kT adaptation correction value / MotMod kT corr

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 6731
P-Group: Control Units group: Unit selection: -
TORQUE_PER_CURR
Min Max Factory setting
- [Nm/A] - [Nm/A] - [Nm/A]

Description: Displays the correction value for the kT adaptation of the motor model for the synchronous motor.

p1800[0...n] Pulse frequency / Pulse frequency

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: FREQUENCY_P3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1.000 [kHz] 16.000 [kHz] 4.000 [kHz]

Description: Sets the drive converter switching frequency.

This parameter is preset to the rated converter value when the drive is first commissioned.
Dependency: The switching frequency can only be changed in an integer ratio to the current controller sampling rate (p0115[0]).
The minimum pulse frequency is half the value of the current controller sampling rate (current controller frequency).
If a sinusoidal filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3), then the pulse frequency cannot be changed below
the minimum value required for the filter.
Refer to: p0110, p0111, p0112, p0115, p0230
Note: The maximum possible pulse frequency is also determined by the power module being used.
When the pulse frequency is increased, depending on the particular power module, the maximum output current
can be reduced (de-rating, refer to r0067).

r1801 Actual pulse frequency / Pulse freq actual

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: FREQUENCY_P3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [kHz] - [kHz] - [kHz]
Description: Displays the actual converter switching frequency.
Note: The selected pulse frequency (p1800) may be reduced if the drive converter has overload condition (refer to
p0290).
The following applies for vector drives (refer to p0107):
The pulse frequency can also be reduced when changing-over the modulator to an optimized pulse pattern. This is
used to avoid overdriving.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-285

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1802[0...n] Modulator modes / Modulator modes

VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 9 0
Description: Sets the modulator mode.
Values: 0: Automatic changeover SVM/FLB
1: Flat top modulation (FLB)
2: Space vector modulation (SVM)
3: SVM without overmodulation
4: SVM/FLB without overcontrol
5: SVM with pulse frequency reduction
6: SVM/FLB with pulse frequency reduction
7: Edge modulation from 100 Hz
8: Edge modulation from 60 Hz
9: Edge modulation from 28 Hz
Dependency: If a sinusoidal filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3, 4), then only space vector modulation without over-
control can be set as modulation type (p1802 = 3).
Refer to: p0230
Note: When modulation modes are enabled that could lead to overmodulation (p1802 = 0, 1, 2, 5, 6), the modulation
depth must be limited using p1803. The higher the overmodulation, the greater the current ripple and torque ripple.

p1803[0...n] Maximum modulation depth / Modulat depth max

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 6723
P-Group: Modulation Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
20.0 [%] 150.0 [%] 100.0 [%]

Description: Defines the maximum modulation depth.

Note: p1803 = 100 % is the overcontrol limit for space vector modulation (or an ideal drive converter without any switching
delay).
If an optimized pulse pattern is enabled (edge modulation), then the modulation depth is limited to below the output
frequency of 28 Hz as there is no optimized pulse pattern in this range.

p1804[0...n] Filter time constant smoothed modulation index / T_filt mod_idxSmth

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms] 10.0 [ms]

Description: Filter time constant for the smoothed modulation index to change over the modulator mode.

p1806[0...n] Filter time constant Vdc correction / T_filt Vdc_corr

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms] 0.0 [ms]

Description: Sets the filter time constant of the DC link voltage used to calculate the modulation depth.

1-286  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1807 Actual DC-link voltage to calculate the modulation depth / VdcActValMod_depth

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: VOLTAGE_DC Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: DC link voltage that is used to convert the setpoint voltage into an equivalent modulation depth.
Note: P1737 can be used for filtering.

r1808 DC link voltage actual value for V_max calculation / Vdc act val U_max
VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: VOLTAGE_DC Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]

Description: DC link voltage used to determine the maximum possible output voltage.

r1809 Modulator mode actual / Modulator mode act

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the effective modulator mode.

Values: 1: Flat top modulation (FLB)
2: Space vector modulation (SVM)
3: Edge modulation from 28 Hz; 23:3
4: Edge modulation from 28 Hz; 19:1
5: Edge modulation from 60 Hz; 17:3
6: Edge modulation from 60 Hz; 17:1
7: Edge modulation from 100 Hz; 9:2
8: Edge modulation from 100 Hz; 9:1

p1817 Minimum ratio, pulse frequency to the output frequency / Min f_puls / f_max
VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
8.3 15.0 12.5

Description: Sets the minimum ratio between the pulse frequency and the output frequency.
Notice: If the ratio between the pulse frequency and the output frequency is reduced, then oscillations can occur in the out-
put current that can result in significant levels of current ripple with the appropriate negative effects.
Note: When the maximum speed is changed, the pulse frequency P1800 is automatically limited to this minimum ratio. It
is not permissible to reduce the pulse frequency if this would result in this ratio being fallen below.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-287

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1825 Converter valve threshold voltage / Threshold voltage

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Veff] 100.0 [Veff] 1.0 [Veff]
Description: Sets the threshold voltage drop of the valves (power semiconductor devices) to be compensated.
Note: The value is automatically calculated in the motor data identification routine.

p1828 Compensation valve lockout time phase U / Comp t_interl ph U

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: TIME_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 1000000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]

Description: Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase U.

Note: The value is automatically calculated in the motor data identification routine.

p1829 Compensation valve lockout time phase V / Comp t_interl ph V

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: TIME_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 1000000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase V.

p1830 Compensation valve lockout time phase W / Comp t_interl ph W

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: TIME_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 1000000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase W.

p1832 Deadtime compensation current level / t_dead_comp I_lev

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [Aeff] 10000.0 [Aeff] 0.0 [Aeff]
Description: Above the current level, the deadtime - resulting from the converter switching delays - is compensated by a previ-
ously calculated, constant value . If the relevant phase current setpoint falls below the absolute value defined by
p1832, the correction value for this phase is continuously reduced.
Dependency: The factor setting of p1832 is automatically set to 0.02 * rated drive converter current (r0207).
If the actual operating frequency exceeds the value of p1831, then p1832 is not applied!

1-288  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1840[0...n] Actual value correction, configuration / ActVal_corr config

VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 0011 bin 0000 bin
Description: Configuration of the actual value correction
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Actual value correction de-activated No Yes -
01 Compares the integrals from modulator and No Yes -
setpoint
Note: During operation (the pulses enabled) the configuration cannot be changed by changing-over drive data sets.

r1841 Actual value correction, status word / ActVal_corr status

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Status of the actual value correction
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Hardware for the actual value correction No Yes -
detected
01 Vector overflow No Yes -
04 -
05 -
06 -
07 -
08 -
09 -
10 -
11 -
12 -
13 -
14 -
15 Actual value correction active No Yes -

p1845[0...n] Actual value correction evaluation factor Lsig / ActV_corr FactLsig

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 10.00 1.50

Description: Sets the weighting factor for the leakage inductance of the L-R element of the actual value correction.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-289

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1846[0...n] Actual value correction damping factor / ActV_corr D_factor

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 10.00 1.00
Description: Sets the damping factor for the actual value correction.
The factor multiplies the T0/Tsig ratio in the feedback branch of the LR element

r1848[0...5] Actual value correction, phase currents / ActVal_corr I_corr

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays phase correction currents as well as the drive converter phase currents
Index: [0] = Harmonics, phase U
[1] = Harmonics, phase V
[2] = Harmonics, phase W
[3] = Meas. val. phase U
[4] = Meas. val. phase V
[5] = Meas. val. phase W

r1849[0...5] Actual value correction, phase voltages / ActVal_corr V_corr

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the phase correction voltages and and the drive converter phase voltages
Index: [0] = Harmonics, phase U
[1] = Harmonics, phase V
[2] = Harmonics, phase W
[3] = Meas. val. phase U
[4] = Meas. val. phase V
[5] = Meas. val. phase W

1-290  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1900 Motor data identification routine and speed controller optimization / MotID and n_opt
VECTOR Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 2
Description: Sets the motor data identification and speed/velocity controller optimization.
p1900 = 0:
Function inhibited.
p1900 = 1: (sets p1910 = 1 and p1960 = 0, 1, 2 depending on the setting of p1300)
When the drive enable signals are present, a motor data identification routine is carried-out with the next power-on
command. Current flows through the motor which means that it can align itself by up to a quarter of a revolution.
With the subsequent power-on command, the speed/velocity controller is optimized by making various measure-
ments with different motor speeds/velocities.
p1900 = 2: (sets p1910 = 1)
When the drive enable signals are present, a motor data identification routine is carried-out with the next power-on
command. Current flows through the motor which means that it can align itself by up to a quarter of a revolution.
Values: 0: Inhibited
1: Identification of motor data and controller optimization with the motor rotating
2: Motor data identification
Dependency: Refer to: p1300, p1910, p1960
Refer to: A07980, A07981, A07982, A07983, A07984, A07985, F07986, A07987, A07988, F07990, A07991
Notice: In order to permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971,
p0977).
Note: An appropriate alarm is output when the parameter is set.
The power-on command must remain set during a measurement and after the measurement has been completed,
the drive automatically resets it.
The duration of the measurements can lie between 10 s and several minutes. This time is, for example, influenced
by the motor size and the mechanical conditions.
p1990 is automatically set to 0 after the motor data identification routine has been completed.

p1909[0...n] Motor data identification control word / MotID STW

VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 bin 0000 bin

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP

00 Estimates the stator inductance, no mea- No Yes -
surement
01 Cl.-loop current control w/ dead-beat con- No Yes -
troller
02 Estimates the rotor time constant, no mea- No Yes -
surement
03 Estimates the leakage inductance, no mea- No Yes -
surement
04 Activ.identificat.dyn.leakage induct. No Yes -
05 Determine Tr. Lsig evaluation in the time No Yes -
range
06 Activates vibration damping No Yes -
07 De-activates the vibration detection No Yes -

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-291

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1910 Motor data identification selection / MotID selection

VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 20 1
Description: Sets the motor data identification routine.
The motor data identification routine is carried-out after the next power-on command.
p1910 = 1:
All motor data and the drive converter characteristics are identified and then transferred to the following parame-
ters:
p0350, p0354, p0356, p0358, p0360, p1825, p1828
Values: 0: Inhibited
1: Complete identification and acceptance of motor data
2: Complete identification of motor data without acceptance
3: Identification of the saturation characteristic and acceptance
4: Identification of the saturation characteristic without acceptance
5: Identification of dynamic leakage inductance Lsig (r1920) without acceptance
6: Identification of lockout time (r1926) without acceptance
7: Identification of stator resistance Rs (r1912) without acceptance
8: Identification of stator inductance Ls (r1915) without acceptance
9: Identification of rotor time constant Tr (r1913) without acceptance
10: Identification of static leakage inductance Lsig (r1914) without acceptance
20: Voltage vector input
Dependency: "Quick commissioning" must be carried-out (P10 = 1) before executing the motor data identification routine!
Refer to: p1900
Cautiont: After the motor data identification (p1910 > 0) has been selected, alarm A07991 is output and a motor data identifi-
cation routine is carried-out as follows at the next power-on command:
- current flows through the motor and a voltage is present at the drive converter output terminals.
- during the identification routine, the motor shaft can rotate through a maximum of half a revolution.
- however, no torque torque is generated.
Notice: In order to permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971,
p0977).
Note: When setting p1910, the following should be observed:
1. "With transfer" means:
The parameters specified in the description are overwritten with the identified values and therefore have an influ-
ence on the controller setting.
2. "Without transfer" means:
The identified parameters are only displayed in the range r1912 ... r1926. The controller settings remain
unchanged.

p1911 Number of phases to be identified / Phases to be ident

VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 3 1
Description: Selects the number of phases to be identified.
The accuracy of the identification routine is higher if several phases are identified - however, the time required to
make the measurements also increases.
Values: 1: 1 phase U
2: 2 phases U, V
3: 3 phases U, V, W

1-292  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1912[0...2] Identified stator resistance / R_stator ident

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: RESISTANCE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Ohm] - [Ohm] - [Ohm]
Description: Displays the identified stator resistance.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

r1913[0...2] Identified rotor time constant / T_rotor ident

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]

Description: Displays the identified rotor time constant.

Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

r1914[0...2] Identified total leakage inductance / L_total_leak ident

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: INDUCTANCE_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]

Description: Displays the identified total leakage inductance.

Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

r1915[0...2] Identified nominal stator inductance / L_stator ident

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: INDUCTANCE_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the nominal stator inductance identified.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-293

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1916[0...2] Identified stator inductance 1 / L_stator 1 ident

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: INDUCTANCE_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the nominal stator inductance identified for the 1st point of the saturation characteristic.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

r1917[0...2] Identified stator inductance 2 / L_stator 2 ident

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: INDUCTANCE_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]

Description: Displays the nominal stator inductance identified for the 2nd point of the saturation characteristic.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

r1918[0...2] Identified stator inductance 3 / L_stator 3 ident

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: INDUCTANCE_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]

Description: Displays the nominal stator inductance identified for the 3rd point of the saturation characteristic.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

r1919[0...2] Identified stator inductance 4 / L_stator 4 ident

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: INDUCTANCE_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the nominal stator inductance identified for the 4th point of the saturation characteristic.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

1-294  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1920[0...2] Identified dynamic leakage inductance / L_leak dyn ident

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: INDUCTANCE_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Description: Displays the identified dynamic total leakage inductance.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

r1921[0...2] Identified dynamic leakage inductance 1 / L_leak 1 dyn id

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: INDUCTANCE_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]

Index: [0] = Phase U

[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

r1922[0...2] Identified dynamic leakage inductance 2 / L_leak 2 dyn id

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: INDUCTANCE_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

r1923[0...2] Identified dynamic leakage inductance 3 / L_leak 3 dyn id

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: INDUCTANCE_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]

Index: [0] = Phase U

[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-295

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1924[0...2] Identified dynamic leakage inductance 4 / L_leak 4 dyn id

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: INDUCTANCE_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

r1925[0...2] Identified threshold voltage / U_threshold ident

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Veff] - [Veff] - [Veff]
Description: Displays the identified IGBT threshold voltage.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

r1926[0...2] Identified active valve lockout time / t valve interl id

VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: TIME_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [µs] - [µs] - [µs]
Description: Displays the identified effective valve lockout time.
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

p1959 Speed controller optimization configuration / n_opt config

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 0001 1111 bin 0001 1111 bin

Description: Sets the configuration of the automatic speed controller optimization

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Enc test active No Yes -
01 Saturation characteristic identification No Yes -
02 Moment of inertia identification No Yes -
03 Recalculates the speed controller parame- No Yes -
ters
04 Speed controller vibration test No Yes -
Dependency: Refer to: A07988

1-296  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Note: The encoder is only tested if the speed controller optimization with encoder is selected (p1960 = 2).
The following parameters are influenced for the individual optimization steps:
Bit 00: None
Bit 01: p0320, p0360, p0362 ... p0369
Bit 02: p0341, p0342
Bit 03: p1400.0, p1458, p1459, p1460, p1462, p1462, p1463, p1470, p1472, p1496
Bit 04: Dependent on p1960
p1960 = 1: p1400.0, p1458, p1459, p1470, p1472, p1496
p1960 = 2: p1458, p1459, p1460, p1461, p1462, p1463, p1496

p1960 Speed controller optimization selection / n_opt selection

VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0

Description: Sets the speed controller optimization.

After the next power-on command, the speed/velocity controller is automatically optimized.
The setting possibilities of the parameter depend on the open-loop/closed-loop control mode (p1300):
p1300 < 20 (V/f control): It is not possible to select the speed controller optimization routine.
p1300 = 20, 22 (sensorless operation): Only speed controller optimization can be selected in the sensorless mode.
p1300 = 21, 23 (operation with encoder): Both versions (sensorless and with encoder) of the speed controller opti-
mization routine can be selected.
Values: 0: Inhibited
1: Speed controller optimization for sensorless operation
2: Speed controller optimization with encoder
Dependency: Refer to: p1300, p1900, p1959
Refer to: A07987
Notice: In order to permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971,
p0977).
Note: When the speed controller optimization is activated, it is not possible to save the parameters (p0971, p0977).

p1961 Saturation characteristic speed to determine / Sat_char n determ

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
26 [%] 75 [%] 30 [%]
Description: Sets the speed to determine the saturation characteristic and the encoder test.
The percentage value is referred to p0310 (rated motor frequency).
Dependency: Refer to: p0310, p1959
Refer to: A07983
Note: The saturation characteristics should be determined at an operating point with the lowest possible load.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-297

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1962[0...4] Saturation characteristic, magnetizing current / Sat_char I_mag

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the magnetizing currents of the identified saturation characteristic.
The values are referred to r0331.
After they have been determined, the values are transferred to p0366 ... p0369.
Index: [0] = Value 1
[1] = Value 2
[2] = Value 3
[3] = Value 4
[4] = Value 5
Dependency: Refer to: r0331

r1963[0...4] Saturation characteristic, magnetizing inductance / Sat_char L_main

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]

Description: Displays the magnetizing inductances of the identified saturation characteristic.

The values are referred to r0382.
Index: [0] = Value 1
[1] = Value 2
[2] = Value 3
[3] = Value 4
[4] = Value 5
Dependency: Refer to: r0382

r1964[0...4] Saturation characteristic, rotor flux / Sat_char rot flux

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]

Description: Displays the rotor flux values of the identified saturation characteristic.
After they have been determined, the values are transferred to p0362 ... p0365.
Index: [0] = Value 1
[1] = Value 2
[2] = Value 3
[3] = Value 4
[4] = Value 5

1-298  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1965 Speed controller optimization speed / n_opt speed

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
10 [%] 75 [%] 50 [%]
Description: Sets the speed for the identification of the moment of inertia and the vibration test.
Induction motor:
The percentage value is referred to p0310 (rated motor frequency).
Synchronous motor:
The percentage value is referred to the minimum from p0310 (rated motor frequency) and p1082 (maximum
speed).
Dependency: Refer to: p0310, p1959
Refer to: A07984, A07985
Note: In order to calculate the inertia, sudden speed changes are carried-out - the specified value corresponds to the
lower speed setpoint. This value is increased by 10 % for the upper speed value.

p1967 Speed controller optimization dynamic factor / n_opt dyn_factor

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 [%] 400 [%] 100 [%]

Description: Sets the dynamic response factor for speed controller optimization.
Dependency: Refer to: p1959
Refer to: A07985

r1968 Speed controller optimization dynamic factor actual / n_opt dyn_fact act
VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]

Description: Displays the dynamic factor which is actually achieved for the vibration test
Dependency: Refer to: p1959, p1967
Refer to: A07985
Note: This dynamics factor only refers to the control mode of the speed controller set in p1960.

r1969 Speed controller, identified optimization inertia / n_opt M_inert iden

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: INERTIA Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [kgm²] - [kgm²] - [kgm²]

Description: Displays the identified moment of inertia of the drive.

After it has been determined, the value is transferred to p0341, p0342.
Dependency: Refer to: p0341, p0342, p1959
Refer to: A07984

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-299

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1970[0...1] Speed controller optimization vibration test vibration frequency determined /

n_opt f_vibration
VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]

Description: Displays the vibration frequencies determined by the vibration test.

Index: [0] = Frequency low
[1] = Frequency high
Dependency: Refer to: p1959
Refer to: A07985

r1971[0...1] Speed controller optimization vibration test standard deviation determined /

n_opt std. deviat.
VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Hz] - [Hz] - [Hz]

Description: Displays the standard deviations of the vibration frequencies determined by the vibration test
Index: [0] = Standard deviation of low frequency
[1] = Standard deviation of high frequency
Dependency: Refer to: p1959
Refer to: A07985

r1972[0...1] Speed controller optimization vibration test cycle number determined /

n_opt period No.
VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the number of periods determined by the vibration test.

Index: [0] = No. of periods of the low frequency
[1] = No. of periods of the high frequency
Dependency: Refer to: p1959
Refer to: A07985

r1973 Speed controller optimization encoder test pulse number determined /

n_opt pulse No.
VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the number of pulses determined during the vibration test.
Note: A negative signal indicates an incorrect polarity of the encoder signal.

1-300  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1979 BO: Speed controller optimization status / n_opt status

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status to check and monitor the states of speed controller optimization.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Speed controller optimization activated No Yes -
01 Speed controller optimization completed No Yes -
02 Speed controller optimization interrupted No Yes -
04 Enc test active No Yes -
05 Saturation char. identification active No Yes -
06 Moment of inertia identification active No Yes -
07 Recalc. speed controller parameters active No Yes -
08 Speed controller vibration test active No Yes -
09 Magnetizing induction adapt. active No Yes -
10 Operation with encoder after sensorless No Yes -
operation

p1980[0...n] Rotor position identification technique / RotPosID technique

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 10 0

Description: Sets the rotor position identification technique.

Values: 0: Saturation-based 1st+ 2nd harmonics
1: Saturation-based 1st harmonics
2: Saturation-based 1st + 2nd harmonics
3: Saturation-based differential 1st harmonics
4: Saturation-based, 2-stage
5: Saturation-based two-staged differential
10: Reserved
Dependency: Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1981, p1982, p1983, r1984, r1985, r1987
Notice: If the incorrect technique is applied, this can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled fashion.
Note: When commissioning a list motor, the technique is automatically selected depending on the motor type being used.
The following applies for 1FN3 motors:
A technique with a 2nd harmonic may not be used.
For 1FN7 motors, the following applies:
A two-stage technique may not be used.
The automatically set value in p0329 may not be changed.

p1980[0...n] Rotor position identification technique / RotPosID technique

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
10 10 10

Description: Sets the rotor position identification technique.

Values: 10: Current is being impressed, the motor aligns itself

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-301

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1981[0...n] Rotor position identification, maximum movement / RotPosID max movem

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: ANGLE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [°] 90 [°] 10 [°]
Description: Sets the maximum distance when carrying-out the rotor position identification routine. If this distance (travel) is
exceeded, an appropriate fault is output.
Dependency: Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1980, p1982, p1983, r1984, r1985, r1987, p1990
Refer to: F07995

p1982[0...n] Rotor position identification, plausibility check / RotPosID plaus

SERVO Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: MDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0

Description: Activates the rotor position identification routine to determine the commutation angle and to carry-out a plausibility
check.
Values: 0: Rotor position identification off
1: Rotor position identification for commutation
2: Rotor position identification for plausibility check
Recommenda- Re p1982 = 1:
tion: This is used for synchronous motors with motor encoder without absolute data.
The information/data regarding the absolute commutation angle is supplied via a track C/D, Hall sensors, an abso-
lute value encoder or from the rotor position identification routine.
Re p1982 = 2:
This is used for synchronous motor with motor encoder with absolute data to check this data.
Dependency: Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1980, p1981, p1983, r1984, r1985, r1987, p1990

p1983 Rotor position identification, test / RotPosID test

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0

Description: Starts the rotor position identification routine for test purposes.
p1983 = 1: Start - is automatically set to zero after being carried-out.
Dependency: Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1980, p1981, p1982, r1984, r1985, r1987, p1990
Notice: For p1983 = 1 and if the pulses are not enabled, then the function is only executed the next time that the pulses are
enabled.
Note: When this test is executed, it does not influence the commutation angle.

1-302  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r1984 Rotor position identification, angular difference / RotPosID ang diff

SERVO Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: ANGLE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°] - [°] - [°]
Description: Displays the angular difference between the actual electrical commutation angle and the angle determined by the
rotor position identification.
Dependency: Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1980, p1981, p1982, p1983, r1985, r1987, p1990
Note: When the rotor position identification routine is executed several times using p1983, then using this value, then the
spread of the measured values can be determined using this value. At the same position, the spread should be less
than 2 degrees electrical.

r1984 Rotor position identification, angular difference / RotPosID ang diff

VECTOR (n/M) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: ANGLE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°] - [°] - [°]

Description: Displays the electrical angular difference: Determined angular rotor position identification minus the encoder angle.

r1985 Rotor position identification, saturation characteristic / RotPosID sat_curve

SERVO Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the saturation characteristic of the rotor position identification routine.
The values for the characteristic of the last rotor position identification routine are output every 1 ms in order to
record signals (e.g. trace).
Dependency: Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1980, p1981, p1982, p1983, r1984, r1987, p1990

r1987 Rotor position identification trigger characteristic / RotPosID trig_curv

SERVO Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]

Description: Displays the trigger characteristic of the rotor position identification routine.
The values for the characteristic of the last rotor position identification routine are output every 1 ms in order to
record signals (e.g. trace).
The values for the trigger characteristic and the saturation characteristic are always output in synchronism from a
time perspective.
Dependency: Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1980, p1981, p1982, p1983, r1984, r1985
Note: The following information and data can be taken from the trigger characteristic.
- the value -100% marks the angle at the start of the measurement.
- the value +100 % marks the commutation angle determined from the rotor position identification routine.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-303

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p1990 Rotor position identification angular commutation offset, commissioning /

RotPosID offs comm
SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0

Description: Activates the commissioning help to determine the angular commutation offset for the active motor. This function
can be started when commissioning a build-in motor for the first time or after the encoder has been replaced.
p1990 = 1: Activates the routine to determine the angular commutation offset
Fault F07415 is output due to this being activated.
p1990 is automatically set to 0 after the angular commutation offset has been determined.
Dependency: Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1980, p1981, p1982, p1983, r1984, r1985, r1987
Refer to: N07415
Notice: For p1990 = 1 and with the pulses not enabled, the function is only executed the next time that the pulses are
enabled.
Note: For motor encoders with zero mark, the following applies:
Before activation, the motor must be moved over the zero mark (either in sensorless operation or manually).
If fault F07414 is present, the following applies:
First set p1990 to 1, then acknowledge the fault and then issue the enable signals.
The following generally applies:
This function provides a result that is suitable to operate the motor. A better result can be achieved by operating
under no-load conditions at a speed > p1752 (operation with encoder) or p1755 (sensorless operation) and trans-
ferring from r1778 into p0431. As an alternative, the average value can be determined from several results of the
rotor position identification run as test (p1983) for various electrical angles and then entered into p0431).

p1990 Encoder adjustment selection / Encod adjust sel

VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Activates the automatic encoder adjustment
The adjustment value determined is saved in p0431.
Values: 0: Encoder adjustment de-activated
1: Enc adjust. active
Dependency: Refer to: p0431
Note: p1990 is automatically set to 0 after the encoder has been adjusted.

1-304  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2000 Reference frequency / Ref freq

A_INF, B_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.10 [Hz] 1000.00 [Hz] 50.00 [Hz]
Description: Sets the reference quantity for the frequency.
All frequencies specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity in this parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
The following applies: Reference frequency (in Hz).

p2000 Reference speed reference frequency / Ref_n Ref_f

SERVO, TM41, Can be changed: T Access level: 2
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
6.00 [1/min] 210000.00 [1/min] 3000.00 [1/min]

Description: Sets the reference quantity for speed/velocity and frequency.

All speeds/velocities or frequencies specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity in this parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
The following applies: Reference frequency (in Hz) = reference speed/velocity (in (RPM) / 60)
Dependency: Refer to: p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004
Note: If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quanti-
ties are used as internal conversion factor.
Example 1:
The signal of an analog input (e.g. r4055[0]) is connected to a speed setpoint (e.g. p1070[0]). The actual percent-
age input value is cyclically converted into the absolute speed setpoint using the reference speed (p2000).
Example 2:
The setpoint from PROFIBUS (r2050[1]) is connected to a speed setpoint (e.g. p1070[0]). The current input value is
cyclically converted into a percentage value via the pre-specified normalization 4000H. This percentage value is
converted to the absolute speed setpoint via reference speed (p2000).

p2001 Reference voltage / Reference voltage

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: T Access level: 3
SERVO, TM41, Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
VECTOR
P-Group: Communication Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
10 [Veff] 10000 [Veff] 1000 [Veff]

Description: Sets the reference quantity for voltages.

All voltages specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity in this parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
Note: If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quanti-
ties are used as internal conversion factor.
For infeed units, the parameterized device supply voltage (p0210) is pre-assigned as the reference quantity.
Example:
The actual value of the DC link voltage (r0079[0]) is connected to a test socket (e.g. p0771[0]). The actual voltage
value is cyclically converted into a percentage of the reference voltage (p2001) and output according to the param-
eterized scaling.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-305

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2002 Reference current / Reference current

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: T Access level: 3
SERVO, TM41, Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
VECTOR
P-Group: Communication Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.10 [Aeff] 10000.00 [Aeff] 100.00 [Aeff]
Description: Sets the reference quantity for currents.
All currents specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity in this parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
Note: If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quanti-
ties are used as internal conversion factor.
For infeed units, the rated line current, that is obtained from the rated power and parameterized rated line supply
voltage (p2002 = r0206 / p0210 / 1.73) is pre-assigned as the reference quantity.
Example:
The actual value of a phase current (r0069[0]) is connected to a test socket (e.g. p0771[0]). The actual current
value is cyclically converted into a percentage of the reference current (p2002) and output according to the param-
eterized scaling.

p2003 Reference torque / Reference torque

SERVO, TM41, Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 200000.00 [Nm] 1.00 [Nm]

Description: Sets the reference quantity for torques/forces.

All torques/forces specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity in this parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
Note: If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quanti-
ties are used as internal conversion factor.
Example:
The actual value of the total torque (r0079[0]) is connected to a test socket (e.g. p0771[0]). The actual torque is
cyclically converted into a percentage of the reference torque (p2003) and output according to the parameterized
scaling.

r2004 Reference power / Reference power

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
SERVO, TM41, Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
VECTOR
P-Group: Communication Units group: POWER_P3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [kW] - [kW] - [kW]

Description: Displays the reference quantity for power ratings.

All power ratings specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity in this parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
Dependency: This value is calculated as voltage x current for the infeed and as torque x speed for closed-loop controls.
Refer to: p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003
Note: If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quanti-
ties are used as internal conversion factor.
The reference power is calculated as follows:
- reference speed * reference torque (motor)
- reference voltage * reference current * root(3) (infeed)

1-306  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r2032 Master control, control word effective / PcCtrl STW eff

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 2
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the effective control word 1 (STW1) of the drive for the master control.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 ON/OFF1 No Yes -
01 OC / OFF2 No Yes -
02 OC / OFF3 No Yes -
03 Enable operation No Yes -
04 Enables the ramp-function generator No Yes -
05 Start ramp-function generator No Yes -
06 Enable speed setpoint No Yes -
07 Acknowledge fault No Yes -
08 Jog bit 0 No Yes 3030
09 Jog bit 1 No Yes 3030
10 Master ctrl by PLC No Yes -
11 Direction reversal No Yes -
12 Enable speed controller No Yes -
13 Motorized potentiometer, raise No Yes -
14 Motorized potentiometer, lower No Yes -
15 CDS bit 0 No Yes -
Note: The master control is used from the commissioning software (drive control panel) and from the advanced operator
panel (AOP, local mode).

p2037 PROFIBUS STW1.10 = 0 mode / PB STW1.10=0 mode

SERVO, TM41, Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0

Description: Sets the processing mode for PROFIBUS STW1.10 "Control from PLC".
Generally, control world 1 is received with the first PROFIBUS receive word (PZD1) (this is in conformance to the
PROFIdrive profile). The behavior of STW1.10 = 0 corresponds to that of the PROFIdrive profile. For other applica-
tions that deviate from this, the behavior can be adapted using this particular parameter.
Values: 0: Freeze setpoints and continue to process sign-of-life
1: Freeze setpoints and sign-of-life
2: Setpoints are not frozen
Note: If the STW1 is not transferred according to the PROFIDRIVE profile with PZD1 (with bit 10 "control by the PLC"),
then P2037 should be set to 2.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-307

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2038 PROFIBUS STW/ZSW interface mode / PB STW/ZSW interf

SERVO Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Sets the interface mode of the PROFIBUS control and status words.
When selecting a telegram via p0922, this parameter influences the device-specific assignment of the bits in the
control and status words.
Values: 0: SINAMICS
1: SIMODRIVE 611 universal
Dependency: Refer to: p0922
Note: For p0922 = 100 ... 199, p2038 is automatically set to 1 and p2038 can no longer be changed. This means that for
these telegrams, the "SIMODRIVE 611 universal" interface mode is set and cannot be changed.

p2039 Select debug monitor interface / Sel. debug monitor

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0

Description: The serial interface for the debug monitor is COM1 (X140) or COM2 (internal).
Value = 0: COM2 (internal)
Value = 1: COM1 (X140), PPI is de-activated
Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.

p2041[0...4] PROFIBUS detail settings / PROFIBUS detail

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0

p2045 CI: Clock synchronous PROFIBUS signal source for master sign-of-life /
PB S_Src mast SoL
SERVO, TM41 Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2444
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Connector input for the sign-of-life of the clock synchronous PROFIBUS master.
The sign-of-life is expected at bits 12 to 15. Bits 0 to 11 are not evaluated.
The sign-of-life signal is normally received in PZD4 (control word 2) from the PROFIBUS master.
Dependency: Refer to: p0925, r2065

1-308  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r2050[0...4] CO: PROFIBUS PZD receive word / PB PZD recv word

A_INF, B_INF, CU, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
TB30, TM31 Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with word format received from the PROFIBUS master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5

r2050[0...15] CO: PROFIBUS PZD receive word / PB PZD recv word

SERVO, TM41, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 2440,
2460
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with word format received from the PROFIBUS master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Dependency: Refer to: r2060

p2051[0...4] CI: PROFIBUS PZD send word / PB PZD send word

A_INF, B_INF, CU, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
TB30, TM31 Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) with word format to be sent to the PROFIBUS master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-309

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2051[0...15] CI: PROFIBUS PZD send word / PB PZD send word

SERVO, TM41, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2470
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) with word format to be sent to the PROFIBUS master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Dependency: Refer to: p2061

r2053[0...4] PROFIBUS diagnostics send PZD word / PB diag send word

A_INF, B_INF, CU, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
TB30, TM31 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the PZD (actual values) with word format sent to the PROFIBUS master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Off On -
01 Bit 1 Off On -
02 Bit 2 Off On -
03 Bit 3 Off On -
04 Bit 4 Off On -
05 Bit 5 Off On -
06 Bit 6 Off On -
07 Bit 7 Off On -
08 Bit 8 Off On -
09 Bit 9 Off On -
10 Bit 10 Off On -
11 Bit 11 Off On -
12 Bit 12 Off On -
13 Bit 13 Off On -
14 Bit 14 Off On -
15 Bit 15 Off On -

1-310  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r2053[0...15] PROFIBUS diagnostics send PZD word / PB diag send word

SERVO, TM41, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 2450,
2470
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the PZD (actual values) with word format sent to the PROFIBUS master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Off On -
01 Bit 1 Off On -
02 Bit 2 Off On -
03 Bit 3 Off On -
04 Bit 4 Off On -
05 Bit 5 Off On -
06 Bit 6 Off On -
07 Bit 7 Off On -
08 Bit 8 Off On -
09 Bit 9 Off On -
10 Bit 10 Off On -
11 Bit 11 Off On -
12 Bit 12 Off On -
13 Bit 13 Off On -
14 Bit 14 Off On -
15 Bit 15 Off On -
Dependency: Refer to: p2051, p2061

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-311

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r2054 PROFIBUS status / PB status

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 2410
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Status display for the PROFIBUS interface.
Values: 0: Off
1: No connection (baud rate search)
2: Connection O. K. (baud rate found)
3: Cyclic connection with master (data exchange)
4: Cyclic data O. K.
Note: Re r2054 = 3:
In state 3 (the LED flashes green), a cyclic connection has been established to the PROFIBUS master; however,
one of the following prerequisites is missing for cyclic operation:
- No setpoints are being received as the PROFIBUS master is in the STOP condition.
Only for clock-cycle synchronous operation:
- The drive is not in synchronism as the global control (GC) has an error.
- The master sign-of-life (r2050[3], r2093.12-15) is not being correctly received on a drive object SERVO. Possible
causes:
- the sign-of-life is completely missing.
- the sign of life is not incremented in the Tmapc (r2064[2]) cycle.
- the sign-of-life (p2045) has not been correctly interconnected (r2050[3]).
The OK status can be identified on a SERVO drive object if the drive increments the slave sign-of-life (r2053[3].12-
15).

Re r2054 = 4:
In the status 4 (LED green), the cyclic connection to the PROFIBUS master has been established and setpoints are
being received. The clock cycle synchronization is OK - sign-of-life characters are being received and sent at all
SERVO drive objects.

r2055[0...2] PROFIBUS diagnostics standard / PB diag standard

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 2410
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Diagnostics display for the PROFIBUS interface.
Index: [0] = Master bus address
[1] = Master input total length bytes
[2] = Master output total length bytes

1-312  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r2056[0...19] PROFIBUS diagnostics expert / PB diag experts

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

r2060[0...14] CO: PROFIBUS PZD receive double word / PB PZD recv DW

SERVO, TM41, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Integer32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2440,
2460
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with double word format received from the PROFIBUS master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 +10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16
Dependency: Refer to: r2050

p2061[0...14] CI: PROFIBUS PZD send double word / PB PZD send DW

SERVO, TM41, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2470
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) with double word format to be sent to the PROFIBUS master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 +10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16
Dependency: Refer to: p2051

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-313

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r2063[0...14] PROFIBUS diagnostics PZD send double word / PB diag send DW

SERVO, TM41, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2450,
2470
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the PZD (actual values) with double word format sent to the PROFIBUS master.
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 +10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Off On -
01 Bit 1 Off On -
02 Bit 2 Off On -
03 Bit 3 Off On -
04 Bit 4 Off On -
05 Bit 5 Off On -
06 Bit 6 Off On -
07 Bit 7 Off On -
08 Bit 8 Off On -
09 Bit 9 Off On -
10 Bit 10 Off On -
11 Bit 11 Off On -
12 Bit 12 Off On -
13 Bit 13 Off On -
14 Bit 14 Off On -
15 Bit 15 Off On -
16 Bit 16 Off On -
17 Bit 17 Off On -
18 Bit 18 Off On -
19 Bit 19 Off On -
20 Bit 20 Off On -
21 Bit 21 Off On -
22 Bit 22 Off On -
23 Bit 23 Off On -
24 Bit 24 Off On -
25 Bit 25 Off On -
26 Bit 26 Off On -
27 Bit 27 Off On -
28 Bit 28 Off On -
29 Bit 29 Off On -
30 Bit 30 Off On -
31 Bit 31 Off On -

1-314  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r2064[0...7] PROFIBUS diagnostics clock synchronous mode / PB diag clock sync

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2410
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the last parameter received from the PROFIBUS master for clock synchronism.
The parameters for clock synchronism are created when configuring the bus and are transferred at the start of
cyclic operation from the PROFIBUS master to the slave.
Index: [0] = Clock synchronous mode activated
[1] = Bus cycle time (Tdp) [µs]
[2] = Master cycle time (Tmapc) [µs]
[3] = Instant of actual value acquisition (Ti) [µs]
[4] = Instant of setpoint acquisition (To) [µs]
[5] = Data exchange interval (Tdx) [µs]
[6] = PLL window (Tpll-w) [1/12 µs]
[7] = PLL delay time (Tpll-d) [1/12 µs]

r2065 PROFIBUS diagnostics master sign-of-life / PB diag master SoL

SERVO, TM41 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 2410
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays how often the sign-of-life from the clock synchronous PROFIBUS master failed. An appropriate fault is out-
put when the tolerance, specified in p0925, is exceeded.
Dependency: Refer to: F01912

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-315

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r2075[0...4] PROFIBUS diagnostics telegram offset PZD receive / PB diag offs recv
A_INF, B_INF, CU, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
TB30, TM31 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: PZD byte offset in the PROFIBUS receive telegram (master output).
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
Note: Value range:
0 - 242: Byte offset
255: Not occupied

r2075[0...15] PROFIBUS diagnostics telegram offset PZD receive / PB diag offs recv
SERVO, TM41, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: PZD byte offset in the PROFIBUS receive telegram (master output).
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Note: Value range:
0 - 242: Byte offset
255: Not occupied

1-316  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r2076[0...4] PROFIBUS PZD diagnostics telegram offset send / PB diag offs send
A_INF, B_INF, CU, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
TB30, TM31 Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: PZD byte offset in the PROFIBUS send telegram (master input).
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
Note: Value range:
0 - 242: Byte offset
255: Not occupied

r2076[0...15] PROFIBUS PZD diagnostics telegram offset send / PB diag offs send
SERVO, TM41, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: PZD byte offset in the PROFIBUS send telegram (master input).
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Note: Value range:
0 - 242: Byte offset
255: Not occupied

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-317

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2080[0...15] BI: PROFIBUS send status word 1 / PB STW1 bit sel.

A_INF, B_INF, CU, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
SERVO, TB30, Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2472
TM31, TM41,
VECTOR P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIBUS master. The individual bits are combined to form status word 1.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency: Refer to: p2088, r2089

p2081[0...15] BI: PROFIBUS send status word 2 / PB STW2 bit sel.

A_INF, B_INF, CU, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
SERVO, TB30, Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2472
TM31, TM41,
VECTOR P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0

Description: Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIBUS master. The individual bits are combined to form status word 2.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency: Refer to: p2088, r2089
Note: When using the clock synchronous (isosynchronous) PROFIBUS with sign-of-life in status word 2, bit 12 to 15 are
reserved to transfer the sign-of-life and may not be freely interconnected.

1-318  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2082[0...15] BI: PROFIBUS send free status word 3 / PB ZSW3 bit sel.
A_INF, B_INF, CU, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
SERVO, TB30, Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2472
TM31, TM41,
VECTOR P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIBUS master. The individual bits are combined to form free status word 3.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency: Refer to: p2088, r2089

p2083[0...15] BI: PROFIBUS send free status word 4 / PB ZSW4 bit sel.
A_INF, B_INF, CU, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
SERVO, TB30, Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2472
TM31, TM41,
VECTOR P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0

Description: Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIBUS master. The individual bits are combined to form free status word 4.
Index: [0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency: Refer to: p2088, r2089

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-319

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2088[0...3] PROFIBUS invert status word / Invert PB ZSW

A_INF, B_INF, CU, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
SERVO, TB30, Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 2472
TM31, TM41,
VECTOR P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -

Min Max Factory setting

0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin 0000 bin
Description: Setting to invert the individual binector inputs of the binector connector converter.
Index: [0] = Status word 1
[1] = Status word 2
[2] = Free status word 3
[3] = Free status word 4
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Not inverted Inverted -
01 Bit 1 Not inverted Inverted -
02 Bit 2 Not inverted Inverted -
03 Bit 3 Not inverted Inverted -
04 Bit 4 Not inverted Inverted -
05 Bit 5 Not inverted Inverted -
06 Bit 6 Not inverted Inverted -
07 Bit 7 Not inverted Inverted -
08 Bit 8 Not inverted Inverted -
09 Bit 9 Not inverted Inverted -
10 Bit 10 Not inverted Inverted -
11 Bit 11 Not inverted Inverted -
12 Bit 12 Not inverted Inverted -
13 Bit 13 Not inverted Inverted -
14 Bit 14 Not inverted Inverted -
15 Bit 15 Not inverted Inverted -
Dependency: Refer to: p2080, p2081, p2082, p2083, r2089

r2089[0...3] CO: PROFIBUS send status word / Send PB ZSW

A_INF, B_INF, CU, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
SERVO, TB30, Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 2472
TM31, TM41,
VECTOR P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -

Min Max Factory setting

- - -

Description: Connector output to interconnect the status words to a PROFIBUS PZD send word.
Index: [0] = Status word 1
[1] = Status word 2
[2] = Free status word 3
[3] = Free status word 4
Dependency: Refer to: p2051, p2080, p2081, p2082, p2083
Note: r2089 together with p2080 to p2083 forms four binector-connector converters.

1-320  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r2090 BO: PROFIBUS PZD1 receive bit-serial / PB PZD1 recv bitw

A_INF, B_INF, CU, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
SERVO, TB30, Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 2460
TM31, TM41,
VECTOR P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -

Min Max Factory setting

- - -
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD1 (normally control word 1) received from the PROFIBUS mas-
ter.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Off On -
01 Bit 1 Off On -
02 Bit 2 Off On -
03 Bit 3 Off On -
04 Bit 4 Off On -
05 Bit 5 Off On -
06 Bit 6 Off On -
07 Bit 7 Off On -
08 Bit 8 Off On -
09 Bit 9 Off On -
10 Bit 10 Off On -
11 Bit 11 Off On -
12 Bit 12 Off On -
13 Bit 13 Off On -
14 Bit 14 Off On -
15 Bit 15 Off On -

r2091 BO: PROFIBUS PZD2 received bit-serial / PB PZD2 recv bitw

A_INF, B_INF, CU, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
SERVO, TB30, Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 2460
TM31, TM41,
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
VECTOR
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD2 received from the PROFIBUS master.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Off On -
01 Bit 1 Off On -
02 Bit 2 Off On -
03 Bit 3 Off On -
04 Bit 4 Off On -
05 Bit 5 Off On -
06 Bit 6 Off On -
07 Bit 7 Off On -
08 Bit 8 Off On -
09 Bit 9 Off On -
10 Bit 10 Off On -
11 Bit 11 Off On -
12 Bit 12 Off On -
13 Bit 13 Off On -
14 Bit 14 Off On -
15 Bit 15 Off On -

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-321

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r2092 BO: PROFIBUS PZD3 received bit-serial / PB PZD3 recv bitw

SERVO, TM41, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 2460
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD3 received from the PROFIBUS master.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Off On -
01 Bit 1 Off On -
02 Bit 2 Off On -
03 Bit 3 Off On -
04 Bit 4 Off On -
05 Bit 5 Off On -
06 Bit 6 Off On -
07 Bit 7 Off On -
08 Bit 8 Off On -
09 Bit 9 Off On -
10 Bit 10 Off On -
11 Bit 11 Off On -
12 Bit 12 Off On -
13 Bit 13 Off On -
14 Bit 14 Off On -
15 Bit 15 Off On -

r2093 BO: PROFIBUS PZD4 received bit-serial / PB PZD4 recv bitw

SERVO, TM41, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 2460
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD4 (normally control word 2) received from the PROFIBUS mas-
ter.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Off On -
01 Bit 1 Off On -
02 Bit 2 Off On -
03 Bit 3 Off On -
04 Bit 4 Off On -
05 Bit 5 Off On -
06 Bit 6 Off On -
07 Bit 7 Off On -
08 Bit 8 Off On -
09 Bit 9 Off On -
10 Bit 10 Off On -
11 Bit 11 Off On -
12 Bit 12 Off On -
13 Bit 13 Off On -
14 Bit 14 Off On -
15 Bit 15 Off On -

1-322  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r2094 BO: PROFIBUS PZD received bit-serial / PB PZD recv bitw

A_INF, B_INF, CU, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
SERVO, TB30, Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 2460
TM31, TM41,
VECTOR P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -

Min Max Factory setting

- - -
Description: Binector output for bit-serial onward interconnection of a PZD word received from the PROFIBUS master . The PZD
is selected via p2099[0].
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Off On -
01 Bit 1 Off On -
02 Bit 2 Off On -
03 Bit 3 Off On -
04 Bit 4 Off On -
05 Bit 5 Off On -
06 Bit 6 Off On -
07 Bit 7 Off On -
08 Bit 8 Off On -
09 Bit 9 Off On -
10 Bit 10 Off On -
11 Bit 11 Off On -
12 Bit 12 Off On -
13 Bit 13 Off On -
14 Bit 14 Off On -
15 Bit 15 Off On -
Dependency: Refer to: p2099

r2095 BO: PROFIBUS PZD received bit-serial / PB PZD recv bitw

A_INF, B_INF, CU, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
SERVO, TB30, Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 2460
TM31, TM41,
VECTOR P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -

Min Max Factory setting

- - -
Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of a PZD word received from the PROFIBUS master. The PZD is
selected via p2099[1].
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Off On -
01 Bit 1 Off On -
02 Bit 2 Off On -
03 Bit 3 Off On -
04 Bit 4 Off On -
05 Bit 5 Off On -
06 Bit 6 Off On -
07 Bit 7 Off On -
08 Bit 8 Off On -
09 Bit 9 Off On -
10 Bit 10 Off On -
11 Bit 11 Off On -
12 Bit 12 Off On -
13 Bit 13 Off On -
14 Bit 14 Off On -
15 Bit 15 Off On -
Dependency: Refer to: p2099

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-323

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2098[0...1] Invert connector-binector converter bit-serial / CI_BO conv inv

A_INF, B_INF, CU, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
SERVO, TB30, Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 2460
TM31, TM41,
VECTOR P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -

Min Max Factory setting

0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin 0000 bin
Description: Setting to invert the individual binector outputs of the connector-binector converter.
Using p2098[0], the signals of CI: p2099[0] are influenced.
Using p2098[1], the signals of CI: p2099[1] are influenced.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Not inverted Inverted -
01 Bit 1 Not inverted Inverted -
02 Bit 2 Not inverted Inverted -
03 Bit 3 Not inverted Inverted -
04 Bit 4 Not inverted Inverted -
05 Bit 5 Not inverted Inverted -
06 Bit 6 Not inverted Inverted -
07 Bit 7 Not inverted Inverted -
08 Bit 8 Not inverted Inverted -
09 Bit 9 Not inverted Inverted -
10 Bit 10 Not inverted Inverted -
11 Bit 11 Not inverted Inverted -
12 Bit 12 Not inverted Inverted -
13 Bit 13 Not inverted Inverted -
14 Bit 14 Not inverted Inverted -
15 Bit 15 Not inverted Inverted -
Dependency: Refer to: r2094, r2095, p2099
Note: Bit x = 1: Inverts the appropriate binector output.
Bit x = 0: No inversion.

p2099[0...1] CI: PROFIBUS PZD selection receive bit-serial / Select CO_BO conv
A_INF, B_INF, CU, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
SERVO, TB30, Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2460
TM31, TM41,
VECTOR P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -

Min Max Factory setting

- - 0
Description: Selects a PROFIBUS PZD receive word for bit-serial interconnection.
Dependency: Refer to: r2094, r2095
Note: p2099 together with r2094 and r2095 forms two connector-binector converters:
Connector input p2099[0] to binector outputs in r2094
Connector input p2099[1] to binector outputs in r2094

1-324  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2100[0...19] Setting the fault number for fault response / F_no F response
All objects Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1750,
8075
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0

Description: Selects the faults for which the fault response should be changed
Dependency: The fault is selected and the required response is set under the same index.
Refer to: p2101
Notice: It is not possible to re-parameterize the fault response to a fault in the following cases:
- if there is no existing fault number.
- the message type is not "fault" (F).
- when a fault is present.

p2101[0...19] Setting the fault response / Fault response

All objects Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1750,
8075
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 7 0

Description: Sets the fault response for the selected fault.

Values: 0: NONE
1: OFF1
2: OFF2
3: OFF3
4: STOP1 (being developed)
5: STOP2
6: DCBRAKE (being developed)
7: ENCODER (p0491)
Dependency: The fault is selected and the required response is set under the same index.
Refer to: p2100
Notice: It is not possible to re-parameterize the response to a specific fault for faults that are already present (queued).
Note: OFF1:
Braking along the ramp-function generator down ramp followed by a pulse inhibit.
OFF2:
Internal/external pulse inhibit.
OFF3:
Braking along the OFF3 down ramp followed by a pulse inhibit.
STOP2:
n_set = 0
The fault response can only be changed for faults with the appropriate identification.
Example:
F12345 and fault response = NONE (OFF1, OFF2) --> The NONE fault response can be changed to either OFF1 or
OFF2.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-325

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2103 BI: 1. Acknowledge faults / 1. Acknowledge

CU, TB30, TM15, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
TM17, TM31 Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the first signal source to acknowledge faults.
Note: A fault acknowledgment is triggered with a 0/1 signal.

p2103[0...n] BI: 1. Acknowledge faults / 1. Acknowledge

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
SERVO, TM41, Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2442,
VECTOR 2443, 2546, 8920
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the first signal source to acknowledge faults.

Note: A fault acknowledgment is triggered with a 0/1 signal.

p2104 BI: 2. Acknowledge faults / 2. Acknowledge

CU, TB30, TM15, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
TM17, TM31 Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the second signal source to acknowledge faults.

Note: A fault acknowledgment is triggered with a 0/1 signal.

p2104[0...n] BI: 2. Acknowledge faults / 2. Acknowledge

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
SERVO, TM41, Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2546,
VECTOR 8920
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the second signal source to acknowledge faults.

Note: A fault acknowledgment is triggered with a 0/1 signal.

1-326  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2105 BI: 3. Acknowledge faults / 3. Acknowledge

CU, TB30, TM15, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
TM17, TM31 Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the third signal source to acknowledge faults.
Note: A fault acknowledgment is triggered with a 0/1 signal.

p2105[0...n] BI: 3. Acknowledge faults / 3. Acknowledge

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
SERVO, TM41, Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2546,
VECTOR 8920
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the third signal source to acknowledge faults.

Note: A fault acknowledgment is triggered with a 0/1 signal.

p2106 BI: External fault 1 / External fault 1

CU, TB30, TM15, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
TM17, TM31 Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for external fault 1.

Dependency: External fault 1 --> F07860(A)
Refer to: F07860
Note: An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal.

p2106[0...n] BI: External fault 1 / External fault 1

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
SERVO, TM41, Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2546
VECTOR
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for external fault 1.

Dependency: External fault 1 --> F07860(A)
Refer to: F07860
Note: An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-327

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2107 BI: External fault 2 / External fault 2

CU, TB30, TM15, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
TM17, TM31 Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for external fault 2.
Dependency: External fault 2 --> F07861(A)
Refer to: F07861
Note: An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal.

p2107[0...n] BI: External fault 2 / External fault 2

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
SERVO, TM41, Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2546
VECTOR
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for external fault 2.

Dependency: External fault 2 --> F07861(A)
Refer to: F07861
Note: An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal.

p2108 BI: External fault 3 / External fault 3

CU, TB30, TM15, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
TM17, TM31 Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for external fault 3.
Dependency: External fault 3 --> F07862(A)
Refer to: F07862
Note: An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal.

p2108[0...n] BI: External fault 3 / External fault 3

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
SERVO, TM41, Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2546
VECTOR
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for external fault 3.

Dependency: External fault 3 --> F07862(A)
Refer to: F07862
Note: An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal.

1-328  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r2109[0...63] Fault time removed in milliseconds / t_flt resolved ms

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1750,
8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]

Description: Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the fault was removed.
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2114, r2130, r2133, r2136

r2110[0...7] Alarm number / Alarm number

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 8065
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: This parameter is identical to r2122.

p2111 Alarm counter / Alarm counter

All objects Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1750,
8065
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0

Description: Number of alarms that have occurred after the last reset.
Dependency: The alarm buffer is deleted (cleared) by setting p2111 to 0.
Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125
Note: The parameter is reset to 0 at POWER ON.

p2112 BI: External alarm 1 / External alarm 1

CU, TB30, TM15, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
TM17, TM31 Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 1.

Dependency: External alarm 1 --> A07850(F)
Refer to: A07850
Note: An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-329

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2112[0...n] BI: External alarm 1 / External alarm 1

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
SERVO, TM41, Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2546
VECTOR
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 1.
Dependency: External alarm 1 --> A07850(F)
Refer to: A07850
Note: An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal.

r2114[0...1] System runtime total / t_System total

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the total system runtime for the drive unit.
Index 0 indicates the system runtime in milliseconds after reaching 86.400.000 ms (24 hours), the value is reset.
Index 1 indicates the system runtime in days.
Dependency: Refer to: r0948, r2109, r2123, r2125, r2130, r2136, r2145, r2146
Note: The time in r2114 is used to display the fault and alarm times.
At power-off the counter value is saved.
After the drive unit is powered-up, the counter continues to run with the value that was saved the last time that the
drive unit was powered-down.

p2116 BI: External alarm 2 / External alarm 2

CU, TB30, TM15, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
TM17, TM31 Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 2.

Dependency: External alarm 2 --> A07851(F)
Refer to: A07851
Note: An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal.

p2116[0...n] BI: External alarm 2 / External alarm 2

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
SERVO, TM41, Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2546
VECTOR
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 2.

Dependency: External alarm 2 --> A07851(F)
Refer to: A07851
Note: An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal.

1-330  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2117 BI: External alarm 3 / External alarm 3

CU, TB30, TM15, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
TM17, TM31 Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 3.
Dependency: External alarm 3 --> A07852(F)
Refer to: A07852
Note: An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal.

p2117[0...n] BI: External alarm 3 / External alarm 3

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
SERVO, TM41, Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 2546
VECTOR
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1

Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 3.

Dependency: External alarm 3 --> A07852(F)
Refer to: A07852
Note: An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal.

p2118[0...19] Sets the message number for message type. / Msg_no Msg_type
All objects Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1750,
8075
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0

Description: Selects faults or alarms for which the message type should be changed.
Dependency: Selects the fault or alarm selection and sets the required type of message realized under the same index.
Refer to: p2119
Notice: It is not possible to re-parameterize the message type in the following cases:
- if there is no existing message number.
- if a message is present.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-331

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2119[0...19] Setting the message type / Message type

All objects Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1750,
8075
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 3 1

Description: Sets the message type for the selected fault or alarm.
Values: 1: Fault (F)
2: Alarm (A)
3: No message (N)
Dependency: Selects the fault or alarm selection and sets the required type of message realized under the same index.
Refer to: p2118
Notice: It is not possible to re-parameterize the message type for the existing faults or alarms.
Note: The message type can only be changed for messages with the appropriate identification.
Example:
F12345(A) --> Fault F12345 can be changed to alarm A12345.
In this case, the message number that may be possibly entered in p2100[0...19] and p2126[0...19] is automatically
removed.

r2120 Sum of fault and alarm buffer changes / Sum buffer changed
All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 8065
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the sum of all of the fault and alarm buffer changes in the drive unit.
Dependency: Refer to: r0944, r2121

r2121 Counter, alarm buffer changes / Alrm buff changed

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 8065
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: This counter is incremented every time the alarm buffer changes.
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125

r2122[0...7] Alarm code / Alarm code

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1750,
8065
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the number of alarms that have occurred.

Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146
Note: Alarm buffer structure (general principle):
r2122[0], r2124[0], r2123[0], r2125[0] --> alarm 1 (the oldest)
...
r2122[7], r2124[7], r2123[7], r2125[7] --> Alarm 8 (the latest)

1-332  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r2123[0...7] Alarm time received in milliseconds / t_alarm recv ms

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1750,
8065
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the alarm occurred.
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2114, r2122, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146

r2124[0...7] Alarm value / Alarm value

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1750,
8065
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays additional information about the active alarm (as integer number).
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146

r2125[0...7] Alarm time removed in milliseconds / t_alarm res ms

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1750,
8065
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the alarm was cleared.
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2114, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2134, r2145, r2146

p2126[0...19] Setting fault number for acknowledge mode / Fault_no ackn_mode

All objects Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1750,
8075
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
Description: Selects the faults for which the acknowledge mode is to be changed
Dependency: Selects the faults and sets the required acknowledge mode realized under the same index
Refer to: p2127
Notice: It is not possible to re-parameterize the acknowledge mode of a fault in the following cases:
- if there is no existing fault number.
- the message type is not "fault" (F).
- when a fault is present.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-333

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2127[0...19] Sets acknowledgment mode / Acknowledge mode

All objects Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1750,
8075
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 2 1

Description: Sets the acknowledge mode for selected fault.

Values: 1: Acknowledgment is only possible using POWER ON
2: The fault can be IMMEDIATELY acknowledged after the cause has been removed
Dependency: Selects the faults and sets the required acknowledge mode realized under the same index
Refer to: p2126
Notice: It is not possible to re-parameterize the acknowledge mode for existing faults.
Note: 1: POWER ON (POWER_ON)
2: IMMEDIATELY
The acknowledge mode can only be changed for faults with the appropriate identification.
Example:
F12345 and acknowledge mode = POWER ON (IMMEDIATELY) --> The acknowledge mode can be changed from
POWER ON to IMMEDIATELY.

p2128[0...15] Selecting fault/alarm code for trigger / Message trigger

All objects Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1750,
8070
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
Description: Selects faults or alarms which can be used as trigger.
Dependency: Refer to: r2129

1-334  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r2129 CO/BO: Trigger word for faults and alarms / Trigger word
All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1530,
8070
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Trigger signal for the selected faults and alarms

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Trigger signal p2128[0] Off On -
01 Trigger signal p2128[1] Off On -
02 Trigger signal p2128[2] Off On -
03 Trigger signal p2128[3] Off On -
04 Trigger signal p2128[4] Off On -
05 Trigger signal p2128[5] Off On -
06 Trigger signal p2128[6] Off On -
07 Trigger signal p2128[7] Off On -
08 Trigger signal p2128[8] Off On -
09 Trigger signal p2128[9] Off On -
10 Trigger signal p2128[10] Off On -
11 Trigger signal p2128[11] Off On -
12 Trigger signal p2128[12] Off On -
13 Trigger signal p2128[13] Off On -
14 Trigger signal p2128[14] Off On -
15 Trigger signal p2128[15] Off On -
Dependency: If one of the faults or alarms selected in p2128[n] occurs, then the particular bit of this binector output is set.
Refer to: p2128
Note: CO: r2129 = 0 --> None of the selected messages has occurred.
CO: r2129 > 0 --> At least one of the selected messages has occurred.

r2130[0...63] Fault time received in days / t_fault recv days

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the system runtime in days when the fault occurred.
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2114, r2133, r2136

r2131 CO: Actual fault code / Actual fault code

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the code of the oldest active fault.

Note: 0: No fault present.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-335

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r2132 CO: Actual alarm code / Actual alarm code

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 8065
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the code of the last alarm that occurred.
Note: 0: No alarm present.

r2133[0...63] Fault value for float values / Fault val float

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays additional information about the fault that occurred for float values.
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2136
Note: Displays additional information about the safety fault that has occurred (for float values)

r2134[0...7] Alarm value for float values / Alarm value float

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8065
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays additional information about the active alarm for float values.
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2145, r2146

r2135 CO/BO: Status word faults/alarms 2 / ZSW fault/alarm 2

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1530,
2548
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the second status word of faults and alarms.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Fault, encoder 1 No Yes -
01 Fault, encoder 2 No Yes -
02 Fault, encoder 3 No Yes -
12 Fault motor overtemperature No Yes -
13 Fault thermal overload power module No Yes -
14 Alarm, motor overtemperature No Yes -
15 Alarm, power module thermal overload No Yes -

1-336  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r2136[0...63] Fault time removed in days / t_flt resolv. days

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the system runtime in days when the fault was removed.
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2114, r2130, r2133

r2138 CO/BO: Control word faults/alarms / STW fault/alarm

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1530,
2546
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the control word of the faults and alarms.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
07 Acknowledge fault No Yes -
10 External alarm 1 No Yes -
11 External alarm 2 No Yes -
12 External alarm 3 No Yes -
13 External fault 1 No Yes -
14 External fault 2 No Yes -
15 External fault 3 No Yes -
Dependency: Refer to: p2103, p2103, p2104, p2104, p2105, p2105, p2106, p2106, p2107, p2107, p2108, p2108, p2112, p2112,
p2116, p2116, p2117, p2117

r2139 CO/BO: Status word faults/alarms 1 / ZSW fault/alarm 1

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1530,
2548
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the first status word of faults and alarms.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Ackn. running No Yes -
03 Fault present No Yes -
06 Internal message 1 present No Yes -
07 Alarm present No Yes -
08 Internal message 2 present No Yes -

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-337

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2140[0...n] Hysteresis speed 2 / n_hysteresis 2

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [1/min] 300.00 [1/min] 90.00 [1/min]
Description: Sets the hysteresis speed/velocity (bandwidth) for the following signals:
"|n_act| < = speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.1)
"|n_act| > speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.2)
Dependency: Refer to: p2155, r2197

p2141[0...n] Speed threshold 1 / n_thresh val 1

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [1/min] 210000.00 [1/min] 5.00 [1/min]

Description: Sets the speed/velocity threshold value for the signal "f or n comparison value reached or exceeded" (BO: r2199.1).
Dependency: Refer to: p2142, r2199

p2142[0...n] Hysteresis speed 1 / n_hysteresis 1

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [1/min] 300.00 [1/min] 2.00 [1/min]
Description: Sets the hysteresis speed/velocity (bandwidth) for the signal "f or n / v comparison value reached or exceeded"
(BO: r2199.1).
Dependency: Refer to: p2141, r2199

r2145[0...7] Alarm time received in days / t_alarm recv days

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 8065
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the system runtime in days when the alarm occurred.
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2114, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2146

r2146[0...7] Alarm time removed in days / t_alarm res days

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 8065
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the system runtime in days when the alarm was cleared.
Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2114, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145

1-338  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2147 Delete fault buffer of all drive objects / Del fault buffer
CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 8060
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Is used to delete (clear) the fault buffer of all of the existing drive objects.
Values: 0: not active
1: Start to delete the fault buffer of all drive objects
Dependency: Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136
Note: p2147 is automatically set to 0 after execution.

p2148[0...n] BI: Ramp-function generator active / HLG active

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for the signal "ramp-function generator active" for the following signals/messages:
"Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_on" (BO: r2199.4)
Ramp-up/ramp-down completed (BO: r2199.5)
Note: The binector input is automatically pre-assigned to r1199.2.
The following applies for SERVO:
The pre-assignment is only made when the function module "setpoint channel" is activated (r0108.8 = 1).

p2149[0...n] Monitoring, configuration / Monit config

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 0001 bin 0000 bin

Description: Configuration word for messages and monitoring functions.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Enable alarm A07903 No Yes 8010
Dependency: Refer to: r2197
Refer to: A07903
Note: Re bit 00:
Alarm A07903 is output when the bit is set with p2197.7 = 0 (n_set <> n_act).

p2150[0...n] Hysteresis speed 3 / n_hysteresis 3

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [1/min] 300.00 [1/min] 2.00 [1/min]

Description: Sets the hysteresis speed/velocity (bandwidth) for the following signals:
"|n_act| < speed threshold value 3" (BO: r2199.0)
"n_set >= 0" (BO: r2198.5)
"n_act >= 0" (BO: r2197.3)
Dependency: Refer to: p2161, r2197, r2199

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-339

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2151[0...n] CI: Speed setpoint for messages/signals / n_set for msg

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1170[0]
Description: Sets the signal source for the speed setpoint for the following messages:
"Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off" (BO: r2197.7)
Ramp-up/ramp-down completed (BO: r2199.5)
"|n_set| < p2161" (BO: r2198.4)
"n_set > 0" (BO: r2198.5)
Dependency: Refer to: r2197, r2198, r2199

p2153[0...n] Speed actual value filter time constant / n_act_filt T

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 1000000 [ms] 0 [ms]

Description: Sets the time constant of the PT1 element to smooth the speed / velocity actual value. The smoothed actual
speed/velocity is compared with the threshold values and is only used for messages and signals.
Dependency: Refer to: r2169

p2154[0...n] CI: Speed setpoint 2 / n_set 2

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for speed setpoint 2.

The sum from CI: p2151 and CI: p2154 is used for the following messages:
"Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off" (BO: r2197.7)
"Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_on" (BO: r2199.4)
Ramp-up/ramp-down completed (BO: r2199.5)
Dependency: Refer to: p2151, r2197, r2199

p2155[0...n] Speed threshold 2 / n_thresh val 2

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [1/min] 210000.00 [1/min] 900.00 [1/min]

Description: Sets the speed/velocity threshold value for the following messages:
"|n_act| < = speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.1)
"|n_act| < speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.2)
Dependency: Refer to: p2140, r2197

1-340  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2156[0...n] On delay, comparison value reached / t_on cmpr val rchd

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms] 0.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the delay time for the signal "comparison value reached" (BO: r2199.1).
Dependency: Refer to: p2141, p2142, r2199

p2161[0...n] Speed threshold 3 / n_thresh val 3

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [1/min] 210000.00 [1/min] 5.00 [1/min]

Description: Sets the speed/velocity threshold value for the signal "|n_act| < speed threshold value 3" (BO: r2199.0).
Dependency: Refer to: p2150, r2199

p2162[0...n] Hysteresis speed n_act > n_max / Hyst n_act>n_max

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [1/min] 60000.00 [1/min] 600.00 [1/min]
Description: Sets the hysteresis speed/velocity (bandwidth) for the signal "n_act > n_max" (BO: r2197.6).
Dependency: Refer to: r1084, r1087, r2197
Note: For a negative speed limit (r1087) the hysteresis is effective below the limit value and for a positive speed limit
(r1084) above the limit value.

p2163[0...n] Speed threshold 4 / n_thresh val 4

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [1/min] 210000.00 [1/min] 90.00 [1/min]

Description: Sets the speed/velocity threshold value for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_off" sig-
nal/message (BO: r2197.7).
Dependency: Refer to: p2164, p2166, r2197

p2164[0...n] Hysteresis speed 4 / n_hysteresis 4

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [1/min] 200.00 [1/min] 2.00 [1/min]

Description: Sets the hysteresis speed/velocity (bandwidth) for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_off"
signal/message (BO: r2197.7).
Dependency: Refer to: p2163, p2166, r2197

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-341

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2166[0...n] Off delay n_act = n_set / t_del_off n_i=n_so

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms] 200.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the power-off delay time for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_off" signal/message
(BO: r2197.7).
Dependency: Refer to: p2163, p2164, r2197

p2167[0...n] Switch-on delay n_act = n_set / t_del_on n_i=n_so

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms] 200.0 [ms]

Description: Sets the switch-in delay for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_on" signal/message (BO:
r2199.4).

r2169 CO: Speed actual value smoothed signals / n_act smth message
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1750,
8010, 8012
P-Group: Messages Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]
Description: Displays the smoothed actual speed/velocity for messages/signals.
Dependency: Refer to: p2153

p2174[0...n] Torque threshold value 1 / M_thresh val 1

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8012
P-Group: Messages Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 99999.00 [Nm] 5.13 [Nm]

Description: Sets the torque/force threshold value for the signal "Torque setpoint < torque threshold value 1" (BO: r2198.10).
Dependency: Refer to: p2195, r2198

p2175[0...n] Motor locked speed threshold / Mot lock n_thresh

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8012
P-Group: Messages Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [1/min] 210000.00 [1/min] 120.00 [1/min]
Description: Sets the speed / velocity threshold for the signal "Motor locked" (BO: r2198.6).
Dependency: Refer to: p2177, r2198

1-342  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2177[0...n] Motor locked delay time / Mot lock t_del

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8012
P-Group: Messages Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 65.000 [s] 1.000 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time for the message "Motor locked" (BO: r2198.6).
If "Motor locked" is identified within this time, then ZSW2.6 is set and an appropriate fault is output.
Dependency: Refer to: p2175, r2198

p2178[0...n] Motor stalled delay time / Mot stall t_del

VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8012
P-Group: Messages Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 1.000 [s] 0.010 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time for the message "Motor stalled" (BO: r2198.7).
If "Motor stalled" is identified within this time, then ZSW2.7 is set and an appropriate fault is output.
Dependency: Refer to: r2198

p2181[0...n] Load monitoring, response / Load monit. resp.

SERVO (Extended Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
msg), VECTOR Data type: Integer16 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8013
(Extended msg)
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 6 0
Description: Sets the response when evaluating the load monitoring.
Values: 0: Load monitoring disabled
1: A07920 for torque/speed too low
2: A07921 for torque/speed too high
3: A07922 for torque/speed out of tolerance
4: F07923 for torque/speed too low
5: F07924 for torque/speed too high
6: F07925 for torque/speed out of tolerance
Dependency: Refer to: p2182, p2183, p2184, p2185, p2186, p2187, p2188, p2189, p2190, r2198
Refer to: A07920, A07921, A07922, F07923, F07924, F07925

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-343

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2182[0...n] Load monitoring, speed threshold value 1 / n_thresh 1

SERVO (Extended Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
msg), VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8013
(Extended msg)
P-Group: Messages Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [1/min] 210000.00 [1/min] 150.00 [1/min]
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelop curve for the load monitoring.
The envelope curve is defined as follows based on 3 speed thresholds:
p2182 (n_threshold 1) --> p2185 (M_threshold 1, upper), p2186 (M_threshold 1, lower)
p2183 (n_threshold 2) --> p2187 (M_threshold 2, upper), p2188 (M_threshold 2, lower)
p2184 (n_threshold 3) --> p2189 (M_threshold 3, upper), p2190 (M_threshold 3, lower)
Dependency: The following applies: p2182 < p2183 < p2184
Refer to: p2183, p2184, p2185, p2186
Refer to: A07926

p2183[0...n] Load monitoring, speed threshold value 2 / n_thresh 2

SERVO (Extended Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
msg), VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8013
(Extended msg)
P-Group: Messages Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [1/min] 210000.00 [1/min] 900.00 [1/min]

Description: Sets the speed/torque envelop curve for the load monitoring.
The envelope curve is defined as follows based on 3 speed thresholds:
p2182 (n_threshold 1) --> p2185 (M_threshold 1, upper), p2186 (M_threshold 1, lower)
p2183 (n_threshold 2) --> p2187 (M_threshold 2, upper), p2188 (M_threshold 2, lower)
p2184 (n_threshold 3) --> p2189 (M_threshold 3, upper), p2190 (M_threshold 3, lower)
Dependency: The following applies: p2182 < p2183 < p2184
Refer to: p2182, p2184, p2187, p2188
Refer to: A07926

p2184[0...n] Load monitoring, speed threshold value 3 / n_thresh 3

SERVO (Extended Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
msg), VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8013
(Extended msg)
P-Group: Messages Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [1/min] 210000.00 [1/min] 1500.00 [1/min]
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelop curve for the load monitoring.
The envelope curve is defined as follows based on 3 speed thresholds:
p2182 (n_threshold 1) --> p2185 (M_threshold 1, upper), p2186 (M_threshold 1, lower)
p2183 (n_threshold 2) --> p2187 (M_threshold 2, upper), p2188 (M_threshold 2, lower)
p2184 (n_threshold 3) --> p2189 (M_threshold 3, upper), p2190 (M_threshold 3, lower)
Dependency: The following applies: p2182 < p2183 < p2184
Refer to: p2182, p2183, p2189, p2190
Refer to: A07926

1-344  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2185[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 1, upper / M_thresh 1 upper

SERVO (Extended Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
msg), VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8013
(Extended msg)
P-Group: Messages Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 99999.00 [Nm] 99999.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelop curve for the load monitoring.
Dependency: The following applies: p2185 > p2186
Refer to: p2182, p2186
Refer to: A07926

p2186[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 1, lower / M_thresh 1 lower

SERVO (Extended Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
msg), VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8013
(Extended msg)
P-Group: Messages Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 99999.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]

Description: Sets the speed/torque envelop curve for the load monitoring.
Dependency: The following applies: p2186 < p2185
Refer to: p2182, p2185
Refer to: A07926

p2187[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 2, upper / M_thresh 2 upper

SERVO (Extended Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
msg), VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8013
(Extended msg)
P-Group: Messages Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 99999.00 [Nm] 99999.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelop curve for the load monitoring.
Dependency: The following applies: p2187 > p2188
Refer to: p2183, p2188
Refer to: A07926

p2188[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 2, lower / M_thresh 2 lower

SERVO (Extended Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
msg), VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8013
(Extended msg)
P-Group: Messages Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 99999.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]

Description: Sets the speed/torque envelop curve for the load monitoring.
Dependency: The following applies: p2188 < p2187
Refer to: p2183, p2187
Refer to: A07926

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-345

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2189[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 3, upper / M_thresh 3 upper

SERVO (Extended Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
msg), VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8013
(Extended msg)
P-Group: Messages Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 99999.00 [Nm] 99999.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets the speed/torque envelop curve for the load monitoring.
Dependency: The following applies: p2189 > p2190
Refer to: p2184, p2190
Refer to: A07926

p2190[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 3, lower / M_thresh 3 lower

SERVO (Extended Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
msg), VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8013
(Extended msg)
P-Group: Messages Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Nm] 99999.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]

Description: Sets the speed/torque envelop curve for the load monitoring.
Dependency: The following applies: p2190 < p2189
Refer to: p2184, p2189
Refer to: A07926

p2192[0...n] Load monitoring, delay time / Load monit t_del

SERVO (Extended Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
msg), VECTOR Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8013
(Extended msg)
P-Group: Messages Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [s] 65.00 [s] 10.00 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time to evaluate the load monitoring.

p2194[0...n] Torque threshold value 2 / M_thresh val 2

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8012
P-Group: Messages Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 90.00 [%]
Description: Sets the torque/force threshold value for the signal "Torque utilization < torque threshold value 2" (BO: r2199.11).
Dependency: Refer to: r0033, p2195, r2199

1-346  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2195[0...n] Torque utilization switch-off delay / M_util t_off

SERVO Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 8012
P-Group: Messages Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 1000.0 [ms] 800.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the power-down delay time for the negated signal "Ramp-up completed".
The evaluation of the message "Torque setpoint < p2174" (BO: r2198.10) and "Torque utilization < p2194" (BO:
r2199.11) is only realized after ramp-up has been completed and the delay time has expired.
Dependency: Refer to: p2174, p2194

r2197 CO/BO: Status word monitoring 1 / ZSW monitor 1

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1530,
2534
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the first status word for monitoring functions.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
01 |n_act| <= speed threshold value 2 No Yes 8010
02 |n_act| > speed threshold value 2 No Yes 8010
03 n_act >= 0 No Yes 8010
06 n_act > n_max No Yes 8010
07 Speed setp - act val deviation in tolerance No Yes 8010
t_off
Note: Re bit 01, 02:
The speed threshold value 2 is set in p2155.

r2198 CO/BO: Status word monitoring 2 / ZSW monitor 2

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1530,
2536
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the second status word for monitoring functions.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
04 |n_set| < p2161 No Yes 8010
05 n_set > 0 No Yes 8010
06 Motor locked No Yes 8012
07 Motor stalled No Yes 8012
10 Torque setpoint < torque threshold value 1 No Yes 8012
11 Load monitoring signals an alarm No Yes 8013
12 Load monitoring signals a fault condition No Yes 8013
Note: Re bit 10:
The torque threshold value 1 is set in p2174.
Re bit 07:
For servo drives, bit 07 is not used and is always inactive.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-347

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r2199 CO/BO: Status word monitoring 3 / ZSW monitor 3

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1530,
2536
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the third status word for monitoring functions.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 |n_act| < speed threshold value 3 No Yes 8010
01 f or n comparison value reached or No Yes 8010
exceeded
04 Speed setp - act val deviation in tolerance No Yes 8010
t_on
05 Ramp-up/ramp-down completed No Yes 8010
11 Torque utilization < torque threshold value 2 No Yes 8012
Note: Re bit 00:
The speed threshold value 3 is set in p2161.
Re bit 01:
The comparison value is set in p2141.
Re bit 11:
The torque threshold value 2 is set in p2194.

p2200[0...n] BI: Technology controller enable / Tec_ctr enable

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to switch-in/switch-out the technology controller.
The technology controller is switched-in with a 1 signal.

p2201[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 1 / Tec_ctr fix val 1

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 0.00 [%]

Description: Sets the value for fixed value 1 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229

p2202[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 2 / Tec_ctr fix val 2

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 10.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 2 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229

1-348  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2203[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 3 / Tec_ctr fix val 3

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 20.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 3 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229

p2204[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 4 / Tec_ctr fix val 4

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 30.00 [%]

Description: Sets the value for fixed value 4 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229

p2205[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 5 / Tec_ctr fix val 5

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 40.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 5 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229

p2206[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 6 / Tec_ctr fix val 6

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 50.00 [%]

Description: Sets the value for fixed value 6 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229

p2207[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 7 / Tec_ctr fix val 7

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 60.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 7 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-349

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2208[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 8 / Tec_ctr fix val 8

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 70.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 8 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229

p2209[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 9 / Tec_ctr fix val 9

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 80.00 [%]

Description: Sets the value for fixed value 9 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229

p2210[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 10 / Tec_ctr fix val 10

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 90.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 10 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229

p2211[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 11 / Tec_ctr fix val 11

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]

Description: Sets the value for fixed value 11 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229

p2212[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 12 / Tec_ctr fix val 12

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 110.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 12 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229

1-350  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2213[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 13 / Tec_ctr fix val 13

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 120.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 13 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229

p2214[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 14 / Tec_ctr fix val 14

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 130.00 [%]

Description: Sets the value for fixed value 14 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229

p2215[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 15 / Tec_ctr fix val 15

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 130.00 [%]
Description: Sets the value for fixed value 15 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229

p2220[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 0 / Tec_ctr sel bit 0
SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 7950
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source to select the fixed value of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2221, p2222, p2223

p2221[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 1 / Tec_ctr sel bit 1
SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 7950
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select the fixed value of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2222, p2223

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-351

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2222[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 2 / Tec_ctr sel bit 2
SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 7950
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to select the fixed value of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2223

p2223[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 3 / Tec_ctr sel bit 3
SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 7950
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source to select the fixed value of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222

r2224 CO: Technology controller, fixed value effective / Tec_ctr FixVal eff
SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: - Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the selected and effective fixed value of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: r2229

r2229 Technology controller current number / Tec_ctrl No. act

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: - Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the number of the selected fixed setpoint of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: r2224

1-352  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2230[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer configuration / Tec_ctr mop config

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: DDS Function diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 0111 bin 0110 bin
Description: Sets the configuration for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Data save active No Yes -
02 Initial rounding-off active No Yes -
Dependency: Refer to: r2231, p2240
Note: Re bit 00:
0: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p2240.
1: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved and after ON is entered using p2231.
Re bit 02:
0: Without initial rounding-off
1: With initial rounding-off. The selected ramp-up/down time is correspondingly exceeded.

r2231 Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint memory /

Tec_ctrl mop mem
SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: - Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]

Description: Displays the setpoint memory for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
For p2230.0 = 1, the last setpoint that was saved is entered after ON.
Dependency: Refer to: p2230

p2235[0...n] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer, raise setpoint /

Tec_ctr mop raise
SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 7954
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to increase the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2236

p2236[0...n] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer, lower setpoint /

Tec_ctr mop lower
SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 7954
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to reduce the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2235

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-353

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2237[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer maximum value / Tec_ctr mop max
SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the maximum value for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2238

p2238[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer minimum value / Tec_ctr mop min
SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] -100.00 [%]

Description: Sets the minimum value for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2237

p2240[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer starting value / Tec_ctrl mop start
SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the starting value for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
For p2230.0 = 0, this setpoint is entered after ON.
Dependency: Refer to: p2230

r2245 CO: Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint before RFG / Tec_ctr
mop b. RFG
SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: - Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]

Description: Sets the effective setpoint in front of the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator of the technology
controller.
Dependency: Refer to: r2250

1-354  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2247[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Tec_ctr mop t_r-up
SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [s] 1000.0 [s] 10.0 [s]
Description: Sets the ramp-up time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer of the technology
controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2248
Note: The time is referred to 100 %.
When the initial rounding-off is activated (p2230.2 = 1) the ramp-up is correspondingly extended.

p2248[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-down time / Tec_ctrMop

t_rdown
SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [s] 1000.0 [s] 10.0 [s]

Description: Sets the ramp-down time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer of the technology
controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2247
Note: The time is referred to 100 %.
When the initial rounding-off is activated (p1030.2) the ramp-down is correspondingly extended.

r2250 CO: Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint after RFG /

Tec_ctr mop a. RFG
SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: - Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]

Description: Displays the effective setpoint after the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer of the
technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: r2245

p2253[0...n] CI: Technology controller setpoint 1 / Tec_ctr setpoint 1

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the setpoint 1 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2254, p2255

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-355

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2254[0...n] CI: Technology controller setpoint 2 / Tec_ctr setpoint 2

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the setpoint 2 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2253, p2256

p2255 Technology controller setpoint 1 scaling / Tec_ctr set1 scal.

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 100.00 [%]

Description: Sets the scaling for the setpoint 1 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2253

p2256 Technology controller setpoint 2 scaling / Tec_ctr set2 scal.

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the scaling for the setpoint 2 of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2254

p2257 Technology controller, ramp-up time / Tec_ctr t_ramp-up

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [s] 650.00 [s] 1.00 [s]

Description: Sets the ramp-up time of the technology controller.

Dependency: Refer to: p2258
Note: The ramp-up time is referred to 100 %.

p2258 Technology controller ramp-down time / Tec_ctr t_ramp-dn

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [s] 650.00 [s] 1.00 [s]

Description: Sets the ramp-down time of the technology controller.

Dependency: Refer to: p2257
Note: The ramp-down time is referred to 100 %.

1-356  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r2260 CO: Technology controller setpoint after ramp-function generator / Tec_ctr set a.
RFG
SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: - Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]

Description: Sets the setpoint after the ramp-function generator of the technology controller.

p2261 Technology controller setpoint filter time constant / Tec_ctr set T

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [s] 60.00 [s] 0.00 [s]

Description: Sets the time constant for the setpoint filter (PT1) of the technology controller.

r2262 CO: Technology controller setpoint after filter / Tec_ctr set a. flt
SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]

Description: Displays the smoothed setpoint after the setpoint filter (PT1) of the technology controller.

p2263 Technology controller type / Tec_ctr type

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0

Description: Sets the technology controller type.

Values: 0: D component in the actual value signal
1: D component in the fault signal

p2264[0...n] CI: Technology controller actual value / Tec_ctr act val

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for the actual value of the technology controller.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-357

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2265 Technology controller actual value filter time constant / Tec_ctr act T
SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [s] 60.00 [s] 0.00 [s]
Description: Sets the time constant for the actual value filter (PT1) of the technology controller.

r2266 CO: Technology controller actual value after filter / Tec_ctr act a. flt
SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: - Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value after the filter (PT1) of the technology controller

r2273 CO: Technology controller error / Tec_ctr error

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: - Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the error (system deviation) between the setpoint and actual value of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2263

p2274 Technology controller differentiation, time constant / Tec_ctr T diff

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 60.000 [s] 0.000 [s]

Description: Sets the time constant for the differentiation (D component) of the technology controller.
Note: p2274 = 0: Differentiation is disabled.

p2280 Technology controller proportional gain / Tec_ctr Kp

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 1000.000 1.000
Description: Sets the proportional gain (P component) of the technology controller.
Note: p2280 = 0: The proportional gain is disabled.

1-358  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2285 Technology controller integral action time / Tec_ctr Tn

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [s] 60.000 [s] 0.000 [s]
Description: Sets the integral actual time (I component, integrating time constant) of the technology controller.
Note: p2285 = 0: The integral action time is disabled.

p2289[0...n] CI: Technology controller pre-control signal / Tec_ctr prectrl

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: CDS Function diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for the pre-control signal of the technology controller.

p2291 Technology controller maximum limiting / Tec_ctr max_limit

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%]

Description: Sets the maximum limit of the technology controller.

Dependency: Refer to: p2292
Caution! The maximum limit must always be greater than the minimum limit (p2291 > p2292).

p2292 Technology controller minimum limiting / Tec_ctr min_lim

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 0.00 [%]

Description: Sets the minimum limit of the technology controller.

Dependency: Refer to: p2291
Caution! The maximum limit must always be greater than the minimum limit (p2291 > p2292).

p2293 Technology controller ramp-up/ramp-down time / Tec_ctr ramp up/dn

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [s] 100.00 [s] 1.00 [s]

Description: Sets the ramp-up and ramp-down time for the maximum and minimum limiting (p2291 and p2292) of the technology
controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2291, p2292
Note: The ramp-up/ramp-down times are referred to 100 %.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-359

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r2294 CO: Technology controller output signal / Tec_ctr outp_sig

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: - Access level: 2
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the output signal of the technology controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p2295

p2295 Technology controller output scaling / Tec_ctr outp scal

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-100.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 100.00 [%]

Description: Sets the scaling for the output signal of the technology controller.

r2349 CO/BO: Technology controller status word / Tec_ctr stat word

SERVO (Tech ctrl), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR (Tech ctrl) Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the status word of the technology controller.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Technology controller de-activated No Yes -
01 Technology controller limited No Yes -

p2900[0...n] CO: Fixed value 1 [%] / Fixed value 1 [%]

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3030
P-Group: Free function blocks Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-10000.00 [%] 10000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets a fixed percentage.
Dependency: Refer to: p2901, p2930
Note: The value can be used to interconnect a scaling function (e.g. scaling of the main setpoint)

p2901[0...n] CO: Fixed value 2 [%] / Fixed value 2 [%]

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3030
P-Group: Free function blocks Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-10000.00 [%] 10000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets a fixed percentage.
Dependency: Refer to: p2900, p2930
Note: The value can be used to interconnect a scaling function (e.g. scaling of the supplementary setpoint)

1-360  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p2930[0...n] CO: Fixed value M [Nm] / Fixed value M [Nm]

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: DDS Function diagram: 3030
P-Group: Free function blocks Units group: TORQUE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-100000.00 [Nm] 100000.00 [Nm] 0.00 [Nm]
Description: Sets a fixed value for torque / force.
Dependency: Refer to: p2900, p2901
Note: The value can, for example, be used to interconnect a supplementary torque.

p3400 Infeed configuration word / INF config word

A_INF Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 8940
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin 1010 bin
Description: Sets the configuration word of the infeed.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 ALM 0 / SLM 1 Off On -
01 Flat-top mode Off On -
03 Vdc controller on Off On -
05 Line supply voltage sensing with VSM Off On -
Dependency: Refer to: p0210
Note: Re bit 00:
In the smart mode, the DC link voltage is not controlled - however, infeed can still regenerate. The magnitude of the
DC link voltage depends on the actual line supply voltage and the DC link load.
For drive units belonging to the 400 V voltage class, for a drive unit supply voltage (p0210) greater than 415 V, the
infeed is always operated in the smart mode. This means that the 660 V limit can be maintained for the steady-state
DC link voltage (p0280) up to a line supply voltage of 480 V.
Re bit 01:
If the flat top mode is deactivated, switching losses are higher. This means that the full power is no longer continu-
ously available.
For p3400.0 = 1, this bit is not effective.
Re bit 03:
If the Vdc controller is switched-out, overvoltage or undervoltage conditions occur in the DC link if no other voltage-
regulating component is located in the DC link.
For p3400.0 = 1, this bit is not effective.
Re bit 05:
VSM: Voltage sensing module
If a VSM is detected when commissioning the system, this bit is automatically set.
When the bit is set, the line supply voltage input of the VSM must be connected (connected at the line side of the
commutating reactor).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-361

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r3402 Infeed internal status / INF status int

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 8932
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the internal status of the infeed module.
Values: 0: Initialization
1: Fault
2: No ON command
3: Offset measurement running
4: ON delay active
5: Precharg. running
6: No pulse enable
7: Synchronization running
8: Ramp-up running
9: Operation.
10: Shutdown running
11: Identification running

r3402 Infeed status internal BIC / INF status int

B_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 8932
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the internal status of the infeed module.

0: Initialization
1: Fault
2: No ON command
4: ON delay active
5: Precharg. running
6: Operation.

r3405 CO/BO: Status word infeed / INF ZSW

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 8928
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Status word of the infeed.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Smart mode active No Yes -
01 Vdc-ctrl active No Yes -
02 Phase failure detected No Yes -
03 Current limit reached No Yes -
04 Infeed operates regenerating/motoring Motor mode Regenerative mode -
05 Motor operation inhibited No Yes -
06 Regenerative operation inhibited No Yes -

1-362  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p3410 Infeed identification method / INF Ident_type

A_INF Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 5 5
Description: Sets the line and DC link parameter identification routine for the infeed module.
Values: 0: Identification off
1: Activate identification
2: Set controller settings
3: Save identification and controller settings
4: Save identification and controller settings with L adaptation
5: Save reset, identification and controller settings with L adaptation
Dependency: Refer to: r3411, r3412, p3415, p3416, p3417, p3421, p3422
Refer to: A06400
Notice: For p3410 = 1, 3, 4, 5, alarm A06400 is output and designates that the selected identification will take place the next
time that the pulses are enabled.
Note: When p3410 = 1 an identification run for the total inductance and DC link capacitance is initiated when the pulses
are next enabled. The results are displayed in r3411, r341. The infeed then goes into the power-on state.
For p3410 = 2, the data (r3411 and r3412) determined during the identification run (p3410 = 1) is transferred into
p3421 and p3422. Calculations for the controller are then repeated. The user must save the new parameters in a
non-volatile fashion in order to permanently select the new controller setting.
When p3410 = 3 an identification run for the total inductance and DC link capacitance is initiated when the pulses
are next enabled. The data determined during identification (r3411 and r3412) are transferred into p3421 and
p3422 and the controller parameters recalculated. All of the parameters for the infeed module are then automati-
cally stored in a non-volatile memory. The infeed continues to operate without any interruption with the new control-
ler parameters.
When p3410 = 4 an identification run for the total inductance and DC link capacitance is initiated when the pulses
are next enabled. The data determined during identification (r3411 and r3412) are transferred into p3421 and
p3422 and the controller parameters recalculated. The identification is then repeated at an increased current level
(p3415[1]). If the inductance measured the second time is lower, the parameters are written to the current controller
adaptation (p3620, p3622).. All of the parameters for the infeed module are then automatically stored in a non-vola-
tile memory. The infeed continues to operate without any interruption with the new controller parameters.
For p3410 = 5, the same measurements and write operations are carried-out as for p3410 = 4. However, for the first
identification run, initially the controller setting is reset by setting p3421 to p0223 and p3422 to p0227.
p3410 is automatically set to 0 after an identification run has been successfully completed.

r3411[0...1] Infeed identified inductance / INF L ident

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: INDUCTANCE_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mH] - [mH] - [mH]

Description: Displays the identified total inductance. The value corresponds to the total inductance between the rigid line supply
and the infeed input terminals.
Index: [0] = Result run 1
[1] = Result run 2
Dependency: Refer to: p3410
Note: The value measured in the first identification run is displayed in r3411[0] (if p3410 = 1, 3, 4, 5). This value is trans-
ferred to p3421.
The value measured in the second identification run (if p3410 = 4, 5) is displayed in r3411[1] - this value is used to
set the current controller adaptation (p3622).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-363

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r3412[0...1] Infeed DC-link capacitance identified / INF C_DClink ident

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: CAPACITY_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [mF] - [mF] - [mF]
Description: Displays the identified total DC link capacitance.
Index: [0] = Result run 1
[1] = Result run 2
Dependency: Refer to: p3410
Note: The value measured in the first identification run (if p3410 = 1, 3, 4, 5) is displayed in r3412[0]. For p3410 = 1, 3, this
value is transferred to p3422.
The DC link capacitance is not measured at the second identification run.

p3415[0...1] Infeed excitation current L identification / INF I_energiz L_ID

A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 100.00 [%] [0] 30.00 [%]
[1] 48.00 [%]

Description: Sets the magnitude of the excitation frequency for the L identification.
The excitation current is specified as a percentage of the maximum power module current (r0209).
Index: [0] = Result run 1
[1] = Result run 2
Dependency: Refer to: p3410, r3411, p3421, p3620, p3622
Notice: In order to correctly identify the current level (p3410 = 4, 5) depending on the reactor inductance, the following must
apply:
p3415[0] < p3415[1]
Note: The reactive current for identification run 1 is set in p3415[0] (basic controller setting).
The reactive current for identification run 2 is set in p3415[1] (adaptation of the current controller when reducing the
reactor inductance with increasing current magnitude).

p3416 Infeed excitation amplitude C identification / INF energ_amp C_Id

A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.10 [%] 20.00 [%] 2.00 [%]

Description: Sets the level of the excitation frequency for identification of the total DC link capacitance. The amplitude is indi-
cated as a percentage of the DC voltage setpoint (Vdc = p0210 * p3510).
Dependency: Refer to: p3410, r3412, p3422

p3417 Infeed excitation frequency C identification / INF f_energiz C_ID

A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
10.00 [Hz] 200.00 [Hz] 50.00 [Hz]

Description: Sets the level of the excitation frequency for identification of the total DC link capacitance.
Dependency: Refer to: p3410, r3412, p3422

1-364  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p3421 Infeed inductance / INF Inductance

A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: INDUCTANCE_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [mH] 1000.00 [mH] 2.00 [mH]
Description: Sets the total line supply inductance. This value is preset to the sum of the values in p0223 and p0225.
Dependency: Refer to: p0223, p0225, p3410, p3622
Note: The controller setting is derived from this value.
The value can be automatically determined using the identification run (p3410).
For a parallel circuit configuration, the value corresponds to the inductance for a power module.

p3422 Infeed DC link capacitance / INF C_DCL

A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: CAPACITY_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [mF] 1000.00 [mF] 2.00 [mF]
Description: Sets the DC link capacitance. This value is preset to p0227.
Dependency: Refer to: p0227, p3410
Note: The controller setting is derived from this value.
The value can be automatically determined using the identification run (p3410).

p3440 Smart Mode configuration word / SLM config_word

A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin 0001 bin

Description: Sets the configuration word of the Smart Mode.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Soft pulse mode Off On -
Note: Re bit 00:
When the pulsed mode for the SmartMode is de-activated, when regenerating, higher phase current gradients
occur.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-365

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r3452 Infeed PLL status / INF PLL status

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status of the line supply PLL.
Values: 0: Initialization running
1: Error when synchronizing
2: Anal. line supply
3: Calculation line data
4: No pulse enable
5: PLL calculation
6: Final status controlled / smart mode
7: Reserved

p3458 Infeed PLL smoothing time / INF PLL t_smooth

A_INF Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
2.0 [ms] 1000.0 [ms] 50.0 [ms]

Description: Sets the smoothing time for the line supply PLL.
Note: It may be necessary to reduce the smoothing time for weak line supplies with high frequency fluctuations. There is
otherwise a risk of brief orientation errors and the infeed could fail.

r3460 Infeed PLL system deviation / INF PLL ctrl_dev

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: ANGLE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°] - [°] - [°]

Description: Displays the PLL system deviation.

r3461 Infeed PLL system deviation after filtering / INF PLL ctrl_devSm
A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: ANGLE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°] - [°] - [°]

Description: Displays the PLL system deviation after filtering.

Dependency: Refer to: p3458

1-366  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p3463 Infeed, line angle change, phase failure detection / INF Phi phase fail
A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: ANGLE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-180.0 [°] 180.0 [°] 15.0 [°]
Description: If the line supply angle (angle between the line supply phases) suddenly changes by this value, then a phase failure
is assumed. The pulses are then inhibited for 10 ms.
Dependency: Refer to: A06205

r3470 Infeed active current filter / INF I_act filter

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the total active active current.

The active current requirement of the line filter is taken into account in this value. This active current is effective with
respect to the line supply.
Note: This value is used for calculating the power factor (r0038).

r3471 Infeed reactive current filter / INF I_reactiveFilt

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the total reactive current.

The reactive current requirement of the line filter is taken into account in this value. This reactive current is effective
with respect to the line supply.
Note: This value is used for calculating the power factor (r0038).

p3480 Infeed modulation depth limit / INF mod_depth lim

A_INF Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8940
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
50.0 [%] 110.0 [%] 97.0 [%]
Description: Sets the maximum steady-state modulation depth. When this limit is reached, the DC link voltage is boosted to
maintain the control margin. This means that the control reserve is maintained.
Dependency: Refer to: p3481, r3485

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-367

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p3481 Infeed standby controller dynamic response / INF res_ctrl dyn

A_INF Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8940
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 1000.0 [ms] 7.5 [ms]
Description: Sets the dynamic response of the reserve controller for the modulation depth. As the smoothing time increases, the
response of the DC link voltage tracking becomes slower.
Dependency: Refer to: p3480, r3485

r3485 Infeed standby controller output / INF res_ctrl outpt

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8940
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_DC Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]

Description: Displays the reserve controller output for the modulation depth.
The DC link voltage is increased by this voltage value - the summed setpoint for the DC link voltage is output in
r0088.
The summed setpoint is limited to the maximum steady-stage DC link voltage (p0280).
Dependency: Refer to: p3480, p3481

p3490 Infeed OFF command delay time / INF t_del OFF

A_INF, B_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8932
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 1000000.0 [ms] 0.0 [ms]

Description: Sets the delay time for the ON/OFF1 command of the infeed. After ON/OFF1 = 0 the infeed remains in operation for
the specified time
Dependency: Refer to: p0840
Notice: The ON/OFF1 command of the infeed can be interrupted.
Note: This parameter is only relevant if a motor module and the infeed are controlled by the same OFF command. In this
case, the delay time and the stop ramp time of the motor can be coordinated with one another.

p3491 Infeed I-offset measurement monitoring time / INF I_offs t_monit

A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8932
P-Group: Commands Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 65000 [ms] 2000 [ms]

Description: Sets the monitoring time for the current-offset measurement of the power module.
The time is started with the normal end of the measurement. If the measurement is invalid and if no valid measure-
ment can be taken within the monitoring period (phase currents too high), an appropriate message is generated.
Note: Set this parameter to 0 to allow variations in the delay when running-up.

1-368  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p3492 Infeed, line supply undervoltage delay time / INF V_line t_del
A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: TIME Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [s] 300 [s] 0 [s]
Description: Sets the delay time for shutdown due to a line supply undervoltage condition (A06100).
After the fault occurs, the power module is only tripped (shut down) after this delay has expired. If the fault is
removed during this design time, then the power module is not tripped (shut down).
Dependency: Refer to: p0283
Refer to: F06100
Note: The degree of ruggedness of the infeed with respect to fluctuations in the line supply voltage can be increased by
parameterizing this delay value.
However, the following should be noted:
- the infeed power decreases proportionally (linearly) with the line supply voltage.
- when other components are connected, for low line supply voltage, operating faults or damage can occur. In this
case, the specifications of the connected electrical components should always be carefully observed.

p3510 Infeed DC link voltage setpoint / INF Vdc setp

A_INF Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1774,
8940
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_DC Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
300.00 [V] 1600.00 [V] 600.00 [V]
Description: Sets the setpoint for the DC link voltage.
Dependency: Refer to: p3511
Note: The permissible range of the DC link voltage depends on the parameterized unit supply voltage (p0210).
The following applies: 1.42 * p0210 < p3510 < 1.60 * p0210

p3511 CI: Infeed DC link voltage supplementary setpoint / INF Vdc Z_set
A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 8940
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for the supplementary setpoint for the DC link voltage.
Dependency: Refer to: p3510

p3513 BI: Inhibit the voltage-controlled mode / Inhib U_ctrl mode

A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for inhibiting the voltage-controlled mode of the infeed.
Dependency: Refer to: p3400, r3405
Notice: The DC link voltage must be controlled by a different component at the DC link; otherwise this results in an overvolt-
age or undervoltage condition.
Note: The current controller remains active and can be controlled by means of its setpoint inputs (p3515, p3610).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-369

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p3514 Infeed supplementary active current steady-state / INF I_sup_eff stat

A_INF Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8940
P-Group: Control Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-1000.00 [Aeff] 1000.00 [Aeff] 0.00 [Aeff]
Description: Sets a steady-state supplementary setpoint for the active line supply current.
Dependency: Refer to: p3515

p3515 CI: Infeed supplementary active current / INF I_suppl eff

A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 8940
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for the supplementary setpoint of the active current.
Dependency: Refer to: p3514
Note: For a master-slave infeed, the master can enter the current setpoint via this connector input.

p3516 Infeed current distribution factor (parallel connection) / INF I_distr_factor

A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8940
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 100.00 [%]

Description: Sets the factor to be multiplied by the active current setpoint for the current controller.
For a master slave infeed configuration, the value reduced in this way can be distributed to the slave axes. The
overall gain from the perspective of the voltage controller remains the same.

r3517 Infeed active current controller unlimited setpoint / INF I_act ctrl set
A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8940
P-Group: Control Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the unlimited setpoint of the active current controller.

For a master-slave infeed configuration, the master retrieves this setpoint and distributes it to all of the slaves. The
slaves operate in the current-controlled mode.

1-370  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p3520[0...3] CI: Infeed power pre-control / INF pre-control P

A_INF Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for power pre-control.
Dependency: Refer to: p3521
Note: Closed-loop control of the DC link voltage is improved by pre-controlling the power required for the other modules.
A non-normalized quantity is expected so that the various power reference values (r2004) of the drive objects do
not have to be taken into account.
The scaling factors p3521 are used to adapt the scaling.

p3521[0...3] Infeed pre-control power scaling / INF pre-ctr P scal

A_INF Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-100000.00000 [%] 100000.00000 [%] 100.00000 [%]

Description: Sets the scaling factor for the power pre-control.

Dependency: Refer to: p3520

p3530 Infeed current limit, motoring / INF I_limit mot

A_INF Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8940
P-Group: Control Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1.00 [Aeff] 100000.00 [Aeff] 10000.00 [Aeff]

Description: Sets the motoring limit for the active line current.
The currently effective current limit is displayed in r0067[0].
Dependency: Refer to: r0067, p3532
Cautiont: If this limit is selected lower than the maximum current permissible for the power module (r0067), the infeed can no
longer provide its full controlled power.
Operating faults of the infeed can occur due to the resulting DC link undervoltage.
Notice: For self-commutated infeeds, the DC link voltage decreases if more power is drawn from the DC link by the con-
nected load than can be supplied by the line because of the power module maximum current or a limit in p3530.
If the DC link voltage decreases down to the rectified value, then the complete current - necessary to cover the
required active power - flows, uncontrolled into the rectifier circuit via the diodes.
This is the reason that, for physical reasons, the value in p3530 cannot act as current limit that is always main-
tained.
The value forms a current threshold from which point onwards the DC link energy is used as buffer for brief power
fluctuations.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-371

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p3531 Infeed current limit, regenerating / INF I_limit regen

A_INF Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8940
P-Group: Control Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-100000.00 [Aeff] -1.00 [Aeff] -10000.00 [Aeff]
Description: Sets the limit for the active line supply current when regenerating.
The currently effective current limit is displayed in r0067[1].
Dependency: Refer to: r0067, p3533
Cautiont: If this limit is selected lower than the maximum current permissible for the power module (r0067), the infeed can no
longer provide its full controlled power.
This can result in an overvoltage condition in the DC link.
Notice: For self-commutated infeeds, the DC link voltage increases if more power is input to the DC link through the con-
nected source than can be fed to the line because of the maximum power module current or a limit in p3531
If the DC link voltage exceeds the permissible threshold (p0297), defined by the hardware, then the unit is tripped
due to overvoltage.
The value in p3531 represents a current limit that is always maintained - however, this can result in overvoltage
conditions in the DC link.
The value in p3531 represents a current limit from which point onwards the capacitance of the DC link can be used
as buffer for brief power fluctuations.

p3532 BI: Infeed, inhibit motoring / INF mot op inhibit

A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 8920
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for inhibiting the motoring mode of the infeed.
Dependency: Refer to: r3405, p3530
Notice: If the motor mode is inhibited although power is withdrawn from the DC link, then the DC link voltage drops to the
rectified value.
In this state, the DC link is post-charged through the diodes and motoring power is fed to the power module in spite
of the motoring inhibit.
Note: The inhibit only becomes active after operation has been enabled and the Vdc has been ramped-up (r0863.0 = 1).

p3533 BI: Infeed, inhibit regenerative operation / INF regen op inhib

A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 8920
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source to inhibit the regenerating mode of the infeed.
Dependency: Refer to: r3405, p3531
Notice: The DC link voltage will increase if regenerative operation is inhibited even though power is being regenerated into
the DC link.
Note: The inhibit only becomes active after operation has been enabled and the Vdc has been ramped-up (r0863.0 = 1).

1-372  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r3554 Infeed Vdc controller integral component / INF Vdc_ctr I_comp

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8940
P-Group: Control Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]
Description: Displays the integral action component of the DC link voltage controller (Vdc controller).

p3560 Infeed Vdc controller proportional gain / INF Vdc_ctrl Kp

A_INF Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8940
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the normalized proportional gain for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc controller).
Note: A value of 100 % corresponds to the basic setting derived from loop control parameters (p3421, p3422).

p3562 Infeed,Vdc controller integral action time / INF Vdc_ctrl Tn

A_INF Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8940
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.10 [%] 100000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]

Description: Sets the normalized integral action time for the DC-link voltage controller (Vdc).
Note: A value of 100 % corresponds to the basic setting derived from loop control parameters (p3421, p3422).

p3564 Infeed Vdc monitor, time constant / INF Vdc_observe T

A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 100.0 [ms] 0.2 [ms]
Description: Sets the filter time constant for the DC link voltage monitor (Vdc).

p3566 Infeed Vdc ramp duration / INF Vdc t_ramp

A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8932
P-Group: Commands Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
40 [ms] 1000 [ms] 100 [ms]
Description: Sets the ramp time for the DC link voltage (Vdc) when powering-up and powering-down.
Powering-up (pulses enabled, r0898.3 = 1):
During this time, the DC link voltage is increased from the rectifier value after pre-charging to the voltage setpoint
(p3510, p3511). The voltage setpoint is increased, when necessary, so that the modulation depth reserve (p3481)
is maintained. The reactive current is set to the value 0 while ramping.
Powering-down (inhibit pulses, r0898.3 = 0):
During this time, the DC link voltage is reduced to the rectified value (sqrt(2) * line supply voltage). The reactive cur-
rent value is set to the value 0 when the ramp starts.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-373

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r3602 Infeed control status / INF ctrl state

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status of the closed-loop infeed control.
Values: 0: Initialization running
1: No pulse enable
2: Ramp-up, DC-link voltage
3: Ramp-up reactive current
4: Shutdown running
5: Reset identification
6: Operation.
7: Identification running
8: Smart mode running

p3603 Infeed current pre-control factor D-action / INF I_ctrl Dfactor

A_INF Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8946
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 500.00 [%] 100.00 [%]

Description: The D component of the current pre-control is determined from the device data of the filter. p3603 can be used to
weigh the pre-calculated D component. If no dynamic precontrol is to be used, set the factor to zero.

r3606 Infeed active current controller system deviation / INF I_act ctrl dev
A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8946
P-Group: Control Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the system deviation of the active current controller.

r3608 Infeed reactive current controller system deviation / INF I_reactvCtrDev

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8946
P-Group: Control Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the system deviation of the reactive current controller.

1-374  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p3610 Infeed reactive current fixed setpoint / INF I_reactv F_set

A_INF Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1774,
8946
P-Group: Control Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-10000.0 [Aeff] 10000.0 [Aeff] 0.0 [Aeff]

Description: Sets the fixed setpoint for the reactive current.

p3611 CI: Infeed reactive current supplementary setpoint / INF I_reactv Z_set
A_INF Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 8946
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for the supplementary setpoint of the reactive current.

p3615 Infeed current controller P gain / INF I_ctrl Kp

A_INF Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8946
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]

Description: Sets the normalized P gain for closed-loop current control of the infeed.
Note: A value of 100 % corresponds to the basic setting derived from loop control parameters (p3421, p3422).

p3617 Infeed current controller integral action time / INF I_ctrl Tn

A_INF Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8946
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.10 [%] 100000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]

Description: Sets the normalized integral action time for the infeed current controller.
Note: A value of 100 % corresponds to the basic setting derived from loop control parameters (p3421, p3422).

r3618 Infeed active current controller, integral component / INF I_act_ctrl Tn

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8946
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Veff] - [Veff] - [Veff]

Description: Displays the integral component of the active current controller.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-375

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r3619 Infeed reactive current controller integral component / INF I_reactv_ctrTn

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8946
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Veff] - [Veff] - [Veff]
Description: Displays the integral action component of the reactive current controller.

p3620 Infeed current controller adaptation lower application threshold /

INF I_adptLowThrsh
A_INF Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 0.00 [%]

Description: Sets the switch-in threshold for the current controller adaptation.
The value refers to the maximum power modular current (r0209). From the starting threshold onwards, the induc-
tance value (p3421) used for current control is reduced linearly as a function of the current value. The inductance
value for the maximum power module current is therefore p3421 * p3622.
Dependency: Refer to: p3410, p3415, p3622
Note: For the identification with p3410 = 4, 5, the parameter is automatically set to 80% of the current magnitude for run 1
(p3415[0]).

p3622 Infeed current controller adaptation reduction factor / INF I_adapt factor
A_INF Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Motor Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 100.00 [%]

Description: Sets the inductance of the commutating reactor at the maximum power module current (r0209) as a percentage of
the inductance (p3421) at the application threshold (p3620).
Dependency: Refer to: p3410, p3415, p3620
Note: This parameter can be set automatically using the identification function (p3410 = 4, 5).

p3624[0...1] Infeed harmonics controller order / INF harm_ctr order

A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
5 13 [0] 5
[1] 7

Description: Sets the Order of the line harmonics for the current harmonics controller.
p3624[0]: Order of the line harmonics for the first harmonics controller.
p3624[1]: Order of the line harmonics for the second harmonics controller.
Dependency: Refer to: p3625, r3626
Note: Harmonics in the line supply voltage can cause harmonics in the converter current. These types of current harmon-
ics can be reduced by activating additional controller modules.
Example:
For a 50 Hz line supply harmonics at 250 Hz in the phase currents can be reduced by activating a harmonic control-
ler with Order 5 (p3624[0] = 5).

1-376  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p3625[0...1] Infeed harmonics controller scaling / INF harm_ctrl scal

A_INF Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [%] 300.0 [%] 100.0 [%]
Description: Sets the gain of the harmonics controller.
p3625[0]: Gain of the first harmonics controller
p3625[1]: Gain of the second harmonics controller
0 %: Controller is de-activated
100 %: Controller is activated with default gain setting
Dependency: Refer to: p3624, r3626
Note: The harmonics controller corrects the power module voltages so that the line-side current harmonics are reduced.
The order of a current harmonic, that is to be dampened using a harmonics controller, is defined using p3524.

r3626[0...1] Infeed harmonics control output / INF harm_ctrl outp

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Veff] - [Veff] - [Veff]

Description: Displays the output voltages of the harmonics controller.

r3626[0]: RMS value of the 5th harmonic of the controller output voltage
r3626[1]: RMS value of the 7th harmonic of the controller output voltage
The harmonics controller corrects the power module voltages so that the line-side current harmonics are reduced.
Dependency: Refer to: p3624, p3625

r3632 Infeed input voltage Vsd (active component) / INF U_input Usd
A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1774,
8946, 8950
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Veff] - [Veff] - [Veff]

Description: Displays the voltage Vsd (active component) at the 3-phase line supply input of the power module.

r3633 Infeed input voltage Vsq (reactive component) / INF U_input Usq
A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1774,
8946, 8950
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Veff] - [Veff] - [Veff]
Description: Displays the voltage Vsq (reactive component) at the 3-phase line supply input of the power module.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-377

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r3635 Infeed output voltage angle / INF U_output angle

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 8950
P-Group: Control Units group: ANGLE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°] - [°] - [°]
Description: Displays the output voltage angle (relative to the line angle).

p3660 VSM input line supply voltage, voltage scaler / VSM input U_scaler
A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 100000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the voltage scaler for the voltage sensing module (VSM).
Note: When the 690 V input is used (X522) without voltage scaler,, 0 % should be entered.
When the 100 V input (X521) is used with voltage scaler to measure medium voltages, the dividing (scaling) factor
multiplied by 100% should be entered.
Example:
1000 V line supply voltage, voltage scaling, 10:1
--> voltage at the VSM input is 100 V
--> p3660 = 10 * 100 % = 1000 %

r3661 CO: VSM input line supply voltage u1 - u2 / VSM input u1-u2
A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]

Description: Displays the voltage between L1 and L2.

Dependency: Refer to: p3660
Note: X521.1 or X522.1: Connection of L1
X521.2 or X522.2: Connection of L2

r3662 CO: VSM input line supply voltage u2 - u3 / VSM input u2-u3
A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]

Description: Displays the voltage between L2 and L3.

Dependency: Refer to: p3660
Note: X521.2 or X522.2: Connection of L2
X521.3 or X522.3: Connection of L3

1-378  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r3664 BO: VSM temperature evaluation, status / VSM temp status

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status of the temperature evaluation of the voltage sensing module (VSM).
This displays as to whether the temperature actual value has exceeded the fault/alarm threshold.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Temperature alarm threshold exceeded No Yes -
01 Temperature fault threshold exceeded No Yes -
Dependency: Refer to: p3665, r3666, p3667, p3668

p3665[0...n] VSM temperature evaluation, sensor type / VSM TempSensorType

A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: VSMDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0

Description: Setting of the temperature sensor for the voltage sensing module (VSM).
The temperature sensor is connected to terminals X520.5 and X520.6 of the VSM.
Values: 0: No sensor
1: PTC
2: KTY84

r3666 CO: VSM temperature KTY / VSM temp KTY

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]

Description: Displays the temperature actual value of a KTY84 temperature sensor connected to the voltage sensing module
(VSM).
Prerequisite:
A KTY84 sensor is connected and p3665 is set to 2.
Dependency: Refer to: p3665

p3667 VSM line filter overtemperature alarm threshold / VSMfilt_T A_thresh

A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [°C] 301 [°C] 150 [°C]
Description: Sets the alarm threshold for the KTY temperature sensor of the voltage sensing module (VSM) to monitor the line
filter temperature.
Prerequisite:
A KTY84 sensor is connected and p3665 is set to 2.
Dependency: Refer to: p3665
Refer to: F34207

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-379

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p3668 VSM line filter overtemperature shutdown threshold / VSM filt_T F_thres
A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [°C] 301 [°C] 180 [°C]
Description: Sets the shutdown threshold for the KTY temperature sensor of the VSM to monitor the line filter temperature.
Dependency: Refer to: p3667
Refer to: A34211

p3669 VSM line filter overtemperature hysteresis / VSM filt_T hyst

A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: TEMPERATURE_K Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 [K] 50 [K] 3 [K]
Description: Sets the hysteresis for the alarm threshold of the VSM to monitor the line filter temperature.
Dependency: Refer to: p3667

p3670 VSM 10 V input CT gain / VSM CT_gain

A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: CURRENT_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.000 [A] 1000.000 [A] 1.000 [A]

Description: Sets CT gain of the CT connected at the 10 V input of the voltage sensing module (VSM).
The parameter specifies the current magnitude in [A] referred to the input voltage at the VSM in [V].
Example:
CT with 1 V per 200 A.
--> p3670 = 200
Dependency: Refer to: r3671, r3672
Note: The CT for phase 1 is connected at terminals X520.1 and X520.2 of the VSM.
The CT for phase 2 is connected at terminals X520.3 and X520.4 of the VSM.

r3671 CO: VSM 10 V input CT 1 actual value / VSM CT 1 I_act

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: CURRENT_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
Description: Displays the current actual value from current transducer (CT) 1 at the 10 V input of the voltage sensing module
(VSM).
Dependency: Refer to: p3670
Note: The CT for phase 1 is connected at terminals X520.1 and X520.2 of the VSM.

1-380  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r3672 CO: VSM 10 V input CT 2 actual value / VSM CT 2 I_act

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: CURRENT_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
Description: Displays the current actual value from current transducer (CT) 2 at the 10 V input of the voltage sensing module
(VSM).
Dependency: Refer to: p3670
Note: The CT for phase 2 is connected at terminals X520.3 and X520.4 of the VSM.

r3673 CO: VSM 10 V input 1 actual value / VSM input 1 U_act

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]

Description: Displays the actual value of the voltage measured at the 10 V input 1 of the voltage sensing modules (VSM).
Dependency: Refer to: p3670
Note: 10 V input 1: Terminals X520.1 and X520.2

r3674 CO: VSM 10 V input 2 actual value / VSM input 2 U_act

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]

Description: Displays the actual value of the voltage measured at the 10 V input 2 of the voltage sensing modules (VSM).
Dependency: Refer to: p3670
Note: 10 V input 2: Terminals X520.3 and X520.4

p3676 VSM line filter capacitance alarm threshold / VSMfilt C A_thresh

A_INF Can be changed: T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 0.00 [%]

Description: Sets the alarm threshold for the change of the capacitance of the line filter.
The filter capacitance monitoring function is de-activated with p3676 = 0.00 %.
Dependency: Refer to: p3670
Refer to: A06250
Note: Prerequisite for monitoring the filter capacitance:
The phase currents must be measured at two capacitors of the line filter. To do this, CTs should be connected at
the 10 V inputs of the VSM.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-381

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r3677[0...2] VSM line filter capacitance / VSM filt C

A_INF Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: CAPACITY_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [µF] - [µF] - [µF]
Description: Displays the capacitance of the line filter (for a star circuit configuration).
Index: [0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
Dependency: Refer to: p3676
Note: Prerequisites:
The filter capacitance monitoring is activated.

p3900 Completion of quick commissioning / End quick_commis.

A_INF, B_INF Can be changed: C2 Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0

Description: Used to calculate all of the dependent parameters when exiting the quick commissioning (p0010 = 1).
Values: 0: No quick parameterization
1: Quick parameterization after parameter reset
2: Quick parameterization (only) for BICO and controller parameters
3: Quick parameterization (only) for control parameters
Note: p3900 = 1 initially resets the parameters (factory setting) for all axis parameters without overwriting the entries
made during the quick commissioning.
When the calculations have been completed, p3900 and p0010 are automatically reset to a value of 0.
For active infeed units, the following applies:
For p3900 > 0, p0340 = 1 is always called and the appropriate parameters calculated (refer to p0340).

p3900 Completion of quick commissioning / End quick_commis.

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
Description: Exits the quick commissioning (p0010 = 1) with automatic calculation of all of the parameters that depend on the
entries made during the quick commissioning.
p3900 = 1 initially includes a parameter reset (factory setting, the same as p0970 = 1) for all parameters of the drive
object; however, without overwriting the entries made during the quick commissioning.
The interconnections of PROFIBUS PZD telegram selection (p0922) and the interconnections via p0700, p1000
and p1500 are re-established and all of the dependent motor, open-loop and control-loop control parameters are
calculated (corresponding to p0340 = 1).
p3900 = 2 includes the restoration of the interconnections of PROFIBUS PZD telegram selection (p0922) and the
interconnections via p0700, p100 and p1500 and the calculations corresponding to p0340 = 1.
p3900 = 3 only includes the calculations associated with the motor, open-loop and closed-loop control parameters
corresponding to p0340 = 1.
Values: 0: No quick parameterization
1: Quick parameterization after parameter reset
2: Quick parameterization (only) for BICO and motor parameters
3: Quick parameterization for motor parameters (only)

1-382  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Note: When the calculations have been completed, p3900 and p0010 are automatically reset to a value of 0.
When calculating motor, open-loop and closed-loop control parameters (such as for p0340 = 1) parameters associ-
ated with a selected Siemens list motor are not overwritten.

p3902[0...n] Power module EEPROM Vdc calibration / PM EEPROM Vdc_cal

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: C1, C2, T Access level: 3
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: All groups Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4294967295 0

Description: Calibration factor for the DC link voltage measurement.

Caution! Incorrect use of the calibration can have a negative impact on the closed-loop control.
Note: The parameter only has an effect for chassis-type power modules.

p3950 Service parameter / Service parameter

CU Can be changed: C1, U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: All groups Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0

Description: For service personnel only.

p3981 Faults, acknowledge drive object / Faults ackn DO

All objects Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: - Function diagram: 2501
P-Group: Messages Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0

Description: Acknowledges all active faults of a drive object.

Note: Parameter should be set from 0 to 1 to acknowledge.
After acknowledgement, the parameter is automatically reset to 0.

p3985 Master control mode selection / PcCtrl mode select

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Setpoints Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0

Description: Sets the mode to change over the master control / local mode.
Values: 0: Change master control for STW1.0 = 0
1: Change master control in operation
Danger! When changing the master control in operation, the drive can manifest undesirable behavior - e.g. it can accelerate
up to another setpoint.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-383

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r3986 No. of parameters / No. of parameters

All objects Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the number of parameters for this drive unit.
The number comprises the device-specific and the drive-specific parameters.
Dependency: Refer to: r0980, r0981, r0989

r3988 Ramp-up state / Ramp-up state

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the ramp-up state.
Values: 0: not active
1: Fatal fault
10: Fault
20: Reset all parameters
30: Drive object modified
40: Download using commissioning software
90: Reset control unit and delete drive objects
100: Start initialization
110: Instantiate control unit basis
150: Wait until actual topology determined
160: Evaluate topology
170: Instantiate control unit rest
180: Initialization YDB configuration information
200: First commissioning
210: Create drive packages
250: Wait for topology acknowledge
325: Wait for input of drive type
350: Determine drive type
360: Write into topology-dependent parameters
370: Wait until p0009 = 0 is set
380: Check topology
550: Call conversion functions for parameter
625: Wait non-cyclic starting DRIVE CLiQ
650: Start cyclic operation
660: Evaluate drive commissioning status
680: Wait for CU link slaves
700: Save parameters
725: Wait until DRIVE-CLiQ cyclic
750: Interrupt enable
800: Initialization finished

1-384  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4021 TB30 digital inputs terminal actual value / TB30 DI act value
TB30 Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9100
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the actual value at the digital inputs.
This means that the actual input signal can be checked at terminal DI x prior to switching from the simulation mode
(p4095.x = 1) to the terminal mode (p4095.x = 0). The input signal of terminal DI x is displayed in bit x of r4021.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X481.1) Low High -
01 DI 1 (X481.2) Low High -
02 DI 2 (X481.3) Low High -
03 DI 3 (X481.4) Low High -
Note: DI: Digital input

r4021 TM31 digital inputs terminal actual value / TM31 DI act value
TM31 Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1840,
9550, 9552, 9560, 9562
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the actual value at the digital inputs.
This means that the actual input signal can be checked at terminal DI x or DI/DO x prior to switching from the simu-
lation mode (p4095.x = 1) to terminal mode (p4095.x = 0). The input signal at terminal DI x or DI/DO x is displayed
in bit x of r4021.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X520.1) Low High -
01 DI 1 (X520.2) Low High -
02 DI 2 (X520.3) Low High -
03 DI 3 (X520.4) Low High -
04 DI 4 (X530.1) Low High -
05 DI 5 (X530.2) Low High -
06 DI 6 (X530.3) Low High -
07 DI 7 (X530.4) Low High -
08 DI/DO 8 (X541.2) Low High -
09 DI/DO 9 (X541.3) Low High -
10 DI/DO 10 (X541.4) Low High -
11 DI/DO 11 (X541.5) Low High -
Note: DI: Digital input
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
If a DI/DO is parameterized as output (p4028.x = 1), then r4021.x = 0 is displayed.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-385

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4022 CO/BO: TB30 digital inputs, status / TB30 DI status

TB30 Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1790,
9100
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the status of the digital inputs of the terminal board 30 (TB30).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X481.1) Low High -
01 DI 1 (X481.2) Low High -
02 DI 2 (X481.3) Low High -
03 DI 3 (X481.4) Low High -
Dependency: Refer to: r4023
Note: DI: Digital input

r4022 CO/BO: TM31 digital inputs, status / TM31 DI status

TM31 Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1840,
9550, 9552, 9560, 9562
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status of the digital inputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X520.1) Low High -
01 DI 1 (X520.2) Low High -
02 DI 2 (X520.3) Low High -
03 DI 3 (X520.4) Low High -
04 DI 4 (X530.1) Low High -
05 DI 5 (X530.2) Low High -
06 DI 6 (X530.3) Low High -
07 DI 7 (X530.4) Low High -
08 DI/DO 8 (X541.2) Low High -
09 DI/DO 9 (X541.3) Low High -
10 DI/DO 10 (X541.4) Low High -
11 DI/DO 11 (X541.5) Low High -
Note: DI: Digital input
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output

1-386  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4023 BO: TB30 digital inputs, status inverted / TB30 DI status inv
TB30 Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1790,
9100
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the inverted status of the digital inputs of the terminal board 30 (TB30).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X481.1) Low High -
01 DI 1 (X481.2) Low High -
02 DI 2 (X481.3) Low High -
03 DI 3 (X481.4) Low High -
Dependency: Refer to: r4022
Note: DI: Digital input

r4023 BO: TM31 digital inputs, status inverted / TM31 DI status inv
TM31 Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1840,
9550, 9552, 9560, 9562
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the inverted status of the digital inputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X520.1) Low High -
01 DI 1 (X520.2) Low High -
02 DI 2 (X520.3) Low High -
03 DI 3 (X520.4) Low High -
04 DI 4 (X530.1) Low High -
05 DI 5 (X530.2) Low High -
06 DI 6 (X530.3) Low High -
07 DI 7 (X530.4) Low High -
08 DI/DO 8 (X541.2) Low High -
09 DI/DO 9 (X541.3) Low High -
10 DI/DO 10 (X541.4) Low High -
11 DI/DO 11 (X541.5) Low High -
Note: DI: Digital input
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output

p4028 TM15 set input or output / TM15 DI or DO

TM15 Can be changed: T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 0000 0000 1111 1111 1111 1111 0000 bin
1111 1111 bin

Description: Sets the bidirectional digital inputs/outputs on the terminal module 15 (TM15) as input or output.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-387

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP

00 DI/DO 0 (X520.2) Input Output -
01 DI/DO 1 (X520.3) Input Output -
02 DI/DO 2 (X520.4) Input Output -
03 DI/DO 3 (X520.5) Input Output -
04 DI/DO 4 (X520.6) Input Output -
05 DI/DO 5 (X520.7) Input Output -
06 DI/DO 6 (X520.8) Input Output -
07 DI/DO 7 (X520.9) Input Output -
08 DI/DO 8 (X521.2) Input Output -
09 DI/DO 9 (X521.3) Input Output -
10 DI/DO 10 (X522.4) Input Output -
11 DI/DO 11 (X521.5) Input Output -
12 DI/DO 12 (X521.6) Input Output -
13 DI/DO 13 (X521.7) Input Output -
14 DI/DO 14 (X521.8) Input Output -
15 DI/DO 15 (X521.9) Input Output -
16 DI/DO 16 (X522.2) Input Output -
17 DI/DO 17 (X522.3) Input Output -
18 DI/DO 18 (X522.4) Input Output -
19 DI/DO 19 (X522.5) Input Output -
20 DI/DO 20 (X522.6) Input Output -
21 DI/DO 21 (X522.7) Input Output -
22 DI/DO 22 (X522.8) Input Output -
23 DI/DO 23 (X522.9) Input Output -
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output

p4028 TM17 set input or output / TM17 DI or DO

TM17 Can be changed: T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin 0000 bin
Description: Sets the bidirectional digital inputs/outputs on the terminal module 17 (TM17) as input or output.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI/DO 0 (X520.2) Input Output -
01 DI/DO 1 (X520.3) Input Output -
02 DI/DO 2 (X520.5) Input Output -
03 DI/DO 3 (X520.6) Input Output -
04 DI/DO 4 (X520.8) Input Output -
05 DI/DO 5 (X520.9) Input Output -
06 DI/DO 6 (X521.2) Input Output -
07 DI/DO 7 (X521.3) Input Output -
08 DI/DO 8 (X521.8) Input Output -
09 DI/DO 9 (X521.9) Input Output -
10 DI/DO 10 (X522.2) Input Output -
11 DI/DO 11 (X522.3) Input Output -
12 DI/DO 12 (X522.5) Input Output -
13 DI/DO 13 (X522.6) Input Output -
14 DI/DO 14 (X522.8) Input Output -
15 DI/DO 15 (X522.9) Input Output -
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output

1-388  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4028 TM31 set input or output / TM31 DI or DO

TM31 Can be changed: T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1840,
9560, 9562
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin 0000 bin

Description: Sets the bidirectional digital inputs/outputs as input or output on the terminal module 31 (TM31).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
08 DI/DO 8 (X541.2) Input Output -
09 DI/DO 9 (X541.3) Input Output -
10 DI/DO 10 (X541.4) Input Output -
11 DI/DO 11 (X541.5) Input Output -

p4030 BI: TB30 signal source for terminal DO 0 / TB30 S_Src DO 0

TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1790,
9102
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DO 0 (X481.5) of the terminal board 30 (TB30).
Note: DO: Digital output

p4030 BI: TM31 signal source for terminal DO 0 / TM31 S_src DO 0

TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1840,
9556
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for the digital output DO 0 (X542.1, X542.2, X542.3) of terminal module 31 (TM31).
Digital output 0 of TM31 is a relay output.
If the signal at the binector input p4030 is low, then terminal COM 0 (X542.2) is connected to NC 0 (X542.1). This
connection also matches the mechanical quiescent setting of the relay.
If the signal at the binector input p4030 is high, then terminal COM 0 (X542.2) is connected to NO 0 (X542.3).
Note: DO: Digital output
NC: Normally closed contact
NO: Normally open contact

p4031 BI: TB30 signal source for terminal DO 1 / TB30 S_Src DO 1

TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9102
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DO 1 (X481.6) of the terminal board 30 (TB30).
Note: DO: Digital output

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-389

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4031 BI: TM31 signal source for terminal DO 1 / TM31 S_src DO 1

TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1840,
9556
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for the digital output DO 1 (X542.4, X542.5, X542.6) of terminal module 31 (TM31).
Digital output 1 of TM31 is a relay output.
If the signal at the binector input p4031 is low, then terminal COM 1 (X542.5) is connected to NC 1 (X542.4). This
connection also matches the mechanical quiescent setting of the relay.
If the signal at the binector input p4031 is high, then terminal COM 1 (X542.5) is connected to NO 1 (X542.6).
Note: DO: Digital output
NC: Normally closed contact
NO: Normally open contact

p4032 BI: TB30 signal source for terminal DO 2 / TB30 S_Src DO 2

TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9102
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DO 2 (X481.7) of the terminal board 30 (TB30).
Note: DO: Digital output

p4033 BI: TB30 signal source for terminal DO 3 / TB30 S_Src DO 3

TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1790,
9102
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DO 3 (X481.8) of the terminal board 30 (TB30).
Note: DO: Digital output

p4038 BI: TM31 signal source for terminal DI/DO 8 / TM31 S_src DI/DO 8
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1840,
9560
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 8 (X541.2) of terminal module 31 (TM31).
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p4028.8 = 1).

1-390  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4039 BI: TM31 signal source for terminal DI/DO 9 / TM31 S_src DI/DO 9
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9560
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 9 (X541.3) of terminal module 31 (TM31).
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p4028.9 = 1).

p4040 BI: TM31 signal source for terminal DI/DO 10 / TM31 S_src DI/DO10
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9562
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 10 (X541.4) of terminal module 31 (TM31).
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p4028.10 = 1).

p4041 BI: TM31 signal source for terminal DI/DO 11 / TM31 S_src DI/DO11
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1840,
9562
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 11 (X541.5) of terminal module 31 (TM31).
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p4028.11 = 1).

p4046 TM31 digital outputs, limit current / TM31 DO limit curr

TM31 Can be changed: T Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 9560
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0

Description: Sets the limit for the total output voltage of terminals X541.1, X541.2, X541.3 and X541.4 (DI/DO 8 ... 11) of termi-
nal module 31 (TM31).
Values: 0: 0.1 A total current limit DI/DO 8 ... 11
1: 1.0 A total current limit DI/DO 8 ... 11
Dependency: Refer to: p4028
Warning! Since the sum of the output currents at terminals X541.1, X541.2, X541.3 and X541.4 is limited, an overcurrent or
short circuit at one output terminal can cause a dip in the signal at the other terminals.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-391

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4047 TB30 digital outputs status / TB30 DO status

TB30 Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9102
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status of the digital outputs of the terminal board 30 (TB30).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DO 0 (X481.5) Low High -
01 DO 1 (X481.6) Low High -
02 DO 2 (X481.7) Low High -
03 DO 3 (X481.8) Low High -
Note: DO: Digital output
Inversion using p4048 has been taken into account.

r4047 TM31 digital outputs status / TM31 DO status

TM31 Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9556,
9560, 9562
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the status of the digital outputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DO 0 (X542.1 - 3) Low High -
01 DO 1 (X542.4 - 6) Low High -
08 DI/DO 8 (X541.2) Low High -
09 DI/DO 9 (X541.3) Low High -
10 DI/DO 10 (X541.4) Low High -
11 DI/DO 11 (X541.5) Low High -
Note: DO: Digital output
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
Inversion using p4048 has been taken into account.
The setting of the DI/DO as either input or output is of no significance (p4028).

p4048 TB30 invert digital outputs / TB30 DO invert

TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9102
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 bin 0000 bin

Description: Setting to invert the signals at the digital outputs of the terminal board 30 (TB30).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DO 0 (X581.5) Not inverted Inverted -
01 DO 1 (X581.6) Not inverted Inverted -
02 DO 3 (X581.7) Not inverted Inverted -
03 DO 4 (X581.8) Not inverted Inverted -
Note: DO: Digital output

1-392  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4048 TM15 invert digital inputs/outputs / TM15 DI/DO invert

TM15 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 0000 0000 1111 1111 1111 1111 0000 bin
1111 1111 bin

Description: Setting to invert the signals at the digital inputs/outputs of terminal module 15 (TM15).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI/DO 0 (X520.2) Not inverted Inverted -
01 DI/DO 1 (X520.3) Not inverted Inverted -
02 DI/DO 2 (X520.4) Not inverted Inverted -
03 DI/DO 3 (X520.5) Not inverted Inverted -
04 DI/DO 4 (X520.6) Not inverted Inverted -
05 DI/DO 5 (X520.7) Not inverted Inverted -
06 DI/DO 6 (X520.8) Not inverted Inverted -
07 DI/DO 7 (X520.9) Not inverted Inverted -
08 DI/DO 8 (X521.2) Not inverted Inverted -
09 DI/DO 9 (X521.3) Not inverted Inverted -
10 DI/DO 10 (X522.4) Not inverted Inverted -
11 DI/DO 11 (X521.5) Not inverted Inverted -
12 DI/DO 12 (X521.6) Not inverted Inverted -
13 DI/DO 13 (X521.7) Not inverted Inverted -
14 DI/DO 14 (X521.8) Not inverted Inverted -
15 DI/DO 15 (X521.9) Not inverted Inverted -
16 DI/DO 16 (X522.2) Not inverted Inverted -
17 DI/DO 17 (X522.3) Not inverted Inverted -
18 DI/DO 18 (X522.4) Not inverted Inverted -
19 DI/DO 19 (X522.5) Not inverted Inverted -
20 DI/DO 20 (X522.6) Not inverted Inverted -
21 DI/DO 21 (X522.7) Not inverted Inverted -
22 DI/DO 22 (X522.8) Not inverted Inverted -
23 DI/DO 23 (X522.9) Not inverted Inverted -
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-393

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4048 TM17 invert digital inputs/outputs / TM17 DI/DO invert

TM17 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin 0000 bin
Description: Setting to invert the signals at the digital inputs/outputs of terminal module 17 (TM17).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI/DO 0 (X520.2) Not inverted Inverted -
01 DI/DO 1 (X520.3) Not inverted Inverted -
02 DI/DO 2 (X520.5) Not inverted Inverted -
03 DI/DO 3 (X520.6) Not inverted Inverted -
04 DI/DO 4 (X520.8) Not inverted Inverted -
05 DI/DO 5 (X520.9) Not inverted Inverted -
06 DI/DO 6 (X521.2) Not inverted Inverted -
07 DI/DO 7 (X521.3) Not inverted Inverted -
08 DI/DO 8 (X521.8) Not inverted Inverted -
09 DI/DO 9 (X521.9) Not inverted Inverted -
10 DI/DO 10 (X522.2) Not inverted Inverted -
11 DI/DO 11 (X522.3) Not inverted Inverted -
12 DI/DO 12 (X522.5) Not inverted Inverted -
13 DI/DO 13 (X522.6) Not inverted Inverted -
14 DI/DO 14 (X522.8) Not inverted Inverted -
15 DI/DO 15 (X522.9) Not inverted Inverted -
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output

p4048 TM31 invert digital outputs / TM31 DO invert

TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9556,
9560, 9562
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 0000 1111 1111 1111 bin 0000 bin

Description: Setting to invert the signals at the digital outputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DO 0 (X542.1 - 3) Not inverted Inverted -
01 DO 1 (X542.4 - 6) Not inverted Inverted -
08 DI/DO 8 (X541.2) Not inverted Inverted -
09 DI/DO 9 (X541.3) Not inverted Inverted -
10 DI/DO 10 (X541.4) Not inverted Inverted -
11 DI/DO 11 (X541.5) Not inverted Inverted -
Note: DO: Digital output
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output

1-394  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4049 TM15 digital inputs/outputs, set the mode / TM15 DI/DO mode
TM15 Can be changed: T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 0000 0000 1111 1111 1111 1111 0000 bin
1111 1111 bin

Description: Sets the mode of the DI/DOs of terminal module 15 (TM15).

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI/DO 0 (X520.2) I/O I/O with time -
01 DI/DO 1 (X520.3) I/O I/O with time -
02 DI/DO 2 (X520.4) I/O I/O with time -
03 DI/DO 3 (X520.5) I/O I/O with time -
04 DI/DO 4 (X520.6) I/O I/O with time -
05 DI/DO 5 (X520.7) I/O I/O with time -
06 DI/DO 6 (X520.8) I/O I/O with time -
07 DI/DO 7 (X520.9) I/O I/O with time -
08 DI/DO 8 (X521.2) I/O I/O with time -
09 DI/DO 9 (X521.3) I/O I/O with time -
10 DI/DO 10 (X522.4) I/O I/O with time -
11 DI/DO 11 (X521.5) I/O I/O with time -
12 DI/DO 12 (X521.6) I/O I/O with time -
13 DI/DO 13 (X521.7) I/O I/O with time -
14 DI/DO 14 (X521.8) I/O I/O with time -
15 DI/DO 15 (X521.9) I/O I/O with time -
16 DI/DO 16 (X522.2) I/O I/O with time -
17 DI/DO 17 (X522.3) I/O I/O with time -
18 DI/DO 18 (X522.4) I/O I/O with time -
19 DI/DO 19 (X522.5) I/O I/O with time -
20 DI/DO 20 (X522.6) I/O I/O with time -
21 DI/DO 21 (X522.7) I/O I/O with time -
22 DI/DO 22 (X522.8) I/O I/O with time -
23 DI/DO 23 (X522.9) I/O I/O with time -
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-395

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4049 TM17 digital inputs/outputs, set the mode / TM17 DI/DO mode
TM17 Can be changed: T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin 0000 bin
Description: Sets the mode of the DI/DO of terminal module 17 (TM17).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI/DO 0 (X520.2) I/O I/O with time -
01 DI/DO 1 (X520.3) I/O I/O with time -
02 DI/DO 2 (X520.5) I/O I/O with time -
03 DI/DO 3 (X520.6) I/O I/O with time -
04 DI/DO 4 (X520.8) I/O I/O with time -
05 DI/DO 5 (X520.9) I/O I/O with time -
06 DI/DO 6 (X521.2) I/O I/O with time -
07 DI/DO 7 (X521.3) I/O I/O with time -
08 DI/DO 8 (X521.8) I/O I/O with time -
09 DI/DO 9 (X521.9) I/O I/O with time -
10 DI/DO 10 (X522.2) I/O I/O with time -
11 DI/DO 11 (X522.3) I/O I/O with time -
12 DI/DO 12 (X522.5) I/O I/O with time -
13 DI/DO 13 (X522.6) I/O I/O with time -
14 DI/DO 14 (X522.8) I/O I/O with time -
15 DI/DO 15 (X522.9) I/O I/O with time -
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output

r4052[0...1] TB30 analog inputs, actual input voltage / TB30 AI input_U

TB30 Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]

Description: Displays the actual input voltage at the analog inputs of the terminal board 30 (TB30).
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Note: AI: Analog input

r4052[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, actual input voltage/current / TM31 AI input_U/I

TM31 Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9566,
9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the actual input voltage in V when set as voltage input.
Displays the actual input current in mA when set as current input and with the load resistor switched-in.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Dependency: The type of analog input AI x (voltage or current input) is set using p4056.
Refer to: p4056
Note: AI: Analog input

1-396  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4053[0...1] TB30 analog inputs, smoothing time constant / TB30 AI T_smooth

TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 1000.0 [ms] 0.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant of the 1st-order low pass filter for the analog inputs of the terminal board 30
(TB30).
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Note: AI: Analog input

p4053[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, smoothing time constant / TM31 AI T_smooth

TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9566,
9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 1000.0 [ms] 0.0 [ms]

Description: Sets the smoothing time constant of the 1st-order low pass filter for the analog inputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Note: AI: Analog input

r4055[0...1] CO: TB30 analog inputs, actual value in percent / TB30 AI value in %
TB30 Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1790,
9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]

Description: Displays the currently referred input value of the analog inputs of terminal board 30 (TB30).
When interconnected, the signals are referred to the reference quantities p200x and p205x.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Note: AI: Analog input

r4055[0...1] CO: TB31 analog inputs, actual value in percent / TM31 AI value in %
TM31 Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1840,
9566, 9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]

Description: Displays the currently referred input value of the analog inputs of terminal module 31 (TB31).
When interconnected, the signals are referred to the reference quantities p200x and p205x.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Note: AI: Analog input

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-397

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4056[0...1] TB30 analog inputs, type / TB30 AI type

TB30 Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the type of analog inputs.
Values: 4: Bipolar voltage input (-10 V ... +10 V)
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)

p4056[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, type / TM31 AI type

TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 9566,
9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 5 4
Description: Sets the type of analog inputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).
p4056[x] = 0, 4 correspond to a voltage input (r4052, p4057, p4059 are displayed in V).
p4056[x] = 2, 3, 5 correspond to a current input (r4052, p4057, p4059 are displayed in mA).
In addition, the associated switch S5 must be switched.
For a voltage input, S5.1 or S5.2 must be switched to setting V.
For a current input, S5.1 and S5.2 must be switched into setting I (load resistor = 250 Ohm is switched-in).
Values: 0: Unipolar voltage input (0 V ... +10 V)
2: Unipolar current input (0 mA ... +20 mA)
3: Unipolar current input monitored (4 mA ... +20 mA)
4: Bipolar voltage input (-10 V ... +10 V)
5: Bipolar current input (-20 mA ... +20 mA)
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Warning! The maximum voltage difference between the analog input terminals AI+, AI- and the ground of the TM31 (X520.6,
X530.3) may not exceed 35 V.
For operation with the load resistor switched-in, the voltage between the differential inputs AI+ and AI- may not
exceed 15 V or the impressed current of 60 mA; if this is not carefully observed, the input will be damaged.
Notice: For use as voltage input, switch S500 must be set to 0 for the input involved.
Switch S500 is located on the front panel of the TM31 above terminal block X521.
Note: When changing p4056, the parameters of the normalization characteristic (p4057, p4058, p4059, p4060) are over-
written with the following default values:
For p4056 = 0 or 4, p4057 is set to 0.0 V, p4058 to 0.0 %, p4059 to 10.0 V and p4060 to 100.0 %.
For p4056 = 2 or 3 or 5, p4057 is set to 0.0 mA, p4058 to 0.0 %, p4059 to 20.0 mA and p4060 to 100.0 %.

1-398  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4057[0...1] TB30 analog inputs, characteristic value x1 / TB30 AI char x1

TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-11.000 [V] 11.000 [V] 0.000 [V]
Description: Sets the normalization characteristic for the analog inputs of terminal board 30 (TB30).
The normalization characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using two points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (input voltage in V) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not limit.

p4057[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, characteristic value x1 / TM31 AI char x1

TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9566,
9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-20.000 20.000 0.000

Description: Sets the normalization characteristic for the analog inputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).
The normalization characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using two points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (input voltage in V or input current in mA) of the 1st value pair of the char-
acteristic.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Dependency: The units of this parameter (V or mA) depend on the analog input type.
Refer to: p4056
Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when the analog input type (p4056) is modified.
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not limit.

p4058[0...1] TB30 analog inputs, characteristic value y1 / TB30 AI char y1

TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the normalization characteristic for the analog inputs of terminal board 30 (TB30).
The normalization characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using two points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (percentage) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not limit.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-399

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4058[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, characteristic value y1 / TM31 AI char y1

TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9566,
9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]

Description: Sets the normalization characteristic for the analog inputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).
The normalization characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using two points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (percentage) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when the analog input type (p4056) is modified.
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not limit.

p4059[0...1] TB30 analog inputs, characteristic value x2 / TB30 AI char x2

TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-11.000 [V] 11.000 [V] 10.000 [V]

Description: Sets the normalization characteristic for the analog inputs of terminal board 30 (TB30).
The normalization characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using two points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (input voltage in V) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not limit.

p4059[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, characteristic value x2 / TM31 AI char x2

TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9566,
9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-20.000 20.000 10.000
Description: Sets the normalization characteristic for the analog inputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).
The normalization characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using two points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (input voltage in V or input current in mA) of the 2nd value pair of the
characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Dependency: The units of this parameter (V or mA) depend on the analog input type.
Refer to: p4056
Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when the analog input type (p4056) is modified.
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not limit.

1-400  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4060[0...1] TB30 analog inputs, characteristic value y2 / TB30 AI char y2

TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the normalization characteristic for the analog inputs of terminal board 30 (TB30).
The normalization characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using two points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (percentage) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not limit.

p4060[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, characteristic value y2 / TM31 AI char y2

TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9566,
9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]

Description: Sets the normalization characteristic for the analog inputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).
The normalization characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using two points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (percentage) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when the analog input type (p4056) is modified.
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not limit.

p4061[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, wire breakage monitoring response threshold /

TM31 WireBrkThresh
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9566,
9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: CURRENT_DC_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [mA] 20.00 [mA] 2.00 [mA]

Description: Sets the response threshold for wire-breakage monitoring of the analog inputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Dependency: Wire-breakage monitoring is active for the following type of analog input: p4056[x] = 3 (unipolar current input moni-
tors 4 mA ... 20 mA).
Refer to: p4056

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-401

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4062[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, wire breakage monitoring, delay time / TM31 wirebrk t_del
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 9566,
9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 100 [ms]

Description: Sets the delay time for wire-breakage monitoring of the analog inputs on terminal module 31 (TM31).
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)

p4063[0...1] TB30 analog inputs offset / TB30 AI offset

TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: VOLTAGE_DC Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-20.000 [V] 20.000 [V] 0.000 [V]

Description: Sets the offset for the analog inputs of terminal board 30 (TB30).
The offset is added to the input signal before the normalization characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)

p4063[0...1] TM31 analog inputs offset / TM31 AI offset

TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9566,
9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-20.000 20.000 0.000
Description: Sets the offset for the analog inputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).
The offset is added to the input signal before the normalization characteristic.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)

p4066[0...1] TB30 analog inputs, activate absolute value generation / TB30 AI absVal act
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0

Description: Activates the absolute value generation for the analog input signals of the terminal board 30 (TB30).
Values: 0: No absolute value generation
1: Absolute value generation switched-in
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)

1-402  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4066[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, activate absolute value generation / TM31 AI absVal act
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 9566,
9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0

Description: Activates the absolute value generation for the analog input signals of terminal module 31 (TM31).
Values: 0: No absolute value generation
1: Absolute value generation switched-in
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)

p4067[0...1] BI: TB30 analog inputs, signal source for inversion / TB30 AI invert
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to invert the analog input signals of the terminal board 30 (TB30).
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)

p4067[0...1] BI: TM31 analog inputs, signal source for inversion / TM31 AI invert
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9566,
9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source to invert the analog inputs signals of terminal module 31 (TM31).
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)

p4068[0...1] TB30 analog inputs, window to suppress noise / TB30 AI window

TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 20.00 [%] 0.00 [%]

Description: Sets the noise suppression window for the analog inputs of terminal board 30 (TB30).
Changes less than the window are suppressed.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-403

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4068[0...1] TM31 analog inputs, window to suppress noise / TM31 AI window

TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9566,
9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 20.00 [%] 0.00 [%]

Description: Sets the window for noise suppression for the analog inputs of terminal module 31 (TB31).
Changes less than the window are suppressed.
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)

p4069[0...1] BI: TB30 analog inputs, signal source for enable / TB30 AI enable
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for enabling the analog inputs of the terminal board 30 (TB30).
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)

p4069[0...1] BI: TM31 analog inputs, signal source for enable / TM31 AI enable
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9566,
9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 1
Description: Sets the signal source for the enable signal of the analog inputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)

p4071[0...1] CI: TB30 analog outputs, signal source / TB30 AO sig_source

TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1790,
9106
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for the analog outputs of the terminal board 30 (TB30).
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)

1-404  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4071[0...1] CI: TM31 analog outputs, signal source / TM31 AO sig_source

TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1840,
9572
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for the analog outputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)
[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)

r4072[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, output value actually referred / TB30 AO output_val
TB30 Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]

Description: Displays the actual referred output value of the analog outputs of the terminal board 30 (TB30).
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)

r4072[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, output value actually referred / TM31 AO output_val
TM31 Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]

Description: Displays the actual referred output value of the analog outputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)
[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)

p4073[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, smoothing time constant / TB30 AO T_smooth

TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 1000.0 [ms] 0.0 [ms]

Description: Sets the smoothing time constant of the 1st order low pass filter for the analog outputs of the terminal board 30
(TB30).
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-405

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4073[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, smoothing time constant / TM31 AO T_smooth

TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.0 [ms] 1000.0 [ms] 0.0 [ms]
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant of the 1st-order low pass filter for the analog outputs of terminal module 31
(TM31).
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)
[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)

r4074[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, actual output voltage / TB30 AO U_smooth

TB30 Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]

Description: Displays the actual output voltage at the analog outputs of the terminal board 30 (TB30).
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)

r4074[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, actual output voltage/current / TM31 AO U/I_output

TM31 Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the actual output voltage in V when set as voltage output.
Displays the actual output voltage in mA when set as current output.
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)
[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Dependency: The type of the analog output AO x (voltage or current output) is set using p4076.
Refer to: p4076
Note: AO: Analog output

p4075[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, activate absolute value generation / TB30 AO absVal act
TB30 Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Activates the absolute value generation for the analog outputs of the terminal board 30 (TB30).
Values: 0: No absolute value generation
1: Absolute value generation switched-in
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)

1-406  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4075[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, activate absolute value generation / TM31 AO absVal act
TM31 Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Activates the absolute value generation for the analog outputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).
Values: 0: No absolute value generation
1: Absolute value generation switched-in
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)
[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)

r4076[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, type / TB30 AO type

TB30 Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the type of analog outputs of the terminal board 30 (TB30).
Values: 4: Voltage output (-10 V ... +10 V)
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)

p4076[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, type / TM31 AO type

TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4 4

Description: Sets the type of analog outputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).

p4076[x] = 1, 4 correspond to a voltage output (p4074, p4078, p4080, p4083 are displayed in V).
p4076[x] = 0, 2, 3correspond to a current output (p4074, p4078, p4080, p4083 are displayed in mA).
Values: 0: Current output (0 mA ... +20 mA)
1: Voltage output (0 V ... +10 V)
2: Current output with monitoring (4 mA ... +20 mA)
3: Current output (-20 mA ... +20 mA)
4: Voltage output (-10 V ... +10 V)
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)
[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Dependency: Refer to: p4077, p4078, p4079, p4080
Note: When changing p4076, the parameters of the normalization characteristic (p4077, p4078, p4079, p4080) are over-
written with the following default values:
For p4076 = 0, p4077 is set to 0.0 %, p4078 to 0.0 mA, p4079 to 100.0 % and p4080 to 20.0 mA.
For p4076 = 1, p4077 is set to 0.0 %, p4078 to 0.0 V, p4079 to 100.0 % and p4080 to 10.0 V.
For p4076 = 2, p4077 is set to 0.0 %, p4078 to 4.0 mA, p4079 to 100.0 % and p4080 to 20.0 mA.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-407

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4077[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, characteristic value x1 / TB30 AO char x1

TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]
Description: Sets the normalization characteristic for the analog outputs of terminal board 30 (TB30).
The normalization characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not limit.

p4077[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, characteristic value x1 / TM31 AO char x1

TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 0.00 [%]

Description: Sets the normalization characteristic for the analog outputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).
The normalization characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)
[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Dependency: The units of this parameter (V or mA) depend on the analog input type.
Refer to: p4076
Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when the analog output type is changed (p4076).
Note: This parameter is automatically overwritten if p4076 (type of analog output) is changed.
The parameters for the characteristic do not limit.

p4078[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, characteristic value y1 / TB30 AO char y1

TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-11.000 [V] 11.000 [V] 0.000 [V]

Description: Sets the normalization characteristic for the analog outputs of terminal board 30 (TB30).
The normalization characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage in V) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not limit.

1-408  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4078[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, characteristic value y1 / TM31 AO char y1

TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-20.000 [V] 20.000 [V] 0.000 [V]
Description: Sets the normalization characteristic for the analog outputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).
The normalization characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage in V or output current in mA) of the 1st value pair of the
characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)
[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Dependency: The units of this parameter (V or mA) depend on the analog input type.
Refer to: p4076
Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when the analog output type is changed (p4076).
Note: This parameter is automatically overwritten if p4076 (type of analog output) is changed.
The parameters for the characteristic do not limit.

p4079[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, characteristic value x2 / TB30 AO char x2

TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]

Description: Sets the normalization characteristic for the analog outputs of terminal board 30 (TB30).
The normalization characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not limit.

p4079[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, characteristic value x2 / TM31 AO char x2

TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-1000.00 [%] 1000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]

Description: Sets the normalization characteristic for the analog outputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).
The normalization characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)
[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Dependency: Refer to: p4076
Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when the analog output type is changed (p4076).
Note: This parameter is overwritten if p4076 (type of analog output) is changed.
The parameters for the characteristic do not limit.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-409

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4080[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, characteristic value y2 / TB30 AO char y2

TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-11.000 [V] 11.000 [V] 10.000 [V]
Description: Sets the normalization characteristic for the analog outputs of terminal board 30 (TB30).
The normalization characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage in V) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)
Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not limit.

p4080[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, characteristic value y2 / TM31 AO char y2

TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-20.000 [V] 20.000 [V] 10.000 [V]

Description: Sets the normalization characteristic for the analog outputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).
The normalization characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage in V or output current in mA) of the 2nd value pair of the
characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)
[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Dependency: The units of this parameter (V or mA) depend on the analog input type.
Refer to: p4076
Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when the analog output type is changed (p4076).
Note: This parameter is overwritten if p4076 (type of analog output) is changed.
The parameters for the characteristic do not limit.

p4082[0...1] BI: TB30 analog outputs, signal source for inversion / TB30 AO invert
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Sets the signal source for inverting the analog output signals of the terminal board 30 (TB30).
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)

1-410  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4082[0...1] BI: TM31 analog outputs, signal source for inversion / TM31 AO invert
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source to invert the analog output signals of terminal module 31 (TM31).
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)
[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)

p4083[0...1] TB30 analog outputs, offset / TB30 AO offset

TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-10.000 10.000 0.000

Description: Sets the offset for the analog outputs of terminal board 30 (TB30).
The offset is added to the output signal after the normalization characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)

p4083[0...1] TM31 analog outputs, offset / TM31 AO offset

TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-20.000 20.000 0.000
Description: Sets the offset for the analog outputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).
The offset is added to the output signal after the normalization characteristic.
Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)
[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Dependency: The units of this parameter (V or mA) depend on the analog input type.
Refer to: p4076
Note: This means, for example, the offset of a downstream isolating amplifier can be compensated.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-411

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4095 TB30 digital inputs, simulation mode / TB30 DI sim_mode

TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1790,
9100
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 bin 0000 bin

Description: Sets the simulation mode for the digital inputs of the terminal board 30 (TB30).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X481.1) Terminal eval. Simulation -
01 DI 1 (X481.2) Terminal eval. Simulation -
02 DI 2 (X481.3) Terminal eval. Simulation -
03 DI 3 (X481.4) Terminal eval. Simulation -
Dependency: The setpoint for the input signals is specified using p4096.
Refer to: p4096
Note: DI: Digital input
This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977).

p4095 TM31 digital inputs, simulation mode / TM31 DI sim_mode

TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1840,
9550, 9552, 9560, 9562
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 0000 1111 1111 1111 bin 0000 bin
Description: Sets the simulation mode for the digital inputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X520.1) Terminal eval. Simulation -
01 DI 1 (X520.2) Terminal eval. Simulation -
02 DI 2 (X520.3) Terminal eval. Simulation -
03 DI 3 (X520.4) Terminal eval. Simulation -
04 DI 4 (X530.1) Terminal eval. Simulation -
05 DI 5 (X530.2) Terminal eval. Simulation -
06 DI 6 (X530.3) Terminal eval. Simulation -
07 DI 7 (X530.4) Terminal eval. Simulation -
08 DI/DO 8 (X541.2) Terminal eval. Simulation -
09 DI/DO 9 (X541.3) Terminal eval. Simulation -
10 DI/DO 10 (X541.4) Terminal eval. Simulation -
11 DI/DO 11 (X541.5) Terminal eval. Simulation -
Dependency: The setpoint for the input signals is specified using p4096.
Refer to: p4096
Note: DI: Digital input
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977).

1-412  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4096 TB30 digital inputs, simulation mode setpoint / TB30 DI sim setpt
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1790,
9100
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 bin 0000 bin

Description: Sets the setpoint for the input signals in the simulation mode of the digital inputs of the terminal board 30 (TB30).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X481.1) Low High -
01 DI 1 (X481.2) Low High -
02 DI 2 (X481.3) Low High -
03 DI 3 (X481.4) Low High -
Dependency: The simulation of a digital input is selected using p4095.
Refer to: p4095
Note: DI: Digital input
This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977).

p4096 TM31 digital inputs, simulation mode setpoint / TM31 DI sim setpt
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 1840,
9550, 9552, 9560, 9562
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 0000 1111 1111 1111 bin 0000 bin
Description: Sets the setpoint for the input signals in the simulation mode of the digital inputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI 0 (X520.1) Low High -
01 DI 1 (X520.2) Low High -
02 DI 2 (X520.3) Low High -
03 DI 3 (X520.4) Low High -
04 DI 4 (X530.1) Low High -
05 DI 5 (X530.2) Low High -
06 DI 6 (X530.3) Low High -
07 DI 7 (X530.4) Low High -
08 DI/DO 8 (X541.2) Low High -
09 DI/DO 9 (X541.3) Low High -
10 DI/DO 10 (X541.4) Low High -
11 DI/DO 11 (X541.5) Low High -
Dependency: The simulation of a digital input is selected using p4095.
Refer to: p4095
Note: DI: Digital input
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-413

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4097[0...1] TB30 analog inputs simulation mode / TB30 AI sim_mode

TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: Sets the simulation mode for the analog inputs of the terminal board 30 (TB30).
Values: 0: Off
1: On
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Dependency: The setpoint for the input voltage is specified via p4098.
Refer to: p4098
Note: AI: Analog input
This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977).

p4097[0...1] TM31 analog inputs simulation mode / TM31 AI sim_mode

TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 9566,
9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0

Description: Sets the simulation mode for the analog inputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).
Values: 0: No simulation mode for analog input x
1: Simulation mode for analog input x
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Dependency: The setpoint for the input voltage is specified via p4098.
Refer to: p4098
Note: AI: Analog input
This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977).

p4098[0...1] TB30 analog inputs simulation mode setpoint / TB30 AI sim setpt
TB30 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-11.000 [V] 11.000 [V] 0.000 [V]

Description: Sets the setpoint for the input voltage in the simulation mode of the analog inputs of terminal board 30 (TB30).
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Dependency: The simulation of an analog input is selected using p4097.
Refer to: p4097
Note: AI: Analog input
This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977).

1-414  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4098[0...1] TM31 analog inputs simulation mode setpoint / TM31 AI sim setpt
TM31 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9566,
9568
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-20.000 20.000 0.000

Description: Sets the setpoint for the input value in simulation mode of the analog inputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).
Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)
[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Dependency: The simulation of an analog input is selected using p4097.
If AI x is parameterized as voltage input (p4056), then the setpoint is a voltage in V.
If AI x is parameterized as current input (p4056), then the setpoint is current in mA.
Refer to: p4056, p4097
Note: AI: Analog input
This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977).

p4099[0...2] TB30 inputs/outputs, sampling time / TB30 I/O t_sample

TB30 Can be changed: C1 Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9100
P-Group: Commands Units group: TIME_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 5000.00 [µs] [0] 4000.00 [µs]
[1] 4000.00 [µs]
[2] 4000.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the sampling time for the inputs and outputs of the terminal board 30 (TB30).
Index: [0] = Digital inputs/outputs
[1] = Analog inputs
[2] = Analog outputs
Dependency: The parameter can only be modified for p0009 = 3, 29.
The sampling times can only be set as an integer multiple of the basic sampling time (p0110, p0111).
Refer to: p0009, p0110, p0111
Note: The modified sampling time is not effective until the drive unit is powered-up again.

p4099 TM15 inputs/outputs, sampling time / TM15 I/O t_sample

TM15 Can be changed: C1 Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: TIME_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
31.25 [µs] 400.00 [µs] 125.00 [µs]

Description: Sets the sampling time for the inputs and outputs of terminal module 15 (TM15).
Dependency: The parameter can only be modified for p0009 = 3, 29.
The sampling time must be set the same as the basic sampling time p0110[0].
Refer to: p0110
Note: The modified sampling time is not effective until the drive unit is powered-up again.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-415

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4099 TM17 inputs/outputs, sampling time / TM17 I/O t_sample

TM17 Can be changed: C1 Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: TIME_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
31.25 [µs] 400.00 [µs] 125.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the sampling time for the inputs and outputs of the 17 (TM17).
Dependency: The parameter can only be modified for p0009 = 3, 29.
The sampling time must be set the same as the basic sampling time p0110[0].
Refer to: p0110
Note: The modified sampling time is not effective until the drive unit is powered-up again.

p4099[0...2] TM31 inputs/outputs, sampling time / TM31 I/O t_sample

TM31 Can be changed: C1 Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9550
P-Group: Commands Units group: TIME_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 5000.00 [µs] 4000.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the sampling time for the inputs and outputs of terminal module 31 (TM31).
Index: [0] = Digital inputs/outputs
[1] = Analog inputs
[2] = Analog outputs
Dependency: The parameter can only be modified for p0009 = 3, 29.
The sampling times can only be set as an integer multiple of the basic sampling time (p0110, p0111).
Refer to: p0009, p0110, p0111
Notice: The sampling times entered in index 0 (digital inputs/outputs) and index 2 (analog outputs) must always be greater
than or equal to the sampling time in index 1 (analog inputs).
Note: The modified sampling time is not effective until the drive unit is powered-up again.

p4099[0...3] TM41 inputs/outputs, sampling time / TM41 I/O t_sample

TM41 Can be changed: C1 Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9550
P-Group: Commands Units group: TIME_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 5000.00 [µs] [0] 0.00 [µs]
[1] 0.00 [µs]
[2] 0.00 [µs]
[3] 125.00 [µs]

Description: Sets the sampling time for the inputs and outputs of terminal module 41 (TM41).
Index: [0] = Digital inputs/outputs
[1] = Analog inputs
[2] = Does not exist
[3] = Encoder emulation
Dependency: The parameter can only be modified for p0009 = 3, 29.
The sampling times for the digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs can only be set as a multiple of the basic sam-
pling time (p0110, p0111).
The sampling time of the encoder emulation must be set the same as the basic sampling time p0110[0] (p0111).
Refer to: p0009, p0110, p0111
Note: The modified sampling time is not effective until the drive unit is powered-up again.

1-416  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4100 TM31 temperature evaluation, sensor type / TM31 temp sens_typ

TM31 Can be changed: T Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 9576,
9577
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 0

Description: Sets the temperature evaluation of terminal module 31 (TM31).

This means that the temperature sensor type is selected and the evaluation is switched-in.
Values: 0: Evaluation disabled
1: PTC thermistor
2: KTY84
Note: The temperature sensor is connected at terminals X522.7(+) and X522.8(-).

r4101 TM31 temperature evaluation, sensor resistance / TM31 temp R_sensor

TM31 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 9576,
9577
P-Group: Terminals Units group: RESISTANCE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Ohm] - [Ohm] - [Ohm]
Description: Displays the actual resistance value of the temperature sensor connected at terminal module 31 (TM31).
Note: The temperature sensor is connected at terminals X522.7(+) and X522.8(-).
The maximum measurable resistance value is approx. 1700 Ohm.

p4102[0...1] TM31 temperature evaluation fault/alarm threshold / TM31 temp thresh

TM31 Can be changed: T Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 9576
P-Group: - Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-48 [°C] 251 [°C] [0] 100 [°C]
[1] 120 [°C]
Description: Sets the fault/alarm threshold for the temperature evaluation of terminal module 31 (TM31).
Temperature actual value > p4102[0] --> alarm A35211 is output.
Temperature actual value > p4102[1] --> fault F35207 is output.
Index: [0] = Alarm threshold
[1] = Fault threshold
Dependency: Refer to: r4104
Warning! Fault F35207 only causes the drive to be shut down if there is at least one BICO interconnection between the drive
and TM31.
Note: The temperature sensor is connected at terminals X522.7(+) and X522.8(-).
A value > 250 °C deactivates the alarm or fault.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-417

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4104 BO: TM31 temperature evaluation, status / TM31 temp status

TM31 Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 1840,
9576
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the status for the temperature evaluation of terminal module 31 (TM31).
This displays as to whether the temperature actual value has exceeded the fault/alarm threshold.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Temperature alarm threshold exceeded No Yes -
01 Temperature fault threshold exceeded No Yes -
Dependency: Refer to: p4102

r4105 CO: TM31 temperature evaluation, actual value / TM31 temp actValue
TM31 Can be changed: - Access level: 1
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 1840,
9576
P-Group: Terminals Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]

Description: Displays the actual temperature value of the temperature evaluation of terminal module 31 (TM31).
Dependency: For sensor type PTC (p4100 = 1), the following applies:
- below the nominal response temperature, r4105 = -50°C.
- above the nominal response temperature, r4105 = 199.9 °C.
For sensor type KTY84-130 (p4100 = 2), the following applies:
- the displayed value corresponds to the temperature actual value.
Refer to: p4100
Note: The temperature sensor is connected at terminals X522.7(+) and X522.8(-).
For an invalid temperature actual value, (e.g. a short-circuit at the sensor input), r4105 = -300 °C is displayed.

r4154 TM41 diagnostics speed setpoint non-filtered / n_set non-filt

TM41 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]

Description: Displays the unfiltered speed setpoint N_SETPT in revolutions per minute for diagnostic purposes. In contrast to
p1155, the value is updated in each DRIVE-CLiQ basic clock cycle and displayed with sign.
Dependency: Refer to: r4155

r4155 TM41 diagnostics speed setpoint / TM41 DIAG n_set

TM41 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 9674
P-Group: - Units group: SPEED_ROT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [1/min] - [1/min] - [1/min]

Description: Displays the filtered speed setpoint N_SETPT in revolutions per minute for diagnostic purposes. In contrast to
p1155, the value is updated in each DRIVE-CLiQ basic clock cycle and displayed with sign.
Dependency: Refer to: r4154

1-418  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4201 TM15 system time for synchronization / TM15 t_system sync

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Is used to synchronize the timer of terminal module 15 (TM15) with the system time of the DP master.
To do this, the sign-of-life of the DP master is transferred in the form of a counter in bits 12 to 15.
At each cycle of the system of the DP master, bit 0 (SYN signal) is set for the duration of a DP master clock cycle.

r4201 TM17 system time for synchronization / TM17 t_system sync

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Is used to synchronize the timer of terminal module 17 (TM17) with the system time of the DP master.
To do this, the sign-of-life of the DP master is transferred in the form of a counter in bits 12 to 15.
At each cycle of the system of the DP master, bit 0 (SYN signal) is set for the duration of a DP master clock cycle.

r4204 TM15 control digital output 0 ... 15 / TM15 ctrl DO 0-15

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Used to control digital output 0 ... 15 of terminal module 15 (TM151).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI/DO 0 (X520.2) Off On -
01 DI/DO 1 (X520.3) Off On -
02 DI/DO 2 (X520.4) Off On -
03 DI/DO 3 (X520.5) Off On -
04 DI/DO 4 (X520.6) Off On -
05 DI/DO 5 (X520.7) Off On -
06 DI/DO 6 (X520.8) Off On -
07 DI/DO 7 (X520.9) Off On -
08 DI/DO 8 (X521.2) Off On -
09 DI/DO 9 (X521.3) Off On -
10 DI/DO 10 (X522.4) Off On -
11 DI/DO 11 (X521.5) Off On -
12 DI/DO 12 (X521.6) Off On -
13 DI/DO 13 (X521.7) Off On -
14 DI/DO 14 (X521.8) Off On -
15 DI/DO 15 (X521.9) Off On -
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-419

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4204 TM17 control digital output 0 ... 15 / TM17 ctrl DO 0-15

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Used to control digital output 0 ... 15 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI/DO 0 (X520.2) Off On -
01 DI/DO 1 (X520.3) Off On -
02 DI/DO 2 (X520.5) Off On -
03 DI/DO 3 (X520.6) Off On -
04 DI/DO 4 (X520.8) Off On -
05 DI/DO 5 (X520.9) Off On -
06 DI/DO 6 (X521.2) Off On -
07 DI/DO 7 (X521.3) Off On -
08 DI/DO 8 (X521.8) Off On -
09 DI/DO 9 (X521.9) Off On -
10 DI/DO 10 (X522.2) Off On -
11 DI/DO 11 (X522.3) Off On -
12 DI/DO 12 (X522.5) Off On -
13 DI/DO 13 (X522.6) Off On -
14 DI/DO 14 (X522.8) Off On -
15 DI/DO 15 (X522.9) Off On -
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output

r4205 TM15 control digital output 16 ... 23 / TM15 ctrl DO 16-23

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Used to control digital output 16 ... 23 of terminal module 15 (TM151).

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI/DO 16 (X522.2) Off On -
01 DI/DO 17 (X522.3) Off On -
02 DI/DO 18 (X522.4) Off On -
03 DI/DO 19 (X522.5) Off On -
04 DI/DO 20 (X522.6) Off On -
05 DI/DO 21 (X522.7) Off On -
06 DI/DO 22 (X522.8) Off On -
07 DI/DO 23 (X522.9) Off On -
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output

1-420  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4211 TM15 edge mode digital input 0 ... 7 / TM15 EdgMd DI0-7
TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the edge mode for digital input 0 ... 7 of terminal module 15 (TM151).
Assignment of the digital inputs to the bits:
DI 0: r4211.1 ... 0
DI 1: r4211.3 ... 2
DI 2: r4211.5 ... 4
DI 3: r4211.7 ... 6
DI 4: r4211.9 ... 8
DI 5: r4211.11 ... 10
DI 6: r4211.13 ... 12
DI 7: r4211.15 ... 14
Possible edge modes:
Bit x, y = 0, 0 --> no edge detection
Bit x, y = 0, 1 --> rising - rising edge
Bit x, y = 1, 0 --> falling - falling edge
Bit x, y = 1, 1 --> rising - falling edge or falling - rising edge
Note: DI: Digital input

r4211 TM17 edge mode digital input 0 ... 7 / TM17 EdgMd DI 0-7
TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the edge mode for digital input 0 ... 7 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
Assignment of the digital inputs to the bits:
DI 0: r4211.1 ... 0
DI 1: r4211.3 ... 2
DI 2: r4211.5 ... 4
DI 3: r4211.7 ... 6
DI 4: r4211.9 ... 8
DI 5: r4211.11 ... 10
DI 6: r4211.13 ... 12
DI 7: r4211.15 ... 14
Possible edge modes:
Bit x, y = 0, 0 --> no edge detection
Bit x, y = 0, 1 --> rising - rising edge
Bit x, y = 1, 0 --> falling - falling edge
Bit x, y = 1, 1 --> rising - falling edge or falling - rising edge
Note: DI: Digital input

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-421

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4212 TM15 edge mode digital input 8 ... 15 / TM15 EdgMd DI8-15
TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the edge mode for digital input 8 ... 15 of terminal module 15 (TM151).
Assignment of the digital inputs to the bits:
DI 8: r4212.1 ... 0
DI 9: r4212.3 ... 2
DI 10: r4212.5 ... 4
DI 11: r4212.7 ... 6
DI 12: r4212.9 ... 8
DI 13: r4212.11 ... 10
DI 14: r4212.13 ... 12
DI 15: r4212.15 ... 14
Possible edge modes:
Bit x, y = 0, 0 --> no edge detection
Bit x, y = 0, 1 --> rising - rising edge
Bit x, y = 1, 0 --> falling - falling edge
Bit x, y = 1, 1 --> rising - falling edge or falling - rising edge
Note: DI: Digital input

r4212 TM17 edge mode digital input 8 ... 15 / TM17 EdgMd DI 8-15
TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the edge mode for digital input 8 ... 15 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
Assignment of the digital inputs to the bits:
DI 8: r4212.1 ... 0
DI 9: r4212.3 ... 2
DI 10: r4212.5 ... 4
DI 11: r4212.7 ... 6
DI 12: r4212.9 ... 8
DI 13: r4212.11 ... 10
DI 14: r4212.13 ... 12
DI 15: r4212.15 ... 14
Possible edge modes:
Bit x, y = 0, 0 --> no edge detection
Bit x, y = 0, 1 --> rising - rising edge
Bit x, y = 1, 0 --> falling - falling edge
Bit x, y = 1, 1 --> rising - falling edge or falling - rising edge
Note: DI: Digital input

1-422  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4213 TM15 edge mode digital input 16 ... 23 / TM15 EdgMd DI16-23
TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the edge mode for digital input 16 ... 23 of terminal module 15 (TM151).
Assignment of the digital inputs to the bits:
DI 16: r4213.1 ... 0
DI 17: r4213.3 ... 2
DI 18: r4213.5 ... 4
DI 19: r4213.7 ... 6
DI 20: r4213.9 ... 8
DI 21: r4213.11 ... 10
DI 22: r4213.13 ... 12
DI 23: r4213.15 ... 14
Possible edge modes:
Bit x, y = 0, 0 --> no edge detection
Bit x, y = 0, 1 --> rising - rising edge
Bit x, y = 1, 0 --> falling - falling edge
Bit x, y = 1, 1 --> rising - falling edge or falling - rising edge
Note: DI: Digital input

p4220 TM17 enable DI/DO 0 ... 5 / TM17 enable 0-5

TM17 Can be changed: T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 0011 1111 0011 1111 bin 0000 bin

Description: Sets the enable signal with bits 0 ... 5 for DI/DO 0 ... 5 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
Sets the triggering of the enable signal with bits 8 ... 13.
The following assignment applies:
Enable signal for DI/DO 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 via DI/DO 10, 11, 12, 13, 14 or 15.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI/DO 0 (X520.2) Without enable With enable -
01 DI/DO 1 (X520.3) Without enable With enable -
02 DI/DO 2 (X520.5) Without enable With enable -
03 DI/DO 3 (X520.6) Without enable With enable -
04 DI/DO 4 (X520.8) Without enable With enable -
05 DI/DO 5 (X520.9) Without enable With enable -
08 DI/DO 10 (X522.2) Edge-triggered Level-triggered -
09 DI/DO 11 (X522.3) Edge-triggered Level-triggered -
10 DI/DO 12 (X522.5) Edge-triggered Level-triggered -
11 DI/DO 13 (X522.6) Edge-triggered Level-triggered -
12 DI/DO 14 (X522.8) Edge-triggered Level-triggered -
13 DI/DO 15 (X522.9) Edge-triggered Level-triggered -
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-423

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4221 TM17 smoothing time constant, digital input 0 ... 15 / TM17 smooth DI
TM17 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin 0000 bin
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant for digital input 0 ... 15 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI/DO 0 (X520.2) Smoothing 125 µs Smoothing 1 µs -
01 DI/DO 1 (X520.3) Smoothing 125 µs Smoothing 1 µs -
02 DI/DO 2 (X520.5) Smoothing 125 µs Smoothing 1 µs -
03 DI/DO 3 (X520.6) Smoothing 125 µs Smoothing 1 µs -
04 DI/DO 4 (X520.8) Smoothing 125 µs Smoothing 1 µs -
05 DI/DO 5 (X520.9) Smoothing 125 µs Smoothing 1 µs -
06 DI/DO 6 (X521.2) Smoothing 125 µs Smoothing 1 µs -
07 DI/DO 7 (X521.3) Smoothing 125 µs Smoothing 1 µs -
08 DI/DO 8 (X521.8) Smoothing 125 µs Smoothing 1 µs -
09 DI/DO 9 (X521.9) Smoothing 125 µs Smoothing 1 µs -
10 DI/DO 10 (X522.2) Smoothing 125 µs Smoothing 1 µs -
11 DI/DO 11 (X522.3) Smoothing 125 µs Smoothing 1 µs -
12 DI/DO 12 (X522.5) Smoothing 125 µs Smoothing 1 µs -
13 DI/DO 13 (X522.6) Smoothing 125 µs Smoothing 1 µs -
14 DI/DO 14 (X522.8) Smoothing 125 µs Smoothing 1 µs -
15 DI/DO 15 (X522.9) Smoothing 125 µs Smoothing 1 µs -
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
DI: Digital input

p4222 TM17 time, absolute/relative for digital output 0 ... 15 / TM17 abs/rel 0-15
TM17 Can be changed: T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin 0000 bin

Description: Sets as absolute or relative timing with bit 0 ... 15 for digital output 0 ... 15 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI/DO 0 (X520.2) Absolute time Relative time -
01 DI/DO 1 (X520.3) Absolute time Relative time -
02 DI/DO 2 (X520.5) Absolute time Relative time -
03 DI/DO 3 (X520.6) Absolute time Relative time -
04 DI/DO 4 (X520.8) Absolute time Relative time -
05 DI/DO 5 (X520.9) Absolute time Relative time -
06 DI/DO 6 (X521.2) Absolute time Relative time -
07 DI/DO 7 (X521.3) Absolute time Relative time -
08 DI/DO 8 (X521.8) Absolute time Relative time -
09 DI/DO 9 (X521.9) Absolute time Relative time -
10 DI/DO 10 (X522.2) Absolute time Relative time -
11 DI/DO 11 (X522.3) Absolute time Relative time -
12 DI/DO 12 (X522.5) Absolute time Relative time -
13 DI/DO 13 (X522.6) Absolute time Relative time -
14 DI/DO 14 (X522.8) Absolute time Relative time -
15 DI/DO 15 (X522.9) Absolute time Relative time -
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
DO: Digital output

1-424  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4250 TM15 set/reset time, digital output 0 / TM15 t_set DO 0

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 0 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4250 TM17 set/reset time, digital output 0 / TM17 t_set DO 0

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 0 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4251 TM15 set/reset time, digital output 1 / TM15 t_set DO 1

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 1 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4251 TM17 set/reset time, digital output 1 / TM17 t_set DO 1

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 1 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4252 TM15 set/reset time, digital output 2 / TM15 t_set DO 2

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 2 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-425

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4252 TM17 set/reset time, digital output 2 / TM17 t_set DO 2

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 2 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4253 TM15 set/reset time, digital output 3 / TM15 t_set DO 3

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 3 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4253 TM17 set/reset time, digital output 3 / TM17 t_set DO 3

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 3 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4254 TM15 set/reset time, digital output 4 / TM15 t_set DO 4

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 4 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4254 TM17 set/reset time, digital output 4 / TM17 t_set DO 4

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 4 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

1-426  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4255 TM15 set/reset time, digital output 5 / TM15 t_set DO 5

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 5 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4255 TM17 set/reset time, digital output 5 / TM17 t_set DO 5

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 5 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4256 TM15 set/reset time, digital output 6 / TM15 t_set DO 6

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 6 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4256 TM17 set/reset time, digital output 6 / TM17 t_set DO 6

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 6 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4257 TM15 set/reset time, digital output 7 / TM15 t_set DO 7

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 7 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-427

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4257 TM17 set/reset time, digital output 7 / TM17 t_set DO 7

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 7 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4258 TM15 set/reset time, digital output 8 / TM15 t_set DO 8

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 8 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4258 TM17 set/reset time, digital output 8 / TM17 t_set DO 8

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 8 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4259 TM15 set/reset time, digital output 9 / TM15 t_set DO 9

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 9 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4259 TM17 set/reset time, digital output 9 / TM17 t_set DO 9

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 9 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

1-428  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4260 TM15 set/reset time, digital output 10 / TM15 t_set DO 10

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 10 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4260 TM17 set/reset time, digital output 10 / TM17 t_set DO 10

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 10 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4261 TM15 set/reset time, digital output 11 / TM15 t_set DO 11

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 11 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4261 TM17 set/reset time, digital output 11 / TM17 t_set DO 11

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 11 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4262 TM15 set/reset time, digital output 12 / TM15 t_set DO 12

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 12 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-429

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4262 TM17 set/reset time, digital output 12 / TM17 t_set DO 12

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 12 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4263 TM15 set/reset time, digital output 13 / TM15 t_set DO 13

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 13 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4263 TM17 set/reset time, digital output 13 / TM17 t_set DO 13

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 13 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4264 TM15 set/reset time, digital output 14 / TM15 t_set DO 14

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 14 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4264 TM17 set/reset time, digital output 14 / TM17 t_set DO 14

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 14 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

1-430  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4265 TM15 set/reset time, digital output 15 / TM15 t_set DO 15

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 15 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4265 TM17 set/reset time, digital output 15 / TM17 t_set DO 15

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 15 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4266 TM15 set/reset time, digital output 16 / TM15 t_set DO 16

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 16 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4267 TM15 set/reset time, digital output 17 / TM15 t_set DO 17

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 17 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4268 TM15 set/reset time, digital output 18 / TM15 t_set DO 18

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 18 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-431

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4269 TM15 set/reset time, digital output 19 / TM15 t_set DO 19

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 19 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4270 TM15 set/reset time, digital output 20 / TM15 t_set DO 20

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 20 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4271 TM15 set/reset time, digital output 21 / TM15 t_set DO 21

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 21 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4272 TM15 set/reset time, digital output 22 / TM15 t_set DO 22

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 22 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

r4273 TM15 set/reset time, digital output 23 / TM15 t_set DO 23

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time to set and reset for digital output 23 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DO: Digital output

1-432  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4301 TM15 module synchronization / TM15 module sync

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Is used to synchronize the timer of terminal module 15 (TM15) with the system time of the DP master.
Bit 12 ... 15:
After synchronization with the DP master, the module sends its sign-of-life in the form of a counter.
Bit 0:
This SYNC signal is set if the module has aligned its time to the system time of the DP master.
Bit 9:
This bit is set if a fault has occurred on the module (r0945).

r4301 TM17 module synchronization / TM17 Module sync

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Is used to synchronize the timer of terminal module 17 (TM17) with the system time of the DP master.
Bit 12 ... 15:
After synchronization with the DP master, the module sends its sign-of-life in the form of a counter.
Bit 0:
This SYNC signal is set if the module has aligned its time to the system time of the DP master.
Bit 9:
This bit is set if a fault has occurred on the module (r0945).

r4304 TM15 status, digital input 0 ... 15 / TM15 St DI 0-15

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays status for digital input 0 ... 15 of terminal module 15 (TM151).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI/DO 0 (X520.2) Off On -
01 DI/DO 1 (X520.3) Off On -
02 DI/DO 2 (X520.4) Off On -
03 DI/DO 3 (X520.5) Off On -
04 DI/DO 4 (X520.6) Off On -
05 DI/DO 5 (X520.7) Off On -
06 DI/DO 6 (X520.8) Off On -
07 DI/DO 7 (X520.9) Off On -
08 DI/DO 8 (X521.2) Off On -
09 DI/DO 9 (X521.3) Off On -
10 DI/DO 10 (X522.4) Off On -
11 DI/DO 11 (X521.5) Off On -
12 DI/DO 12 (X521.6) Off On -
13 DI/DO 13 (X521.7) Off On -
14 DI/DO 14 (X521.8) Off On -
15 DI/DO 15 (X521.9) Off On -
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-433

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4304 TM17 status, digital input 0 ... 15 / TM17 St DI 0-15

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays status for digital input 0 ... 15 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI/DO 0 (X520.2) Off On -
01 DI/DO 1 (X520.3) Off On -
02 DI/DO 2 (X520.5) Off On -
03 DI/DO 3 (X520.6) Off On -
04 DI/DO 4 (X520.8) Off On -
05 DI/DO 5 (X520.9) Off On -
06 DI/DO 6 (X521.2) Off On -
07 DI/DO 7 (X521.3) Off On -
08 DI/DO 8 (X521.8) Off On -
09 DI/DO 9 (X521.9) Off On -
10 DI/DO 10 (X522.2) Off On -
11 DI/DO 11 (X522.3) Off On -
12 DI/DO 12 (X522.5) Off On -
13 DI/DO 13 (X522.6) Off On -
14 DI/DO 14 (X522.8) Off On -
15 DI/DO 15 (X522.9) Off On -
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output

r4305 TM15 status, digital input 16 ... 23 / TM15 St DI 16-23

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays status for digital input 16 ... 23 of terminal module 15 (TM151).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 DI/DO 16 (X522.2) Off On -
01 DI/DO 17 (X522.3) Off On -
02 DI/DO 18 (X522.4) Off On -
03 DI/DO 19 (X522.5) Off On -
04 DI/DO 20 (X522.6) Off On -
05 DI/DO 21 (X522.7) Off On -
06 DI/DO 22 (X522.8) Off On -
07 DI/DO 23 (X522.9) Off On -
Note: DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output

1-434  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4311 TM15 edge status digital input 0 ... 7 / TM15 EdgSt DI 0-7
TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the edge status for digital input 0 ... 7 of terminal module 15 (TM151).
Assignment of the digital inputs to the bits:
DI 0: r4311.1 ... 0
DI 1: r4311.3 ... 2
DI 2: r4311.5 ... 4
DI 3: r4311.7 ... 6
DI 4: r4311.9 ... 8
DI 5: r4311.11 ... 10
DI 6: r4311.13 ... 12
DI 7: r4311.15 ... 14
Possible edge states:
Bit x, y = 0, 0 --> no edge detection
Bit x, y = 0, 1 --> 1st edge detected
Bit x, y = 1, 0 --> 2nd edge detected
Bit x, y = 1, 1 --> both edges detected
Note: DI: Digital input

r4311 TM17 edge status digital input 0 ... 7 / TM17 EdgSt DI 0-7
TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the edge status for digital input 0 ... 7 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
Assignment of the digital inputs to the bits:
DI 0: r4311.1 ... 0
DI 1: r4311.3 ... 2
DI 2: r4311.5 ... 4
DI 3: r4311.7 ... 6
DI 4: r4311.9 ... 8
DI 5: r4311.11 ... 10
DI 6: r4311.13 ... 12
DI 7: r4311.15 ... 14
Possible edge states:
Bit x, y = 0, 0 --> no edge detection
Bit x, y = 0, 1 --> 1st edge detected
Bit x, y = 1, 0 --> 2nd edge detected
Bit x, y = 1, 1 --> both edges detected
Note: DI: Digital input

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-435

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4312 TM15 edge status digital input 8 ... 15 / TM15 EdgSt DI 8-15
TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the edge status for digital input 8 ... 15 of terminal module 15 (TM151).
Assignment of the digital inputs to the bits:
DI 8: r4312.1 ... 0
DI 9: r4312.3 ... 2
DI 10: r4312.5 ... 4
DI 11: r4312.7 ... 6
DI 12: r4312.9 ... 8
DI 13: r4312.11 ... 10
DI 14: r4312.13 ... 12
DI 15: r4312.15 ... 14
Possible edge states:
Bit x, y = 0, 0 --> no edge detection
Bit x, y = 0, 1 --> 1st edge detected
Bit x, y = 1, 0 --> 2nd edge detected
Bit x, y = 1, 1 --> both edges detected
Note: DI: Digital input

r4312 TM17 edge status digital input 8 ... 15 / TM17 EdgSt DI 8-15
TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the edge status for digital input 8 ... 15 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
Assignment of the digital inputs to the bits:
DI 8: r4312.1 ... 0
DI 9: r4312.3 ... 2
DI 10: r4312.5 ... 4
DI 11: r4312.7 ... 6
DI 12: r4312.9 ... 8
DI 13: r4312.11 ... 10
DI 14: r4312.13 ... 12
DI 15: r4312.15 ... 14
Possible edge states:
Bit x, y = 0, 0 --> no edge detection
Bit x, y = 0, 1 --> 1st edge detected
Bit x, y = 1, 0 --> 2nd edge detected
Bit x, y = 1, 1 --> both edges detected
Note: DI: Digital input

1-436  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4313 TM15 edge status digital input 16 ... 23 / TM15 EdgSt DI16-23
TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the edge status for digital input 16 ... 23 of terminal module 15 (TM151).
Assignment of the digital inputs to the bits:
DI 16: r4313.1 ... 0
DI 17: r4313.3 ... 2
DI 18: r4313.5 ... 4
DI 19: r4313.7 ... 6
DI 20: r4313.9 ... 8
DI 21: r4313.11 ... 10
DI 22: r4313.13 ... 12
DI 23: r4313.15 ... 14
Possible edge states:
Bit x, y = 0, 0 --> no edge detection
Bit x, y = 0, 1 --> 1st edge detected
Bit x, y = 1, 0 --> 2nd edge detected
Bit x, y = 1, 1 --> both edges detected
Note: DI: Digital input

r4350 TM15 edge times digital input 0 / TM15 edge_t DI 0

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 0 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4350 TM17 edge times digital input 0 / TM17 edge_t DI 0

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 0 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-437

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4351 TM15 edge times digital input 1 / TM15 edge_t DI 1

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 1 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4351 TM17 edge times digital input 1 / TM17 edge_t DI 1

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 1 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4352 TM15 edge times digital input 2 / TM15 edge_t DI 2

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 2 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4352 TM17 edge times digital input 2 / TM17 edge_t DI 2

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 2 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4353 TM15 edge times digital input 3 / TM15 edge_t DI 3

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 3 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

1-438  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4353 TM17 edge times digital input 3 / TM17 edge_t DI 3

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 3 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4354 TM15 edge times digital input 4 / TM15 edge_t DI 4

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 4 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4354 TM17 edge times digital input 4 / TM17 edge_t DI 4

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 4 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4355 TM15 edge times digital input 5 / TM15 edge_t DI 5

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 5 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4355 TM17 edge times digital input 5 / TM17 edge_t DI 5

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 5 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-439

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4356 TM15 edge times digital input 6 / TM15 edge_t DI 6

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 6 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4356 TM17 edge times digital input 6 / TM17 edge_t DI 6

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 6 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4357 TM15 edge times digital input 7 / TM15 edge_t DI 7

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 7 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4357 TM17 edge times digital input 7 / TM17 edge_t DI 7

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 7 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4358 TM15 edge times digital input 8 / TM15 edge_t DI 8

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 8 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

1-440  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4358 TM17 edge times digital input 8 / TM17 edge_t DI 8

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 8 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4359 TM15 edge times digital input 9 / TM15 edge_t DI 9

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 9 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4359 TM17 edge times digital input 9 / TM17 edge_t DI 9

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 9 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4360 TM15 edge times digital input 10 / TM15 edge_t DI 10

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 10 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4360 TM17 edge times digital input 10 / TM17 edge_t DI 10

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 10 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-441

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4361 TM15 edge times digital input 11 / TM15 edge_t DI 11

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 11 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4361 TM17 edge times digital input 11 / TM17 edge_t DI 11

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 11 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4362 TM15 edge times digital input 12 / TM15 edge_t DI 12

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 12 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4362 TM17 edge times digital input 12 / TM17 edge_t DI 12

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 12 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4363 TM15 edge times digital input 13 / TM15 edge_t DI 13

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 13 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

1-442  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4363 TM17 edge times digital input 13 / TM17 edge_t DI 13

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 13 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4364 TM15 edge times digital input 14 / TM15 edge_t DI 14

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 14 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4364 TM17 edge times digital input 14 / TM17 edge_t DI 14

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 14 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4365 TM15 edge times digital input 15 / TM15 edge_t DI 15

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 15 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4365 TM17 edge times digital input 15 / TM17 edge_t DI 15

TM17 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 15 of terminal module 17 (TM17).
The two times are specified as 16 bit values with a resolution of 0.25 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-443

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4366 TM15 edge times digital input 16 / TM15 edge_t DI 16

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 16 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4367 TM15 edge times digital input 17 / TM15 edge_t DI 17

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 17 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4368 TM15 edge times digital input 18 / TM15 edge_t DI 18

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 18 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4369 TM15 edge times digital input 19 / TM15 edge_t DI 19

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 19 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4370 TM15 edge times digital input 20 / TM15 edge_t DI 20

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 20 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

1-444  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4371 TM15 edge times digital input 21 / TM15 edge_t DI 21

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 21 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4372 TM15 edge times digital input 22 / TM15 edge_t DI 22

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 22 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

r4373 TM15 edge times digital input 23 / TM15 edge_t DI 23

TM15 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the time when detecting the 1st and 2nd edge for digital input 23 of terminal module 15 (TM15).
The two times are specified as 8 bit values with a resolution of 64 µs.
Note: DI: Digital input

p4401 Incremental encoder emulation mode / Enc_emulat mode

TM41 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 9674
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 0001 bin 0001 bin
Description: Sets the mode for the incremental encoder emulation.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Enable zero mark No Yes 9674

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-445

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4402 Incremental encoder emulation status / Enc_emulat status

TM41 Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 9674
P-Group: Control Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status of the incremental encoder emulation on terminal module 41 (TM41).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Zero mark enabled No Yes -
01 Tracks A/B enabled No Yes -
02 Interface encoder emulation enabled No Yes -

p4426 Incremental encoder emulation, pulses for zero mark / Enc_emul pulses ZM
TM41 Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9674
P-Group: Encoder Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 8192 0

Description: Sets pulse number to output the zero mark for the incremental encoder simulation/emulation.
Example:
p0408 = 2048 (encoder pulses)
p4426 = 512 (pulses for the zero mark)
--> positive direction: The zero mark is output after 512 pulses.
--> negative direction: The zero mark is output after 1536 pulses.
Dependency: Refer to: p0408
Note: The pulses for the zero mark (p4426) must be less than the encoder pulse number (p0408).

p4490 BO: STW1 set bitwise (bit-serially) / STW1 set bit-ser.

TM41 Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 2442
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 bin 0000 bin
Description: Binector output to interconnect control word 1 (STW1) bitwise (bit-serially) for a free BICO interconnection.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Off On -
01 Bit 1 Off On -
02 Bit 2 Off On -
03 Bit 3 Off On -
04 Bit 4 Off On -
05 Bit 5 Off On -
06 Bit 6 Off On -
07 Bit 7 Off On -
08 Bit 8 Off On -
09 Bit 9 Off On -
10 Bit 10 Off On -
11 Bit 11 Off On -
12 Bit 12 Off On -
13 Bit 13 Off On -
14 Bit 14 Off On -
15 Bit 15 Off On -
Dependency: Refer to: p0922
Note: Only for test purposes.

1-446  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r4706 Trace status / Trace status

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Values: 0: Measurement function inactive
1: Measuring parameterization checked
2: Measuring function waits for stabilization
3: Measuring function recording (tracing)
4: Recording ended with error
5: Recording ended

p4800 Function generator control / FG control

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Values: 0: Stop function generator
1: Start function generator

r4805 Function generator status / FG status

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the actual status of the function generator.

Values: 0: not active
1: Generate accelerating ramp to offset
2: Generate parameterized signal shape
3: Generate braking ramp
4: Function generator stopped due to missing enable signals

p4810 Function generator mode / FG operating mode

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 99 0

Description: Sets the operating mode of the function generator.

Values: 0: Connection at connector output r4818
1: Connection at current setpoint after filter and r4818
2: Connection as disturbing torque and r4818
3: Connection at speed setpoint after filter and r4818
4: Connection at current setpoint before filter and r4818
5: Connection at speed setpoint before filter and r4818
99: Connection at physical address and r4818

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-447

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4812 Function generator physical address / FG phys address

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4294967295 0
Description: Sets the physical address where the function generator is to be connected.
Dependency: Only effective when p4810 = 99.

p4813 Function generator physical address reference value / FG phys addr ref
CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1.00 1000000.00 1.00

Description: Sets the reference value for 100 % for referred inputs.
Dependency: Only effective when p4810 = 99.

p4815[0...1] Function generator drive number / FG drive number

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0
Description: Selects the required drive where the function generator is to be connected.
Only one SERVO type drive can be selected.
Index: [0] = First drive for connection
[1] = Second drive for connection
Dependency: Only effective when p4810 = 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.

r4818 CO: Function generator output signal / FG output signal

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]

Description: Displays the output signal for the function generator.

Dependency: Refer to: p4810
Note: The value is displayed independently of the function generator mode.
The signal is available as connector output for an ongoing interconnection.

1-448  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4820 Function generator signal shape / FG signal shape

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 5 1
Description: Sets the signal to be generated for the function generator.
Values: 1: Square-wave
2: Staircase
3: Triangular
4: Binary noise - PRBS (Pseudo Random Binary Signal)
5: Sinusoidal

p4821 Function generator period / FG period duration

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 60000.00 [ms] 1000.00 [ms]

Description: Sets the period of the signal to be generated for the function generator.
Dependency: Ineffective when p4820 = 4 (PRBS).

p4822 Function generator pulse width / FG pulse width

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 60000.00 [ms] 500.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the pulse width for the signal to be generated for the function generator.
Dependency: Only effective when p4820 = 1 (square-wave).

p4823 Function generator bandwidth / FG bandwith

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: FREQUENCY Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [Hz] 16000.00 [Hz] 4000.00 [Hz]

Description: Sets the bandwidth for the signal to be generated for the function generator.
Dependency: Only effective when p4820 = 4 (PRBS).
Refer to: p4830
Refer to: A02041

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-449

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4824 Function generator amplitude / FG amplitude

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-1600.00 [%] 1600.00 [%] 5.00 [%]
Description: Sets the amplitude for the signal to be generated for the function generator.
Dependency: Units are dependent on p4810.
If p4810 = 1, 2, 4: the amplitude is referred to p2002 (rated motor current).
If p4810 = 3, 5: the amplitude is referred to p2000 (rated motor speed).

p4825 Function generator 2nd amplitude / FG 2nd amplitude

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-1600.00 [%] 1600.00 [%] 7.00 [%]

Description: Sets the second amplitude for the signal to be generated for the function generator.
Dependency: Only effective for p4820 = 2 (staircase).
Units are dependent on p4810.
If p4810 = 1, 2, 4: the amplitude is referred to p2002 (rated motor current).
If p4810 = 3, 5: the amplitude is referred to p2000 (rated motor speed).

p4826 Function generator offset / FG offset

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-1600.00 [%] 1600.00 [%] 0.00 [%]

Description: Sets the offset (DC component) of the signal to be generated for the function generator.
Dependency: Units are dependent on p4810.
If p4810 = 1, 2, 4: the offset is referred to p2002 (rated motor current).
If p4810 = 3, 5: the offset is referred to p2009 (rated motor speed).
If p4810 = 2: in order to avoid effects of play (backlash), the offset does not act on the current setpoint, but instead
on the speed setpoint.

p4827 Function generator ramp-up time to offset / FG ramp-up offset

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 100000.00 [ms] 32.00 [ms]

Description: Sets the ramp-up time to the offset for the function generator.

1-450  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p4828 Function generator lower limit / FG lower limit

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
-10000.00 [%] 0.00 [%] -100.00 [%]
Description: Sets the lower limit for the function generator.
Dependency: For p4810 = 2 the limit only applies to the current setpoint, but not the speed setpoint (offset).

p4829 Function generator upper limit / FG upper limit

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [%] 10000.00 [%] 100.00 [%]

Description: Sets the upper limit for the function generator.

Dependency: For p4810 = 2 the limit only applies to the current setpoint, but not the speed setpoint (offset).

p4830 Function generator time slice cycle / FG time slice

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.03125 [ms] 2.00000 [ms] 0.12500 [ms]
Description: Sets the time slice cycle in which the function generator is called.

r4899 Status word sequential control / ZSW seq ctrl

TM41 Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status word of the sequential control from terminal module 41 (TM41).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Ready to power up No Yes -
01 Ready No Yes -
02 Operation enabled No Yes -
03 Fault present No Yes -
04 Coast down active Yes No -
05 Fast stop active Yes No -
06 Power-on inhibit No Yes -
07 Alarm present No Yes -
09 Control from the PLC No Yes -
14 Motor rotates forwards No Yes -

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-451

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r7000 Parallel circuit configuration, number of active power modules / No. active PM
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the active power modules for a parallel circuit configuration.
Dependency: Refer to: p7001

p7001[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, enable power modules / Enable PM

A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: T Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Integer16 Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 1

Description: Enables the power modules in the parallel circuit configuration.

Values: 0: Deactivated
1: Activated
Dependency: Refer to: r7000

r7002[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, status power modules / Status PM

A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Integer16 Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Modulation Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the status of the power modules in the parallel circuit configuration.
Values: 0: Pulses inhibited
1: Pulses enabled
Dependency: Refer to: r7000, p7001

p7010 Parallel circuit configuration, current dissymmetry alarm threshold /

i_dissym A thresh
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
VECTOR (Parallel) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
2 [%] 100 [%] 20 [%]

Description: Sets the alarm threshold to detect current dissymmetry in the parallel circuit configuration.
The deviation between the measured values and average value is evaluated. The specified value is referred to the
rated power module current (p7251[0]).
Dependency: Refer to: r7251
Refer to: A05052

1-452  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p7011 Parallel circuit configuration, DC link voltage dissymmetry, alarm threshold /

Vdc_dissym A thrsh
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Modulation Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
2 [%] 100 [%] 10 [%]

Description: Sets the alarm threshold to detect dissymmetry of the DC link voltages in the parallel circuit configuration.
The deviation between the measured values and average value is evaluated. The specified value is referred to the
rated link voltage.
Dependency: Refer to: A05053

r7020[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, deviation current in phase U / Phase U curr dev
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR (Parallel) Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]

Description: Displays the deviation between the measured current actual value of phase U and the average value as peak value.
The maximum deviation from the average value is displayed in r7025.
Dependency: Refer to: r7021, r7022, r7025

r7021[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, deviation current in phase V / Phase V curr dev
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR (Parallel) Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]

Description: Displays the deviation between the measured current actual value of phase V and the average value as peak value.
The maximum deviation from the average value is displayed in r7026.
Dependency: Refer to: r7020, r7022, r7026

r7022[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, deviation current in phase W / Phase W curr dev
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR (Parallel) Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]

Description: Displays the deviation between the measured current actual value of phase W and the average value as peak
value.
The maximum deviation from the average value is displayed in r7027.
Dependency: Refer to: r7020, r7021, r7027

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-453

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r7025 Parallel circuit configuration, maximum deviation currents phase U /

Phase U Max i_dev
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR (Parallel) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]

Description: Displays the maximum absolute deviation of the measured current actual values of phase U from the average value
as peak value.
The deviation of the individual currents from the average value is displayed in r7020.
Dependency: Refer to: r7020, r7026, r7027
Refer to: A05052

r7026 Parallel circuit configuration, maximum deviation currents phase V /

Phase V Max i_dev
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR (Parallel) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]

Description: Displays the maximum absolute deviation of the measured current actual values of phase V from the average value
as peak value.
The deviation of the individual currents from the average value is displayed in r7021.
Dependency: Refer to: r7021, r7025, r7027
Refer to: A05052

r7027 Parallel circuit configuration, maximum deviation currents phase W /

Phase W Max i_dev
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR (Parallel) Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]

Description: Displays the maximum absolute deviation of the measured current actual values of phase W from the average
value as peak value.
The deviation of the individual currents from the average value is displayed in r7022.
Dependency: Refer to: r7022, r7025, r7026
Refer to: A05052

r7030[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, deviation DC link voltage / Vdc deviation

A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: VOLTAGE_DC Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]

Description: Displays the deviation of the measured DC link voltage from the average value.
The maximum deviation from the average value is displayed in r7031.
Dependency: Refer to: r7031

1-454  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r7031 Parallel circuit configuration, maximum deviation DC link voltage / Vdc max deviation
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: VOLTAGE_DC Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the maximum absolute deviation of the measured DC link voltage from the average value.
The deviation of the individual voltages from the average value is displayed in r7030.
Dependency: Refer to: r7030
Refer to: A05053

p7040[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, valve lockout time correction, phase U positive /
Comp t_interl Upos
VECTOR (Parallel) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: TIME_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 1000000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
Description: Using this correction time, the valve lockout time in phase U (p1828) is compensated for a positive phase current
for the particular motor module. This therefore takes into account a spread in the valve lockout times of motor mod-
ules in a parallel circuit configuration.
Dependency: Refer to: p1828

p7041[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, valve lockout time correction, phase U negative /
Comp t_interl Uneg
VECTOR (Parallel) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: TIME_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 1000000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]

Description: Using this correction time, the valve lockout time in phase U (p1828) is compensated for a negative phase current
for the particular motor module. This therefore takes into account a spread in the valve lockout times of motor mod-
ules in a parallel circuit configuration.
Dependency: Refer to: p1828

p7042[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, valve lockout time correction, phase V positive /
Comp t_interl Vpos
VECTOR (Parallel) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: TIME_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 1000000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]

Description: Using this correction time, the valve lockout time in phase V (p1829) is compensated for a positive phase current for
the particular motor module. This therefore takes into account a spread in the valve lockout times of motor modules
in a parallel circuit configuration.
Dependency: Refer to: p1829

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-455

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p7043[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, valve lockout time correction, phase V negative /
Comp t_interl Vneg
VECTOR (Parallel) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: TIME_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 1000000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]

Description: Using this correction time, the valve lockout time in phase V (p1829) is compensated for a negative phase current
for the particular motor module. This therefore takes into account a spread in the valve lockout times of motor mod-
ules in a parallel circuit configuration.
Dependency: Refer to: p1829

p7044[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, valve lockout time correction, phase W positive /
Comp t_interl Wpos
VECTOR (Parallel) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: TIME_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 1000000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]

Description: Using this correction time, the valve lockout time in phase W (p1830) is compensated for a positive phase current
for the particular motor module. This therefore takes into account a spread in the valve lockout times of motor mod-
ules in a parallel circuit configuration.
Dependency: Refer to: p1830

p7045[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, valve lockout time correction, phase W negative /
Comp t_interl Wneg
VECTOR (Parallel) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation Units group: TIME_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 1000000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
Description: Using this correction time, the valve lockout time in phase W (p1830) is compensated for a positive phase current
for the particular motor module. This therefore takes into account a spread in the valve lockout times of motor mod-
ules in a parallel circuit configuration.
Dependency: Refer to: p1830

r7100[0...99] Parallel circuit configuration, ring buffer fault/alarm code / Fault/alarm code
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Ring buffer for faults and alarms that have occurred from power modules connected in parallel (motor module,
active line infeed, voltage sensing module).
Displays the fault/alarm code.
Dependency: Refer to: r7101, r7102, r7103
Note: The last fault case that occurred is documented in index 0.
The parameter is reset to 0 at POWER ON.

1-456  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r7101[0...99] Parallel circuit configuration, ring buffer data set number / Ring buffer Ds_No.
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Ring buffer for faults and alarms that have occurred from power modules connected in parallel (motor module,
active line infeed, voltage sensing module).
p7101 < 100:
Displays the power module data set number (Power Data Set, PDS).
p7101 >= 100:
Displays the voltage sensing module data set number (VSMDS)
Dependency: Refer to: r7100, r7102, r7103
Note: The last fault case that occurred is documented in index 0.
The parameter is reset to 0 at POWER ON.

r7102[0...99] Parallel circuit configuration, ring buffer fault/alarm received / F/A received
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Ring buffer for faults and alarms that have occurred from power modules connected in parallel (motor module,
active line infeed, voltage sensing module).
Displays the relative system runtime when the fault or alarm occurred.
Dependency: Refer to: r7100, r7101, r7103
Note: The last fault case that occurred is documented in index 0.
The parameter is reset to 0 at POWER ON.

r7103[0...99] Parallel circuit configuration, ring buffer fault/alarm gone / F/A gone
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Ring buffer for faults and alarms that have occurred from power modules connected in parallel (motor module,
active line infeed, voltage sensing module).
Displays the relative system runtime when the fault or alarm was withdrawn.
Dependency: Refer to: r7100, r7101, r7102
Note: The last fault case that occurred is documented in index 0.
The parameter is reset to 0 at POWER ON.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-457

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r7200[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, power module overload I2T / PM overload I2T
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR (Parallel) Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the overload of the particular power module in a parallel circuit configuration calculated using the I2t func-
tion. The maximum value of all power modules is displayed in r0036.

r7201[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, power module, maximum inverter temperatures /

PM temp max inv
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]

Description: Displays the maximum inverter temperature in the power module for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power modules is displayed in r0037[0].

r7202[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, power module, maximum depletion layer temperatures
/ PM TempMaxDepLayer
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]

Description: Displays the maximum barrier junction temperature in the power module for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power modules is displayed in r0037[1].

r7203[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, power module, maximum rectifier temperatures /

PM temp max rect
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]

Description: Displays the maximum rectifier temperature in the power module for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power modules is displayed in r0037[2].

1-458  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r7204[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, power module air intake temperatures /

PM temp air intake
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]

Description: Displays the air intake temperature in the power module for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power modules is displayed in r0037[3].

r7205[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, power module electronics temperature / PM temp electr
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Displays the temperature of the electronics module in the power module for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power modules is displayed in r0037[4].

r7206[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, power module, temperatures inverter 1 / PM temp inv 1
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]

Description: Displays the inverter temperature 1 in the power module for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power modules is displayed in r0037[5].

r7207[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, power module, temperatures inverter 2 / PM temp inv 2
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Displays the inverter temperature 2 in the power module for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power modules is displayed in r0037[6].

r7208[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, power module, temperatures inverter 3 / PM temp inv 3
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]

Description: Displays the inverter temperature 3 in the power module for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power modules is displayed in r0037[7].

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-459

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r7209[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, power module, temperatures inverter 4 / PM temp inv 4
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Displays the inverter temperature 4 in the power module for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power modules is displayed in r0037[8].

r7210[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, power module, temperatures inverter 5 / PM temp inv 5
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]

Description: Displays the inverter temperature 5 in the power module for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power modules is displayed in r0037[9].

r7211[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, power module, temperatures inverter 6 / PM temp inv 6
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Displays the inverter temperature 6 in the power module for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power modules is displayed in r0037[10].

r7212[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, power module, temperatures rectifier 1 / PM temp rect 1
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]

Description: Displays rectifier temperature 1 in the power module for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power modules is displayed in r0037[11].

r7213[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, power module, temperatures rectifier 2 / PM temp rect 2
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Displays rectifier temperature 2 in the power module for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power modules is displayed in r0037[12].

1-460  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r7214[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, power module, temperatures depletion layer 1 /

PM temp DepLayer 1
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]

Description: Displays barrier junction temperature 1 in the power module for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power modules is displayed in r0037[13].

r7215[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, power module, temperatures depletion layer 2 /

PM temp DepLayer 2
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]

Description: Displays barrier junction temperature 2 in the power module for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power modules is displayed in r0037[14].

r7216[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, power module, temperatures depletion layer 3 /

PM temp DepLayer 3
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]

Description: Displays barrier junction temperature 3 in the power module for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power modules is displayed in r0037[15].

r7217[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, power module, temperatures depletion layer 4 /

PM temp DepLayer 4
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]

Description: Displays barrier junction temperature 4 in the power module for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power modules is displayed in r0037[16].

r7218[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, power module, temperatures depletion layer 5 /

PM temp DepLayer 5
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]

Description: Displays barrier junction temperature 5 in the power module for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power modules is displayed in r0037[17].

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-461

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r7219[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, power module, temperatures depletion layer 6 /

PM temp DepLayer 6
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]

Description: Displays barrier junction temperature 6 in the power module for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power modules is displayed in r0037[18].

r7220[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, infeed absolute current motoring permissible /

INF I_abs mot perm
A_INF (Parallel) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the currently permissible line-side absolute current when motoring.
The minimum value of all power modules multiplied by the number motor modules is displayed in r0067[0].

r7220[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, maximum drive output current / Drv I_output max
VECTOR (Parallel) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]
Description: Displays the maximum output current of the power module.
The minimum value of all power modules multiplied by the number motor modules is displayed in r0067.

r7221[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, infeed absolute current regenerative permissible /

INF I_absRegenPerm
A_INF (Parallel) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]
Description: Displays the currently permissible line-side absolute regenerative current.
The minimum value of all power modules multiplied by the number motor modules is displayed in r0067[1].

r7222[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, absolute current actual value / I_act abs.val.
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR (Parallel) Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays actual absolute current.

The summed value of all power modules is displayed in r0068.

1-462  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r7223[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, phase current actual value phase U / I_phase U act val
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR (Parallel) Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
Description: Displays the measured actual value of phase U as peak value.
The summed value of all power modules is displayed in r0069[0].

r7224[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, phase current actual value phase V / I_phase V act val
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR (Parallel) Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]

Description: Displays the measured actual value of phase V as peak value.

The summed value of all power modules is displayed in r0069[1].

r7225[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, phase current actual value phase W / I_phase W act val
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR (Parallel) Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
Description: Displays the measured actual value of phase W as peak value.
The summed value of all power modules is displayed in r0069[2].

r7226[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, phase current actual value, phase U offset /
I_phase U offset
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR (Parallel) Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
Description: Displays the measured offset of phase U as peak value.
The summed value of all power modules is displayed in r0069[3].

r7227[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, phase current actual value, phase V offset /
I_phase V offset
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR (Parallel) Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
Description: Displays the measured offset of phase V as peak value.
The summed value of all power modules is displayed in r0069[4].

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-463

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r7228[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, phase current actual value, phase W offset /
I_phase W offset
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR (Parallel) Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]

Description: Displays the measured offset of phase W as peak value.

The summed value of all power modules is displayed in r0069[5].

r7229[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, phase current actual value sum U, V, W /

I_phase sum UVW
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR (Parallel) Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: CURRENT_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]

Description: Displays the measured sum of the currents in phases U, V and W as peak value.
The summed value of all power modules is displayed in r0069[6].

r7230[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, DC link voltage actual value / Vdc_act

A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: VOLTAGE_DC Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the measured actual value of the DC link voltage.
The average value of all power modules is displayed in r0070.

r7231[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, phase voltage, actual value phase U / U_phase U act val
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR (Parallel) Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]

Description: Displays the actual voltage, phase U.

The average value of all power modules is displayed in r0089[0].

r7232[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, phase voltage, actual value phase V / U_phase V act val
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR (Parallel) Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the actual voltage, phase V.
The average value of all power modules is displayed in r0089[1].

1-464  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r7233[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, phase voltage, actual value phase W /

U_phase W act val
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 3
VECTOR (Parallel) Data type: Floating Point Data set: PDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]

Description: Displays the actual voltage, phase W.

The average value of all power modules is displayed in r0089[2].

r7250[0...4] Parallel circuit configuration, rated power module power rating / PM P_rated
A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 2
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: POWER_P3 Unit selection: p0100
Min Max Factory setting
- [kW] - [kW] - [kW]
Description: Displays the rated power of the individual power modules connected in parallel for various load duty cycles.
The sum of the rated powers of all power modules connected in parallel is displayed in r0206.
Index: [0] = Rating plate
[1] = Load duty cycle with high overload condition
[2] = Load duty cycle with slight overload condition
[3] = S1 load duty cycle
[4] = S6 load duty cycle
Dependency: The value is displayed in [kW] or [hp].
Refer to: p0100, p0205

r7251[0...4] Parallel circuit configuration, rated power module current / PM I_rated

A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 2
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]

Description: Displays the rated current of the individual power modules connected in parallel for various load duty cycles.
The sum of the rated currents of all power modules connected in parallel is displayed in r0207.
Index: [0] = Rating plate
[1] = Load duty cycle with high overload condition
[2] = Load duty cycle with slight overload condition
[3] = S1 load duty cycle
[4] = S6 load duty cycle
Dependency: Refer to: p0205

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-465

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r7252[0...4] Parallel circuit configuration, maximum power module current / PM I_max

A_INF (Parallel), Can be changed: - Access level: 2
B_INF (Parallel), Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
VECTOR (Parallel)
P-Group: Drive converter Units group: CURRENT_AC_EFF Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [Aeff] - [Aeff] - [Aeff]
Description: Displays the maximum output current of the individual power modules connected in parallel.
The sum of the maximum currents of all power modules connected in parallel is displayed in r0209.
Index: [0] = Rating plate
[1] = Load duty cycle with high overload condition
[2] = Load duty cycle with slight overload condition
[3] = S1 load duty cycle
[4] = S6 load duty cycle
Dependency: Refer to: p0205

r7300[0...n] CO: Parallel circuit configuration, VSM input line supply voltage u1 - u2 /
VSM input u1-u2
A_INF (Parallel) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: VSMDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]

Description: Displays the voltage between phases L1 and L2 of the particular voltage sensing module (VSM) for a parallel circuit
configuration.
The average value of all VSM is displayed in r3661.
Dependency: Refer to: p3660
Note: X521.1 or X522.1: Connection of L1
X521.2 or X522.2: Connection of L2

r7301[0...n] CO: Parallel circuit configuration, VSM input line supply voltage u2 - u3 /
VSM input u2-u3
A_INF (Parallel) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: VSMDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]
Description: Displays the voltage between phases L2 and L3 of the particular voltage sensing module (VSM) for a parallel circuit
configuration.
The average value of all VSM is displayed in r3662.
Dependency: Refer to: p3660
Note: X521.2 or X522.2: Connection of L2
X521.3 or X522.3: Connection of L3

1-466  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r7305[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, VSM temperature evaluation status / VSM temp status
A_INF (Parallel) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: VSMDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status of the temperature evaluation of the particular voltage sensing module (VSM) for a parallel cir-
cuit configuration.
This displays as to whether the temperature actual value has exceeded the fault/alarm threshold.
The overall status of the temperature evaluation of all VSM is displayed in r3664.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Temperature alarm threshold exceeded No Yes -
01 Temperature fault threshold exceeded No Yes -
Dependency: Refer to: p3665, r3666, p3667, p3668

r7306[0...n] CO: Parallel circuit configuration, VSM temperature KTY / VSM temp KTY
A_INF (Parallel) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: VSMDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: TEMPERATURE Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [°C] - [°C] - [°C]
Description: Displays the temperature actual value of the KTY84 temperature sensor connected to the voltage sensing module
(VSM) for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all VSM is displayed in r3666.
Prerequisite:
A KTY84 sensor is connected and p3665 is set to 2.
Dependency: Refer to: p3665

r7310[0...n] CO: Parallel circuit configuration, VSM 10 V input CT 1 actual value / VSM CT 1 I_act
A_INF (Parallel) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: VSMDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: CURRENT_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]

Description: Displays the current actual value from current transducer (CT) 1 at the 10 V input of the particular voltage sensing
module (VSM) for a parallel circuit configuration.
The average value of all VSM is displayed in r3671.
Dependency: Refer to: p3670
Note: The CT for phase 1 is connected at terminals X520.1 and X520.2 of the VSM.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-467

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r7311[0...n] CO: Parallel circuit configuration, VSM 10 V input CT 2 actual value / VSM CT 2 I_act
A_INF (Parallel) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: VSMDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: CURRENT_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [A] - [A] - [A]
Description: Displays the current actual value from current transducer (CT) 2 at the 10 V input of the particular voltage sensing
module (VSM) for a parallel circuit configuration.
The average value of all VSM is displayed in r3672.
Dependency: Refer to: p3670
Note: The CT for phase 2 is connected at terminals X520.3 and X520.4 of the VSM.

r7315[0...n] CO: Parallel circuit configuration, VSM 10 V input 1 actual value / VSM input 1 U_act
A_INF (Parallel) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: VSMDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]

Description: Displays the actual value of the voltage measured at the 10 V input 1 of the voltage sensing modules (VSM).
The average value of all VSM is displayed in r3673.
Dependency: Refer to: p3670
Note: 10 V input 1: Terminals X520.1 and X520.2

r7316[0...n] CO: Parallel circuit configuration, VSM 10 V input 2 actual value / VSM input 2 U_act
A_INF (Parallel) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: VSMDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: VOLTAGE_AC_PP Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [V] - [V] - [V]

Description: Displays the actual value of the voltage measured at the 10 V input 2 of the voltage sensing modules (VSM).
The average value of all VSM is displayed in r3674.
Dependency: Refer to: p3670
Note: 10 V input 2: Terminals X520.3 and X520.4

r7320[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, VSM line filter capacitance, phase U /

VSM filt C phase U
A_INF (Parallel) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: VSMDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: CAPACITY_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [µF] - [µF] - [µF]

Description: Displays the capacitance of the line filter, phase U of the particular voltage sensing module (VSM).
The average value of all VSM is displayed in r3677[0].
Dependency: Refer to: p3676
Note: Prerequisites:
The filter capacitance monitoring is activated.

1-468  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r7321[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, VSM line filter capacitance, phase V /

VSM filt C phase V
A_INF (Parallel) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: VSMDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: CAPACITY_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [µF] - [µF] - [µF]

Description: Displays the capacitance of the line filter, phase V of the particular voltage sensing module (VSM).
The average value of all VSM is displayed in r3677[1].
Dependency: Refer to: p3676
Note: Prerequisites:
The filter capacitance monitoring is activated.

r7322[0...n] Parallel circuit configuration, VSM line filter capacitance, phase W /

VSM filt C phase W
A_INF (Parallel) Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: VSMDS Function diagram: -
P-Group: Control Units group: CAPACITY_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [µF] - [µF] - [µF]
Description: Displays the capacitance of the line filter, phase W of the particular voltage sensing module (VSM).
The average value of all VSM is displayed in r3677[2].
Dependency: Refer to: p3676
Note: Prerequisites:
The filter capacitance monitoring is activated.

p7828 Firmware download component number / FW_download number

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 399 0
Description: Component number of the DRIVE-CLiQ component for which a firmware download is to be made.
Dependency: Refer to: p0121, p0141, p0151, p7829
Note: The downloaded is started by setting p7829 to "1" .

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-469

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p7829 Activate firmware download / Act. FW_download

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 999 0
Description: Setting this parameter to 1 activates a firmware download for the DRIVE CLiQ component indicated in p7828:1:
1: Activate download
0: Download successfully completed
>1: Error code
011: DRIVE-CLiQ component has detected a checksum error.
015: The selected DRIVE-CLiQ component did not accept the contents of the firmware file.
101: After several communication attempts, not response from the DRIVE-CLiQ component.
140: Firmware file for the DRIVE-CLiQ component is not available on the CompactFlash Card.
156: Component with the specified component number is not available.
Additional values:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Dependency: Component number of the DRIVE-CLiQ component for which the firmware is to be downloaded.
Refer to: p7828
Note: p7829 is automatically reset to 0 after the firmware has been successfully downloaded.
The new firmware only becomes active at the next system run-up.

p7830[0...15] Diagnostics telegram selection / Diag telegram

CU Can be changed: T Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0
Description: Selects a telegram whose contents should be shown in p7831 ... p7836.
Values: 0: Reserved
1: First cyclic receive telegram, sensor 1
2: First cyclic receive telegram, sensor 2
3: First cyclic receive telegram, sensor 3
Index: [0] =
[1] =
[2] =
[3] =
[4] =
[5] =
[6] =
[7] =
[8] =
[9] =
[10] =
[11] =
[12] =
[13] =
[14] =
[15] =

1-470  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r7831[0...15] Telegram diagnostics signals / Tel diag signals

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Indicates the signals contained in the selected telegram (P7830).
Values: 0: UNUSED
1: UNKNOWN
102: SAPAR_ID_DSA_ALARM
110: SAPAR_ALARMBITS_FLOAT_0
111: SAPAR_ALARMBITS_FLOAT_1
112: SAPAR_ALARMBITS_FLOAT_2
113: SAPAR_ALARMBITS_FLOAT_3
114: SAPAR_ALARMBITS_FLOAT_4
115: SAPAR_ALARMBITS_FLOAT_5
10500: ENC_ID_TIME_PRETRIGGER
10501: ENC_ID_TIME_SEND_TELEG_1
10502: ENC_ID_TIME_CYCLE_FINISHED
10503: ENC_ID_TIME_DELTA_FUNMAN
10504: ENC_ID_SUBTRACE_CALCTIMES
10505: ENC_ID_SYNO_PERIOD
10516: ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_A
10517: ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_B
10518: ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_C
10519: ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_D
10520: ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_A_SAFETY
10521: ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_B_SAFETY
10523: ENC_ID_ADC_TEMP_1
10532: ENC_ID_TRACK_AB_X
10533: ENC_ID_TRACK_AB_Y
10534: ENC_ID_OFFSET_CORR_AB_X
10535: ENC_ID_OFFSET_CORR_AB_Y
10536: ENC_ID_AB_ABS_VALUE
10537: ENC_ID_TRACK_CD_X
10538: ENC_ID_TRACK_CD_Y
10539: ENC_ID_TRACK_CD_ABS
10542: ENC_ID_AB_RAND_X
10543: ENC_ID_AB_RAND_Y
10544: ENC_ID_AB_RAND_ABS_VALUE
10545: ENC_ID_SUBTRACE_ABS_ARRAY
10546: ENC_ID_PROC_OFFSET_0
10547: ENC_ID_PROC_OFFSET_4
10564: ENC_SELFTEMP_ACT
10565: ENC_ID_MOTOR_TEMP_TOP
10566: ENC_ID_MOTOR_TEMP_1
10580: ENC_ID_RESISTANCE_1
10596: ENC_ID_AB_ANGLE
10597: ENC_ID_CD_ANGLE
10598: ENC_ID_MECH_ANGLE_HI
10599: ENC_ID_RM_POS_PHI_COMMU
10600: ENC_ID_PHI_COMMU
10612: ENC_ID_DIFF_CD_INC
10613: ENC_ID_RM_POS_PHI_COMMU_RFG
10628: ENC_ID_MECH_ANGLE
10629: ENC_ID_MECH_RM_POS
10644: ENC_ID_INIT_VECTOR
10645: FEAT_INIT_VEKTOR
10660: ENC_ID_SENSOR_STATE
10661: ENC_ID_BASIC_SYSTEM

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-471

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

10662: ENC_ID_REFMARK_STATUS
10663: ENC_ID_DSA_STATUS1_SENSOR
10664: ENC_ID_DSA_RMSTAT_HANDSHAKE
10665: ENC_ID_DSA_CONTROL1_SENSOR
10676: ENC_ID_COUNTCORR_SAW_VALUE
10677: ENC_ID_COUNTCORR_ABS_VALUE
10678: ENC_ID_SAWTOOTH_CORR
10692: ENC_ID_RESISTANCE_CALIB_INSTANT
10693: ENC_ID_SERPROT_POS
10724: ENC_ID_ACT_FUNMAN_FUNCTION
10725: ENC_ID_SAFETY_COUNTER_CRC
10740: ENC_ID_POS_ABSOLUTE
10741: ENC_ID_POS_REFMARK
10742: ENC_ID_SAWTOOTH
10743: ENC_ID_SAFETY_PULSE_COUNTER
10756: ENC_ID_DSA_ACTUAL_SPEED
10772: ENC_ID_DSA_POS_XIST1
10788: ENC_ID_AB_CROSS_CORR
10789: ENC_ID_AB_GAIN_Y_CORR
Index: [0] =
[1] =
[2] =
[3] =
[4] =
[5] =
[6] =
[7] =
[8] =
[9] =
[10] =
[11] =
[12] =
[13] =
[14] =
[15] =

r7832[0...15] Telegram diagnostics numerical format / tel diag format

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Indicates the original numerical format of the signals contained in the telegram.
The associated signal number is represented at the appropriate index in r7831.
Values: -1: unknown
0: Boolean
1: signed 1 byte
2: signed 2 byte
3: signed 4 byte
4: signed 8 byte
5: unsigned 1 byte
6: unsigned 2 byte
7: unsigned 4 byte
8: unsigned 8 byte
9: float 4 byte
10: double 8 byte
11: mm dd yy HH MM SS MS DOW
12: ASCII string
13: SIMUMERIK frame type
14: SIMUMERIK axis type

1-472  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Index: [0] =
[1] =
[2] =
[3] =
[4] =
[5] =
[6] =
[7] =
[8] =
[9] =
[10] =
[11] =
[12] =
[13] =
[14] =
[15] =

r7833[0...15] Telegram diagnostics unsigned / Tel diag unsigned

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Parameter to display a DSA signal in the unsigned-integer format.

The associated signal number is represented at the appropriate index in r7831.
Index: [0] =
[1] =
[2] =
[3] =
[4] =
[5] =
[6] =
[7] =
[8] =
[9] =
[10] =
[11] =
[12] =
[13] =
[14] =
[15] =

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-473

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r7834[0...15] Telegram diagnostics signed / Tel diag signed

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Integer32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Parameter to display a DSA signal in the signed-integer format.
The associated signal number is represented at the appropriate index in r7831.
Index: [0] =
[1] =
[2] =
[3] =
[4] =
[5] =
[6] =
[7] =
[8] =
[9] =
[10] =
[11] =
[12] =
[13] =
[14] =
[15] =

r7835[0...15] Telegram diagnostics real / Tel diag real

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Parameter to display a DSA signal in the float format.

The associated signal number is represented at the appropriate index in r7831.
Index: [0] =
[1] =
[2] =
[3] =
[4] =
[5] =
[6] =
[7] =
[8] =
[9] =
[10] =
[11] =
[12] =
[13] =
[14] =
[15] =

1-474  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r7836[0...15] Telegram diagnostics unit / Tel diag unit

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Parameter to display the units of a DSA signal.
The associated signal number is represented at the appropriate index in r7831.
Values: -1: unknown
0: none
1: Millimeter or degrees
2: Millimeter
3: Degrees
4: mm/min or RPM
5: Millimeter / min
6: Revolutions / min
7: m/sec^2 or V/sec^2
8: m/sec^2
9: V/sec^2
10: m/sec^3 or V/sec^3
11: m/sec^3
12: V/sec^3
13: Sec
14: 16.667 / sec
15: mm / rev
16: ACX_UNIT_COMPENSATION_CORR
18: Newton
19: Kilogram
20: Kilogram meter ^2
21: Percent
22: Hertz
23: Volt peak-to-peak
24: Amps, peak-to-peak
25: Degrees Celsius
26: Degrees
28: Millimeter or degrees
29: Meters / minute
30: Meters / second
31: Ohm
32: Millihenry
33: Newton meter
34: Newton meter / Amps
35: Volt / Amp
36: Newton meter second / rad
38: 31.25 microseconds
39: Microseconds
40: Milliseconds
42: Kilowatt
43: Microamps, peak-to-peak
44: Volt seconds
45: Microvolt seconds
46: Micro Newton meter
47: Amp / Volt seconds
48: Per mille
49: Hertz / second
53: Micrometer or millidegrees
54: Micrometer
55: Millidegrees
59: Nanometer
61: Newton/Amps

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-475

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
Parameters
Parameter list

62: Volt seconds / meter

63: Newton seconds / meter
64: Micronewton
65: Liters / minute
66: Bar
67: Cubic centimeter
68: Millimeters / Volt minute
69: Newton/Volt
80: Millivolt peak-to-peak
81: Volt rms
82: Millivolt rms
83: Amps rms
84: Microamps rms
85: Micrometers / revolution
90: Tenths of a second
91: Hundredths of a second
92: 10 microseconds
93: Pulses
94: 256 pulses
95: Tenth of a pulse
96: Revolutions
97: 100 revolutions / minute
98: 10 revolutions / minute
99: 0.1 revolutions / minute
100: Thousandth revolution / minute
101: Pulses / second
102: 100 pulses / second
103: 10 revolutions / (minute * second)
104: 10000 pulses / second ^2
105: 0.1 Hertz
106: 0.01 Hertz
107: 0.1 / seconds
108: Factor 0.1
109: Factor 0.01
110: Factor 0.001
111: Factor 0.0001
112: 0.1 Volt peak-to-peak
113: 0.1 Volt peak-to-peak
114: 0.1 amps, peak-to-peak
115: Watt
116: 100 Watt
117: 10 Watt
118: 0.01 percent
119: 1 / second ^3
120: 0.01 percent / millisecond
121: Pulses / revolution
122: Microfarad
123: Milliohm
124: 0.01 Newton meter
125: Kilogram millimeter ^2
126: Rad / (seconds newton meter)
127: Henry
128: Kelvin
129: Hours
130: Kilohertz
131: Milliamps, peak-to-peak
132: Millifarad
133: Meter
135: Kilowatt hours
136: Percent
137: Amp / Volt
138: Volt
139: Millivolt
140: Microvolt

1-476  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

141: Amps
142: Milliamps
143: Microamps
144: Milliamps rms
145: Millimeter
146: Nanometer
147: Joules
Index: [0] =
[1] =
[2] =
[3] =
[4] =
[5] =
[6] =
[7] =
[8] =
[9] =
[10] =
[11] =
[12] =
[13] =
[14] =
[15] =

p8550 AOP LOCAL/REMOTE / AOP LOCAL/REMOTE

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 0100 1001 bin
1111 1111 bin

Description: Parameter to save the actual AOP configuration.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 LOCAL save No Yes -
01 Start in LOCAL No Yes -
02 Change in oper. No Yes -
03 OFF acts like OFF2 No Yes -
04 OFF acts like OFF2 No Yes -
05 OFF acts like OFF3 No Yes -
07 CW/CCW active No Yes -
08 Jog active No Yes -
09 Save speed setpoint No Yes -
14 Inhibit operation No Yes -
15 Inhibit parameters No Yes -

r8570[0...9] Existing macros to the trigger parameter p0015 device / existMacros_p15

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Contains the macros that are available on this drive object for the macro trigger parameter p0015.
Dependency: Refer to: p0015

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-477

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r8570[0...9] Existing macros to the trigger parameter p0015 / existMacros_p15

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Contains the macros that are available on this drive object for the macro trigger parameter p0015.
Dependency: Refer to: p0015

r8571[0...9] Existing macros to trigger parameter p0700 / existMacros_p700

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Contains the macros that are available on this drive object for the macro trigger parameter p0700.
Dependency: Refer to: p0700

r8572[0...9] Existing macros to the trigger parameter p1000 / existMacros_p1000

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Contains the macros that are available on this drive object for the macro trigger parameter p1000.
Dependency: Refer to: p1000

r8573[0...9] Existing macros to the trigger parameter p1500 / existMacros_p1500

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
SERVO, VECTOR Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Contains the macros that are available on this drive object for the macro trigger parameter p1500.
Dependency: Refer to: p1500

1-478  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r8600 CBC device type / Device type

CU (CAN) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays all of the devices connected to the CAN bus after run-up.
r8600
= 00000000 hex: No drive recognized.
= FFFF0192 hex: Several drives - drive 1 is an active line module, servo drive or vector drive
= FFFF0191 hex: Several drives - 1st drive is a terminal module
= 00010192 hex: 1 vector drive
= 00020192 hex: 1 servo drive
= 01000192 hex: 1 active line module
= 00080191 hex: 1 terminal module
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1000 hex.
For each detected drive, the device type is displayed in object 67FF hex + 800 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).

r8601 CBC error register / Error register

CU (CAN) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the error register for CANopen.
Bit 0: Generic fault --> 0: No fault/error present --> 1: Generic fault/error present
Bit 1 ... 7: Not supported (always 0)
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1001 hex.

p8602 CBC SYNC object / SYNC_object

CU (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 4294967295 128

Description: Sets the SYNC object parameter for the following CANopen objects:
- 1005 hex: COB-ID
Note: SINAMICS operates as SYNC load.
COB-ID: CAN object identification

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-479

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p8603 CBC emergency telegram / Emergency telegram

CU (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
Description: Sets emergency telegram parameters (error telegrams) for the following CANopen objects:
- 1014 hex: COB-ID
Note: When downloading, if a default value of 0 is loaded, then the CANopen default value 0x80 + Node ID is automati-
cally set.

p8604[0...1] CBC node guarding / Node guarding

CU (CAN) Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF hex 0000 hex

Description: Sets the node guarding parameter for the following CANopen objects:
- 100C hex: Guard time
- 100D hex: Life time factor
The life time is derived by multiplying guard time by the life time factor.
Index: [0] = Time interval [ms] for new node guarding telegram
[1] = Factor for failure of the node guarding telegram
Dependency: Only adjustable if heartbeat time = 0 (heartbeat is disabled).
Refer to: p8606
Note: For p8604[0] = 0 and/or p8604[1] = 0, the node guarding protocol is not used.
Either node guarding or heartbeat can be used.

p8606 CBC producer heartbeat time / Prod Heartb Time

CU (CAN) Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 65535 [ms] 0 [ms]

Description: Sets the time [ms] to cyclically send heartbeat telegrams. The lowest cycle time is 100ms. The heartbeat telegram
send function can be disabled by writing a value of 0.
Dependency: Only adjustable if guard time = 0 (node guarding disabled).
Refer to: p8604
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1017 hex.
Either node guarding or heartbeat can be used.

1-480  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r8607[0...3] CBC identity object / Identity object

CU (CAN) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: General device information display.
Index: [0] = Vendor ID
[1] = Product code
[2] = Revision number
[3] = Serial number
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1018 hex.

p8608 CBC clear bus off error / Clear bus off err
CU (CAN) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0

Description: For a bus off error, the CAN bus is restarted with p8608 = 1 after the cause of the error has been removed.
Values: 0: Inactive
1: Start CAN controller
Note: This parameter is automatically reset to 0 after start.

p8609[0...1] CBC error behavior / Error behavior

CU (CAN) Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 1

Description: Sets the behavior of the CAN node referred to the communications error or equipment fault.
Values: 0: PREOPERATIONAL
1: No change
2: STOPPED
Index: [0] = Behavior for communication errors
[1] = Behavior for device faults
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1029 hex.

r8610[0...1] CBC first server SDO / First server SDO

CU (CAN) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the identifier (client/server and server/client) of the SDO channel.
Index: [0] = Displays the COB ID from client to server
[1] = Displays the COB ID from server to client
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1200 hex.
SDO: Service data object

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-481

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p8611[0...82] CBC pre-defined error field / Pre_def err field

CU (CAN) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF 1000 hex 0000 hex
Description: Displays the Pre-defined Error Field of the CAN node.
It includes the number of all errors that have occurred, the number of errors that have occurred for each drive and
the errors according to their history.
The first 16 bits represent the CANopen error code for Generic Error (1000 hex) and the second 16 bits the
SINAMICS error code.
Index 1 has the same structure - however, the CAN offset is in the second 16 bits instead of the SINAMICS error
code.
Index: [0] = Number of all faults in the drive unit
[1] = Most recent drive number / fault number
[2] = Number of faults drive 1
[3] = Fault 1/ drive 1
[4] = Fault 2/ drive 1
[5] = Fault 3/ drive 1
[6] = Fault 4/ drive 1
[7] = Fault 5/ drive 1
[8] = Fault 6/ drive 1
[9] = Fault 7/ drive 1
[10] = Fault 8/ drive 1
[11] = Number of faults drive 2
[12] = Fault 1/ drive 2
[13] = Fault 2/ drive 2
[14] = Fault 3/ drive 2
[15] = Fault 4/ drive 2
[16] = Fault 5/ drive 2
[17] = Fault 6/ drive 2
[18] = Fault 7/ drive 2
[19] = Fault 8/ drive 2
[20] = Number of faults drive 3
[21] = Fault 1/ drive 3
[22] = Fault 2/ drive 3
[23] = Fault 3/ drive 3
[24] = Fault 4/ drive 3
[25] = Fault 5/ drive 3
[26] = Fault 6/ drive 3
[27] = Fault 7/ drive 3
[28] = Fault 8/ drive 3
[29] = Number of faults drive 4
[30] = Fault 1/ drive 4
[31] = Fault 2/ drive 4
[32] = Fault 3/ drive 4
[33] = Fault 4/ drive 4
[34] = Fault 5/ drive 4
[35] = Fault 6/ drive 4
[36] = Fault 7/ drive 4
[37] = Fault 8/ drive 4
[38] = Number of faults drive 5
[39] = Fault 1/ drive 5
[40] = Fault 2/ drive 5
[41] = Fault 3/ drive 5
[42] = Fault 4/ drive 5
[43] = Fault 5/ drive 5
[44] = Fault 6/ drive 5
[45] = Fault 7/ drive 5
[46] = Fault 8/ drive 5

1-482  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

[47] = Number of faults drive 6

[48] = Fault 1/ drive 6
[49] = Fault 2/ drive 6
[50] = Fault 3/ drive 6
[51] = Fault 4/ drive 6
[52] = Fault 5/ drive 6
[53] = Fault 6/ drive 6
[54] = Fault 7/ drive 6
[55] = Fault 8/ drive 6
[56] = Number of faults drive 7
[57] = Fault 1/ drive 7
[58] = Fault 2/ drive 7
[59] = Fault 3/ drive 7
[60] = Fault 4/ drive 7
[61] = Fault 5/ drive 7
[62] = Fault 6/ drive 7
[63] = Fault 7/ drive 7
[64] = Fault 8/ drive 7
[65] = Number of faults drive 8
[66] = Fault 1/ drive 8
[67] = Fault 2/ drive 8
[68] = Fault 3/ drive 8
[69] = Fault 4/ drive 8
[70] = Fault 5/ drive 8
[71] = Fault 6/ drive 8
[72] = Fault 7/ drive 8
[73] = Fault 8/ drive 8
[74] = Number of faults control unit
[75] = Fault 1/control unit
[76] = Fault 2/control unit
[77] = Fault 3/control unit
[78] = Fault 4/control unit
[79] = Fault 5/control unit
[80] = Fault 6/control unit
[81] = Fault 7/control unit
[82] = Fault 8/control unit

p8620 CBC node ID / Node_ID

CU (CAN) Can be changed: T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
1 126 126

Description: Display or setting of the CANopen Node ID.

The Node ID can be set as follows:
1) Using the DIP power-up the control unit.
--> p8620 can then only be read and displays the selected Node ID.
--> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
--> CAN Node ID and PROFIBUS address are identical.
2) Using p8620
--> only if all of the DIP switches - from S1 to S7 - are either set to ON or OFF.
--> the Node ID is set as standard to 126.
--> A change only becomes effective after save and POWER ON.
Note: Every node ID change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
It is only possible to independently set CANopen node ID and the PROFIBUS address using p0918 and p8620 (pre-
requisite: All of the DIP switches S1 to S7 are set to ON or OFF).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-483

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p8622 CBC baud rate / Baud rate

CU (CAN) Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 7 6
Description: Setting the baud rate for the CAN bus.
The appropriate bit timings are selected that are defined in p8623 in the associated sub-index.
Values: 0: 1 Mbit/s
1: 800 kbit/s
2: 500 kbit/s
3: 250 kbit/s
4: 125 kbit/s
5: 50 kbit/s
6: 20 kbit/s
7: 10 kbit/s
Recommenda- Use the factor setting when setting the baud rate.
tion: Example:
Baud rate = 20 kbit/s --> p8622 = 6 --> associated bit timing is in p8623[6].
Dependency: Refer to: p8623

p8623[0...7] CBC bit timing selection / Bit timing select

CU (CAN) Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 000F 7FFF hex [0] 1405 hex
[1] 1605 hex
[2] 1C05 hex
[3] 1C0B hex
[4] 1C17 hex
[5] 1C3B hex
[6] 0002 1C15 hex
[7] 0004 1C2B hex

Description: Sets the bit timing for the C_CAN controller to the associated and selected baud rate (p8622).
Bits are distributed to the following parameters of the C_CAN controller in p8623[0...7]:
Bit 0 ... 5: BRP (Baud Rate Prescaler)
Bit 6 ... 7: SJW (Synchronisation Jump Width)
Bit 8 ... 11: TSEG1 (Time Segment 1, before the sampling point)
Bit 12 ... 14: TSEG2 (Time Segment 2, after the sampling point)
Bit 15: Reserved
Bit 16 ... 19: BRPE (Baud Rate Prescaler Extension)
Bit 20 ... 31: Reserved
Index: [0] = 1 Mbit/s
[1] = 800 kbit/s
[2] = 500 kbit/s
[3] = 250 kbit/s
[4] = 125 kbit/s
[5] = 50 kbit/s
[6] = 20 kbit/s
[7] = 10 kbit/s
Dependency: Refer to: p8622

1-484  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Note: Recommendation:
You use the factory setting (refer to p8622) when setting the bit timing.
Example:
Baud rate = 20 kbit/s --> p8622 = 6 --> associated bit timing is in p8623[6] --> 0001 2FB6

p8630[0...2] CBC virtual objects / Virtual objects

CU (CAN) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 [0] 1
[1] 0
[2] 0

Description: Sets the drive object selection (index 0), the sub-index area (index 1) and the parameter area (index 2) when using
virtual objects.
This means that it is possible to access all SINAMICS parameters via CAN.
Index 0 (drive object selection):
1: Device
2 ... 65535: Drive 1 ... 8
Index 1 (sub-index area):
0: 0 ... 255
1: 256 ... 511
2: 512 ... 767
3: 768 ... 1023
Index 2 (parameter area):
0: 1 ... 16383
1: 16384 ... 32768
2: 32768 ... 49152
3: 49153 ... 65535
Index: [0] = Drive object selection
[1] = Sub-index range
[2] = Parameter range

p8641 CBC abort connection option code / Abort con opt code
SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0

Description: Sets the drive behavior if a CAN communication error occurs.

Values: 0: No response
1: OFF1
2: OFF2
3: OFF3

r8680[0...36] CBC diagnostics hardware / Diagnostics HW

CU (CAN) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the register of the CAN controller C_CAN:
Register, Message Interface Register and Message Handler Register - referred to the CAN protocol.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-485

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

Index: [0] = Control register

[1] = Status register
[2] = Error counter
[3] = Bit timing register
[4] = Interrupt register
[5] = Test register
[6] = Baud rate prescaler extension register
[7] = Interface 1 command request register
[8] = Interface 1 command mask register
[9] = Interface 1 mask 1 register
[10] = Interface 1 mask 2 register
[11] = Interface 1 arbitration 1 register
[12] = Interface 1 arbitration 2 register
[13] = Interface 1 message control register
[14] = Interface 1 data A1 register
[15] = Interface 1 data A2 register
[16] = Interface 1 data B1 register
[17] = Interface 1 data B2 register
[18] = Interface 2 command request register
[19] = Interface 2 command mask register
[20] = Interface 2 mask 1 register
[21] = Interface 2 mask 2 register
[22] = Interface 2 arbitration 1 register
[23] = Interface 2 arbitration 2 register
[24] = Interface 2 message control register
[25] = Interface 2 data A1 register
[26] = Interface 2 data A2 register
[27] = Interface 2 data B1 register
[28] = Interface 2 data B2 register
[29] = Transmission request 1 register
[30] = Transmission request 2 register
[31] = New data 1 register
[32] = New data 2 register
[33] = Interrupt pending 1 register
[34] = Interrupt pending 2 register
[35] = Message valid 1 register
[36] = Message valid 2 register
Note: A description of the individual registers of the C_CAN controller can be taken from the document "C_CAN User's
Manual".

p8685 CBC diagnostics NMT states / Diagnost. NMTstate

CU (CAN) Can be changed: C1, U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 129 127

Description: Sets and displays the CANopen NMT state.

Values: 0: Initializing
4: Stopped
5: Operational
127: Preoperational
128: Reset node
129: Reset Communication
Note: The value 0 (initialization) is only displayed and cannot be set.

1-486  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p8700[0...1] CBC receive PDO 1 / Receive PDO 1

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9204,
9206
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex [0] C000 06E0 hex
[1] 00FE hex

Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen receive process data object 1 (RPDO 1).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1400 hex +40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).
PDO: Process data object

p8701[0...1] CBC receive PDO 2 / Receive PDO 2

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9204,
9206
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex [0] C000 06E0 hex
[1] 00FE hex
Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen receive process data object 2 (RPDO 2).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1401 hex +40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).

p8702[0...1] CBC receive PDO 3 / Receive PDO 3

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9204,
9206
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex [0] C000 06E0 hex
[1] 00FE hex

Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen receive process data object 3 (RPDO 3).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1402 hex +40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).

p8703[0...1] CBC receive PDO 4 / Receive PDO 4

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9204,
9206
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex [0] C000 06E0 hex
[1] 00FE hex

Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen receive process data object 4 (RPDO 4).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1403 hex +40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-487

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p8704[0...1] CBC receive PDO 5 / Receive PDO 5

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9204
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex [0] C000 06E0 hex
[1] 00FE hex

Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen receive process data object 5 (RPDO 5).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1404 hex +40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).

p8705[0...1] CBC receive PDO 6 / Receive PDO 6

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9204
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex [0] C000 06E0 hex
[1] 00FE hex

Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen receive process data object 6 (RPDO 6).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1405 hex +40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).

p8706[0...1] CBC receive PDO 7 / Receive PDO 7

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9204
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex [0] C000 06E0 hex
[1] 00FE hex

Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen receive process data object 7 (RPDO 7).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1406 hex +40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).

p8707[0...1] CBC receive PDO 8 / Receive PDO 8

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9204
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex [0] C000 06E0 hex
[1] 00FE hex

Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen receive process data object 8 (RPDO 8).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1407 hex +40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).

1-488  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p8710[0...3] CBC receive mapping for RPDO 1 / Mapping RPDO 1

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9204,
9206
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex

Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen receive process data object 1 (RPDO 1).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1600 hex +40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).
Dummy mapping not supported.

p8711[0...3] CBC receive mapping for RPDO 2 / Mapping RPDO 2

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9204,
9206
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen receive process data object 2 (RPDO 2).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1601 hex +40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).
Dummy mapping not supported.

p8712[0...3] CBC receive mapping for RPDO 3 / Mapping RPDO 3

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9204,
9206
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen receive process data object 3 (RPDO 3).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1602 hex +40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).
Dummy mapping not supported.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-489

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p8713[0...3] CBC receive mapping for RPDO 4 / Mapping RPDO 4

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9204,
9206
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex

Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen receive process data object 4 (RPDO 4).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1603 hex +40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).
Dummy mapping not supported.

p8714[0...3] CBC receive mapping for RPDO 5 / Mapping RPDO 5

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9204
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen receive process data object 5 (RPDO 5).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1604 hex +40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).
Dummy mapping not supported.

p8715[0...3] CBC receive mapping for RPDO 6 / Mapping RPDO 6

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9204
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex

Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen receive process data object 6 (RPDO 6).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1605 hex +40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).
Dummy mapping not supported.

1-490  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p8716[0...3] CBC receive mapping for RPDO 7 / Mapping RPDO 7

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9204
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen receive process data object 7 (RPDO 7).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1606 hex +40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).
Dummy mapping not supported.

p8717[0...3] CBC receive mapping for RPDO 8 / Mapping RPDO 8

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9204
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen receive process data object 8 (RPDO 8).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1607 hex +40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).
Dummy mapping not supported.

p8720[0...4] CBC transmit PDO 1 / Transmit PDO 1

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9208,
9210
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex [0] C000 06E0 hex
[1] 00FE hex
[2] 0000 hex
[3] 0000 hex
[4] 0000 hex
Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen transmit process data object 1 (TPDO 1).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
[2] = Inhibit time
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Event timer
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1800 hex +40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-491

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p8721[0...4] CBC transmit PDO 2 / Transmit PDO 2

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9208,
9210
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex [0] C000 06E0 hex
[1] 00FE hex
[2] 0000 hex
[3] 0000 hex
[4] 0000 hex

Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen transmit process data object 2 (TPDO 2).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
[2] = Inhibit time
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Event timer
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1801 hex +40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).

p8722[0...4] CBC transmit PDO 3 / Transmit PDO 3

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9208,
9210
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex [0] C000 06E0 hex
[1] 00FE hex
[2] 0000 hex
[3] 0000 hex
[4] 0000 hex

Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen transmit process data object 3 (TPDO 3).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
[2] = Inhibit time
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Event timer
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1802 hex +40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).

1-492  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p8723[0...4] CBC transmit PDO 4 / Transmit PDO 4

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9208,
9210
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex [0] C000 06E0 hex
[1] 00FE hex
[2] 0000 hex
[3] 0000 hex
[4] 0000 hex

Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen transmit process data object 4 (TPDO 4).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
[2] = Inhibit time
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Event timer
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1803 hex +40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).

p8724[0...4] CBC transmit PDO 5 / Transmit PDO 5

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9208
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex [0] C000 06E0 hex
[1] 00FE hex
[2] 0000 hex
[3] 0000 hex
[4] 0000 hex

Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen transmit process data object 5 (TPDO 5).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
[2] = Inhibit time
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Event timer
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1804 hex +40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).

p8725[0...4] CBC transmit PDO 6 / Transmit PDO 6

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9208
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex [0] C000 06E0 hex
[1] 00FE hex
[2] 0000 hex
[3] 0000 hex
[4] 0000 hex
Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen transmit process data object 6 (TPDO 6).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PD transmission type
[2] = Inhibit time
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Event timer
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1805 hex +40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-493

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p8726[0...4] CBC transmit PDO 7 / Transmit PDO 7

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9208
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex [0] C000 06E0 hex
[1] 00FE hex
[2] 0000 hex
[3] 0000 hex
[4] 0000 hex

Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen transmit process data object 7 (TPDO 7).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
[2] = Inhibit time
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Event timer
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1806 hex +40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).

p8727[0...4] CBC transmit PDO 8 / Transmit PDO 8

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9208
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex [0] C000 06E0 hex
[1] 00FE hex
[2] 0000 hex
[3] 0000 hex
[4] 0000 hex
Description: Sets the communication parameters for CANopen transmit process data object 8 (TPDO 8).
Index: [0] = PDO COB-ID
[1] = PDO transmission type
[2] = Inhibit time
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Event timer
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1807 hex +40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).

p8730[0...3] CBC send mapping for TPDO 1 / Mapping TPDO 1

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9208,
9210
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex

Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen transmit process data object 1 (TPDO 1).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A00 hex + 40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).

1-494  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p8731[0...3] CBC send mapping for TPDO 2 / Mapping TPDO 2

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9208,
9210
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex

Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen transmit process data object 2 (TPDO 2).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A01 hex + 40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).

p8732[0...3] CBC send mapping for TPDO 3 / Mapping TPDO 3

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9208,
9210
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex

Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen transmit process data object 3 (TPDO 3).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A02 hex + 40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).

p8733[0...3] CBC send mapping for TPDO 4 / Mapping TPDO 4

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9208,
9210
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen transmit process data object 4 (TPDO 4).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: : drive number 0 ... 7).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-495

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p8734[0...3] CBC send mapping for TPDO 5 / Mapping TPDO 5

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9208
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen transmit process data object 5 (TPDO 5).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A04 hex + 40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).

p8735[0...3] CBC send mapping for TPDO 6 / Mapping TPDO 6

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9208
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex

Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen transmit process data object 6 (TPDO 6).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A05 hex + 40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).

p8736[0...3] CBC send mapping for TPDO 7 / Mapping TPDO 7

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9208
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex

Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen transmit process data object 7 (TPDO 7).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A06 hex + 40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).

p8737[0...3] CBC send mapping for TPDO 8 / Mapping TPDO 8

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9208
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex

Description: Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen transmit process data object 8 (TPDO 8).
Index: [0] = Mapped object 1
[1] = Mapped object 2
[2] = Mapped object 3
[3] = Mapped object 4
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A07 hex + 40 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).

1-496  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p8740[0...23] CBC channel assignment / Chann assign.

CU (CAN) Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 8 0
Description: Sets the number of channels for receive PDOs and Transmit PDOs.
3 indices are provided for each drive; these indices define the number of channels (3 * n indices, n = 8).
Index 0: Number of channels for receive PDOs (drive 1)
Index 1: Number of channels for transmit PDOs (drive 1)
Index 2: Reserved
Correspondingly, indices 3 to 6 are valid for the 2nd drive, etc.
Index: [0] = Number of channels for receive PDOs (drive 1)
[1] = Number of channels for transmit PDOs (drive 1)
[2] = Reserved
[3] = Number of channels for receive PDOs (drive 2)
[4] = Number of channels for transmit PDOs (drive 2)
[5] = Reserved
[6] = Number of channels for receive PDOs (drive 3)
[7] = Number of channels for transmit PDOs (drive 3)
[8] = Reserved
[9] = Number of channels for receive PDOs (drive 4)
[10] = Number of channels for transmit PDOs (drive 4)
[11] = Reserved
[12] = Number of channels for receive PDOs (drive 5)
[13] = Number of channels for transmit PDOs (drive 5)
[14] = Reserved
[15] = Number of channels for receive PDOs (drive 6)
[16] = Number of channels for transmit PDOs (drive 6)
[17] = Reserved
[18] = Number of channels for receive PDOs (drive 7)
[19] = Number of channels for transmit PDOs (drive 7)
[20] = Reserved
[21] = Number of channels for receive PDOs (drive 8)
[22] = Number of channels for transmit PDOs (drive 8)
[23] = Reserved
Dependency: Refer to: p8741
Note: Channel assignment not yet in effect. To acknowledge set p8741 = 1.

p8741 CBC channel assignment acknowledgment / Chan assign. ackn.

CU (CAN) Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0

Description: This parameter must be set to 1 to acknowledge the channel assignment selected in p8740.
Dependency: Refer to: p8740

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-497

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r8742 CBC number of free PDO channels / No. fr. PDO chan.
CU (CAN) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the RPDO channels that are still available.

p8743[0...7] CBC assignment, drive ID / Drive ID

CU (CAN) Can be changed: C1 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 62 0
Description: Displays the drive ID associated with each drive.
Index: [0] = Drive ID for 1st drive
[1] = Drive ID for 2nd drive
[2] = Drive ID for 3rd drive
[3] = Drive ID for 4th drive
[4] = Drive ID for 5th drive
[5] = Drive ID for 6th drive
[6] = Drive ID for 7th drive
[7] = Drive ID for 8th drive

p8744 CBC PDO mapping configuration / PDO Mapping conf.

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C2, T Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 9204,
9206, 9208, 9210
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 2 2

Description: Selector switch for the PDO mapping.

Sets the mapping for download or in the online mode after setting p8741 to 1.
Values: 0: Must be set before making changes
1: Predefined Connection Set
2: Free PDO Mapping

1-498  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r8750[0...15] CBC mapped 16-bit receive objects / RPDO 16 mapped

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays 16-bit receive CANopen objects mapped to process data buffer.
Example:
The control word is mapped in p8720[0] and p8721[0]; this means that r8750[0] indicates that it is located at the first
position (p8850[0]) in the process data buffer.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16

r8751[0...15] CBC mapped 16-bit transmit objects / TPDO 16 mapped

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays mapped 16-bit transmit CANopen objects in the process data buffer.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Dependency: Refer to: r8750

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-499

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r8760[0...14] CBC mapped 32-bit receive objects / RPDO 32 mapped

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays 32-bit receive CANopen objects mapped to process data buffer.
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 +10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16

r8761[0...14] CBC mapped 32-bit transmit objects / TPDO 32 mapped

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays mapped 32-bit transmit CANopen objects in the process data buffer.
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 +10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16

1-500  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r8784 CO: CBC status word / Status word

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the CANopen status word.
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 6041 hex + 800 hex * : drive number 0 ... 7).
Re bit 10:
When the ramp-function generator is activated, the interconnection from CI: p2151 = r1119 can be changed, so that
to evaluate bit 10, the setpoint can be retrieved (taken) from in front of the ramp-function generator.

p8785 BI: CBC status word bit 8 / Status word bit 8

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Binector input for CANopen status word bit 8.

Dependency: Refer to: r8784

p8786 BI: CBC status word bit 14 / Status word bit 14

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Binector input for CANopen status word bit 14.

Dependency: Refer to: r8784

p8787 BI: CBC status word bit 15 / Status word bit 15

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Binector input for CANopen status word bit 15.

Dependency: Refer to: r8784

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-501

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p8790 CBC control word - auto interconnection / STW_interconn.auto

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: When p8790 = 1, BICO interconnection for CANopen control word is automatic.
Values: 0: No interconn
1: Interconnection
Dependency: Refer to: r8795
Note: For p8790 = 1, the following BICO interconnections are automatically established:
BI: p0840.0 = r8890.0
BI: p0844.0 = r8890.1
BI: p0848.0 = r8890.2
BI: p0852.0 = r8890.3
BI: p2103.0 = r8890.7

r8795 CBC control word / Control word

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Access to the CANopen control word using SDO transfer.

Dependency: Refer to: p8790
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 6040 hex + 800 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).

r8796 CBC target velocity / Target velocity

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Access to the CANopen object target velocity using the SDO transfer.
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 60FF hex + 800 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).

r8797 CBC target torque / Target torque

SERVO (CAN) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Access to the CANopen object target torque using SDO transfer.
Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 6071 hex + 800 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7).

1-502  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p8840 COMM BOARD monitoring time / CB t_monitoring

CU (CB) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 [ms] 65535000 [ms] 20 [ms]

p8841[0...39] COMM BOARD send configuration data / CB S_config_data

CU (CB) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 65535 0

p8842 COMM BOARD start configuration / CB config start

CU (CB) Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0

r8849[0...139] COMM BOARD receive configuration data / CB E_config_data

CU (CB) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-503

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r8850[0...15] CO: COMM BOARD PZD receive word / CB PZD recv word
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 9204,
9206
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Connector output for interconnecting the PZD (setpoints) received from the COMM BOARD in the word format.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Dependency: Refer to: r8860, r8890, r8891, r8892, r8893
Note: PZD1 to PZD4 are displayed bit-serially in r8890 to r8893.

p8851[0...15] CI: COMM BOARD PZD send word / CB PZD send word
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9208
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Selects PZD (actual values) to be sent to COMM BOARD in the word format.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Dependency: Refer to: p8861

1-504  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r8853[0...15] COMM BOARD PZD send diagnostics / CB diag PZD send

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 9208,
9210
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays PZD (actual values) sent to COMM BOARD.

Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Off On -
01 Bit 1 Off On -
02 Bit 2 Off On -
03 Bit 3 Off On -
04 Bit 4 Off On -
05 Bit 5 Off On -
06 Bit 6 Off On -
07 Bit 7 Off On -
08 Bit 8 Off On -
09 Bit 9 Off On -
10 Bit 10 Off On -
11 Bit 11 Off On -
12 Bit 12 Off On -
13 Bit 13 Off On -
14 Bit 14 Off On -
15 Bit 15 Off On -
Dependency: Refer to: p8851, p8861

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-505

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r8858[0...39] COMM BOARD read diagnostics channel / CB diagn. read

CU (CB) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

r8859[0...7] COMM BOARD identification Data / CB Ident_data

CU (CB) Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

r8860[0...14] CO: COMM BOARD PZD receive double word / CB PZD recv DW
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9204,
9206
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Connector output for interconnecting the PZD (setpoints) received from the COMM BOARD with double word for-
mat.
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 +10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16
Dependency: Refer to: r8850

1-506  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p8861[0...14] CI: COMM BOARD PZD send doubleword / CB PZD send DW

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 9208,
9210
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0

Description: Selects PZD (actual values) to be sent to COMM BOARD in the double word format.
Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 +10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16
Dependency: Refer to: p8851

r8874[0...15] COMM BOARD PZD diagnostics bus address receive / CB diag addr recv
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Bus address of sender from which the PZD is received.

Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Note: Value range:
0 - 125: Bus address of the sender
255: Not occupied

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-507

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r8875[0...15] COMM BOARD PZD diagnostics telegram offset receive / CB diag offs recv
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Byte offset of the PZD in the COMM BOARD receive telegram.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Note: Value range:
0 - 242: Byte offset
255: Not occupied

r8876[0...15] COMM BOARD PZD diagnostics telegram offset send / CB diag offs send
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Byte offset of the PZD in the COMM BOARD send telegram.
Index: [0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Note: Value range:
0 - 242: Byte offset
255: Not occupied

1-508  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r8890 BO: COMM BOARD PZD1 receive bit-serial / CB PZD1 recv bitw
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 9204,
9206
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of a PZD1 (normally control word 1) word received from the COMM
BOARD.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Off On -
01 Bit 1 Off On -
02 Bit 2 Off On -
03 Bit 3 Off On -
04 Bit 4 Off On -
05 Bit 5 Off On -
06 Bit 6 Off On -
07 Bit 7 Off On -
08 Bit 8 Off On -
09 Bit 9 Off On -
10 Bit 10 Off On -
11 Bit 11 Off On -
12 Bit 12 Off On -
13 Bit 13 Off On -
14 Bit 14 Off On -
15 Bit 15 Off On -
Dependency: Refer to: r8850

r8891 BO: COMM BOARD PZD2 receive bit-serial / CB PZD2 recv bitw
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 9204,
9206
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of a PZD2 word received from the COMM BOARD.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Off On -
01 Bit 1 Off On -
02 Bit 2 Off On -
03 Bit 3 Off On -
04 Bit 4 Off On -
05 Bit 5 Off On -
06 Bit 6 Off On -
07 Bit 7 Off On -
08 Bit 8 Off On -
09 Bit 9 Off On -
10 Bit 10 Off On -
11 Bit 11 Off On -
12 Bit 12 Off On -
13 Bit 13 Off On -
14 Bit 14 Off On -
15 Bit 15 Off On -
Dependency: Refer to: r8850

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-509

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r8892 BO: COMM BOARD PZD3 receive bit-serial / CB PZD3 recv bitw
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 9204,
9206
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of a PZD3 word received from the COMM BOARD..
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Off On -
01 Bit 1 Off On -
02 Bit 2 Off On -
03 Bit 3 Off On -
04 Bit 4 Off On -
05 Bit 5 Off On -
06 Bit 6 Off On -
07 Bit 7 Off On -
08 Bit 8 Off On -
09 Bit 9 Off On -
10 Bit 10 Off On -
11 Bit 11 Off On -
12 Bit 12 Off On -
13 Bit 13 Off On -
14 Bit 14 Off On -
15 Bit 15 Off On -
Dependency: Refer to: r8850

r8893 BO: COMM BOARD PZD4 receive bit-serial / CB PZD4 recv bitw
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 9204,
9206
P-Group: Communication Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of a PZD4 (normally control word 2) word received from the COMM
BOARD.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Bit 0 Off On -
01 Bit 1 Off On -
02 Bit 2 Off On -
03 Bit 3 Off On -
04 Bit 4 Off On -
05 Bit 5 Off On -
06 Bit 6 Off On -
07 Bit 7 Off On -
08 Bit 8 Off On -
09 Bit 9 Off On -
10 Bit 10 Off On -
11 Bit 11 Off On -
12 Bit 12 Off On -
13 Bit 13 Off On -
14 Bit 14 Off On -
15 Bit 15 Off On -
Dependency: Refer to: r8850

1-510  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r9409 Number of parameters to be saved / No. of par to save

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 4
SERVO, TB30, Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
TM15, TM17, TM31,
TM41, VECTOR P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -

Min Max Factory setting

- - -
Description: Displays the number of modified parameters and those that have still not be saved for this drive object.
Dependency: Refer to: p0971, p0977
Note: The modified parameters that still need to be saved are internally listed in r9410 ... r9419.

r9490 Number of BICO interconnections to other drives / No. BICO to drive

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
SERVO, TB30, Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
TM15, TM17, TM31,
TM41, VECTOR P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -

Min Max Factory setting

- - -

Description: Displays the number of signal sources from this drive to other drives/drive objects (binector output/connector out-
put, BO/CO).
Dependency: Refer to: r9491, r9492, p9493

r9491[0...9] BI/CI of BICO interconnections to other drives / BI/CI to drive

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
SERVO, TB30, Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
TM15, TM17, TM31,
TM41, VECTOR P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -

Min Max Factory setting

- - -

Description: Displays the signal receiver list (binector input/connector input, BI/CI) for the first interconnections between this
drive and other drives/drive objects.
Dependency: Refer to: r9490, r9492, p9493
Notice: A drive cannot be deleted if this list is not empty! Otherwise, another drive would continue to attempt to read a sig-
nal from a drive that no longer existed.
Note: All indices of r9491 to p9493 designate the same interconnection. r9491[x] contains the signal receiver and r9492[x]
the matching signal source; p9493[x] can be set to modify the interconnection.

r9492[0...9] BO/CO of BICO interconnections to other drives / BO/CO to drive

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: - Access level: 3
SERVO, TB30, Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
TM15, TM17, TM31,
TM41, VECTOR P-Group: Commands Units group: - Unit selection: -

Min Max Factory setting

- - -

Description: Displays the signal source list (binector output/connector output, BO/CO) for the first interconnections between this
drive and other drives/drive objects.
Dependency: Refer to: r9490, r9491, p9493
Notice: A drive cannot be deleted if this list is not empty! Otherwise, another drive would continue to attempt to read a sig-
nal from a drive that no longer existed.
Note: All indices of r9491 to p9493 designate the same interconnection. r9491[x] contains the signal receiver and r9492[x]
the matching signal source; p9493[x] can be set to modify the interconnection.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-511

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p9493[0...9] Reset BICO interconnections to other drives / Reset BICO to drv

A_INF, B_INF, Can be changed: T Access level: 3
SERVO, TB30, Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
TM15, TM17, TM31,
TM41, VECTOR P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -

Min Max Factory setting

0 15 15
Description: Resets the BICO interconnections to other drives to 0, 1 or to the factory setting. Each interconnection can be indi-
vidually reset.
Values: 0: Set connection to 0
1: Set connection to 1 (100 %)
2: Set connection to factory setting
15: Finished
Dependency: Refer to: r9490, r9491, r9492
Note: All indices of r9491 to p9493 designate the same interconnection. r9491[x] contains the signal receiver and r9492[x]
the matching signal source; p9493[x] can be set to modify the interconnection.

p9601 SI enables safety functions (control unit) / SI enable fct CU

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 0001 bin 0000 bin
Description: Sets the enable signals for safety functions on the control unit.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Enable SH via terminal (Control Unit) Inhibit Enable 2810
Dependency: Refer to: p9801
Note: CU: Control unit
SH: Safe standstill
SI: Safety Integrated

p9602 SI enable safe brake control (control unit) / SI enable SBC CU

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: 2814
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0

Description: Sets the enable signal for the function "Safe brake control" (SBC) on the control unit.
Values: 0: Inhibit SBC
1: Enable SBC
Dependency: Refer to: p9802
Note: The "safe brake control" function is not activated until at least one safety monitoring function has been enabled (i.e.
p9601 not equal to 0).
CU: Control unit
SBC: Safe brake control
SI: Safety Integrated

1-512  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p9620 BI: SI signal source for safe standstill (control unit) / SI select SH CU
SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2810
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - 0
Description: Sets the signal source for the function "Safe standstill" (SH) on the control unit.
Dependency: Refer to: p9601
Note: The following signal sources are permitted:
- fixed zero (standard setting)
- digital inputs (DI 0 to DI 7 on the control unit

p9650 SI tolerance time SGE changeover (control unit) / SI tol SGE_chgovCU

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 2810
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 2000.00 [ms] 500.00 [ms]
Description: Sets the tolerance time to change over the safety-related input signals (SGE) on the control unit.
A SGE changeover is not simultaneously effective due to the different runtimes in the two monitoring channels.
After an SGE switchover, dynamic data is not subject to a crosswise data comparison during this tolerance time.
Dependency: Refer to: p9850
Note: For a crosswise data comparison between p9650 and p9850, a difference of one Safety monitoring clock cycle is
tolerated.
The parameterized time is internally rounded-off to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.
SGE: Safety-related input signal (e.g. SH terminals)

p9658 SI transition time STOP F to STOP A (control unit) / SI STOP F to A CU

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 2802
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [ms] 30000.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms]

Description: Sets the transition period from STOP F to STOP A on the control unit.
Dependency: Refer to: r9795, p9858
Refer to: F01611
Note: For a crosswise data comparison between p9658 and p9858, a difference of one Safety monitoring clock cycle is
tolerated.
The parameterized time is internally rounded-off to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.
STOP F: Defect in a monitoring channel (error in the crosswise data comparison)
STOP A: Pulse cancellation via the safety shutdown path

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-513

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p9659 SI timer for the forced checking procedure / SI TimerFrcdCkProc

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 2810
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: TIME_H Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [h] 9000.00 [h] 8.00 [h]
Description: Sets the time to carry-out the dynamic update and testing the safety shutdown paths (forced checking procedure).
Within the parameterized time, safe standstill must have been de-selected at least once. The monitoring time is
reset each time that SH is de-selected.
Dependency: Refer to: A01699

p9761 SI password input / SI password input

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C1, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2800
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex

Description: Enters the Safety Integrated password.

Dependency: Refer to: F01659
Note: It is not permissible to change Safety Integrated parameter settings until the Safety Integrated password has been
entered.

p9762 SI password new / SI password new

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2800
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex

Description: Enters a new Safety Integrated password.

Dependency: A change made to the Safety Integrated password must be acknowledged in the following parameter:
Refer to: p9763

p9763 SI password acknowledgment / SI ackn password

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2800
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex

Description: Acknowledges the new Safety Integrated password.

Dependency: Refer to: p9762
Note: The new password entered into p9762 must be re-entered in order to acknowledge.
p9762 and p9763 are automatically set to 0 after the new Safety Integrated password has been successfully
acknowledged.

1-514  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r9770[0...2] SI version (control unit) / SI version CU

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 2802
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the Safety Integrated version on the control unit.
Index: [0] = Safety Version (major release)
[1] = Safety Version (minor release)
[2] = Safety Version (baselevel or patch)
Dependency: Refer to: r9870
Note: Example:
r9770[0] = 2, r9770[1] = 1, r9770[2] = 1 --> Safety version V02.01.01

r9771 SI common functions (control unit) / SI common fct CU

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2804
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the safety integrated monitoring functions supported on the control unit and motor module.
The control unit determines this display.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 SH supported via terminal No Yes -
01 SBC supported No Yes -
Dependency: Refer to: r9871
Note: CU: Control unit
SBC: Safe brake control
SH: Safe standstill
SI: Safety Integrated

r9772 CO/BO: SI status (control unit) / SI status CU

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2804
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the Safety Integrated status on the control unit.

Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 SH selected on control unit No Yes 2810
01 SH active on the control unit No Yes 2810
04 SBC requested No Yes 2814
09 STOP A cannot be acknowledged, active No Yes 2802
10 STOP A active No Yes 2802
15 STOP F active No Yes 2802
Dependency: Refer to: r9872

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-515

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r9773 CO/BO: SI status (control unit + motor module) / SI status CU + MM

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2804
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the Safety Integrated status on the drive (control unit + motor module).
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 SH in the drive selected No Yes 2810
01 SH in the drive active No Yes 2810
31 Shutdown paths must be tested No Yes 2810
Note: This status is formed from the AND operation of the relevant status of the two monitoring channels.

r9774 CO/BO: SI status (safe standstill group) / SI status group SH

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2804
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the status for Safety Integrated of the group to which this drive belongs.
This signal is an AND logic operation of the individual status signals of the drives included in this group.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 SH selected in group No Yes 2804
01 SH active in group No Yes 2804
31 Shutdown paths of the group must be tested No Yes 2804
Dependency: Refer to: p9620, r9773
Note: A group is formed by appropriately grouping the terminals for "safe standstill".
The status of a group of n drives is, for drives 1 to n - 1 displayed with a delay of one monitoring clock cycle; this is
a system-related effect.

r9780 SI monitoring clock cycle (control unit) / SI monitor_clck CU

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 2802
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]

Description: Displays the clock cycle time for the safety functions on the control unit.
Dependency: Refer to: r9880

1-516  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r9794[0...19] SI crosswise comparison list (control unit) / SI KDV_list CU

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 2802
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the number of the data that are being presently compared crosswise on the control unit.
Example:
r9794[0] = 1 (monitoring clock cycle)
r9794[1] = 2 (enable safety-related functions)
r9794[2] = 3 (tolerance time, SGE changeover)
r9794[3] = 4 (transition time, STOP F to STOP A)
r9794[4] = 0
...
r9794[19] = 0
The data corresponding to the numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4 are subject to a crosswise comparison.
Dependency: Refer to: r9894
Note: The complete list of numbers for crosswise data comparison is listed in Fault F01611.

r9795 SI diagnostics for STOP F (control unit) / SI diag STOP F CU

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2802
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the number of the cross-checked data which has caused STOP F on the control unit.
Dependency: Refer to: r9895
Refer to: F01611
Note: The list for crosswise data comparison is described in fault F01611.

r9798 SI actual checksum SI parameters (control unit) / SI act_checksum CU

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2800
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the checksum over the checked Safety Integrated parameters on the control unit (actual checksum).
Dependency: Refer to: p9799, r9898

p9799 SI reference checksum SI parameters (control unit) / SI set_checksum CU

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2800
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex

Description: Sets the checksum for the checked Safety Integrated parameters on the control unit (reference checksum).
Dependency: Refer to: r9798, p9899

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-517

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p9801 SI enables safety functions (motor module) / SI enable fct MM

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 bin 0001 bin 0000 bin
Description: Sets the enable signals for safety functions on the motor module.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 Enable SH via terminal (Motor Module) Inhibit Enable 2810
Dependency: Refer to: p9601
Note: MM: Motor module
SH: Safe standstill
SI: Safety Integrated

p9802 SI enable safe brake control (motor module) / SI enable SBC MM

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Integer32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2814
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0

Description: Sets the enable signal for the "Safe brake control" function (SBC) on the motor module.
0: Inhibit SBC
1: Enable SBC
Dependency: Refer to: p9602
Note: The "safe brake control" function is not activated until at least one safety monitoring function has been enabled (i.e.
p9801 not equal to 0).
MM: Motor module
SBC: Safe brake control
SI: Safety Integrated

p9850 SI tolerance time SGE changeover (motor module) / SI tol SGE_chgovMM

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 2810
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: TIME_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 2000000.00 [µs] 500000.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the tolerance time to change over the safety-related input signals (SGE) on the motor module.
A SGE changeover is not simultaneously effective due to the different runtimes in the two monitoring channels.
After an SGE switchover, dynamic data is not subject to a crosswise data comparison during this tolerance time.
Dependency: Refer to: p9650
Note: For a crosswise data comparison between p9650 and p9850, a difference of one Safety monitoring clock cycle is
tolerated.
The parameterized time is internally rounded-off to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.
SGE: Safety-related input signal (e.g. SH terminals)

1-518  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p9858 SI transition time STOP F to STOP A (control unit) / SI STOP F to A MM

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 2802
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: TIME_M6 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0.00 [µs] 30000000.00 [µs] 0.00 [µs]
Description: Sets the transition period from STOP F to STOP A on the motor module.
Dependency: Refer to: p9658, r9895
Refer to: F30611
Note: For a crosswise data comparison between p9658 and p9858, a difference of one Safety monitoring clock cycle is
tolerated.
The parameterized time is internally rounded-off to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.
STOP F: Defect in a monitoring channel (error in the crosswise data comparison)
STOP A: Pulse cancellation via the safety shutdown path

r9870[0...2] SI version (motor module) / SI version MM

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 2802
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the Safety Integrated version on the motor module.

Index: [0] = Safety Version (major release)
[1] = Safety Version (minor release)
[2] = Safety Version (baselevel or patch)
Dependency: Refer to: r9770
Note: Example:
r9870[0] = 2, r9870[1] = 1, r9870[2] = 1 --> Safety version V02.01.01

r9871 SI common functions (motor module / SI general fct MM

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2804
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the safety integrated monitoring functions supported on the control unit and motor module.
The motor module determines this display.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 SH supported via terminal No Yes -
01 SBC supported No Yes -
Dependency: Refer to: r9771
Note: MM: Motor module
SBC: Safe brake control
SH: Safe standstill
SI: Safety Integrated

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-519

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r9872 CO/BO: SI status list (motor module) / SI status MM

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2804
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the Safety Integrated status on the motor module.
Bit field: Bit Signal name 0 signal 1 signal FP
00 SH on selected on motor module No Yes 2810
01 SH on motor module active No Yes 2810
04 SBC requested No Yes 2814
09 STOP A cannot be acknowledged, active No Yes 2802
10 STOP A active No Yes 2802
15 STOP F active No Yes 2802
Dependency: Refer to: r9772

r9880 SI monitoring clock cycle (motor module) / SI monitor_clck MM

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: 2802
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: TIME_M3 Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]

Description: Displays the cycle time for the safety functions on the motor module.
Dependency: Refer to: r9780

r9894[0...19] SI crosswise comparison list (motor module) / SI KDV_list MM

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: 2802
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the number of the data that are being presently compared crosswise on the motor module.
Example:
r9894[0] = 1 (monitoring clock cycle)
r9894[1] = 2 (enable safety-related functions)
r9894[2] = 3 (tolerance time, SGE changeover)
r9894[3] = 4 (transition time, STOP F to STOP A)
r9894[4] = 0
...
r9894[19] = 0
The data corresponding to the numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4 are subject to a crosswise comparison.
Dependency: Refer to: r9794
Note: The complete list of numbers for crosswise data comparison is listed in Fault F30611.

1-520  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r9895 SI diagnostics for STOP F (motor module) / SI diag STOP F MM

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2802
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -
Description: Displays the number of the cross-checked data which has caused STOP F on the motor module.
Dependency: Refer to: r9795
Refer to: F30611
Note: The list for crosswise data comparison is described in fault F30611.

r9898 SI actual checksum SI parameters (motor module) / SI act_checksum MM

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: - Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2800
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- - -

Description: Displays the checksum for the checked Safety Integrated parameters on the motor module (actual checksum).
Dependency: Refer to: r9798, p9899

p9899 SI reference checksum SI parameters (motor module) / SI set_checksum MM

SERVO, VECTOR Can be changed: C2 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: 2800
P-Group: Safety Integrated Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
Description: Sets the checksum for the checked Safety Integrated parameters on the motor module (reference checksum).
Dependency: Refer to: p9799, r9898

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-521

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p9904 Topology comparison, acknowledge differences / Topo_compare ackn

CU Can be changed: C1 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex
Description: If, when comparing the actual topology and target topology, only error has occurred, that can be acknowledged,
then using this parameter, a new comparison can be started - acknowledging the error in the target topology.
Differences that can be acknowledged:
- topology comparison, component shifted
- topology comparison, serial number of a component has been detected to be different (byte 3 = 1)
- topology comparison shows one component that is connected differently
The following parameter values are available:
p9904 = 1 --> the procedure is started.
p9904 = 0 after starting --> the procedure has been successfully completed.
p9904 = 1 after starting --> the procedure has not been successfully completed.
The possible causes for an unsuccessful procedure are located in bytes 4, 3, 2.
Byte 2:
Number of structural differences.
Byte 3:
Number of differences that can be acknowledged (p9904).
Byte 4:
Number of differences. These differences can be resolved as follows:
- sets the topology comparison (p9906 or p9907/p9908).
- change over the actual topology.
The appropriate action should be selected corresponding to the message that is displayed/output.
Note: In order to permanently accept the acknowledgement of the fault that can be resolved, then it must be saved in a
non-volatile fashion (p0977).

p9905 Device specialization / Device specializ.

CU Can be changed: C1 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0
Description: With p9905 = 1, the serial numbers and the hardware versions of all of the components are transferred from the
actual topology into the target topology and a new comparison is started..
For the device specialization, the components of the target topology may only differ from those of the actual topol-
ogy by the serial numbers.
Note: p9905 is automatically set to 0 at the end of the operation.
In order to permanently accept the data, it is necessary to save in a non-volatile fashion (p0977).

1-522  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p9906 Topology comparison, comparison stage of all components / Topo_cmpr tot comp
CU Can be changed: C1 Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 99 0
Description: Sets the type of comparison between the actual topology and target topology.
The comparison is started by setting the required value.
Values: 0: High: Compares the complete electronic rating plate
1: Average: Compares the component type and the Order number
2: Low: Compares the component type
3: Minimum: Compares the component class
99: Topology has different comparison stages
Note: The electronic rating plate comprises the following data:
- component type (e.g. "SMC20")
- Order No. (e.g. "6SL3055-0AA0-5BA0")
- Manufacturer (e.g. SIEMENS)
- hardware version (e.g. "A")
- Serial No. (e.g. "T-P30050495")
When comparing the topology, the following data is compared in the target and actual topologies:
p9906 = 0: Component type, Order No., Hardware version, Manufacturer, Serial No.
p9906 = 1: Component type, Order No.
p9906 = 2: Component type
p9906 = 3: Component class (e.g. sensor module or motor module)

p9907 Topology comparison, comparison stage of the component number /

Topo_cmpr comp_no
CU Can be changed: C1 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 199 0

Description: Enters the number of the component where the setting of how the actual topology should be compared to the target
topology should be changed.
Dependency: Refer to: p9908

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-523

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p9908 Topology comparison, comparison stage of a component / Topo_cmpr 1 comp

CU Can be changed: C1 Access level: 3
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 99 0
Description: Sets the type of comparison of a component in the target topology with the actual topology.
The comparison is started by setting the required value.
Values: 0: High: Compares the complete electronic rating plate
1: Average: Compares the component type and the Order number
2: Low: Compares the component type
3: Minimum: Compares the component class
99: Topology has different comparison stages
Dependency: Refer to: p9907
Note: The electronic rating plate comprises the following data:
- component type (e.g. "SMC20")
- Order No. (e.g. "6SL3055-0AA0-5BA0")
- Manufacturer (e.g. SIEMENS)
- hardware version (e.g. "A")
- Serial No. (e.g. "T-P30050495")
When comparing the topology, the following data is compared in the target and actual topologies:
p9908 = 0: Component type, Order No., Hardware version, Manufacturer, Serial No.
p9908 = 1: Component type, Order No.
p9908 = 2: Component type
p9908 = 3: Component class (e.g. sensor module or motor module)

p9909 Topology comparison, component replacement / Topo_cmpr replace

CU Can be changed: C1 Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 1

Description: For p9908 = 1, the serial number and the hardware version of the new replaced component is automatically trans-
ferred from the actual topology into the target topology and then saved in a non-volatile fashion.
For the components that have been replaced, the electronic type plate must match as far as the following data is
concerned:
- component type (e.g. "SMC20")
- Order No. (e.g. "6SL3055-0AA0-5BA0")
Dependency: Refer to: p9904, p9905
Note: Components must be replaced before POWER ON in order that the changes in the target topology are automati-
cally saved in a non-volatile fashion.

p9915 DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error, shutdown threshold, master / DLQ fault master
CU Can be changed: C1 Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 0007 07FF hex 0007 02FF hex

Description: Only for internal Siemens service.

1-524  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p9916 DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error, shutdown threshold, slave / DLQ fault slave
CU Can be changed: C1 Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: Topology Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex 0007 07FF hex 0007 02FF hex
Description: Only for internal Siemens service.

p9920[0...19] Licensing, enter license key / Enter license key

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
Description: Enters the license key for this drive unit.
Example of the license key:
EACZ-QBCA = 69 65 67 90 45 81 66 67 65 dec (ASCII characters)
Index 0 = license key character 1 (e.g. 69 dec)
Index 1 = license key character 2 (e.g. 65 dec)
...
Index 19 = license key character 20 (e.g. 0 dec)
Dependency: Refer to: p9921
Refer to: A13000, A13001
Note: When changing p9920[x] to the value 0, all of the following indices are also set to 0.
After entering the license key, the license key must be activated (p9921).
If the licensing is not adequate, then the following alarm is displayed together with LED:
- A13000 --> licensing not sufficient
- LED READY --> flashes green/red with 0.5 Hz

p9921 Licensing, activate license key / Act. license key

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 2
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 1 0

Description: Activates the entered license key.

The following is executed when activating the license key.
- the checksum of the entered license key is checked.
- the entered license key is saved in the a non-volatile fashion on the CompactFlash Card.
- re-enter the license key.
Values: 0: not active
1: Activate start license key
Dependency: Refer to: p9920
Refer to: A13000, A13001
Note: When the license key has been activated, p9921 is automatically reset to 0.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-525

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

p9930[0...8] System logbook activation / SYSLOG activation

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0
Description: Only for service purposes.
Index: [0] = System logbook stage (0: not active)
[1] = COM2/COM1 (0: COM2, 1: COM1)
[2] = Activate file write (0: not active)
[3] = Display time stamp (0: No display)
[4] = Display system logbook stage (0: No display)
[5] = Display drive object number (0: No display)
[6] = Display software module name (0: No display)
[7] = Output buffer size (in 1 kB stages)
[8] = System logbook file size (in stages, each 10 kB)
Notice: Before powering-down the control unit, ensure that the system logbook is switched-out (p9930[0] = 0).

p9931[0...99] System logbook module selection / SYSLOG mod select.

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex

Description: Only for service purposes.

p9932 Save system logbook EEPROM / SYSLOG EEPROM save

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned8 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 255 0

Description: Only for service purposes.

p9950 Runtime measurement, control / Runtime_meas ctrl

CU Can be changed: U, T Access level: 4
Data type: Integer16 Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: - Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
0 3 0

Description: Controls the runtime measurements.

Values: 0: Stop runtime measurement
1: Start runtime meas (internal)
2: Clear trace buffer (internal)
3: Activate calculation of remaining computing time
Dependency: Refer to: r9976

1-526  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameter list

r9976[0...2] Rem comp time / Rem comp time

CU Can be changed: - Access level: 4
Data type: Floating Point Data set: - Function diagram: -
P-Group: - Units group: PERCENT Unit selection: -
Min Max Factory setting
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Displays the remaining computation time (min/averaged/max).
For p9950 = 3 the system starts to determine the residual computation time.
The individual values are measured over short time slices and from the measurements, the maximum, the minimum
and the average value are formed and displayed in the appropriate indices of the parameters.
If the system configuration is changed, the measurement must be stopped and re-activated.
Index: [0] = Remaining computation time (min)
[1] = Remaining computation time (averaged)
[2] = Remaining computation time (max)
Dependency: Refer to: p9950

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-527

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameters for data sets

1.3 Parameters for data sets

1.3.1 Parameters for Command Data Sets (CDS)

Note:
References: /IH1/ SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
in section "Data Sets"

The following list contains those parameters which are dependent on Command Data Sets.
Product: SINAMICS S, Version: V02.20.28.00, Label: ARM_M0475_11, Language: en
p0700[0...n] Macro binector input (BI) / Macro BI
p0820[0...n] BI: Drive data set selection DDS bit 0 / DDS select., bit 0
p0821[0...n] BI: Drive data set selection DDS bit 1 / DDS select., bit 1
p0822[0...n] BI: Drive data set selection DDS bit 2 / DDS select., bit 2
p0823[0...n] BI: Drive data set selection DDS bit 3 / DDS select., bit 3
p0824[0...n] BI: Drive data set selection DDS bit 4 / DDS select., bit 4
p0840[0...n] BI: ON/OFF1 / ON/OFF1
p0844[0...n] BI: 1. OFF2 / 1. OFF2
p0845[0...n] BI: 2. OFF2 / 2. OFF2
p0848[0...n] BI: 1. OFF3 / 1. OFF3
p0849[0...n] BI: 2. OFF3 / 2. OFF3
p0852[0...n] BI: Enable operation / Enable operation
p0854[0...n] BI: Master ctrl by PLC / Master ctrl by PLC
p0855[0...n] BI: Unconditionally release holding brake / Uncond. open brake
p0856[0...n] BI: Enable speed controller / Enable n_ctrl
p1000[0...n] Macro connector inputs (CI) for speed setpoints / Macro CI n_set
p1020[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 0 / n_set_fixed Bit 0
p1021[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 1 / n_set_fixed Bit 1
p1022[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 2 / n_set_fixed Bit 2
p1023[0...n] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 3 / n_set_fixed Bit 3
p1035[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer, setpoint, raise / Mop raise
p1036[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer, lower setpoint / Mop lower
p1039[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer, inversion / Mop inversion
p1041[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer, manual/automatic / Mop manual/auto
p1042[0...n] CI: Motorized potentiometer, automatic setpoint / Mop auto setpoint
p1043[0...n] BI: Motorized potentiometer, accept setpoint / Mop accept set val
p1044[0...n] CI: Motorized potentiometer, setting value / Mop setting value
p1055[0...n] BI: Jog bit 0 / Jog bit 0
p1056[0...n] BI: Jog bit 1 / Jog bit 1
p1070[0...n] CI: Main setpoint / Main setpoint
p1071[0...n] CI: Main setpoint scaling / Main setpt scal
p1075[0...n] CI: Suppl setpoint / Suppl setpoint
p1076[0...n] CI: Supplementary setpoint scaling / Suppl setpt scal
p1085[0...n] CI: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos
p1088[0...n] CI: Speed limit negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg
p1110[0...n] BI: Inhibit negative direction / Inhibit negative
p1111[0...n] BI: Inhibit positive direction / Inhibit positive
p1113[0...n] BI: Direction reversal / Direction reversal

1-528  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameters for data sets

p1122[0...n] BI: Bypass ramp-function generator / Bypass RFG

p1140[0...n] BI: Enables the ramp-function generator / Enable RFG
p1141[0...n] BI: Start ramp-function generator / Start RFG
p1142[0...n] BI: Enable speed setpoint / Enable n_set
p1143[0...n] BI: Ramp-function generator, accept setting value / Accept RFG set val
p1144[0...n] CI: Ramp-function generator setting value / RFG setting value
p1155[0...n] CI: Speed controller speed setpoint 1 / n_ctrl n_set 1
p1160[0...n] CI: Speed controller speed setpoint 2 / n_ctrl n_set 2
p1330[0...n] CI: V/Hz control independent voltage setpoint / Uf U_set independ.
p1430[0...n] CI: Speed pre-control / n_pre-control
p1437[0...n] CI: Speed controller, reference model I component input / n_ctrRefMod I_comp
p1455[0...n] CI: Speed controller P gain adaptation signal / n_ctrl Adpt_sig Kp
p1466[0...n] CI: Speed controller P-gain scaling / n_ctrl Kp Scal
p1476[0...n] BI: Speed controller hold integrator / n_ctrl integ stop
p1477[0...n] BI: Speed controller set integrator value / n_ctrl integ set
p1478[0...n] CI: Speed controller integrator setting value / n_ctr integ_setVal
p1479[0...n] CI: Speed controller integrator setting value scaling / n_ctrl I_val scal
p1492[0...n] BI: Droop feedback enable / Enables droop
p1495[0...n] CI: Acceleration pre-controlling, speed change each 1 s / a_prectrl dn/1s
p1500[0...n] Macro connector inputs (CI) for torque setpoints / Macro CI M_set
p1501[0...n] BI: Change over between closed-loop speed/torque control / Changeov n/M_ctrl
p1503[0...n] CI: Torque setpoint / M_set
p1511[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 1 / M_suppl 1
p1512[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 1 scaling / M_suppl 1 scal
p1513[0...n] CI: Supplementary torque 2 / M_suppl 2
p1522[0...n] CI: Torque limit, upper/motoring / M_max upper/mot
p1523[0...n] CI: Torque limit, lower/regenerative / M_max lower/regen
p1528[0...n] CI: Torque limit, upper/motoring, scaling / M_max up/mot scal
p1528[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper scaling / M_max upper scal
p1529[0...n] CI: Torque limit, lower/regenerating scaling / M_max low/gen scal
p1529[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal
p1540[0...n] CI: Torque limit upper scaling / M_max upper scal
p1541[0...n] CI: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal
p1542[0...n] CI: Travel to a fixed endstop, torque reduction / TfS M_red
p1545[0...n] BI: Activates travel to a fixed endstop / TfS activation
p2103[0...n] BI: 1. Acknowledge faults / 1. Acknowledge
p2104[0...n] BI: 2. Acknowledge faults / 2. Acknowledge
p2105[0...n] BI: 3. Acknowledge faults / 3. Acknowledge
p2106[0...n] BI: External fault 1 / External fault 1
p2107[0...n] BI: External fault 2 / External fault 2
p2108[0...n] BI: External fault 3 / External fault 3
p2112[0...n] BI: External alarm 1 / External alarm 1
p2116[0...n] BI: External alarm 2 / External alarm 2
p2117[0...n] BI: External alarm 3 / External alarm 3
p2148[0...n] BI: Ramp-function generator active / HLG active
p2151[0...n] CI: Speed setpoint for messages/signals / n_set for msg
p2154[0...n] CI: Speed setpoint 2 / n_set 2
p2200[0...n] BI: Technology controller enable / Tec_ctr enable
p2220[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 0 / Tec_ctr sel bit 0
p2221[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 1 / Tec_ctr sel bit 1
p2222[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 2 / Tec_ctr sel bit 2
p2223[0...n] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 3 / Tec_ctr sel bit 3
p2235[0...n] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer, raise setpoint / Tec_ctr mop raise

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-529

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameters for data sets

p2236[0...n] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer, lower setpoint / Tec_ctr mop lower
p2253[0...n] CI: Technology controller setpoint 1 / Tec_ctr setpoint 1
p2254[0...n] CI: Technology controller setpoint 2 / Tec_ctr setpoint 2
p2264[0...n] CI: Technology controller actual value / Tec_ctr act val
p2289[0...n] CI: Technology controller pre-control signal / Tec_ctr prectrl

1.3.2 Parameters for Drive Data Sets (DDS)

Note:
References: /IH1/ SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
in section "Data Sets"

The following list contains those parameters which are dependent on Drive Data Sets.
Product: SINAMICS S, Version: V02.20.28.00, Label: ARM_M0475_11, Language: en
p0186[0...n] Motor data sets (MDS) number / MDS number
p0187[0...n] Encoder 1 encoder data set number / Enc 1 EDS number
p0188[0...n] Encoder 2 encoder data set number / Enc 2 EDS number
p0189[0...n] Encoder 3 encoder data set number / Enc 3 EDS number
p0340[0...n] Automatic calculation of motor/control parameters / Calc auto par
p0578[0...n] Calculate parameters that are dependent on the technology/units / Calc techn par
p0640[0...n] Current limit / Current limit
p1001[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 1 / n_set_fixed 1
p1002[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 2 / n_set_fixed 2
p1003[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 3 / n_set_fixed 3
p1004[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 4 / n_set_fixed 4
p1005[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 5 / n_set_fixed 5
p1006[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 6 / n_set_fixed 6
p1007[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 7 / n_set_fixed 7
p1008[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 8 / n_set_fixed 8
p1009[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 9 / n_set_fixed 9
p1010[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 10 / n_set_fixed 10
p1011[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 11 / n_set_fixed 11
p1012[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 12 / n_set_fixed 12
p1013[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 13 / n_set_fixed 13
p1014[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 14 / n_set_fixed 14
p1015[0...n] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 15 / n_set_fixed 15
p1030[0...n] Motorized potentiometer, configuration / Mop configuration
p1037[0...n] Motorized potentiometer, maximum speed / Mop n_max
p1038[0...n] Motorized potentiometer, minimum speed / Mop n_min
p1040[0...n] Motorized potentiometer, starting value / Mop start value
p1047[0...n] Motorized potentiometer, ramp-up time / Mop ramp-up time
p1048[0...n] Motorized potentiometer, ramp-down time / Mop ramp-down time
p1058[0...n] Jog 1 speed setpoint / Jog 1 n_set
p1059[0...n] Jog 2 speed setpoint / Jog 2 n_set
p1080[0...n] Minimum speed / Minimum speed
p1082[0...n] Maximum speed / Maximum speed
p1083[0...n] CO: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos
p1086[0...n] CO: Speed limit negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg

1-530  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameters for data sets

p1091[0...n] Skip speed 1 / Skip speed 1

p1092[0...n] Skip speed 2 / Skip speed 2
p1093[0...n] Skip speed 3 / Skip speed 3
p1094[0...n] Skip speed 4 / Skip speed 4
p1101[0...n] Skip speed bandwidth / Skip_n bandwidth
p1120[0...n] Ramp-function generator ramp-up time / RFG ramp-up time
p1121[0...n] Ramp-function generator ramp-down time / RFG ramp-down time
p1130[0...n] Ramp-function generator initial rounding-off time / RFG t_start_round
p1131[0...n] Ramp-function generator final rounding-off time / RFG t_end_delay
p1134[0...n] Ramp-function generator rounding-off type / RFG round-off type
p1135[0...n] OFF3 ramp-down time / RFG OFF3 t_ramp-dn
p1136[0...n] OFF3 initial rounding-off time / RFGOFF3 t_strt_rnd
p1137[0...n] OFF3 final rounding-off time / RFG OFF3 t_end_del
p1145[0...n] Ramp-function generator tracking intensity. / RFG track intens
p1148[0...n] Ramp-function generator, tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down active / RFG tol HL/RL act
p1189[0...n] Speed setpoint configuration / n_ctrl config
p1192[0...n] DSC enc selection / DSC enc selection
p1193[0...n] DSC encoder adaptation factor / DSC encodAdaptFact
p1200[0...n] FlyRest oper mode / FlyRest oper mode
p1202[0...n] FlyRest srch curr / FlyRest srch curr
p1203[0...n] Flying restart search rate factor / FlyRst v_Srch Fact
p1240[0...n] Vdc controller configuration / Vdc_ctrl config
p1243[0...n] Vdc_max controller dynamic factor / Vdc_max dyn_factor
p1245[0...n] Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min on_level
p1247[0...n] Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min dyn_factor
p1250[0...n] Vdc controller proportional gain / Vdc_ctrl Kp
p1251[0...n] Vdc controller integral action time / Vdc_ctrl Tn
p1252[0...n] Vdc controller derivative-action time / Vdc_ctrl t_deriv.
p1255[0...n] Vdc_min controller time threshold / Vdc_min t_thresh
p1256[0...n] Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min response
p1257[0...n] Vdc_min controller speed threshold / Vdc_min n_thresh
p1280[0...n] Vdc controller configuration (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl config
p1283[0...n] Vdc_max controller dynamic factor (V/f) / Vdc_max dyn_factor
p1285[0...n] Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) (V/f) / Vdc_min on_level
p1287[0...n] Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) (V/f) / Vdc_min dyn_factor
p1290[0...n] Vdc controller proportional gain (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl Kp
p1291[0...n] Vdc controller integral action time (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl Tn
p1292[0...n] Vdc controller derivative-action time (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl t_deriv.
p1293[0...n] Vdc controller output limit (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl outp_lim
p1295[0...n] Vdc_min controller time threshold (V/f) / Vdc_min t_thresh
p1296[0...n] Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) (V/f / Vdc_min response
p1297[0...n] Vdc_min controller speed threshold (V/f) / Vdc_min n_thresh
p1300[0...n] Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode / Control mode
p1310[0...n] Voltage boost permanent / U_boost perm
p1311[0...n] Voltage boost at acceleration / U_boost accelerate
p1317[0...n] V/f control diagnostics activation / Uf diagn act
p1318[0...n] V/f control ramp-up/ramp-down time / Uf t_rmp-up_rmp-dn
p1319[0...n] V/f control voltage at zero frequency / Uf U at f=0 Hz
p1320[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic frequency 1 / Uf char f1
p1321[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic voltage 1 / Uf char U1
p1322[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic frequency 2 / Uf char f2
p1323[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic voltage 2 / Uf char U2
p1324[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic frequency 3 / Uf char f3

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-531

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
Parameters
Parameters for data sets

p1325[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic voltage 3 / Uf char U3

p1326[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic frequency 4 / Uf char f4
p1327[0...n] V/f control programmable characteristic voltage 4 / Uf char U4
p1335[0...n] Slip compensation, scaling / Slip comp scal
p1336[0...n] Slip compensation limit value / Slip comp lim val
p1338[0...n] V/f mode resonance damping gain / Uf Res_damp gain
p1339[0...n] V/f mode resonance damping filter time constant / Uf Res_damp T
p1340[0...n] I_max frequency controller proportional gain / I_max_ctrl Kp
p1341[0...n] I_max frequency controller integral action time / I_max_ctrl Tn
p1345[0...n] I_max voltage controller proportional gain / I_max_U_ctrl Kp
p1346[0...n] I_max voltage controller integral action time / I_max_U_ctrl Tn
p1350[0...n] Soft starting / Soft starting
p1400[0...n] Speed control configuration / n_ctrl config
p1400[0...n] Speed control configuration / n_ctrl config
p1401[0...n] Flux control configuration / F_ctrl config
p1404[0...n] Sensorless operation changeover speed / Sensorl op n_chgov
p1412[0...n] Speed setpoint filter, deadtime / n_set deadtime
p1414[0...n] Speed setpoint filter activation / n_set_filt active
p1414[0...n] Speed setpoint filter activation / n_set_filt active
p1415[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 1 type / n_set_filt 1 typ
p1416[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 1 time constant / n_set_filt 1 T
p1417[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 1 denominator natural frequency / n_set_filt 1 fn_n
p1417[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 1 denominator natural frequency / n_set_filt 1 fn_n
p1418[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 1 denominator damping / n_set_filt 1 D_n
p1418[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 1 denominator damping / n_set_filt 1 D_n
p1419[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 1 numerator natural frequency / n_set_filt 1 fn_z
p1420[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 1 numerator damping / n_set_filt 1 D_z
p1421[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 2 type / n_set_filt 2 typ
p1422[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 2 time constant / n_set_filt 2 T
p1423[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 2 denominator natural frequency / n_set_filt 2 fn_n
p1424[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 2 denominator damping / n_set_filt 2 D_n
p1425[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 2 numerator natural frequency / n_set_filt 2 fn_z
p1426[0...n] Speed setpoint filter 2 numerator damping / n_set_filt 2 D_z
p1428[0...n] Speed pre-control balancing deadtime / n_pre bal t_dead
p1429[0...n] Speed pre-control balancing time constant / n_prectrl bal T
p1433[0...n] Speed controller reference model natural frequency / n_ctrl RefMod fn
p1434[0...n] Speed controller reference model damping / n_ctrl RefMod D
p1435[0...n] Speed controller reference model deadtime / n_ctrRefMod t_dead
p1441[0...n] Actual speed smoothing time / n_act T_smooth
p1442[0...n] Actual speed smoothing time / n_act T_smooth
p1452[0...n] Speed actual value smoothing time (SLVC) / n_act T_smoothSLVC
p1456[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation lower starting point / n_ctrl AdaptKpLow.
p1457[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation upper starting point / n_ctrl AdaptKp up.
p1458[0...n] Adaptation factor, lower / Adapt_factor lower
p1459[0...n] Adaptation factor, upper / Adapt_factor upper
p1460[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation speed, lower / n_ctrl Kp n lower
p1461[0...n] Speed controller P gain adaptation speed, upper / n_ctrl Kp n upper
p1462[0...n] Speed controller integral action time adaptation speed, lower / n_ctrl Tn n lower
p1463[0...n] Speed controller integral action time adaptation speed, upper / n_ctrl Tn n upper
p1464[0...n] Speed controller adaptation speed, lower / n_ctrl n lower
p1465[0...n] Speed controller adaptation speed, upper / n_ctrl n upper
p1470[0...n] Speed controller sensorless operation P-gain / n_ctrl SLVC Kp
p1472[0...n] Speed controller sensorless operation integral action time / n_ctrl SLVC Tn

1-532  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameters for data sets

p1488[0...n] Droop input source / Droop input,source

p1489[0...n] Droop feedback scaling / Droop scaling
p1494[0...n] Speed controller integrator feedback time constant / n_ctr integ_fdbk T
p1496[0...n] Acceleration pre-control scaling / a_before scaling
p1498[0...n] Load moment of inertia / Load mom of inert
p1499[0...n] Accelerating for torque control, scaling / a for M_ctrl scal
p1514[0...n] Supplementary torque 2 scaling / M_suppl 2 scal
p1517[0...n] Accelerating torque smoothing time constant / M_accel T_smooth
p1520[0...n] CO: Torque limit, upper/motoring / M_max upper/mot
p1521[0...n] CO: Torque limit, lower/regenerative / M_max lower/regen
p1524[0...n] CO: Torque limit, upper/motoring, scaling / M_max up/mot scal
p1525[0...n] CO: Torque limit, lower/regenerating scaling / M_max low/gen scal
p1530[0...n] Power limit, motoring / P_max mot
p1531[0...n] Power limit, regenerating / P_max gen
p1532[0...n] Torque limit, offset / M_max offset
p1570[0...n] CO: Flux setpoint / Flux setpoint
p1574[0...n] Voltage reserve dynamic / U_reserve dyn
p1580[0...n] Efficiency optimization / Efficiency opt.
p1582[0...n] Flux setpoint smoothing time / Flux setp T_smth
p1584[0...n] Flux setpoint smoothing time for field-weakening operation / Flx setp T_smth Fs
p1590[0...n] Flux controller P gain / Flux controller Kp
p1592[0...n] Flux controller integral.action time / Flux controller Tn
p1594[0...n] Field-weakening controller, P gain / Field_ctrl Kp
p1596[0...n] Field weakening controller integral-action time / Field_ctrl Tn
p1610[0...n] Torque setpoint static (SLVC) / M_set static
p1611[0...n] Supplementary accelerating torque (SLVC) / M_suppl_accel
p1612[0...n] Current setpoint, open-loop control, sensorless / I_setCtrSensorless
p1616[0...n] Current setpoint smoothing time / I_set T_smooth
p1654[0...n] Current setpoint torque-generating smoothing time / Isq_set T_smooth
p1656[0...n] Activates current setpoint filter / I_set_filt active
p1656[0...n] Activates current setpoint filter / I_set_filt active
p1657[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 type / I_set_filt 1 Typ
p1658[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 denominator natural frequency / I_set_filt 1 fn_n
p1659[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 denominator damping / I_set_filt 1 D_n
p1660[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 numerator natural frequency / I_set_filt 1 fn_z
p1661[0...n] Current setpoint filter 1 numerator damping / I_set_filt 1 D_z
p1662[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 type / I_set_filt 2 Typ
p1663[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 denominator natural frequency / I_set_filt 2 fn_n
p1664[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 denominator damping / I_set_filt 2 D_n
p1665[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 numerator natural frequency / I_set_filt 2 fn_z
p1666[0...n] Current setpoint filter 2 numerator damping / I_set_filt 2 D_z
p1667[0...n] Current setpoint filter 3 type / I_set_filt 3 Typ
p1668[0...n] Current setpoint filter 3 denominator natural frequency / I_set_filt 3 fn_n
p1669[0...n] Current setpoint filter 3 denominator damping / I_set_filt 3 D_n
p1670[0...n] Current setpoint filter 3 numerator natural frequency / I_set_filt 3 fn_z
p1671[0...n] Current setpoint filter 3 numerator damping / I_set_filt 3 D_z
p1672[0...n] Current setpoint filter 4 type / I_set_filt 4 Typ
p1673[0...n] Current setpoint filter 4 denominator natural frequency / I_set_filt 4 fn_n
p1674[0...n] Current setpoint filter 4 denominator damping / I_set_filt 4 D_n
p1675[0...n] Current setpoint filter 4 numerator natural frequency / I_set_filt 4 fn_n
p1676[0...n] Current setpoint filter 4 numerator damping / I_set_filt 4 D_z
p1701[0...n] Current controller reference model deadtime / I_ctrRefMod t_dead
p1703[0...n] Isq current controller pre-control scaling / Isq_ctr_prectrScal

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-533

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
Parameters
Parameters for data sets

p1715[0...n] Current controller P gain / I_ctrl Kp

p1717[0...n] Current controller integral-action time / I_ctrl Tn
p1726[0...n] Quadrature arm decoupling, scaling / Transv_decpl scal
p1727[0...n] Quadrature arm decoupling at voltage limit, scaling / TrnsvDecplVmaxScal
p1740[0...n] Gain resonance damping for sensorless closed loop control / Gain res_damp
p1744[0...n] Motor model speed threshold stall detection / MotMod n_thr stall
p1745[0...n] Motor model error threshold stall detection / MotMod ThreshStall
p1750[0...n] Motor model configuration / MotMod config
p1752[0...n] Motor model changeover speed operation with encoder / MotMod n_chgov enc
p1755[0...n] Motor model changeover speed sensorless operation / MotMod n_chgSnsorl
p1758[0...n] Motor model changeover delay time, closed/open-loop control / MotMod t cl_op
p1759[0...n] Motor model changeover delay time open/closed loop control / MotMod t op_cl
p1760[0...n] Motor model with encoder speed adaptation Kp / MotMod wE n_ada Kp
p1761[0...n] Motor model with encoder speed adaptation Tn / MotMod wE n_ada Tn
p1764[0...n] Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Kp / MotMod woE n_adaKp
p1767[0...n] Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Tn / MotMod woE n_adaTn
p1774[0...n] Motor model, offset voltage compensation / MotMod woE n_adaTn
p1775[0...n] Motor model, offset voltage compensation / MotMod woE n_adaTn
p1780[0...n] Motor model configuration adaptation / MotMod config adap
p1781[0...n] Motor model IM Rs adaptation integral action time / MotMod Rs Tn
p1783[0...n] Motor model IM Rs adaptation Kp / MotMod Rs Kp
p1785[0...n] Motor model IM Lh adaptation Kp / MotMod Lh Kp
p1786[0...n] Motor model IM Lh adaptation integral action time / MotMod Lh Tn
p1795[0...n] Motor model PESM kT adaptation integral action time / MotMod kT Tn
p1800[0...n] Pulse frequency / Pulse frequency
p1802[0...n] Modulator modes / Modulator modes
p1803[0...n] Maximum modulation depth / Modulat depth max
p1804[0...n] Filter time constant smoothed modulation index / T_filt mod_idxSmth
p1806[0...n] Filter time constant Vdc correction / T_filt Vdc_corr
p1840[0...n] Actual value correction, configuration / ActVal_corr config
p1845[0...n] Actual value correction evaluation factor Lsig / ActV_corr FactLsig
p1846[0...n] Actual value correction damping factor / ActV_corr D_factor
p2140[0...n] Hysteresis speed 2 / n_hysteresis 2
p2141[0...n] Speed threshold 1 / n_thresh val 1
p2142[0...n] Hysteresis speed 1 / n_hysteresis 1
p2149[0...n] Monitoring, configuration / Monit config
p2150[0...n] Hysteresis speed 3 / n_hysteresis 3
p2153[0...n] Speed actual value filter time constant / n_act_filt T
p2155[0...n] Speed threshold 2 / n_thresh val 2
p2156[0...n] On delay, comparison value reached / t_on cmpr val rchd
p2161[0...n] Speed threshold 3 / n_thresh val 3
p2162[0...n] Hysteresis speed n_act > n_max / Hyst n_act>n_max
p2163[0...n] Speed threshold 4 / n_thresh val 4
p2164[0...n] Hysteresis speed 4 / n_hysteresis 4
p2166[0...n] Off delay n_act = n_set / t_del_off n_i=n_so
p2167[0...n] Switch-on delay n_act = n_set / t_del_on n_i=n_so
p2174[0...n] Torque threshold value 1 / M_thresh val 1
p2175[0...n] Motor locked speed threshold / Mot lock n_thresh
p2177[0...n] Motor locked delay time / Mot lock t_del
p2178[0...n] Motor stalled delay time / Mot stall t_del
p2181[0...n] Load monitoring, response / Load monit. resp.
p2182[0...n] Load monitoring, speed threshold value 1 / n_thresh 1
p2183[0...n] Load monitoring, speed threshold value 2 / n_thresh 2

1-534  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameters
Parameters for data sets

p2184[0...n] Load monitoring, speed threshold value 3 / n_thresh 3

p2185[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 1, upper / M_thresh 1 upper
p2186[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 1, lower / M_thresh 1 lower
p2187[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 2, upper / M_thresh 2 upper
p2188[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 2, lower / M_thresh 2 lower
p2189[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 3, upper / M_thresh 3 upper
p2190[0...n] Load monitoring torque threshold 3, lower / M_thresh 3 lower
p2192[0...n] Load monitoring, delay time / Load monit t_del
p2194[0...n] Torque threshold value 2 / M_thresh val 2
p2195[0...n] Torque utilization switch-off delay / M_util t_off
p2201[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 1 / Tec_ctr fix val 1
p2202[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 2 / Tec_ctr fix val 2
p2203[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 3 / Tec_ctr fix val 3
p2204[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 4 / Tec_ctr fix val 4
p2205[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 5 / Tec_ctr fix val 5
p2206[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 6 / Tec_ctr fix val 6
p2207[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 7 / Tec_ctr fix val 7
p2208[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 8 / Tec_ctr fix val 8
p2209[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 9 / Tec_ctr fix val 9
p2210[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 10 / Tec_ctr fix val 10
p2211[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 11 / Tec_ctr fix val 11
p2212[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 12 / Tec_ctr fix val 12
p2213[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 13 / Tec_ctr fix val 13
p2214[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 14 / Tec_ctr fix val 14
p2215[0...n] CO: Technology controller, fixed value 15 / Tec_ctr fix val 15
p2230[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer configuration / Tec_ctr mop config
p2237[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer maximum value / Tec_ctr mop max
p2238[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer minimum value / Tec_ctr mop min
p2240[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer starting value / Tec_ctrl mop start
p2247[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Tec_ctr mop t_r-up
p2248[0...n] Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-down time / Tec_ctrMop t_rdown
p2900[0...n] CO: Fixed value 1 [%] / Fixed value 1 [%]
p2901[0...n] CO: Fixed value 2 [%] / Fixed value 2 [%]
p2930[0...n] CO: Fixed value M [Nm] / Fixed value M [Nm]

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 1-535

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
Parameters
Parameters for data sets

1-536  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
Function diagrams 2
Inhalt

2.1 Function diagrams - Contents 2-539

2.2 Explanations of the function diagrams 2-546

2.3 Overviews 2-551

2.4 CU320 input/output terminals 2-570

2.5 CX32 input/output terminals 2-577

2.6 PROFIBUS 2-581

2.7 Internal control/status words 2-604

2.8 Sequence control 2-616

2.9 Motor holding brake 2-619

2.10 Safety Integrated 2-624

2.11 Setpoint channel 2-630

2.12 Configuration without setpoint 2-640

2.13 Servo control 2-642

2.14 Vector control 2-668

2.15 Technology controller 2-694

2.16 Signals and monitoring functions 2-698

2.17 Faults and alarms 2-704

2.18 Test sockets 2-709

2.19 Data sets 2-711

2.20 Basic Infeed 2-714

2.21 Active Infeed 2-721

2.22 Terminal Board 30 (TB30) 2-732

2.23 Communication Board CAN 10 (CBC10) 2-737

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 2-537

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
Function diagrams

2.24 Terminal Module 31 (TM31) 2-742

2.25 Terminal Module 41 (TM41) 2-753

2.26 Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) 2-755

2-538  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Function diagrams
Function diagrams - Contents

2.1 Function diagrams - Contents

2.2 Explanations of the function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-546

1020 – Explanation of the symbols (Part 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-547
1021 – Explanation of the symbols (Part 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-548
1024 – Explanation of the symbols (Part 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-549
1025 – Handling BICO-Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-550

2.3 Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-551

1510 – CU320 Input-/Output terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-552
1512 – CX32 Input-/Output terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-553
1520 – PROFIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-554
1530 – Internal control/status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-555
1550 – Setpoint channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-556
1580 – Servo encoder evaluation functions (position, speed, temperature) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-557
1590 – Servo Closed-loop speed control and V/f control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-558
1610 – Servo Generating the torque limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-559
1630 – Servo Closed loop current control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-560
1680 – Vector Encoder evaluation functions (position, speed, temperature) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-561
1690 – Vector V/f-control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-562
1700 – Vector Closed-loop speed control and formation of the torque limits . . . . . . . . . . . 2-563
1710 – Vector Closed loop current control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-564
1750 – Monitoring functions, faults, alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-565
1773 – Basic Infeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-566
1774 – Active Infeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-567
1790 – Terminal Board 30 (TB30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-568
1840 – Terminal Module 31 (TM31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-569

2.4 CU320 input/output terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-570

2100 – Input/output terminals - digital inputs electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3) . . . . . . . . . 2-571
2120 – Digital inputs electrically isolated (DI 4 ... DI 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-572
2130 – Digital inputs/outputs bidirectional (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-573
2131 – Digital inputs/outputs bidirectional (DI/DO 10 ... DI/DO 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-574
2132 – Digital inputs/outputs bidirectional (DI/DO 12 ... DI/DO 13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-575
2133 – Digital inputs/outputs bidirectional (DI/DO 14 ... DI/DO 15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-576

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 2-539

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
Function diagrams
Function diagrams - Contents

2.5 CX32 input/output terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-577

2220 – Digital inputs/outputs bidirectional (DI 0 ... DI 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-578
2230 – Digital inputs/outputs bidirectional (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-579
2231 – Digital inputs/outputs bidirectional (DI/DO 10 ... DI/DO 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-580

2.6 PROFIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-581

2410 – PROFIBUS address, diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-582
2420 – Telegrams and Process data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-583
2440 – Standard/manufacturer-specific receive telegram interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-584
2442 – STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-585
2443 – STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-586
2444 – STW2 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-587
2445 – STW2 control word interconnection (p2038 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-588
2446 – A_STW1 control word B_Infeed sequence control interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-589
2447 – A_STW1 control word A_Infeed sequence control interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-590
2450 – Standard/manufacturer-specific send telegram interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-591
2452 – ZSW1 Status word interconnection (p2038 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-592
2453 – ZSW1 Status word interconnection (p2038 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-593
2454 – ZSW2 Status word interconnection (p2038 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-594
2455 – ZSW2 Status word interconnection (p2038 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-595
2456 – MELDW Status word interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-596
2458 – A_ZSW1 status word B_Infeed status word interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-597
2459 – A_ZSW1 status word A_Infeed status word interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-598
2460 – Receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-599
2470 – Send telegram free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-600
2472 – Status words free interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-601
2481 – Receive telegram free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-602
2483 – Send telegram free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-603

2.7 Internal control/status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-604

2501 – Control word sequence control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-605
2503 – Status word sequence control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-606
2505 – Control word setpoint channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-607
2520 – Control word speed controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-608
2522 – Status word speed controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-609
2534 – Status word monitoring functions 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-610

2-540  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Function diagrams
Function diagrams - Contents

2536 – Status word monitoring functions 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-611

2537 – Status word monitoring functions 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-612
2546 – Control word, faults/alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-613
2548 – Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-614
2578 – Control word command data set selection (CDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-615

2.8 Sequence control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-616

2610 – Control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-617
2614 – Missing enable signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-618

2.9 Motor holding brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-619

2701 – Basic brake control (r0108.14 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-620
2704 – Expanded brake control/standstill detection (r0108.14 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-621
2707 – Expanded brake control/opening and closing a brake (r0108.14 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-622
2711 – Expanded brake control/signal outputs (r0108.14 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-623

2.10 Safety Integrated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-624

2800 – Parameter manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-625
2802 – Monitoring functions and faults/alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-626
2804 – Status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-627
2810 – Safe standstill (SH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-628
2814 – Safe brake control (SBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-629

2.11 Setpoint channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-630

3010 – Fixed speed setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-631
3020 – Motorized potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-632
3030 – Main/supplementary setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-633
3040 – Direction of rotation limitating and direction of rotation reversal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-634
3050 – Suppression bandwidth and speed limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-635
3060 – Basic ramp-function generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-636
3070 – Expanded ramp-function generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-637
3080 – Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-638
3090 – Dynamic Servo Control (DSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-639

2.12 Configuration without setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-640

3095 – Generating speed limits (r0108.8 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-641

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 2-541

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Function diagrams
Function diagrams - Contents

2.13 Servo control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-642

4704 – Position and temperture sensing encoder 1 ... 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-643
4710 – Speed actual value and rotor position sensing for motor encoder (encoder 1) . . . . 2-644
4720 – Encoder interface, receive signals, encoders 1 ... 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-645
4730 – Encoder interface, send signals, encoders 1 ... 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-646
4735 – Reference mark search with equivalent zero mark, encoders 1 ... 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-647
4740 – Measuring probe evaluation, measured value memory, encoders 1 ... 3 . . . . . . . . 2-648
5020 – Speed setpoint filter and speed pre-control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-649
5030 – Reference model/pre-control balancing/setpoint n_ctrl. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-650
5040 – Speed control with encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-651
5050 – Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-652
5060 – Torque setpoint, changeover control type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-653
5210 – Speed control without encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-654
5300 – V/f control for diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-655
5490 – Speed control configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-656
5492 – Control status word 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-657
5493 – Control status word 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-658
5610 – Torque limiting/reduction/interpolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-659
5620 – Motoring/regenerating torque limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-660
5630 – Upper/lower torque limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-661
5640 – Mode changeover, power/current limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-662
5650 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-663
5710 – Current setpoint filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-664
5714 – Iq and Id controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-665
5722 – Field current setpoint, flux controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-666
5730 – Interface to the motor module (gating/control signals, current actual values) . . . . . 2-667

2.14 Vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-668

6004 – Raw signal and temperature sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-669
6010 – Speed actual value and rotor position sensing, motor encoder (encoder 1) . . . . . . 2-670
6030 – Speed setpoint, droop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-671
6031 – Pre-control balancing Reference/acceleration modell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-672
6040 – Speed control with/without encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-673
6050 – Kp_n-/Tn_n adaption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-674
6060 – Torque setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-675
6220 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-676

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 2-542

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Function diagrams
Function diagrams - Contents

6300 – V/f characteristic and voltage boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-677

6310 – Resonance damping and slip compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-678
6320 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-679
6489 – V/f control status word 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-680
6490 – Speed control configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-681
6491 – Flux control configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-682
6492 – Control status word 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-683
6493 – Control status word 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-684
6630 – Upper/lower torque limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-685
6640 – Current/power/torque limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-686
6710 – Current setpoint filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-687
6714 – Iq and Id controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-688
6722 – Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-689
6723 – Field weakening controller, flux controller for induction motors (p0300 = 1) . . . . . . 2-690
6724 – Field weakening controller for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-691
6730 – Interface to the motor module for induction motors (p0300 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-692
6731 – Interface to the motor module for a synchronous motor (p0300 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-693

2.15 Technology controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-694

7950 – Fixed values (r0108.16 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-695
7954 – Motorized potentiometer (r0108.16 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-696
7958 – Control (r0108.16 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-697

2.16 Signals and monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-698

8010 – Speed messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-699
8012 – Torque messages/signals, motor locked/stalled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-700
8013 – Load monitoring (r0108.17 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-701
8014 – Thermal monitoring, power modulel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-702
8016 – Thermal motor monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-703

2.17 Faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-704

8060 – Fault buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-705
8065 – Alarm buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-706
8070 – Fault/alarm trigger word (r2129) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-707
8075 – Fault/alarm configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-708

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 2-543

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Function diagrams
Function diagrams - Contents

2.18 Test sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-709

8134 – Test sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-710

2.19 Data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-711

8565 – Drive Data Set, DDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-712
8570 – Encoder Data Set, EDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-713

2.20 Basic Infeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-714

8720 – Control word, sequence control infeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-715
8726 – Status word, sequence control infeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-716
8732 – Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-717
8734 – Missing enable signals, line contactor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-718
8750 – Interface to the basic infeed power module (gating signals, actual values) . . . . . . . 2-719
8760 – Signals and monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-720

2.21 Active Infeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-721

8920 – Control word, sequence control infeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-722
8926 – Status word, sequence control infeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-723
8928 – Status word infeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-724
8932 – Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-725
8934 – Missing enable signals, line contactor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-726
8940 – Controller modulation depth reserve/controller DC link voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-727
8946 – Power pre-control/current controller/gating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-728
8950 – Interface to the active infeed power module (gating signals, actual values) . . . . . . 2-729
8960 – Messages/signals and monitoring functions, line supply voltage monitoring . . . . . . 2-730
8964 – Messages/signals and monitoring functions, line supply freq. and Vdc monitoring . 2-731

2.22 Terminal Board 30 (TB30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-732

9100 – Electrically isolated digital inputs (DI 0 ... DI 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-733
9102 – Electrically isolated digital outputs (DO 0 ... DO 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-734
9104 – Analog inputs (AI 0 ... AI 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-735
9106 – Analog outputs (AO 0 ... AO 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-736

2.23 Communication Board CAN 10 (CBC10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-737

9204 – Receive telegram free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-738
9206 – Receive telegram Predef. Conn. Set (p8744 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-739
9208 – Send telegram free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-740
9210 – Send telegram Predef. Conn. Set (p8744 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-741

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 2-544

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Function diagrams
Function diagrams - Contents

2.24 Terminal Module 31 (TM31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-742

9550 – Electrically isolated digital inputs (DI 0 ... DI 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-743
9552 – Electrically isolated digital inputs (DI 4 ... DI 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-744
9556 – Electrically isolated digital relay outputs (DO 0 ... DO 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-745
9560 – Bidirectional digital inputs/outputs (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-746
9562 – Bidirectional digital inputs/outputs (DI/DO 10 ... DI/DO 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-747
9566 – Analog input 0 (AI 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-748
9568 – Analog input 1 (AI 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-749
9572 – Analog outputs (AO 0 ... AO 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-750
9576 – Temperature evaluation KTY/PTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-751
9577 – Sensor monitoring KTY/PTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-752

2.25 Terminal Module 41 (TM41) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-753

9674 – Incremental encoder emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-754

2.26 Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-755

9880 – Analog inputs (AI 0 ... AI 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-756
9886 – Temperature evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-757
9887 – Sensor monitoring KTY/PTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-758

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 2-545

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Function diagrams
Explanations of the function diagrams

2.2 Explanations of the function diagrams

Function diagrams

1020 – Explanation of the symbols (Part 1) 2-547

1021 – Explanation of the symbols (Part 2) 2-548

1024 – Explanation of the symbols (Part 3) 2-549

1025 – Handling BICO-Technology 2-550

2-546  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Parameter Connectors Binectors Connectors/binectors
Picture 2-1 Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Parameter name [Units] Monitoring parameter Parameter name

Parameter name Parameter name Binector input BI with index
rxxxx [x..y] (parameter may appear multiple rxxxx
pxxxx[y...z] Connector input CI with Connector/binector output CO/BO
times). pxxxx[y...z] range [y...z] and factory rxxxx
(xxxx [y]) index range [y...z] setting (Def.x) with
(Def.x)
Parameter name [Units] bit x. Cross references between charts
1020 – Explanation of the symbols (Part 1)

Monitoring parameter with Parameter name

Index name
rxxxx[x]
index( parameter may appear a Index name Parameter name Symbol Meaning
multiple number of times). Bit name Binector input BI
pxxxx[y] Connector input CI with with index [y] and factory Signal path The function charts are sub-divided into
(xxxx [x]) index [y] pxxxx[y] setting (Def.x) with signal paths 1...8 for faster orientation.
[aaaa.b] (Def.x) bit x. Text Text = Unique signal designation
Parameter name Setting parameter [aaaa.b] aaaa = Signal goes to the target chart aaaa
from ... to [Units] (if the parameter appears a b = Signal goes to signal path b
Parameter name [Units] Connector output CO with Parameter name Binector output BO (the
multiple number of times, then
pxxxx[y...z] (Def)
chart references are specified). rxxxx[y...z] [dimension units] and index range rxxxx parameter may appear Text Text = Unique signal designation
[y...z] multiple times). [cccc.d] cccc = Comes from source chart cccc
(the parameter may appear d = Signal comes from signal path d
[aaaa.b] multiple times). To "function chart name" [aaaa.b] = for binectors.
Setting parameter with index Parameter name
Parameter name
Index name (if the parameter appears a Parameter name [Units]
Connector output CO [dimension
Bit name
Binector output BO with Cross references for control bits
multiple number of times, then Index name rxxxx.yy
from ... to [Units] units] and with index [y] (the bit yy Symbol Meaning
pxxxx[y] (Def) chart references are specified). rxxxx[y] parameter may appear multiple (the parameter may appear
times). multiple times). pxxxx pxxxx = original parameter of signal
aaaa = signal comes from the source chart aaaa
[aaaa.b]
b = Signal comes from signal path b

Data sets Information on parameters, binectors, connectors Sampling times

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning
Parameter name Parameter name (max. 18 characters) Setting parameter with factory
pxxxx[Y] (ZZZ.ZZ µs)
pxxxx[C] setting to select the time slice
Parameter belongs to the command data [Units] [dimension units] (refer to [xxxx]).
set (CDS).
rxxxx[y] or "r" = monitoring parameter. These parameters are read-only p0115[y] (Drive Object) Time slice depending on the pre-

Explanations of the function diagrams

rxxxx[y...z] "xxxx" stands for a four-digit parameter number setting p0112 of the drive object.
pxxxx[D] Parameter belongs to the drive data set Refer to [1020.7]
rxxxx[y] .ww "[y]" specifies the valid index, "[y...z]" specifies the applicable index range
(DDS).
rxxxx.ww ".ww" specifies the bit number (e.g. 0...15). p0115[y] (Motor Modules) Time slide depending on the rated
pulse frequency of the motor
pxxxx[y] or "p" = setting parameter. These parameters can be changed. Refer to [1020.7] module.
pxxxx[E]
Parameter belongs to the encoder data pxxxx[y...z] "xxxx" stands for a four-digit parameter number, "[y]" specifies the applicable index,
set (EDS). pxxxx[y] .ww "[y...z]" specifies the applicable index range". PROFIBUS sampling time a) If clock-cycle synchronous,
then bus cycle time alias DP
pxxxx.ww ww" specifies the bit number (e.g. 0...15). Refer to [1020.7] cycle (Tdp).
pxxxx[M] b) Otherwise 4000.00 µs.
Parameter belongs to the motor data set from ... to Value range
Background There is no fixed sampling time for
(MDS).

Function diagrams
(xxxx[y]) Parameter number (xxxx) and Index number [y]. this function. The processing is
Refer to [1020.7] made in the background. The
pxxxx[P] Parameter belongs to the power module (Def) Factory setting cycle time depends on the com-
data set (PDS) putational load of the control unit.
(Def.w) Factory setting with bit number as prefix. A static state is displayed here.
Not relevant
The sampling time data is not
[aaaa.b] Chart references for setting parameters that occur a multiple number of times. Refer to [1020.7] relevant.
2-547

[Function chart number, signal path]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: All objects fp_S01_1020_en.vsd Function diagram
- 1020 -
General - explanation of the symbols (part 1) 13.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Symbols for computational and closed-loop
Pre-assigned binectors and connectors Symbols for logic functions
Picture 2-2
control functions
S
2-548

Explanations of the function diagrams

Function diagrams
1 Logical inversion
% fixed setpoints 1 y
Threshold value switch 1 / 0
x
Limit value monitor, outputs at y a logical
AND element with logical 0 "1" if x < s.
&
1021 – Explanation of the symbols (Part 2)

inversion of an input signal S

Fixed value_%_1
-10 000.00...10 000.00 %
p2900[D] (0.00)
p2900[D] Threshold value switch 0 / 1
x 1 y
R/S flip-flop Limit value monitor, outputs at y a logical
0 "1" if x > s.
S Q
S = setting input
Fixed value_%_2 pxxxx
R = reset input
-10 000.00...10 000.00 %
p2901[D] R Q
Q = non-inverted output
Changeover switch
p2901[D] (0.00)
Q = inverted output 0 The switch position acc. to factory setting is
shown.
(In this case, switch position 1 in the state
1 when supplied.)
Symbols for computational and closed-
Fixed speed values loop control functions Limiter
LU MLU

x y Sign reversal x is limited to the upper limit LU and the

Fixed value_n_1 -1 x y lower limit LL and output at y.
-210 000.000...210 000.000 RPM y = -x The digital signals MLU and MLL have the
pxxxx[D]
pxx20[D] (0.000) value "1", if the upper or lower limit is
LL MLL active.

x y Absolute value generator

Fixed value_n_2
Sample & Hold element
-210 000.000...210 000.000 RPM Absolute value generator: y = |x|
pxxxx[D] SET Sampling and hold element.
pxx21[D] (0.000)
y = x if SET = 1
x S&H y
(this is not retentively saved at POWER
x1 Divider OFF)
y
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

x2 x1 Differentiator
y= dx
x2 x y dx
dt y=
Fixed torque values dt
Comparator
x y
>0
Output y = a logical "1", if the analog
signal x > 0, i.e. is positive
Fixed Value_M_1 Symbol for monitoring
-100 000.00...100 000.00 Nm
p2930[D]
p2930[D] (0.00)
Axxxxx Monitoring
Monitoring or
Fxxxxx Located at the lower right in the Sheet.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: All objects fp_S01_1021_en.vsd Function diagram
- 1021 -
General - explanation of the symbols (part 2) 13.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Switch-on delay

Picture 2-3
pxxxx
x y PT1 element 2nd Order filter (bandstop/general filter)
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

T 0
x T 0 y Natural frequency, numerator Damping, numerator
pxxxx fn_z D_z
pxxxx pxxxx pxxxx

The digital signal x must have the value "1" without any interruption
1024 – Explanation of the symbols (Part 3)

y
during time T before output y changes to "1".

T T T T
|y| fs
t
x x y
Delay element, first Order. f_B
pxxxx = time constant f
y 2nd Order filter

Switch-out delay
pxxxx
x y
0 T Natural frequency, denominator Damping, denominator
x 0 T y fn_n D_n
pxxxx pxxxx
pxxxx
The digital signal x must have the value "0" without interruption during
time T before output y changes to "1".

T T T T PT2 lowpass
Used as bandstop filter
x
Natural frequency, denominator Damping, denominator
fn_n D_n - center frequency fs: fn_z = fs
y
pxxxx pxxxx fn_n = fs

Explanations of the function diagrams

- bandwidth f_B: D_z = 0
Delay (switch-in and switch-out) f _B
pxxxx pxxxx D_n =
x y 2 • fs
|y|
T1 T2
D Transfer function when used as general filter
x T1 T2 y x y

pxxxx pxxxx fn
The digital signal x must have the value "1" without interruption during
f
s .
2 2 D_z .
time T1 or must have the value "0" during time T2 before output y + s + 1
2 p fn_z 2 p fn_z

Function diagrams
changes its signal state. Transfer function H(s) =
T1 T1 T2 T2 s .
2 2 D_n
.
1 + s + 1
2 p fn_n 2 p fn_n
H(s) =
s .
2 2 D_n
.
x + s + 1
2 p fn_n 2 p fn_n
2-549

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: All objects fp_S01_1024_en.vsd Function diagram
- 1024 -
General - explanation of the symbols (part 3) 15.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Handling BICO technology
Picture 2-4
2-550

Explanations of the function diagrams

Function diagrams
Binectors are binary signals that can be freely interconnected (BO = Binector Output).
Binector: r0723.15
The represent a bit of a "BO:" display parameter (e.g. bit 15 from r0723).

Connector: r0723 Connectors are "analog signals" that can be freely interconnected (e.g. percentage quantities, speeds or torques).
1025 – Handling BICO-Technology

Connectors are simultaneously "CO:" Display parameters (CO = Connector Output).

Parameterization
: the signal destination (target), the required binector or connector is selected using the appropriate parameter:
At
"BI:" parameter for binectors (BI = Binector Input)
or
"CI:" parameter for connectors (CI = Connector Input)

Example:
The main setpoint for the speed controller (CI: p1070) should be received from the output of the motorized potentiometer
(CO: r1050) and the command "jog" (BI: p1055) from digital input DI 0 (BO: r0722.0, terminal X122.1) on the CU320.

Digital input 1 Control bit 8 r0967.8 Setpoint channel

DI 0
p1055 [C]
X122.1 r0722.0 722.0

[2100] [2501]

Motorized potentiometer
2
Main setpoint
p1070[C] Speed controller
Raise
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

r1050 1050
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Lower

Jog setpoint 1

[3020] [3030]

Parameterizing steps:
1 p1055[0] = 722.0 Terminal X122.1 acts as "Jog bit 0".

2 p1070[0] = 1050 The output of the motorized potentiometer acts as main setpoint for the speed controller.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: All objects fp_S01_1025_en.vsd Function diagram
- 1025 -
General - Handling BICO technology 09.12.03 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Function diagrams
Overviews

2.3 Overviews

Function diagrams

1510 – CU320 Input-/Output terminals 2-552

1512 – CX32 Input-/Output terminals 2-553

1520 – PROFIBUS 2-554

1530 – Internal control/status words 2-555

1550 – Setpoint channel 2-556

1580 – Servo encoder evaluation functions (position, speed, temperature) 2-557

1590 – Servo Closed-loop speed control and V/f control 2-558

1610 – Servo Generating the torque limits 2-559

1630 – Servo Closed loop current control 2-560

1680 – Vector Encoder evaluation functions (position, speed, temperature) 2-561

1690 – Vector V/f-control 2-562

1700 – Vector Closed-loop speed control and formation of the torque limits 2-563

1710 – Vector Closed loop current control 2-564

1750 – Monitoring functions, faults, alarms 2-565

1773 – Basic Infeed 2-566

1774 – Active Infeed 2-567

1790 – Terminal Board 30 (TB30) 2-568

1840 – Terminal Module 31 (TM31) 2-569

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 2-551

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 CU320 Simulation for DI 0...DI 15
Picture 2-5 1 = Simulation on
2-552

Overviews
Function diagrams
p0795.0...15
r0721.0...15
+24 V DC to the
~ next device 0

= r0722.0...15 1 r0723.0...15
1510 – CU320 Input-/Output terminals

+ M 1
X124
+ +24 V
+ Simulation signals
M M p0796.0...15
M M

X122 4 digital inputs, electrically isolated

1 DI 0 r0722.0 1 r0723.0
2 DI 1
3 DI 2
... ...
4 DI 3 r0722.3 1 r0723.3
5 M1 [2100]
<2> 6 M
7 p0728.8 4 digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional
DI/DO 8
8 DI/DO 9 <1> 0
9
r0722.8 1 r0723.8
M p0738
10 DI/DO 10 <1> 1
... ...
11 DI/DO 11 <1> [2130]
12 M p0728.11 ... ... ...
0
r0722.11 1 r0723.11
p0741
1
[2131]

X132 4 digital inputs, electrically isolated

1 DI4 r0722.4 1 r0723.4
2
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

DI5
... ...
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

3 DI 6
4 DI 7 r0722.7 1 r0723.7
5 M2 [2120]
<2> 6 M
7 p0728.12 4 digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional
DI/DO 12
8 DI/DO 13 <1> 0
9
r0722.12 1 r0723.12
M p0742
10 DI/DO 14 <1> 1
... ...
11 DI/DO 15 <1> [2132]
12 M p0728.15 ... ... ...
0
r0722.15 1 r0723.15
<1> Fast measuring probe inputs. p0745
<2> Jumper open, electrical isolation for DI 0...3 and DI 4...7 1
[2133]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: CU320 fp_S01_1510_en.vsd Function diagram
- 1510 -
Overviews - CU320 inputs/output terminals 15.12.03 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 CX32 Simulation for DI 0...DI 11
Picture 2-6 <3> 1 = simulation on
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

p0795.0...11
r0721.0...11
+24 V DC to the
~ next unit 0

= r0722.0...11 1 r0723.0...11
1512 – CX32 Input-/Output terminals

+ M 1
X124
+ + 24 V
+ Simulation signals
M M p0796.0...11
M M

X122 4 electrically isolated digital inputs

1 DI 0 r0722.0 1 r0723.0
2 DI 1
3 DI 2
... ...
4 DI 3 r0722.3 1 r0723.3
5 M1 [2220]
<2> 6 M
7 p0728.8 4 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs
DI/DO 8
8 DI/DO 9 <1> 0
9
r0722.8 1 r0723.8
M p0738
10 DI/DO 10 <1> 1
... ...
11 DI/DO 11 <1> [2230]
12 M p0728.11 ... ... ...
0
r0722.11 1 r0723.11
p0741
1
[2231]

Function diagrams
<1> Fast measuring probe inputs.

Overviews
<2> Jumper open, electrical isolation for DI 0...3 and DI 4...7
<3> Can only be used in conjunction with the SIMOTION D
control or SINUMERIK NCU710.
2-553

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: CX32 fp_S01_1512_en.vsd Function diagram
- 1512 -
Overviews - CX32 inputs/output terminals 05.11.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Slave address, diagnostics Interconnecting the permanently assigned receive telegrams. Receive telegram

Picture 2-7
Slave address
p0918 Signal Description ...
Interconnectio
2-554

Overviews
Function diagrams
n

... ... ...

LED
... ... ...
1520 – PROFIBUS

Axxxxx
Monitoring
Fxxxxx Permanently
assigned telegrams [2440] ... [2445] Drive
Diagnostics rxxxx n
Interconnecting the permanently assigned send telegrams

Signal Description Interconnectio

[2410]
n
Selects the telegram type
contents of standard/manufacturer-specific telegrams ... ... ...
p0922
... ... ...
Signal assignment

... [2450] ... [2456]

2 Signal x Interconnecting the free receive telegram
3
4 PZD 1
... PZD 2
Send telegram X126
... .. PROFIBUS
Signal y
102 ..
103 ..
...

PZD 16
999 Free telegram BICO
[2460] [2481]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

[2420] Interconnecting the free send telegram

PZD 1 Drive
n
PZD 2

.
.
.

PZD 16

[2470] [2472] [2483]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: CU320 fp_S01_1520_en.vsd Function diagram
- 1520 -
Overviews - PROFIBUS 16.03.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Sequence control Monitoring functions CDS, command data sets
Picture 2-8
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

r0898 r2197 r0836

0 0 0
STW sequence ZSW monitoring STWCDS selection
control functions 1
15 15 15
1530 – Internal control/status words

[2501] [2534] [2578]

r0899
r2198
0
ZSW sequence 0
control ZSW monitoring
15 functions 2
15
[2502]
[2536]
Setpoint channel
r2199

STW3 r1198 0
ZSW monitoring
0
STW setpoint functions 3
15
channel [2537]
15
[2505]

Speed controller Faults/alarms

r1406 r2138
0 0
STW STW faults/alarms
n-controller
15 15
[2520] [2546]

r1407 r2139
0 0
ZSW ZSW faults/alarms 1
n-controller
15 15

Function diagrams
[2522] [2548]

r2135
0
ZSW faults/alarms 2

Overviews
15
2-555

[2548]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: All objects fp_S01_1530_en.vsd Function diagram
- 1530 -
Overview - internal control/status words 31.03.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[1] (125.00 µs) p0115[3] (250.00 µs)

Picture 2-9 Basic ramp-function generator All other functions

2-556

Overviews
Function diagrams
Jog 1
r0898.8
Jog 2
1550 – Setpoint channel

r1024
r0898.9
Main setpoint
p1070 0 0
+
Additional setpoint
+ Setpoint after
RFG
0 1 setpoint
[3010] Fixed speed setpoints limiting
p1075 n_set_1 at the input

1 0
+/- r1114

raise Jog setpoint 1 pos

p1058
1 1 neg
Jog setpoint 2
p1059 (-1)

r1050 [3030] Main/supplementary setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging [3040] Direction of rotating limiting/changeover [3050] Skip (suppression) bandwidth and speed
limiting
r1119
lower

RFG selection RFG n_set at the output

p1115 r1150
[3020] Motorized potentiometer

n_set_4 p1155
0 n_ctrl n_set sum
+
n_pre-ctrl_1 r1170
n_cmd speed pre-control signal +
p1430 1 + [1590.1]
p1160
[5020.1] [3060] Basic ramp-function
KPC
p1191 generator r1438
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

+
Kp
– n_act
x,y x
y n_set DSC ZSW r1199
x_exc
p1190 [5020.4]
+ + + – n_set_5
Ramp-function
t generator M_limit
Interpolator tracking
from DSC position
PROFIBUS controller
[3070] Expanded ramp-function generator
Deadtime [3080] Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking
element
x_act
Simulate ramp-function generator
[3090] Dynamic Servo Control (DSC)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_1550_en.vsd Function diagram
- 1550 -
Overviews - setpoint channel 23.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Position sensing for encoder n (n = 1, 2, 3) Fault/ alarm Speed actual value and rotor position sensing for motor encoder (encoder 1)

Picture 2-10 1580 – Servo encoder evaluation functions (position, speed, temperature)
messages
Encoders 1, 2, 3 Transformat_angle
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Position counter F31100-A33904 Rotor

Fine resolution position r0094
Position actual value 1 sensing
+ n_act motor encoder
~
SMx x2n III 31 n 0 r0482[n-1]
- r0061
Fine resolution Gn_XIST1

Temp. ϑ from sensor n

p0400...
x2n
III r0021
x absolute Fine
x2n Position actual
resolution n_act smooth
Error value 2 n_act_measurement
Sequence control r0063
Reference mark position r0483[n-1]
for Gn_XIST2 n_act calculation
Measuring probe position Gn_XIST2
from the measured Encoderless (sensorless) closed-loop control
value memory
[4710]
[4704]

Measuring probe evaluation for encoder n

Control word Gn_STW for encoder n Status word Gn_ZSW for encoder n Control
p0480[n-1] r0487[n-1] r0487[n-1] DI 9 X_IST
0 0 DI 10
SET
1 1 DI 11
DI 13 SET
DI 14
SET
DI 15
15 15
Measuring probe SET
[4720] [4730]
signals from the 2 from 6 selection
EDS Encoder Data Sets 4 measured value
"fast" digital inputs
3 encoder p0187...p0189 [2130...2133] memory for XIST2
data sets
[4740]

EDS[0] 0 p0400...p4025
Parameters,
EDS[1] 1 encoder 1
Parameters,

Function diagrams
EDS[2] 2 encoder 2
Parameters,
encoder 3

Overviews
No encoder 99
2-557

[8570]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_1580_en.vsd Function diagram
- 1580 -
Overview - servo encoder evaluation functions (position, speed, temperature) 15.07.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Closed-loop speed control, servo [5050] Kp_n and Tp_n adaptation
1538
Forming the
Picture 2-11 1590 – Servo Closed-loop speed control and V/f control
with encoder Kp adaptation Tn adaptation
torque limits
2-558

Overviews
Function diagrams
1539

[5620]...[5640]

Torque setpoint
n_ctrl n_set n_set after n_act > torque pre-
sum Kp n_ctrl p1404 p1317
filter control
r1170 r0062 PI_output
0 M_set before
[1550.8] r1480 21 M_limit M_set_6
[5040.8]
n_pre-ctrl_1 Reference r1509
1
p1430 Tn [1630.1]
model
20
(0) n_pre-ctrl_2
Pre-control
balancing
[5020] Speed setpoint filter Integrator
and speed pre-control [5610] Torque limiting
control

[5030] Speed limiting [5040] Speed controller

r1438
n_act smooth
Sampling times:
Actual speed value n_act measured
Speed actual value sensing r0063
n_act calculated 1000.00 µs Adaptation
[4710]
p0115[1] (125.00 µs) Closed-loop
speed control
n_ctrl n_set
p0115[0] (125.00 µs) Closed-loop
r1438 current control
n_set after filter M_set_4
Acceleration
r0062 r1480
model >0
[5210.7] [5730.1] Uq
[1630.5]
Ud
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

[5210] Closed-loop speed control, servo without encoder 0

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

[5060] Setpoint input, changeover of the closed-loop control type

n U

f p1400 r1407
f
. .
Ramp-function generator . .
[5300] V/f open-loop control for diagnostics . .

[5490] Closed-loop speed [2522] Status word, speed controller

control, configuration

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_1590_en.vsd Function diagram
- 1590 -
Overview - servo closed-loop speed control and V/f open-loop control 30.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Mode torque limiting For synchronous motor 1000.00 µs

Picture 2-12 1610 – Servo Generating the torque limits

Power limits generating
Torque limit input [5490.7] p1400.4
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

For induction motor p0115[1] (125.00 µs)

M_max_upper/mot M_max_upper/mot tot

M
0 M_max upper effective
2 1 p1522 r1534 [Nm] Iq_max_1 [A] [Nm]
r1538
n
M_max_upper/mot scal 1
p1528 Effective
torque
Torque limits
limits
upper/lower Power limits [5610.4]
motoring To the closed-
loop speed
M_max_lower/gen M_max_lower/gen tot control
M
0 M_max lower effective
p1523 r1535 [Nm] Iq_min_1 [A] [Nm]
r1539
n
M_max_lower/gen scal 1
3 4
p1529
Compatible to
MASTERDRIVES &
MICROMASTER
M Power limiting Current limiting
[5630] Upper/lower torque limit
2 1 Iq_max
n
[5640] Mode changeover, power/current
limiting
M_max_upper/mot M_max_upper/mot tot
M Stall power P_stall
1 p1522 r1534
[5730.1]
From the The 4 quadrants
n M_max_upper/mot scal
closed- Torque factor M2Iq
3 p1528 M loop M
Torque limits current [5730.4]
motoring/ control Max. torque-generating current Iq_max total +
regenerating n
[5722.8] 2 1
3 4
M_max_lower/gen M_max_lower/gen tot Reverse, Forwards,
M generating motoring
p1523 r1535
2 – + n
n

Function diagrams
M_max_lower/gen scal
4 reverse, Forwards,
p1529 motoring generating
Compatible to
SIMODRIVE 3 4

Overviews
[5620] Motoring/generating torque limit –
2-559

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_1610_en.vsd Function diagram
- 1610 -
Overview - servo forming the torque limits 30.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Picture 2-13 1630 – Servo Closed loop current control
Motor module
2-560

Overviews
Function diagrams
Torque-generating Iq controller
M_set total current Iq_set_3 Uq_set_2 |U|
Iq
r0079 r0077 r1733
+ –
[1590.8]
Trans-
r0072
Adaptation Kp
M2Iq Output voltage [V]

~
M

[5710] Current setpoint filter

Kp U
Field generating current
Id_set_4 Ud_set_2 formation
r0075 r1732
+ –
Id controller

[5714] Current controller Motor model

Id_act IU_act
r0076 Trans- r0069[0]

Motor type
SM IV_act
Field current input Iq_act r0069[1]
synchronous motor
r0078
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

IW_act
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Limit
ASM r0069[2]
formation
Flux setpoint (input)
Induction motor

Flux controller [5730] Control signals, current actual values

[5722] Field current input, flux controller

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_1630_en.vsd Function diagram
- 1630 -
Overview - servo closed-loop current control 30.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Raw signal and temperature sensing Speed actual value and rotor position sensing for motor encoder (encoder 1)

Picture 2-14 1680 – Vector Encoder evaluation functions (position, speed, temperature)
Faults/alarms
Encoders 1, 2, 3 F31100...A33904
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Raw position signals n_act motor encoder

~
SMx x2n
only from encoder1) r0061
Fine resolution
Temperature ϑ from sensor n
[8016.1]
n_act
x2n
III smooth
Fine r0021
resolution n_act smooth
n_act_measurement
r0063
n_act calculation
Encoderless (sensorless) closed-loop control

[6010]
[6004]

Control word Gn_STW for encoder n

p0480[n-1] r0487[n-1]
0
1

15
[4720]
Encoder Data Sets (EDS)
p0187...p0189
3 encoder data sets

EDS[0] 0 p0400...p4025
Parameters,
EDS[1] 1 encoder 1
Parameters,

Function diagrams
EDS[2] 2 encoder 2
Parameters,
encoder 3

Overviews
No encoder 99
2-561

[8570]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_1680_en.vsd Function diagram
- 1680 -
Overviews - vector encoder evaluation functions (position, speed, temperature) 02.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[y] (MM)

Picture 2-15 1690 – Vector V/f-control Refer to [1020.7]

2-562

Overviews
Function diagrams
Flying restart mode Vdc_ctrl config Slip compensation Uf res_damp gain
Speed actual value
calculation
p1200 p1280 p1335 p1338
[6320] [6010] [6310] [6310]
n_ctrl n_set sum
r1170
RFG setpoint
at the input [6030.1]
+ + − Drv f_output
Ramp-function
[3050.8] r1119 r0066
generator
+ + + [6310]
[3060] I_max_ctrl f_outp
r1343 60

Motor temperature Mot. pole pair number act

Power module temperature r0313 Drv outp_f smth
[6640.2]
Power module I²t 100 ms r0024
Imax closed-loop
frequency control
Drv I_outp max
r0067
p1340 ... p1341
Current limit p0640 I_max_ctrl V_outp Voutp
[6640.2]
− + Imax closed-loop
r1344

0 voltage control

I_act abs. value p1345 ... p1346

[6714.5] r0068

Soft starting
Control mode
p1350
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

p1300 Drv V_output

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

r0072
V_boost perm –
f_set
[6730.4]
p1310 [6300.8] +
V_boost accel

p1311
[6300] Drv V_outp smth
100 ms r0025

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_1690_en.vsd Function diagram
- 1690 -
Overviews - vector V/f open-loop control 30.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 [6050] Kp_n-/Tn_n adaptation
p1511 p0115[1] (MM)

Picture 2-16 1700 – Vector Closed-loop speed control and formation of the torque limits
Kp adaptation Tn adaptation
For Kp p0115[2] (MM)
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

p1460 p1470 p1462 p1472

<1> <1> p1512
adaptation
p1514 Refer to [1020.7]
p0341 p0342
p1496
p1513
r1515
r1518
p1540
p1416 p1300
(r1407.1)

n_ctrl n_set sum n_set after filter n_ctrl n_set Kp p1501

r1170 r0062 Balancing r1438 M_set total
– – p1508 r0079
p1503

n_set I_comp Tn
Reference model p1541
r1439
Droop input p1400.3
p1488 –

[6060] Torque setpoint

[6030] Speed setpoint filter [6031] Acceleration model

p0640
Integrator control r0067
M_max upper
M-max upper/mot effective
<1> p1520 p1522 r1538
p1442 p1452 Forming the torque M_max lower
n_act motor encoder M-max lower/gen limits effective
r0061 p1521 p1523 r1539
[6040] Speed controller
p1300
p1300 (r1407.1)
(r1407.1) p1530 p1531

<1> [6630] Torque limit

n_act smooth n_pre-control [1710.1] [6640] current-power limit
r0063

Function diagrams
n_model p1400 p1401 p1405 p1408
<1>

[6490] Closed-loop speed control configuration

Overviews
[6010] Speed actual value sensing [6491] Closed-loop flux control configuration
[6492] Closed-loop control status word 1
<1> Only for closed-loop vector control without encoder.
2-563

[6492] Closed-loop control status word 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_1700_en.vsd Function diagram
- 1700 -
Overview - vector closed-loop speed control and formation of the torque limits 30.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[2] (MM)

Picture 2-17 1710 – Vector Closed loop current control

p1655 Drv V_output
Refer to [1020.7]
2-564

Overviews
Function diagrams
p1715 p1717 r0072
Vdc_act
r0070
|y|
Iq_set Modulation depth
|y| V_set
r0077 K r0074
M_set total +
f – V_angle
r0079 P
iq controller +
f +

M
Iq

[6710] Current setpoint filter p1715 p1717

V_output max Id_set

r0071 r0075
– –
– +
Field-weakening id controller
controller
V_set Id_act
I_phase
p1570 r0076 actual value
Modulation depth Transformation r0069
p1580 + + r0074
Fieldweakening
characteristic

p1610 [6714] Current controller

V_phase
p1611 <1>
actual value
Current calculation
r0089
[6718] Field weakening characteristic
[6719] Field weakening controller
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

Drv f_output
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

n_pre-control
[1700.5] r0066
+ + +
p1764 p1767

Motor model
Current model r0065
(Observer)
M
<1>
Iq
n_model

[6730] Interface to the motor module for an induction motor (p0300 = 1)

<1> Only for closed-loop vector control without encoder.
[6731] Interface to the motor module for a synchronous motor (p0300 = 2)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_1710_en.vsd Function diagram
- 1710 -
Overviews - vector closed-loop current control 30.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Picture 2-18 1750 – Monitoring functions, faults, alarms
<1> <1>
Fxxxxx
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

n_act smooth M_set total Fyyyyy III r0945 r0949 r0948 r2109 III
III
r0063 r0079
[4710] [5610] Fzzzzz System runtime
Code Value incoming outgoing No. of fault cases
Faults r0969
r0952
M_limit_max
r2169 r1538 [8060] Fault buffer
[5640] Limit value monitor

Axxxxx
M_limit_min r2122 r2124 r2123 r2125 III
Ayyyyy III
r1539
[5640]
n_max Code Value incoming outgoing Alarm counter
r2111
n_act smooth
r0063 [8065] Alarm buffer
[4710]
Motor blocked
r2929
p2128
RFG setpoint [0]
at the input
r1119
[3050]

[15]
[8010] Speed monitoring [8012] Torque monitoring

[8070] Fault/alarm trigger word

<1> <2> Changing the fault response Changing the message type
[0] p2100 p2101 [0] p2118 p2119
M_act [1] [1]
r0080
[5730.1] [19] [19]
[6714.8]
Changing the acknowledge mode
[0] p2126 p2127

Function diagrams
[1]

[8013] Load monitoring [19]

Overviews
<1> Only for SERVO, VECTOR
[8075] Fault/alarm configuration
<2> Only for p0108.17 = 1
2-565

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: All objects fp_S01_1750_en.vsd Function diagram
- 1750 -
Overview - Monitoring functions, faults, alarms 15.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Control words Status words Control unit Basic Infeed
PROFIBUS Sequence control
Picture 2-19 1773 – Basic Infeed
PROFIBUS STW1 ZSW1 L1
receive/send y Slave address L2
2-566

Overviews
Function diagrams
y Diagnostics L3
telegram Energize line contactor PE
y Interconnection of the
r0863.1
free receive and send
A_STW1 telegrams STW2 ZSW2
Telegram
370 A_ZSW1

[2446], [2458] [2410], [2460], [2470] [8720] [8726] [8732] [8734] Infeed ready to SERVO/VECTOR
r0863.0 p0864
[2610]

U1 V1 W1

Line supply voltage Thermal power module Faults and alarms Pre-charging
monitoring monitoring

!
Fxxxxx
ϑ > ϑmax Axxxxx

[8760] [8014] [8060] ... [8075]

Gating signals, actual values

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Vdc_act
r0070 Vdc measurement

DCP DCN
+ –

Vdc to the motor modules

[8750]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: B_INF fp_S01_1773_en.vsd Function diagram
- 1773 -
Overviews - basic infeed 27.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Control words Status words Control unit Active infeed
PROFIBUS Sequence control
Picture 2-20 1774 – Active Infeed
PROFIBUS STW1 ZSW1 L1
receive/send y Slave address L2
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

y Diagnostics L3
telegram Energize line contactor PE
y Interconnection of the
r0863.1
free receive and send
A_STW1 telegrams STW2 ZSW2
Telegram
370 A_ZSW1

[2447], [2459] [2410], [2460], [2470] [8920] ... [8928] [8932] [8934] Infeed ready to SERVO/VECTOR
r0863.0 p0864
[2610] U1 V1 W1
Line supply voltage Line supply frequency Thermal power module Faults and alarms
Pre-charging
monitoring and Vdc monitoring monitoring

!
Fxxxxx
ϑ > ϑmax Axxxxx

[8960] [8964] [8014] [8060] ... [8075]

DC link voltage controller Current controller Gating signals, actual values

p3511
Iq_set Usd Trans-
Vdc_set |U|
r0077 r3632
p3510 –
Active current
setpoint Usq PWM
r3633
[8940] U
p3611 formation

Reactive current setpoint

Vdc measurement
Id_set Line supply
p3610 – model

[8946] Id_act Trans-

r0076

Function diagrams
Iq_act
DCP DCN
r0078
+ –
Vdc_act formation

Overviews
r0070 Vdc to the motor modules
2-567

[8950]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF fp_S01_1774_en.vsd Function diagram
- 1774 -
Overviews - active infeed 27.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Picture 2-21 1790 – Terminal Board 30 (TB30) Simulation for DI 0...DI 3
2-568

Overviews
Function diagrams
+24 V DC to the
~ next device 1 = Simulation on p4095.0...3
=
+ M
0
r4022.0...3 1 r4023.0...3
1

X424 Simulation signals p4096.0..3

+ +24 V
+
M M
M M
4 digital inputs, electrically isolated
X481 r4022.0 1 r4023.0
1
2
1 DI 0 ... ...
DI 1
3 DI 2 r4022.3 1 r4023.3
4 DI 3 [9100]
5 DO 0 4 digital outputs, electrically isolated
6 DO 1 p4030
7 DO 2
8 8 DO 3 ... ...
p4033

[9102]

2 analog inputs +/-11 V

A
r4055[0] [%]
X482
D
10 V
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

1 1 AI 0+
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

2 A
AI 0- r4055[1] [%]
3 AI 1+ D
4 AI 1- [9104] Reference quantities for 10 V or 100 %
5 AO 0+ p200x 10 V 100 %
V 2 analog outputs +/-11 V
6 AO 0- A p4071[0] p205x 10 V 100 %
7 AO 1+
V
8 8 AO 1- D
A p4071[1]

D
[9106]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: TB30 fp_S01_1790_en.vsd Function diagram
- 1790 -
Overview - terminal board 30 (TB30) 15.12.03 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 +24 V DC to the
next device Simulation for DI 0...DI 111 = Simulation on p4095.0...11 X540

Picture 2-22 1840 – Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

1
+24 V
~ r4021.0...11 +24 V
2
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

3
= X524
0
Auxiliary voltage for
+24 V
4
+24 V
+ M + +24 V r4022.0...11 1 r4023.0..11 the digital inputs 5
+24 V
+ 1 6
+24 V
M M +24 V 7
M M +24 V 8
Simulation signals p4096.0...11
X520
1
DI 0 p4048.0
2
DI 1
r4022.0 1 r4023.0
3
4
DI 2 ... ...
DI 3 p4030 0 X542
5 M1 r4022.3 1 r4023.3
1
6
M
1 1
DO 0 NC 0
2
COM
[9550] 4 digital inputs, electrically isolated 3
NO 0
4
X530 DO 1 NC 1
1 5
DI4 p4031 0 COM
2 r4022.4 1 r4023.4 6
DI5 NO 1
3
4
DI 6 ... ... 1 1
DI 7
5 M2 r4022.7 1 r4023.7
6
M p4048.1
[9552] 4 digital inputs, electrically isolated [9556] 2 digital outputs (relay)
X522
X541 1
1
p4028.8 AO 0V+
+ p4071[0] D 2
0 AO 0-
2 r4022.8 1 r4023.8 3
DI/D0 8 AO 0A+
3 p4038 A
4
DI/D0 9
DI/D0 10 1
... ... AO 1V+
4
5
p4071[1] AO 1-
5 D 6
6
DI/D0 11
M
p4028.11 ... ... ... AO 1A+
7
0 A +Temp
r4022.11 1 r4023.11 -Temp
8
p4041
[9572] 2 analog outputs
1

[9560], [9562] 4 digital inputs/outputs Temp. KTY/PTC

r4104.0
r4105
X521 Alarm:
1 A35211 Overtemperature
AI 0+ A
2 sensor TM31
AI 0- r4055[0] [%] D

Function diagrams
3
AI 1+ D r4104.1
4 A
AI 1-
5 A Fault:
P 10
6 r4055[1] [%] F35207 Overtemperature
M
D sensor TM31

Overviews
7
N 10
8
M
[9566], [9568] 2 analog inputs [9576] Input for temperature sensor
2-569

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: TM31 fp_S01_1840_en.vsd Function diagram
- 1840 -
Overviews - terminal module 31 (TM31) 12.03.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Function diagrams
CU320 input/output terminals

2.4 CU320 input/output terminals

Function diagrams

2100 – Input/output terminals - digital inputs electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3) 2-571

2120 – Digital inputs electrically isolated (DI 4 ... DI 7) 2-572

2130 – Digital inputs/outputs bidirectional (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9) 2-573

2131 – Digital inputs/outputs bidirectional (DI/DO 10 ... DI/DO 11) 2-574

2132 – Digital inputs/outputs bidirectional (DI/DO 12 ... DI/DO 13) 2-575

2133 – Digital inputs/outputs bidirectional (DI/DO 14 ... DI/DO 15) 2-576

2-570  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 24 V DC to the next device
p0799 (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-23 2100 – Input/output terminals - digital inputs electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3) X124.M M
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

DI 0...DI 15 DI 0...DI 15
M inverted
X124.M
r0723 r0722
+
X124.+ +24 V
1 = Simulation on
X124.+ +24 V p0795.0
<1>
r0721.0
X122.1 DI 0 0 1 r0723.0

r0722.0
p0796.0
1

24 V

p0795.1
r0721.1
X122.2 DI 1 0 1 r0723.1
r0722.1
p0796.1
1

p0795.2
r0721.2
X122.3 DI 2 0 1 r0723.2

r0722.2
p0796.2
1

CU320 input/output terminals

5V
p0795.3
r0721.3
X122.4 DI 3 0 1 r0723.3

Function diagrams
r0722.3
<1> p0796.3
X122.5 M1 1
+

<1>
<1> When using the electrical isolation eliminate 24 V X122.6 M
the terminal jumper and connect the load power <1>
supply shown as a dotted line.
2-571

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: CU320 fp_S01_2100_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2100 -
CU320 input/output terminals - digital inputs are electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3) 09.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 24 V DC to the next device p0799 (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-24 2120 – Digital inputs electrically isolated (DI 4 ... DI 7) X124.M M
2-572

CU320 input/output terminals

Function diagrams
DI 0...DI 15
M inverted DI 0...DI 15
X124.M
r0723 r0722
+
X124.+ +24 V
1= Simulation on
X124.+ +24 V p0795.4
<1>
r0721.4
X132.1 DI4 0 1 r0723.4

r0722.4
p0796.4
1

24 V

p0795.5
r0721.5
X132.2 DI5 0 1 r0723.5

r0722.5
p0796.5
1

p0795.6
r0721.6
X132.3 DI 6 0 1 r0723.6

r0722.6
p0796.6
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

1
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

5V
p0795.7
r0721.7
X132.4 DI 7 0 1 r0723.7

r0722.7
<1> p0796.7
X132.5 M2 1
+

<1>
<1> When using the electrical isolation eliminate 24 V X132.6 M
the terminal jumper and connect the load power <1>
supply shown as a dotted line.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: CU320 fp_S01_2120_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2120 -
CU320 input/output terminals - digital inputs are electrically isolated (DI 4 ... DI 7) 09.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 24 V DC to the next device p0799 (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-25 2130 – Digital inputs/outputs bidirectional (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9)

X124.M M
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

CU DO status CU DI status inv CU DI status

M
X124.M r0747 r0723 r0722

+ Simulation
X124.+ +24 V p0796.8 p0795.8 (0)

1 r0723.8
X124.+ +24 V p0728.8 (0) r0721.8 1 DI/DO 8 (X122.7)
r0722.8
DI
0 DI 0
X122.7 DI/DO 8

1 24 V DI/DO 8 (X122.7) p0748.8 (0)

DO DO
r0747.8
CU S_Src DI/DO 8
0 p0738 (0)
<1>
1
1

Simulation
p0796.9 p0795.9 (0)

1 r0723.9
p0728.9 (0) r0721.9 DI 9_probe 1
[4735.1] DI/DO 9 (X122.8)
DI [4740.1] <2> r0722.9

0 DI 0
X122.8 DI/DO 9
5V
1 DI/DO 9 (X122.8) p0748.9 (0)
DO
DO r0747.9

CU320 input/output terminals

CU S_Src DI/DO 9
0 p0739 (0)
<1>
1
1

Function diagrams
X122.9 M

<1> The connection shown as dotted line is <2> Can be used as fast measuring probe inputs (refer to [4735] [4740]).
applicable when used as digital output
2-573

(p0728.x = 1).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: CU320 fp_S01_2130_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2130 -
CU320 input/output terminals - digital inputs/outputs bidirectional (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9) 10.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 24 V DC to the next device p0799 (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-26 2131 – Digital inputs/outputs bidirectional (DI/DO 10 ... DI/DO 11)
X124.M M
2-574

CU320 input/output terminals

Function diagrams
CU DO status CU DI status inv CU DI status
M
X124.M r0747 r0723 r0722

+ Simulation
X124.+ +24 V p0796.10 p0795.10 (0)

1 r0723.10
X124.+ +24 V p0728.10 (0) r0721.10 DI 10_probe 1 DI/DO 10 (X122.10)
[4735.1]
[4740.1] <2> r0722.10
DI
0 DI 0
X122.10 DI/DO 10

1 DI/DO 10 (X122.10) p0748.10 (0)

DO 24 V DO
r0747.10
CU S_Src DI/DO 11
0 p0740 (0)
<1>
1
1

Simulation
p0796.11 p0795.11 (0)

1 r0723.11
p0728.11 (0) r0721.11 DI 11_probe 1 DI/DO 11 (X122.11)
[4735.1]
DI [4740.1] <2> r0722.11

0 DI 0
X122.11 DI/DO 11
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

5V
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

1 DI/DO 11 (X122.11) p0748.11 (0)

DO DO
r0747.11
CU S_Src DI/DO 11
0 p0741 (0)
<1>
1
1

X122.12 M

<1> The connection shown as dotted line is <2> Can be used as fast measuring probe inputs (refer to [4735] [4740]).
applicable when used as digital output
(p0728.x = 1).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: CU320 fp_S01_2131_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2131 -
CU320 input/output terminals - digital inputs/outputs bidirectional (DI/DO 10 ... DI/DO 11) 10.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 24 V DC to the next device
p0799 (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-27 2132 – Digital inputs/outputs bidirectional (DI/DO 12 ... DI/DO 13)
X124.M M
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

CU DO status CU DI status inv CU DI status

M
X124.M r0742 r0723 r0722

+ Simulation
X124.+ +24 V p0796.12 p0795.12 (0)

1 r0723.12
X124.+ +24 V p0728.12 (0) r0721.12 1 DI/DO 12 (X132.7)
r0722.12
DI
0 DI 0
X132.7 DI/DO 12

1 24 V DI/DO 12 (X132.7) p0748.12 (0)

DO DO
r0747.12
CU S_Src DI/DO 12
0 p0742 (0)
<1>
1
1

Simulation
p0796.13 p0795.13 (0)

DI 13_probe 1 r0723.13
p0728.13 (0) r0721.13 [4735.1] 1 DI/DO 13 (X132.8)
[4740.1] <2> r0722.13
DI
0 DI 0
X132.8 DI/DO 13
5V
1 DI/DO 13 (X132.7) p0748.13 (0)
DO DO
r0747.13

CU320 input/output terminals

CU S_Src DI/DO 13
0 p0743 (0)
<1>
1
1

Function diagrams
X132.9 M

<1> The connection shown as dotted line is <2> Can be used as fast measuring probe inputs (refer to [4735] [4740]).
applicable when used as digital output
2-575

(p0728.x = 1).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: CU320 fp_S01_2132_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2132 -
CU320 input/output terminals - digital inputs/outputs bidirectional (DI/DO 12 ... DI/DO 13) 10.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 24 V DC to the next device
p0799 (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-28 2133 – Digital inputs/outputs bidirectional (DI/DO 14 ... DI/DO 15)
X124.M M
2-576

CU320 input/output terminals

Function diagrams
M CU DO status CU DI status inv CU DI status
X124.M
r0747 r0723 r0722
+ Simulation
X124.+ +24 V p0796.14 p0795.14 (0)

1 r0723.14
X124.+ +24 V DI 14_probe 1
p0728.14 (0) r0721.14 DI/DO 14 (X132.10)
[4735.1]
[4740.1]<2> r0722.14
DI
0 DI 0
X132.10 DI/DO 14

1 DI/DO 14 (X132.10) p0748.14 (0)

DO 24 V DO
r0747.14
CU S_Src DI/DO 14
0 p0744 (0)
<1>
1
1

Simulation
p0796.15 p0795.15 (0)

1 r0723.15
p0728.15 (0) r0721.15 DI 15_probe 1 DI/DO 15 (X132.11)
[4735.1]
<2> r0722.15
DI [4740.1]

X132.11 DI/DO 15 0 DI 0
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

5V
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

1 DI/DO 15 (X132.11) p0748.15 (0)

DO DO
r0747.15
CU S_Src DI/DO 15
0 p0745 (0)
<1>
1
1

X132.12
M

<1> The connection shown as dotted line is <2> Can be used as fast measuring probe inputs (refer to [4735] [4740]).
applicable when used as digital output
(p0728.x = 1).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: CU320 fp_S01_2133_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2133 -
CU320 input/output terminals - digital inputs/outputs bidirectional (DI/DO 14 ... DI/DO 15) 10.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Function diagrams
CX32 input/output terminals

2.5 CX32 input/output terminals

Function diagrams

2220 – Digital inputs/outputs bidirectional (DI 0 ... DI 3) 2-578

2230 – Digital inputs/outputs bidirectional (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9) 2-579

2231 – Digital inputs/outputs bidirectional (DI/DO 10 ... DI/DO 11) 2-580

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 2-577

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 24 V DC to the next unit
p0799 (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-29 2220 – Digital inputs/outputs bidirectional (DI 0 ... DI 3) X124.M M

<2>
2-578

CX32 input/output terminals

Function diagrams
DI 0...DI 3 DI 0...DI 3
M inverted
X124.M
r0723 r0722
+
X124.+ +24 V
1 = simulation on
X124.+ +24 V p0795.0
<1>
r0721.0
X122.1 DI 0 0 1 r0723.0

r0722.0
p0796.0
1

24 V

p0795.1
r0721.1
X122.2 DI 1 0 1 r0723.1
r0722.1
p0796.1
1

p0795.2
r0721.2
X122.3 DI 2 0 1 r0723.2

r0722.2
p0796.2
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

1
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

5V
p0795.3
r0721.3
X122.4 DI 3 0 1 r0723.3
r0722.3
<1> p0796.3
X122.5 M1 1
<1> When using the electrical isolation eliminate the
+

terminal jumper and connect the load power <1>

supply shown as dotted line 24 V X122.6 M
<2> Can only be used in conjunction with the SIMOTION D <1>
control or SINUMERIK NCU710.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: CX32 fp_S01_2220_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2220 -
CX32 input/output terminals - digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3) 05.11.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 24 V DC to the next unit p0799 (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-30 2230 – Digital inputs/outputs bidirectional (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9)

X124.M M <3>
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

CU DO status CU DI status inv CU DI status

M
X124.M r0747 r0723 r0722

+ Simulation
X124.+ +24 V p0796.8 p0795.8 (0)

1 r0723.8
X124.+ +24 V p0728.8 (0) r0721.8 1 DI/DO 8 (X122.7)
r0722.8
DI
0 DI 0
X122.7 DI/DO 8

1 24 V DI/DO 8 (X122.7) p0748.8 (0)

DO DO
r0747.8
CU S_src DI/DO 8
0 p0738 (0)
<1>
1
1

Simulation
p0796.9 p0795.9 (0)

1 r0723.9
p0728.9 (0) r0721.9 DI 9_probe 1
[4735.1] DI/DO 9 (X122.8)
DI [4740.1] <2> r0722.9

0 DI 0
X122.8 DI/DO 9
5V
1 DI/DO 9 (X122.8) p0748.9 (0)
DO
DO r0747.9
CU S_src DI/DO 9

CX32 input/output terminals

0 p0739 (0)
<1>
1
1

Function diagrams
X122.9 M

<1> The wiring shown as dotted line is <2> Can be used as fast measuring probe inputs (refer to [4735] [4740]).
applicable when used as digital output
<3> Can only be used in conjunction with the SIMOTION D control or SINUMERIK NCU710.
2-579

(p0728.x = 1).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: CX32 fp_S01_2230_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2230 -
CX32 input/output terminals - bidirect. digital inputs/outputs (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9) 05.11.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 24 V DC to the next unit p0799 (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-31 2231 – Digital inputs/outputs bidirectional (DI/DO 10 ... DI/DO 11)
X124.M M <3>
2-580

CX32 input/output terminals

Function diagrams
CU DO status CU DI status inv CU DI status
M
X124.M r0747 r0723 r0722

+ Simulation
X124.+ +24 V p0796.10 p0795.10 (0)

1 r0723.10
X124.+ +24 V p0728.10 (0) r0721.10 DI 10_probe 1 DI/DO 10 (X122.10)
[4735.1]
[4740.1] <2> r0722.10
DI
0 DI 0
X122.10 DI/DO 10

1 DI/DO 10 (X122.10) p0748.10 (0)

DO 24 V DO
r0747.10
CU S_Src DI/DO 11
0 p0740 (0)
<1>
1
1

Simulation
p0796.11 p0795.11 (0)

1 r0723.11
p0728.11 (0) r0721.11 DI 11_probe 1 DI/DO 11 (X122.11)
[4735.1]
DI [4740.1] <2> r0722.11

0 DI 0
X122.11 DI/DO 11
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

5V
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

1 DI/DO 11 (X122.11) p0748.11 (0)

DO DO
r0747.11
CU S_Src DI/DO 11
0 p0741 (0)
<1>
1
1

X122.12 M

<1> The wiring shown as dotted line is <2> Can be used as fast measuring probe inputs (refer to [4735] [4740]).
applicable when used as digital output
(p0728.x = 1). <3> Can only be used in conjunction with the SIMOTION D control or SINUMERIK NCU710.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: CX32 fp_S01_2231_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2231 -
CX32 input/output terminals - bidirect. digital inputs/outputs (DI/DO 10 ... DI/DO 11) 05.11.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Function diagrams
PROFIBUS

2.6 PROFIBUS

Function diagrams

2410 – PROFIBUS address, diagnostics 2-582

2420 – Telegrams and Process data 2-583

2440 – Standard/manufacturer-specific receive telegram interconnection 2-584

2442 – STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) 2-585

2443 – STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 1) 2-586

2444 – STW2 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) 2-587

2445 – STW2 control word interconnection (p2038 = 1) 2-588

2446 – A_STW1 control word B_Infeed sequence control interconnection 2-589

2447 – A_STW1 control word A_Infeed sequence control interconnection 2-590

2450 – Standard/manufacturer-specific send telegram interconnection 2-591

2452 – ZSW1 Status word interconnection (p2038 = 0) 2-592

2453 – ZSW1 Status word interconnection (p2038 = 1) 2-593

2454 – ZSW2 Status word interconnection (p2038 = 0) 2-594

2455 – ZSW2 Status word interconnection (p2038 = 1) 2-595

2456 – MELDW Status word interconnection 2-596

2458 – A_ZSW1 status word B_Infeed status word interconnection 2-597

2459 – A_ZSW1 status word A_Infeed status word interconnection 2-598

2460 – Receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 2-599

2470 – Send telegram free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 2-600

2472 – Status words free interconnection 2-601

2481 – Receive telegram free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 2-602

2483 – Send telegram free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 2-603

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 2-581

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 PROFIBUS sampling time

Picture 2-32 2410 – PROFIBUS address, diagnostics

CU-specific functions Drive-specific functions (available once for each drive object)
Refer to [1020.7]
2-582

PROFIBUS
Function diagrams
Setting the PROFIBUS address Monitoring functions Alarms Faults

PROFIBUS address 1...126 p0918 (126)

Cyclic
p0918 telegrams from t > t_response
DIP switch on the control unit the master No cyclic telegrams from the master <1> No telegrams from the master
Actual
DP ADDRESS F01910 setpoint timeout
PROFIBUS
ON t
address A01920 interrupted, cyclic connection interrupted
1..126
Memory
1 2 4 8 16 32 64 SET
Master sign-of-life_tol
0...65535
Significance <5> p0925 (1)
POWER ON <3>
<5>
All DIP switches to ON or OFF = 65535
Sign-of-life from Detecting <2> F01911 clock cycle synchronism, clock cycle failure
==> set the address using p0918
the clock cycle missing n & F01912 clock cycle synchronism sign-of-life failure
synchronous master signs-of-life
>
in a series n > p0925

A01940 clock cycle synchronism still not reached

A01941 clock cycle signal missing when establishing the bus
A01943 clock cycle signal faulted when establishing the bus
A01900 configuration telegram incorrect
A01901 parameterizing telegram incorrect
A01902 parameterizing telegram not permissible
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

<1> Monitoring is only carried-out if for the first time at least a

"valid" cyclic telegram was received "valid" equals master is
r2075
PB status Telegram diagnostics operational ("valid" = master is operational and net [useful]
r2076
r2054 data is transferred).
<2> Monitoring is only carried-out when a sign-of-life was
PB Diag master SoL received for the first time.
PB Diag Standard <3> Sign-of-life monitoring not effective for p0925 = 65535.
r2065
r2055[0...2] Diagnostic parameters
PB S_Src master <4> The response monitoring time t_response is automatically
<6> defined, when configuring PROFIBUS, by the configuration
p2045
PB Diag clock cyc sync configuration tool (e.g. HW Config from SIEMENS).
r2050[3] (0)
r2064[0...7] <5> The parameters, alarms and faults for clock cycle
<5> synchronous operation are only available for the SERVO
<5>
drive object.
<6> The interconnection from p2045 is automatically carried-out
when the telegram is selected.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF, CU320, SERVO, TB30, TM31, VECTOR fp_S01_2410_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2410 -
PROFIBUS - PROFIBUS address, diagnostics 04.08.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 PROFIBUS sampling time

Picture 2-33 2420 – Telegrams and Process data

<1>
Telegram selection Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

<2> p0922 (999)

Tele- Appl.
Function in the drive PZD 01 PZD 02 PZD 03 PZD 04 PZD 05 PZD 06 PZD 07 PZD 08 PZD 09 PZD 10 PZD 11 PZD 12 PZD 13 PZD 14 PZD 15 PZD 16
gram class
STW1 NSOLL_A Receive telegram from PROFIBUS
1 1 Speed control, 2 words
ZSW1 NIST_A Send telegram to PROFIBUS
= Position encoder signal
STW1 NSOLL_B STW2
2 1 Speed control, 4 words
ZSW1 NIST_B ZSW2
Standard telegrams STW1 NSOLL_B STW2 G1_STW
Interconnection is made 3 1, 4 Speed control, 1 position encoder
ZSW1 NIST_B ZSW2 G1_ZSW G1_XIST1 G1_XIST2
automatically acc. to
STW1 NSOLL_B STW2 G1_STW G2_STW
[2440] and [2450] 4 1, 4 Speed control, 2 position encoder
ZSW1 NIST_B ZSW2 G1_ZSW G1_XIST1 G1_XIST2 G2_ZSW G2_XIST1 G2_XIST2
STW1 NSOLL_B STW2 G1_STW XERR KPC
5 4 DSC DSC, 1 position encoder
ZSW1 NIST_B ZSW2 G1_ZSW G1_XIST1 G1_XIST2
STW1 NSOLL_B STW2 G1_STW G2_STW XERR KPC
6 4 DSC DSC, 2 position encoder
ZSW1 NIST_B ZSW2 G1_ZSW G1_XIST1 G1_XIST2 G2_ZSW G2_XIST1 G2_XIST2
Speed control with torque STW1 NSOLL_B STW2 MOMRED G1_STW
102 1, 4
reduction, 1 position encoder ZSW1 NIST_B ZSW2 MELDW G1_ZSW G1_XIST1 G1_XIST2
Manufacturer-specific Speed control with torque STW1 NSOLL_B STW2 MOMRED G1_STW G2_STW
103 1, 4
telegrams reduction, 2 position encoder ZSW1 NIST_B ZSW2 MELDW G1_ZSW G1_XIST1 G1_XIST2 G2_ZSW G2_XIST1 G2_XIST2
Interconnection is made DSC with torque reduction, 1 STW1 NSOLL_B STW2 MOMRED G1_STW XERR KPC
automatically acc. to 105 4
position encoder ZSW1 NIST_B ZSW2 MELDW G1_ZSW G1_XIST1 G1_XIST2
[2440] and [2450]
DSC with torque reduction, 2 STW1 NSOLL_B STW2 MOMRED G1_STW G2_STW XERR KPC
106 4
position encoder ZSW1 NIST_B ZSW2 MELDW G1_ZSW G1_XIST1 G1_XIST2 G2_ZSW G2_XIST1 G2_XIST2
A_STW1
370 - Infeed, 1 word
A_ZSW1
Free telegram
STW1<3> Receive telegram length can be freely selected via the central PROFIBUS configuring in the master
Interconnection is 999 - Free interconnection via BICO
ZSW1<3> Send telegram length can be freely selected via the central PROFIBUS configuring in the master
made according to
[2460] and [2470]

Function diagrams
<1> Depending on the drive object, only specific telegrams can be used.
<2> When p0922 = 999 is changed to another value, the telegram is automatically assigned according to [2420].
If p0922 is not equal to 999 and is changed to p0922 = 999, the "old" telegram assignment is kept according to [2420]!

PROFIBUS
<3> To maintain the PROFIdrive profile, PZD1 must be used as control word 1 (STW1) and/or status word 1 (ZSW1). If STW1 is not transferred
according to the PROFIdrive profile with PZD1, then p2037 must be set to 2.
2-583

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF, SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2420_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2420 -
PROFIBUS - telegrams and process data 07.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 PROFIBUS sampling time

Picture 2-34 2440 – Standard/manufacturer-specific receive telegram interconnection Refer to [1020.7]

2-584

PROFIBUS
Function diagrams
Signal receivers for PZD receive signals
<1> <2>
X126
PROFIdrive Interconnection Function
PROFIBUS Signal Meaning Data type Normalization
Signal No. parameter chart
[2442]
STW1 Control word 1 for telegram 1 ... 106 1 (bit serial) U16 -
[2443]
[2444]
STW2 Control word 2 for telegram 1 ... 106 3 (bit serial) U16 -
[2445]
NSOLL_A Speed setpoint A (16-bit) 5 p1070 [3030.2] I16 4000 hex p2000
PROFIBUS
receive telegram p1155 [3080.4]
NSOLL_B Speed setpoint B (32-bit) 7 I32 4000 0000 hex p2000
p1430 (DSC) [3090.8]
Header G1_STW Encoder 1 control word 9 p0480[0] [4720] U16

Drive object 1 G2_STW Encoder 2 control word 13 p0480[1] [4720] U16

Drive object 2 G3_STW Encoder 3 control word 17 p0480[2] [4720] U16

<3>
XERR Position deviation 25 p1190 [3090.5] I32
. r2090...r2095 bit
. r2050[0...15] WORD KPC Position controller gain factor 26 p1191 [3090.5] I32
. r2060[0...14] DWORD
MOMRED Torque reduction 101 p1542 [5610.2] I16 4000 hex p2003
...
A_STW1 Control word for A_INFEED 320 (bit serial) [2447] U16
Drive object n

Telegram assignment
. according to p0922
. [2420]
.
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Drive object m

Trailer

<1> When selecting a standard telegram or a manufacturer-specific telegram using p0922, these interconnection parameters of the
command data set CDS are automatically set to 0.
<2> Data type according to to the PROFIdrive profile: I16 = Integer16, I32 = Integer32, U16 = Unsigned16, U32 = Unsigned32
<3> Display parameters for receive data according to [2460].

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF, SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2440_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2440 -
PROFIBUS - standard/manufacturer-specific receive telegram interconnection 07.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 PROFIBUS sampling time

Picture 2-35 2442 – STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) Signal targets for STW1 (Interface Mode SINAMICS/MICROMASTER, p2038 = 0) <1> Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Interconnection [Function chart] [Function chart]

Signal Meaning Inverted
parameters internal control word signal target

= ON (pulses can be enabled) 0 = OFF1 (braking with ramp-function generator, then pulse
STW1.0 p0840[0] = r2090.0 [2501.3] [2610] -
cancellation and ready-to-power-up)

1 = No OFF2 (enable is possible)

STW1.1 p0844[0] = r2090.1 [2501.3] [2610] -
0 = OFF2 (immediate pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit)

1 = No OFF3 (enable possible)

STW1.2 p0848[0] = r2090.2 [2501.3] [2610] -
0 = OFF3 (braking with the OFF3 ramp p1135, then pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit)

1 = Enable operation (pulses can be enabled)

STW1.3 p0852[0] = r2090.3 [2501.3] [2610] -
0 = Inhibit operation (cancel pulses)

1 = operating condition (the ramp-function generator can be enabled)

STW1.4 p1140[0] = r2090.4 [2501.3] [3060] [3070] [3080] -
0 = inhibit ramp-function generator (set the ramp-function generator output to zero)

1 = Enable the ramp-function generator

STW1.5 p1141[0] = r2090.5 [2501.3] [3060] [3070] -
0 = stop the ramp-function generator (freeze the ramp-function generator output)

1 = Enable setpoint
STW1.6 p1142[0] = r2090.6 [2501.3] [3060] [3070] [3080] -
0 = inhibit setpoint (set the ramp-function generator input to zero)

STW1.7 = Acknowledge faults p2103[0] = r2090.7 [2546.1] [8060] -

STW1.8 Reserved - - - -

STW1.9 Reserved - - - -

STW1.10 1 = Control via PLC <2> p0854[0] = r2090.10 [2501.3] [2501] -

STW1.11 1 = Direction of rotation reversal p1113[0] = r2090.11 [2505.3] [3040] -

STW1.12 Reserved - - - -

STW1.13 1 = Motorized potentiometer, setpoint, raise p1035[0] = r2090.13 [2505.3] [3020] -

Function diagrams
STW1.14 1 = Motorized potentiometer, setpoint, lower p1036[0] = r2090.14 [2505.3] [3020] -

PROFIBUS
STW1.15 Reserved - - - -

<1> Used in telegram 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 999.

2-585

<2> Bit 10 must be set in the first PZD word of the telegram received from PROFIBUS in order that the drive accepts the process data.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2442_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2442 -
PROFIBUS - STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) 20.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 PROFIBUS sampling time

Picture 2-36 2443 – STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 1) Signal targets for STW1 (Interface Mode SIMODRIVE 611 universal, p2038 = 1) <1> Refer to [1020.7]
2-586

PROFIBUS
Function diagrams
Interconnection [Function chart] [Function chart]
Signal Meaning
parameters internal control word signal target Inverted
= ON (pulses can be enabled)
STW1.0 0 = OFF1 (braking with ramp-function generator, then pulse cancellation and ready-to- p0840[0] = r2090.0 [2501.3] [2610] -
power-up)
1 = No OFF2 (enable is possible)
STW1.1 p0844[0] = r2090.1 [2501.3] [2610] -
0 = OFF2 (immediate pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit)

1 = No OFF3 (enable possible)

STW1.2 p0848[0] = r2090.2 [2501.3] [2610] -
0 = OFF3 (braking with the OFF ramp p1135, then pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit)

1 = Enable operation (pulses can be enabled)

STW1.3 p0852[0] = r2090.3 [2501.3] [2610] -
0 = Inhibit operation (cancel pulses)

1 = operating condition (the ramp-function generator can be enabled)

STW1.4 p1140[0] = r2090.4 [2501.3] [3060] [3070] [3080] -
0 = inhibit ramp-function generator (set the ramp-function generator output to zero)

1 = Enable the ramp-function generator

STW1.5 p1141[0] = r2090.5 [2501.3] [3060] [3070] -
0 = stop the ramp-function generator (freeze the ramp-function generator output)

1 = Enable setpoint
STW1.6 p1142[0] = r2090.6 [2501.3] [3060] [3070] [3080] -
0 = inhibit setpoint (set the ramp-function generator input to zero)

STW1.7 = Acknowledge faults p2103[0] = r2090.7 [2546.1] [8060] -

STW1.8 Reserved - - - -

STW1.9 Reserved - - - -

STW1.10 1 = Control via PLC <2> p0854[0] = r2090.10 [2501.3] [2501] -

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

STW1.11 Reserved - - - -

STW1.12 1 = Unconditionally open the holding brake p0855[0] =- r2090.12 [2501.3] [2701] -

STW1.13 Reserved - - - -

1 = Closed-loop torque control active

STW1.14 p1501[0] =- r2090.14 [2520.3] [5060] [6060] -
0 = Closed-loop speed control active

STW1.15 Reserved - - - -

<1> Used in telegram 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 102, 103, 105, 106, 999.

<2> Bit 10 must be set in the first PZD word of the telegram received from PROFIBUS in order that the drive accepts the process data.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_2443_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2443 -
PROFIBUS - STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 1) 20.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 PROFIBUS sampling time

Picture 2-37 2444 – STW2 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) Signal targets for STW2 (Interface Mode SINAMICS/MICROMASTER, p2038 = 0) <1> Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Interconnection [Function chart] [Function chart]

Signal Meaning Inverted
parameters internal control word signal target

STW2.0 Drive data set selection DDS, bit 0 p0820[0] = r2093.0 - [8565] -

STW2.1 Drive data set selection DDS, bit 1 p0821[0] = r2093.1 - [8565] -

STW2.2 Drive data set selection DDS, bit 2 p0822[0] = r2093.2 - [8565] -

STW2.3 Drive data set selection DDS, bit 3 p0823[0] = r2093.3 - [8565] -

STW2.4 Drive data set selection DDS, bit 4 p0824[0] = r2093.4 - [8565] -

STW2.5 Reserved - - - -

STW2.6 Reserved - - - -

STW2.7 Reserved - - - -

STW2.8 1 = Traverse to fixed endstop p1545[0] = r2093.8 [2520.2] [8012] -

STW2.9 Reserved - - - -

STW2.10 Reserved - - - -

STW2.11 Reserved - - - -

STW2.12 Master sign-of-life, bit 0 p2045 = r2050[3] - [2410] -

STW2.13 Master sign-of-life, bit 1 p2045 = r2050[3] - [2410] -

Function diagrams
STW2.14 Master sign-of-life, bit 2 p2045 = r2050[3] - [2410] -

PROFIBUS
STW2.15 Master sign-of-life, bit 3 p2045 = r2050[3] - [2410] -

<1> Used in telegram 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 999.

2-587

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_2444_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2444 -
PROFIBUS - STW2 control word interconnection (p2038 = 0) 08.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 PROFIBUS sampling time

Picture 2-38 2445 – STW2 control word interconnection (p2038 = 1) Signal targets for STW2 (Interface Mode SIMODRIVE 611 universal, p2038 = 1) <1> Refer to [1020.7]
2-588

PROFIBUS
Function diagrams
Interconnection [Function diagram] [Function diagram]
Signal Meaning Inverted
parameters internal control word signal target

STW2.0 Drive data set selection DDS, bit 0 p0820[0] = r2093.0 - [8565] -

STW2.1 Drive data set selection DDS, bit 1 p0821[0] = r2093.1 - [8565] -

STW2.2 Drive data set selection DDS, bit 2 p0822[0] = r2093.2 - [8565] -

STW2.3 Reserved - - - -

STW2.4 1 = Bypass ramp-function generator p1122[0] = r2093.4 - [3060] [3070] -

STW2.5 Reserved - - - -

STW2.6 1 = Integrator inhibit, speed controller <2> p1477[0] = r2093.6 - [5040] [5210] -

STW2.7 Reserved - - - -

STW2.8 1 = Traverse to fixed endstop p1545[0] = r2093.8 [2520.2] [8012] -

STW2.9 Drive data set selection DDS, bit 3 p0823[0] = r2093.9 - [8565] -

STW2.10 Drive data set selection DDS, bit 4 p0824[0] = r2093.10 - [8565] -
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

STW2.11 Reserved - - - -

STW2.12 Master sign-of-life, bit 0 p2045 = r2050[3] - [2410] -

STW2.13 Master sign-of-life, bit 1 p2045 = r2050[3] - [2410] -

STW2.14 Master sign-of-life, bit 2 p2045 = r2050[3] - [2410] -

STW2.15 Master sign-of-life, bit 3 p2045 = r2050[3] - [2410] -

<1> Used in telegram 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 102, 103, 105, 106, 999.

<2> For a 1 signal, the integrator component of the speed controller is deleted (cleared) and the integrator inhibited.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_2445_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2445 -
PROFIBUS - STW2 control word interconnection (p2038 = 1) 08.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 PROFIBUS sampling time

Picture 2-39 2446 – A_STW1 control word B_Infeed sequence control interconnection Signal targets for A_STW1 <1> refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Interconnection [Function diagram] [Function diagram]

Signal Meaning Inverted
parameters internal control word signal target

= ON (close pre-charging/line contactor, pulses can be enabled)

STW1.0 p0840[0] = r2090.0 [8720.3] [8732] -
0 = OFF1 (ramp-down Vdc, cancel pulses and open pre-charging/line contactor)

1 = no OFF2 (enable possible)

STW1.1 p0844[0] = r2090.1 [8720.3] [8732] -
0 = OFF2 (power-on inhibit)

STW1.2 Reserved - - - -

STW1.3 Reserved - - - -

STW1.4 Reserved - - - -

STW1.5 Reserved - - - -

STW1.6 Reserved - - - -

STW1.7 = acknowledge faults p2103[0] = r2090.7 [2546.3] [8060] -

STW1.8 Reserved - - - -

STW1.9 Reserved - - - -

STW1.10 1 = control by PLC <2> p0854[0] = r2090.10 [8720.3] [8720] -

STW1.11 Reserved - - - -

STW1.12 Reserved - - - -

STW1.13 Reserved - - - -

Function diagrams
STW1.14 Reserved - - - -

PROFIBUS
STW1.15 Reserved - - - -

<1> Used in telegram 370.

2-589

<2> Bit 10 must be set in the first PZD word of the telegram received from PROFIBUS so that the drive object accepts the process data.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: B_INF fp_S01_2446_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2446 -
PROFIBUS - A_STW1 control word B_infeed sequence control interconnection 05.11.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 PROFIBUS sampling time

Picture 2-40 2447 – A_STW1 control word A_Infeed sequence control interconnection Signal targets for A_STW1 <1> Refer to [1020.7]
2-590

PROFIBUS
Function diagrams
Interconnection [Function chart] [Function chart]
Signal Meaning Inverted
parameters internal control word signal target
= ON (close pre-charging/line contactor, pulses can be enabled)
STW1.0 0 = OFF1 (reduce Vdc along a ramp, pulse cancellation and open pre-charging/line p0840[0] = r2090.0 [8920.3] [8932] -
contactor)
1 = No OFF2 (enable is possible)
STW1.1 p0844[0] = r2090.1 [8920.3] [8932] -
0 = OFF2 (immediate pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit)

STW1.2 Reserved - - - -

1 = Enable operation (pulses can be enabled)

STW1.3 p0852[0] = r2090.3 [8920.3] [8932] -
0 = Inhibit operation (cancel pulses)

STW1.4 Reserved - - - -

STW1.5 1 = Inhibit motoring operation p3532= r2090.5 [8920.3] [8920] -

STW1.6 1 = Inhibit regenerative operation p3533= r2090.6 [8920.3] [8920] -

STW1.7 = Acknowledge faults p2103[0] = r2090.7 [2546.3] [8060] -

STW1.8 Reserved - - - -

STW1.9 Reserved - - - -

STW1.10 1 = Control via PLC <2> p0854[0] = r2090.10 [8920.3] [8920] -

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

STW1.11 Reserved - - - -

STW1.12 Reserved - - - -

STW1.13 Reserved - - - -

STW1.14 Reserved - - - -

STW1.15 Reserved - - - -

<1> Used in telegram 370.

<2> Bit 10 must be set in the first PZD word of the telegram received from PROFIBUS in order that the drive object (A_INFEED) accepts the process data.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF fp_S01_2447_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2447 -
PROFIBUS - A_STW1 control word A_Infeed sequence control interconnection 20.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 PROFIBUS sampling time

Picture 2-41 2450 – Standard/manufacturer-specific send telegram interconnection Signal sources for PZD send signals <1> Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

PROFIdrive Interconnection Function

Signal Description Data type Normalization
Signal No. parameter chart
[2452] PROFIBUS
ZSW1 Status word 1 2 r2089[0] U16 -
[2453] send telegram
[2454]
ZSW2 Status word 2 4 r2089[1] U16 -
[2455] Header
[4710.6]
NIST_A Speed setpoint A (16 bit) 6 r0063 I16 4000 hex p2000
[6010.6] Drive object 1
[4710.6]
NIST_B Speed setpoint B (32 bit) 8 r0063 I32 4000 0000 hex p2000 Drive object 2
[6010.6]
G1_ZSW Encoder 1 status word 10 r0481[0] [4730] U16 PROFIBUS
Send words 1...16 .
G1_XIST1 Encoder 1 actual position 1 11 r0482[0] [4704] U32 r2053[0...15] WORD .
G1_XIST2 Encoder 1 actual position 2 12 r0483[0] [4704] U32
r2063[0...14] DWORD
.
G2_ZSW Encoder 2 status word 14 r0481[1] [4730] U16
...
Drive object n
G2_XIST1 Encoder 2 actual position 1 15 r0482[1] [4704] U32
Telegram assignment
G2_XIST2 Encoder 2 actual position 2 16 r0483[1] [4704] U32 according to p0922 .
[2420] .
G3_ZSW Encoder 3 status word 18 r0481[2] [4730] U16 .
G3_XIST1 Encoder 3 actual position 1 19 r0482[2] [4704] U32

G3_XIST2 Encoder 3 actual position 2 20 r0483[2] [4704] U32 Drive object m

MELDW Message word 102 r2089[2] [2456] U16 Trailer

A_ZSW1 Status word for A_INFEED 321 r0899, r2139 [2459] U16

X126
PROFIBUS

Function diagrams
PROFIBUS
<1> Data type according to the PROFIdrive profile: I16 = Integer16, I32 = Integer32, U16 = Unsigned16, U32 = Unsigned32
2-591

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF, SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2450_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2450 -
PROFIBUS - standard/manufacturer-specific send telegram interconnection 29.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 PROFIBUS sampling time

Picture 2-42 2452 – ZSW1 Status word interconnection (p2038 = 0) Signal sources for ZSW1 (Interface Mode SINAMICS/MICROMASTER, p2038 = 0) <1> Refer to [1020.7]
2-592

PROFIBUS
Function diagrams
Interconnection [Function chart] [Function chart]
Signal Meaning Inverted
parameters internal status word signal source
<2>

ZSW1.0 1 = Ready to power-up p2080[0] = r0899.0 [2503.7] [2610] -

ZSW1.1 1 = Ready to operate, DC link charged, pulses inhibited p2080[1] = r0899.1 [2503.7] [2610] -

ZSW1.2 1 = Operation enabled, drive follows n_set p2080[2] = r0899.2 [2503.7] [2610] -

ZSW1.3 1 = Fault present p2080[3] = r2139.3 [2548.7] [8060] -

ZSW1.4 0 = Coast to stop active (OFF2 active) p2080[4] = r0899.4 [2503.7] [2610] -

ZSW1.5 0 = Fast stop active (OFF3 active) p2080[5] = r0899.5 [2503.7] [2610] -

ZSW1.6 1 = Power-on inhibit p2080[6] = r0899.6 [2503.7] [2610] -

ZSW1.7 1 = Alarm present p2080[7] = r2139.7 [2548.7] [8065] -

ZSW1.8 1 = Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off p2080[8] = r2197.7 [2534.7] [8010] -

ZSW1.9 1 = PLC requests control <3> p2080[9] = r0899.9 [2503.7] [2503] -

ZSW1.10 1 = f or n comparison value reached or exceeded p2080[10] = r2199.1 [2536.7] [8010] -

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

ZSW1.11 0 = I, M, or P limit reached p2080[11] = r1407.7 [2522.7] [5610] [6060] D

ZSW1.12 0 = Holding brake closed p2080[12] = r0899.12 [2503.7] [2701] -

ZSW1.13 0 = Alarm motor overtemperature p2080[13] = r2135.14 [2548.7] [8016] D

1 = Motor rotates forwards (n_act ³ 0)
ZSW1.14 p2080[14] = r2197.3 [2534.7] [8010] -
0 = Motor rotates backwards (n_act < 0)

ZSW1.15 0 = Alarm, thermal overload, power module p2080[15] = r2135.15 [2548.7] [8014] D
<1> Used in telegram 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 999.
<2> The status word is generated using the binector-connector converter p2088[0]. <3> The master system requests the process data.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2452_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2452 -
PROFIBUS - ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 0) 08.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 PROFIBUS sampling time

Picture 2-43 2453 – ZSW1 Status word interconnection (p2038 = 1) Signal sources for ZSW1 (Interface Mode SIMODRIVE 611 universal, p2038 = 1) <1>
Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Interconnection [Function chart] [Function chart]

Signal Meaning Inverted
parameters Internal status word signal source

ZSW1.0 1 = Ready to power-up p2080[0] = r0899.0 [2503.7] [2610] -

ZSW1.1 1 = Ready to operate, DC link charged, pulses inhibited p2080[1] = r0899.1 [2503.7] [2610] -

ZSW1.2 1 = Operation enabled, drive follows n_set p2080[2] = r0899.2 [2503.7] [2610] -

ZSW1.3 1 = Fault present p2080[3] = r2139.3 [2548.7] [8060] -

1 = No coast-down active (OFF2 inactive)

ZSW1.4 p2080[4] = r0899.4 [2503.7] [2610] -
0 = Coast down active (OFF2 active)

1 = No fast stop active (OFF3 inactive)

ZSW1.5 p2080[5] = r0899.5 [2503.7] [2610] -
0 = Fast stop active (OFF3 active)

ZSW1.6 1 = Power-on inhibit p2080[6] = r0899.6 [2503.7] [2610] -

ZSW1.7 1 = Alarm present p2080[7] = r2139.7 [2548.7] [8065] -

ZSW1.8 1 = Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off p2080[8] = r2197.7 [2534.7] [8010] -

ZSW1.9 1 = PLC requests control <2> p2080[9] = r0899.9 [2503.7] [2503] -

ZSW1.10 1 = f or n comparison value reached or exceeded p2080[10] = r2199.1 [2536.7] [8010] -

ZSW1.11 Reserved - - - -

ZSW1.12 Reserved - - - -

ZSW1.13 Reserved - - - -

Function diagrams
1 = Closed-loop torque controlled operation
ZSW1.14 p2080[14] = r1407.2 [2522.7] [2522] -
0 = Closed-loop speed controlled operation

PROFIBUS
ZSW1.15 Reserved - - - -

<1> Used in telegram 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 102, 103, 105, 106, 999.

2-593

<2> The master system requests the process data.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_2453_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2453 -
PROFIBUS - ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 1) 08.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 PROFIBUS sampling time

Picture 2-44 2454 – ZSW2 Status word interconnection (p2038 = 0) Signal sources for ZSW2 (Interface Mode SINAMICS/MICROMASTER, p2038 = 0) <1>
Refer to [1020.7]
2-594

PROFIBUS
Function diagrams
Interconnection [Function chart] [Function chart]
Signal Meaning Inverted
parameters internal status word signal source

ZSW2.0 1 = Drive data set DDS effective, bit 0 p2081[0] = r0051.0 - [8565] -

ZSW2.1 1 = Drive data set DDS effective, bit 1 p2081[1] = r0051.1 - [8565] -

ZSW2.2 1 = Drive data set DDS effective, bit 2 p2081[2] = r0051.2 - [8565] -

ZSW2.3 1 = Drive data set DDS effective, bit 3 p2081[3] = r0051.3 - [8565] -

ZSW2.4 1 = Drive data set DDS effective, bit 4 p2081[4] = r0051.4 - [8565] -

ZSW2.5 Reserved - - - -

ZSW2.6 Reserved - - - -

ZSW2.7 Reserved - - - -

ZSW2.8 1 = Traverse to fixed endstop p2081[8] = r1406.8 - [2520] -

ZSW2.9 Reserved - - - -

ZSW2.10 Reserved - - - -
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

ZSW2.11 Reserved - - - -

Implicitly
ZSW2.12 Slave sign-of-life bit 0 - - -
interconnected

Implicitly
ZSW2.13 Slave sign-of-life bit 1 - - -
interconnected
<2>
Implicitly
ZSW2.14 Slave sign-of-life bit 2 - - -
interconnected

Implicitly
ZSW2.15 Slave sign-of-life bit 3 - - -
interconnected

<1> Used in telegrams 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 999.

<2> These signals are automatically interconnected for clock cycle synchronous operation.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_2454_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2454 -
PROFIBUS - ZSW2 status word interconnection (p2038 = 0) 19.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 PROFIBUS sampling time

Picture 2-45 2455 – ZSW2 Status word interconnection (p2038 = 1) Signal sources for ZSW2 (Interface Mode SIMODRIVE 611 universal, p2038 = 1) <1>
Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Interconnection [Function chart] [Function chart]

Signal Meaning Inverted
parameters internal status word signal source

ZSW2.0 1 = Drive data set DDS effective, bit 0 p2081[0] = r0051.0 - [8565] -

ZSW2.1 1 = Drive data set DDS effective, bit 1 p2081[1] = r0051.1 - [8565] -

ZSW2.2 1 = Drive data set DDS effective, bit 2 p2081[2] = r0051.2 - [8565] -

ZSW2.3 Reserved - - - -

ZSW2.4 1 = Ramp-function generator inactive p2081[4] = r2093.4 - [3060] [3070] -

ZSW2.5 1 = Open the holding brake p2081[5] = r0899.12 [2503.7] [2701] -

ZSW2.6 1 = Integrator inhibit, speed controller p2081[6] = r2093.6 - [5040] [5210] -

ZSW2.7 Reserved - - - -

ZSW2.8 1 = Traverse to fixed endstop p2081[8] = r1406.8 - [2520] -

ZSW2.9 1 = Drive data set DDS effective, bit 3 p2081[9] = r0051.3 - [8565] -

ZSW2.10 1 = Drive data set DDS effective, bit 4 p2081[10] = r0051.4 - [8565] -

ZSW2.11 Reserved - - - -

Implicitly
ZSW2.12 Slave sign-of-life bit 0 - - -
interconnected

Implicitly
ZSW2.13 Slave sign-of-life bit 1 - - -
interconnected

Function diagrams
<2>
Implicitly
ZSW2.14 Slave sign-of-life bit 2 - - -
interconnected

Implicitly

PROFIBUS
ZSW2.15 Slave sign-of-life bit 3 - - -
interconnected

<1> Used in telegrams 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 102, 103, 105, 106, 999.

2-595

<2> These signals are automatically interconnected for clock cycle synchronous operation.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_2455_en.vsd Function diagram - 2455 -
PROFIBUS - ZSW2 status word interconnection (p2038 = 1) 19.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 PROFIBUS sampling time

Picture 2-46 2456 – MELDW Status word interconnection Signal sources for MELDW <1> Refer to [1020.7]
2-596

PROFIBUS
Function diagrams
Interconnection [Function chart] [Function chart]
Signal Meaning Inverted
parameters Internal status word signal source <2>
1 = Ramp-up/ramp-down completed
MELDW.0 p2082[0] = r2199.5 [2537.7] [8010] -
0 = Ramp-function generator active

MELDW.1 1 = Torque utilization [%] < torque threshold value 2 (p2194) p2082[1] = r2199.11 [2537.7] [8012] -

MELDW.2 1 = |n_act| < speed threshold value 3 (p2161) p2082[2] = r2199.0 [2537.7] [8010] -

MELDW.3 1 = |n_act| £ speed threshold value 2 (p2155) p2082[3] = r2197.1 [2534.7] [8010] -

MELDW.4 Reserved - - - -

MELDW.5 Reserved - - - -

MELDW.6 0 = Alarm motor overtemperature p2082[6] = r2135.14 [2548.7] [8016] D

MELDW.7 0 = Alarm, thermal overload, power module p2082[7] = r2135.15 [2548.7] [8014] D

MELDW.8 1 = Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off p2082[8] = r2197.7 [2534.7] [8010] -

MELDW.9 Reserved - - - -

MELDW.10 Reserved - - - -
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

MELDW.11 Reserved - - - -

MELDW.12 Reserved - - - -

MELDW.13 1 = Pulses enabled p2082[13] = r0899.11 [2503.7] [2610] -

MELDW.14 Reserved - - - -

MELDW.15 Reserved - - - -

<1> Used in telegrams 102, 103, 105, 106, 999.

<2> The status word is generated using the binector-connector converter p2088[2].

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_2456_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2456 -
PROFIBUS - MELDW status word interconnection 08.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 PROFIBUS sampling time

Picture 2-47 2458 – A_ZSW1 status word B_Infeed status word interconnection Signal sources for A_ZSW1 <1>
refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Interconnection [Function diagram] [Function diagram]

Signal Meaning Inverted
parameters internal control word signal target

ZSW1.0 1 = ready to power-up p2080[0] = r0899.0 [8726.7] [8732] -

ZSW1.1 1 = ready p2080[1] = r0899.1 [8726.7] [8932]

[8732] -

ZSW1.2 1 = operation enabled p2080[2] = r0899.2 [8726.7] [8732] -

ZSW1.3 1 = fault present p2080[3] = r2139.3 [2548.7] [8060] -

ZSW1.4 1 = no OFF2 present p2080[4] = r0899.4 [8926.7] [8932] -

ZSW1.5 Reserved - - - -

ZSW1.6 1 = power-on inhibit p2080[6] = r0899.6 [8726.7] [8732] -

ZSW1.7 1 = alarm present p2080[7] = r2139.7 [2548.7] [8065] -

ZSW1.8 Reserved - - - -

ZSW1.9 1 = PLC requests control <2> p2080[9] = r0899.9 [8726.7] [8726] -

ZSW1.10 Reserved - - - -

ZSW1.11 1 = pre-charging completed p2080[11] = r0899.11 [8726.7] [8750] -

ZSW1.12 1 = line contactor closed p2080[12] = r0899.12 [8726.7] [8734] -

ZSW1.13 Reserved - - - -

Function diagrams
ZSW1.14 Reserved - - - -

PROFIBUS
ZSW1.15 Reserved - - - -

<1> Used in telegram 370.

2-597

<2> Master control system requests the process data.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: B_INF fp_S01_2458_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2458 -
PROFIBUS - A_ZSW1 status word B_infeed sequence control interconnection 05.11.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 PROFIBUS sampling time

Picture 2-48 2459 – A_ZSW1 status word A_Infeed status word interconnection Signal sources for A_ZSW1 <1>
Refer to [1020.7]
2-598

PROFIBUS
Function diagrams
Interconnection [Function chart] [Function chart]
Signal Meaning Inverted
parameters internal status word signal source

ZSW1.0 1 = Ready to power-up p2080[0] = r0899.0 [8926.7] [8932] -

ZSW1.1 1 = Ready to operate p2080[1] = r0899.1 [8926.7] [8932] -

ZSW1.2 1 = Operation enabled p2080[2] = r0899.2 [8926.7] [8932] -

ZSW1.3 1 = Fault present p2080[3] = r2139.3 [2548.7] [8060] -

ZSW1.4 1 = No OFF2 effective p2080[4] = r0899.4 [8926.7] [8932] -

ZSW1.5 Reserved - - - -

ZSW1.6 1 = Power-on inhibit p2080[6] = r0899.6 [8926.7] [8932] -

ZSW1.7 1 = Alarm present p2080[7] = r2139.7 [2548.7] [8065] -

ZSW1.8 Reserved - - - -

ZSW1.9 1 = PLC requests control <2> p2080[9] = r0899.9 [8926.7] [8926] -

ZSW1.10 Reserved - - - -
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

ZSW1.11 1 = Pre-charging completed p2080[11] = r0899.11 [8926.7] [8950] -

ZSW1.12 1 = Line contactor closed p2080[12] = r0899.12 [8926.7] [8934] -

ZSW1.13 Reserved - - - -

ZSW1.14 Reserved - - - -

ZSW1.15 Reserved - - - -

<1> Used in telegram 370.

<2> The master system requests process data.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF fp_S01_2459_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2459 -
PROFIBUS - A_ZSW1 status word A_Infeed sequence control interconnection 17.05.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 r2090.0 Bit 0
... PROFIBUS sampling time

Picture 2-49 2460 – Receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999)
r2090.15 Bit 15
<1> PZD receive word 1 r2050[0]
Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

r2060[0] DWORD
r2091.0 ...
Bit 0
r2091.15 Bit 15
PZD receive word 2 r2050[1]
r2092.0 Bit 0
X126 r2060[1] DWORD ...
PROFIBUS r2092.15 Bit 15
PZD receive word 3 r2050[2]
r2093.0 Bit 0
r2060[2] DWORD ...
r2093.15 Bit 15
PZD receive word 4 r2050[3]
r2060[3] DWORD
PROFIBUS
receive telegram PZD receive word 5 r2050[4] 4000.00 µs
r2060[4] DWORD
2 connector-binector converter
Header PZD receive word 6 r2050[5]
p2098[0].0
Drive object 1 r2060[5] DWORD
PZD receive word 7 r2050[6] <2>
Drive object 2
r2060[6] DWORD p2099[0] 0
PZD receive word 8 r2050[7] (0) r2094.0 Bit 0
1
. r2060[7] DWORD 1
.
. PZD receive word 9
r2060[8] DWORD
r2050[8]
p2098[0].15
PZD receive word 10 r2050[9]
Drive object n r2060[9] DWORD
0
PZD receive word 11 r2050[10]
r2094.15 Bit 15
. r2060[10] DWORD 1 1
. PZD receive word 12 r2050[11]
. r2060[11] DWORD
PZD receive word 13 r2050[12] p2098[1].0
r2060[12] DWORD
Drive object m <2>
PZD receive word 14 r2050[13]
Trailer p2099[1] 0
r2060[13] DWORD
(0) r2095.0 Bit 0
PZD receive word 15 r2050[14] 1 1
r2060[14] DWORD
PZD receive word 16 r2050[15]
p2098[1].15
<3> <3>

Reference quantities for ongoing interconnection 0

p200x

Function diagrams
r2095.15 Bit 15
1 1

<1> In order to maintain the PROFIdrive profile, receive word 1 must be used as control word (STW1) (due to bit 10 "control requested").

PROFIBUS
<2> Using the connector-binector converters, the bits can be extracted from two of the PZD receive words 5 to 16 and used as binectors.
<3> For words and double words, the representation 4000 hex = 100 % or 4000 0000 hex = 100 % for double words.
Reference quantities p200x are decisive for the ongoing interconnection (100 % corresponds to p200x).
2-599

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2460_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2460 -
PROFIBUS - Receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 22.03.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 PROFIBUS words 1...16 PROFIBUS sampling time

Picture 2-50 2470 – Send telegram free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999)
diagnostics display
r2063[0...14] r2053[0...15] Refer to [1020.7]
2-600

PROFIBUS
Function diagrams
<2>

<2>
p2051[0] ...
<1> (0)
PZD send word 1 <1>
p2061[0]
DWORD p2051[1]
(0)
p2061[1] PZD send word 2
DWORD p2051[2]
(0)
p2061[2] PZD send word 3
DWORD p2051[3]
(0)
PZD send word 4 PROFIBUS
p2061[3] send telegram
DWORD p2051[4]
(0)
PZD send word 5 Header
p2061[4]
DWORD p2051[5]
(0) Drive object 1
p2061[5] PZD send word 6
DWORD p2051[6] Drive object 2
(0) .
p2061[6] PZD send word 7 .
DWORD p2051[7]
(0)
.
p2061[7] PZD send word 8 Drive object n
DWORD p2051[8]
.
(0)
PZD send word 9 .
DWORD
p2061[8]
p2051[9] .
(0) Drive object m
p2061[9] PZD send word 10
DWORD p2051[10] Trailer
(0)
p2061[10] PZD send word 11
DWORD p2051[11]
(0)
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

PZD send word 12

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

p2061[11]
DWORD p2051[12]
(0)
p2061[12] PZD send word 13
DWORD p2051[13]
(0)
p2061[13] PZD send word 14
<1> In order to maintain the PROFIdrive profile, send word 1 must be used as status DWORD p2051[14] X126
word 1 (ZSW1), not as DWORD. (0) PROFIBUS
<2> Every PZD word can be assigned one word or one double word. Only one of the 2 p2061[14] PZD send word 15
DWORD p2051[15]
interconnection parameters p2051 or p2061 may have a value of ¹ 0 for a PZD
word. (0)
PZD send word 16
<3> Physical word and double word values are inserted in the telegram as referenced
variables. p200x apply as reference variables (telegram contents = 4000 hex or <3> <3>
4000 0000 hex in the case of double words if the input variable has the value
p200x). Reference quantities for ongoing interconnection
p200x

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2470_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2470 -
PROFIBUS - send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 16.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 4000.00 µs

Picture 2-51 2472 – Status words free interconnection

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

4 binector-connector converter

p2088[0].0 p2088[2].0

p2080[0...15] 0 Status word 1 p2082[0...15] 0 Free status word 3

[0] [0]
(0.0) r2089[0] (0.0) r2089[2]
(0.0)
[1] 1 1 (0.0)
[1] 1 1

p2088[0].15 p2088[2].15

0 0
[15] [15]
(0.0) (0.0)
1 1
1 1

p2088[1].0 p2088[3].0

p2081[0...15] 0 Status word 2 p2083[0...15] 0 Free status word 4

[0] [0]
(0.0) r2089[1] (0.0) r2089[3]
(0.0) [1]
1 1 (0.0) [1]
1 1

p2088[1].11 p2088[3].15

0 0
[11] [15]
(0.0) (0.0)
(0.0)
[12] 1 1
1 1

Function diagrams
<1>

[15]
(0.0)

PROFIBUS
<1> For clock-cycle synchronous SERVO, these signals may not be interconnected (slave sign-of-life).
2-601

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF, CU320, SERVO, TB30, TM31, VECTOR fp_S01_2472_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2472 -
PROFIBUS - status words, free interconnection 12.03.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 PROFIBUS sampling time

Picture 2-52 2481 – Receive telegram free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) Refer to [1020.7]
2-602

PROFIBUS
Function diagrams
X126
r2090.0 Bit 0
PROFIBUS ...
r2090.15 Bit 15
<1> PZD receive word 1 r2050[0]
r2091.0 Bit 0
...
r2091.15 Bit 15
PZD receive word 2 r2050[1]
PROFIBUS
receive telegram
PZD receive word 3 r2050[2] 4000.00 µs
2 connector-binector converter
Header
p2098[0].0
Drive object 1 PZD receive word 4 r2050[3]
<2>
Drive object 2
p2099[0] 0
PZD receive word 5 r2050[4]
(0) r2094.0 Bit 0
1
. 1
.
. Reference quantities for ongoing interconnection
p200x p2098[0].15

Drive object n
0
r2094.15 Bit 15
. 1 1
.
.
p2098[1].0
Drive object m <2>
Trailer p2099[1] 0
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

(0) r2095.0 Bit 0

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

1 1

p2098[1].15
<3>

0
r2095.15 Bit 15
1 1

<1> In order to maintain the PROFIdrive profile, for A_INFEED, the receive word 1 must be used as control word (STW1) (due to bit 10 "control requested").
<2> Using the two connector-binector converters, two of the PZD receive words 3 to 5 can be converted into binectors for continued interconnection.
<3> For words, the following representation applies, 4000 hex = 100 %. Reference quantities p200x are decisive for the ongoing interconnection (100 % corresponds to p200x).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF, CU320, TB30, TM31 fp_S01_2481_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2481 -
PROFIBUS - Receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 16.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 PROFIBUS sampling time

Picture 2-53 2483 – Send telegram free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

PROFIBUS send words 1...5

Diagnostics display PROFIBUS send telegram
r2053[0...4]
Header
<2> ...
p2051[0] Drive object 1
(0) PZD send word 1 <1>
Drive object 2
p2051[1]
.
(0) PZD send word 2
.
p2051[2] .
(0) PZD send word 3 Drive object n
p2051[3] .
(0) PZD send word 4 .
p2051[4]
.
(0) PZD send word 5 Drive object m

<3> Trailer

Reference quantities for ongoing interconnection

p200x

X126
PROFIBUS

Function diagrams
<1> In order to maintain the PROFIdrive profile, send word 1 must be used as status word 1 (ZSW1) for A_INFEED.

PROFIBUS
<2> Using the binector/connector converters at [2472], bits of 4 send words can be interconnected with any binectors.
<3> Physical word quantities are inserted in the telegram as referenced quantities. In this case, p200x is decisive as reference quantity (telegram
contents = 4000 hex if the input quantity has the value p200x).
2-603

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF, CU320, TB30, TM31 fp_S01_2483_de.vsd Function diagram
- 2483 -
PROFIBUS - send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) 15.12.03 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Function diagrams
Internal control/status words

2.7 Internal control/status words

Function diagrams

2501 – Control word sequence control 2-605

2503 – Status word sequence control 2-606

2505 – Control word setpoint channel 2-607

2520 – Control word speed controller 2-608

2522 – Status word speed controller 2-609

2534 – Status word monitoring functions 1 2-610

2536 – Status word monitoring functions 2 2-611

2537 – Status word monitoring functions 3 2-612

2546 – Control word, faults/alarms 2-613

2548 – Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2 2-614

2578 – Control word command data set selection (CDS) 2-615

2-604  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 PROFIdrive bit
2000.00 µs

Picture 2-54 2501 – Control word sequence control

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

1 OFF2 (electrical) STW sequence ctrl

<2> p0844[C] Bit No. Control word sequence control r0898
<3> (1)
OFF1 p0840[C] = ON (pulses can be enabled)
p0845[C]
(1)
& <3> (0) 0 0 = OFF1 (braking with ramp-function generator, then pulse cancellation and ready-to-
power-up)
r0898.0 To the control unit [2610]

2 OFF2 (electrical) 1 = Operating condition, no coast-down active (OFF2 inactive)

1 r0898.1 To the control unit [2610]
0 = Coast-down active (OFF2 active), pulse inhibit, motor coasts down

1 = Operating condition, no fast stop active (OFF3 inactive)

2 r0898.2 To the control unit [2610]
0 = Fast stop active (OFF3 active)
p0852[C]
1 = Enable operation (pulses can be enabled)
<3> (1) 3 r0898.3 To the control unit [2610]
0 = Inhibit operation (cancel pulses)
1 OFF3 (fast stop)
<2> p1140[C]
p0848[C] 1 = Enable ramp-function generator To the setpoint channel
<3> <3> (1) 4 r0898.4
(1) 0 = Inhibit ramp-function generator (set the ramp-function generator output to zero) [3060.6] [3070.7] [3080.5]

p0849[C]
(1)
& <3>
p1141[C]
(1) 5
1 = Start the ramp-function generator
0 = Stop the ramp-function generator (freeze the ramp-function generator output)
r0898.5 To the setpoint channel [3060.1] [3070.1]

2 OFF3 (fast stop) p1142[C]

1 = Enable setpoint To the setpoint channel
<4> <3> (1) 6 r0898.6 <4>
0 = Inhibit setpoint (set the ramp-function generator input to zero) [3060.1] [3070.1] [3080.4]
p0855[C]
To the brake control [2701.4]
<3> (0) 7 1 = Unconditionally open the holding brake r0898.7
To the expanded brake control [2707.1]
p1055 [C]
<3> (0) 8 1 = Jog, bit 0 r0898.8 To jogging [3030.6]

p1056 [C]
<3> (0) 9 1 = Jog, bit 1 r0898.9 To jogging [3030.6]

p0854[C]
<3> (1) 10 1 = Control via PLC <1> r0898.10

11 Reserved

Internal control/status words

p0856[C]
1 = Enable speed controller
(1) 12 r0898.12 To the expanded brake control [2707.1]
0 = Set speed controller to zero (I component and controller output)
<1> Bit 10 must be set in the first PZD word of the telegram received
from the serial interface in order that the drive accepts the 13 Reserved
process data.

Function diagrams
<2> PROFIBUS interconnection:
For PROFIBUS standard telegrams, the upper inputs are 14 Reserved
connected to PROFIBUS-STW1 [2420].
This only involves CDS0.
<3> When the master control is retrieved, entered from STARTER or 15 Reserved
AOP30.
<4> The path from [2711.6] is only valid for the expanded function module "expanded brake control (r0108.14 = 1)".
2-605

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2501_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2501 -
Internal control/status words, control word sequence control 20.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 2000.00 µs

Picture 2-55 2503 – Status word sequence control

PROFIdrive bit
2-606

Internal control/status words

Function diagrams
ZSW sequence ctrl
Bit No. Status word sequence control r0899

From the control unit [2610] 0 1 = Ready to power-up r0899.0

From the control unit [2610] 1 1 = Ready to operate (DC link loaded, pulses blocked) r0899.1

From the control unit [2610] 2 1 = Operation enabled (drive follows n_set) r0899.2

3 Reserved

From the control unit [2610] 4 1 = No coast down active (OFF2 inactive) r0899.4

From the control unit [2610] 5 1 = No fast stop active (OFF3 inactive) r0899.5

From the control unit [2610] 6 1 = Power-on inhibit active r0899.6

7 Reserved

8 Reserved

Bit 9 = 1 --> Ready to exchange process data 9 1 = Control requested <1> r0899.9

10 Reserved
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

From the control unit [2610.4] 11 1 = Pulses enabled r0899.11

1 = Open holding brake (only for booksize units when the brake is
From the basic brake control (p0108.14 = 0) [2701.8] 12 r0899.12
connected to the power module)

From the basic brake control (p0108.14 = 0) [2701.8]

13 1 = Command, close holding brake r0899.13
From the expanded brake control/standstill detection (p0108.14 = 1) [2711.8]

From the expanded brake control/standstill detection (p0108.14 = 1) [2711.8] 14 1 = Pulse enable from the brake control r0899.14

From the expanded brake control/standstill detection (p0108.14 = 1) [2711.8] 15 1 = Enable setpoint from the brake control r0899.15

<1> The master system requests process data.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2503_de.vsd Function diagram
- 2503 -
Internal control/status words - status word sequence control 21.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 PROFIdrive bit
p0115[3] (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-56 2505 – Control word setpoint channel

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

STW setpoint channel

Bit No. Control word, setpoint channel r1198

Fixed setpoint selection, bit 0 p1020[C] (0)

(0) 0 1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 0 r1198.0 To fixed speed setpoints [3010.2]

Fixed setpoint selection, bit 1 p1021[C]

(0) 1 1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 1 r1198.1 To fixed speed setpoints [3010.2]

Fixed setpoint selection, bit 2 p1022[C]

(0) 2 1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 2 r1198.2 To fixed speed setpoints [3010.2]

Fixed setpoint selection, bit 3 p1023[C]

(0) 3 1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 3 r1198.3 To fixed speed setpoints [3010.2]

4 Reserved

p1110[C]
To direction of rotation limiting and
(0) 5 1 = Inhibit negative direction of rotation r1198.5
direction of rotation reversal [3040.3]
p1111[C]
To direction of rotation limiting and
(0) 6 1 = Inhibit positive direction of rotation r1198.6
direction of rotation reversal [3040.5]

7 Reserved

8 Reserved

9 Reserved

10 Reserved

Direction of rotation reversal p1113[C]

To direction of rotation limiting and
(0) 11 1 = Direction of rotation reversal r1198.11
direction of rotation reversal [3040.2]

Internal control/status words

12 Reserved

Motorized potentiometer, raise p1035[C]

(0) 13 1 = Motorized potentiometer, raise r1198.13 To the motorized potentiometer [3020.1]

Function diagrams
Motorized potentiometer, lower p1036[C]
(0) 14 1 = Motorized potentiometer, lower r1198.14 To the motorized potentiometer [3020.1]

Bypass RFG p1122[C]

(0) 15 1 = Bypass ramp-function generator r1198.15 To the setpoint channel [3060.1] [3070.3]
2-607

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2505_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2505 -
Internal control/status words - control word setpoint channel 17.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 1000.00 µs

Picture 2-57 2520 – Control word speed controller

2-608

Internal control/status words

Function diagrams
STW n controller
Bit No. Control word, speed controller Servo Vector r1406

0 Reserved - -

1 Reserved - -

2 Reserved - -

3 Reserved - -

n_ctrl integ stop p1476[C]

(0) 4 1 = speed controller, hold I component - D r1406.4 To the speed controller [6040.4]

n_ctrl integ set p1477[C]

(0) 5 1 = speed controller, set I component - D r1406.5 To the speed controller [6040.4]

6 Reserved - -

7 Reserved - -
Activation, TfS p1545[C]
To torque signals,
(0) 8 1 = Traverse to fixed endstop active D r1406.8
Motor stalled/locked [8012.5]

9 Reserved - -

10 Reserved - -
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Enable droop p1492[C]

(0) 11 1 = Droop enable - D r1406.11 To the speed setpoint, droop [6030.1]

Change over n/M_ctrl p1501[C] To the closed-loop speed control

(0) 12 1= Closed-loop torque control active D D r1406.12
[5060.1 and 6060.1]

13 Reserved - -

14 Reserved - -

15 Reserved - -

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2520_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2520 -
Internal control/status words - control word, speed controller 17.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[1] (125.00 µs)

Picture 2-58 2522 – Status word speed controller

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

ZSW n_ctrl
Bit No. Status word, speed controller Servo Vector r1407

0 1 = V/f control active D D

To the speed actual value and
From closed-loop speed control without encoder [5060.5] 1 1 = Sensorless operation active D D r1407.1 rotor position sensing,
Motor encoder (encoder 1) [4710.4] [6010.4]
1 = Torque control (closed-loop) [2520.7] r1406.12 To speed setpoint, droop [6030.5]
& 2
1 = Closed-loop torque control active D D r1407.2
To torque setpoint [6060.3]
Sensorless operation

Enable the speed controller from the sequence control [2610.4] 3 1 = Closed-loop speed control active - D r1407.3 To the speed controller [6040.8]

4 1 = DSC active D - r1407.4

<1> From the speed controller [5040.7] [6040.7] [5210.8] 5 1 = Speed controller, I component held D D r1407.5

<1> From the speed controller [5040.7] [6040.7] [5210.8] 6 1 = Speed controller, I component set D D r1407.6

Ramp-function generator tracking [3080.1]

From torque limiting [5610.4]
From the torque setpoint [6060.7]
7 1 = Torque limit reached D D r1407.7 Speed controller [5040.7] [6040.4]
Motor locked/stalled [8012.5]
From torque limiting [5610.4]
From the torque setpoint [6060.7]
8 1 = Torque limiting, upper, active D D r1407.8

From torque limiting [5610.4]

From the torque setpoint [6060.7]
9 1 = Torque limiting, lower, active D D r1407.9 To the torque setpoint [6060.7]

From the speed setpoint, droop [6030.3] 10 1 = Droop enabled - D r1407.10

Speed limiting [5030.8]

<1> Speed controller [5210.3] 11 1 = Speed setpoint limited D D r1407.11
Speed setpoint, droop [6030.4][6030.5]

Internal control/status words

From the expanded ramp-function generator [3070.2] 12 1 = Ramp-function generator set - D r1407.12

13 Reserved - -

Function diagrams
14 Reserved - -

15 Reserved - -

<1> Only for closed-loop servo control without encoder.

2-609

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2522_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2522 -
Internal control/status words - status word, speed controller 17.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[3] (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-59 2534 – Status word monitoring functions 1

2-610

Internal control/status words

Function diagrams
ZSW monitoring functions 1
Bit No. Status word, monitoring functions 1 r2197

0 Reserved

<1>
From speed signals [8010.4] 1 |n_act| <= speed threshold value 2 (p2155) r2197.1

1 2 |n_act| > speed threshold value 2 (p2155) <1> r2197.2

From speed signals [8010.8] 3 1 = n_act >= 0 r2197.3

4 Reserved

5 Reserved

From speed signals [8010.4] 6 n_act > n_max r2197.6

From speed signals [8010.8] 7 1 = Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off r2197.7

8 Reserved

9 Reserved

10 Reserved
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

<1> nact = smoothed speed actual value r2169 [8010.2].

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2534_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2534 -
Internal control/status words - status word, monitoring functions 1 08.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[3] (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-60 2536 – Status word monitoring functions 2

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

ZSW monitoring functions 2

Bit No. Status word, monitoring functions 2 r2198

0 Reserved

1 Reserved

2 Reserved

3 Reserved

<1> From speed signals [8010.8] 4 1 = |n_set| < p2161 r2198.4

<1> From speed signals [8010.8] 5 1 = n_set > 0 r2198.5

From torque signals, motor locked/stalled [8012.8] 6 1 = Motor locked r2198.6

From torque signals, motor locked/stalled [8012.8] 7 1 = Motor stalled r2198.7

8 Reserved

9 Reserved

From torque signals, motor locked/stalled [8012.3] 10 1 = Torque setpoint < toque threshold value 1 (p2174) r2198.10

From load monitoring [8013.8] 11 1 = Load monitoring signals an alarm r2198.11

Internal control/status words

From load monitoring [8013.8] 12 1 = Load monitoring signals a fault r2198.12

13 Reserved

Function diagrams
14 Reserved

15 Reserved
<1> Only for activated function module "expanded
messages/monitoring functions" (r0108.17 = 1).
2-611

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2536_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2536 -
Internal control/status words - status word, monitoring functions 2 20.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 PROFIdrive bit
4000.00 µs

Picture 2-61 2537 – Status word monitoring functions 3

2-612

Internal control/status words

Function diagrams
ZSW monitoring functions 3
Bit No. Status word, monitoring functions 3 r2199

From speed signals [8010.4] 0 1 = |n_act| < speed threshold value 3 (p2161) <1> r2199.0

From speed signals [8010.5] 1 1 = f or n comparison value reached or exceeded (p2141) r2199.1

2 Reserved

3 Reserved

From speed signals [8010.8] 4 1 = Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_on r2199.4

1 = Ramp-up/ramp-down completed
From speed signals [8010.7] 5 r2199.5 [8012.1]
0 = Ramp-function generator active

6 Reserved

7 Reserved

8 Reserved

9 Reserved

10 Reserved
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

From torque signals [8012.5] 11 1 = Torque utilization < torque threshold value 2 (p2194) r2199.11

12 Reserved

13 Reserved

14 Reserved

15 Reserved

<1>n_act = smoothed speed actual value r2169 [8010.2].

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2537_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2537 -
Internal control/status words - status word, monitoring functions 3 08.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 PROFIdrive bit
4000.00 µs

Picture 2-62 2546 – Control word, faults/alarms

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

STW faults/alarms
Bit No. Control word, faults/alarms r2138

0 Reserved

1 Reserved

2 Reserved

3 Reserved

4 Reserved

1 acknowledge p2103[C] 5 Reserved

2 acknowledge p2104[C] 6 Reserved

3 acknowledge p2105[C] 1 7 = Acknowledge faults r2138.7 To the fault buffer [8060.1]

Pulse generator 8 Reserved

9 Reserved

p2112[C] (0)
10 = External alarm 1 (A07850) r2138.10 To the alarm buffer [8065.1]

p2116[C] (0)
11 = External alarm 2 (A07851) r2138.11 To the alarm buffer [8065.1]

Internal control/status words

p2117[C] (0)
12 = External alarm 3 (A07852) r2138.12 To the alarm buffer [8065.1]

p2106[C] (0)
13 = External fault 1 (F07860) r2138.13 To the fault buffer [8060.1]

Function diagrams
p2107[C] (0)
14 = External fault 2 (F07861) r2138.14 To the fault buffer [8060.1]

p2108[C] (0)
15 = External fault 3 (F07862) r2138.15 To the fault buffer [8060.1]
2-613

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF, SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2546_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2546 -
Internal control/status words - control word, faults/alarms 17.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 ZSW faults/alarms 1
Source sampling time

Picture 2-63 2548 – Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2

Bit No. Status word, faults/alarms 1 r2139
Refer to [1020.7]
2-614

Internal control/status words

Function diagrams
0 1 = Acknowledgement running r2139.0

1
Reserved
2

From the fault buffer [8060.6] 3 1 = Fault present r2139.3

4
Reserved
5

6 1 = Internal signal 1 present r2139.6

From the alarm buffer [8065.4] 7 1 = Alarm present r2139.7

8 1 = Internal signal 2 present r2139.8

9
... Reserved
15

ZSW faults/alarms 2
Bit No. Status word, faults/alarms 2 r2135

0 1 = Fault, encoder 1 r2135.0

1 1 = Fault, encoder 2 r2135.1

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

2 1 = Fault, encoder 3 r2135.2

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

3
... Reserved
11

From the thermal monitoring, motor [8016.8] 12 1 = Fault motor overtemperature r2135.12

From the thermal monitoring, power module [8014.8] 13 1 = Fault, thermal overload, power module r2135.13

From the thermal monitoring, motor [8016.8] 14 1 = Alarm motor overtemperature r2135.14

From the thermal monitoring, power module [8014.8] 15 1 = Alarm, thermal overload, power module r2135.15

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF, SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2548_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2548 -
Internal control/status words - status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2 28.06.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 4000.00 µs

Picture 2-64 2578 – Control word command data set selection (CDS)
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

STW CDS selected

Bit No. Control word, command data set selection (CDS) r0836

p0810
0 1 = CDS selection, bit 0 r0836.0

p0811
1 1 = CDS selection, bit 1 r0836.1

p0812
2 1 = CDS selection, bit 2 r0836.2

p0813
3 1 = CDS selection, bit 3 r0836.3

4 Reserved

5 Reserved

6 Reserved

7 Reserved

8 Reserved

9 Reserved

10 Reserved

11 Reserved

Internal control/status words

12 Reserved

13 Reserved

Function diagrams
14 Reserved

15 Reserved
2-615

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF, SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2578_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2578 -
Internal control/status words - control word, command data set selection (CDS) 04.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Function diagrams
Sequence control

2.8 Sequence control

Function diagrams

2610 – Control unit 2-617

2614 – Missing enable signals 2-618

2-616  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 p0857... p0862 POWER ON <1> Fault
<2> 2000.00 µs

Picture 2-65 2610 – Control unit

Pulse enable
&
HW[2701.8] with OFF1 - or ...
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

S1: Power-on inhibit Drive at OFF3

ZSWA.06 = 1, ZSWA.11 = 0 standstill response
From all states
ZSWA.00/01/02 = 0
Drive at
Pulses inhibited standstill
<4> <5>
"0 = OFF" (STWA.00)
<4> <5> "0 = Coast down" (STWA.01)
"0 = Coast down" (STWA.01) <4><5> "0 = Coast down"
(STWA.01) <4> <5>
"0 = Fast stop" (STWA.02) <4> <5> & "0 = Fast stop" (STWA.02)
<4> <5>
≥1 0 V at EP terminals,
≥1 Pulse enable HW
[2701.8] [2711.8]
&
24 V at EP terminals, motor module [2614] r0046.8 motor module
0 V at EP terminals, motor module
"Commissioning completed" (p0010 = 0 and p0009 = 0)
<5>
S2: Ready to power-on <5>
"0 = Fast stop" S5b: Fast stop
ZSWA.00 = 1, ZSWA.11 = 0
(STWA.02)
&
- Main contactor de-energized (open)
- Wait for power-on or jogging
<4> <5> ZSWA.00/01 = 1, ZSWA.11 = 1
ZSWA.02/06 = 0
Bring the drive to n = 0 along the
"0 = Coast down" fast stopping ramp or torque limit,
(STWA.01) <4> <5> Pulse enable then inhibit the pulses
"0 = OFF" "0 = OFF" HW[2701.8][2711.8] &
"0 = Fast stop"
(STWA.02) <4> <5> ≥1 Jog 1
Jog 2
≥1 Jog 1
Jog 2
& Drive at
0 V at EP terminals, Drive at standstill
motor module standstill
<5>
S3: Ready
<5>
ZSWA.00/01 = 1, ZSWA.11 = 0
Line contactor S5a: Ramp stop
ZSWA.02/06 = 0
CLOSE
S5c: Jog down ramp n_min_jog
Close line contactor Shutdown speed
r0863.1 <3> ZSWA.00/01 = 1
Wait for pre-charging for jogging
ZSWA.11 = 1
<5> ZSWA.02/06 = 0 - Drive is ramped-down (via
t_delay_jog
"Enable operation" (STWA.03) Ramp-down to n = 0, then the ramp-function generator) delay time
"0 = Coast down" inhibit the pulses for power-down
"Ready" from motor module to |n| < min_jog = 0 - then
(STWA.01) after jogging
≥1 "Enable operation" delay time 0.0 ... 60.0 s
<4> <5> De-magnetization completed & (STWA.03)
&
0 V at EP terminals, (r0046.27 = 0)
motor module
<5> Jog 1 Jog 1
"0 = OFF"
S4: Operation No jogging operation
& ≥1 Jog 2 &
Infeed ready ZSWA.00/01/02 = 1 Jog 2 Jog mode
p0864 ZSWA.11 = 1
OFF2 (has priority over jogging)

Function diagrams
ZSWA.06 = 0

Sequence control
From the line module or A_INFEED (r0863.0) [8932] - Pulses enabled
- Controller enabled
<1> POWER ON = 24 V electronics power supply OFF --> ON or RESET button. - If not jog operation
Setpoint enabled
<2> The control unit is implemented according to the PROFIdrive profile. OFF3
<3> If an Active Infeed is being used, this closes the line contactor (refer to [8932]) and not the DO SERVO/VECTOR. (has priority over jogging) Faults F07802...F07300 Missing enable
[2614]
F6000 signals
<4> These control commands can also be triggered by a fault response.
2-617

<5> STWA.xx = control word, sequence control, bit xx (r0898) [2501]; ZSWA.xx = status word, sequence control bit xx (r0899) [2503].

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2610_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2610 -
Sequence control - control unit 14.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Missing enable signals that prevent the drive going into operation (these can be detected at the ZSW sequence control r0899.2 = 1 [2503]). 2000.00 µs

Picture 2-66 2614 – Missing enable signals

2-618

Sequence control
Function diagrams
Bit No. Meaning r0046
0 1 = OFF1, enable missing

1 1 = OFF2, enable missing

2 1 = OFF3, enable missing

3 1 = Enable operation missing 1 = Internal RFG missing [3060.2]

≥1 [3070.2]
5 1 = STOP2, enable missing

6 1 = STOP1, enable missing

8 1 = EP terminals, enable missing

9 1 = Infeed, enable missing

10 1 = Ramp-function generator enable missing

11 1 = Ramp-function generator start missing

12 1 = Setpoint, enable missing

16 1 = OFF1, enable, internal missing

17 1 = OFF2, enable, internal missing

18 1 = OFF3, enable, internal missing

19 1 = Pulse enable, internal missing

21 1 = STOP2, enable internal missing ≥1

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Fault with OFF3 response

22 1 = STOP1, enable internal missing

27 1 = De-magnetization not completed <900>

[3060.2]
0 = Internal fast stop [3060.4]
28 1 = Open brake missing
[3070.2]
[3070.4]
30 1 = Function generator with current input active

31 1 = Jog setpoint active

<900> Only for VECTOR.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2614_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2614 -
Sequence control - missing enable signals 20.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Function diagrams
Motor holding brake

2.9 Motor holding brake

Function diagrams

2701 – Basic brake control (r0108.14 = 0) 2-620

2704 – Expanded brake control/standstill detection (r0108.14 = 1) 2-621

2707 – Expanded brake control/opening and closing a brake (r0108.14 = 1) 2-622

2711 – Expanded brake control/signal outputs (r0108.14 = 1) 2-623

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 2-619

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Background

Picture 2-67 2701 – Basic brake control (r0108.14 = 0) Refer to [1020.7]

2-620

Motor holding brake

Function diagrams
0.000...10.000 s Command, close holding brake
p1228 (0.000) RESET
r0899.13 [2503.3]
(Q=0) Q

n_act smooth <2> Close "normal" brake

1 <1> Open brake [2814.2]
SET
r0063 Q p1215 = 0
(Q=1)
[4710.6] 0 T 0 ≥1 Close brake RESET 1 = Close holding brake
[6010.6] & ≥1 (Q=0) Q
[2503.3]

Open brake
SET 1 = Open holding brake
n_stop n_thresh Q [2503.3]
<5> (Q=1)
0.0...210 000.0 RPM
0.000...300.000 s 1 = Open holding brake
p1226 (20.0)
p1227 (4.000) <3> r0899.12 [2503.3]
0...10 000 ms
<6>
p1217 (100)
n_set before filter 1
r0060
[5020.4] for SERVO 0 T 0 T 0
[6030.2] for VECTOR
RESET
OFF 1 present ≥1 (Q=0) Q

OFF 3 present
≥1 Pulse enable, HW
[2610.5]
SET [2610.8]
& (Q=1)
Q [2711.1]
[5730.4]
Coast down not active (r0899.4)
[2503.7]
Pulse enable X21
<4> RESET
[2503.7]
Operation enabled (r0898.3) & 1 (Q=0) Q
Power-on inhibit active (r0899.6) <1> <2>
[2503.7] p1215 = 2
SET
(Q=1)
Q ≥1 RESET Q
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

(Q=0)
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Magnetizing completed T 0 SET

r0056.4
& (Q=1)
Q

Stop 2 enable internal missing

<1> Motor holding brake configuration ;0 = No motor holding brake used.
r0046.21 [2614.6] <7>
1 = Motor holding brake the same as sequential control. 0...10 000 ms p1216 (100)
2 = Motor holding brake always open. <3>
3 = Motor holding brake the same as sequence control, brake connection can be parameterized using BICO.
<2> Priority assignment (high -> low): p1215, p0855, sequence control.
<3> If p1215 = 0, 2 --> t = 0 ms. p0855 1 = Unconditionally open the holding brake
<4> Only when Safety Integrated is activated (Double Motor Module: X22, Chassis: X41).
[2501.7] r0898.7
<5> For p1227 = 300 s, the monitoring is de-activated.
<6> If an external motor holding brake is used, then p1215 should be set to 3 and r0899.12 should be interconnected as control signal.
<7> r0046.21 = 0, as long as r0046.0 = 0 (OFF1 enable missing or power-on inhibit).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2701_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2701 -
Brake control - basic brake control (r0108.14 = 0) 05.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Background

Picture 2-68 2704 – Expanded brake control/standstill detection (r0108.14 = 1) 0.000...10.000 s Brake, threshold value Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

p1228 (0.000) fallen below

<1>
r1229.7
Standstill threshold
n_act smooth p1225 1 T 0
r0063 (r0063)
[4710.6] 0

n_stop n_thresh <2> Brake monitoring time

0.0...210 000.0 RPM 0.000...300.000 s expired
p1226 (20.0) p1227 (4.000)
r1229.8

n_set before filter 1

r0060
[5020.4] for SERVO 0 T 0
1 & SET
(Q=1)
Q
Close brake from standstill detection [2707.1]
[2711.1]
[6030.2] for VECTOR
p1275.02 (0) p1275.03 (0) RESET
<2> Q
(Q=0)
Brake to standstill 0.000...300.000 s
p1224[0] 0 p1276 (300.000)
(0)
1 1
p1224[1] 0
(0) T 0
<3> -1 1
p1224[2]
(0)
p1224[3]
(0)
1 1

OFF1 present

OFF3 present

<1> Shutdown threshold of the standstill detection. Here (e.g. when using a brake), another criterion to
cancel the pulses can be selected other than the speed actual value. Otherwise, we recommend that
the factory setting is kept.

Motor holding brake

Function diagrams
<2> For p1276 = 300.000 s the timer is de-activated, i.e. the timer output is always 0.
Note: If a motor is operated with a brake that may not be closed while the motor is rotating, then the
monitoring time of both timers must be set to 300 s.

<3> For operation without brake, p1224[0...3] must be 0 (factory setting) in order to avoid mutual effects
with the sequence control.
2-621

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2704_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2704 -
Brake control - expanded brake control/standstill detection (r0108.14 = 1) 18.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Background

Picture 2-69 2707 – Expanded brake control/opening and closing a brake (r0108.14 = 1) Close brake from standstill detection
Refer to [1020.7]
2-622

Motor holding brake

Function diagrams
[2704.8] <2>

p1275.00 (0) p1275.01 (0)

Immediately close brake
p1219[0] 0 <1> Close brake (internal)
(0)
1 1
p1215 = 0
1 [2711.1]

p1219[1] 0
(0)
1
p1219[2]
(0)
1
1
Request pulse enable Pulses or speed controller inhibited p1219[3]
[2711.8]
& 1 r1229.9 (r1229.9)
p0856 1 = Enable speed controller
[2501.7] r0898.12

Brake open threshold

0.00...200.00% 0.000...300.000 s
p1221(0.00) p1277(0.000) Braking threshold exceeded <2>
Brake open threshold r1229.6 <1>
p1220 p1215 = 2
1
(1)
Open brake (internal)
Open brake
0 T 0 Magnetizing completed
r0056.4
& 1 [2711.1]

p1218[0]
(1)

p1218[1]
(1)
&
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

p0855 1 = Unconditionally open the holding brake

OR logic operation
[2501.7] r0898.7 Brake, result of
p1279[0] the OR
(0) logic operation
<1> Motor holding brake configuration
0 = No brake or brake always closed (brake connected to the power module) p1279[1]
(0)
1 1229.10

1 = Brake control active (brake connected to the power module)

2 = Brake always open (brake connected to the power module) <3>
3 = Brake control active (brake connection can be interconnected using BICO). AND logic operation
Brake, result of
Note: p1279[2] the AND
Not all power modules have the ability to connect a motor brake. In this case p1215 is set to 3 and the brake is controlled through (0) logic operation
a digital output (e.g. TM31).
<2> Priority assignment (high -> low): p1215, p1219, p0855, close brake from the standstill detection, p1218. p1279[3]
(0)
& 1229.11

<3> These blocks/modules are evaluated with the same sampling rate as the brake control and therefore may only be
used to individually adapt the brake control.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2707_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2707 -
Brake control - expanded brake control/opening and closing a brake (r0108.14 = 1) 20.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Coast down not active (r0899.4)
[2503.7] Background

Picture 2-70 2711 – Expanded brake control/signal outputs (r0108.14 = 1)

Pulse enable X21
<4>
Enable operation (r0898.3) & Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

[2503.7]
Power-on inhibit (r0899.6) Request pulse enable
[2503.7] [2707.1]

Close brake from standstill detection

[2704.8] 1
Brake closed, feedback signal r1229.5
<3> p1222 Brake does not close
(0)
& & A07932

Brake with Brake is being used

feedback signal p1215 > 0
p1275.5 Brake is being used
0...10 000 ms
p1217 (100) & p1215 > 0
No OFF1 0 Pulse enable, HW [2610.5]
No OFF3 & & [2610.8]
<2> [5730.4]
Close brake T 0 0
1
0
≥1 1 Pulse enable from the brake control
[2704.8] 1
From the standstill detection r0899.14 [2503.3]
1
1 Pulse enable from the expanded brake control
Brake open, feedback signal r1229.3
p1223
<3>
(1) & A07931
Brake does not open
0...10 000 ms r1229.4
p1216 (100) Setpoint enable
from the Setpoint 2 enable
0 brake control p1152
1 Enable speed setpoint
0
T 0 r0899.15 (r0899.15)
& r0898.6
& 1 [2503.3]
Enable n_set Close "normal" brake
1
[2501.3] p1142[C] [2814.2]
<5> (1) Command, close holding brake
Close brake (internal) RESET
[2707.8] r0899.13 [2503.3]
(Q=0) Q

Command, open brake

Open brake (internal) SET
[2707.8] Q r1229.1
(Q=1)
<6>
<1> Operating mode, braking control
0 = No brake or brake or brake always closed (brake connected to the power module)
1 = Brake control active (brake connected to the power module)

Motor holding brake

2 = Brake always open (brake connected to the power module)

Function diagrams
3 = Brake control active (brake connection can be interconnected using BICO)
Note: Not all power modules have the ability to connect a motor brake. In this case p1215 is set to 3 and the brake is controlled through a digital output (e.g. TM31).
<2> This pulse enable path only works for operation with brake (p1215 > 0).
<3> When braking with a feedback signal, the inverted signal is interconnected to the BICO input for the second feedback signal. The brake switching times are set in p1216 and p1217.
<4> Only when Safety Integrated is activated (Double Motor Module: X22, Chassis: X41).
<5> When the master control is retrieved, entered from STARTER or AOP.
2-623

<6> If an external motor holding brake is used, then p1215 should be set to 3 and r1229.1 should be used as control signal.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2711_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2711 -
Brake control - expanded brake control/signal outputs (r0108.14 = 1) 15.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Function diagrams
Safety Integrated

2.10 Safety Integrated

Function diagrams

2800 – Parameter manager 2-625

2802 – Monitoring functions and faults/alarms 2-626

2804 – Status words 2-627

2810 – Safe standstill (SH) 2-628

2814 – Safe brake control (SBC) 2-629

2-624  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 r9780 CU/r9880 MM

Picture 2-71 2800 – Parameter manager

Changing safety parameters
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

<3>

Safety commissioning SI Act_checksum SI reference_checksum

mode [2810.3] [2802.1] CU CU
--> select SH p9798 p9799

<1>
Safety parameterizing enable =
Safety Integrated commissioning
p0010 = 95
Password input
Safety parameters Safety parameters
SI password input
p9761
& p9601 ... p9899 can & p9601 ... p9899
be changed are valid
Checksum
= Check for safety
SI password new x y parameters
p9762
<1>

SET Effective password

= y=x
SI password, confirm
p9763 <2>

<1> = <1>

p9898 p9899
SI Act_ SI reference_
checksum MM checksum MM

Resetting safety parameters <3>

p0010 ≠ 95
Inhibiting safety functions Safety commissioning
p9601 = 0
Safety parameters
mode exited
[2810.3] p9601 ... p9899

Function diagrams
& can be reset to the

Safety Integrated
p9801 = 0 factory setting using
[2810.3]
p0970, p3900
<1> Comparator, refer to [1021]
<2> Analog signal memory, refer to [1021]
<3> Reference checksum must be the same as the actual checksum.
2-625

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2800_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2800 -
Safety Integrated - parameter manager 07.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 r9780 CU/r9880 MM

Picture 2-72 2802 – Monitoring functions and faults/alarms

2-626

Safety Integrated
Function diagrams
Safety Integrated version Monitoring clock cycle

CU MM CU MM
r9770 r9870 r9780 r9880
p9658 (CU)
p9858 (MM)
F01611
[2810.3] SH terminal CU Safety monitoring functions F30611
1 = faults with response "NONE" T 0
STOP F
[2810.3] SH terminal MM
Timer for emergency
retraction
[2800.3] Safety commissioning mode r9772.15 (CU)
faults/alarms
[2804.2]
CU: F/A01600 ... 01699
[2810.6] DIAG_U MM: F/A30600 ... 30699
r9872.15 (MM)
r9772.10 (CU)
[2804.5] ≥1 [2804.2]
[2810.6] DIAG_L
1 = Faults with response - "immediate pulse cancellation" r9872.10 (MM)
[2804.5]
[2814.7] BR_DIAG

1 = Faults with response - "immediate pulse cancellation"

Additional diagnostics - that cannot be acknowledged
information

1 = STOP A
CU MM CU MM To safe standstill
r9794 r9894 r9795 r9895 [2810.3]

Cross monitoring list Diagnostics for STOP F To safe brake

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

control [2814.1]

F01600/F30600
≥1 "STOP A initiated"

r9772.9 (CU)
[2804.2]

r9872.9 (MM)
[2804.5]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2802_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2802 -
Safety Integrated - monitoring functions and faults/alarms 07.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 r9780 CU/r9880 MM

Picture 2-73 2804 – Status words Status word Safety Integrated Status word Safety Integrated Status word Safety Integrated
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

control unit motor module control unit and motor module

Bit No. ZSW SI CU r9772 Bit No. ZSW SI MM r9872 Bit No. ZSW SI CU+MM r9773

[2810.3]
[2810.3] 0 1 = SH selected (0 V at the DI terminal) 0 1 = SH selected (0 V at the EP+ terminal) & 0 1 = SH at CU and MM selected

[2810.6]
[2810.7] 1 1 = SH active (DIAG_U = 0) 1 1 = SH active (DIAG_L = 0) & 1 1 = SH from CUd MM active

[2814.3] 4 1 = Safe brake control requested [2814.3] 4 1 = Safe brake control requested
... Reserved

... Reserved
... Reserved [2810.5] 31 1 = The shutdown paths must be tested

1 = STOP A cannot be acknowledged, 1 = STOP A cannot be acknowledged,

[2802.7] 9
active
[2802.7] 9
active
Status word Safety Integrated
Safe standstill group
[2802.8] 10 1 = STOP A active [2802.8] 10 1 = STOP A active
Bit No. ZSW SI group SH r9774

... Reserved
... Reserved r9773.0
Group n & 0 1 = SH selected in a group

[2802.5] 15 1 = STOP F active [2802.5] 15 1 = STOP F active r9773.1

Group n & 1 1 = SH active in a group

... Reserved

r9773.31
1 = The shutdown paths of the group
Group n & 31
have to be tested
Functions available on the CU and MM Functions available on the CU and MM
from the CU perspective from the MM perspective

Bit No. SI, common functions r9771 Bit No. SI, common functions r9871

0 1 = SH supported through terminals 0 1 = SH supported through terminals

Function diagrams
1 1 = SBC supported 1 1 = SBC supported

Safety Integrated
... Reserved
... Reserved
2-627

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2804_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2804 -
Safety Integrated - status words 10.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 [2804.2]
Control unit 1 = SH selected on CU r9780 CU
Motor module r9880 MM

Picture 2-74 2810 – Safe standstill (SH)

M r9772.0 Timer for forced
2-628

Safety Integrated
Function diagrams
<3> checking procedure 1 = SH on CU active
+24 V A01699 r9772.1
0 = Safe <2> T 0
r0722.0 1 "Shutdown 2804.2]
standstill CU paths have
p9620 to be tested"
r0722.3 (0) T 1

DRIVE CLiQ
& 1 = Shutdown paths +5 V
0...9000 h have to be tested
r0722.4
1 = STOP A [2802.8]
≥1 p9659(8) r9773.31 Shutdown path
1 = Enable SH_CU from CU
[2804.7] Upper IGBT
p9601.0 0 = SH_CU + Vdc
r0722.7
& 0 = Request pulse
<5>
bridge halves

CU terminals that can 1 = Safety commissioning mode cancellation CU to SBC [2814.2]

be used for SH [2800.3]
<1>
Monitoring for simultaneous
Redundant functions occurrence
<4>
Gating unit U
F01611 (CU) Safe pulse cancellation
V
F30611 (MM) ~
M

W
Tolerance time
0...2000 ms (500 ms) +5 V
p9650(CU)
Shutdown path
p9850(MM)
from MM Lower IGBT
0 = SH_MM bridge halves
Motor module <5>
[2804.5]
to SBC
1 = SH selected on MM
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

[2814.2]
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

r9872.0
"Enable 1 = SH active on MM
pulses r9872.1 1 - Vdc
terminals" 1 [2804.5]

X21/22 EP + 1 = "SH active"

0 = Request pulse for sequence control &
& cancellation MM Gating unit
1 = STOP A [2802.8]
≥1 [2802.1][2814.2] DIAG_L
+24 V 1 = Enable SH_MM
[2802.1][2814.2] DIAG_U
p9801.0
EP M
& <1> One terminal can be used for several drives to form a group.
<2> Switch-on delay according to [1024], starts when the "request pulse cancelation CU" is withdrawn.
M 1 = Safety commissioning mode <3> Value range: p9620 = 0 or r0722.0 ... r0722.7.
[2800.3] <4> Redundant functions in the control unit (CU) and motor module (MM).
<5> Transistors inhibited for a "0" signal.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2810_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2810 -
Safety Integrated - safe standstill (SH) 28.05.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Control unit
r9780 CU

Picture 2-75 2814 – Safe brake control (SBC)

Enable signals for SBC CU 0
F07930 "Incorrect brake control"
>0 1 = "SBC enabled"
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Safety enable p9601

F01630 "Incorrect safety brake control, CU"
1
&
=1
SBC enable p9602
1 = "Fault, brake control"
Causes for "close brake"
0 = SH_CU
From the SH ≥1 0 = "SBC requested"
shutdown paths
[2810.6] 1
0 = SH_MM Safety Logic CU

DIAG_U & 1 = SBC

0 = Pulses requested
cancelled [2810.7] r9772.4
DIAG_L 2804.2]

BR1* BR1 BR2* BR_DIAG

Safety fault
1 = STOP A 0 = "SBC selected"
[2802.8]
Close "normal" brake from the basic brake control [2701.8]
Close "normal" brake from the expanded brake control [2711.8]
DRIVE CLiQ DRIVE-CLiQ controller
BR2*
Motor module r9880 MM
Causes for "safely close brake"
Diagnostics
0 = SH_CU signal
From the SH 0 = "SBC selected" BR1* BR1 BR2 BR_DIAG
shutdown paths Upper gating control channel
[2810.6]
0 = SH_MM +24 V <1>
BR+

0 = Pulses
DIAG_U &
cancelled BR1
[2810.7]
DIAG_L ~
M

Safety Logic MM
1 = Transistor
Safety fault BR_DIAG [2802.1]
conductive
[2802.8]
1 = STOP A
≥1 0 = "SBC requested" BR-
<1>
1
Enable signals for SBC MM M
<1> Both transistors

Function diagrams
conductive --> 24 V at

Safety Integrated
>0
Safety enable p9801 1 = SBC BR2 the brake--> Brake
1 = Fault, brake control
opened Outputs BR+
& requested
and BR- are only
=1 r9872.4 Lower gating control channel
SBC enable p9802 available for compact
[2804.5]
F30630 drive untis.
1 = "SBC enabled" & "Incorrect safety brake control, MM"
2-629

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_2814_en.vsd Function diagram
- 2814 -
Safety Integrated - safe brake control (SBC) 14.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Function diagrams
Setpoint channel

2.11 Setpoint channel

Function diagrams

3010 – Fixed speed setpoints 2-631

3020 – Motorized potentiometer 2-632

3030 – Main/supplementary setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging 2-633

3040 – Direction of rotation limitating and direction of rotation reversal 2-634

3050 – Suppression bandwidth and speed limiting 2-635

3060 – Basic ramp-function generator 2-636

3070 – Expanded ramp-function generator 2-637

3080 – Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking 2-638

3090 – Dynamic Servo Control (DSC) 2-639

2-630  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 p0115[3] (Drive Object)

Picture 2-76 3010 – Fixed speed setpoints p1020 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 0 Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

[2505.7] 1198.0 <100>

<101>
0.000 0 0 0 0
p1021 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 1
From the [2505.7] 1198.1 Fixed speed setpoint 1
control word, -210 000.000...210 000.000 RPM 0 0 0 1
setpoint p1001[D] (0.000) p1001[D]
p1022 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 2 Fixed speed setpoint 2
channel
[2505.7] 1198.2 -210 000.000...210 000.000 RPM 0 0 1 0
p1002[D] (0.000) p1002[D]
Fixed speed setpoint 3
p1023 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 3 -210 000.000...210 000.000 RPM 0 0 1 1
[2505.7] 1198.3 p1003[D] (0.000) p1003[D]
Fixed speed setpoint 4
-210 000.000...210 000.000 RPM 0 1 0 0
p1004[D] (0.000) p1004[D]
Fixed speed setopoint 5
-210 000.000...210 000.000 RPM 0 1 0 1
p1005[D] (0.000) p1005[D]
Fixed speed setpoint 6
-210 000.000...210 000.000 RPM 0 1 1 0
p1006[D] (0.000) p1006[D]
Fixed speed setpoint 7
-210 000.000...210 000.000 RPM 0 1 1 1
Fixed speed setpoint, actual
p1007[D] (0.000) p1007[D]
Fixed speed setpoint 8 r1024
-210 000.000...210 000.000 RPM 1 0 0 0
p1008[D] (0.000) Fixed speed setpoint number actual
p1008[D]
Fixed speed setpoint 9 0...15
-210 000.000...210 000.000 RPM 1 0 0 1 r1197
p1009[D] (0.000) p1009[D]
Fixed speed setpoint 10
-210 000.000...210 000.000 RPM 1 0 1 0
p1010[D] (0.000) p1010[D]
Fixed speed setpoint 11
-210 000.000...210 000.000 RPM 1 0 1 1
p1011[D] (0.000) p1011[D]
Fixed speed setpoint 12
-210 000.000...210 000.000 RPM 1 1 0 0
p1012[D] (0.000) p1012[D]
Fixed speed setpoint 13
-210 000.000...210 000.000 RPM 1 1 0 1

Function diagrams
p1013[D] (0.000) p1013[D]

Setpoint channel
Fixed speed setpoint 14
-210 000.000...210 000.000 RPM 1 1 1 0
p1014[D] (0.000) p1014[D]
<100> For SERVO, the following applies: Only for activated Fixed speed setpoint 15
function module "setpoint channel" (r0108.8 = 1). -210 000.000...210 000.000 RPM 1 1 1 1
p1015[D] (0.000) p1015[D]
<101> Pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112.
2-631

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_3010_en.vsd Function diagram
- 3010 -
Setpoint channel - fixed speed setpoints 27.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Mop configuration
p0115[3] (Drive Object)

Picture 2-77 3020 – Motorized potentiometer

0000...0111
p1030[D] (0110) Refer to [1020.7]
2-632

Setpoint channel
Function diagrams
<100>
Data save active <101>
0 The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p1040.

Ramp-function generator active 0 Without ramp generator in automatic mode (ramp-up/ramp-down time = 0).
1 With ramp generator in automatic mode.
Initial rounding-off active 0 Without initial rounding.
1 With initial rounding. The ramp-up/down time set is exceeded accordingly.

r1198.13
0
[2505.7] Old value is kept
p1035 Motorized potentiometer, raise 1
-1
(0)

r1198.14
[2505.7]
p1036 <2> <2>
Motorized potentiometer, lower
(0) Ramp-up time Ramp-down time
0.0...1 000.0 s 0.0...1 000.0 s
Manual/automatic
p1047[D] (10.0) p1048[D] (10.0)
00 p1041[C] (0)

Maximum speed Setpoint in front of y

-210 000.000...210 000.000 RPM 01 the ramp-function generator
p1082
p1037[D](n_max_Mot) r1045
0 Setpoint after the
<1> 0 motorized potentiometer
x y
Minimium sped -1 1 r1050
-210 000.000...210 000.000 RPM 10 x
1 e.g. to [3030.1]
p1038[D] (-n_max_Mot)
<1>
-p1082
y=0
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

11
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

n_max (reference value for

ramp-function generator p1082)
Inversion [3050.5]
Starting value
p1039[C] (0) Setting value -210 000.000...210 000.000 RPM
p1044[C] p1040[D] (0.000)
Automatic setpoint <3>

p1042[C] (0) Accept setpoint

<1> For the automatic commissioning, p1037 and p1038 are set to the
maximum motor speed or to the rated motor speed if n_max_mot has p1043[C]
not been specified.
<2> If the initial rounding-off is active (p2230.2 = 1), the selected ramp-up and ramp-down times are appropriately exceeded. 1: OFF1 enable missing (r0046.0)
<3> Only effective for p1030.0 = 0. [2614.6]
<100> For SERVO, the following applies: Only when the function module "setpoint channel" is activated (r0108.8 = 1).

<101> Pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_3020_en.vsd Function diagram
- 3020 -
Setpoint channel, - motorized potentiometer 27.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[3] (Drive Object)

Picture 2-78 3030 – Main/supplementary setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

<100>
<101>
<2>
p1055 Jog 1
[2501.7] r0898.8

p1056 Jog 2
[2501.7] r0898.9

Main setpoint
p1070[C]
(0) 0 0
+
+
Jog setpoint 1
r1073 r1078 -210 000.000...210 000.000 RPM 0 1
Main setp scal
p1058[D] (100.000)
p1071[C] n_set_1
<1> r0001 = 100 % [1021] (1) [3040.1]
Jog setpoint 2
-210 000.000...210 000.000 RPM 1 0
p1059[D] (100.000)

1 1
Supplementary setpoint
p1075[C]
(0) r1077
Keep old setpoint

Suppl setp scal

p1076[C]
<1> r0001 = 100 % [1021] (1)

Function diagrams
Setpoint channel
<1> To set a fixed scaling factor, a connection can be made to a fixed percentage value, e.g. p2900, p2901, p2930 [1021].
<2> Jogging is only possible from the mode "ready to power-up (S2)". For the sequence control, refer to [2610].
<100> For SERVO, the following applies: Only when the function module "setpoint channel" is activated (r0108.8 = 1).
<101>Pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112.
2-633

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_3030_de.vsd Function diagram
- 3030 -
Setpoint channel - main/supplementary setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging 27.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[3] (Drive Object)

Picture 2-79 3040 – Direction of rotation limitating and direction of rotation reversal Refer to [1020.7]
2-634

Setpoint channel
Function diagrams
<100>
<101>

p1111 1 = Inhibit positive direction of rotation

[2505.7] r1198.6

p1110 1 = Inhibit negative direction of rotation

[2505.5] r1198.5

p1113 1 = Dir of rot reversal

[2505.7] r1198.11

0 0 0 Setpoint after limiting

n_set_1
[3030.8] 0 r1114 [3050.1]
-1 1
0 1 1
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

<100> For SERVO, the following applies: Only when the function module "setpoint channel" is activated (r0108.8 = 1).

<101>Pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_3040_en.vsd Function diagram
- 3040 -
Setpoint channel - Direction of rotation limitating and direction of rotation reversal 27.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 1000.00 µs p0115[3] (Drive Object)

Picture 2-80 3050 – Suppression bandwidth and speed limiting n_limit_pos p1085[C] Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

0.000...210 000.000 RPM p1083 (1083) <100>

p1083[D] (210 000.000) <101>
Min
Suppression speed 0
3 0.000...210 000.000 RPM
Suppression speed 1 p1093[D] (0.000)
0.000...210 000.000 RPM
p1091[D] (0.000) Suppression speed
2 0.000...210 000.000 RPM <1> Suppression speed n_limit pos effective
p1092[D] (0.000) 4 0.000...210 000.000 RPM r1084
<1> Reference value [5030.5]
p1094[D] (0.000)
for the [5210.1]
<1> ramp-function [8010.2]
<1> Maximum speed generator [3020.6]
0...210 000.000 RPM [3060.4]
p1082[D] (n_max_Mot) [3070.4]
Minimum speed <2>
|y| Maximum
0.00...19 500.00 RPM
limiting
p1080[D] (0.00) ≥1 active
[3080.2]
<100> Package 2, version
y I
w r1112

Setpoint after limiting RFG setpoint at the input

x y x y
r1114 r1119
x
[3040.8] w -1 [3060.1]

w Speed limiting max

Speed limiting min

n_limit neg effective

<3>
w |x| r1087
-1
[5030.5]
[5210.1]
Suppression speed, bandwidth [8010.2]
0.000...210 000.000 RPM
p1101[D] (0.000) Limiting to
<3> negative values

n_limit_neg p1088[C] 0
-210 000.000...0.000 RPM p1086 (1086) Max

Function diagrams
p1086[D] (-210 000.000)

Setpoint channel
<1> A suppression speed of "0" de-activates the suppression speed bandwidth. 1000.00 µs
<2> The setting range of p1082 is limited to n_max_mot.
<3> If the drive is not stopped using the input setpoint, but using a controlled intervention, then after a subsequent run-up, the lower hysteresis branch is decisive.
<100> For SERVO, the following applies: Only when the function module "setpoint channel" is activated (r0108.8 = 1). For r0108.8 = 0, is valid to generated the speed limits [3095].
2-635

<101> Pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_3050_en.vsd Function diagram
- 3050 -
Setpoint channel - suppression bandwidth and speed limiting 27.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Ramp-up time Ramp-down time OFF3 ramp-down time
p0115[3] (Drive Object)

Picture 2-81 3060 – Basic ramp-function generator

0.000...999 999.000 s 0.000...999 999.000 s 0.000...600.000 s
p1120[D] (10.000) p1121[D] (10.000) p1135[D] (0.000) Refer to [1020.7]
2-636

Setpoint channel
Function diagrams
<101>

0 = Internal fast stop 0 1

[2614.8]

0 0
p1122 1 = Bypass ramp-function generator 0 1 0 1
[2505.7] r1198.15

Ramp flattening-off
[5610.5]
Tup Tdn
Freeze ramp-function generator

x Tup Tdn
0 0
p1082 0 n_set_4
RFG setpoint at the input 1
From the setpoint limiting x y [3080.1]
r1119
1 t 1
[3050.8] 0 -p1082
0
p1141 0 = Freeze ramp generator p1140 1 = Enable ramp-function generator
[2501.7] r0898.5 [2501.7] r0898.4
y
p1142 1 = Enable speed setpoint p1082
[2501.7] r0898.6
[2614.8] 1 = Internal RFG enable & t
0 = Internal fast stop -p1082
[2614.8]
Tup Tdn
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Set ramp-function generator Other status bits

p1143[C]
1
(0) Ramp-up active
Ramp-function generator setting value x
p1144[C] + – 0
y Ramp-down active
(0)

p1082

Ramp-function generator, status bits

Threshold for [3080.5]
[3050.5] n_max "Ramp-up/ramp-down active"
[3095.7] 0.00...1000.00 RPM
p1148[D] (19.80)
<101> Pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_3060_en.vsd Function diagram
- 3060 -
Setpoint channel - basic ramp-function generator 13.07.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 OFF3 OFF3 OFF3
Ramp-up time Ramp-down time Ramp-down time Initial rounding-off Final rounding-off Final rounding-off p0115[3] (Drive Object)
Picture 2-82 3070 – Expanded ramp-function generator
Initial rounding-off
0.000...999 999.000 s 0.000...999 999.000 s 0.000...600.000 s 0.000...30.000 s 0.000...30.000 s 0.000...30.000 s 0.000...30.000 s
Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

p1120[D] (10.000) p1121[D] (10.000) p1135[D] (0.000) p1130[D] (0.000) p1136[D] (0.000) p1131[D] (0.000) p1137[D] (0.000)
<101>

0 1 0 1 0 1
0 = Internal fast stop
[2614.8]

0 0
p1122 1 = Bypass ramp-function generator 0 1 0 1
[2505.7] r1198.15

Ramp flattening-off
[3080.6]

0
RFG setpoint at the input y IR FR
r1119
1
p1082
Tup Tdn Expanded ramp-function
[3050.8] x
generator y 1
n_set_5
p1141 0 = Freeze ramp generator y [3080.1]
0
[2501.7] r0898.5 1 0
x <2>

0
0
p1142 1 = Enable speed setpoint
[2501.7] r0898.6 1 = Ramp-function
p1140 generator enabled
[2614.8] 1 = Internal RFG enable &
0 = Internal fast stop -p1082 [2501.7] r0898.4
[2614.8]
<3> dy/dt IR FR IR FR IR FR IR FR
Rounding-off type
0...1
p1134[D] (0) t Other status bits
Set ramp-function generator
p1143[C]
(0) Ramp-up active
Ramp-function generator setting value Tup_eff <1> Tdn_eff <1>
p1144[C] 1
(0) Ramp-down active
x
+ – 0
<1> Effective ramp-up time: Tup_eff = Tup + (IR/2 + FR/2) Effective y
ramp-down time Tdn_eff = Tdn + (IR/2 + FR/2) p1082

Function diagrams
<2> Rounding-off is also effective at the zero crossover

Setpoint channel
n_max [3080.5]
<3> [3050.5] Ramp-function generator, status bits
p1134 = 0 --> The Rounding-off is always active. Overshoots can occur. Threshold for
[3095.7]
"Ramp-up/ramp-down active"
p1134 = 1 --> The Final rounding-off is not affected when the setpoint is suddenly reduced while ramping-up. 0.00...1000.00 RPM
p1148[D] (19.80)

<101> Pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112.

2-637

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_3070_en.vsd Function diagram
- 3070 -
Setpoint channel - expanded ramp-function generator 13.07.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Enable speed setpoint (from the STW sequence control)
p0115[3] (250.00 µs) r0898.6 p0115[3] (Drive Object)

Picture 2-83 3080 – Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking

Enable ramp-function generator (from the STW sequence control)
[2501.7] r0898.4 Refer to [1020.7]
2-638

Setpoint channel
Function diagrams
n_ctrl n_set 1
1 [2501.7] <101>
p1155[C]
1
<2> (0) <3> p1189.1 n_ctrl n_set 1/2
0
n_ctrl n_set 2 0 x,y x r1169
0
Ramp-function p1160[C]
0 + T1 y
x y 1 n_ctrl n_set sum
generator selection <2> (0)
+ [2701.1]
r1170
+ [5020.1]
t 0 + [6030.1]
RFG n_set at the output
RFG selection Interpolator [8010.5]
r1150 Setpoint channel
n_set_4 p1115 <5> p0108.8
from the basic ramp-function generator p1189.0
[3060.8]
x,y x
0 T1 y 0
x y 0
1
n_set_5 1 1
from the expanded ramp-function generator t 0
[3070.8]
Interpolator RFG tracking intensity
0.0...50.0
p1145[D] (1.3) Ramp-function generator tracking
<4>
Torque limit reached
Ramp flattening-off [3060.3]
[2522.7] r1407.7
[3070.3]

Ramp-function generator tracking active

r1199.5

Ramp-function generator status word

RFG ZSW
Bit Ramp-function generator status word r1199
<1> For p1145 > 0, the ramp-function generator tracking is activated when the torque limiting [3070.8] 0 Ramp-up active
responds. This means that the speed controller output only exceeds the torque limit by a
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

1 Ramp-down active
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

deviation that can be set using p1145.

2 Ramp-function generator active r1199.2 [8010.5]
<2> For OFF1/OFF3, the ramp-function generator ramp is effective: The ramp-function generator is ≥1 3 Ramp-function generator set
set to the actual value and stops the drive according to the ramp-down time p1121 or p1136. 4 Ramp-function generator held
Depending on p1115 either the basic ramp-function generator [3060] or the expanded ramp- [3080.8] 5 Ramp-function generator tracking active <1>
function generator [3070] is effective.
[3050.8] 6 Maximum limiting active
If the setpoint channel is not activated (p0108.8 = 0) for OFF1/OFF3, the down ramp of the basic
ramp-function generator is effective (refer to n_set_4 at [3060.8]). 7 Reserved
8 Reserved
<3> The Interpolator is only effective for the clock cycle synchronous PROFIBUS.
9 Reserved
<4> Behaviro of the response ramp of the torque limiting:
10 Reserved
p1145 = 0.0: No ramp-function generator tracking. The ramp-function generator ramp distances itself from the speed actual value.
p1145 = 1.0: The ramp-function generator ramp remains as close as possible to the speed actual value. 11 Reserved
p1145 > 1.0: The ramp-function generator ramp is steeper than for 12 Reserved
p1145 = 1.0 (higher "speed following error"). 13 Reserved
<5> Only for Servo. Switch output = 0 when the "setpoint channel" function module is not activated. 14 Reserved
<101> Pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112. 15 Reserved

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_3080_en.vsd Function diagram
- 3080 -
Setpoint channel - ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking 23.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Higher-level motion control (e.g. SINUMERIK, SIMOTION) PROFIBUS sampling time p0115[1] (Drive Object)

Picture 2-84 3090 – Dynamic Servo Control (DSC) Refer to [1020.7] Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

e.g. p0922 = 5, 6, 105 [2420]

Speed controller clock cycle <101>
SINAMICS Control Unit To the speed
n_cmd NSOLL_B Speed pre-control pre-control input
Motion Control (p1430)
p1191 > 0 (interconnected) [5020.1]
&
Path p1191 > 0 (interconnected) & 1 = DSC active [5020.2]
[5030.3]

Interpolation KPC
<6> p1191 P gain

{4} <6>
x_cmd <4>
Position deviation x,y x
+ + <5> y Kp
Offset and p1190
x y XERR n_set from DSC [5020.1]
compensation S&H
– + [5030.3]
+ SET {1} <5> +
+ –
t
Position actual value T_MAPC Interpolator DSC position
generation controller
Master application cycle time

Encoder signals acc.

telegram type [2420] Isochronous (clock-cycle
synchronous) PROFIBUS
Fast position
Selecting the actual value
PROFIBUS
position encoder channel
Transmission
p1192 DSC encoder
Delay
From the motor encoder adaptation <3>
G1_XIST1 factor Speed controller clock
1 p1193 (1) <4> cycle
r0482[0]
<2> SET
T_SAPC
G2_XIST1 x
2 y
r0482[1] S&H
{2} Slave application cycle
G3_XIST1
3 time <4>
r0482[2]
<1> x SET
Position actual values from encoder 1, 2, 3 y
[4704.8] S&H
{3}
<1> Principle of operation of Dynamic Servo Control (DSC): The feedback branch {2} completely compensates the feedback coupling branch {1} regarding the position actual value sent from the drive. The fast actual value channel

Function diagrams
{3} allows a high dynamic performance and high Kv factors to be achieved.

Setpoint channel
<2> For the motor encoder (p1192 = 1) p1193 = 1 is effective.
When using encoder 2 or 3 (p1192 = 2, 3), p1193 should be set to "Increments per revolution motor encoder/increments per revolution position encoder (including fine resolution)".
<3> The deadtime for the PROFIBUS data transfer is automatically set.
<4> Sample & Hold element; refer to [1021].
<5> The position deviation must be referred to the increments of the motor including the fine resolution.
<6> Normalization of KPC: If signal {4} = 1 motor revolution and KPC = 1, then "n_set from DSC" = 0.001 motor revolutions/s.
<101> Pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112.
2-639

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_3090_en.vsd Function diagram
- 3090 -
Setpoint channel - Dynamic Servo Control (DSC) 15.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Function diagrams
Configuration without setpoint

2.12 Configuration without setpoint

Function diagrams

3095 – Generating speed limits (r0108.8 = 0) 2-641

2-640  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 p0115[3] (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-85 3095 – Generating speed limits (r0108.8 = 0) <100>

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

n_limit pos effective

n_limit pos n_limit pos
r1084
0.000...210 000.000 RPM p1083[D] [5030.5]
p1083[D] (210 000.000) [5210.1]
Min [8010.2]
0 [6030.2]

[3020.6]
Maximum speed Reference value for the ramp-function generator Speed limits if a setpoint
[3060.4]
0.000...210 000.000 RPM channel has not been activated
[3070.4]
p1082[D] (1500.000) (r0108.8 = 0).
[5300.1]

-1

n_limit neg effective

Configuration without setpoint

r1087
0 [5030.5]
[5210.1]
n_limit neg n_limit neg Max [8010.2]
-210 000.000...0.000 RPM p1086[D] [6030.2]
p1086[D] (-210 000.000)

Function diagrams
<100> Only for non-activated function module "setpoint channel" (r0108.8 = 0). For r0108.8 = 1, [3050] applies and not [3095].
2-641

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_3095_en.vsd Function diagram
- 3095 -
Setpoint channel not activated - generating the speed limits (r0108.8 = 0) 28.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Function diagrams
Servo control

2.13 Servo control

Function diagrams

4704 – Position and temperture sensing encoder 1 ... 3 2-643

4710 – Speed actual value and rotor position sensing for motor encoder (encoder 1) 2-644

4720 – Encoder interface, receive signals, encoders 1 ... 3 2-645

4730 – Encoder interface, send signals, encoders 1 ... 3 2-646

4735 – Reference mark search with equivalent zero mark, encoders 1 ... 3 2-647

4740 – Measuring probe evaluation, measured value memory, encoders 1 ... 3 2-648

5020 – Speed setpoint filter and speed pre-control 2-649

5030 – Reference model/pre-control balancing/setpoint n_ctrl. 2-650

5040 – Speed control with encoder 2-651

5050 – Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation 2-652

5060 – Torque setpoint, changeover control type 2-653

5210 – Speed control without encoder 2-654

5300 – V/f control for diagnostics 2-655

5490 – Speed control configuration 2-656

5492 – Control status word 1 2-657

5493 – Control status word 3 2-658

5610 – Torque limiting/reduction/interpolator 2-659

5620 – Motoring/regenerating torque limit 2-660

5630 – Upper/lower torque limits 2-661

5640 – Mode changeover, power/current limiting 2-662

5650 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller 2-663

5710 – Current setpoint filter 2-664

5714 – Iq and Id controller 2-665

5722 – Field current setpoint, flux controller 2-666

5730 – Interface to the motor module (gating/control signals, current actual values) 2-667

2-642  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 <1> Configuration, absolute value encoder
Encoders Sensor module Control unit Encoder pulse number PROFIBUS sampling time

Picture 2-86 4704 – Position and temperture sensing encoder 1 ... 3

Encoder type selection Enc Enc Encoder (No. of signal periods per Abs encoder Abs encoder Abs encoder Enc rot
0 = No encoder configuration squarewave A/Bgrid division track and encoder revolution) multiturn measuring step singleturn clearance NM Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

p0400[E] p0404[E] p0405[E] p0407[E] p0408[E] p0421[E] p0422[E] p0423[E] p0425[E]

[E] The encoder data set
<2> <4> <4> <4> <4> <4> <4> changeover is represented
Enc_interface Comp_No. at [8570]
p0141[E]
<2> 1 2 Enc fine
Encoder Comp_No. Gx_XIST1 1 2
incr. Invert position actual value p0410.1[E]
p0142[E] A p0418[E]
2n
DRIVE CLiQ
B A <3>
up 0
Raw position <7> Enc Gn_XIST1
SMx x2n
signals dn III 31 n n-1 0 r0483[n-1]
2n -1
Multiplication 1 [4735.6]
A B 32 bits
SM properties by hardware [4740.6]
No. of signal Fine resolution
r0458 sin/cos Free-running
periods (multiplication by
position counter 232 -
B hardware).
1

0
1 signal period 1 signal period
For SSI encoders:
Absolute position information To speed
Raw position signals
sensing
(only from encoder1) [4710.1]
Sequence control for Gn_XIST2
Encoder fine
Gx_XIST2
To the thermal
p0419[E]
Reference mark position
& motor monitoring

Cykl. absolute [4735.7] ϑ from sensor n

position value Absolute value [8016.1]
x2n
(only for absolute value
encoders, Error code
e.g. EQN) Encoder error
processing <3>
Measuring probe position <8> Enc Gn_XIST2
r0483[n-1]

Encoder status bits

[4730.1]
Function selection to Gn_ZSW

Bits 14-15 Bits 0-13

Enc Gn_STW
Encoder control word F31100-A33905
[4720.4] r0487[n-1] Encoder faults/alarms
<3> Measuring probe positions Enc Gn_ZSW Encoder status word p0979[0...25]

Function diagrams
[4740.7]
[4730.5] r0481[n-1] Encoder format acc. to
<1> For rotary encoders = setting the number pulses.
PROFIdrive
For resolvers = setting the pulse pair number.

Servo control
<2> p0142 = p0141 for motors with integrated DRIVE-CLiQ interface. <4> These parameters are automatically set.
<3> Assignment of the indices: Index [n-1] --> Encoder n <5> For SIMODRIVE-compatible functions: Set p0418 = 11.
Index [0] --> Encoder 1 <6> Generating the two's complement.
Index [1] --> Encoder 2 <7> Gn_XIST1 is a free-running position value. The external control must process the overflows.
2-643

Index [2] --> Encoder 3 <8> The contents of Gn_XIST2 depends on the encoder status and and control words. Refer to [4720] and [4730].

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_4704_en.vsd Function diagram
- 4704 -
Servo encoder evaluation - position and temperture sensing, encoder 1 ... 3 04.08.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[0] (125.00 µs)

Picture 2-87 4710 – Speed actual value and rotor position sensing for motor encoder (encoder 1) 1 encoder revolution Rotor position el. norm
2-644

Servo control
Function diagrams
r0093
C Rotor position
Transformat_angle
sensing
r0094
D
Enc commut_factor r0451

Zero mark <2>

C,D <1> n_act T_smooth

Inv encoder actual value 0.00...20.00 ms n_act smooth r0021
100 ms
p0410.0[E] p1441[D] (0.00)

[4704.8] To the brake control [2701.1]

Fine resolution up dx 0
A,B x y 0 n_act smooth To the speed controller [5040.2]
for the speed dt To Kp_n and Tn_n_adaptation [5050.1]
actual value
-1 1 r0063
dn III To change over the control type [5060.2]
Raw position 1
signals from Smoothing To the speed controller [5210.5]
encoder 1 To torque limits [5620.6] To power limiting [5640.1]
n_act motor encoder [RPM] To the speed messages/signals [8010.1]
n_act measurement r0061

n_act calculation

1 = Sensorless operation active

[2522.6] r1407.1
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

(refer to p1300 [5060])

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

<1> The [E]ncoder data set changeover is represented at [8570].

<2> Ratio between the electrical and mechanical rotor position (= motor pole pair number).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_4710_en.vsd Function diagram
- 4710 -
Encoder evaluation functions - speed actual value and rotor position sensing for motor encoder (encoder 1) 02.08.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 PROFIBUS sampling time

Picture 2-88 4720 – Encoder interface, receive signals, encoders 1 ... 3 Control word for encoder n (n = 1, 2 or 3) Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

<1>
<1>
Gn-STW
p0480[n-1] To position sensing encoder n
(0) Bit No. Meaning r0487[n-1] [4704.3]

Selects the function to be activated (with bit value = 1)

Function for bit 7 = 0 Function for bit 7 = 1
Function No.
(search for reference mark) (flying measurement)

0 1 Reference marker 1 Measuring probe 1 <1> Index [n-1] --> encoder n

Index [0] --> encoder 1
1 2 Reference marker 2<4> Measuring probe 1 Index [1] --> encoder 2
Index [2] --> encoder 3
2 3 Reference marker 3 Measuring probe 2
<4>
<2> The position actual values are read-out of Gn.XIST2 using a
3 4 Reference marker 4<4> Measuring probe 2 handshaking technique. The following pulse diagram shows, as
example, reading-in the position at the reference mark
Start/stop/read selected function (Mode: Bit 7 = 0)
Bits 0...13 control what is transferred in Select function 1 [Bit ...0]("search
4 0 1 0 1 Gn_XIST 2. 0001
for reference mark 1")
5 0 0 1 1 There are 3 alternatives: Start function [Bit 6...4] 000 001 000
6 0 0 0 0 - Bit 7 = 0: Position actual value at
the reference mark <2> Function active [Gn_ZSW Bit 0]
- Bit 7 = 1: Position actual value
Interrupt function when the measuring probe Actual value save at the
Read generated value edge is received <2> reference mark
Activate selected function - Bit 13 = 1: Cyclic absolute position
value from Absolute Read generated value [Bit 6...4] 000 010
No function
encoder
Value from function 1 available
Mode of the function to be activated [Gn_ZSW Bit 4]
7 1 = flying measurement
0 = Search for reference mark (zero mark or BERO) Position actual value at reference
mark 1 in Gn_XIST2
8...12 Reserved part

<3> The bits are processed with the following priority sequence (highest priority -->
1 = Request cyclic transfer of the absolute position value in lowest priority bit): Bit 14 --> Bit 15 --> Bit 4-7 --> Bit 12 --> Bit 13.
13 Gn_XIST2 (e.g. EQN absolute track;
acknowledgment in Gn_ZSW bit 13) <4> Reference marks 2, 3 and 4 are not supported. These bits must be set to 0.

<5> Feedback signal is provided in Gn_ZSW bit 14 - however the encoder is not
14 1 =Request parking encoder (handshake with Gn_ZSW bit 14) <5> actually parked.

Function diagrams
= acknowledge encoder fault (located in Gn_ZSW, bit 15;
15
Handshake with Gn_ZSW bit 11)

Servo control
<3>
2-645

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_4720_en.vsd Function diagram
- 4720 -
Servo encoder evaluation function - encoder interface, receive signals, encoders 1 ... 3 29.01.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Status word from encoder n (n = 1, 2 or 3) PROFIBUS sampling time

Picture 2-89 4730 – Encoder interface, send signals, encoders 1 ... 3 Gn_ZSW Refer to [1020.7]
2-646

Servo control
Function diagrams
Encoder status bits from To the sequence control for Gn_XIST2
the position sensing, encoder n Bit No. Meaning r0481[n-1] [4704.5]
[4704.8]
Feedback signal of the active function (1 = function <1>
Bit 0 active)
Function For reference number and flying
No. measurement
Bit 1
1 reference mark 1 or measuring probe 1

2 reference mark 2 or measuring probe 1

Bit 2
3 reference mark 3 or measuring probe 2

Bit 3 4 Reference mark 4 or measuring probe 2

Bit 4 1 = Position actual value from function 1

Bit 5 1 = Position actual value from function 2 Generated value Position value 2 from encoder n
in Gn_XIST2
(and can be The contents of position actual value 2 (Gn_XIST2) at [4704] depends on Gn_STW and Gn_ZSW.
Bit 6 1 = Position actual value from function 3 read) This can be done as follows:

- Undefined for a parking encoder (Gn_ZSW.14 = 1).

Bit 7 1 = Position actual value from function 4 - For Gn_ZSW.15 = 1 the fault code for encoder faults is located here.
- Position actual value at the reference mark (for Gn_STW.7 = 0 and Gn_ZSW.4-7 > 0; with handshake).
- Position actual value due to flying measurement (for Gn_STW.7 = 1 and Gn_ZSW.4.7 > 0; with handshake).
Bit 8 1 = Measuring probe 1 deflected (high signal) - Cyclic absolute position value (free-running value, e.g. from the EQN absolute tract (for Gn_ZSW.13 = 1).
From the measuring probe evaluation
[4740.4]
Bit 9 1 = Measuring probe 2 deflected (high signal)

Bit 10 Reserved
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Bit 11 1 = Acknowledge encoder fault active

Bit 12 Reserved (for reference point offset)

Bit 13 Absolute value is cyclically transferred

Bit 14 Parking encoder active (i.e. parking encoder shutdown)

<1> Index [n-1] --> encoder n
Index [0] --> encoder 1
Bit 15 Encoder fault, the fault is in Gn_XIST2 (r0483)
Index [1] --> encoder 2
Index [2] --> encoder 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_4730_en.vsd Function diagram
- 4730 -
Servo encoder evaluation function - encoder interface, send signals, encoders 1 ... 3 15.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Find reference marker STW for encoder n Activate selected function PROFIBUS sampling time

Picture 2-90 4735 – Reference mark search with equivalent zero mark, encoders 1 ... 3
Gn_STW [4720] Position actual value 1
This function is provided once for each of Select the function to be activated Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

r0487[n-1].0 from encoder n

the maximum 3 encoders.
Store [4704.8]
r0487[n-1].4 r0483[n-1]
&
r0487[n-1].7 1
<3>
No equivalent zero mark
(evaluate the encoder zero mark for encoder n) D
D memory element
(flip-flop) Q
p0490.9
"Fast inputs"
0 Zero mark input
DI9_probe 0 0...6 <1>
(X122.8) 1 p0495[n-1] (0) Measured-value memory
[2130.4] 1 1 Reference mark
<4> position to the
Gn_XIST2
p0490.10 x y encoder interface
for function No. = 1
0 & Store [4704.4]
1
DI10_probe 0
2
(X122.10) 2
[2131.4] 1 1 3
4
p0490.11
5
6
DI11_probe 0
(X122.11) 3
[2131.4] 1 1

From the p0490.13

digital
inputs/
outputs DI13_probe <5> 0
(X132.8) 4
[2132.4] 1 1

p0490.14

DI14_probe <5> 0 <1> The measured value memory is read-out using a handshaking technique according to [4720], [4730].
(X132.10) 5 <2> Index [n-1] --> encoder n (n = 1, 2, 3)
[2133.4] 1 1 Index [0] --> encoder 1

Function diagrams
Index [1] --> encoder 2
p0490.15 Index [2] --> encoder 3
<3> All other bits in the encoder control word must be 0.

Servo control
<4> Increasing position actual values (r0482) --> The 0/1 edge is evaluated
DI15_probe <5> 0 Decreasing position actual values(r0482) --> The 1/0 edge is evaluated.
(X132.11) 6 This means that when traversing to an equivalent zero mark, the same reference point is always used.
[2133.4] 1 1 <5> These measuring probe inputs are only available on the CU320.
2-647

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_4735_en.vsd Function diagram
- 4735 -
Servo encoder evaluation function - reference mark search with equivalent zero mark, encoders 1 ... 3 10.03.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 STW for encoder n Activate selected function Select the function to be activated
Measuring probe evaluation Gn_STW [4720] PROFIBUS sampling time

Picture 2-91 4740 – Measuring probe evaluation, measured value memory, encoders 1 ... 3
Position actual value 1
r0487[n-1].0 Refer to [1020.7]
This function is provided once for each of from encoder n
2-648

Servo control
Function diagrams
the maximum 3 encoders. r0487[n-1].1
[4704.8]
r0487[n-1].2
r0487[n-1].3 Store r0483[n-1]
r0487[n-1].4
&
r0487[n-1].7
(no measuring <3> D memory D D D D
probe for encoder n) element (flip-
flop) Q Q Q Q
0
p0490.9
"Fast inputs"
0 Measuring probe 1 input
DI9_probe 0 0...6 <1>
(X122.8) 1 p0488[n-1] (0) 4 measured value memory
[2130.4] 1 1
Gn_XIST2
p0490.10 x y
for function No. = 1
0 & Store
1
DI10_probe 0
2
(X122.10) 2
[2131.4] 1 1 3
4
p0490.11 Gn_XIST2
5 x y
for function No. = 2
6 & Store Measuring
probes
DI11_probe 0
positions to
(X122.11) 3Measuring probe 1 deflected the encoder
[2131.4] 1 1 to Gn_ZSW8 [4730.2] interface
[4704.3]
From the p0490.13 Measuring probe 2 input
digital 0...6 Gn_XIST2
x y
inputs/ p0489[n-1] (0) for function No. = 3
outputs <4> 0
& Store
DI13_probe
(X132.8) 4
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

1 x=
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

[2132.4] 1 0

p0490.14 1
2
Gn_XIST2
3 x y
0 for function No. = 4
DI14_probe <4>
(X132.10) 5 4
& Store

[2133.4] 1 1 5
<1> Up to 4 measuring functions can be simultneously active; the measured value
p0490.15 6 memory is read-out using a handshaking technique according to [4720], [4730].
<2> Index [n-1] --> encoder n (n = 1, 2, 3)
Measuring probe 2 deflected Index [0] --> encoder 1
DI15_probe <4> 0 to Gn_ZSW9 [4730.2] Index [1] --> encoder 2
(X132.11) 6 Index [2] --> encoder 3
[2133.4] 1 1 <3> All other bits in the encoder control word must be 0.
<4> These measuring probe inputs are only available on the CU320

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_4740_en.vsd Function diagram
- 4740 -
Servo encoder evaluation function - measuring probe evaluation, measured value memory, encoders 1 ... 3 10.03.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 n_before_setpoint filter
Speed setpoint from the function generator n_set smooth p0115[1] (125.00 µs)

Picture 2-92 5020 – Speed setpoint filter and speed pre-control

1 = DSC active 100 ms r0020
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

[3090.8]
n_set from DSC p1414.0[D]
r0060 p1414.1[D]
[3090.8]
1
+ Setpoint filter 1 <6>
n_ctrl n_set sum 0 Setpoint filter 2 <6>
0 n_set after filter
r1170 + p1416[D]
0 + r0062
[3080.8] 1 p1422[D]
+ + + To the speed
1
y controller
y [5210.1]
x y
x and to the
y
reference model
t [5030.1]
PT1 low pass t
fn_n PT1 low pass
p1417[D] fn_n
D_n
p1418[D] p1423[D] n_after_setpoint filter
D_n from the function generator
<1> Low-pass 2nd order. Detailed representation at [1024]. p1415[D] p1424[D] p1421[D]
<2> General 2nd Order filter. Detailed representation at [1024].
<3> Speed pre-control only available for speed control with encoder. Pre-control |y| 0
signal permanently connected to "0" for close-loop control without encoder |y| 0
x D y
and for V/f control. 1 x D y 1
<4> p1400.10 = 1 is recommended, if in addition to the speed pre-control signal, a 2
fn 2
torque pre-control signal is also connected at [5060]. f fn
f
<5> The interpolator is only effective for clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS operation PT2 lowpass <1>
and, when the Dynamic Servo Control (DSC) is active, has an additional deadtime PT2 lowpass <1>
of one speed controller clock cycle.
fn_z D_z
<6> For a 1/0 edge from control command STW2.8 "traverse to fixed endstop" [2502] p1419[D] p1420[D] fn_z D_z
the output of all filters is set to the input value for an instantaneous response to a p1425[D] p1426[D]
change of the speed setpoint sign.
y
Speed pre-control signal y
x y [5490.7] x
[5490.7] y
1 = Speed pre-control
1 = Interpolation f
2nd Order filter
for balancing
<2> f
speed controller pre-control active From the speed control 2nd Order filter <2>
from speed control configuration configuration
p1400.7 p1400.10
fn_n D_n
n_pre-control x,y x fn_n D_n
y p1417[D] p1418[D]
<3> p1430[C] x y p1423[D] p1424[D]
1 0

Function diagrams
[3090.8] (0)
n_pre-ctrl_2
t [5030.1]
0 1 <4>

Servo control
Interpolator
<5>
Monitoring F07421 "Speed setpoint filter natural frequency > Shannon frequency".
2-649

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_5020_en.vsd Function diagram
- 5020 -
Servo speed control with encoder - speed setpoint filter and speed pre-control 23.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 n_limit pos effective r1084 p0115[1] (125.00 µs)

Picture 2-93 5030 – Reference model/pre-control balancing/setpoint n_ctrl. From the setpoint limiting [3050.8]
2-650

Servo control
Function diagrams
[3095.7]
n_set after filter n_ctrl n_set
r0062 r1438
+
n_pre t_dead bal n To the speed controller [5040.1]
0.0...2.0 + To the V/f control [5300.1]
p1428[D] (0.0)
n_pre T bal
0.00...10 000.00 ms
Sampling time, current control (p0115[0])
p1429[D] (0.00)
Speed setpoint limited

n_pre-ctrl_2 x Pre-control balancing y

Speed limiting 1 p1407.11
To the status word
[5020.8] Speed controller
Simulation of the build-up of the pre-control torque [2522.3]
n_pre after balance
y = x for the factory setting
r1432

n_ctrl RefMod t_dead

0.00...2.00
p1435[D] (0.00)
n_ctrl RefMod fn n_ctrl RefMod D
0.0...8000.0 Hz 0.000...5.000 Sampling time, speed control (p0115[1])
p1433[D] (0.0) p1434[D] (1.000)
n_set I_comp
r1439
+
x Reference model y To the speed controller
[5040.1]
Emulating the pre-controlled speed control loop +
r1436 From the setpoint limiting [3050.8]
y = x for the factory setting
n_set RefMod output [3095.7]

n_limit neg effective r1087

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

PcCtrl active
Steady-state setpoint calculation
p0807.0
RFG setpoint at the input
1 = DSC active
r1119 [3090.8]
n_set via PC 1
n_ctrl n_set 1 n_set from DSC 1 p3983 n_ctrl n_set stat
+ [3090.8]
p1155[C] r1444
+ 0
+ 0
+
n_ctrl n_set 2 +
p1160[C]

n_pre-control
p1430[C]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_5030_en.vsd Function diagram
- 5030 -
Servo speed control with encoder - reference model/pre-control balancing/setpoint n_ctrl. 23.06.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 n_ctrl Kp n lower n_ctrl Tn n lower p0115[1] (125.00 µs)

Picture 2-94 5040 – Speed control with encoder

0.000...999 999.000 Nms/rad 0.00...100 000.00 ms
p1460[D] (0.300) p1462[D] (20.00)
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

<1>
Kp_n_basic
To Kp/Tn adaptation [5050.2]
Tn_n_adapt Tn_n_basic
From Kp/Tn adaptation
[5050.7] Kp_n_adapt

1 = Kp/Tn adaptation 1 0 1 0
from the speed control configuration
p1400.5
[5490.7] n_diff
n_ctrl Kp effective
r0064 r1468
Kp
n_set for P component P component
r1438 r1481
+ <3>
[5030.8] –
n_ctrl Tn effective
r1469
n_act smooth
<4> + n_ctrl PI M_output (M_set_1)
r0063 n_ctrl integr_feedback
[4710.6] n_ctrl Ctrl_diff Tn r1480 [5060.1]
p1494
r1454 <3>
+
Kp TF Tn

n_set for I component – I-component

[5030.8] r1482
+ Set <2> <3>
Hold Set Val
Enable speed controller from the sequence control
[2522.2] Speed
n_ctrl integ stop
controller
p1476[C]
(0) Uq at the limit of control-ZSW3
n_ctrl integ set
p1477[C] r1408.5 [5493.5]
(0) Integrator
n_ctrl integ_value control Torque limit reached

Function diagrams
p1478[C] r1407.7 [2522.7]
(0) Speed controller, I component held
<1> For p1462 = 0.0, the I component is disabled (integral action time = ).

Servo control
<2> For torque control, the I component is set to the value of r1515 (supplmentary torque). r1407.5 [2522.3]
<3> This parameter is set to 0 when the pulses are cancelled. Speed controller, I component set
<4> The integrator of the speed controller is re-parameterized to become a PT1 filter through a feedback element (p1494). r1407.6 [2522.3]
2-651

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_5040_en.vsd Function diagram
- 5040 -
Servo speed control with encoder - speed controller 15.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 1000.00 µs

Picture 2-95 5050 – Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation

Free Kp_n adaptation
2-652

Servo control
Function diagrams
Upper adaptation factor
0.0...200 000.0 %
p1459[D] (100.0)

y
Adaptation signal 1
x 1.00 in the factory setting
p1455[C] Kp_n_ adaptation factor To the speed controller without encoder
(0) [5210.3]
x
referred to p200x
Lower adaptation factor
0.0...200 000.0 % 0.00...400.00 % 0.00...400.00 %
p1458[D] (100.0) p1456[D] (0.00) p1457[D] (0.00)

Adaptation signal 2
p1466[C]
(1)

Speed-dependent Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation

Kp_n_basic (p1460) Kp
[5040.8]
n_act smooth
n Kp
r0063 Kp_n_adapt
[4710.6]
n

p1461[D] (100%)
0.00...210 000.00 RPM
p1464[D] (0.00)
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

To the speed controller with encoder

0.00...210 000.00 RPM [5040.4]
p1465[D] (0.00)
p1463[D] (100%)

Tn

n Tn
Tn_n_adapt
Tn_n_basic (p1462)
[5040.8] n

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_5050_en.vsd Function diagram
- 5050 -
Servo speed control without encoder - Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation 31.08.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Torque setpoint and/or acceleration p0115[1] (125.00 µs)

Picture 2-96 5060 – Torque setpoint, changeover control type p1511[C]

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

(0)
+
+
Weighting and/or moment of inertia M_suppl total
p1512[C] r1515
e.g. p2900
(0)
[1021]
Supplementary torque setpoint
p1513[C]
(0)

Threshold, encoder --> sensorless

0.0...210000.0 RPM
p1404[D] (210000.0)

n_act smooth 1 1 = Sensorless speed control active

0 = Speed control r0063 r1407.1

p1501 1 = Torque control [4710.6] 0 [2522.3]
[2520.7] r1406.12
Control type p1300
<1> <3>
p1300 = MCtrl ≥1
"Speed control [5730.1]
0
with/without encoder" 21 + M_set_2 <4>
M_set_1 r1509 [5610.3]
From the speed 0 1 +
r1480 To torque limiting
control with encoder 20 +
[5040.8] 0
1
"Speed control without encoder"

M_set_4
From the speed r1480 21
0
control without
encoder [5210.8] M_pre-control_1
20

1 Uq_set_3, Ud_set_3
From V/f control To current control
[5300] Uq_set_3, Ud_set_3 [5730]
0 <2>

Function diagrams
<1> The torque control can only be activated for operation with encoder.
An appropriate fault message is output, if:
V/f activation p1317

Servo control
1) Sensorless operation is active and closed-loop torque control is requested (r1406.12 = 0 --> 1).
2) Torque control is active and n_act smooth > p1404.
<2> For a more detailed description of the changeover to [5730.2] nd V/f control at [5300].
<3> Automatic changeover to sensorless operation, e.g. for extremely high-speed spindle drives.
<4> When the pulses are cancelled, r1509 is set to 0.
2-653

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_5060_en.vsd Function diagram
- 5060 -
Servo speed control with encoder - torque setpoint, changeover control type 30.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 n_ctrl SLVC Kp n_ctrl SLVC Tn
p0115[1] (125.00 µs)

Picture 2-97 5210 – Speed control without encoder

0.000...999 999.000 Nms/rad <2> 0.0...100 000.0 ms
p1470[D](0.300) p1472[D](20.0)
2-654

Servo control
Function diagrams
0

Kp_n-Adaptation factor [5050.6] n_ctrl Kp effective r1468

(= 1.00 for the factory setting) 1

1 = Sensorless operation, 1 = Kp/Tn adaptation active

speed actual value, starting value From the speed control configuration
From the speed control, configuration <4>
p1400.5
p1400.11 n_ctrl integr_feedback
[5490.7] [5490.4] p1494 n_ctrl P_output
n_ctrl n_set
TF r1481
r1438
Kp Tn
n_ctrl PI_output
Balanced speed setpoint (M_set_4)

n_limit pos effective + r1480

Speed setpoint n_act smooth –
r1084 I_ctrl I_output
limiting active r0063
From setpoint limiting
r1482
[3050.8] r1407.11 [4710.6] 1 = I component speed controller
[3095.7] hold from STW2
[2522.3]
r0188.2
n_after filter [2502.6] To torque
x
r0062 Acceleration model setpoint input
n_ctrl integ_set Integrator [5060.1]
[5020.8]
p1477[C] control
M_accel T_smooth
(0)
0.00...100.00 ms
From setpoint limiting p1517[D] (4.00)
[3050.8] n_ctrl integ_set value
[3095.7]
p1478[C]
n_limit neg effective (0)
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

r1087
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Total moment of inertia

Speed
Mot inertia ratio
Smoothing controller
M_pre-control_1
1.000...10 000.000 <3>
p0342[M] (1.000)

Mot M_inertia
0.000 00...100 000.000 00 kgm² I-component held
<2> For p1472 = 0, the I component is disabled (Tn_n = µ). p0341[M] (0.000 00) r1407.5 [2522.3]
<3> Setting rule: p0341 and p0342 are correctly set if, when I component set
accelerating, the speed output r1480 displays values r1407.6 [2522.3]
around /in the vicinity of 0.
<4> The integrator of the speed controller is re-parameterized to become a PT1 filter through a feedback element (p1494).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_5210_en.vsd Function diagram
- 5210 -
Servo speed control without encoder - speed controller 15.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[0] (125.00 µs)

Picture 2-98 5300 – V/f control for diagnostics

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Drv f_output
r0066

V/f t_up_down
0.000...999 999.000 s r0024
100 ms
p1318[D] (10.000)

n_act smooth [RPM]

r0063
Pole pair number p
r0313[M]
Pole pair number /60
fm
<1> n_set for P component ax
p ⋅ n f_set_1 f_set_2 Uq_set_3
[5030.8] r1438 f=
60

(synchronous frequencies) 0
Safety ramp-function generator
[3050.6] n_max (p1082) p⋅n f_max for V/f control (as stall <2>
f= To the current control
[3095.7] Reference quantity for protection)
60
the ramp-up time
V/f characteristic
U
f V_set Ud_set_3
V/f characteristic U4 430V
0.0...10 000.0 V
p1327[D] (0.0)
V/f U at f zero
0.0...25.0 V
p1319[D] (0.0)
f

V/f characteristic f4
0.00...10 000.00 Hz
p1326[D] (0.00)

F07801

Function diagrams
"Motor overcurrent"
Monitoring (not automatic
current limiting for

Servo control
V/f control)

<1> For synchronous motors only speed setpoints up to approx. 25 % of the rateed speed are practical. Beyond this, there is a danger of resonant oscillations.
<2> The changeover to V/f control (closed-loop control type) is represented at [5730.2].
2-655

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_5300_en.vsd Function diagram
- 5300 -
Servo V/f control - V/f control for diagnostics 30.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p1400[D] 1000.00 µs

Picture 2-99 5490 – Speed control configuration

Speed control configuration Factory setting
n_ctrl config
2-656

Servo control
Function diagrams
Bit No. Meaning p1400[D]

0 Reserved

1 Reserved

2 Reserved

3 Reserved

4 1 = Torque limiting, motoring/regenerating active 1 [5640.3]

[5040.2]
5 1 = Kp/Tn adaptation active 1
[5210.5]

6 Reserved

7 1 = Interpolation, speed pre-control active 1 [5020.3]

8 1 = Interpolation, torque setpoint active [5610.6]

9 Reserved

Speed pre-control
10 1 [5020.5]
0 = To setopint filter 2; 1 = To balancing
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

Sensorless operation, speed actual value starting value

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

11 [5210.2]
0 = 0.0;1 = setpoint

Sensorless operation, changeover

12
0 = When accelerating, 1 = Stationary

Motoring/regenerating depending on
13
0 = Speed actual value, 1 = Speed setpoint

14 Reserved

15 Reserved

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_5490_en.vsd Function diagram
- 5490 -
Servo closed-loop - open-loop status words - speed control configuration 15.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[y] (MM)

Picture 2-100 5492 – Control status word 1

Control status word 1 Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Ctrl ZSW1
Bit No. Meaning r0056

0 Reserved r0056.0

1 1 = De-magnetization completed r0056.1

2 Reserved r0056.2

3 Reserved r0056.3

[6722.4] 4 1 = Magnetization completed [2701.1]

r0056.4
[2707.1]

5 Reserved r0056.5

6 Reserved r0056.6

[6730.5] 7 Reserved r0056.7

[6722.3] 8 1 = Field weakening active r0056.8

[6714.8] 9 Reserved r0056.9

10 Reserved r0056.10

[6730.5] 11 Reserved r0056.11

12 Reserved r0056.12

13 Reserved r0056.13

Function diagrams
[6710.2] 14 1 = Vdc_max controller active r0056.14

Servo control
[6710.2] 15 1 = Vdc_min controller active r0056.15
2-657

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_5492_en.vsd Function diagram
- 5492 -
Servo open-loop - closed-loop control/status words - control status word 1 30.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 125.00 µs

Picture 2-101 5493 – Control status word 3

2-658

Servo control
Function diagrams
Control status word 3 (for current control)
Ctrl ZSW3
Bit No. Meaning r1408

0 1 = Current control active

4 1 = Ud limiting active

5 1 = Uq limiting active [5040.7]

6 1 = Pos. limiting Iq active [5714.5]

7 1 = Neg. limiting Iq active [5714.4]

8 1 = Iq setpoint limiting active [5714.4]

9 1 = Id setpoint limiting active [5722.7]

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_5493_en.vsd Function diagram
- 5493 -
Servo open-loop - closed-loop control/status words - control status word 3 10.12.03 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[1] (125.00 µs) p0115[0] (125.00 µs)

Picture 2-102 5610 – Torque limiting/reduction/interpolator

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Torque limiting, upper active

r1407.8 [2522.3]

1 = Interpolation torque setpoint active

p1400.8
[5490.7]

M_set total
r0079
M_set_2 x,y x M_set_6
From torque setpoint input y
x y To the
1
r1509 current setpoint filter
[5710.1]
[5060.6]
t 0
Torque limiting Interpolator
<1>

M_max upper effective

r1538
Torque limiting lower active
M_max lower effective r1407.9 [2522.3]
r1539

Torque limit reached

From generation of t1 r1407.7
5490.8 [2522.3]
the torque limits [3080.1)
[5650.8]
214 = 100 % 100 %

TfS M_red eval

0...65535 %
p1544 (100)
0...100 % 100...0 %
TfS M_red TfS M scal
+
p1542 r1543 [5620.3]

Function diagrams
<2> –

Servo control
<1> For p0115[1] = p0115[0] the interpolator is automatically jumpered (bypassed) independent of the control.
<2> Torque reduction (e.g. for "Traversing to fixed endstop (TfS)" with process data MOMRED, refer to PROFIBUS telegram 102 ... 106 [2420]).
2-659

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_5610_en.vsd Function diagram
- 5610 -
Servo torque limits - torque limiting/reduction/interpolator 05.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Motoring torque limit 1000.00 µs

Picture 2-103 5620 – Motoring/regenerating torque limit n_act smooth

2-660

Servo control
Function diagrams
r0063
[4710.6]

M_max upper without Offs

r1526 M M
<1> 1 2 1
M_max upper/mot p1522 Min n n
-100 000.00...100 000.00 Nm p1520 (1520)
p1520 (100.00) t M_max upper total
Max tM_offset
<1> p1528 r1534
-1 + +
p2900 (1) <0 [5640.1]
M 0
e.g. from MOMRED M
1
n <2> 2
3 n
M_max offset
-100 000.00...100 000.00 Nmp
1532[D] (0.00)
M

0 n
4
t + M_max lower total
Min dM_offset
r1535
-1 +
<1> <0 [5640.1]
M_max lower/regen p1523 Max M M
-100 000.00...100 000.00 Nm p1521 (1521)
p1521[D] (-100.00) n n
3 3 4
<1> p1529
p2900 (1)
M e.g. from MOMRED
The 4 quadrants
2 <2> M_max lower without Offs M
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

n Regenerative torque limit

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

r1527
4 +
2 1

Reverse, Forwards,
generating motoring
– + n

Reverse, Forwards,
motoring generating
<1> For p1400.4 = 1, one torque limit applies for the motoring operation and the other for the regenerative operation, independent of the sign of the torque
and the speed (compatible with Simodrive).
"Normal case": If neither dynamic limits nor offsets are required, then the torque limit when motoring is entered using p1520 and the torque limit when 3 4
regenerating (as negative value) using p1521.
–
<2> For the manufacturer-specific PROFIBUS telegrams 102 ... 106, r1543 is entered here [5610.4].

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_5620_en.vsd Function diagram
- 5620 -
Servo torque limitis - motoring/regenerating torque limit 05.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 1000.00 µs

Picture 2-104 5630 – Upper/lower torque limits Upper torque limit

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

<2>
A
M_max upper without Offs
<1> M_ upper/mot r1526
M_max upper/mot p1522[C] M_max upper total
tMBmax offset
-100 000.00...100 000.00 Nm p1520[D] (1520) r1534
p1520[D] (100.00) <2> +
[5640.1]
M_max upper/mot scal +
M p1528[C]
2 1 p2900 (1)
n
e.g. from MOMRED
<4>

M_max offset
-100 000.00...100 000.00 Nm
p1532[D] (0.00)

<3> F07090

Lower torque limit

<1> M_max lower/regen

+ M_max lower total
M_max lower/regen p1523[C] <2> dM_max offset
-100 000.00...100 000.00 Nm p1521[D] (1521) r1535
p1521[D] (-100.00) +
[5640.1]
M_max lower/regen scal M_max lower without Offs
p1529[C] r1527
B
p2900 (1) <2> M
M
e.g. from MOMRED
p1520
<4>
n
3 4
{p1522}
p1532
{p1523}

p1521

Function diagrams
<1> For p1400.4 = 0 the torque limits for the positive and negative torque directions (upper and lower) are compatible with MASTERDRIVES and MICROMASTER 4.
"normal case" If dynamic limits and an offset are not required, then the upper torque limit is entered using p1520 and the lower torque limit (as negative value) using p1521.

Servo control
<2> Danger note:
Negative values at A or positive values at B represent a minimum torque for the other torque direction and can cause the motor to accelerate uncontrollably.
<3> The limiters ensure that the limits cannot mutually "overtake" one another. For A < B Fault F07090 is initiated that can also be disabled.

<4> For the manufacturer-specific PROFIBUS telegrams 102 ... 106, r1543 is entered here [5610.4].
2-661

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_5630_en.vsd Function diagram
- 5630 -
Servo torque limit - upper/lower torque limits 05.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 <2> p0115[1] (125.00 µs) 1000.00 µs

Picture 2-105 5640 – Mode changeover, power/current limiting

Mode changeover
2-662

Servo control
Function diagrams
Current limiting
[5490.7]
1 = Mode torque limiting Torque factor from the current control M2Iq
from the speed control configuration [5730.4]
p1400.4

M_max_1
r1534
0 Min
Iq_max_1 M_limit Vdc_max
Max
From "upper/lower 1 [5650.1]
torque limits" r1534
[5630.8]
M_min_1
0 Iq_min_1
r1535

1
r1535
M_max_1 M_limit Vdc_min
r1534
-1 Min
Max [5650.1]
From "motoring/
regenerating torque
limits"
[5620.8] M_min_1
r1535
Iq_max total
[5722.8] r1533
Maximum torque-generating current
Power limiting from the current control
n_act smooth
[4710.6] r0063

P_max mot
t0
0.00...10 000.00 kW
p1530 (100.00)
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

<0 P_max
Min M_max_3
P
Ma [Nm]
n

P_max regen <1>

-10 000.00...0.00 kW t0
-1
p1531 (100.00)
<0 P_min
Min -1 M_min_3
P_stall from the current control P
[5730.2] Ma [Nm]
n

60 1000 P [kW] n
<1> M [Nm] = [RPM]
2p

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_5640_en.vsd Function diagram
- 5640 -
Servo torque limits - mode changeover, power/current limiting 05.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 1000.00 µs

Picture 2-106 5650 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller Vdc_max controller
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

n_act smooth Vdc_ctrl config

Vdc_ctrl Kp
r0063 p1240
Vdc threshold, upper p1250
p1244

Vdc_act –
iDC max MUD max
r0070 Adaption
Logic
[8950.1]
+

n_act smooth a = ((p1240 = 2 or 3) and (r0063 > 0))

a = ((p1240 = 1 or 3) and (r0063 < 0))
r0063

M_limit Vdc_max a
[5640.8]
a M_max upper effective
r1538
b
b
b = ((p1240 = 0, 2, 4, 5 or 6) or (r0063 ≥ 0)) Effective
b = ((p1240 = 0, 1, 4, 5 or 6) or (r0063 ≤ 0)) torque limits
To the speed
a = ((p1240 = 1 or 3) and (r0063 > 0)) control
[5610.1)
a = ((p1240 = 2 or 3) and (r0063 < 0))
M_limit Vdc_min a
[5640.8]
a M_max lower effective
r1539
b
Vdc_min controller b

Vdc_ctrl Kp b = ((p1240 = 0, 1, 4, 5 or 6) or (r0063 ≥ 0))

Vdc threshold, lower p1250 b = ((p1240 = 0, 2, 4, 5 or 6) or (r0063 ≤ 0))
p1248

Vdc_act –
iDC min MUD min
r0070 Adaption
+

Function diagrams
Servo control
n_act smooth
r0063
2-663

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_5650_en.vsd Function diagram
- 5650 -
Servo torque limits - Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller 05.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 M after setpoint filter p0115[0] (125.00 µs)

Picture 2-107 5710 – Current setpoint filter

from function generator
I_pre_setpoint filter
2-664

Servo control
Function diagrams
from the function generator r1650 Torque factor M2Iq M_set FG
Iq_set_1 [5730.4] r1651
p1656[D].0 I_after_setpoint filter from the function generator
p1656[D].1 I_after_setpoint
M_set_6 p1656[D].2
from torque limit filter = active
+ 0 p1656[D].3
+ 0
[5610.8]
0 0
1 0 + Iq_set_2
Torque factor M2Iq 1 [5714.1]
1 1
[5730.4] 1
fn_n
p1658[D] fn_n
D_n p1663[D] fn_n
p1659[D] D_n p1668[D] fn_n
p1664[D] D_n p1673[D]
p1657[D] p1669[D] D_n
|y| p1662[D] p1674[D]
|y| p1667[D]
x D y p1672[D]
0 |y|
x D y
0 |y|
x D y
fn 0
f x D y
1 fn 0
f 1 fn
PT2 lowpass f 1 fn
<2> PT2 lowpass f
PT2 lowpass 1
<2>
<2> PT2 lowpass
fn_z D_z <2>
p1660[D] p1661[D] fn_z D_z
p1665[D] p1666[D] fn_z D_z
p1670[D] p1671[D] fn_z D_z
|y| p1675[D] p1676[D]
|y|
x y
|y|
x y
|y|
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

y
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

f <1> x
2nd Order filter f <1> x y
2nd Order filter f <1>
2nd Order filter f <1>
2nd Order filter
fn_n D_n
p1658[D] p1659[D] fn_n D_n D_n
fn_n
p1663[D] p1664[D] fn_n D_n
p1668[D] p1669[D]
Filter 1 p1673[D] p1674[D]
Filter 2
Filter 3
Filter 4

<1> General 2nd order filter; detailed representation at [1024]. Monitoring F07420
<2> PT2 lowpass; detailed representation at [1024]. Filter frequency too high

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_5710_en.vsd Function diagram
- 5710 -
Servo current control - current setpoint filter 30.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[0] (125.00 µs)

Picture 2-108 5714 – Iq and Id controller

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

F07410
r1408.6 "Current controller
I_ctrl RefMod t_dead
Iq limiting [5493.4] output limited"
p1701[D]
(cuts-off filter overshoots)
Iq_set
Setpoint, torque-generating
Iq controller <1>
r0077
current
U_quadrature axis_set
Iq_set_2 Uq_set_1
r1733
[5710.8] + – + + [5730.1]
r1408.7 Kp_I Tn_I
[A] [5493.4]
M_max upper effective
r1538
Uq pre-control
[5640.8]
t1 r1408.8 I_ctrl Kp
[5493.4] p1715[D]
M_max lower effective
r1539
[5640.8]
Kp_I adaptation
Torque factor M2Iq Kp_I
Iq_act
[5730.4] Tn_I
r0078
Kp_I p1717[D]
[5730.1]
Iq
[%]
p0393[M] p0391[M] p0392[M]

Ud pre-control

Kp_I Tn_I
Id_set U_direct axis_set
Ud_set_1 +
r0075 r1732
+ – +
[5722.8] [5730.1]

Function diagrams
Id_act Id controller
r0076

Servo control
[5730.1]

<1> F07410 is initiated if Uq_set_1 is at its limit and |Iq_set_3| < the limit for16 ms.
2-665

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_5714_en.vsd Function diagram
- 5714 -
Servo current control - Iq and Id controller 05.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Synchronous motor 1000.00 µs
1000.00 µs

Picture 2-109 5722 – Field current setpoint, flux controller

Drv I_outp max
Induction motor p0115[1] (125.00 µs)
(only for synchronous motors with r0067
2-666

Servo control
Function diagrams
reluctance torque) User limits p0640[D]
Max. torque-generating current
optimum load angle Iq_max total
p0327.M Mot I_max I_max
<1> Min imax2 – id_set_42 r1533
p0323[M]
[5640.6]
Field current setpoint for Max. current from the motor module
[5730.4]
synchronous motor i_max_MM 0.9

IF p0348
Synchronous motor Field current setpoint (to the Id controller)
n Id_set_1 1 Id_set_4
Id_set_3
r0075

r0331 -Isc 0 [5714.4]

Speed at the Induction motor -1

Short-circuit Field current limiting
start of field
current Isc
weakening
16 [ms]
T 0

p0348[M]
1 A07411
"Flux controller
output limited"

Short-circuit current or
>0 magnetizing current
p0320[M]
r0331
0
r1408.9
Computation [5493.4]
model Pre-control

Motor data
p1592[D]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

Speed at the start Img p1590[D]

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

of field weakening magnetizing

current
Flux setpoint for induction motor [%] fromMn
Kp Tn
r0083
IF
MN +
r0331 Img
Flux setpoint + – + Id_set_2
Flux actual value
n r0084 [%] from
p0348 jn
Flux controller
Motor model

1000.00 µs p0115[1] (125.00 µs) <1> p0323 is not taken into account for induction motors.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_5722_en.vsd Function diagram
- 5722 -
Servo current control - field current setpoint, flux controller 05.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Drv V_output x1
x1 x x 2 p0115[0] (125.00 µs)
r0072

Picture 2-110 5730 – Interface to the motor module (gating/control signals, current actual values)
Drawn Power 2
Drv V_outp smth Control unit Motor module
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

r0082[2] x2
r0025 100 ms
Vdc act
1.5 x cos phi DC link voltage
r0070
Vdc smooth
r0026 100 ms [2701.8] Pulse enable HW Pulse enable HW +
U_quadrature axis_set Coordinate [2711.8]
>0 Modulation depth –
r1733 converter and
transformation r0074
[5714.8] =0 U
U_direct axis_set
>0 K Modulation depth, PWM
r1732
smooth V
~
[5714.8] Uq_set_3 =0 100 ms M
r0028
From V/f control <3>
[5300.8] Ud_set_3 Voltage angle W

Vf diagnostics act. Drv f_output

P_stall p1317 P
[5640.1] r0066

Drv Iq_act smooth Drv outp_f smth

r0030 100 ms +
Transformation 100 ms r0024
Iq_act angle DRIVE-CLiQ
<1> [5640.4]
[5714.4] r0078 [5714.2]
Torque factor M2Iq
M act smooth Motor model [5730.2]
r0031 100 ms
i_max_MM
Transformation [5722.4]
M_act Max. current, motor module
angle <2>
r0080 –
n_act smooth Phase U
[5300.7] r0063 r0069[0]
Active power, smooth IU
r0032 100 ms
2 Phase V
Unsmoothed
r0069[1]
r0082[0]
IV
Smoothed p0045
Phase W
r0082[1] 3
p0045 r0069[2]
IW
M2Iq
[5730.4] Phase current actual values
Drv Id_act amooth <4>
100 ms I_act abs value smooth

Function diagrams
r0029 P24 + BRP
Coordinate converter 100 ms r0027
Id_act and transformation
[5714.4] r0076 I_act abs. value

Servo control
M - BRN
<1> Iq = M2Iq x Iq (M2Iq = "Torque-To-Iq factor"). iq2  id2 r0068
<2> i_max_MM depends on the power module temperature. Brake control
<3> The voltage angle is the angle of the voltage vector in a fixed stator coordinate system.
<4> In addition for booksize.
2-667

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_5730_en.vsd Function diagram
- 5730 -
Servo current control - interface to the motor module (gating/control signals, current actual values) 21.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Function diagrams
Vector control

2.14 Vector control

Function diagrams

6004 – Raw signal and temperature sensing 2-669

6010 – Speed actual value and rotor position sensing, motor encoder (encoder 1) 2-670

6030 – Speed setpoint, droop 2-671

6031 – Pre-control balancing Reference/acceleration modell 2-672

6040 – Speed control with/without encoder 2-673

6050 – Kp_n-/Tn_n adaption 2-674

6060 – Torque setpoint 2-675

6220 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller 2-676

6300 – V/f characteristic and voltage boost 2-677

6310 – Resonance damping and slip compensation 2-678

6320 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller 2-679

6489 – V/f control status word 1 2-680

6490 – Speed control configuration 2-681

6491 – Flux control configuration 2-682

6492 – Control status word 1 2-683

6493 – Control status word 3 2-684

6630 – Upper/lower torque limit 2-685

6640 – Current/power/torque limits 2-686

6710 – Current setpoint filter 2-687

6714 – Iq and Id controllers 2-688

6722 – Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint 2-689

6723 – Field weakening controller, flux controller for induction motors (p0300 = 1) 2-690

6724 – Field weakening controller for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2) 2-691

6730 – Interface to the motor module for induction motors (p0300 = 1) 2-692

6731 – Interface to the motor module for a synchronous motor (p0300 = 2) 2-693

2-668  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Encoders Sensor module Control unit
p0115[y] (MM)

Picture 2-111 6004 – Raw signal and temperature sensing Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Configuration, absolute value

encoder
Encoder type <1>
selection Enc Encoder Encoder Abs encoder Abs encoder Abs encoder Enc rot
0 = No encoder Enc configuration squarewave A/B grid division pulse number multiturn measuring step singleturn clearance NM
The encoder data set
p0400[E] p0404[E] p0405[E] p0407[E] p0408[E] p0421[E] p0422[E] p0423[E] p0425[E]
[E] changeover is
<3> <3> <3> <3> <3> <3> represented at [8570]

<2>
Comp.No.encoder interface
p0141[E]
<2> 1 2
Comp.No.encoder incr.
p0142[E] A
DRIVE CLiQ
B
To speed
Raw position signals
SMx sensing
Raw position signals (only from encoder1)
[6010.1]
A
SM properties sin/cos
r0458
B
To the thermal
motor monitoring
1 signal period -from sensor n
[8016.1]

F31100-A33905
Encoder faults/alarms
p0979[0...25]

Function diagrams
Encoder format acc. to
PROFIdrive

Vector control
<1> For rotary encoders = setting the number pulses. For resolvers = setting the pulse
pair number.
<2> p0142 = p0141 for motors with integrated DRIVE-CLiQ interface.
<3> These parameters are automatically set.
2-669

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_6004_en.vsd Function diagram
- 6004 -
Vector encoder evaluation - raw signal and temperature sensing 30.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 1 = Sensorless operation active
Induction motor [2522.6] r1407.1
p0115[y] (MM)

Picture 2-112 6010 – Speed actual value and rotor position sensing, motor encoder (encoder 1) <2> n_act T_smooth Refer to [1020.7]
2-670

Vector control
Function diagrams
Inv encoder actual value 0.00...20.00 ms n_act smooth r0021
C,D 100 ms
p0410.0[E] p1441[D] (0.00)

To the brake control [2701.1]

Fine resolution up dx 0 To the speed controller [6040.1]
A,B x y n_act motor encoder 0 n_act smooth
for the speed dt To Kp_n/Tn_n-adaptation [6050.1]
-1 1 r0063
actual value dn III To torque limiting [6640.1]
Raw position
Smoothing 1 To the Iq and Id controllers [6714.7]
signals from
To field weakening characteristic [6722.1]
encoder 1 n_act motor encoder To the motor module interface (pre-control speed) [6730.1]
n_act [RPM]
1 encoder revolution To the speed messages/signals [8010.1]
measurement r0061
C

D n_act calculation
<1> [6730.1]

Zero mark

<1> = Only for vector control without encoder.

<2> The [E]ncoder data set changeover is represented at [8570].

Synchronous
<1>
motor p0115[y] (MM)

<2> n_act T_smooth n_act smooth Refer to [1020.7]

100 ms r0021
C,D n_act measurement Inv encoder actual value 0.00...20.00 ms
p0410.0[E] p1441[D] (0.00)
To the brake control [2701.1]
To the speed controller [6040.1]
up dx 0 n_act smooth To Kp_n/Tn_n-adaptation [6050.1]
A,B Fine resolution x y n_act motor encoder
dt r0063 To torque limiting [6640.1]
for the speed -1 1
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

dn To the Iq and Id controllers [6714.7]

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Raw position actual value III

Smoothing To field weakening characteristic [6722.1]
signals from
encoder 1 To the motor module interface (pre-control speed) [6730.1]
To the speed messages/signals [8010.1]
n_act motor encoder [RPM]
1 encoder revolution
r0061
C
Transformat_angle
r0094
D 0
[6714.1]
-1 1
Zero mark

<1> Only for p0300 = 2.

<2> The [E]ncoder data set changeover is represented at [8570].

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_6010_en.vsd Function diagram
- 6010 -
Vector encoder evaluation functions - speed actual value and rotor position sensing, motor encoder (encoder 1) 30.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[y] (MM)

Picture 2-113 6030 – Speed setpoint, droop Droop input source

Droop input Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

n-ctrl I_output 0...3 <3>

p1488 (0)
[6040.8]
r1482 Droop scaling
M_set before M_suppl 0.000...0.500
r1508 p1489 [D] (0.050)
3 <1>
2 Droop n_reduction
[6060.5]
1 r1490
150 ms
M_set total
0
r0079 0 nN
[6060.8] MN
0
p1492 Enable droop 0 1 Droop enabled
[2520.7] r1406.11 r1407.10
[2522.3]
n_set_filter 1 T
0.00...5000.00 [ms]
n_set limited
p1416 [D] (0.00)
n_set before filter r1407.11
r0060 [2522.3]
n_ctrl n_set sum - n_set after filter
r1170 r0062 [6031.1]
[3080.8] +
n_limit pos effective
r1084

[3050.8] [3095.8]
[3050.8] [3095.8]

n_limit negative effective

<1> r1087
0
Mot moment of inertia ratio Mot M_inertia
1.000...10000.000 0.00000...100000.00000 [kgm²] 1 0
p0342 [M] (1.000) p0341 [M] (0.00000) 1 = Sensorless vector control, speed pre-control active
from speed control configuration
a at M_ctrl scal p1400.15
0.0...400.0 [%]
n_set limited
p1499 [D] (100.0)
r1407.11 0
Pre-control speed
M_set total [2522.3]
r0079 [6730.1]

Function diagrams
1
[6060.8] M_ctrl active
r1407.2

Vector control
[6060.3]

<1> = Only for vector control without encoder. <3> Scaling: p1489 = 0.100 - for a rated motor torque of r0333 - results in a speed setpoint reduction of 0.1 x p0311.
2-671

<2> Refer to speed actual value smoothing [6040.2]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_6030_en.vsd Function diagram
- 6030 -
Vector speed control with/without encoder - speed setpoint, droop 30.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Mot moment of inertia ratio Mot M_inertia
p0115[y] (MM)

Picture 2-114 6031 – Pre-control balancing Reference/acceleration modell

1.000...10000.000 0.00000...100000.00000 [kgm²]
p0342 [M] (1.000) p0341 [M] (0.00000) Refer to [1020.7]
2-672

Vector control
Function diagrams
Acceleration pre-control, source a_before scaling
p1400.2 0.0...10 000.0 [%]
a_pre-ctrl dn/1s p1496 [D] (0.0)
p1495
1
(0) Calculated accelerating torque
Acceleration calculation [6060.1]
0

p1400.2 = 1
Reference model n_pre t_dead bal n n_pre T bal or
Speed setpoint 0.0...2.0 0.00...10.00 [ms] § p1400.3 0 ·
I-component p1428[D] (0.0) p1429[D] (0.00) ¨ ¸
1 0 <1> ¨ und ¸
p1400.3 ¨ ¸
© p1496 ! 0 ¹
0

Pre-control balancing 1 n_ctrl n_set

n_set after filter r1438 [6040.1]
[6030.8]
0

n_ctrl RefMod t_dead

0.0...2.0
p1435[D] (0.0)
n_ctrl RefMod fn n_ctrl RefMod D Reference model, speed setpoint I component
0.00...8000.00 [Hz] 0.00...5.00 p1400.3
p1433[D] (0.00) p1434[D] (1.00) Sampling time, closed-loop speed control (p0115[1])

n_ctrl I_comp RefMod n_set smooth 0 n_set I_comp

n_set RefMod output p1437 r1439 [6040.1]
Reference model r1436 (r1436)
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

1
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

(y = x for the factory setting of p1433 ... p1435)

<1> p1428, p1429 only effective for p1400.2 = 1; for p1400.2 = 0 instead of p1429: p1442 or for SLVC p1452 [6040.2].

RFG setpoint at the input

r1119
Steady-state setpoint calculation Master control
p0807.0
n_ctrl n_set 1
p1155[C]
n_set via PC 1
+ n_ctrl n_set stat
n_ctrl n_set 2 r1444
p1160[C] 0
+ +

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_6031_en.vsd Function diagram
- 6031 -
Speed control with/without encoder - pre-control balancing Reference/acceleration model 30.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 <4> <3>
n_ctrl Kp n lower n_ctrl Tn n lower
p0115[y] (MM)

Picture 2-115 6040 – Speed control with/without encoder

0.000...999999.000 0.00...100000.00 [ms]
p1460 [D] (0.300) p1462 [D] (20.00) Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

<1> p1470 [D] (0.300) <1> p1472 [D] (20.00)

Kp_n_basic
To Kp/Tn adaptation
Tn_n_adapt Tn_n_basic [6050.2]
From Kp/Tn adaptation Kp_n_adapt
[6050.7]
[6490.7]
1 0 1 0
1 = Kp/Tn adaptation active <2>
p1400.5
n_ctrl Tn effective
1 = Automatic Kp/Tn adaptation active Reduction in dynamic performance, field r1469
p1400.0 weakening <1>
n_ctrl Kp effective
[6490.7]
r1468

n_ctrl system deviation Kp Tn

n_ctrl n_set Speed controller
r1438 r0064 Kp
M_set from the
Kp
speed controller
[6030.8] [6060.1]
n_act T_smooth + + +
0.00...32000.00 [ms] - M_max upper effective
p1442 [D] (4.00) [6640.8] r1538
<1> p1452 [D] (10.00)

M_max lower effective

n_act smooth n_act smooth [6640.8] r1539
Kp Tn
[6010.6] r0063 r1445

n_set I_comp
- n_ctrl I_output
[6030.8] r1482
+ Set [6030.1]
Enable speed controller Hold Set Val
[2610.4] Speed control active
from sequence control S4: Operation
r1407.3 [2522.2]
p1476 1 = speed controller, hold I component
[2520.7] r1406.4 1 = Speed controller, I component held
1 = speed controller, set I component r1407.5
p1477
r1406.5 [2522.3]
[2520.7] n_ctrl I_value scal Integrator
p1479[C] control 1 = Speed controller, I component set
n_ctrl integ_set val

Function diagrams
(1) r1407.6
p1478[C]
(0) [2522.3]
<1> = Only for vector control without encoder.

Vector control
<2> Only for speed control with encoder. 1 = Torque limit reached
[2522.7] r1407.7
<3> For p1462/p1472 = 0.0 s or 100.0 s the I component is
disabled (integral action time = ). 1 = Sensorless vector control, freeze I component
<1> [5490.7] p1400.1
<4> Units Kp can be changed over using p0528.
2-673

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_6040_en.vsd Function diagram
- 6040 -
Vector speed control with/without encoder - speed controller 21.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[y] (MM)

Picture 2-116 6050 – Kp_n-/Tn_n adaption

Free Kp_n adaptation Refer to [1020.7]
Adapt_factor upper
2-674

Vector control
Function diagrams
0.0...200 000.0 %
Free Tn-adaptation active
p1459[D] (100.0)
p1400.6

y 0
n_ctrl adapt_sig Kp 1
x
p1455[C]
1
(0)
x

Adapt_factor lower
0.0...200 000.0 %
0.00...400.00 % 0.00...400.00 %
p1458[D] (100.0)
p1456[D] (0.00) p1457[D] (0.00)
n_ctrl Kp scal n_ctrl adapt Kp lower n_ctrl adapt Kp upper
p1466[C]
(1)

Speed-dependent Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation

Kp_n_basic (p1460) Kp
[6040.8]
n_act smooth
n Kp Kp_n_adapt
r0063 To the speed controller [6040.4]
[6010.6]
n

p1461[D] (100.000) n_ctrl n upper

0.000...200 000.000 % 0.00...210 000.00 RPM
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

n_ctrl Kp n upper p1465[D] (0.00)

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

n_ctrl Tn n upper n_ctrl n lower

0.000...200 000.000 % 0.00...210 000.00 RPM
p1463[D] (100.000) p1464[D] (0.00)

Tn

n Tn Tn_n_adapt
To the speed controller [6040.4]
Tn_n_basic (p1462)
[6040.8] n

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_6050_en.vsd Function diagram
- 6050 -
Vector, speed control with/without encoder - Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation 17.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 M_suppl total
r1515 p0115[y] (MM)

Picture 2-117 6060 – Torque setpoint

M_suppl 1 0
0
p1511[C] Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

(0)
1
+
M_suppl 1 scal + p1400.14
p1512[C] M_suppl 2 scal p0856 ≥1
(0) -10 000%...10 000%
[2501.7] r0898.12
p1514[D] (100.0%)
M_suppl 2
p1513[C]
(0) Accel_torque
Calculated acceleration torque r1518
0 +
[6031.8]
0 1 +
M_max upper effective
r1538
[6640.8] M_max upper scal
p1540[C] 0
p1501 1 = M_ctrl active (100) 0 1
[2520.7] r1406.12
1 = M_ctrl active 1 = Speed controller limited
p1300 = MCtrl ≥1 r1407.2 r1407.7
[6030.5] 1 = M_max output n_ctrl upper limit [2522.3]

1 = Magnetization completed r1547[0]

r1405.4
[6492.7] Torque limiting, upper active Torque limiting, upper active
r1407.8 r1407.8
M_soll 0 [2522.3] [2522.3]
0 M_set before M_suppl
p1503[C]
r1508
(0)
1 [6030.1]
1
[6722.1] + M_set total
M_set from the speed controller r0079
0 + [6030.1]
[6040] [6710.1]
Torque limiting lower active Torque limiting
r1407.9 Torque limiting lower active
[2522.3] r1407.9
[2522.3]
1 = M_max output n_ctrl lower limit
M_max lower scal

Function diagrams
r1547[1]
p1541[C]
(100)

Vector control
M_max lower effective
r1539
[6640.8]
2-675

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_6060_en.vsd Function diagram
- 6060 -
Vector speed control with encoder - torque setpoint 05.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[y] (MM)

Picture 2-118 6220 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller Refer to [1020.7]
2-676

Vector control
Function diagrams
Vdc_ctrl Tn
Vdc_max (ctrl) p1251

Vdc_max on_level Vdc_ctrl Kp Vdc_ctrl t_deriv action

r1242 p1250 p1252
Vdc_ctrl config
p1240

Vdc_act –
r0070 1,3
1 Control ZSW 1
[8950.1] + r0056
0
0,2 0 r0056.14

Vdc controller
active
≥1 [6710.2]
Vdc_max Dyn_factor
p1243
Vdc_ctrl output
r1258 Iq_max
[6710.2]
Operating point
0 Iq_min
selection
[6710.2]
Vdc_ctrl Tn
Vdc_min (ctrl) p1251

Vdc_min on_level Vdc_ctrl Kp Vdc_ctrl t_deriv action

r1246 p1250 p1252
Vdc_ctrl config
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

p1240

Vdc_act + 0
2,3 1 Control ZSW 1
r0070
[8950.1] – r0056
0,1 0 r0056.15

Vdc_min Dyn_factor
p1247

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_6220_en.vsd Function diagram
- 6220 -
Vector control - Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller 14.06.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Linear
p0115[y] (MM)

Picture 2-119 6300 – V/f characteristic and voltage boost

V_output max r0071
Mot V_rated p0304 Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Mot f_rated Flux current control (FCC)

p0310 Dependent on the load current
V_output max r0071
Mot V_rated p0304 Control type
p1300

0/5
1/6
2
[1690.4]
Mot f_rated Vf V_set independent 3
Parabolic
p0310 p1330[C]
19
V_output max r0071 (0)
Mot V_rated p0304
f_set
[1690.1]

Freely programmable

Mot f_rated
V_output max r0071
p0310
Vf characteristic U4 p1327

Drv output I_max Vf characteristic U3 p1325

r0067 V_boost total
r1315 Vf characteristic U2 p1323
V_boost perm Vf characteristic U1 p1321
p1310 + +
Ramp-up active Mot I_rated
p1199.0 0 R_stator act
p0305

Function diagrams
r0395
0 Vf characteristic f1 Vf characteristic f3
0

Vector control
p1320 p1324
V_boost accel
p1311 1 Vf characteristic f2 Vf characteristic f4
p1322 p1326
2-677

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_6300_en.vsd Function diagram
- 6300 -
Vector V/f control - V/f characteristic and voltage boost 16.07.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[y] (MM)

Picture 2-120 6310 – Resonance damping and slip compensation Refer to [1020.7]
2-678

Vector control
Function diagrams
V/f resonance damping V/f slip compensation

Vf gain res damp

p1338

f_res damp
[1690.7] Slip comp limit
+ – p1336
Vf T res damp
p1339 Slip compensation Slip compensation
f_slip p1335 actual value
r0065 r1337
Iq_act
r0078 [6730.2] [1690.6]
250 ms
[6714.4]

-1

Drv f_output 1
r0066 Motor type selection
[1690.8] p0300
[6730.4] 6 10 80 95 % f/fMot,Nom Control ZSW1
slip limiting
1 r0056
1
< r0056.10
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

6 10 % f/fMot,Nom

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_6310_en.vsd Function diagram
- 6310 -
Vector V/f control - resonance damping and slip compensation 30.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[y] (MM)

Picture 2-121 6320 – Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Vdc_ctrl Tn
Vdc_max (V/f) p1291

Vdc_max on_level Vdc_ctrl Kp Vdc_ctrl t_deriv action

r1282 p1290 p1292
Vdc_ctrl config
p1280 Vdc_ctrl output_limit
p1293
Vdc_act –
r0070 1,3
1 Control ZSW 1
[8950.1] + r0056
0 r0056.14
0,2 0

Vdc_max dyn_factor
p1283
Vdc_ctrl output
r1298

0 [1690]

Vdc_ctrl Tn
Vdc_min (V/f) p1291

Vdc_min on_level Vdc_ctrl Kp Vdc_ctrl t_deriv action

r1286 p1290 p1292
Vdc_ctrl config
p1280
0
Vdc_act + 0
2,3 Control ZSW 1
r0070 1
[8950.1]
– r0056
0,1 0 r0056.15

- Vdc_ctrl output_limit

Function diagrams
p1293

Vector control
Vdc_min dyn_factor
p1287
2-679

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_6320_en.vsd Function diagram
- 6320 -
Vector V/f control - Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller 16.07.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p1305

Picture 2-122 6489 – V/f control status word 1

p0115[y] (MM)
V/f control, status word 1
Refer to [1020.7]
2-680

Vector control
Function diagrams
V/f control ZSW1
Bit No. Meaning r1305 [6492.7]

0 1 = Initialization completed r1305.0

1 1 = De-magnetization completed r1305.1

2 1 = Pulses enabled r1305.2

3 1 = Soft starting active r1305.3

[6722.4] 4 1 = Magnetizing (and flying restart) completed r1305.4

5 Reserved r1305.5

6 1 = Acceleration voltage active r1305.6

[6730.5] 7 1 = Frequency, negative r1305.7

[6722.3] 8 1 = Field weakening active r1305.8

[6714.8] 9 1 = Voltage limit reached r1305.9

10 1 = Slip limiting active r1305.10

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

[6730.5] 11 1 = Frequency limit reached r1305.11

12 1 = Current limiting controller (voltage) active r1305.12

13 1 = Current limiting controller (frequency) active r1305.13

[6710.2] 14 1 = Vdc_max controller active r1305.14

[6710.2] 15 1 = Vdc_min controller active r1305.15

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_6489_en.vsd Function diagram
- 6489 -
Vector open-loop - closed-loop control/status word - V/f control, status word 1 30.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p1400[D] p0115[y] (MM)

Picture 2-123 6490 – Speed control configuration

Speed control configuration Factory setting
Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

n_ctrl config
Bit No. Meaning p1400[D]

0 1 = Automatic Kp/Tn adaptation active 0 [6040.3]

1 1 = Sensorless vector control, freeze I component 0

1 = Acceleration pre-control, external source (p1495)

2
0 = Internal acceleration pre-control (n_set)

3 1 = Reference model, speed setpoint I component ON

4 Reserved

5 1 = Kp/Tn adaptation active 1 [6040.3]

6 Reserved

7 Reserved

8 Reserved

9 Reserved

10 Reserved

11 Reserved

12 Reserved

13 Reserved

Function diagrams
1 = Torque pre-control always active
14 0
0 = Torque pre-control for n_ctrl enable

Vector control
15 1 = Sensorless vector control, speed pre-control active 1 [6030.5]
2-681

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_6490_en.vsd Function diagram
- 6490 -
Vector open-loop - closed-loop control status words - speed control configuration 29.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[y] (MM)

Picture 2-124 6491 – Flux control configuration

p1401[D]
Flux control, configuration Factory setting
Refer to [1020.7]
2-682

Vector control
Function diagrams
F_ctrl config
Bit No. Meaning p1401[D]

0 1 = Flux setpoint, soft starting active 0 [6722.3]

1 1 = Flux setpoint, differentiation active 1 [6723.7]

2 1 = Flux build-up control active 1 [6723.6]

3 Reserved

4 Reserved

5 Reserved

6 Reserved

7 Reserved

3
8 Reserved

9 Reserved

10 Reserved
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

11 Reserved

12 Reserved

13 Reserved

14 Reserved

15 Reserved

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_6491_en.vsd Function diagram
- 6491 -
Vector open-loop - closed-loop control status words - flux control configuration 03.08.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p1405
p0115[y] (MM)

Picture 2-125 6492 – Control status word 1

Control status word 1 Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Ctrl ZSW1
Bit No. Meaning r1405

0 1 = Initialization completed r1405.0

Control ZSW1
1 1 = De-magnetization completed r1405.1 V/f control ZSW1 t1 r0056
r1305 r0056
2 1 = Pulses enabled r1405.2 [6489.7]

3 Reserved r1405.3

[6722.4] 4 1 = Magnetizing (and flying restart) completed r1405.4

5 Reserved r1405.5

6 Reserved r1405.6

[6730.5] 7 1 = Frequency, negative r1405.7

[6722.3] 8 1 = Field weakening active r1405.8

[6714.8] 9 1 = Voltage limit reached r1405.9

10 Reserved r1405.10

[6730.5] 11 1 = Frequency limit reached r1405.11

12 Reserved r1405.12

13 Reserved r1405.13

Function diagrams
[6710.2] 14 1 = Vdc_max controller active r1405.14

Vector control
[6710.2] 15 1 = Vdc_min controller active r1405.15
2-683

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_6492_en.vsd Function diagram
- 6492 -
Vector open-loop - closed-loop control/status words - control status word 1 30.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[y] (MM)

Picture 2-126 6493 – Control status word 3

Control status word 3 (for current control)
Refer to [1020.7]
2-684

Vector control
Function diagrams
Ctrl ZSW3
Bit No. Meaning r1408

0 1 = Current control active

[6714.5] 1 1 = Lim. I-comp. Id-ctrl active

2 Reserved

[6714.7] 3 1 = V limiting active

4 Reserved

5 Reserved

6 Reserved

7 Reserved

8 Reserved

9 Reserved

[6730.3] 10 1 = Lim. EMF/Obs-ctrl. active

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

11 1 = Error EMF/Obs-N active

12 1 = Motor stalled active

13 Reserved

14 Reserved

15 Reserved

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_6493_en.vsd Function diagram
- 6493 -
Vector open-loop - closed-loop control/status words - control status word 3 30.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[2] (MM)

Picture 2-127 6630 – Upper/lower torque limit

Upper torque limit Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

<1>
A

M_max upper/mot
M_max upper/mot p1522[C] M_max upper without Offs
-100 000.00...100 000.00 Nm p1520[D] (1520) r1526
M p1520[D] (0.00) [6640.1]
2 1 M_max upper scal
n M_max upper/mot scal p1528[C]
-2 000.0...2 000.0 [%] p1524[D] (1524)
p1524[D] (100.0)

Lower torque limit

M_max lower/regen
M_max lower/regen p1523[C] M_max lower without Offs
M -100 000.00...100 000.00 Nm p1521[D] (1521) r1527
p1521[D] (0.00) [6640.1]
n M_max lower scal
3 4 M_max lower/regen scal p1529[C]
-2 000.0...2 000.0 [%] p1525[D] (1525) B
p1525[D] (100.0) <1>

Function diagrams
Vector control
<1> Danger note:
Negative values at A or positive values at B represent a minimum torque for the other torque direction and can cause the motor to accelerate uncontrollably.
2-685

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_6630_en.vsd Function diagram
- 6630 -
Generating torque limits - upper/lower torque limit 01.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[2] (MM)

Picture 2-128 6640 – Current/power/torque limits

Mot L_leakage total
Current limiting r0377[M] Speed limitation Refer to [1020.7]
2-686

Vector control
Function diagrams
Kp from speed controller [6040.5]
V_output max
Iq stall Tn from speed controller [6040.6]
r0071 n_limit pos effective
calculation
[6723.4] Drv I_ouput max
r1084
r0067 +
[3050.8]
[6722.1]
Current limit n_limit neg effective
p0640[D] Iq_max total - + –
I_max reduction x r1087
r1533 Speed limiting
[8016.8] Min [3050.8]
I_max motor module controller
[6730.4] x y2 2
Sign +
Id_set stat or -
[6723.8]
y
-1
Id_set stat
r1624

Max Min

n_act smooth
r0063
[6010.6]

M_max upper without Offs

r1526 – M_max upper effective
[6630.8] M Min r1538
+ [6060.1] [6040.4]
Iq [6730.1]
M_max lower without Offs
r1527 – M_max lower effective
[6630.8] M
Max r1539
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

Power limiting +
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

[6060.1] [6040.4]
Iq [6730.1]
<1>
Isq_max
Min r1536
P_max regen
-10 000.00...-0.01 kW [6710.1]
p1531 (-0.01)
n
P_max mot
0.00...10 000.00 kW
p1530 (0.00)
Isq_min
Max r1537
[6710.1]
Intervention Vdc controller
<1> <1>

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_6640_en.vsd Function diagram
- 6640 -
Generating torque limits - current/power/torque limits 05.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Vdc_controller
p0115[y] (MM)

Picture 2-129 6710 – Current setpoint filter

active
[6220.8]
Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Iq_max 1 = Vdc_max controller active

[6220.8] r1405.14 [6492.2]
1
Isq_max
[6640.8] r1536
0

Iq_min 1 = Vdc_min controller active

[6220.8] r1405.15 [6492.2]
1
Isq_min
[6640.8] r1537 p1656[D]0.0
0 p1656[D].1
Isq_set T_smooth
p1654
0
0 Iq_set
M_set total r0077
Interpolator and 1
r0079 smoothing for voltage 1 [6714.1]
[6060.8] limits fn_n
p1658[D] fn_n
D_n p1663[D]
M D_n
p1659[D]
Iq p1664[D]
[6730.1] p1657[D]
|y| p1662[D]
D y |y|
x 0
x D y
0
fn
f 1 fn
<2> f 1
I_set_filt fn <2>
I_set_filt fn
p1655[0] p1655[1]
(1) (1)
fn_z D_z
<3> p1660[D] p1661[D] <3> fn_z D_z
p1665[D] p1666[D]

|y|
|y|
x y
x y
f <1>

Function diagrams
2nd Order filter f <1>
2nd Order filter

Vector control
fn_n D_n
p1658[D] p1659[D] fn_n D_n
<1> General 2nd order filter; detailed representation at [1024].
p1663[D] p1664[D]
<2> PT2 lowpass; detailed representation at [1024].
<3> The frequency is multiplied by this factor.
Filter 1 Filter 2
2-687

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_6710_en.vsd Function diagram
- 6710 -
Vector current control - current setpoint filter 05.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Isq_ctrl_pre-ctrl scal Quadrature axis_de-couple VmaxScal
p1703 p1727 p0115[y] (MM)

Picture 2-130 6714 – Iq and Id controllers

Mot L_leakage, total Quadrature axis_de-couple scal
p0377 p1726 Refer to [1020.7]
2-688

Vector control
Function diagrams
Flux setpoint total
<1> [6723.1] Pre-control, de-coupling and V_de-couple
r1598
<2> [6724.1] limiting r1728
V_set 1 [6723.1] <1>
[6724.1] <2>
Isd_ctrl I_limit V_max 1 [6723.4] <1>
r1725 [6724.4] <2>
Voltage limit active
Id control, I component limiting
r0056.9
r1408.1
Voltage limiting
Isd_ctrl I_comp V_quadrature axis_set
r1408.3
r1724 r1733
Id current controller
Id_set
r0075
+ + + V_set
<1> [6723.8] Id_set total [6730.1] <1>
Balancing
<2> [6724.8] + + + [6731.1] <2>
– +
Kp_I Tn_I K
Isd_ctrl output
r1723
p1715 p1717 Coordinate converter
Isq_ctrl Tn
r1719
p
Iq_set [6730.1]
+ + V_angle <1>
[6710.8] r0077 Balancing [6731.1]
+ – + + + +
Isq_ctrl output <2>
Transformat_angle Kp_I Tn_I r1718 V_direct axis_set
<1> r0094 Iq current controller
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

r1732
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

[6730.1] Active power, smooth

<2> 100 ms r0032
[6731.1] Id_act I_act abs value smooth
<1> r0076 300 ms r0027 P_act
[6730.4] I_phase actual value
<2> Ia r0082
r0069[0] I_act abs. value n_act smooth
[6731.4] 3
<1>
2
x y 2 r0068 r0063
I_phase actual value
[6730.4] [6010.6] M_act
<2> r0069[1] VD -
[6731.4] r0080
I_phase actual value Iq_act <1>
<1> 2 Ib [6730.1] M
[6730.4] r0069[2] r0078
<2> Iq
<2>
[6310.1] [6731.1]
[6731.4]
<1> For induction motors.
<2> For synchronous motors.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_6714_en.vsd Function diagram
- 6714 -
Vector current control - Iq and Id controllers 21.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Flux setpoint T_smooth Fs
p0115[2] (MM)

Picture 2-131 6722 – Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint

p1584[D]
Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Mot t_excitation
V_output max p0346[D]
r0071
Magnetization
1 = Flux setpoint, soft starting active r1405.4
p1570[D]
Field weakening p1401.0 r0056.4
Flux setpoint y
p1570[D] r1405.8 1 = Flux build-up control active
r0056.8 p1401.2
n_act smooth
[6010.6] r0063 Magnetization control
f
Field-weakening
characteristic MotMod status (r1751)
[6730.3]
Mot T_rotor
r0384
0 Flux setpoint, smoothed
MIN
Efficiency opt r1583
0...100 % < 0.3 s 1 [6723.1]
p1580[D](0)

Flux setpoint T_smooth

Efficiency optimization p1582[D]
0,9

Drv I_ouput max

Id current limit
r0067
[6640.3] [6723.1]

<1>
M_set steady-state
p1610[D] I_set T_smooth
p1616
M_suppl_accel
p1611[D]
–
M_set before M_suppl Id_set Flux setpoint
r1508 calculation calculation
[6060.5]

Function diagrams
Vector control
Mot I_mag_rated act
r0331[M]

<1> Only for vector control without encoder (SLVC).

2-689

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_6722_en.vsd Function diagram
- 6722 -
Vector current control - field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint 01.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Pulse frequency Modulator, modes Modulation depth, max p0115[y] (MM)

Picture 2-132 6723 – Field weakening controller, flux controller for induction motors (p0300 = 1)
p0230 p1800 p1802 p1803
Refer to [1020.7]
2-690

Vector control
Function diagrams
Calculation, max. modulation depth

V_max 1
[6714.8]
Modulat_depth max
r0073

Field-weakening controller, integral action time

Voltage reserve, dynamic 10...10 000 [ms]
0...150 [Vrms] p1596[D] (50) V_max-ctrl output
Vdc smooth p1574[D] (10) V_output max r1597
r0026 r0071 0
– [6640.1]
[6730.1]
+ +
–
-200 % [6491]
[6491] Flux differentiation
2 Flux build-up control p1401.1
p1401.2

V_set 1 0
0
[6714.8]
1
Flux setpoint total
r1598 I_set_steady-state Id_set total
[6714.1] r1623 r1624

Flux setpoint, smoothed + +

r1583 [6714.1]
[6722.8]
+ +
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Saturation characteristic -1
p0362 ... p0369
Id current limit
[6722.8]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_6723_en.vsd Function diagram
- 6723 -
Vector current control - field weakening controller, flux controller for induction motors (p0300 =1) 01.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Pulse frequency Modulator, modes Modulation depth, max p0115[y] (MM)

Picture 2-133 6724 – Field weakening controller for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2)
p0230 p1800 p1802 p1803
Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Calculation, max. modulation depth

V_max 1
[6714.8]
Modulat_depth max
r0073
Field_ctrl Kp Field_ctrl Tn
V_reserve dyn V_output max 0.00 ...1000.00 [A/V] 10...10 000 [ms] Mot I_mag_rated act
0...150 [Vrms] p1594[D] (0.00) p1596[D] (50) r0331
r0071 Field_ctrl output
Vdc smooth p1574[D] (10)
[6640.1] [5722.3] 0 r1593
r0026
–
[6718.1]
+ +
–
Mot V_rated
2 0...20 000 [Vrms]
p0304(0)

V_set 1
[6714.8]

Mot I_mag_rated act

r0331

+ Field weakening current pre-ctrl Id_set total

- r1589 r1624
n_act smooth -nF
+
nF
r0063 [6714.1]
+
[6010.6]

0.9
Drv I_ouput max
Min -1
r0067
[6640.3]

Function diagrams
Vector control
2-691

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_6724_en.vsd Function diagram
- 6724 -
Vector current control - field weakening controller for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2) 30.06.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[y] (MM)

Picture 2-134 6730 – Interface to the motor module for induction motors (p0300 = 1)
Vdc smooth Refer to [1020]
Vdc_act
r0026
Control unit Motor module
2-692

Vector control
Function diagrams
r0070
[6723.1] 0.1 s DC link voltage
Drv V_output Pulse enable
r0072 HW
+
Modulation depth
2 r0074 –
V_set
[6714.8] U
V_angle
[6714.8] PWM
<1> p1740 V
Frequency limit
f_slip
active ~
M
Current model Vibration damping r1405.11 W
r0065
<1>Pre-
control Drv f_output
[6310.5]
speed r0066
[6030.8] n_act smooth + + [6310.1]
[6010.6] r0063
p1764 p1767 + +
+
DRIVE CLiQ
MotMod
Kp Tn Sign
n_adapt
+ or -
Kp r1770

Frequency, negative I_max motor module

+ + MotMod r1405.7
n_adapt
<1> Tn r1771 I_max motor module
Actual speed value Adaptation controller
[6010] [6640.1]
R_stator act
r0395
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

I_phase actual value

From the thermal motor model Motor model
(observer) r0069[0..0.2] [6714.1]
Flux actual value r1762, r1763,
r0084 r1778, r1779 V_phase actual value
r0089[0...2]
[6714.1]

Stall monitoring r1408.11 <2> <3>

Transformat_angle
p1744, p1745
r0094 r1408.12 P24 + BRP
Model control
M [6722.7]
p1750 ... p1759
M - BRN
[6640.5] Iq
r1751
[6710.2] Brake control
MotMod status
[6714.6] p1750 p1755 p1756 p1758 p1759
<1> = Only for vector control without encoder.
<2> = Only for vector control with encoder. <3> In addition for booksize.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_6730_en.vsd Function diagram
- 6730 -
Vector current control - interface to the motor module for induction motors (p0300 = 1) 04.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[y] (MM)

Picture 2-135 6731 – Interface to the motor module for a synchronous motor (p0300 = 2)
Vdc smooth Refer to [1020]
Vdc_act
r0026
Control unit Motor module
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

r0070
[6723.1] 0.1 s DC link voltage
Drv V_output
r0072 Pulse enable +
Modulation depth HW
2 r0074 –
V_set
[6714.8] U
V_angle
PWM
[6714.8] V
Frequency limit active ~
M
r1405.11 W
<1>Pre-
control Drv f_output
speed r0066
[6030.8] n_act smooth
[6310.1]
[6010.6] r0063
p1795
DRIVE CLiQ

Tn MotMod KT corr Sign

r1797 + or -

Frequency, negative I_max motor module

r1405.7

I_max motor module

KT adaptation controller
V_quadrature [6640.1]
R_stator act axis_set
r0395 r1733
Iq_set r0077
I_phase actual value
From the thermal motor model KT estimate
r0069[0..0.2] [6714.1]
Flux actual value p0328, p0316,
p0357, p1780.3
r0084 V_phase actual value
r0089[0...2]
Id_act
r1408.11 <2> r0076 <3>
Stall monitoring

Function diagrams
r1408.12 P24 + BRP

Vector control
M - BRN
[6640.5] Iq
[6710.2] Brake control
[6714.6]
<3> In addition for booksize.
2-693

<2> = Only for vector control with encoder.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: VECTOR fp_S01_6731_en.vsd Function diagram
- 6731 -
Vector current control - interface to the motor module for a synchronous motor (p0300 = 2) 04.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Function diagrams
Technology controller

2.15 Technology controller

Function diagrams

7950 – Fixed values (r0108.16 = 1) 2-695

7954 – Motorized potentiometer (r0108.16 = 1) 2-696

7958 – Control (r0108.16 = 1) 2-697

2-694  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Tec_ctrl select bit 0
4000.00 µs

Picture 2-136 7950 – Fixed values (r0108.16 = 1)

p2220[D] 0 ... 15
(0) Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

23 20 <101>
Tec_ctrl select bit 1 Tec_ctrl No. act
0.00 % 0000 0...15
p2221[D]
r2229
(0) Tec_ctrl fixed value 1
-200.00...200.00 % 0001
Tec_ctrl select bit 2 p2201D] (0.00) r2201[D]
p2222[D] Tec_ctrl fixed value 2
(0) -200.00...200.00 % 0010
p2202[D] (10.00) r2202[D]
Tec_ctrl select bit 3 Tec_ctrl fixed value 3
p2223[D] -200.00...200.00 % 0011
(0) p2203[D] (20.00) r2203[D]
Tec_ctrl fixed value 4
-200.00...200.00 % 0100
p2204[D] (30.00) r2204[D]
Tec_ctrl fixed value 5
-200.00...200.00 % 0101
p2205[D] (40.00) r2205[D]
Tec_ctrl fixed value 6
-200.00...200.00 % 0110
p2206[D] (50.00) r2206[D]
Tec_ctrl fixed value 7
-200.00...200.00 % 0111
p2207[D] (60.00) Tec_ctrl fixed val effective
r2207[D]
Tec_ctrl fixed value 8 r2224
-200.00...200.00 % 1000
p2208[D] (70.00) r2208[D]
Tec_ctrl fixed value 9
-200.00...200.00 % 1001
p2209[D] (80.00) r2209[D]
Tec_ctrl fixed value 10
-200.00...200.00 % 1010
p2210[D] (90.00) r2210[D]
Tec_ctrl fixed value 11
-200.00...200.00 % 1011
p2211[D] (100.00) r2211[D]
Tec_ctrl fixed value 12
-200.00...200.00 % 1100
p2212[D] (110.00) r2212[D]
Tec_ctrl fixed value 13
-200.00...200.00 % 1101

Technology controller
p2213[D] (120.00) r2213[D]

Function diagrams
Tec_ctrl fixed value 14
-200.00...200.00 % 1110
p2214[D] (130.00) r2214[D]
Tec_ctrl fixed value 15
-200.00...200.00 % 1111
p2215[D] (130.00) r2215[D]
<101> Pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112.
2-695

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_7950_en.vsd Function diagram
- 7950 -
Technology controller - fixed values (r0108.16 = 1) 28.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Tec_ctrl Mop config
0000...0111 4000.00 µs

Picture 2-137 7954 – Motorized potentiometer (r0108.16 = 1)

p2230[D] (0110)
Refer to [1020.7]
2-696

Technology controller
Function diagrams
<101>
Data save active 0 The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p2240.
1 The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved and after ON is entered using p2231.

Initial rounding-off active 0 Without initial rounding-off.

1 With initial rounding-off. The ramp-up/down time set is exceeded accordingly.

Tec_ctrl mop raise Old value is kept

p2235[C]
(0)

Tec_ctrl mop lower <2> <2>

p2236[C] Tec_ctrl mop t_up Tec_ctrl mop t_down
(0) 0.0...1 000.0 s 0.0...1 000.0 s
p2247[D] (10.0) p2248[D] (10.0)
0 0

y
Tec_ctrl mop max
-200.00...200.00 [%] 0 1 Tec_ctrl mop before RFG p2237
p2237[D] (100.00) r2245
Tec_ctrl mop after RFG
x y
r2250
Tec_ctrl mop min x
-200.00...200.00 [%] 1 0
p2238[D] (-100.00)
p2238
y=0
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

1 1
Tec_ctrl mop start
r0046.0 -200.00...200.00 %
1 = OFF1, enable missing p2240[D] (0.00)
[2614.6] <1>

<1> For p2230.0 = 0, this setpoint is entered after ON.

<2> If the initial rounding-off is active (p2230.2 = 1), the selected ramp-up and ramp-down times are appropriately exceeded.
<101> Pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_7954_en.vsd Function diagram
- 7954 -
Technology controller - motorized potentiometer (r0108.16 = 1) 28.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 4000.00 µs

Picture 2-138 7958 – Control (r0108.16 = 1) Refer to [1020.7]

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Tec_ctrl pre-control <101>

Tec_ctrl set 1 scal
0.00...100.00 % p2289[C]
p2255 (100.00) (0)
Tec_ctrl setpoint 1 Technology controller limited
p2253[C] r2349.1
<1> <1>
(0) Tec_ctrl t_up Tec_ctrl set T Tec_ctrl Kp Tec_ctrl Tn
Tec_ctrl set 2 scal 0.00...650.00 s 0.00...60.00 s 0.000...1000.000 0.000...60.000 s Tec_ctrl output scal
0.00...100.00 % p2257 (1.00) p2261 (0.00) Tec_ctrl set after filt Tec_ctrl fault p2280 (1.000) p2285 (0.000) -100.00...100.00 %
p2256 (100.00) r2262 r2273 p2295 (100.00)
Tec_ctrl setpoint 2
p2254[C] + + Tec_ctrl outp_sig
(0) r2294
+ + + + +
+

Tec_ctrl t _down Tec_ctrl set after RFG

0.00...650.00 s r2260
p2258 (1.00)
Tec_ctrl act T
0.00...60.00 s
p2265 (0.00)

Tec_ctrl actual value 1 d

p2264[C] dt
(0) -1 0

Tec_ctrl act after filt

Tec_ctrl T diff Tec_ctrl max_limit
r2266
0.000...60.000 s -200.00...200.00 %
p2274 (0.000) p2291 (100.00)
<1>
Tec_ctrl type
0 = D component in the actual value signal
1 = D component in the fault signal
p2263 (0)

Tec_ctrl min_limit
Tec_ctrl enable
-200.00...200.00 %

Technology controller
p2200[C] p2292 (0.00)
(Def.x)

Function diagrams
Technology controller de-activated
1 r2349.0
Tec_ctrl up/down
<1> P, I and D components can be disabled by entering a zero. 0.00...100.00 s
<101> Pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112. p2293 (1.00)
2-697

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_7958_en.vsd Function diagram
- 7958 -
Technology controller - closed-loop control (r0108.16 = 1) 28.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Function diagrams
Signals and monitoring functions

2.16 Signals and monitoring functions

Function diagrams

8010 – Speed messages 2-699

8012 – Torque messages/signals, motor locked/stalled 2-700

8013 – Load monitoring (r0108.17 = 1) 2-701

8014 – Thermal monitoring, power modulel 2-702

8016 – Thermal motor monitoring 2-703

2-698  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 n_limit pos effective n_set 2
<2>
r1084 p0115[1] (125.00 µs) p2154[C] p0115[3] (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-139 8010 – Speed messages

From setpoint 0.00...600.00 RPM
0...1 000 000 ms limiting 0 p2163[D] (90.00) 0.0...500.0 ms
p0115[1] (<3>) p0115[3] (<4>)
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

p2153 (0) [3050.8] [3080.8] p2166[D] (200.0)

[3095.7] Speed setpoint -
n_limit neg effective n_setp actual value deviation
n_act smooth r1087 n
n_act > n_max p2151[C] + 1
0 T
within tolerance t_off
r0063 r2197.6 r1170 r2197.7 [2534.3]
[6010.6] n [2534.3] [3060.1] + – 0
[4710.6] Smoothing [3080.8]
n_act smooth signal 0.0...10000.0 ms
F07901 "motor overspeed" p2167[D] (200.0)
r2169 n_act smooth signal Speed setpoint -
0.00...200.00 RPM
[8010.5] 0.00...60 000.00 RPM p2164[D] (1.50) actual value deviation
r2169
[8013.2] p2162[D] (600.00) within tolerance t_on
<2> T 0
[8010.2] r2199.4 [2537.3]
0.00...210 000.00 RPM
p2161[D] (5.00) p2149.0[D]
1 = RESET

Ramp-up/ramp-down completed 1
SET A07903
1 |n_act| < p2161
r2199.0
RFG active (Q=1) Q Priority r2199.5 "Motor speed
[2537.3] 1 deviation"
p2148[C] RESET 1 RESET 0
0 [2537.3]
(0) (Q=0) Q 2 SET A07903 is only signals for p2149.0 = 1
and r2197.7 = 0.

0.00...210 000.00 RPM <1>

p2155[D] (900.00)
1 |n_set| ≤ p2161
r2198.4
0 0 [2536.3]
1 |n_act| ≤ p2155
r2197.1
0 [2534.3] n_set > 0
1
|n_act| > p2155 r2198.5
0 [2536.3]
1 r2197.2
0.00...300.00 RPM

Signals and monitoring functions

p2140[D] (90.00) <2>

0.00...210 000.00 RPM 0

p2141[D] (5.00)
0...10 000 ms
p2156[D] (0)
1 n_act ≥ 0
<1> Only for activated function module "expanded f or n comparison value
messages/monitoring functions" 1 reached or exceeded r2197.3
1

Function diagrams
(r0108.17 = 1). T 0
r2199.1 0 [2534.3]
<2> VECTOR: Calculated. 0
0 [2537.3]
<3> VECTOR:
Dependent on the drive unit, 250 or 400 µs.
<4> VECTOR: 0.000...300.000 RPM
Dependent on the drive unit, 0.00...300.00 RPM
p2142[D] (2.00) <2>
2-699

1000 or 1600 µs. p2150[D] (2.00) <2>

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_8010_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8010 -
Messages and monitoring functions - speed messages/signals 07.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[3] (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-140 8012 – Torque messages/signals, motor locked/stalled

0.0...1 000.0 ms
p2195[D] (800.0)
p0115[3] (<5>)
2-700

Signals and monitoring functions

Function diagrams
Mot lock n_thresh
Ramp-up completed 0 T Ramp-function generator operating Motor locked detection or motor locked monitroing function
0.00...210 000.00 RPM
r2199.5 1 p2175 (120.00)
(not for closed-loop torque control)
[2537.7]

0.00...99 999.00 Nm n_act smooth signal < p2175

p2174 (5.13) n_act smooth signal 0.000...65.000 s
r2169 p2177 (1.000)
M_set total [8010.5] Control type p1300
r0079[0]
<2> 1
[5610.5]
Torque setpoint < p2174 Torque limit reached
t
M_set total
<4> 0 t1 r2198.10 r1407.7 & T 0 Motor locked
r0079 [2536.3] [2522.7] r2198.6
[6060.8] <2> <20 [2536.3]
p1545 Travel to fixed stop
2 % of p2174 [2520.7] r1406.8 1 F07900

I_limit V_output act

&
r1305.12
! M_set_3 > M_max offset [6489.7]
M_set total, smooth (positives torque requested)
r0079[1]
<2>
[5610.5] Only VECTOR Stall detection or stall monitoring
0.00...100.00 % (not for V/f control)
M_set total
<4>
+ – 1 p2194 (90.00)
Requested torque
r0079 (100.00) <4> 0.000...1.000 s
[6060.8] p2178 (0.010)
0 <3>
+ Speed adaptaion, speed deviation
– Torque utilization < p2194 r1408.11 Motor stalled
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

M_max offset [Nm] T 0

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

x1 1
p1532 y
[%] t1 r2199.11 Motor stalled t1 r2198.7
<2> [5620.7] [2537.3] r1408.12 [2536.3]
x2
M_max upper effective <1> [5630.7] 0
[Nm] [6730.3]
r1538 x1x 100 % F07902
+ –
[5640.8] 1 x2
2 % of p2194

M_max lower effective 0 M_utilization smooth

+ r0033
r1539 100 ms <1> The torque setpoint and the torque limits are referred to p1532
–
[5640.8] M_utilization (M_max offset). "Normally" M_max offset = 0.
<2> Only for SERVO (r0107 = 11).
r0081 <3> Only for vector control with encoder.
<4> Only for VECTOR (r0107 = 12).
Actual torque limit <5> VECTOR: Dependent on the drive unit, 1000 or 1600 µs.
[3080.4]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_8012_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8012 -
Messages and monitoring functions- torque messages/signals, motor locked/stalled 19.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[3] (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-141 8013 – Load monitoring (r0108.17 = 1)

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

A07926 "Envelop characteristic, parameter not value"

M [Nm]
M_act
r0080
[5730.1]
[6714.8] M_threshold 3 upper
0.00...99 999.00 Nm
p2189[D](99999.00)
M_threshold 3 lower
0.00...99 999.00 Nm
p2189[D](99999.00) Load monitoring response
p2181[D](0)
0.00...65.00 s
p2192[D](10.00)
Tolerance A0792x
bandwidth r2198.11
0 T [2536.3]
Evaluation
M_threshold 2 upper F07923 ... F07925
0.00...99 999.00 Nm
r2198.12
p2187[D](99999.00)
M_threshold 2 lower [2536.3]
0.00...99 999.00 Nm
p2188[D](0.00) A07920 "Torque/speed too low"
M_threshold 1 upper
0.00...99 999.00 Nm
A07921 "Torque/speed too high"
p2185[D](99999.00)
M_threshold 1 lower
0.00...99 999.00 Nm A07922 "Torque/speed outside tolerance"
p2186[D](0.00)

Signals and monitoring functions

F07923 "Torque/speed too low"
n_act smooth signal
r2169 n [RPM] F07924 "Torque/speed too high"
[8010.2]
F07925 "Torque/speed outside tolerance"
n_threshold 1 n_threshold 2 n_threshold 3
0.00...210 000.00 RPM 0.00...210 000.00 RPM 0.00...210 000.00 RPM

Function diagrams
p2182[D](150.00) p2183[D](900.00) p2184[D](1500.00)
2-701

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_8013_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8013 -
Messages and monitoring functions - load monitoring (r0108.17 = 1) 29.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Power section Control unit Thermal monitoring for the power module p0115[3] (2000.00 µs)

Picture 2-142 8014 – Thermal monitoring, power modulel

2-702

Signals and monitoring functions

Function diagrams
Maximum power module temperature 1 = Fault thermal overload in power section
Tmax heatsink t1 r2135.13
[2548.2]
Temperature measurement
1
- Max Faults "power module overtemperature"
0 F30004 inverter heatsink
Power module F30025 chip
temperatures [°C] F30035 air intake
r0037[0...18] Temperature difference, alarm/ F30036 electronics module
shutdown threshold (15 °C) F30037 rectifier
0...25 °C p0292

-
+

1
Alarms "power module overtemperature"
DRIVE-CLiQ 0 A05000 inverter heatsink
Absolute current A05001 chip
100 % A05002 air intake
actual value Power module overload
r0068 (0...100 %) A05003 electronics module
r0036 A05004 rectifier
[5730.4] i²t model 1
[8950.4] power Fault "power module overload"
Rated power - module F30005
0
module current

Rated power 1 = Alarm, thermal overload, power module

module current t1 r2135.15
r0207 [2548.2]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

Overload response
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Power module overload response

Alarm threshold
p0290
i²t overload power module 0...100 %
<1>
p0294 (95 %)

1 Alarm "power module

overload"
0 A07805

<1> Not for Active Infeed.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF, SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_8014_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8014 -
Messages and monitoring functions - thermal monitoring, power module 01.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0610[M] <4>
Rated motor temperature rise p0610 = 0: Only alarm, suppress fault 1.00 s

Picture 2-143 8016 – Thermal motor monitoring

p0610 = 1: Display fault, for alarm I_max reduction <4>
p0610 = 2: Display fault
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

T_mot above alarm

250 °C Fault response p0610 = 1
p0604[M]
T_mot environment T_mot via iron T_mot via stator T_mot via rotor
p0625[M] p0626[M] p0627[M] p0628[M] T_mot sensor KTY PTC
p0600[M] Sensor type <3>
I_max reduction
& [6640.2]
0
Thermal 3-mass model 1
A07910
Model tracking
(only for induction motors) 0
"motor temperature rise"

p0606[M]
T_mot environment T_mot iron T_mot copper T_mot rotor T_mot measured
r0630 r0631 r0632 r0633 <1>
r0035
T 0 t1 r2135.14 [2548.2]

Calculated motor temperatures

Fault threshold Suppress fault
Sensor type motor overtemperature p0610 = 0
0 = No sensor, use model p0605[M]
1 = PTC
2 = KTY
3 = KTY and PTC (only for sensors 1, 2, 3) Only for KTY F07011
1 &
p0601[M] t1 "Motor temperature rise"

0
&
-from sensor 1 1
KTY sensor type t1 r2135.12 [2548.2]
[4704.8]
(threshold not applicable for PTC)
-from sensor 2 2
[4704.8] -50 °C 250 °C

-from sensor 3 3

Signals and monitoring functions

[4704.8] A07015
"Motor temperature
-from motor module 11 p0607[M] sensor fault, alarm"

T_mot external [°C] <2>

p0603[C] T 0 F07016
10
(0) "Motor temperature
sensor fault, fault"

Function diagrams
e.g. r4105 from TM31 [9576.3]

<1> The value p0606 = 0 has, for KTY and PTC, a different meaning:
KTY: 0 The output of the timer is always switched-out (logical 0)
A07820
PTC: 0 Delay time = 0 s
"Temperature sensor
<2> Switch-in delay, refer to [1024]. p0607 = 0 suppresses fault F07016.
not connected"
<3> For KTY and "No sensor", temperature from the model.
<4> Only for VECTOR.
2-703

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_8016_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8016 -
Messages and monitoring functions - thermal motor monitoring 30.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Function diagrams
Faults and alarms

2.17 Faults and alarms

Function diagrams

8060 – Fault buffer 2-705

8065 – Alarm buffer 2-706

8070 – Fault/alarm trigger word (r2129) 2-707

8075 – Fault/alarm configuration 2-708

2-704  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 LED "RDY" [= red for fault] Background

Picture 2-144 8060 – Fault buffer Actual fault code Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

r2131
1 ms
0 = "No fault present"
System time
r0969 [ms] Fault code Fault value Fault time Fault time
"come" "removed"

Fault times
III
Fault 1 r0949[0] [I32] r0948[0] [ms] r2109[0] [ms]
32 bit counter, r0945[0]
r2133[0] [Float] r2130[0] [d] r2136[0] [d]
free running Counter
[8065.1] Fault 2 r0949[1] [I32] r0948[1] [ms] r2109[1] [ms] 16 bit
r0945[1]
operating time r2133[1] [Float] r2130[1] [d] r2136[1] [d]
Fault case comes Fault cases No.
Actual III
fault case p0952
RESET

p3981 Delete fault buffer

RESET
Acknowledge faults r0949[7] [I32] r0948[7] [ms] r2109[7] [ms] r0945 = 0 p0952 = 0:
Fault 8 r0945[7] <1> r0948 = 0
r2133[7] [Float] r2130[7] [d] r2136[7] [d] Deletes the fault buffer
r0949 = 0
POWER ON
1 Faults
Acknowledging
r0949[8] [I32] r0948[8] [ms] r2109[8] [ms]
r2109 = 0 ≥1
p2147 (CU) = 1
Automatic <2>
p2103 ... p2105 Acknowledge error Fault 1 r0945[8] r2130 = 0
r2133[8] [Float] r2130[8] [d] r2136[8] [d]
[2546.7] r2138.7 r2133 = 0
r0949[9] [I32] r0948[9] [ms] r2109[9] [ms] r2136 = 0
1. Fault 2 r0945[9]
r2133[9] [Float] r2130[9] [d] r2136[9] [d]
Acknowledged
fault case 16 bit counter
Fault comes free running
p2106 External fault 1 Fault goes Fault buffer
≥1 III change
[2546.7] r2138.13 r0949[15] [I32] r0948[15] [ms] r2109[15] [ms] Fault case RESET r0944
Fault 8 r0945[15]
p2107 External fault 2 r2133[15] [Float] r2130[15] [d] r2136[15] [d] acknowledged
[2546.7] r2138.14 POWER ON
r0949[56] [I32] r0948[56] [ms] r2109[56] [ms]
p2108 External fault 3 Fault 1 r0945[56]
r2133[56] [Float] r2130[56] [d] r2136[56] [d] Fault buffer change [8065.6]
[2546.7] r2138.15
Fault 2 r0949[57] [I32] r0948[57] [ms] r2109[57] [ms]
7. r0945[57]
r2133[57] [Float] r2130[57] [d] r2136[57] [d]
Acknowledged
fault case
[oldest]

Function diagrams
r0949[63] [I32] r0948[63] [ms] r2109[63] [ms]

Faults and alarms

Fault 8 r0945[63]
r2133[63] [Float] r2130[63] [d] r2136[63] [d]

Fault responses to the sequence control [2610]

<1> This fault is overwritten when "more recent" faults occur (with the exception of "safety faults"). Fault present
<2> Refer to the list Manual under the index entry "Fault buffer - save when powering-down". r2139.3 [2548.2]
2-705

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF, SERVO, VECTOR, TB30, TMxx, CU fp_S01_8060_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8060 -
Faults and alarms - fault buffer 16.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Background

Picture 2-145 8065 – Alarm buffer Refer to [1020.7]

2-706

Faults and alarms

Function diagrams
Actual alarm code
r2132
0 = "No alarm present"

Alarm code Alarm value Alarm time Alarm time

"come" "removed"
Operating time
[8060.1] Alarm times Counter
16 bit
Alarm 1 r2124[0] [I32] r2123[0] [ms] r2125[0] [ms] Alarm comes Alarms counter
(oldest) r2122[0] III
r2134[0] [Float] r2145[0] [d] r2146[0] [d] p2111
RESET
r2124[1] [I32] r2123[1] [ms] r2125[1] [ms]
Alarm 2 r2122[1]
r2134[1] [Float] r2145[1] [d] r2146[1] [d] p2111 = 0:
p2112 External alarm 1
Alarm buffer is deleted
[2546.7] r2138.10
Delete alarm buffer POWER ON
p2116 External alarm 2 RESET t1
r2122 = 0
[2546.7] r2138.11 r2123 = 0
p2117 External alarm 3 r2124 = 0
[2546.7] r2138.12 r2125 = 0
Alarm 8 r2124[7] [I32] r2123[7] [ms] r2125[7] [ms]
r2122[7] <1> r2134 = 0
(most recent) r2134[7] [Float] r2145[7] [d] r2146[7] [d]
r2145 = 0
r2146 = 0 16 bit counter,
free running
Alarm comes
Alarm number Alarm buffer changed
r2110 Alarm goes t1 III
r2121
RESET

Alarm present Alarm buffer

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

change
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

r2139.7
POWER ON
[2548.2]

16 bit counter,
free running
Fault buffer change [8060.8] Sum, buffer changed
Fault/alarm buffer changes from
t1 III
r2120
RESET
other drive objects

POWER ON

<1> Alarm 8 is overwritten when "more recent" alarms occur (with the exception of "safety alarms").

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF, SERVO, VECTOR, TMxx, CU fp_S01_8065_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8065 -
Faults and alarms - alarm buffer 15.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Background

Picture 2-146 8070 – Fault/alarm trigger word (r2129) Refer to [1020.7]

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Fault/alarm trigger word

(e.g. as trigger condition to record traces)
SAelect fault/alarm code
for trigger
p2128 r2129

0. Message/signal present
[0] 0. Fault/alarm code r2129.0
1. Message/signal present
[1] 1. Fault/alarm code r2129.1

15. Message/signal present

[15] 15. Fault/alarm code r2129.15

Setting, fault/alarm trigger

Function diagrams
Faults and alarms
2-707

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF, SERVO, VECTOR, TMxx, CU fp_S01_8070_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8070 -
Faults and alarms - Fault/alarm trigger word (r2129) 26.05.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Background

Picture 2-147 8075 – Fault/alarm configuration Refer to [1020.7]

2-708

Faults and alarms

Function diagrams
Changing the fault response for a maximum of 20 faults <1> Changes the message type - fault <==> alarm for a maximum of 20 faults/alarms <1>
p2100 p2101 p2118 p2119

[0] 0. Fault code [0] Fault response 0 = NONE [0] 0. Fault/alarm code [0] Fault/alarm type 1 = Fault

[1] 1. Fault code [1] Fault response 1 = OFF1 [1] 1. Fault/alarm code [1] Fault/alarm type 2 = Alarm

2 = OFF2

3 = OFF3

4 = STOP1

5 = STOP2

6 = DCBRK

[19] 19. Fault code [19] Fault response [19] 19. Fault/alarm code [19] Fault/alarm type

Changes the acknowledge mode for max. 20 faults <1>

p2126 p2127

[0] 0. Fault code [0] Acknowledge mode 1 = Can be acknowledged after POWER ON (the electronics power supply is switched-in) if the cause of the fault has been removed.

[1] 1. Fault code [1] Acknowledge mode 2 = Can be acknowledged at any time if the cause of the fault has been removed.
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

[19] 19. Fault code [19] Acknowledge mode

<1> In the factory setting, fault responds, acknowledge mode and message type are practically and sensibly pre-assigned for all faults and alarms.
Possible changes can only be made in an individual value range that is specified by SIEMENS.
When the message type is changed, the supplementary information "moves" from fault value r0949 to alarm value r2124 and vice versa.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF, SERVO, VECTOR, TMxx, CU fp_S01_8075_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8075 -
Faults and alarms - fault/alarm configuration 02.08.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Function diagrams
Test sockets

2.18 Test sockets

Function diagrams

8134 – Test sockets 2-710

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 2-709

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 -100 000.00...100 000.00 % -100 000.00...100 000.00 % p0110[0] (125.00 µs)

Picture 2-148 8134 – Test sockets

p0777[0] (0.00) p0779[0] (100.00) y [V]
4.98
2-710

Test sockets
Function diagrams
Dimension unit
[%] x y per volt <4>
r0772[0] p0784[0] r0774[0] r0786[0]
0.00...4.98 V x1 x2 Offset -10 -5 5 x [V]
p0780[0] (4.98) y2 (4.98 V) y [V] Measuring socket
-4.98...4.98 V 4.98
1
P2 p0783[0] (0.00) [V] D T0
0.00...4.98 V y1 (2.49 V) Limit
p0771[0] p0778[0] (2.49) P1 + A
y [V] 0
4.98 <1>
x (100 %) x [%] y + 0..0.40.98 V
<3> x y
x1
y Scaling <2>
[%]
x2 -10 -5 5 10 x
4.98 [V]
x1x 100 %
-100 000.00...100 000.00 % -100 000.00...100 000.00 %
Reference quantities x2 p0777[1] (0.00) p0779[1] (100.00) y [V]
p200x
4.98 Dimension unit
[%] x y per volt <4>
r0772[1] p0784[1] r0774[1] r0786[1]
0.00...4.98 V x1 x2 Offset -10 -5 5 x [V]
p0780[1] (4.98) y2 (4.98 V) y [V] Measuring socket
-4.98...4.98 V 4.98
1
P2 p0783[1] (0.00) [V] D T1
0.00...4.98 V y1 (2.49 V) Limit
p0771[1] p0778[1] (2.49) P1 + A
0
4.98
y [V] <1>
x (100 %) x [%] y + 0..0.40.98 V
x y
Scaling <2>

-10 -5 5 10 x
4.98 [V]
-100 000.00...100 000.00 % -100 000.00...100 000.00 %
p0777[2] (0.00) p0779[2] (100.00) y [V]
4.98
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

[%] Dimension unit

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

r0772[2] x y per volt <4>

p0784[2] r0774[2] r0786[2]
0.00...4.98 V x1 x2 Offset -10 -5 5 x [V]
p0780[2] (4.98) y2 (4.98 V) y [V] Measuring socket
-4.98...4.98 V 4.98
1
P2 p0783[2] (0.00) [V] D T2
0.00...4.98 V y1 (2.49 V) Limit
p0771[2] p0778[2] (2.49) P1 + A
y [V] 0 <1>
4.98
x (100 %) x [%] y + 0..0.40.98
<1> Only for measuring equipment with Ri t 1 M: Scaling <2>
x y
M V
<2> With the factory setting, input values
from -100...100 % result in output voltages from 0...4.98 V. -10 -5 5 10 x
<3> The input signals are referred to the reference quantities p200x (100 % corresponds to p200x) 4.98 [V]
and the calculated normalization is displayed using r0786.
<4> Example: If a speed signal is entered via p0071 and r0786 indicates 100.0, then a speed change of 100 RPM results in an output voltage change of 1.0 V.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: CU320 fp_S01_8134_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8134 -
Measuring sockets 31.08.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Function diagrams
Data sets

2.19 Data sets

Function diagrams

8565 – Drive Data Set, DDS 2-712

8570 – Encoder Data Set, EDS 2-713

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 2-711

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Not relevant

Picture 2-149 8565 – Drive Data Set, DDS Copy DDS, start
Refer to [1020.7]
2-712

Data sets
Function diagrams
p0819[2] (0)

Copy DDS, source Copy DDS, target

p0819[0] (0) p0819[1] (1)

Drive n

Drive 2
Drive 1
DDS selected
r0837
r0837.0
r0837.1
Select DDS bit 0 r0837.2
DDS number r0837.3
p0820[C] p0180 (1) r0837.4
(0)

Select DDS bit 1

p0821[C] DDS31
(0) A07530 "Drive data set does not exist"

Select DDS bit 2

p0822[C] DDS1
(0) DDS effective
DDS0 r0051
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Select DDS bit 3 r0051.0

r0051.1
p0823[C]
r0051.2
(0)
r0051.3
r0051.4
Select DDS bit 4
p0824[C]
(0)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, TM41 fp_S01_8565_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8565 -
Data sets - drive data sets (DDS) 13.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Assign the encoder data sets to Not relevant

Picture 2-150 8570 – Encoder Data Set, EDS encoders 1, 2 and 3 Refer to [1020.7]
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

p0187[D]

EDS encoder data set 0 Encoder data set for encoder 1

p0141[0] = component number of the 0 p0400[E]
sensor module 1
0 ...
p0400[0]
2
... p0425[E]
99

p0425[0]
(E = p0187)
p0188[D]

EDS encoder data set 1 Encoder data set for encoder 2

p0141[1] = component number of the 0 p0400[E] Assigned parameters
sensor module 1 y to sense the position for
p0400[1] 1 ... encoder n
2 [4704]
... p0425[E]
y to sense the actual speed
99
for encoder n 4710]
p0425[1]
(E = p0188)
p0189[D]

EDS encoder data set 2 Encoder data set for encoder 3

p0141[2] = component number of the 0 p0400[E]
sensor module 1
p0400[2] 2 ...
2
... p0425[E]
99
p0425[2]
(E = p0189)

No encoder
99
has been configured

Function diagrams
F07502 "EDS encoder data set not configured"

Data sets
F07510 "identical encoder" (a component No. (p0141) is interconnected to more than one of the encoders 1, 2, 3).
2-713

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO, VECTOR fp_S01_8570_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8570 -
Data sets - encoder data sets, EDS 17.06.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Function diagrams
Basic Infeed

2.20 Basic Infeed

Function diagrams

8720 – Control word, sequence control infeed 2-715

8726 – Status word, sequence control infeed 2-716

8732 – Control Unit 2-717

8734 – Missing enable signals, line contactor control 2-718

8750 – Interface to the basic infeed power module (gating signals, actual values) 2-719

8760 – Signals and monitoring functions 2-720

2-714  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 p0115[3] (2000.00 µs)

Picture 2-151 8720 – Control word, sequence control infeed

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

STW sequence_ctrl INF

Bit No. Control word sequence control infeed r0898
<2> <3>
1 OFF2 (electr) p0840[C] (0)
= ON (close pre-charging/line contactor, pulses can be enabled)
p0844[C] (1) <3> 0 r0898.0 To the control unit [8732]
0 = OFF1 (ramp-down Vdc, cancel pulses and open pre-charging/line contactor)

p0845[C] (1) & 1

1 = operating condition no OFF2 (enable possible)
0 = OFF2 (immediate pulse cancellation, open pre-charging/ine contactor and power-on inhibit)
r0898.1 To the control unit [8732]

2 OFF2 (electr) 2 Reserved

3 Reserved

4 Reserved

5 Reserved

6 Reserved

7 Reserved

8 Reserved

9 Reserved

p0854[C] (0)
<3> 10 1 = control via PLC <1> r0898.10

11 Reserved

12 Reserved

13 Reserved
<1> Bit 10 must be set in the first PZD word of the telegram

Function diagrams
received from the serial interfaces in order that the drive
object accepts process data. 14 Reserved
<2> PROFIBUS interconnection:

Basic Infeed
For the manufacturer-specific PROFIBUS telegram, the upper
input is connected to PROFIBUS signal A_STW1 [2447]. This 15 Reserved
only involves CDS0.
2-715

<3> Entered from the PC when the master contorl is retrieved.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: B_INF fp_S01_8720_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8720 -
Basic infeed - control word, sequence control infeed 28.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[3] (2000.00 µs)

Picture 2-152 8726 – Status word, sequence control infeed

2-716

Basic Infeed
Function diagrams
ZSW sequence control
Bit
Status word, sequence control infeed r0899
No.

[8732] from the control unit 0 1 = ready to power-up r0899.0

[8732] from the control unit 1 1 = ready r0899.1

[8732] from the control unit 2 1 = enable operation r0899.2

3 Reserved

[8732] from the control unit 4 1 = no OFF2 present r0899.4

5 Reserved

[8732] from the control unit 6 1 = power-on inhibit r0899.6

7 Reserved

8 Reserved

Bit 9 = 1 --> ready to exchange process data 9 1 = control requested <1> r0899.9

10 Reserved
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

[8750] from the power module 11 1 = pre-charging completed r0899.11

[8734.3] from the line contactor control 12 1 = line contactor closed r0899.12

13 Reserved

14 Reserved

15 Reserved

<1> Master control system requests the process data.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: B_INF fp_S01_8726_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8726 -
Basic infeed - status word, sequence control infeed 28.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0857 ... p0862, p3490 r3402 POWER ON <1>
p0115[3] (2000.00 µs)

Picture 2-153 8732 – Control Unit

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

S1: Power-on inhibit S7:

<2> ZSWAE.6 = 1 Missing enable
[8734]
ZSWAE.0/1/2 = 0 Open line contactor signals

"Commissioning completed" Faults/alarms

<2> F06000
(p10 = 0 and p9 = 0)
"Commissioning" F07220
"0 = OFF1" (STWAE.0) & (p10 ≠ 0 and p9 ≠ 0)
≥1
"0 = OFF2" (STWAE.1)
≥1 F07300
<2> "0 = OFF2" (STWAE.1) "Commissioning F07802
"0 = OFF2" (STWAE.1)
(p10 ≠ 0 or p9 ≠ 0) F07840...F07841
A06602

S2: Ready to power-up S6:

<2> ZSWAE.0 = 1
ZSWAE.1/2/6 = 0
Open line contactor
Line contactor is open,
wait for power-on

"0 = OFF1"
<2> (STWAE.0) & "0 = OFF1" (STWAE.0) &
<2>

T 0 0 T
p0862 p3490

S3a: Close line

"0 = OFF1"
contactor (STWAE.0) &
(refer to [8734] ) <2>
Pre-charging
Time monitoring, refer to [8760]

S3: Ready
ZSWAE.0/1 = 1
<2> ZSWAE.2/6 = 0

Line contactor is closed

Infeed ready
r0863.0 [2610.1]

Function diagrams
To SERVO/VECTOR

Basic Infeed
<1> POWER ON = 24 V electronics power supply OFF --> ON or RESET button.
<2> STWAE.xx = control word, sequence control infeed, bit xx
ZSWAE.xx = status word, sequence control infeed, bit xx
2-717

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: B_INF fp_S01_8732_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8732 -
Basic infeed - control unit 28.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[3] (2000.00 µs)

Picture 2-154 8734 – Missing enable signals, line contactor control

2-718

Basic Infeed
Function diagrams
Control Unit
Missing enable signals Line contactor control
Missing enable signals that prevent the infeed from going into operation (detected
at ZSW sequence control infeed r0899.2 = 1 [8726]) .
From the line supply

Bit No. Meaning r0046

1 = OFF1 enable missing (p0840 = 0 or power-on inhibit From the control unit [8732.4]
0
present ) S7 open line
contactor
1 1 = OFF2 enable missing (p0844 or p0845 = 0) S6 open line
contactor
2 S3a close line Control line
contactor contactor DO
r0863.1 +24 V
3
[8964.6] [2130]...[2133]

Line contactor feedback

5 r0899.12 p0860 DI
line contactor
closed
1
6 [8726.3] [2100]...[2133]

ON/OFF monitoring
8
p0861
9

T 0 F07300
16
1 = OFF1 internal enable missing (OFF1 fault response
present)
=1 "Line contactor feedback missing"
To the line module
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

1 = OFF2 internal enable missing (commissioning selected

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Time monitoring
17 p0009 > 0
or p0010 > 0 or OFF2 fault response present)
Operation monitoring

&

&

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: B_INF fp_S01_8734_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8734 -
Basic infeed - missing enable signals, line contactor control 04.11.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Control Unit Basic Line Module
p0115[1] 250.00 µs

Picture 2-155 8750 – Interface to the basic infeed power module (gating signals, actual values)
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Vdc_act
r0070

Vdc smooth
r0026 300 ms

U1 V1 W1

PM I_max
r0209

DRIVE-CLiQ

PM I_max
r0209

Function diagrams
+
DCP
-

Basic Infeed
DCN
DC link voltage Vdc_act
2-719

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: B_INF fp_S01_8750_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8750 -
Basic infeed - interface to the basic infeed power module (control signals, actual values) 05.11.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[3] (2000.00 µs)

Picture 2-156 8760 – Signals and monitoring functions

2-720

Basic Infeed
Function diagrams
DC link monitoring

Vdc overvoltage,
hardware-related
Line supply voltage monitoring shutdown threshold

Supply voltage Vdc_act

p0210 F30002
r0070
"DC link overvoltage"
Vdc_act
r0070
85 % 110 %
1 F30003
2 "DC link undervoltage"

A06310
"Supply voltage Vdc undervoltage,
V_line calculated (p0210) incorrectly parameterized" hardware-related
shutdown threshold

Pre-charging monitoring for the DC link

p0857
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Control line contactor T 0

[8734.5]
& F06000
"Pre-charging monitoring time expired"
Pre-charging completed

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: B_INF fp_S01_8760_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8760 -
Basic infeed - messages/signals and monitoring functions 28.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Function diagrams
Active Infeed

2.21 Active Infeed

Function diagrams

8920 – Control word, sequence control infeed 2-722

8926 – Status word, sequence control infeed 2-723

8928 – Status word infeed 2-724

8932 – Control Unit 2-725

8934 – Missing enable signals, line contactor control 2-726

8940 – Controller modulation depth reserve/controller DC link voltage 2-727

8946 – Power pre-control/current controller/gating unit 2-728

8950 – Interface to the active infeed power module (gating signals, actual values) 2-729

8960 – Messages/signals and monitoring functions, line supply voltage monitoring 2-730

8964 – Messages/signals and monitoring functions, line supply freq. and Vdc monitoring 2-731

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 2-721

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 p0115[3] (2000.00 µs)

Picture 2-157 8920 – Control word, sequence control infeed

2-722

Active Infeed
Function diagrams
STW seq_ctrl INF
Bit No. Control word sequence control infeed r0898
<2> <3>
1 OFF2 (electrical) p0840[C] (0)
= ON (close pre-charging/line contactor, pulses can be enabled)
p0844[C] (1) <3> 0 r0898.0 To the control unit [8932]
0 = OFF1 (reduce Vdc along a ramp, pulse cancellation and open pre-charging/line contactor)

p0845[C] (1) & 1

1 = Operating condition no OFF2 (enable is possible)
0 = OFF2 (immediate pulse cancellation, open pre-charging/line contactor and power-on inhibit)
r0898.1 To the control unit [8932]

2 OFF2 (electrical) 2 Reserved

p0852[C] (1)
1 = Enable operation (pulses can be enabled)
<3> 3 r0898.3 To the control unit [8932]
0 = Inhibit operation (cancel pulses)

4 Reserved

p3532[C] (0)
5 1 = Inhibit motoring operation r0898.5

p3533[C] (0)
6 1 = Inhibit regenerative operation r0898.6

7 Reserved

8 Reserved

9 Reserved

p0854[C] (0)
<3> 10 1 = Control via PLC <1> r0898.10
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

11 Reserved

12 Reserved

13 Reserved
<1> Bit 10 must be set in the first PZD word of the telegram
received from the serial interface in order that the drive object
accepts the process data. 14 Reserved
<2> PROFIBUS interconnection:
For the manufacturer-specific PROFIBUS telegram, the upper
input is connected to PROFIBUS signal A_STW1 [2447]. This 15 Reserved
only involves CDS0.
<3> Is entered from the PC when the master control is retrieved.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF fp_S01_8920_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8920 -
Active Infeed - control word, sequence control infeed 25.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[3] (2000.00 µs)

Picture 2-158 8926 – Status word, sequence control infeed

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

ZSW sequence ctrl

Bit
Status word sequence control infeed r0899
No.

[8932] From the control unit 0 1 = Ready to power-up r0899.0

[8932] From the control unit 1 1 = Ready to operate r0899.1

[8932] From the control unit 2 1 = Operation enabled r0899.2

3 Reserved

[8932] From the control unit 4 1 = No OFF2 effective r0899.4

5 Reserved

[8932] From the control unit 6 1 = Power-on inhibit r0899.6

7 Reserved

8 Reserved

Bit 9 = 1 --> Ready to exchange process data 9 1 = Control requested <1> r0899.9

10 Reserved

[8950] From the power module 11 1 = Pre-charging completed r0899.11

[8934.3] From line contactor control 12 1 = Line contactor closed r0899.12

13 Reserved

Function diagrams
14 Reserved

Active Infeed
15 Reserved

<1> The master system requests process data.

2-723

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF fp_S01_8926_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8926 -
Active Infeed - status word, sequence control infeed 25.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[3] (2000.00 µs)

Picture 2-159 8928 – Status word infeed

2-724

Active Infeed
Function diagrams
INF ZSW
Bit No. Status word, infeed r3405

0 1 = Smart Mode active r3405.0

1 1 = Vdc controller active r3405.1

2 1 = Phase failure detected r3405.2

3 1 = Current limit reached r3405.3

1 = Infeed operates in the regenerative mode

4 r3405.4
0 = Infeed operates in the motoring mode

5 1 = Motoring mode inhibited r3405.5

6 1 = Regenerative mode inhibited r3405.6

7 Reserved

8 Reserved

9 Reserved

10 Reserved
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

11 Reserved

12 Reserved

13 Reserved

14 Reserved

15 Reserved

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF fp_S01_8928_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8928 -
Active Infeed - status word, infeed 25.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0857...p0862, p3490...p3491 r3402 POWER ON <1>
p0115[3] (2000.00 µs)

Picture 2-160 8932 – Control Unit

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

S1: Power-on inhibit S7:

<2> ZSWAE.6 = 1 Missing enable
[8934]
ZSWAE.0/1/2 = 0 Open the line contactor signals
"Commissioning completed" <2>
(p10 = 0 and p9 = 0) Faults/alarms
"Commissioning" "0 = OFF2" (STWAE.1) F06000
(p10z0 and p9 z 0)
"0 = OFF1" (STWAE.0) "Commissioning" F07220
& <2> "0 = OFF2"(STWAE.1) t1 (p10 z 0 or p9 z 0) t1 F07300
"0 = OFF2" (STWAE.1)
0 V at EP terminals, power module 0 V at EP terminals F07802
24 V at EP terminals, power module F07840...F07841
power module A06602
<2>
S2: Ready to power-up
ZSWAE.0 = 1
S6:
"0 = OFF2"
<2>
ZSWAE.1/2/6 = 0 (STWAE.1) &
Open the line contactor <2>
Line contactor is open
Wait for power-on
"0 = OFF1"
(STWAE.0) &
"0 = OFF1" <2>
<2> (STWAE.0) & "0 = OFF1" (STWAE.0) &
<2>

T 0 0 T
p0862 p3490
S5a: Discharge ramp
ZSWAE.0/1/2 = 1
S3a: Close the line <2>
ZSWAE.6 = 0
contactor "0 = OFF1"
(STWAE.0) & "0= OFF1"
& Ramp-down Vdc via ramp
(refer to [8934] ) (STWAE.0)
<2> <2> p3566, then cancel the
Pre-charging
time monitoring, refer to [8964.7] pulses

S3: Ready
ZSWAE.0/1 = 1
<2> ZSWAE.2/6 = 0
0 T
p3490
Line contactor is closed
<2>
"Enable operation" "Enable operation"
& <2>
(STWAE.3) (STWAE.3) "Enable operation" "0 = OFF2" (STWAE.1)
<2> "0 = OFF1"
& (STWAE.3) & 0 V at EP terminals
t1
<2> (STWAE.0) <2> power module

Function diagrams
S4: Operation
<2> ZSWAE.0/1/2 = 1
ZSWAE.6 = 0

Active Infeed
Pulses and controller are Infeed ready
enabled Ramp-up Vdc via the <1> POWER ON = 24 V electronics power supply OFF --> ON or RESET button.
r0863.0 [2610.1] <2> STWAE.xx = Control word, sequence control infeed bit xx
ramp
2-725

to SERVO/VECTOR ZSWAE.xx = Status word, sequence control, infeed bit xx

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF fp_S01_8932_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8932 -
Active infeed - control unit 25.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[3] (2000.00 µs)

Picture 2-161 8934 – Missing enable signals, line contactor control

2-726

Active Infeed
Function diagrams
Control unit
Missing enable signals Line contactor control
Missing enable signals that prevent the drive going into operation (this situation
can be detected at the ZSW sequence control, infeed r0899.2 = 1 [8926]).
From line

Bit No. Meaning r0046

From the control unit [8932.4]

1 = OFF1, enable missing (p0840 = 0 or power-on inhibit
0
is present) S7 open line
contactor
1 1 = OFF2, enable missing (p0844 or p0845 = 0) S6 open line
contactor
2 S3a close line Control line
contactor contactor DO
r0863.1 +24 V
3 1 = Enable operation missing (p0852 = 0)
[8964.6] [2130]...[2133]

Line contactor feedback signal

5 r0899.12 p0860 DI
Line contactor
closed
1
6 [8926.3] [2100]...[2133]

1 = EP terminals, enable missing (pulse enable EP ON/OFF monitoring

8
terminals missing)
p0861
9
Line contactor
T 0 Feedback signal missing
16
1 = OFF1 internal enable missing (OFF1 fault response is
present)
=1 F7300
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

Time monitoring
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

1 = OFF2 enable internal missing (commissioning selected

17 To line modules
p0009 > 0 or p0010 > 0 or OFF2 fault response present)
Operating monitoring

&

&

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF fp_S01_8934_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8934 -
Active Infeed - missing enable signals, line contactor control 29.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Controller, modulation depth reserve p0115[0] (250.00 µs)

Picture 2-162 8940 – Controller modulation depth reserve/controller DC link voltage

<1>
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Modulation depth
smooth
r0028 INF
mod_depth limit
p3480

Modulation depth –
r0074
+
[8950.4]

p3481
INF res_ctrl dyn

INF res_ctrl output

r3485

INF Vdc Z_set Kp Tn

Controller DC link voltage p0280 p3560 p3562 INF I_distr_factor
p3511 p3516
p3400.3 INF I_limit mot
Vdc_max stat p3530
[8960.7] Kp Tn
1 Iq_set
0
INF Vdc setpoint + + r0077
300.00...1600.00 V +
p3510 (600.00) + + + 0 + [8946.1]
–
p3531
INF I_limit regen
Vdc_act
r0070 r3554
[8950.1] INF Vdc_ctrl I_comp
INF I_active ctrl set
r3517
Vdc setpoint
r0088

Function diagrams
[8964.6]

Active Infeed
INF I_supple active
p3515
+ INF I_suppl_active stat
<1> This controller increases (boosts) the DC link voltage if the modulation depth limit has been reached (p3480). + p3514
2-727

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF fp_S01_8940_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8940 -
Active infeed - controller modulation depth reserve/controller DC link voltage 25.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Active current, actual value
p0115[0] (250.00 µs)

Picture 2-163 8946 – Power pre-control/current controller/gating unit

r0078
[8950.1]
2-728

Active Infeed
Function diagrams
Current pre-control Closed-loop current control
Factor D component
p3603
<2>
Active current setpoint d
r0077 dt
[8940.8] Integral component
Differentiator r3618

Kp Tn

– + Active component Usd

r3632
+ +
[8950.1]
r3606
System deviation Active current
controller

Kp
p3615

Tn
p3617

System deviation Kp Tn
Filter capacitance
r3608
p0221 Reactive component Usq

<1> r3633
+ +
– + [8950.1]
Filter compensation
Reactive current
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

controller
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Reactive current
Supplementary setpoint
r3619
p3611 + d Integral component
dt
+
+
<2>
Differentiator
p3603
Reactive current Factor D component
Fixed setpoint
p3610

Reactive current setpoint Reactive current actual value <1> Using the filter compensation, the reactive current requirement of a line filter is covered that is
r0075 r0076 obtained dependent on the operating point as a result of its capacitance. This means that the
reactive power is not taken from the line supply.
[8950.1] <2> For p3603 = 0 the D component is disabled.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF fp_S01_8946_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8946 -
Active infeed - power pre-control/current controller/gating unit 25.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 INF V_input Control unit Active Infeed, power module
r0072 p0115[1] 250.00 µs

Picture 2-164 8950 – Interface to the active infeed power module (gating signals, actual values) INF V_input smooth x1 • x 2 x1
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

r0025 300 ms 2 U1 V1 W1
Vdc_act x2
[8964.5]
r0070
Active W1
[8940.1] Voltage Sensing Module (VSM)
Vdc smooth Coordinate converter and Modulation depth [%] Interface
r0026 300 ms transformation r0074 Module Line reactor
[8940.1]
r3632 Nur Chassis
[8946.8] K
r3633 Modulation depth, smooth
[8946.8] 300 ms r0028 PE U1 V1 W1
P

<2> <1> INF V_output angle INF f_line supply

r3661
[9880.8] r3635 r0066
PM.I_max
r3662 INF line_f smooth r0209
[9880.8] 300 ms 300 ms
r0024
PM I_max
CosPhi smoothed r0209
+ Transformation angle
r0038 300 ms DRIVE CLiQ
Line supply and p0221...p0227
Active power, smoothed filter model V_line supply calculated [8960.1]
r0032 300 ms
iR
– Transformation angle Sum, U, V, W R
P_act
r0069[6] iS
r0082 S
Iq_act + Phase U iT
+ + T
[8946.4] r0078 r0069[0]
IU <2>
f_line supply
Voltage/frequency
INF I_active smooth 2 Phase V
V_line supply sensing
r0030 300 ms
r0069[1]
IV
Reactive current actual value
[8946.4] r0076 Phase W
3
r0069[2]
INF I_reactive smooth IW PWM
r0029 300 ms
Phase current actual
values

Function diagrams
Coordinate converter I_act abs value smooth
and transformation 300 ms r0027
+
DCP
I_act abs value

Active Infeed
iq + id
2 2 -
r0068 DCN
DC link voltage Vdc_act
<1> Angle of the voltage vector in the fixed stator coordinate system.
<2> Voltage management is optional (otherwise from the filter module).
2-729

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF fp_S01_8950_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8950 -
Active infeed - interface to the active infeed power module (gating signals, actual values) 18.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[3] (2000.00 µs)

Picture 2-165 8960 – Messages/signals and monitoring functions, line supply voltage monitoring Connection voltage
2-730

Active Infeed
Function diagrams
p0210
INF V_input smooth
r0025 Monitoring when switching-in the pulses
(regarding the frequency, refer to [8964])
V_line supply calculated
[8950.4] p0281 (110 %)
V_line supply actual A06300
[8960.2] "Line supply voltage too high
when powering-up"
--> voltage cannot be controlled
Vdc_max stat
300 ms A06301 "Line supply overvoltage" [8940.4]

p0282 (85 %)

INF V_input
smoothed
r0025

& A06105 "Line supply undervoltage"

Actual line Nominal line

supply voltage p0283 (75 %)
supply voltage

F06100 "Shutdown due to line supply undervoltage"

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

85 % 110 %

A06310 "Supply voltage (p0210) incorrectly parameterized.

V_line supply actual

[8960.6]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF fp_S01_8960_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8960 -
Active infeed - messages/signals and monitoring functions, line supply voltage monitoring 25.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p0115[3] (2000.00 µs)

Picture 2-166 8964 – Messages/signals and monitoring functions, line supply freq. and Vdc monitoring
Line supply frequency monitoring DC link monitoring
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Line supply frequency

Vdc setpoint
p0211 (50 Hz) A06800
[8950.4] r0088
"Maximum steady-state DC link voltage reached"
[8940.4]
INF f_line supply
r0066

(110 %) p0280
p0284

Vdc overvoltagehardware-
related shutdown
threshold

A06350
"Measured line supply frequency too high" Vdc_act
F30002
r0070
"DC link overvoltage"
[8950.1]

(90 %)
p0285
F30003
"DC link undervoltage condition"

Vdc undervoltagehardware-
A06351 related shutdown
"Measured line supply frequency too low" threshold

t1
Pre-charging monitoring for the DC link
Change from
Repeat the line supply
"ready"
synchronization when
to "operation" p0857
switching-in the pulses
[8932.4]

Energize line contactor T 0

Function diagrams
[8934.5]
Fault triggered for more
than 20 attempts
III
> 20 & F06000
"Pre-charging monitoring time expired"

Active Infeed
Pre-charging completed

F06500
"Line supply synchronization not possible within the monitoring time"
2-731

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF fp_S01_8964_en.vsd Function diagram
- 8964 -
Active infeed - messages/signals and monitoring functions, line supply frequency and Vdc monitoring 09.03.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Function diagrams
Terminal Board 30 (TB30)

2.22 Terminal Board 30 (TB30)

Function diagrams

9100 – Electrically isolated digital inputs (DI 0 ... DI 3) 2-733

9102 – Electrically isolated digital outputs (DO 0 ... DO 3) 2-734

9104 – Analog inputs (AI 0 ... AI 1) 2-735

9106 – Analog outputs (AO 0 ... AO 1) 2-736

2-732  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 24 V DC to the next device
p4099[0] (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-167 9100 – Electrically isolated digital inputs (DI 0 ... DI 3)

<1>
X424.M Mext <2>
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Mext
X424.M TB30 DI status inv TB30 DI status
+ r4023 r4022
X424.+ +24Vext
1 = Simulation on
X424.+ +24Vext p4095.0
r4021.0
X481.1 DI 0 1 r4023.0
0 DI 0 (X481.1)
r4022.0
1

24 V p4096.0

p4095.1
r4021.1
1 r4023.1
X481.2 DI 1 0 DI 1 (X481.2)
r4022.1
1

p4096.1

p4095.2
r4021.2

X481.3 DI 2 1 r4023.2
0 DI 2 (X481.3)
r4022.2
1

p4096.2
5V

Terminal Board 30 (TB30)

p4095.3
r4021.3

X481.4 DI 3 1 r4023.3
0 DI 3 (X481.4)

Function diagrams
r4022.3
1
OptBoard Comp_No.
<1> Mext electrically isolated to the internal CU reference potential M. Mext
<2> If the PROFIBUS communications is operated with clock-cycle synchronism p0161
<1> p4096.3
(r2064[0] = 1), then the time slice is automatically the same as the
PROFIBUS clock cycle (r2064[1]). In the operating mode, the PROFIBUS
interface for TB30, parameter p4099 has no effect on the time slice.
2-733

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: TB30 fp_S01_9100_en.vsd Function diagram
- 9100 -
Terminal board 30 (TB30) - electrically isolated digital inputs (DI 0 ... DI 3) 15.01.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p4099[0] (4000.00 µs)
24 VDC to the next drive unit
<2>

Picture 2-168 9102 – Electrically isolated digital outputs (DO 0 ... DO 3)

+24 Vext X424.+
2-734

Terminal Board 30 (TB30)

Function diagrams
+24 Vext X424.+ +
<1>
Mext X424.M
TB30 DO status
r4047
Mext X424.M
p4048.0

TB30 S_Src DO 0
p4030 0
DO 0 X481.5
(0)
1 1

DO 0 (X481.5)
r4047.0 24 V
p4048.1

TB30 S_Src DO 1
p4031 0
DO 1 X481.6
(0)
1 1

DO 1 (X481.6)
<1> Mext electrically isolated r4047.1
to the internal CU
reference potential M p4048.2

TB30 S_Src DO 2
p4032 0
<2> If the PROFIBUS DO 2 X481.7
(0)
communications is 1 1
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

operated with clock-

cycle synchronism
(r2064[0] = 1), then the DO 2 (X481.7)
time slice is r4047.2
automatically the same
5V
as the PROFIBUS clock p4048.3
cycle (r2064[1]). In the
operating mode, the TB30 S_Src DO 3
PROFIBUS interface for p4033 0
TB30, p4099 has no DO 3 X481.8
(0)
effect on the time slice. 1 1

DO 3 (X481.8)
Mext
<1>
r4047.3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: TB30 fp_S01_9102_en.vsd Function diagram
- 9102 -
Terminal board 30 (TB30) - electrically isolated digital outputs (DO 0 ... DO 3) 14.01.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p4099[1] (4000.00 µs) <4>

Picture 2-169 9104 – Analog inputs (AI 0 ... AI 1)

-11.000...11.000 V -11.000...11.000 V
p4057[0] (0.000)
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Offset <3> p4059[0] (10.000)

Hardware -20.000...20.000 V [V]
p4097.0
smoothing 100 µs p4063[0] (0.000) r4052[0]
y [%]
X482.1 -1000.00...1000.00 %
+ A + y2
0 p4060[0] (100.00)
AI 0 x y [%]
X482.2 D + Simulation mode
- x1 x2 x
<2> -11.000...11.000 V
-11...+11 V 1 -1000.00...1000.00 % [V]
p4098[0] (0.000) y1
p4058[0] (0.00)
Scaling

Enable Reference quantities x1

<1> When interconnected p200x y
further, the output p4067[0]
Window to suppress noise p4069[0]
x
(0) Smoothing x2
signals are referred to 0.00...20.00 %
0.0...1 000.0 ms (1) x1 x x 2
the reference p4068[0] (0.00)
quantities p4066 [0] p4053[0] (0.0) 100 %
p2000 ... r2004
(100 % p200x). 0
0%
0 0 x y = x if |y - x| > p4068 y r4055[0]
<2> Differential inputs! otherwise y = y(old)
For input signals that 1
-1 1
1 <1>
are referred to
ground, terminal 2
and/or terminal 4
must be connected to -11.000...11.000 V -11.000...11.000 V
the reference <3> p4057[1] (0.000) p4059[1] (10.000)
Offset
potential M. Hardware -20.000...20.000 V [V]
p4097.1
smoothing 100 µs p4063[1] (0.000) r4052[1]
-11...+11 V y [%]
X482.3 -1000.00...1000.00 %
+ A p4060[1] (100.00) y2
+ 0
AI 1 x y [%]
X482.4 D + Simulation mode
- x1 x2 x
<3> Caution: The voltage -11.000...11.000 V
<2> 1 -1000.00...1000.00 % [V]
between an input and p4098[1] (0.000) y1
p4058[1] (0.00)
ground may not
exceed 35 V. The Scaling
voltage between the
inputs may not Reference quantities x1
Enable

Terminal Board 30 (TB30)

y
exceed 35 V. p4067[1]
Window to suppress noise p4069[1]
p2000...r2004 x
(0) Smoothing x2
0.00...20.00 % (1) x1 x x 2
<4> If the PROFIBUS 0.0...1 000.0 ms
p4068[1] (0.00)
communications is p4066 [1] p4053[0] (0.0) 100 %

Function diagrams
operated with
clock-cycle synchronism 0
(r2064[0] = 1),
0%
0 0 x y = x if y r4055[1]
then the time slice is
|y - x| > p4068
automatically the same
1
-1 1 1 <1>
as the PROFIBUS otherwise y = y(old)
clock cycle (r2064[1]).
2-735

In the operating mode, the PROFIBUS interface for TB30, p4099 has no effect on the time slice.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: TB30 fp_S01_9104_en.vsd Function diagram
- 9104 -
Terminal board 30 (TB30) - analog inputs (AI 0 and AI 1) 31.08.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p4099[2] (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-170 9106 – Analog outputs (AO 0 ... AO 1)

<2>
2-736

Terminal Board 30 (TB30)

Function diagrams
[%]
r4072 [0] -1000.00...1000.00 %
p4082[0] p4079[0] (100.00 %)
(0)
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4077[0] (0.00 %)
0.0...1000.0 ms
p4075 [0] (0) p4073[0] (0.0)
y [V] [V]
-11.000...11.000 V
r4074[0]
p4080[0] (10.000 V) y2
<1> p4071 [0] (0) 0 0 D
x y X482.5
y x2 x
-1 x1 + +
1 1
[%] A AO 0
-11.000...11.000 V X482.6
y1
Smoothing p4078[0] (0.000 V)
-11...+11 V
Scaling Offset
-10.000...10.000 V
p4083[0] (0.000)
<1>
x1
y
[%]
x1 x 100 %
x2
x2 [%]
Reference quantities r4072 [1] -1000.00...1000.00 %
p2000... p2004 p4082[1] p4079[1] (100.00 %)
(0)
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4077[1] (0.00 %)
0.0...1000.0 ms
p4075 [1] (0) p4073[1] (0.0)
y [V] [V]
-11.000...11.000 V
y2 r4074[1]
p4080[1] (10.000 V)
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

<1> p4071 [1] (0) 0 0 D

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

x y X482.7
y x2 x
-1 x1 + +
1 1
[%] A AO 1
-11.000...11.000 V X482.8
y1
Smoothing p4078[1] (0.000 V)
-11...+11 V
Scaling Offset
-10.000...10.000 V
p4083[1] (0.000)

<1> The input signals are referred to the reference quantities p2004 ... p2004 (100 % p200x).
<2> If the PROFIBUS communications is operated with clock-cycle synchronism (r2064[0] = 1), then the time slice is automatically the same as the
PROFIBUS clock cycle (r2064[1]).In the operating mode, the PROFIBUS interface for TB30, parameter p4099 has no effect on the time slice.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: TB30 fp_S01_9106_en.vsd Function diagram
- 9106 -
Terminal board 30 (TB30) - analog outputs (AO 0 and AO 1) 04.10.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Function diagrams
Communication Board CAN 10 (CBC10)

2.23 Communication Board CAN 10 (CBC10)

Function diagrams

9204 – Receive telegram free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2) 2-738

9206 – Receive telegram Predef. Conn. Set (p8744 = 1) 2-739

9208 – Send telegram free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2) 2-740

9210 – Send telegram Predef. Conn. Set (p8744 = 1) 2-741

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 2-737

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 CAN bus sampling time

Picture 2-171 9204 – Receive telegram free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2)

2-738

Communication Board CAN 10 (CBC10)

Function diagrams
COB-ID for RPDO 1 PDO mapping for RPDO 1
p8700[0] p8710[0...3]

<2> Automatic assignment of the

RPDOs to the receive buffer <1> Receive buffer r8890.0 Bit 0
RPDO 1 ...
r8890.15 Bit 15
Object 1 PZD receive word 1 r8850[0]
r8891.0 Bit 0
X451 CAN
Object 2
r8860[0] DWORD ...
bus r8891.15 Bit 15
PZD receive word 2 r8850[1]
r8892.0 Bit 0
Object 3 r8860[1] DWORD ...
r8892.15 Bit 15
PZD receive word 3 r8850[2]
Object 4 r8893.0 Bit 0
The assignment is made from r8860[2] DWORD ...
r8893.15 Bit 15
RPDO 1, RPDO 2 ... RPDO 8 PZD receive word 4 r8850[3]
and from receive buffer word 1.
X452 CAN p8701[0] p8711[0...3] r8860[3] DWORD
bus PZD receive word 5 r8850[4]
r8860[4] DWORD
RPDO 2
PZD receive word 6 r8850[5]
Object 1 r8860[5] DWORD
CANopen receive PZD receive word 7 r8850[6]
telegram Object 2 r8860[6] DWORD
Evaluation
PZD receive word 8 r8850[7]
COB-ID of the COB- Object 3
ID r8860[7] DWORD
Object 1 Object 4 PZD receive word 9 r8850[8]
r8860[8] DWORD
PZD receive word 10 r8850[9]
Objects that occur a multiple
number of times are r8860[9] DWORD
marshalled to the same PZD receive word 11 r8850[10]
p8707[0] p8717[0...3] location/position of the receive r8860[10] DWORD
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

buffer.
PZD receive word 12 r8850[11]
Object 4 r8860[11] DWORD
RPDO 8
PZD receive word 13 r8850[12]
Object 1 r8860[12] DWORD
PZD receive word 14 r8850[13]
Object 2 r8860[13] DWORD
PZD receive word 15 r8850[14]
Object 3
r8860[14] DWORD
Object 4 PZD receive word 16 r8850[15]

<1> To use the automatic BICO interconnection (p8790 = 1), receive word 1 must be used as control word 1 (STW1). RPDO: Receive Process Data Object
COB-ID: CAN Object Identification
<2> Telegram, maximum of 4 words, or 64 bits

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_9204_en.vsd Function diagram
- 9204 -
Communication board CAN 10 (CBC10) - receive telegram free PDO mapping. (p8744 = 2) 13.05.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 CAN bus sampling time

Picture 2-172 9206 – Receive telegram Predef. Conn. Set (p8744 = 1)

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

COB-ID for RPDO 1 PDO mapping for RPDO 1

p8700[0] p8710[0...3]

<2> Automatic assignment of the

RPDOs to the receive buffer <1> Receive buffer r8890.0 Bit 0
RPDO 1 ...
r8890.15 Bit 15
Object 1 PZD receive word 1 r8850[0]
r8891.0 Bit 0
X451 CAN
Object 2
r8860[0] DWORD ...
bus r8891.15 Bit 15
PZD receive word 2 r8850[1]
r8892.0 Bit 0
Object 3 r8860[1] DWORD ...
r8892.15 Bit 15
PZD receive word 3 r8850[2]
Object 4 r8893.0 Bit 0
The assignment is made from r8860[2] DWORD ...
r8893.15 Bit 15
RPDO 1, RPDO 2 ... RPDO 8 PZD receive word 4 r8850[3]
and from receive buffer word 1.
X452 CAN p8701[0] p8711[0...3] r8860[3] DWORD
bus PZD receive word 5 r8850[4]
r8860[4] DWORD
RPDO 2
PZD receive word 6 r8850[5]
Object 1 r8860[5] DWORD
CANopen receive PZD receive word 7 r8850[6]
telegram Object 2 r8860[6] DWORD
Evaluation
PZD receive word 8 r8850[7]
COB-ID of the COB- Object 3
ID r8860[7] DWORD
Object 1 Object 4 PZD receive word 9 r8850[8]
r8860[8] DWORD
PZD receive word 10 r8850[9]

Communication Board CAN 10 (CBC10)

Objects that occur a multiple
number of times are r8860[9] DWORD
marshalled to the same PZD receive word 11 r8850[10]
p8707[0] p8717[0...3] location/position of the receive r8860[10] DWORD
buffer.
PZD receive word 12 r8850[11]
Object 4 r8860[11] DWORD
RPDO 8
PZD receive word 13 r8850[12]
Object 1 r8860[12] DWORD
PZD receive word 14 r8850[13]
Object 2 r8860[13] DWORD

Function diagrams
PZD receive word 15 r8850[14]
Object 3
r8860[14] DWORD
Object 4 PZD receive word 16 r8850[15]

<1> To use the automatic BICO interconnection (p8790 = 1), receive word 1 must be used as control word 1 (STW1). RPDO: Receive Process Data Object
COB-ID: CAN Object Identification
<2> Telegram, maximum of 4 words, or 64 bits
2-739

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_9204_en.vsd Function diagram
- 9204 -
Communication board CAN 10 (CBC10) - receive telegram free PDO mapping. (p8744 = 2) 13.05.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 COB-ID for TPDO 1 PDO mapping for TPDO 1
CAN bus sampling time

Picture 2-173 9208 – Send telegram free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2)

CANopen send words 1...16 p8720[0] p8730[0...3]
diagnostics display <1>
2-740

Communication Board CAN 10 (CBC10)

Function diagrams
r8853[0...15] Automatic assignment of the
p8851[0] Send buffer send buffer to the TPDOs TPDO 1
(0) ...
p8861[0] PZD send word 1 Object 1
DWORD p8851[1]
(0)
(0)
PZD send word 2 Object 2
p8861[1]
DWORD p8851[2]
(0)
(0) Object 3
p8861[2] PZD send word 3
DWORD p8851[3]
(0) Object 4
(0)
PZD send word 4 CANopen send telegram
p8861[3]
DWORD p8851[4]
(0) The assignment is made
(0) p8721[0] p8731[0...3] COB-ID
PZD send word 5 from send buffer 1 onwards
p8861[4] and from TPDO 1.
DWORD p8851[5] Object 1
(0)
(0)
p8861[5] PZD send word 6 TPDO 2
.
DWORD
(0)
p8851[6]
Object 1 .
p8861[6]
(0)
PZD send word 7
.
DWORD p8851[7] Object 2
(0) Object 4
(0)
PZD send word 8 Evaluation of
p8861[7]
DWORD p8851[8] Object 3 the COB-ID
(0)
(0) and transfer/
p8861[8] PZD send word 9 exchange type
DWORD p8851[9] Object 4
(0)
(0)
p8861[9] PZD send word 10 Objects that occur a
DWORD p8851[10] multiple number of times
(0)
(0) are updated from the same
p8861[10] PZD send word 11 send buffer.
DWORD p8851[11]
(0)
(0) p8727[0] p8737[0...3]
X451
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

p8861[11] PZD send word 12

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

DWORD p8851[12] CAN bus

(0)
(0) TPDO 8
p8861[12] PZD send word 13
DWORD p8851[13] Object 1
(0)
(0)
p8861[13] PZD send word 14
DWORD p8851[14] Object 2
(0)
(0)
PZD send word 15 X452
p8861[14] Object 3
DWORD p8851[15] CAN bus
(0)
(0)
PZD send word 16 Object 4

<1> The sum of the various objects may not exceeded 16 words. TPDO: Receive Process Data Object
COB-ID: CAN Object Identification

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_9208_en.vsd Function diagram
- 9208 -
Communication board CAN10 (CBC10) - send telegram free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2) 13.05.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 CANopen send words 1...16 COB-ID for TPDO 1 PDO mapping for TPDO 1
CAN bus sampling time

Picture 2-174 9210 – Send telegram Predef. Conn. Set (p8744 = 1)

diagnostics display p8720[0] p8730[0...3]
r8853[0...15] Automatic assignment of the
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

<1>
p8851[0] Send buffer send buffer to TPDOs
8784 ... TPDO 1

p8861[0] PZD send word 1 60410010

DWORD p8851[1]
(0)
(0)
p8861[1] PZD send word 2
DWORD p8851[2]
63
(0) CANopen send telegram
p8861[2] PZD send word 3
DWORD p8851[3]
(0)
79 COB-ID
p8861[3] PZD send word 4 p8721[0] p8731[0...3]
DWORD p8851[4] Object 1
(0)
(0)
p8861[4] PZD send word 5 TPDO 2
DWORD p8851[5]
492.0 60410010
(0)
p8861[5] PZD send word 6 606C0020
DWORD p8851[6]
(0)
(0) Object 4
p8861[6] PZD send word 7
DWORD p8851[7]
(0) The assignment
(0) is made from
p8861[7] PZD send word 8 Evaluation of
DWORD p8851[8] send buffer 1
the COB-ID
(0) onwards and
(0) p8722[0] p8732[0...3] and transfer
PZD send word 9 from TPDO 1
p8861[8] type.
DWORD p8851[9] onwards.
(0)
(0)
PZD send word 10 TPDO 3
p8861[9]
DWORD p8851[10] 60410010
(0)
(0)

Communication Board CAN 10 (CBC10)

PZD send word 11 60740010
p8861[10] X451
DWORD p8851[11]
(0) CAN bus
(0)
p8861[11] PZD send word 12 Objects that occur
DWORD p8851[12] a multiple number
(0)
(0) of times are
p8861[12] PZD send word 13 updated from the p8723[0] p8733[0...3]
DWORD p8851[13]
(0) same send buffer.
(0)
p8861[13] PZD send word 14 X452
DWORD p8851[14] TPDO 4
(0) CAN bus
(0) 60410010
PZD send word 15

Function diagrams
p8861[14] 60630020
DWORD p8851[15]
(0)
(0)
PZD send word 16

TPDO: Receive Process Data Object

COB-ID: CAN Object Identification
2-741

<1> The sum of the various objects may not exceeded 16 words.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: SERVO fp_S01_9210_en.vsd Function diagram
- 9210 -
Communication board CAN10 (CBC10) - send telegram Predef. Conn. Set (p8744 = 1) 13.05.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Function diagrams
Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

2.24 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

Function diagrams

9550 – Electrically isolated digital inputs (DI 0 ... DI 3) 2-743

9552 – Electrically isolated digital inputs (DI 4 ... DI 7) 2-744

9556 – Electrically isolated digital relay outputs (DO 0 ... DO 1) 2-745

9560 – Bidirectional digital inputs/outputs (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9) 2-746

9562 – Bidirectional digital inputs/outputs (DI/DO 10 ... DI/DO 11) 2-747

9566 – Analog input 0 (AI 0) 2-748

9568 – Analog input 1 (AI 1) 2-749

9572 – Analog outputs (AO 0 ... AO 1) 2-750

9576 – Temperature evaluation KTY/PTC 2-751

9577 – Sensor monitoring KTY/PTC 2-752

2-742  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 24 V DC to the next device
p4099[0] (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-175 9550 – Electrically isolated digital inputs (DI 0 ... DI 3) X524.M M
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

X524.M M TM31 DI status inv TM31 DI status

+ r4023 r4022
X524.+ +24 V
1 = Simulation on
X524.+ +24 V p4095.0
r4021.0 1 r4023.0
<1>
X520.1 DI 0 0 DI 0 (X520.1)
r4022.0
1

p4096.0
24 V

p4095.1
r4021.1 1 r4023.1

X520.2 DI 1 0 DI 1 (X520.2)
r4022.1
1

p4096.1

p4095.2
r4021.2 1 r4023.2

X520.3 DI 2 0 DI 2 (X520.3)
r4022.2
1

p4096.2

Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

5V
p4095.3
r4021.3 1 r4023.3

X520.4 DI 3 0 DI 3 (X520.4)

Function diagrams
<1> r4022.3
X520.5 M1 1
TM Comp_No.
+

p0151
<1> When using the electrical isolation eliminate the 24 V X520.6 M p4096.3
terminal jumper and connect the load power supply
shown as a dotted line.
2-743

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: TM31 fp_S01_9550_en.vsd Function diagram
- 9550 -
Terminal board 31 (TB31) - electrically isolated digital inputs (DI 0 ... DI 3) 16.06.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 24 V DC to the next device
p4099[0] (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-176 9552 – Electrically isolated digital inputs (DI 4 ... DI 7) X524.M M
2-744

Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

Function diagrams
X524.M M TM31 DI status inv TM31 DI status
+ r4023 r4022
X524.+ +24 V
1 = Simulation on
X524.+ +24 V p4095.4
<1> 1 r4023.4
r4021.4
X530.1 DI4 0 DI 4 (X530.1)
r4022.4
1

p4096.4
24 V

p4095.5
r4021.5 1 r4023.5

X530.2 DI5 0 DI 5 (X530.2)

r4022.5
1

p4096.5

p4095.6
r4021.6 1 r4023.6

X530.3 DI 6 0 DI 6 (X530.3)
r4022.6
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

1
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

p4096.6

5V
p4095.7
r4021.7 1 r4023.7

X530.4 DI 7 0 DI 7 (X530.4)
<1> r4022.7
X530.5 M2 1
+

24 V X530.6 M p4096.7
<1> When using the electrical isolation eliminate the
terminal jumper and connect the load power supply
shown as a dotted line.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: TM31 fp_S01_9552_en.vsd Function diagram
- 9552 -
Terminal board 31 (TB31) - electrically isolated digital inputs (DI 4 ... DI 7) 16.06.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p4099[0] (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-177 9556 – Electrically isolated digital relay outputs (DO 0 ... DO 1)
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

p4048.0 r4047

<1> X542
p4030 (0) 0 NC 0 1

1 1 COM 2

NO 0 3

r4047.0

p4048.1
<1>
p4031 (0) 0 NC 1 4

1 COM 5
1
NO 1 6

r4047.1

Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

WARNING
Hazardous voltage!
These terminals can have
voltages up to 250 V AC!

Function diagrams
<1> NO: Normally Open contact ("open" in the quiescent state = NO contact)
NC: Normally Closed contact ("closed" in the quiescent state = NC contact)
The relay contacts have a max. load capacity up to 100 V DC 240 W or 250 V AC 2000 VA.
2-745

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: TM31 fp_S01_9556_en.vsd Function diagram
- 9556 -
Terminal module 31 (TM31) - electrically isolated digital relay outputs (DO 0 ... DO 1) 17.12.03 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p4099[0] (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-178 9560 – Bidirectional digital inputs/outputs (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9)

<2>
Current limiting
2-746

Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

Function diagrams
p4046 (1)
TM31 DO status TM31 DI status inv TM31 DI status
+
r4047 r4023 r4022
Simulation
X541.1 +24 V p4096.8 p4095.8 (0)
[9562.3]
1 r4023.8
p4028.8 (0) r4021.8 1 DI/DO 8 (X541.2)
24 V r4022.8
DI
0 DI 0
X541.2 DI/DO 8

1 DI/DO 8 (X541.2)
DO DO p4048.8 (0)
r4047.8

TM31 S_Src DI/DO 8

<1> 0 p4038 (0)

1
-1

Simulation
p4096.9 p4095.9 (0)

1 r4023.9
p4028.9 (0) r4021.9 1 DI/DO 9 (X541.3)
r4022.9
DI
0 DI 0
X541.3 DI/DO 9
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

1 DI/DO 9 (X541.3)
DO
DO r4047.9 p4048.9 (0)
5V
TM31 S_Src DI/DO 9
<1> 0 p4039 (0)

1 -1
X541.6 M

<1> The connection shown as dotted line is applicable when set as digital output (p4028.x = 1).
<2> Limits the summed (total output current of terminals X541.1, X541.2, X541.3 and X541.4 to 0.1 A (p4046 = 0) or 1A (p4046 = 1).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: TM31 fp_S01_9560_en.vsd Function diagram
- 9560 -
Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - bidirectional digital inputs/outputs (DI/DO 8 and DI/DO 9) 14.01.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p4099[0] (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-179 9562 – Bidirectional digital inputs/outputs (DI/DO 10 ... DI/DO 11)
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

TM31 DO status TM31 DI status inv TM31 DI status

+
r4047 r4023 r4022
<2> Simulation
X541.1 +24 V p4096.10 p4095.10 (0)
[9560.4]
1 r4023.10
p4028.10 (0) r4021.10 1 DI/DO 10 (X541.4)
24 V r4022.10
DI
0 DI 0
X541.4 DI/DO 10

1 DI/DO10 (X541.4)
DO DO p4048.10 (0)
r4047.10

TM31 S_Src DI/DO 10

<1> 0 p4040
(0)
1
-1

Simulation
p4096.11 p4095.11 (0)

1 r4023.11
p4028.11 (0) r4021.11 1 DI/DO 11 (X541.5)
r4022.11
DI
0 DI 0
X541.5 DI/DO 11

1 DI/DO11 (X541.5)
DO
DO r4047.11 p4048.11 (0)
5V

Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

TM31 S_Src DI/DO 11
<1> 0 p4041
(0)
1 -1
X541.6 M

Function diagrams
<1> The connection shown as dotted line is applicable when set as digital output (p4028.x = 1).
<2> Limits the summed (total output current of terminals X541.1, X541.2, X541.3 and X541.4 to 0.1 A (p4046 = 0) or 1 A (p4046 = 1).
2-747

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: TM31 fp_S01_9562_en.vsd Function diagram
- 9562 -
Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - bidirectional digital inputs/outputs (DI/DO 10 and DI/DO 11) 15.01.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 <2> Analog inputs type
<3> p4056[0] (4) p4099[1] (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-180 9566 – Analog input 0 (AI 0)

Threshold for
wire breakage detection
2-748

Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

Function diagrams
0.00...20.00 mA 0...1000 ms
p4061[0] (2.00) p4062[0] (100)

z
20 mA T 0
F03505 "wire breakage"
3

-1000.00...1000.00 %
Voltage Current p4060[0] (100.00) <2> <2>
V I S5.0 <2> -20.000...20.000 -20.000...20.000
V I S5.1 [9568] p4057[0] (0.000) p4059[0] (10.000)
Hardware Offset
X521.1 -20.000...20.000 Act.ADC input
smoothing p4097[0] (0)
100 µs p4063[0] (0.000) r4052[0]
0, 2 y [%]
S5.0
+ A + 0 y2
<1> 3 0
AI 0 x y [%]
- D + 4 mA 4, 5 Simulation mode
x1 x2 x
-20.000...20.000
1
X521.2 <2> p4098[0] (0.000) y1
<2>
+/-20 mA -1000.00...1000.00 % Scaling
p4058[0] (0.0)
+/-10 V

x1
p4067[0] Reference quantities
Enable y
(0) Window to suppress noise p4069[0]
p2000...r2004 u
Smoothing x2
0.0...100.0 % (1)
0.0...1000.0 ms x1 x x 2
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

p4068[0] (0.0)
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

p4066[0] (0) p4053[0] (0) 100 %

0
0%
0 0 x y = x if y r4055[0]
|y - x| > p4068
1
-1 1
1
otherwise y = y(old)

<1> Differential input!

For ground-referred input signals, terminal X521.2 must be connected to the reference potential M. <3> p4056
Caution: = 0: 0 V ... +10 V
The voltage between an input (X521.1 or X521.2) and ground may not exceed 35 V. When the load resistor is switched-in (S5.1 closed), the = 2: 0 mA ... +20 mA
voltage between the input terminals may not exceed 15 V. = 3: 4 mA ... +20 mA with monitoring
<2> For p4056 = 2, 3, 5 the units are mA. = 4: -10 V ... +10 V
For p4056 = 0, 4 the units are V. = 5: -20 mA ... +20 mA

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: TM31 <9> Not implemented. fp_S01_9566_en.vsd Function diagram
- 9566 -
Terminal module 31 (TM31) - analog input 0 (AI 0) 19.11.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 <2> Analog inputs type p4099[1] (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-181 9568 – Analog input 1 (AI 1)

Threshold for
<3> p4056[1] (4)
wire breakage detection
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

0.00...20.00 mA 0...1000 ms
p4061[1] (2.00) p4062[1] (100)

z
20 mA T 0
F03505 "wire breakage"
3

-1000.00...1000.00 %
Voltage Current <2> <2>
p4060[1] (100.00)
V I S5.0 [9568] <2> -20.000...20.000 -20.000...20.000
V I S5.1 Offset p4057[1] (0.000) p4059[1] (10.000)
X521.3 Hardware
-20.000...20.000 Act.ADC input
smoothing p4097[1] (0)
p4063[1] (0.000) r4052[1]
100 µs 0, 2 y [%]
S5.1
+ A + 0 y2
3 0
<1> AI 1 x y [%]
- D + 4 mA 4, 5 Simulation mode
x1 x2 x
-20.000...20.000
1
p4098[1] (0.000) y1
X521.4
<2>
+/-20 mA Scaling
+/-10 V -1 000.00...1 000.00 %
p4058[1] (0.00)

Reference quantities x1
p4067[1] Enable y
(0) Window to suppress noise p4069[0]
p2000...r2004
x2
u
Smoothing
0.00...20.00 % (1) x1 x x 2
0.0..1000.0 ms
p4068[1] (0.00)
p4066[1] (0) p4053[1] (0.0) 100 %

0
0%
0 0 x y = x if

Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

y r4055[1]
|y - x| > p4068
1
-1 1
1
otherwise y = y(old)

Function diagrams
<1> Differential input!
For ground-referred input signals, terminal X521.4 must be connected to the reference potential M. <3> p4056
Caution: = 0: 0 V ... +10 V
The voltage between an input (X521.3 or X521.4) and ground may not exceed 35 V. When the load resistor is switched-in (S5.1 closed), the = 2: 0 mA ... +20 mA
voltage between the input terminals may not exceed 15 V. = 3: 4 mA ... +20 mA with monitoring
<2> For p4056 = 2, 3, 5 the units are mA. = 4: -10 V ... +10 V
2-749

For p4056 = 0, 4 the units are V. = 5: -20 mA ... +20 mA

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: TM31 fp_S01_9568_en.vsd Function diagram
- 9568 -
Terminal module 31 (TM31) - analog input 1 (AI 1) 19.11.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p4099[2] (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-182 9572 – Analog outputs (AO 0 ... AO 1)

2-750

Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

Function diagrams
<1>
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4082[0] -20.000...20.000 p4079[0] (100.00 %)
(0) p4080[0] (10.000)
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4077[0] (0.00) Analog outputs type
0.0...1000.0 ms p4076[0] (1)
p4075 [0] (0) p4073[0] (0.0) [%] <4>
y <1> Voltage output
r4072[0]
0, 1 r4074[0] <2>
y2 AO 0 V+ X522.1
p4071 [0] (0) 0 0 0 D
x 2 y +/-10 V
y x2 x
-1 x1 + + AO 0 A+ X522.3
1 1
-20.000...20.000 [%]
4 mA 3, 4 A
p4078[0] (0.000) y1
Smoothing +/-20 mA
<1>
<1> Scaling Offset X522.2
-20.000...20.000 AO 0 ref.
x1 % <2>
p4083[0] (0.000)
y
[%] Current output
x2 x1x 100 %
x2

Reference quantities
p2000...r2004 <1>
-1000.00...1000.00 %
<3> p4082[1] -20.000...20.000
p4079[1] (100.00 %)
(0) p4080[1] (10.000)
-1000.00...1000.00 %
Analog outputs type
p4077[1] (0.00)
0.0...1000.0 ms p4076[1] (1)
p4075 [1] (0) p4073[1] (0.0) [%] <4>
y <1> Voltage output
r4072[1]
0, 1 r4074[1] <2>
y2 AO 1 V+ X522.4
p4071 [1] (0) 0 0 0 D
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

x 2 y
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

y +/-10 V
-1 x1 x2 x
1 1 4 mA 3, 4 + + A AO 1 A+ X522.6
-20.000...20.000 [%]
y1
Smoothing p4078[1] (0.000) +/-20 mA
<1>
<1> Scaling Offset X522.5
-20.000...20.000 AO 1 ref.
p4083[1] (0.000) <2>

<1> For p4076 = 0, 2, 3 the units are mA.

Current output
For p4076 = 1, 4 the units are V.
<4> p4076
<2> For a voltage output, the output voltage can be taken from between the following terminals: = 0: 0 mA ... +20 mA
AO 0 between X522.2 (reference potential) and X522.1, AO 1 between X522.5 (reference potential) and X522.4. = 1: 0 V ... +10 V
For a current output, the output current can be taken from between the following terminals: = 2: 4 mA ... +20 mA
AO 0 between X522.2 and X522.3, AO 1 between X522.5 and X522.6. = 3: -20 mA ... +20 mA
<3> The input signals are referred to reference quantity p2000 ... r2004 (100 % = p200x). = 4: -10 V ... +10 V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: TM31 fp_S01_9572_en.vsd Function diagram
- 9572 -
Terminal module 31 (TM31) - analog outputs (AO 0 ... AO 1) 19.11.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p4099[0] (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-183 9576 – Temperature evaluation KTY/PTC R <3> 248 °C

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

<1> <1>
Sensor type KTY T Sensor type
p4100 p4100
Sensor -48 °C
Temperature sensor + temp Hardware Software resistance
X522.7 2 mA smoothing 1 s smoothing 0.5 r4101
+ A s 2
- Resistance
PTC resistor
calculation
X522.8 - D threshold 1650 Ohm 1

KTY/PTC - temp PTC 1

0
0
-50 °C

250 °C
1
Sensor resistance [9577.1]
Measured temperature

Temp. alarm threshold

-48...251 °C
p4102[0] (100)
<4>
A35211
"Overtemperature sensor TM31"
1
<1> p4100 r4104.0
= 0: Evaluation disabled 0
= 1: PTC
= 2: KTY
F35207
<2> An alarm A35920 "Overtemperature sensor TM31"
1
in the temperature
evaluation of the TM31 r4104.1
is signaled to the next 0
(downstream) vector

Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

<2>
control via the special
temperature value Alarm A35920
temperature sensor evaluation <4>
-300 °C (refer to [9577]).
Temp. fault threshold
<3> As a result of the wire -48...251 °C
breakage monitoring

Function diagrams
Alarm is not present p4102[1] (120) TM31. temperature actual value
[9577.3] the maximum
temperature that can be r4105
-300 °C Alarm is present
measured is limited to
approx. 175 °C.
<4> A value > 250 °C de-
activates the alarm or
fault.
2-751

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: TM31 fp_S01_9576_en.vsd Function diagram
- 9576 -
Terminal module 31 (TM31) - temperature evaluation KTY/PTC 15.03.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p4099[0] (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-184 9577 – Sensor monitoring KTY/PTC

p4100 = 1
sensor type PTC
2-752

Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

Function diagrams
[9576.8]

p4100 = 2
sensor type KTY
30 Ohm [9576.8]

y A35920 fault, temperature sensor

Sensor resistance x 1 y & alarm value 2
[9576.6] x
0

340 Ohm

y
x 1 y <1> & A35920 fault, temperature sensor
larm value 2
0 x

1630 Ohm
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

A35920 fault, temperature sensor

x
y 1 y <2> & alarm value 1
x
0

<1> For KTY 84-130 the threshold value of 340 Ohm corresponds to a temperature of -40° C
<2> For KTY 84-130 the threshold value of 1630 Ohm corresponds to a temperature of +180° C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: TM31 fp_S01_9577_en.vsd Function diagram
- 9577 -
Terminal module (TM31) - sensor monitoring KTY/PTC 20.04.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Function diagrams
Terminal Module 41 (TM41)

2.25 Terminal Module 41 (TM41)

Function diagrams

9674 – Incremental encoder emulation 2-754

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 2-753

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 p0110[0] (125.00 µs) p0110[0] (125.00 µs)

Picture 2-185 9674 – Incremental encoder emulation

<2>
2-754

Terminal Module 41 (TM41)

Function diagrams
Control unit Terminal Module 41 Zero mark enabled
r4402.0
Enc emulat pulses ZM Enable zero mark
p4426 p4401.0 X520
1
A
6
1 A 2
N
Comparator 7
N
0 3
B
8
B
4
Not connected
9
M
Not connected 5

Interface
encoder emulation
p1417 p1418 Encoder pulse enabled
number r4402.2 Tracks A/B
p1189.1 n_set
p0408 enabled
x,y p1414.0 p1412 r4155
r4402.1
|y|
1 1
p1155 D
1 1
r2060[1] Format
t 0 adaptation 0
f 0 0
Clock cyc. adaptation
<1> PT2 lowpass Dead time
p0840[0]
Enable n_set p0844[0]
p1142[0] p0848[0]
p0852[0]

Fine resolution
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

Pos act val DQ_clock cycle p0418

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

r0479
Pos act val DP_clock cycle 31 0
r0482 n
DRIVE CLiQ Position actual value

<1> The clock cycle adaptation is only effective for a clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS.
<2> Terminal module 41 has only been released for SIMOTION.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: TM41 fp_S01_9674_en.vsd Function diagram
- 9674 -
Terminal module 41 (TM41) - incremental encoder emulation 23.09.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 Function diagrams
Voltage Sensing Module (VSM)

2.26 Voltage Sensing Module (VSM)

Function diagrams

9880 – Analog inputs (AI 0 ... AI 3) 2-756

9886 – Temperature evaluation 2-757

9887 – Sensor monitoring KTY/PTC 2-758

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 2-755

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Current transformer gain
p0115[1] (250.00 µs)

Picture 2-186 9880 – Analog inputs (AI 0 ... AI 3)

p3670
<1>
2-756

Voltage Sensing Module (VSM)

Function diagrams
x2
x1 y
r3671

Rated line r3673

supply frequency
p0211
X520.2 p0115[3] (2000.00 µs)
Rated line supply frequency
+ A I1 p0211
+/- 10 V AI 0 0.5 s
X520.1 - D
I2
0.5 s
X520.4 Current transformer gain
+ A I3 p3670
+/- 10 V AI 1 0.5 s
X520.3 - D x2
PT1 smoothing PT1 smoothing x1 y
r3672
f
r3674
I3 3
C3 = Filter capacitanceThreshold
2πf • U3
p0221 p3677
I2 3
C2 =
2πf • U2 C3
C2 Limit value
I1 3 A06251
C1 = comparison
2πf • U1 C1

X521.1
r36xx[2]
100 V X521.2 Rated line
supply frequency
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004

X521.3
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

p0211 r36xx[1]
Σ∆
Voltage divider
+ A U1 p3660 r36xx[0]
AI 2 0.5 s
- D x2
U2 x1 y
r3661
Σ∆ 0.5 s
[8950.1]
X522.1 Voltage divider
+ A U3 p3660
690 V X522.2 AI 3 0.5 s
X522.3 - D x2
PT1 smoothing PT1 smoothing x1 y
r3662
[8950.1]
<1> Can only be used in conjunction with the Chasis Active Line Modules.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF fp_S01_9880_en.vsd Function diagram
- 9880 -
Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) - analog inputs (AI 0 ... AI 3) 29.11.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 R 248 °C 4000.00 µs

Picture 2-187 9886 – Temperature evaluation

Sensor type <3>
KTY <5>
p3665 (0)
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

Temperature sensor Sensor type

+ temp Hardware <1> Software T p3665 (0)
X520.5 2 mA smoothing 1 s smoothing 0.5 s
+ A -48 °C <1>
ϑ Resistance
calculation 2
X520.6 - D
KTY/PTC PTC 1 1
- temp
0
0
-50 °C

PTC resistor 250 °C 1

threshold 1650 Ohm
Sensor resistance
[9887.1]

Overtemperature alarm threshold

0...301 °C
<4> p3667[0] (150)

A34211
Alarm threshold temperature exceeded
1
r3664.0
0

Overtemperature hysteresis
<1> p3665 p3669
= 0: No sensor F34207
= 1: PTC Fault threshold, temperature exceeded
= 2: KTY 1
<2> A fault or an alarm in the r3664.1
temperature evaluation 0

Voltage Sensing Module (VSM)

of the VSM is signaled
to the next
(downstream)
evaluation using special <2>
temperature values. Alarm A35920 temperature Overtemperature fault threshold
sensor evaluation 0...301 °C
<4> p3668[1] (180)
<3> Due to the wire

Function diagrams
breakage monitoring,
the maximum Alarm is not present Temperature KTY
temperature that can be r3666
measured is limited to -300 °C Alarm is present
approx. 175 °C.
<4> A value > 250 °C de-
activates the alarm or <5> Can only be used in conjunction with the Chasis Active Line Modules.
2-757

fault.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF fp_S01_9886_en.vsd Function diagram
- 9886 -
Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) - temperature evaluation 29.11.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
 p3665 = 1 p4099[0] (4000.00 µs)

Picture 2-188 9887 – Sensor monitoring KTY/PTC

sensor type PTC
[9886.8] <3>
2-758

Voltage Sensing Module (VSM)

Function diagrams
p3665 = 2
Sensor type KTY
[9886.8]

30 Ohm

y A34920 fault, temperature sensor

Sensor resistance x 1 y & alarm value 2
[9886.6] x
0

340 Ohm

y
x 1 y <1> & A34920 fault, temperature sensor
alarm value 2
0 x

1630 Ohm
SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

A34920 fault, temperature sensor

x
y 1 y <2> & alarm value 1
x
0

<1> For KTY 84-130 temperature sensor, the following applies: A threshold value 340 Ohm corresponds to -40 °C.
<2> For KTY 84-130 temperature sensor, the following applies: A threshold value 1630 Ohm corresponds to +180 °C.
<3> Can only be used in conjunction with the Chasis Active Line Modules.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DO: A_INF fp_S01_9887_en.vsd Function diagram
- 9887 -
Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) - sensor monitoring KTY/PTC 29.11.04 V02.02.00 SINAMICS S
Faults and Alarms 3
Content

3.1 Overview of Faults and Alarms 3-760

3.2 List of faults and alarms 3-768

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-759

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
Faults and Alarms
Overview of Faults and Alarms

3.1 Overview of Faults and Alarms

3.1.1 General information about faults and alarms

Display of Faults and Alarms

If a fault occurs, the drive indicates the fault and/or alarm.
The following methods for displaying faults and alarms are available:
• Display via the fault and alarm buffer with PROFIBUS.
• Display online via the commissioning software.

Differences between Faults and Alarms

The differences between faults and alarms are as follows:

Table 3-1 Differences between Faults and Alarms

Type Description

Faults What happens when a fault occurs?

• The appropriate fault reaction is triggered.
• Status signal ZSW1.3 is set.
• The fault is entered in the fault buffer.

How are faults eliminated?

• Remove the original cause of the fault.
• Acknowledge the fault.
Alarms What happens when an alarm occurs?
• Status signal ZSW1.7 is set.
• The alarm is entered in the alarm buffer.

How are alarms eliminated?

• Alarms are "self acknowledging", that is, they are reset automati-
cally when the cause of the alarm has been eliminated.

3-760  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
Overview of Faults and Alarms

Fault reactions
The following fault reactions are defined:

Table 3-2 Fault reactions

List PROFId- Reaction Description

rive

NONE - None No reaction when a fault occurs.

OFF1 ON/ Brake along the Closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20, 21)
OFF ramp generator • n_set = 0 is input immediately to brake the drive along
deceleration the deceleration ramp (p1121).
ramp followed by
• When zero speed is detected, the motor holding brake (if
pulse disable
parameterized) is closed (p1215). The pulses are sup-
pressed when the brake application time (p1217)
expires.
Zero speed is detected if the actual speed drops below
the threshold in p1226 or if the monitoring time (p1227)
started when speed setpoint <= speed threshold (p1226)
has expired.

Closed-loop torque control (p1300 = 23)

• The following applies to closed-loop torque control
mode: Reaction as for OFF2
• On switchover to closed-loop torque control (p1501), the
following applies:
No separate braking reaction.
If the actual speed drops below the speed threshold
(p1226), the motor holding brake (if parameterized) is
closed. The pulses are suppressed when the brake
application time (p1217) expires.
OFF2 COAST Internal/external Closed-loop speed and torque control
STOP pulse disable • Instantaneous pulse suppression, the drive "coasts" to a
standstill.
• The motor holding brake (if parameterized) is closed
immediately.
• Power-on disable is activated.
OFF3 QUICK Brake along the Closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20, 21)
STOP OFF3 decelera- • n_set = 0 is input immediately to brake the drive along
tion ramp fol- the OFF3 deceleration ramp (p1135).
lowed by pulse
• When zero speed is detected, the motor holding brake (if
disable
parameterized) is closed. The pulses are suppressed
when the brake application time (p1217) expires.
Zero speed is detected if the actual speed drops below
the threshold in p1226 or if the monitoring time (p1227)
started when speed setpoint <= speed threshold (p1226)
has expired.
• Power-on disable is activated.

Closed-loop torque control (p1300 = 23)

• Switchover to speed-controlled operation and other
reactions as described for speed-controlled operation.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-761

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
Faults and Alarms
Overview of Faults and Alarms

Table 3-2 Fault reactions, continued

List PROFId- Reaction Description

rive

STOP1 - - Available soon

STOP2 - n_set = 0 • n_set = 0 is input immediately to brake the drive along
the OFF3 deceleration ramp (p1135).
• The drive remains in closed-loop speed control mode.
DCBRAKE - - Available soon
ENCODER - Internal/external The fault reaction ENCODER is applied as a function of
pulse disable the setting in p0491.
(p0491) Factory setting:
p0491 = 0 --> Encoder fault causes OFF2

Acknowledgement of faults
The list of faults and alarms specifies how to acknowledge each fault after the
cause has been remedied.

Table 3-3 Acknowledgement of faults

List Description

POWER ON The fault is acknowledged by a POWER ON process (switch drive unit off and on again).

Note:
If this action has not eliminated the fault cause, the fault is displayed again immediately
after power up.
IMMEDIATELY Starting from a drive object, the fault can be acknowledged by the following methods:
1 Acknowledge by setting parameter:
p3981 = 0 --> 1
2 Acknowledge via binector inputs:
p2103 BI: 1. Acknowledge faults
p2104 BI: 2. Acknowledge faults
p2105 BI: 3. Acknowledge faults
3 Acknowledge using PROFIBUS control signal:
STW1.7 = 0 --> 1 (edge)

Note:
• These faults can also be acknowledged by a POWER ON operation.
• If this action has not eliminated the fault cause, the fault is displayed again immedi-
ately after power up.
• Safety Integrated faults
The "Safe Stop" (SH) function must be deselected before these faults are acknowl-
edged.
READY The fault can be acknowledged only in the READY state.
In this state, the DC link is charged and the pulses disabled.

3-762  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
Overview of Faults and Alarms

Save fault buffer on POWER OFF

The contents of the fault buffer are saved to non-volatile storage when the Control
Unit 320 (CU320) is powered down, i.e. the fault buffer history is still available
when the unit is powered up again.

Note:
Requirements:
• Firmware with version V2.2 or later.
• Control Unit 320 (CU320) with hardware version C or higher.
The hardware version is shown on the rating plate or can be displayed online
with the commissioning software (in Project Navigator under "Drive Unit" -->
Configuration --> Version Overview).
If these conditions are not fulfilled, the contents of the fault buffer are deleted on
every POWER ON.

The fault buffer of a drive object comprises the following parameters:

• r0945[0...63], r0947[0...63], r0948[0...63], r0949[0...63]
• r2109[0...63], r2130[0...63], r2133[0...63], r2136[0...63]
The fault buffer contents can be deleted manually as follows:
• Delete fault buffer for all drive objects:
p2147 = 1 --> p2147 = 0 is automatically set after execution.
• Delete fault buffer for a specific drive object:
p0952 = 0 --> The parameter belongs to the specific drive object.
The fault buffer contents are automatically deleted in response to the following
events:
• Restore factory setting (p0009 = 30 and p0976 = 1).
• Download with modified structure (e. g. number of drive objects changed).
• Power-up after other parameter values have been loaded (e. g. p0976 = 10).
• Firmware release upgrade.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-763

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
Overview of Faults and Alarms

3.1.2 Explanation of the List of Faults and Alarms

The data in the following example has been chosen at random. A description can
contain the information listed below. Some of the information is optional.
The list of faults and alarms (see Section 3.2) has the following layout:

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Start of example - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Axxxxx (F, N) Fault location (optional): Name

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge- NONE
ment:
Cause: Description of possible causes.
Fault value (r0949, format): or alarm value (r2124, format): (optional)
Information about fault or alarm values (optional).
Remedy: Description of possible remedies.
Reaction to F: A_INFEED: OFF2 (OFF1, NONE)
SERVO: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
VECTOR: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge- IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
ment for F:
Reaction to N: NONE
Acknowledge- NONE
ment for N:

Axxxxx Alarm xxxxx

Axxxxx (F, N) Alarm xxxxx (report type can be changed to F or N)
Fxxxxx Fault xxxxx
Fxxxxx (A, N) Fault xxxxx (report type can be changed to A or N)
Nxxxxx No report
Nxxxxx (A) No report (report type can be changed to A)
A report comprises a letter followed by the relevant number.
The meaning of the letters is as follows:
• A means "Alarm"
• F means "Fault"
• N means "No Report" or "Internal Report"
The optional parenthesis indicates whether the type specified for this report can
be changed and which report types can be adjusted via parameter.
Information about reaction and acknowledgement are specified independently for
a report with adjustable report type (e.g. reaction to F, acknowledgement for F).

3-764  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
Overview of Faults and Alarms

Note:
You can change the default properties of a fault or alarm by setting parameters.
References: /IH1/ SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual,
Section "Diagnostics"

Fault location (optional): Name

The fault location (optional), the name of the fault or alarm and the report number
all serve to identify the report (e.g. with the commissioning software).

Reaction: Default fault reaction (adjustable fault reaction)

Specifies the default reaction in the event of a fault.
The optional parenthesis indicates whether the default fault reaction can be
changed and which fault reactions can be adjusted via parameter.
Note:
See Section 3.1.1

Acknowledgement: Default acknowledgement (adjustable acknowledgement)

Specifies the default method of fault acknowledgement after the cause has been
eliminated.
The optional parenthesis indicates whether the default acknowledgement can be
changed and which acknowledgement can be adjusted via parameter.
Note:
See Section 3.1.1

Cause:
Description of the possible causes of the fault/alarm A fault or alarm value is also
specified as an option.
Fault value (r0949, format):
The fault value is entered in the fault buffer in r0949[0...63] and specifies addi-
tional, precise information about a fault.
Alarm value (r2124, format):
The alarm value specifies additional, precise information about an alarm.
The alarm value is entered in the alarm buffer in r2124[0...7] and specifies addi-
tional, precise information about an alarm.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-765

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
Faults and Alarms
Overview of Faults and Alarms

Remedy:
Description of the potential methods for eliminating the cause of the active fault
or alarm.

Warning
In individual cases, the servicing and maintenance personnel are responsible for
choosing a suitable method for eliminating the cause of faults.

3-766  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
Overview of Faults and Alarms

3.1.3 Numerical Ranges of Faults and Alarms

Faults and alarms are organized into the following numerical ranges:

Table 3-4 Numerical Ranges of Faults and Alarms

From To Range

1000 2999 Control Unit

3000 4999 Reserved
5000 5999 Power Module
6000 6999 Supply
7000 7999 Drives
8000 8999 Option Board
9000 29999 Reserved
30000 30999 DRIVE-CLiQ component power section
31000 31999 DRIVE-CLiQ component encoder 1
32000 32999 DRIVE-CLiQ component encoder 2
33000 33999 DRIVE-CLiQ component encoder 3
34000 34999 Reserved
35000 35999 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
36000 49999 Reserved
50000 50399 Communication Board (COMM BOARD)
50400 65535 Reserved

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-767

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

3.2 List of faults and alarms

Product: SINAMICS S, Version: V02.20.28.00, Label: ARM_M0475_11, Language: en

F01000 Internal software error

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: power on
Cause: An internal software error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry-out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the firmware release.
- contact the Hotline.
- replace the control unit.

F01001 Internal software error

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: power on
Cause: An internal software error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry-out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the firmware release.
- contact the Hotline.

F01002 Internal software error

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2 (OFF1)
SERVO: OFF2
VECTOR: OFF2
Acknowledge: power on
Cause: An internal software error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry-out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the firmware release.
- contact the Hotline.

F01003 Acknowledgment delay when accessing the memory

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2 (OFF1)
SERVO: OFF2
VECTOR: OFF2
Acknowledge: power on
Cause: A memory area was accessed that does not return a "READY".
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry-out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- contact the Hotline.

3-768  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F01005 Firmware download DRIVE-CLiQ component unsuccessful

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Firmware was not able to be downloaded into a DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Fault value (r0949):
xxyyyy hex: xx = component number, yyyy = cause of the fault.
Cause of the fault (decimal):
011: DRIVE-CLiQ component has detected a checksum error.
015: The selected DRIVE-CLiQ component did not accept the contents of the firmware file.
101: After several communication attempts, not response from the DRIVE-CLiQ component.
140: Firmware file for the DRIVE-CLiQ component not available on the CompactFlash Card.
156: Component with the specified component number is not available (p7828).
Additional values:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - check the selected component number (p7828).
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
- save suitable firmware file for download in the directory /siemens/sinamics/code/sac/.
- after POWER ON has been carried-out again for the DRIVE-CLiQ component, download the firmware again.

A01006 Firmware update DRIVE-CLiQ component required

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The firmware of a DRIVE CLiQ component must be updated as there is no suitable firmware or firmware version in
the component for operation with the control unit.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Component number of the DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Remedy: Firmware update using the commissioning software:
The firmware version of all of the components on the "version overview" page can be read in the Project Navigator
under "Configuration" of the associated drive unit and an appropriate firmware update can be carried-out.
Firmware update via parameter:
- take the component number from the alarm value and enter into p7828.
- start the firmware download with p7829 = 1.

A01007 POWER ON DRIVE-CLiQ component required

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ component must be powered-up again (POWER ON) as, for example, the firmware was updated.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Component number of the DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Remedy: Switch-out the power supply of the specified DRIVE-CLiQ component and switch-in again.

F01010 Unknown drive type

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An unknown drive type was found.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Drive object number.
Remedy: Check the EEPROM data of the drive objects.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-769

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F01015 Internal software error

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: power on
Cause: An internal software error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry-out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the firmware release.
- contact the Hotline.

F01030 Monitoring master control: Sign-of-life failure PC

Reaction: OFF1
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For active PC master control, no sign-of-life was received within the monitoring time.
The master control was returned to the active BICO interconnection.
Remedy: Set the monitoring time higher at the PC/AOP or disable completely.
Notice:
The monitoring time should be set as short as possible. A long monitoring time means a late response when the
communications fail!
The monitoring time is set in milliseconds.
- in the AOP using the Main menu -> Settings -> Control settings -> Timeout monitoring
- In Starter using <Drive> -> Commissioning -> Control panel -> Button "Fetch master control" -> a window is dis-
played in which the monitoring time can be set.

A01035 (F) ACX: Run-up from the back-up files

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When the control unit ran-up no complete data set from the parameter save files was found. The last time that the
parameterization was saved, it was not completely carried-out. Instead, a backup data set or file is downloaded.
Alarm value (r2124, hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: If you saved the project in STARTER, carry-out a new download for your project and save using the function "Copy
RAM to ROM" or with p0977 = 1 so that all of the parameter files are again completely written into the CompactFlash
Card.
Reaction upon F: A_INFEED: NONE (OFF2)
SERVO: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
VECTOR: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY
upon F:

F01036 (A) ACX: Parameter back-up file missing

Reaction: A_INFEED: NONE (OFF2)
SERVO: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
VECTOR: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When downloading the device parameterization, a file associated with a drive object cannot be found. Neither a
PSxxxyyy.ACX, a PSxxxyyy.NEW nor a PSxxxyyy.BAK exists on the CompactFlash Card for this drive object.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: If you have saved your project data using STARTER, carry-out a new download for your project. Save using the func-
tion "Copy RAM to ROM" or with p0977 = 1 so that all of the parameter files are again completely written into the
CompactFlash Card.
If you have not saved the project data, then the system must be again commissioned for the first time.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

3-770  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F01037 (A) ACX: Re-naming parameter file not successful

Reaction: A_INFEED: NONE (OFF2)
SERVO: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
VECTOR: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The re-naming after saving a parameter-save file on the CompactFlash Card was unsuccessful.
One of the files to be re-named had the "read only" attribute. The parameter-save files are saved on the Compact-
Flash Card in the directory \USER\SINAMICS\DATA.
It is possible that the CompactFlash Card is defective.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
The least-significant byte includes the drive object number (yyy in the file names PSxxxyyy.* or CAxxxyyy.* or
CCxxxyyy.*).
Special cases: yyy = 0 --> consistency save file PSxxx000.*, yyy = 99 --> PROFIBUS parameter file PSxxx099.*
The next most significant byte includes the file number xxx.
The value for xxx depends on p0977 with which the save operation was started:
p0977 = 1, 10, 11, 12 --> xxx = 0, 10, 11, 12
The two most significant bytes are used for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Check whether one of the files to be overwritten has the attribute "read only" and change this file attribute into "writ-
able". Check all of the files (PSxxxyyy.*, CCxxxyyy.*, CAxxxyyy.*) that belong to drive yyy designated in the fault
value.
Replace the CompactFlash Card.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

F01039 (A) ACX: Writing into parameter file not successful.

Reaction: A_INFEED: NONE (OFF2)
SERVO: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
VECTOR: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When writing at least one parameter-save file was not written onto the CompactFlash Card.
One of the files to be overwritten has the "read only" attribute. The parameter-save files PSxxxyyy.NEW are saved
on the CompactFlash Card in the directory \USER\SINAMICS\DATA.
It is possible that the CompactFlash Card is defective.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
The least significant byte includes the drive object number (yyy in the file names PSxxxyyy.NEW).
Special cases: yyy = 0 --> consistency save file PSxxx000.NEW, yyy = 99 --> PROFIBUS parameter file
The next most significant byte includes the file number xxx.
The value for xxx depends on p0977 with which the save operation was started:
p0977 = 1, 10, 11, 12 --> xxx = 0, 10, 11, 12
The two most significant bytes are used for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Check whether one of the files to be overwritten (PSxxxyyy.*, CAxxxyyy.*, CCxxxyyy.*) has the attribute "read only"
and change this file attribute into "writable".
Replace the CompactFlash Card.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

F01040 Save parameter settings and carry-out a POWER ON

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: power on
Cause: A parameter was changed in the drive system that means that it is necessary to save the parameters and run-up
again (e.g. p0110).
Remedy: - save the parameters (p0971/p0977).
- carry-out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-771

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F01041 Parameter save necessary

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Defective or missing files were detected on the CompactFlash Card at run-up.
Remedy: - save the parameters (p0977).
- download the project again into the drive unit.

F01042 Parameter error during project download

Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An error was detected when downloading a project using the commissioning (start-up) software (e.g. incorrect
parameter value).
For the specified parameter, it was detected that dynamic limits were exceeded that could possibly depend on other
parameters.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Low word: Parameter number (16 bits without sign)
Byte 3: Parameter index
Byte 4: Fault detection
0: Parameter number illegal.
1: Parameter value cannot be changed.
2: Lower or upper value limit exceeded.
3: Sub-index incorrect.
4: No array, no sub-index.
5: Data type incorrect.
6: Setting not permitted (only resetting).
7: Descriptive element cannot be changed.
9: Descriptive data not available.
11: No master control.
15: No text array present.
17: Task cannot be executed due to operating status.
20: Illegal value.
21: Response too long.
22: Parameter address illegal.
23: Format illegal.
24: Number of values not consistent.
25: Drive object does not exist.
101: Presently de-activated.
104: Illegal value.
107: Write access not permitted when controller enabled.
108: Units unknown.
109: Write access only in the commissioning state, encoder (p0010 = 4).
110: Write access only in the commissioning state, motor (p0010 = 3).
111: Write access only in the commissioning state, power module (p0010 = 2).
112: Write access only in the quick commissioning mode (p0010 = 1).
113: Write access only in the ready mode (p0010 = 0).
114: Write access only in the commissioning state, parameter reset (p0010 = 30).
115: Write access only in the Safety Integrated commissioning state (p0010 = 95).
116: Write access only in the commissioning state, technological application/units (p0010 = 5).
117: Write access only in the commissioning state (p0010 not equal to 0).
118: Write access only in the commissioning state, download (p0010 = 29).
119: Parameter may not be written into in download.
120: Write access only in the startup state, drive basis configuration (device: p0009 = 3).
121: Write access only in commissioning state Define drive type" (device: p0009 = 2).
122: Write access only in commissioning state Data set basic configuration" (device: p0009 = 4).
123: Write access only in commissioning state "Device Configuration" (device: p0009 = 1).
124: Write access only in commissioning state Device download" (device: p0009 = 29).
125: Write access only in commissioning state Device parameter reset" (device: p0009 = 30).
126: Write access only in commissioning state Device ready" (device: p0009 = 0).
127: Write access only in commissioning state Device" (device: p0009 not equal to 0).
129: Parameter may not be written into in download.
130: Transfer of the master control is inhibited via BI: p0806.

3-772  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

131: Required BICO interconnection not possible, because BICO output does not supply floating value
132: Free BICO interconnection inhibited via p0922.
133: Access method not defined.
200: Below the valid values.
201: Above the valid values.
202: Not accessible from BOP.
203: Cannot be read from BOP.
204: Write access not permitted.
Remedy: - enter the correct value into the specified parameter.
- identify the parameter that narrows (restricts) the limits of the specified parameter.

F01043 Fatal error when downloading a project

Reaction: OFF2 (OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fatal error was detected when downloading a project using the commissioning (start-up) software.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
1: Device status cannot be changed to Device Download (drive object ON?).
2: Drive object ID incorrect
3: A drive object that has already been deleted is deleted again.
4: Deletes drive object that has already been registered for generation.
5: Deletes a drive object that no longer exists.
6: Generating an undeleted drive object that already existed.
7: Regeneration of a drive object already registered for generation.
8: Maximum number of drive objects that can be generated exceeded.
9: Error while generating a device drive object.
10: Error while generating target topology parameters (p9902 and p9903).
11: Error when generating a drive object (global component).
12: Error when generating a drive object (drive component).
13: Unknown drive object type.
14: Drive status cannot be changed to Drive Download.
15: Drive status cannot be changed to Ready (p0947 and p0949).
16: Device status cannot be changed to Ready.
17: It is not possible to download the topology. The component wiring should be checked, taking into account the
various messages/signals.
18: A new download is only possible if the factory settings are re-established for the drive unit.
19: The slot for the option module has been configured several times (e.g. CAN and COMM BOARD)
20: The configuration is inconsistent (e.g. CAN for control unit, however no CAN configured for drive objects - active
line module, servo or vector).
Remedy: - use the actual version of the commissioning software.
- modify the offline project and carry-out a new download (e.g. compare the number of drive objects, motor, encoder,
power module in the offline project and at the drive).
- change the drive system (is a drive rotating or is there a message/signal?).
- carefully note any other messages/signals and remove their cause.

F01044 CU CompactFlash: Message description incorrect

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: power on
Cause: An error was detected when loading the message descriptions (FDxxxyyy.ACX) saved on the CompactFlash Card.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Replace the CompactFlash Card.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-773

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A01045 CU CompactFlash: Configuration data invalid

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An invalid data type was detected when evaluating parameter files PSxxxyyy.ACX, PTxxxyyy.ACX, CAxxxyyy.ACX
or CCxxxyyy.ACX, saved on the CompactFlash Card.
Alarm value (r2124, hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Restore the factory setting using (p0976 = 1) and re-load the project into the drive unit. Operation without any restric-
tions is then possible.
After downloading the project, save the parameterization in STARTER using the function "Copy RAM to ROM" or
with p0977 = 1 so that the incorrect parameter files are overwritten on the CompactFlash Card.

A01046 (F) CU CompactFlash: Configuration data invalid

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An invalid data type was detected when evaluating the parameter files PSxxxyyy.ACX, PTxxxyyy.ACX, CAxxx-
yyy.ACX or CCxxxyyy.ACX saved on the CompactFlash Card.
Alarm value (r2124, hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Restore the factory setting using (p0976 = 1) and re-load the project into the drive unit. Operation without any restric-
tions is then possible.
After downloading the project, save the parameterization in STARTER using the function "Copy RAM to ROM" or
with p0977 = 1 so that the incorrect parameter files are overwritten on the CompactFlash Card.
Reaction upon F: A_INFEED: NONE (OFF2)
SERVO: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
VECTOR: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY
upon F:

A01047 (F) ACX: Parameter write error

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When evaluating the parameters files PSxxxyyy.ACX, PTxxxyyy.ACX, CAxxxyyy.ACX or CCxxxyyy.ACX, saved on
the CompactFlash Card, a parameter value was not able to be transferred into the control unit memory.
Alarm value (r2124, hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Restore the factory setting using (p0976 = 1) and re-load the project into the drive unit. Operation without any restric-
tions is then possible.
After downloading the project, save the parameterization in STARTER using the function "Copy RAM to ROM" or
with p0977 = 1 so that the incorrect parameter files are overwritten on the CompactFlash Card.
Reaction upon F: A_INFEED: NONE (OFF2)
SERVO: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
VECTOR: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY
upon F:

A01049 CU CompactFlash: It is not possible write into the file

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: It is not possible to write into a write-protective file (PSxxxxxx.acx). The write task was interrupted.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Drive object number.
Remedy: Check whether the write-protected attribute has been set for the files on the CompactFlash Card under
.../USER/SINAMICS/DATA/... When required, remove write protection and save again (e.g. set p0971 to 1).

3-774  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F01050 CompactFlash card and device not compatible

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2 (NONE)
SERVO: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
VECTOR: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The CompactFlash Card and the device type do not match (e.g. a CompactFlash Card for SINAMICS S is inserted
in SINAMICS G).
Remedy: - insert the matching CompactFlash Card
- use the matching control unit or power module.

F01051 Drive object type is not available

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The drive object type in conjunction with the selected application-specific perspective is not available. The required
descriptive file (PDxxxyyy.ACX) does not exist on the CompactFlash Card.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Index of p0103 and p0107.
See also: p0103, p0107
Remedy: - for this drive object type (p0107), select a valid application-specific perspective (p0103).
- save the required descriptive file (PDxxxyyy.ACX) on the CompactFlash Card.
See also: p0103, p0107

A01100 CU: CompactFlash Card withdrawn

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The CompactFlash Card (non-volatile memory) was withdrawn in operation.
Notice:
It is not permissible that the CompactFlash Card is withdrawn or inserted under voltage.
Remedy: - power-down the drive system.
- re-insert the CompactFlash Card that was withdrawn - this card must match the drive system.
- power-up the drive system again.

F01105 (A) CU: Insufficient memory

Reaction: OFF1
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: Two many functions, data sets or drives configured on this control unit.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - change the configuration on this control unit.
- use an additional control unit.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

F01107 CU: Save to CompactFlash Card unsuccessful

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A data save on the CompactFlash Card was not able to be successfully carried-out.
- CompactFlash Card is defective.
- CompactFlash Card does not have sufficient memory space.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
-1: The file on the RAM was not able to be opened.
-2: The file on the RAM was not able to be read.
-3. A new directory was not able to be set-up on the CompactFlash Card.
-4: A new file was not able to be set-up on the CompactFlash Card.
-5: A new file was not able to be written onto the CompactFlash Card.
Remedy: - try to save again.
- use another CompactFlash Card.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-775

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F01110 CU: More than one SINAMICS G on one control unit

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: More than one SINAMICS G power module type is being operated from the control unit.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Number of the second drive with a SINAMICS G power module type.
Remedy: Only one SINAMICS G drive type is permitted.

F01111 CU: SINAMICS S and G together on one control unit

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: SINAMICS S and G drive units are being operated together on one control unit.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Number of the first drive object with a different power module type.
Remedy: Only power modules of one particular drive type may be operated with one CU.

F01120 (A) Terminal initialization has failed

Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: An internal software error has occurred when initializing the terminal functions on the CU3xx, the TB30 or the TM31.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry-out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the firmware release.
- contact the Hotline.
- replace the control unit.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

F01205 CU: Time slice overflow

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: power on
Cause: Insufficient processing time is available for the existing topology.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - reduce the number of drives.
- increase the sampling times.

F01210 CU: Selected basic clock cycle does not match DRIVE-CLiQ clock cycle
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The parameter to select the basic clock cycle does not match the drive topology. Drives connected to the same
DRIVE-CLiQ port of the control unit have been assigned different basic clock cycles.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
The fault value specifies the parameter involved.
See also: p0111
Remedy: Only those drive objects may be connected to the same DRIVE-CLiQ socket of the control unit that should run with
the same basic clock cycle. For example, active line modules and motor modules should be inserted at different
DRIVE-CLiQ ports as their basic clock cycles and current controller clock cycles are generally different.
See also: p0111

3-776  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F01220 CU: Bas clock cyc too low

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The parameter for the basic clock cycle is set too short for the number of connected drives.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
The fault value specifies the parameter involved.
See also: p0110
Remedy: - increase the basic clock cycle.
- reduce the number of connected drives and start to re-commission the unit.
See also: p0110

F01221 CU: Basic clock cycle too short (application cannot maintain its clock cycle)
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The closed-loop control / monitoring cannot maintain the intended clock cycle.
The runtime of the closed-loop control/monitoring is too longer for the particular clock cycle or the computation time
remaining in the system is not sufficient for the closed-loop control/monitoring.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Increase the basic clock cycle of DRIVE-CLiQ communications.
See also: p0112

F01250 CU: CU-EEPROM incorrect read-only data

Reaction: NONE (OFF2)
Acknowledge: power on
Cause: Error when reading the read-only data of the EEPROM in the control unit.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry-out a POWER ON.
- replace the control unit

A01251 CU: CU-EEPROM incorrect read-write data

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Error when reading the read-write data of the EEPROM in the control unit.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: For alarm value r2124 < 256, the following applies:
- carry-out a POWER ON.
- replace the control unit.
For alarm value r2124 >= 256, the following applies:
- delete (clear) the fault memory on the drive object on which the alarm occurred (p0952 = 0).
- as an alternative, delete (clear) the fault memories of all drive objects (p2147 = 1).
- replace the control unit.

F01255 CU: Opt. module EEPROM incorrect read-only data

Reaction: NONE (OFF2)
Acknowledge: power on
Cause: Error when reading the read-only data of the EEPROM in the option module.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry-out a POWER ON.
- replace the control unit.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-777

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A01256 CU: Opt. module EEPROM incorrect read-write data

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Error when reading the read-write data of the EEPROM in the option module.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry-out a POWER ON.
- replace the control unit.

F01305 Topology: Component number missing

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The component number from the topology was not parameterized (p0121 (for power module, refer to p0107), p0131
(for servo/vector drives, refer to p0107), p0141, p0151, p0161).
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
The fault value includes the particular data set number.
The fault also occurs if speed encoders were configured (p0187 ... p0189), however, no component numbers exist
for them.
In this case, the fault value includes the drive data set number plus 100 * encoder number (e.g. 3xx, if a component
number was not entered into p0141 for the third encoder).
See also: p0121, p0131, p0141, p0142, p0151, p0161, p0186, p0187, p0188, p0189
Remedy: Enter the missing component number or remove the component and restart commissioning.
See also: p0121, p0131, p0141, p0142, p0151, p0161, p0186, p0187, p0188, p0189

A01320 Topology: Drive object number does not exist in configuration

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A drive object number is missing in p0978
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Index of p0101 under which the missing drive object number can be determined.
Remedy: Set p0009 to 1 and change p0978:
Rules:
- p0978 must include all of the drive object numbers (refer to p0101).
- it is not permissible that a drive object number is repeated.
- by entering a 0, the drive objects with PZD are separated from those without PZD.

A01321 Topology: Drive object number does not exist in configuration

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: p0978 contains a drive object number that does not exist.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Index of p0978 under which the drive object number can be determined.
Remedy: Set p0009 to 1 and change p0978:
Rules:
- p0978 must include all of the drive object numbers (refer to p0101).
- it is not permissible that a drive object number is repeated.
- by entering a 0, the drive objects with PZD are separated from those without PZD.

A01322 Topology: Drive object number present twice in configuration

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: a drive object number is present more than once in p0978.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Index of p0978 under which the involved drive object number is located.

3-778  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

Remedy: Set p0009 to 1 and change p0978:

Rules:
- p0978 must include all of the drive object numbers (refer to p0101).
- it is not permissible that a drive object number is repeated.
- by entering a 0, the drive objects with PZD are separated from those without PZD.

A01330 Topology: Quick commissioning not possible

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Unable to carry-out a quick commissioning. The existing actual topology does not fulfill the requirements.
Alarm value (r2124, hexadecimal):
The cause is in byte 1 supplementary information is included in byte 2 and the high word.
Byte 1 = 1:
For a component, illegal connections were detected.
- byte 2 = 1: For a motor module, more than one motor with DRIVE-CLIQ was detected.
- byte 2 = 2: For a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, the DRIVE-CLiQ cable is not connected to a motor module.
- high word = preliminary component number of the component with illegal connection.
Byte 1 = 2:
The topology contains too many components of a particular type.
- byte 2 = 1: There is more than one master control unit.
- byte 2 = 2: There is more than 1 active line module (8 for a parallel circuit configuration).
- byte 2 = 3: There are more than 6 motor modules (8 for a parallel circuit configuration).
- byte 2 = 4: There are more than 9 encoders.
- byte 2 = 5: There are more than 2 terminal modules.
- byte 2 = 7: Component type unknown.
- byte 2 = 8: There are more than 6 drive slaves.
- byte 2 = 9: Connection of a drive slave not permitted.
- byte 2 = 10: No drive master available.
- byte 2 = 11: There is more than one motor with DRIVE-CLiQ for a parallel circuit.
- high word = not used.
Byte 1 = 3:
More than 16 components are connected at a DRIVE-CLiQ socket of the control unit.
- byte 2 = 0, 1, 2, 3 means e.g. detected at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100, X101, X102, X103.
- high word = not used.
Byte 1 = 4:
The number of components connected one after the other is greater than 7.
- byte 2 = not used.
- high word = preliminary component number of the 8th component.
Byte 1 = 5:
The component is not permissible for SERVO.
- byte 2 = 1: SINAMICS G available.
- byte 2 = 2: Chassis available.
- high word = preliminary component number of the 1st component found that resulted in the fault.
Byte 1 = 6:
For a component, illegal EEPROM data was detected. These must be corrected before the system continues to run-
up.
- byte 2 = 1: The Order No. [MLFB] of the power module that was replaced includes a space retainer. The space
retainer (*) must be replaced by a correct character.
- high word = preliminary component number of the component with illegal EEPROM data.
Byte 1 = 7:
The actual topology contains an illegal combination of components.
- byte 2 = 1: Active line module (ALM) and basic line module (BLM).
- byte 2 = 2: Active line module (ALM) and smart line module (SLM).
- high word = not used.
Note:
Connection type and connection number are described in F01375.
See also: p0097, r0098, p0099

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-779

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

Remedy: - adapt the output topology to the permissible requirements.

- carry-out commissioning using the commissioning software.
- for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ, connect the power and DRIVE-CLiQ cable to the same motor module (single motor
module: DRIVE-CLiQ at X202, double motor module: DRIVE-CLiQ from motor 1 (X1) to X202, from motor 2 (X2) to
X203).
Re byte 1 = 6 and byte 2 = 1:
Correct the order number when commissioning using the commissioning software.
See also: p0097, r0098, p0099

A01331 Topology: Component not assigned to a drive object

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A component is not assigned to a drive object.
- when commissioning, a component was not able to be automatically assigned to a drive object.
- the parameters for the data sets are not correctly set.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Component number of the unassigned component.
Remedy: This component is assigned to a drive object.
Check the parameters for the data sets.
Examples:
- power module (p0121).
- motor (p0131, p0186).
- encoder interface (p0140, p0141, p0187 ... p0189).
- encoder (p0140, p0142, p0187 ... p0189).
- terminal module (p0151).
- option board (p0161).

F01340 Topology: Too many components on one line

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For the selected communications clock cycle, too many DRIVE-CLiQ components are connected to one line of the
control unit.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
xyy hex: x = fault cause, yy = component number or connection number.
1yy:
The communications clock cycle of the DRIVE-CLiQ connection on the CU is not sufficient for all read transfers.
2yy:
The communications clock cycle of the DRIVE-CLiQ connection on the CU is not sufficient for all write transfers.
3yy:
Cyclic communications is fully utilized.
4yy:
The DRIVE-CLiQ cycle starts before the earliest end of the application. An additional deadtime must be added to the
control. Sign-of-life errors can be expected.
5yy:
Internal buffer overflow for net data of a DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
6yy:
Internal buffer overflow for receive data of a DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
7yy:
Internal buffer overflow for send data of a DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
Remedy: Check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection:
Approximately the same number of components should be connected in series and operated at the DRIVE-CLiQ
connections. This means that communication is uniformly distributed over several communication lines.
Re fault value = 1yy - 4yy in addition:
- increase the basic clock cycle (p0112).

3-780  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F01355 Topology: Actual topology modified

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The unit target topology p0099 does not correspond to the unit actual topology r0098.
The fault only occurs if the topology was commissioned using the automatic internal device mechanism and not using
the commissioning software.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
See also: r0098, p0099
Remedy: One of the following counter-measures can be selected if no faults have occurred in the topology detection itself:
If commissioning was still not completed:
- carry-out a self-commissioning routine (starting from p0009 = 1).
general: Set p0099 to r0098, set p0009 to 0; for existing motor modules, this results in servo drives being automati-
cally generated (refer to p0107).
or to generate servo drives: Set p0097 to 1, set p0009 to 0;
or to generate vector drives: Set p0097 to 2, set p0009 to 0.
or to generate vector drives with a parallel circuit configuration: Set p0097 to 12, set p0009 to 0.
In order to set configurations in p0108, before setting p0009 to 0, it is possible to first set p0009 to 2 and p0108 mod-
ified (the index corresponds to the drive object,also refer to p0107).
If commissioning was already completed:
- re-establish the original connections and re-connect power to the control unit.
- restore the factory setting for the complete equipment (all of the drives) and allow automatic self-commissioning
again.
- change the device parameterization to match the connections (this is only possible using the commissioning soft-
ware).
Notice:
Topology changes, that result in this fault being generated, cannot be accepted by the automatic function in the
device, but must be transferred using the commissioning software and parameter download. The automatic function
in the device only allows constant topology to be used. Otherwise, when the topology is changed, all of the previous
parameter settings are lost and replaced by the factory setting.
See also: r0098

F01360 Topology: Actual topology is illegal

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The detected actual topology is not permissible.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Byte 1 (cause):
1: Too many components were detected at the control unit. The maximum permissiblen number of components is
199.
2: The component type of a component is not known. The preliminary component number is in the high word.
Note:
The drive system run-up is stopped. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Re fault value = 1:
Change the configuration. Connect less than 199 components to the control unit.
Re fault value = 2:
Remove the component with unknown component type.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-781

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F01375 Topology: Actual topology duplicate connection between two components

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When detecting the actual topology, a ring-type connection was detected.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Low word: Preliminary component number of a component included in the ring
Byte 3: Component class
Byte 4: Connection number
Example:
Fault value = 33751339 dec = 203012B hex
Byte 4 = 02 hex = 2 dec, byte 3 = 03 hex = 3 dec, low word = 012B hex = 299 dec
Component class:
1: Control unit
2: Motor module
3: Line module
4: Sensor module (SM)
5: Voltage sensing module (VSM)
6: Terminal module (TM)
7: DMC20, repeater
8: CX32
49: DRIVE-CLiQ components (non-listed components)
50: Option slot (e.g. terminal board 30)
60: Encoder (e.g. EnDat)
70: Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ
Component type:
Precise designation within a component class (e.g. "SMC20").
Connection number:
Consecutive numbers, starting from zero, of the appropriate connection or slote (e.g. DRIVE-CLiQ connection X100
on the control unit has the connection number 0).
Remedy: Output the fault value and remove the specified connection.

F01380 Topology: Actual topology, defective EEPROM

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: power on
Cause: When detecting the actual topology, a component with a defective EEPROM was detected.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Low word:
Preliminary component number of the defective components.
Remedy: Output the fault value and remove the defected component.

A01381 Topology: Comparison shows power module shifted

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a power module in the actual topology that has been shifted with respect to
the target topology.
Alarm value (r2124, hexadecimal):
Byte 1: Component number of the component shifted in the target topology.
The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected, is described in bytes 2, 3 and 4.
Byte 2: Component class
Byte 3: component number
Byte 4: Connection number
Note:
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
The drive system run-up is stopped. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- undo the change to the actual topology by changing-over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables.
- commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified
project.
- automatically remove the topology error (p9904).

3-782  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A01382 Topology: Comparison shows sensor module shifted

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a sensor module in the actual topology that has been shifted with respect to
the target topology.
Alarm value (r2124, hexadecimal):
Byte 1: Component number of the component shifted in the target topology
The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected, is described in bytes 2, 3 and 4.
Byte 2: Component class
Byte 3: component number
Byte 4: Connection number
Note:
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
The drive system run-up is stopped. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- undo the change to the actual topology by changing-over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables.
- commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified
project.
- automatically remove the topology error (p9904).

A01383 Topology: Comparison shows terminal module shifted

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a terminal module in the actual topology that has been shifted with respect
to the target topology.
Alarm value (r2124, hexadecimal):
Byte 1: Component number of the component shifted in the target topology
The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected, is described in bytes 2, 3 and 4.
Byte 2: Component class
Byte 3: component number
Byte 4: Connection number
Note:
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
The drive system run-up is stopped. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- undo the change to the actual topology by changing-over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables.
- commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified
project.
- automatically remove the topology error (p9904).

A01385 Topology: Comparison shows CX32 shifted

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a controller extension 32 (CX32) in the actual topology that has been shifted
with respect to the target topology.
Alarm value (r2124, hexadecimal):
Byte 1: Component number of the component shifted in the target topology
The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected, is described in bytes 2, 3 and 4.
Byte 2: Component class
Byte 3: component number
Byte 4: Connection number
Note:
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
The drive system run-up is stopped. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-783

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

Remedy: Adapting the topologies:

- undo the change to the actual topology by changing-over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables.
- commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified
project.
- automatically remove the topology error (p9904).

A01386 Topology: Comparison shows DRIVE-CLiQ component shifted

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a DRIVE-CLiQ component in the actual topology that has been shifted with
respect to the target topology.
Alarm value (r2124, hexadecimal):
Byte 1: Component number of the component shifted in the target topology
The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected, is described in bytes 2, 3 and 4.
Byte 2: Component class
Byte 3: component number
Byte 4: Connection number
Note:
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
The drive system run-up is stopped. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- undo the change to the actual topology by changing-over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables.
- commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified
project.
- automatically remove the topology error (p9904).

A01387 Topology: Comparison shows option slot component shifted

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a option slot component in the actual topology that has been shifted with
respect to the target topology.
Alarm value (r2124, hexadecimal):
Byte 1: Component number of the component shifted in the target topology
The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected, is described in bytes 2, 3 and 4.
Byte 2: Component class
Byte 3: component number
Byte 4: Connection number
Note:
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
The drive system run-up is stopped. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- undo the change to the actual topology by changing-over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables.
- commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified
project.
- automatically remove the topology error (p9904).

3-784  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A01388 Topology: Comparison shows EnDat encoder shifted

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected an EnDat encoder in the actual topology that has been shifted with respect
to the target topology.
Alarm value (r2124, hexadecimal):
Byte 1: Component number of the component shifted in the target topology
The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected, is described in bytes 2, 3 and 4.
Byte 2: Component class
Byte 3: component number
Byte 4: Connection number
Note:
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
The drive system run-up is stopped. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- undo the change to the actual topology by changing-over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables.
- commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified
project.
- automatically remove the topology error (p9904).

A01389 Topology: Comparison shows motor with DRIVE-CLiQ shifted

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ in the actual topology that has been shifted with
respect to the target topology.
Alarm value (r2124, hexadecimal):
Byte 1: Component number of the component shifted in the target topology
The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected, is described in bytes 2, 3 and 4.
Byte 2: Component class
Byte 3: component number
Byte 4: Connection number
Note:
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
The drive system run-up is stopped. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- undo the change to the actual topology by changing-over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables.
- commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified
project.
- automatically remove the topology error (p9904).

A01416 Topology: Comparison shows additional component in actual topology

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has found a component in the actual topology which is not specified in the target topology.
The alarm value defines the connection at which the additional component was detected.
Alarm value (r2124, hexadecimal):
Byte 1: component number
Byte 2: Component class
Byte 3: Connection number
Note:
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- remove the additional component in the actual topology.
- download the target topology that matches the actual topology (commissioning software).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-785

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A01420 Topology: Comparison shows a component is different

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected differences in the actual and target topologies in relation to one component.
There are differences in the electronic rating plate.
Alarm value (r2124, hexadecimal):
Byte 1: Component number of the component
Byte 2: Component class of the target topology
Byte 3: Component class of the actual topology
Byte 4 (cause):
1: Different component type
2: Different order number
3: Different manufacturer
4: Connection changed-over for a multi-component slave (e.g. double motor module) or defective EEPROM data in
the electronic rating plate
Note:
Component class and component type are described in F01375.
The drive system run-up is stopped. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- check the component soft-wired connections against the hardware configuration of the drive unit in the commis-
sioning software and correct differences.
- parameterize the topology comparison of all components (p9906).
- parameterize the topology comparison of one components (p9907, p9908).

A01421 Topology: Comparison, different components

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected differences in the actual and target topologies in relation to one component.
The component class, the component type or the number of connections differ.
Alarm value (r2124, hexadecimal):
Byte 1: Component number of the component
Byte 2: Component class of the target topology
Byte 3: Component class of the actual topology
Byte 4 (cause):
1: Different component class
2: Different component type
3: Different order number
4: Different number of connections
Note:
Component class, component type and connection number are described in F01375.
The drive system run-up is stopped. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Check the component soft-wired connections against the hardware configuration of the drive unit in the commission-
ing software and correct differences.

A01425 Topology: Comparison shows that the serial number of a component is different
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected differences in the actual and target topologies in relation to one component.
The serial number is different.
Alarm value (r2124, hexadecimal):
Byte 1: Component number of the component
Byte 2: Component class
Byte 3: Number of differences
Note:
The component class is described in F01375.
The drive system run-up is stopped. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.

3-786  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

Remedy: Adapting the topologies:

- change over the actual topology to match the target topology.
- download the target topology that matches the actual topology (commissioning software).
Re byte 3:
Byte 3 = 1 --> can be acknowledged using p9904 or p9905.
Byte 3 > 1 --> can be acknowledged using p9905 and can be de-activated using p9906 or p9907/p9908.
See also: p9904, p9905, p9906, p9907, p9908

A01428 Topology: Comparison shows connection of a component is different

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected differences in the actual and target topologies in relation to one component.
A component was connected to another connection.
The different connections of a component are described in the alarm value:
Alarm value (r2124, hexadecimal):
Byte 1: component number
Byte 2: Component class
Byte 3: Connection number in the actual topology
Byte 4: Connection number in the target topology
Note:
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
The drive system run-up is stopped. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- change over the actual topology to match the target topology.
- download the target topology that matches the actual topology (commissioning software).
- automatically remove the topology error (p9904).
See also: p9904

A01429 Topology: Comparison shows connection is different for more than component
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A topology comparison has found differences between the actual and target topology for several components. A
component was connected to another connection.
The different connections of a component are described in the alarm value:
Alarm value (r2124, hexadecimal):
Byte 1: component number
Byte 2: Component class
Byte 3: Connection number in the actual topology
Byte 4: Connection number in the target topology
Note:
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
The drive system run-up is stopped. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: Adapting the topologies:
- change over the actual topology to match the target topology.
- download the target topology that matches the actual topology (commissioning software).
Note:
In the software, a double motor module behaves just like two separate DRIVE-CLiQ nodes. If a double motor module
is re-inserted, this can result in several differences in the actual topology.

F01451 Topology: Target topology is invalid

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An error has occurred when writing into the target topology.
The write operation was interrupted due to an invalid target topology.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Reload the target topology using the commissioning software.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-787

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F01470 Topology: Target topology ring connection

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A ring-type connection was detected when writing into the target topology.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Byte 1: Component number of a component included in the ring
Byte 2: Component class
Byte 3: Connection number
Note:
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
Remedy: Read-out the fault value and remove one of the specified connections.
Then, download the target topology again using the commissioning software.

F01475 Topology: Target topology duplicate connection between two components

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When writing the target topology, a duplicate connection between two components was detected.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Byte 1: Component number of one of the components connected twice
Byte 2: Component class
Byte 3: Connection number 1 of the duplicate connection
Byte 4: Connection number 2 of the duplicate connection
Note:
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
Remedy: Read-out the fault value and remove one of the two specified connections.
Then, download the target topology again using the commissioning software.

A01481 Topology: Comparison shows power module not present in the actual topology
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a power module in the target topology that is not used in the actual topology.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Component number of the additional target components.
Note:
The drive system run-up is stopped. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: - delete the drive belonging to the power module in the commissioning software project and download the new con-
figuration into the drive unit.
- check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over.
- check DRIVE-CLiQ cables for interruption and contact problems.

A01482 Topology: Comparison shows sensor module not present in the actual topology
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a sensor module in the target topology that is not used in the actual topology.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Component number of the additional target components.
Note:
The drive system run-up is stopped. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: - re-configure the drive belonging to the sensor module in the commissioning software project (encoder configura-
tion) and download the new configuration into the drive unit.
- delete the drive belonging to the sensor module in the commissioning software project and download the new con-
figuration into the drive unit.
- check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over.
- check DRIVE-CLiQ cables for interruption and contact problems.

3-788  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A01483 Topology: Comparison shows terminal module not present in the actual topology
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a terminal module in the target topology that is not used in the actual topol-
ogy.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Component number of the additional target components.
Note:
The drive system run-up is stopped. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: - delete the terminal module in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration into the drive
unit.
- check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over.
- check DRIVE-CLiQ cables for interruption and contact problems.

A01485 Topology: Comparison CX32 in actual topology missing

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a controller extension 32 (CX32) in the target topology that is not used in the
actual topology.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Component number of the additional target components.
Note:
The drive system run-up is stopped. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: - delete the CX32 in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration into the drive unit.
- check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over.
- check DRIVE-CLiQ cables for interruption and contact problems.

A01486 Topology: Comparison shows DRIVE-CLiQ not present in the actual topology
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a DRIVE-CliQ component in the target topology that is not used in the actual
topology.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Component number of the additional target components.
Note:
The drive system run-up is stopped. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: - delete the drive belonging to this component in the commissioning software project and download the new config-
uration into the drive unit.
- re-configure the drive belonging to this component in the commissioning software project and download the new
configuration into the drive unit.
- check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over.
- check DRIVE-CLiQ cables for interruption and contact problems.

A01487 Topology: Comparison shows option slot component not present in the actual topol-
ogy
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected an option slot component in the target topology that is not used in the actual
topology.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Component number of the additional target components.
Note:
The drive system run-up is stopped. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-789

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

Remedy: - delete the option board in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration into the drive
unit.
- re-configure the drive unit in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration into the drive
unit.
- check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over.

A01488 Topology: Comparison EnDat encoder not present in the actual topology
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected an EnDat encoder in the target topology that is not used in the actual topol-
ogy.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Component number of the additional target components.
Note:
The drive system run-up is stopped. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: - re-configure the drive belonging to the encoder in the commissioning software project (encoder configuration) and
download the new configuration into the drive unit.
- delete the drive belonging to the encoder in the commissioning software project and download the new configura-
tion into the drive unit.
- check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over.

A01489 Topology: Comparison shows motor with DRIVE-CLiQ not present in the actual topol-
ogy
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The topology comparison has detected a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ in the target topology that is not used in the actual
topology.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Component number of the additional target components.
Note:
The drive system run-up is stopped. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy: - re-configure the drive belonging to this motor in the commissioning software project and download the new config-
uration into the drive unit.
- delete the drive belonging to this motor in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration
into the drive unit.
- check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over.
- check DRIVE-CLiQ cables for interruption and contact problems.

F01505 (A) BICO: Interconnection cannot be established

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A PROFIBUS telegram has been set (p0922).
An interconnection contained in the telegram, was not able to be established.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Parameter receiver that should be changed.
Remedy: Establish another interconnection.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

3-790  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F01506 (A) BICO: No standard telegram

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The standard telegram in p0922 is not maintained and therefore p0922 is set to 999.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
BICO parameter for which the write attempt was unsuccessful.
Remedy: Again set the required standard telegram (p0922).
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

F01510 BICO: Signal source is not float type

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The selected connector output does not have the correct data type. This interconnection is not established.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Parameter number to which an interconnection should be made (connector output).
Remedy: Interconnect this connector input with a connector output having a float data type.

F01511 (A) BICO: Interconnection between various normalizations

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The requested interconnection was set up. However, a conversion is made between the BICO output and BICO input
using the reference values.
- the BICO output has different normalized units than the BICO input.
- alarm only for interconnections within a drive object.
Alarm during commissioning and download inactive.
Example:
The BICO output has, as normalized unit, voltage and the BICO input has current.
This means that the factor p2002 (contains the reference value for current) / p2001 (contains the reference value for
voltage) is calculated between the BICO output and BICO input.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Parameter number of the BICO input (signal receiver).
Remedy: No correction needed.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

F01512 BICO: No normalization available

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2 (OFF1)
SERVO: OFF2
VECTOR: OFF2
Acknowledge: power on
Cause: An attempt was made to determine a conversion factor for a normalization that does not exist.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Unit (e.g. corresponding to SPEED) for which an attempt was made to determine a factor.
Remedy: Apply normalization or check the transfer value.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-791

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F01513 (A) BICO: Spanning DO between different normalizations

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The requested interconnection was set up. However, a conversion is made between the BICO output and BICO input
using the reference values.
An interconnection is made between different drive objects and the BICO output has different normalized units than
the BICO input or the normalized units are the same but the reference values are different.
Example:
The BICO output has, as standard unit, voltage and the BICO input has current; both lie in different drive objects.
This means that the factor p2002 (contains the reference value for current) / p2001 (contains the reference value for
voltage) is calculated between the BICO output and BICO input.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Parameter number of the BICO input (signal receiver).
Remedy: No correction needed.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

A01514 (F) BICO: Error when writing during a reconnect

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: During a reconnect operation (e.g. at run-up or download - but cannot occur in normal operation) a parameter was
not able to be written into.
Example:
When writing to a double word BICO input in the second index, the memory areas overlap (e.g. p8861). The param-
eter is then reset to the factor setting.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Parameter number of the BICO input (signal receiver).
Remedy:
Reaction upon F: NONE
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY
upon F:

F01590 (A) Drive: Service/maintenance interval expired

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The selected service/maintenance interval (p0651) for this drive was reached.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Motor data set number.
See also: p0650, p0651
Remedy: Carry-out service/maintenance and reset the service/maintenance interval (p0651).
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

F01600 SI CU: STOP A initiated

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The Safety Integrated function on the control unit has detected a fault and initiated a STOP A (pulse cancellation via
the safety shutdown path of the control unit).
- forced checking procedure of the safety shutdown path of the control unit unsuccessful.
- subsequent response to fault F01611 (defect in a monitoring channel).
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
0: Stop request from the motor module.
1005: Pulses cancelled although SH not selected and there is not internal STOP A present.
1010: Pulses enabled although SH is selected or an internal STOP A is present.
1015: Feedback of the safe pulse cancellation for motor modules connected in parallel are different.
9999: Subsequent response to fault F01611.

3-792  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

Remedy: - select safe standstill and then de-select again.

- check whether the safe standstill function is also enabled on the motor module (p9801).
If required, select the safety commissioning mode (p0010), enable the safe standstill function on the control unit and
motor module (p9601, p9801), exist the safety commissioning mode (p0010) and carry-out a POWER ON for all com-
ponents (power-down/power-up).
- replace the motor module involved.
Re fault value = 9999:
- carry-out diagnostics for fault F01611.
Note:
CU: Control unit
SI: Safety Integrated

F01611 SI CU: Defect in a monitoring channel

Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The Safety Integrated function on the control unit has detected a fault in the crosswise data comparison and initiated
a STOP F.
As a result of this fault, after the parameterized transition has expired (p9658), fault F01600 (CU Safety Integrated:
STOP A initiated) is output.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
0: Stop request from the motor module.
1 to 999:
Number of the crosswise compared data that resulted in this fault.
1: Safety Integrated monitoring clock cycle (r9780, r9880).
2: Safety Integrated enable safety functions (p9601, p9801).
3: Safety Integrated tolerance time SGE changeover (p9650, p9850).
4: Safety Integrated transition period STOP F to STOP A (p9658, p9858).
5: Safety Integrated enable safe brake control (p9602, p9802).
This number is also displayed in r9795.
1000:
Watchdog timer has expired. Within the time of approx. 5 * p9650 too many switching operations have occurred at
terminal EP of the motor module.
1001, 1002: Initialization error, change timer / check timer.
2000: Status of the SH terminals on the control unit and motor module are different.
2001: Feedback signal for safe pulse cancellation on the control unit and motor module are different.
2004: Status of the SH selection for modules connected in parallel are different.
2005: Feedback signal of the safe pulse cancellation on the control unit and motor modules connected in parallel are
different.
Remedy: Re fault value = 1 to 999:
- check the crosswise compared data that resulted in a STOP F.
- carry-out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the motor module software.
- upgrade the control unit software.
Re fault value = 1000:
- check the EP terminal at the motor module (contact problems).
Re fault value = 1001, 1002:
- carry-out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the motor module software.
- upgrade the control unit software.
Re fault value = 2000, 2001:
- check the tolerance time SGE changeover and if required, increase the value (p9650, p9850).
- check the wiring of the safety-relevant input signals (contact problems).
- replace the motor module involved.
Note:
CU: Control unit
SI: Safety Integrated

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-793

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

N01620 (F, A) SI CU: Safe standstill active

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The safe standstill function has been selected on the control unit and is active.
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
Remedy: None necessary.
Note:
CU: Control unit
SI: Safety Integrated
Reaction upon F: OFF2
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY (power on)
upon F:
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

F01625 SI CU: Sign-of-life error in safety data

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The Safety Integrated function on the control unit has detected an error in the sign-of-life of the safety data and ini-
tiated a STOP A.
- there is either a DRIVE-CLIQ communications error or communications have failed.
- a time slice overflow of the safety software has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - select safe standstill and then de-select again.
- carry-out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communications error between the control unit and the motor module
involved and if required, carry-out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified.
- de-select all drive functions that are not absolutely necessary.
- reduce the number of drives.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
Note:
CU: Control unit
SI: Safety Integrated

F01630 SI CU: Brake control defective

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The Safety Integrated function on the control unit has detected a brake control fault and initiated a STOP A.
- no motor holding brake connected.
- the motor holding brake control on the motor module is faulty.
- a DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred between the control unit and the motor module involved.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
10: No brake connected or fault in the motor module brake control circuit ("open brake" operation).
11: Defect in the brake control circuit of the motor module ("brake open" operation).
20: Short-circuit in the brake winding or fault in the brake control circuit of the motor module ("brake open" state).
30: No brake connected, short-circuit in the brake winding or fault in the motor module brake control circuit ("close
brake" operation).
31: Defect in the brake control circuit of the motor module ("close brake" operation).
40: Defect in the brake control circuit of the motor module ("brake closed" state).
50: Defect in the brake control circuit of the motor module or communications fault between the control unit and the
motor module (brake control diagnostics).

3-794  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

Remedy: - check the motor holding brake connection.

- check the function of the motor holding brake.
- check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communications error between the control unit and the motor module
involved and if required, carry-out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- replace the motor module involved.
Note:
CU: Control unit
SI: Safety Integrated

F01649 SI CU: Internal software error

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: An internal error in the Safety Integrated software on the control unit has occurred.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry-out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- re-commission the Safety Integrated function and carry-out a POWER ON.
- upgrade the control unit software.
- contact the Hotline.
- replace the control unit.
Note:
CU: Control unit
SI: Safety Integrated

F01650 SI CU: Acceptance test required

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The Safety Integrated function on the control unit requires an acceptance test.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
130: No safety parameters available for the motor module.
1000: Reference and actual checksum on the control unit are not identical (run-up).
- at least one checksum-checked piece of data is defective.
2000: Reference and actual checksum on the control unit are not identical (commissioning mode).
- reference checksum incorrectly entered into the control unit (p9799 not equal to r9798).
2001: Reference and actual checksum on the motor module are not identical (commissioning mode).
- reference checksum incorrectly entered into the motor module (p9899 not equal to r9898).
2002: Enable of safety-related functions between the control unit and motor module differ (p9601 not equal to
p9801).
2003: Acceptance test is required as a safety parameter has been changed.
2010: Safe brake control is enabled differently the control unit and motor module (p9602 not equal to p9802).
2020: Error when saving the safety parameters for the motor module.
9999: Subsequent response of another safety-related fault that occurred at run-up that requires an acceptance test.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-795

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

Remedy: Re fault value = 130:

- carry-out safety commissioning routine.
Re fault value = 1000:
- again carry-out safety commissioning routine.
- replace the CompactFlash Card.
Re fault value = 2000:
- check the safety parameters in the control unit and adapt the reference checksum (p9799).
Re fault value = 2001:
- check the safety parameters in the motor module and adapt the reference checksum (p9899).
Re fault value = 2002:
- enable the safety-related functions on the control unit and check on the motor module (p9601 = p9801).
Re fault value = 2003:
- carry-out an acceptance test.
Re fault value = 2010:
- enable the safe brake control in the control unit and check on the motor module (p9602 = p9802).
Re fault value = 2020:
- again carry-out safety commissioning routine.
- replace the CompactFlash Card.
Re fault value = 9999:
- carry-out diagnostics for the other safety-related fault that is present.
Note:
CU: Control unit
SI: Safety Integrated
See also: p9799, p9899

F01651 SI CU: Not synchronized with the motor module

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The Safety Integrated function is requesting synchronization of the safety time slices on the control unit and motor
module. This synchronization routine was not successful.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry-out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the motor module software.
- upgrade the control unit software.
Note:
CU: Control unit
SI: Safety Integrated

F01652 SI CU: Monitoring clock cycle not permissible

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The Safety Integrated monitoring clock cycle cannot be maintained due to the communication conditions requested
in the system.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Upgrade the control unit software.
Note:
CU: Control unit
SI: Safety Integrated

3-796  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F01655 SI CU: Align monitoring functions

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: An error has occurred when aligning the Safety Integrated monitoring functions on the control unit and motor module.
Control unit and motor module were not able to determine a common set of supported SI monitoring functions.
- there is either a DRIVE-CLIQ communications error or communications have failed.
- Safety Integrated software releases on the control unit and motor module are not compatible with one another.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry-out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the motor module software.
- upgrade the control unit software.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
Note:
CU: Control unit
SI: Safety Integrated

F01656 SI CU: Incorrect motor module parameter

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: When accessing the Safety Integrated parameters for the motor module on the CompactFlash Card, an error has
occurred.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
129: Safety parameters for the motor module corrupted.
131: Internal motor module software error.
132: Communication errors when uploading or downloading the safety parameters for the motor module.
255: Internal software error on the control unit.
Remedy: - re-commission the safety functions.
- upgrade the control unit software.
- upgrade the motor module software.
- replace the CompactFlash Card.
Re fault value = 132:
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
Note:
CU: Control unit
SI: Safety Integrated

F01659 SI CU: Write task for parameter rejected

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The write task for one or several Safety Integrated parameters on the control unit was rejected.
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
1: The Safety Integrated password is not set.
2: A parameter reset was selected - however, the Safety Integrated parameters cannot be reset as Safety Integrated
is presently enabled.
10: An attempt was made to enable the SH function although this cannot be supported.
11: An attempt was made to enable the SBC function although this cannot be supported.
12: An attempt was made to enable the SBC function although this cannot be supported for a parallel circuit config-
uration.

See also: p0970, p3900, r9771, r9871

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-797

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

Remedy: Re fault value = 1:

- set the Safety Integrated password (p9761).
Re fault value = 2:
- inhibit Safety Integrated (p9601, p9801) and again reset the drive parameters.
Re fault value = 10, 11:
- check whether there are faults in the safety function alignment between the control unit and the motor module
involved (F01655, F30655) and if required, carry-out diagnostics for the faults involved.
- use a motor module that supports the function safe standstill or safe brake control.
- upgrade the motor module software.
- upgrade the control unit software.
Note:
CU: Control unit
SI: Safety Integrated
See also: p9601, p9761, p9801

F01660 SI CU: Safety-related functions not supported

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The motor module does not support the safety-related functions (e.g. the motor module version is not the correct
one). Safety Integrated cannot be commissioned.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Remedy: - use a motor module that supports the safety-related functions.
- upgrade the motor module software.
Note:
CU: Control unit
SI: Safety Integrated

A01698 (F) SI CU: Commissioning mode active

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The commissioning of the Safety Integrated function is selected.
This alarm is withdrawn after the safety functions have been commissioned.
See also: p0010
Remedy: None necessary.
Note:
CU: Control unit
SI: Safety Integrated
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY (power on)
upon F:

A01699 (F) SI CU: Shutdown path test required

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The time set in p9659 for the forced checking procedure of the safety shutdown paths has been exceeded. The
safety shutdown paths must be re-tested.
After the next time that the safe standstill function is de-selected, the alarm is withdrawn and the monitoring time is
reset.
See also: p9659
Remedy: Select safe standstill and then deselect again.
Note:
CU: Control unit
SI: Safety Integrated
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY (power on)
upon F:

3-798  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F01800 DRIVE-CLiQ: Hardware/configuration incorrect

Reaction: A_INFEED: NONE (DCBRAKE, ENCODER, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
SERVO: OFF1 (DCBRAKE, ENCODER, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
VECTOR: OFF1 (DCBRAKE, ENCODER, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: power on
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ connection fault has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
0 ... 3:
The socket 0 ... 3 has not switched to cyclic operation. The cause can be an incorrect structure or a configuration
that results in an impossible bus timing.
10:
Loss of the DRIVE-CliQ connection. The cause can be, for example, that the DRIVE-CLiQ cable was withdrawn from
the control unit or as a result of a short-circuit for motors with SMI. This fault can only be acknowledged in cyclic
communication.
11:
Repeated fault when detecting the connection. This fault can only be acknowledged in cyclic communication.
12:
A connection was detected but the node ID exchange mechanism does not function. The reason is probably that the
component is defective. This fault can only be acknowledged in cyclic communication.
Remedy: Re fault value = 0 ... 3:
- ensure that the DRIVE-CLiQ components have the same firmware releases.
- avoid longer topologies for short current controller clock cycles.
Re fault value = 10:
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ cables at the control unit.
- remove any short-circuit for motors with SMI.
- carry-out a POWER ON.
Re fault value = 11:
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
Re fault value = 12:
- replace the component involved.

F01801 DRIVE-CLiQ: No communications to the components

Reaction: OFF1 (DCBRAKE, ENCODER, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: power on (IMMEDIATELY)
Cause: Communications with the DRIVE-CLiQ component specified by the fault value is not possible.
One cause can be, e.g. that a DRIVE-CLiQ cable has been withdrawn.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Component ID.
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ connections.
- check the power supply voltage of the component involved.
- carry-out a POWER ON.

F01802 (A) CU DRIVE-CLiQ: POWER ON due to basic sampling times

Reaction: OFF2 (DCBRAKE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: power on
Cause: It is not possible to change the the DRIVE-CLiQ basic sampling times p0110 in operation. POWER ON is required.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Index of p0110.
Remedy: - save (p0971 = 1).
- carry-out a POWER ON.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-799

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A01900 (F) PROFIBUS: Configuration telegram error

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A PROFIBUS master attempts to establish a connection using an incorrect configuring telegram.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
50: Syntax error.
51: Connection established to more drive objects than configured in the device. The drive objects for PZD exchange
and their sequence was defined using p0978.
52: Too many data words for input or output to a drive object. A max. of 16 words is permitted for SERVO and VEC-
TOR; max. 5 words, for A_INFEED, TB30, TM31 and CU320.
53: Uneven number of bytes for input or output.
Remedy: Check the bus configuring on the master and slave sides.
Re alarm value = 51:
Check the list of the drive objects with PZD exchange (p0978). With p0978[x] = 0, all of the following drive objects in
the list are excluded from the PZD replacement.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY
upon F:

A01901 (F) PROFIBUS: Parameterizing telegram error

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A PROFIBUS master attempts to establish a connection using an incorrect parameterizing telegram.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
1: Incorrect parameterizing bits
10: Illegal length of an optional parameterizing block
11: Illegal ID of an optional parameterizing block
20: Double parameterizing block for clock synchronization
21: Incorrect parameterizing block for clock synchronization
22: Incorrect parameterizing bits for clock synchronization
Remedy: Check the bus configuration:
- bus addresses
- slave configuring
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY
upon F:

A01902 PROFIBUS: Parameterizing telegram not permissible

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
0: Bus cycle time Tdp < 1 ms
1: Bus cycle time Tdp > 32 ms
2: Bus cycle time Tdp is not a integer multiple of the current controller clock cycle.
3: Instant of the actual value sensing Ti > Bus cycle time Tdp
4: Instant of the actual value sensing Ti is not an integer multiple of the current controller clock cycle.
5: Instant of the setpoint transfer Ti > = Bus cycle time Tdp
6: Instant of the setpoint transfer To is not an integer multiple of the current controller clock cycle.
7: Master application cycle time Tmapc is not an integer multiple of the speed controller clock cycle.
8: Bus reserve bus cycle time Tdp - data exchange time Tdx less than two current controller clock cycles.
9: Bus cycle time Tdp has been modified with respect to the first time that the connection was established.
10: Instant of the setpoint transfer To <= data exchange time Tdx + To_min.
11: Master application cycle time Tmapc > 14.
12: PLL tolerance window Tpll_w > Tpll_w_max.
13: Bus cycle time Tdp is not a multiple of all basic clock cycles p0110[x].
Remedy: - adapt the parameterizing telegram.
- adapt the current and speed controller clock cycle.

3-800  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A01903 (F) COMM INT: Receive configuration data not valid

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The drive unit did not accept the receive-configuration data.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Return value of the receive-configuration data check.
0: Configuration accepted.
1: Drive overflow.
2: Data length overflow.
3: Data length uneven.
4: Setting data for synchronization not accepted.
5: Drive still not in cyclic operation.
6: Buffer system not accepted.
7: Cyclic channel length too short for this setting.
8: Cyclic channel address not initialized.
9: 3-buffer system not permitted.
10: DRIVE-CLiQ fault.
11: CU link fault.
12: CX32 not in cyclic operation.
Remedy: Check the receive configuration data.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY
upon F:

F01910 (N, A) PROFIBUS: Setpoint timeout

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2 (DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
SERVO: OFF3 (DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, STOP1, STOP2)
VECTOR: OFF3 (DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The receipt of setpoints from the PROFIBUS interface is interrupted because the bus connection is interrupted or the
PROFIBUS master is switched off or was set into the STOP state.
Remedy: Restore the bus connection and set the PROFIBUS master to RUN.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

F01911 PROFIBUS: Clock synchronous operation, clock cycle failure

Reaction: OFF1
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The global control telegram to synchronize the clock cycles has failed - in cyclic operation - for several DP clock
cycles or has violated the time grid specified in the parameterizing telegram over several consecutive DP clock
cycles (refer to the bus cycle time, Tdp and Tdpllw).
Remedy: - check the PROFIBUS cables and connectors.
- check whether communications were briefly or permanently interrupted.
- check the bus and master for utilization level (e.g. bus cycle time Tdp was set too short).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-801

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F01912 PROFIBUS: Clock-synchronous operation, sign-of-life failure

Reaction: OFF1
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The maximum permissible number of errors in the master sign-of-life (clock synchronous PROFIBUS) has been
exceeded in cyclic operation.
Remedy: - check the physical bus configuration (terminating resistor, shielding, etc.).
- check the interconnection of the master sign-of-life (p2045).
- check whether the master correctly sends the sign-of-life (e.g. set-up a trace with STW2.12 ... STW2.15 and trigger
signal ZSW1.3).
- check the permissible telegram failure rate (p0925).
- check the bus and master for utilization level (e.g. bus cycle time Tdp was set too short).

F01913 (N, A) COMM INT: Monitoring time, sign-of-life expired

Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The monitoring time for the sign-of-life counter has expired.
Remedy: - acknowledge faults that are present.
- carry-out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the firmware release.
- contact the Hotline.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

F01914 (N, A) COMM INT: Monitoring time, configuration expired

Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The monitoring time for the configuration has expired.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
0: The transfer of the send-configuration data has been exceeded (time).
1: The transfer of the receive-configuration data has been exceeded (time).
Remedy: - acknowledge faults that are present.
- carry-out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the firmware release.
- contact the Hotline.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

A01920 (F) PROFIBUS: Interruption, cyclic connection

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The cyclic connection to the PROFIBUS master is interrupted.
Remedy: Set up the PROFIBUS connection and activate the PROFIBUS master in the cyclic mode.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY
upon F:

3-802  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A01921 (F) PROFIBUS: Clock cyc synchron

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Output data of PROFIBUS master (setpoints) received at the incorrect instant in time within the PROFIBUS clock
cycle.
Remedy: Check the bus configuration:
- parameters for clock synchronization: Ensure the instant in time for setpoint acceptance To > data exchange time
Tdx
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY
upon F:

A01930 PROFIBUS: Current controller clock cycle for clock synchronous operation, not the
same
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The current controller clock cycle of all drives must be set the same for the clock synchronous PROFIBUS.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Number of the drive object with the different current controller clock cycle.
Remedy: - set current controller clock cycles to identical values (p0115[0]).
See also: p0115

A01931 PROFIBUS: Speed controller clock cycle for clock synchronous operation, not the
same
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The speed controller clock cycle of all drives must be set the same for the clock synchronous PROFIBUS.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Number of the drive object with the different speed controller clock cycle.
Remedy: - set the speed controller clock cycles the same (p0115[1]).
See also: p0115

A01940 PROFIBUS: Clock synchronism still not reached

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: PROFIBUS is in the data exchange state and clock synchronous operation has been selected using the parameter-
izing telegram. It was not possible to synchronize to the clock cycle specified by the master.
- the master doesn't send a clock synchronous global control telegram although the clock synchronous operation
was selected when configuring the bus.
- the master is using another clock synchronous DP clock cycle than was transferred to the slave in the parameter-
izing telegram.
Remedy: - check the master application and bus configuration.
- check the consistency between the clock cycle input when configuring the slave and clock cycle setting at the mas-
ter.

A01941 PROFIBUS: Clock cycle signal missing when the bus is being established
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: PROFIBUS is in the data exchange state and clock synchronous operation has been selected using the parameter-
izing telegram. The global control telegram for synchronization is not being received.
Remedy: Check the master application and bus configuration.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-803

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A01943 PROFIBUS: Clock cycle signal error when the bus is being established
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: PROFIBUS is in the data exchange state and clock synchronous operation has been selected using the parameter-
izing telegram. The global control telegram for synchronization is being irregularly received.
-.the master is sending an irregular global control telegram.
- the master is using another clock synchronous DP clock cycle than was transferred to the slave in the parameter-
izing telegram.
Remedy: - check the master application and bus configuration.
- check the consistency between the clock cycle input when configuring the slave and clock cycle setting at the mas-
ter.

A01944 PROFIBUS: Sign-of-life synchronism not reached

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: PROFIBUS is in the data exchange state and clock synchronous operation has been selected using the parameter-
izing telegram. Synchronization with the master sign-of-life (STW2 bits 12-15) could not be completed because the
sign-of-life is changing differently than configured in the Tmapc time grid.
Remedy: - ensure that the master correctly increments the sign-of-life in the master application clock cycle.
- check the interconnection of the master sign-of-life (p2045).

F01950 (N, A) PROFIBUS: Clock synchronous operation, synchronization unsuccessful

Reaction: OFF1 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: Synchronization of the internal clock cycle to the global control telegram has failed. The internal clock cycle exhibits
an unexpected shift.
Remedy: Siemens-internal
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

F01951 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Synchronization, application clock cycle missing

Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: If DRIVE-CLiQ components with different application clock cycle are operated at a DRIVE-CLiQ port, then this
requires synchronization with the control unit.
This synchronization routine was not successful.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry-out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the motor module software.
- upgrade the control unit software.

F01952 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Synchronization of components not supported

Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The existing system configuration requires at the connected DRIVE-CLiQ components support the synchronization
between the basic clock cycle, DRIVE-CLiQ clock cycle and the application clock cycle.
However, not all DRIVE-CLiQ components have this functionality.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Component number of the first faulted DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Remedy: Upgrade the firmware of the component specified in the fault value.
Note:
If required, also upgrade additional components in the DRIVE-CLiQ line.

3-804  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A01953 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Synchronization not completed

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: After the drive system is powered-up, the synchronization between the basic clock cycle, DRIVE-CLiQ clock cycle
and application clock cycle was started but was not completed within the selected time (tolerance).
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Carry-out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.

F01954 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Synchronization not successful

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: After the drive system is powered-up, the synchronization between the basic clock cycle, DRIVE-CLiQ clock cycle
and application clock cycle was started and was not able to be successfully completed.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: 1. Ensure perfect functioning of the DRIVE-CLiQ.
2. Initiate a new synchronization, e.g. by:
- remove the PROFIBUS master and re-insert again.
- restart the PROFIBUS master.
- power-down the control unit and power-up again.
- press the control unit reset button.
- reset the parameter and download the saved parameters (p0009 = 30, p0976 = 2).

A02000 Function generator: Start not possible

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The function generator has already been started.
Remedy: Stop the function generator and restart again if necessary.
See also: p4800

A02005 Function generator: Drive does not exist

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The drive object specified for connection does not exist.
See also: p4815
Remedy: Use the existing drive object with the corresponding number.
See also: p4815

A02006 Function generator: No drive specified for connection

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: No drive specified for connection in p4815.
See also: p4815
Remedy: At least one drive to be connected must be specified in p4815.
See also: p4815

A02007 Function generator: Drive not SERVO

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The drive object specified for connection is not a SERVO.
See also: p4815
Remedy: Use a SERVO drive object with the corresponding number.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-805

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A02010 Function generator: Speed setpoint from the drive is not zero
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The speed setpoint of a drive - selected to be connected to - is greater than the value for the standstill detection set
using p1226.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Number of the drive object involved.
Remedy: For all of the drives specified for connection, set the speed setpoints to 0.

A02011 Function generator: Speed actual value not zero

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The speed actual value of a drive - selected to be connected to - is greater than the value for the standstill detection
set using p1226.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Number of the drive object involved.
Remedy: Set the relevant drives to zero speed before starting the function generator.

A02015 Function generator: Drive enable signals missing

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The master control and/or enable signals are missing to connect to the specified drive.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Number of the drive object involved.
See also: p4815
Remedy: Fetch the master control to the specified drive object and set all enable signals.

A02020 Function generator: Parameter cannot be changed

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: This parameter setting cannot be changed when the function generator is active (p4800 = 1).
See also: p4810, p4812, p4813, p4815, p4820, p4821, p4822, p4823, p4824, p4825, p4826, p4827, p4828, p4829
Remedy: - stop before parameterizing the function generator (p4800 = 0).
- if required, start the function generator (p4800 = 1).
See also: p4800

A02025 Function generator: Period too short

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The value for the period is too short.
See also: p4821
Remedy: Check and adapt the value for the period.
See also: p4821

A02026 Function generator: Pulse width too wide

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The selected pulse width is too high.
The pulse width must be less than the period duration.
See also: p4822
Remedy: Reduce pulse width.
See also: p4821, p4822

3-806  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A02030 Function generator: Physical address equals zero

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The specified physical address is zero.
See also: p4812
Remedy: Set a physical address with a value other than zero.
See also: p4812

A02040 Function generator: Impermissible value for offset

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The value for the offset is higher than the value for the upper limit or lower than the value for the lower limit.
See also: p4826
Remedy: Adjust the offset value accordingly.
See also: p4826, p4828, p4829

A02041 Function generator: Impermissible value for bandwidth

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The bandwidth, referred to the time slice clock cycle of the function generator has either been set too low or too high.
Depending on the time slice clock cycle, the bandwidth is defined as follows:
Bandwidth_max = 1 / (2 * time slice clock cycle)
Bandwidth_min = Bandwidth_max / 100000
Example:
Assumption: p4830 = 125 µs
--> Bandwidth_max = 1 / (2 * 125 µs) = 4000 Hz
--> Bandwidth_min = 4000 Hz / 100000 = 0.04 Hz
Note:
p4823: Function generator bandwidth
p4830: Function generator time slice cycle
See also: p4823, p4830
Remedy: Check the value for the bandwidth and appropriately adapt.

A02047 Function generator: Invalid time slice clock cycle

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The time slice cycle selected does not match any of the existing time slices.
See also: p4830
Remedy: Input an existing time slice cycle. The existing time slices can be read out via p7901.

A02050 Trace: Start not possible

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The trace has already been started.
Remedy: Stop the trace and, if necessary, start again.

A02055 Trace: Recording time too short

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The trace duration is too short.
The minimum is twice the value of the trace clock cycle.
Remedy: Check the selected recording time and, if necessary, adjust.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-807

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A02056 Trace: Recording cycle too low

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The selected recording cycle is shorter than the selected basis clock cycle 0 (p0110[0]).
Remedy: Increase the value for the trace cycle.

A02057 Trace: Invalid time slice clock cycle

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The time slice cycle selected does not match any of the existing time slices.
Remedy: Input an existing time slice cycle. The existing time slices can be read out via p7901.

A02060 Trace: Signal to be recorded is missing

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: - a signal to be traced was not specified.
- the specified signals are not valid.
Remedy: - specify the signal to be traced.
- check whether the relevant signal can be traced.

A02061 Trace: Invalid signal

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: - the specified signal does not exist.
- the specified signal can no longer be traced (recorded).
Remedy: - specify the signal to be traced.
- check whether the relevant signal can be traced.

A02062 Trace: Trigger signal invalid

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: - a trigger signal was not specified.
- the specified signal does not exist.
- the specified signal is not a fixed-point signal.
- the specified signal cannot be used as trigger signal for the trace.
Remedy: Specify a valid trigger signal.

A02063 Trace: Invalid data type

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The specified data type to select a signal using a physical address is invalid.
Remedy: Use a valid data type.

A02070 Trace: Parameter cannot be changed

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The trace parameter settings cannot be changed when the trace is active.
Remedy: - stop the trace before parameterization.
- if required, start the trace.

A02075 Trace: Pretrigger time too long

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The selected pretrigger time must be shorter than the recording time.
Remedy: Check the pretrigger time setting and change if necessary.

3-808  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A02099 Trace: Insufficient memory

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The memory space still available on the control unit is no longer sufficient for the trace function.
Remedy: Reduce the memory required, e.g. as follows:
- reduce the trace (record) time.
- increase the trace clock cycle.
- reduce the number of signals to be traced (recorded).

A02100 CU: Computation deadtime current controller too low

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The value in p0118 produces a dead time of one clock cycle because it lies before the setpoint becomes available.
A possible cause could be, for example, that the system characteristics no longer match those parameterized after
a component has been replaced.
Alarm value (r2124, floating point):
The minimum value for p0118 where a deadtime no longer occurs.
Remedy: - set p0118 to a value greater than or equal to the alarm value.
- set p0117 to an automatic setting.
- check the firmware releases of the components involved.
See also: p0117, p0118

F03500 (A) TM: Initialization

Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: When initializing the terminal modules, the terminals of the control unit or the terminal board 30, an internal software
error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
The thousands location = 1 ... 3:
The component number (p0151) of the module involved is specified at the ones, tens and hundreds position.
Remedy: - power-down the power supply for the control unit and power-up again.
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
- if required, replace the terminal module.
The terminal module should be directly connected to a DRIVE-CLiQ socket of the control unit.
If the fault occurs again, replace the terminal module.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-809

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F03505 (N, A) TM: Analog input, wire breakage

Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The input current of the TM analog input has exceeded the threshold value parameterized in p4061[x].
This fault can only occur, if p4056[x] = 3 (4 ... 20 mA with monitoring) is set.
Index x = 0: Analog input 0 (X522.1 to .3)
Index x = 1: Analog input 1 (X522.4 to .5)
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
The component number (p0151) of the module involved is specified at the ones, tens and hundreds position.
The thousands position specifies the analog input involved: 0: Analog input 0 (AI 0), 1: Analog input 1 (AI 1)
Remedy: Check the connection to the signal source for interruptions.
Check the magnitude of the impressed current - it is possible that the impressed signal is too low.
Please note that the input has a load resistor of 250 Ohm.
The input current measured by the TM can be read-out of r4052[x].
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

A03550 TM: Speed setpoint filter natural frequency > Shannon frequency
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The natural filter frequency of the speed setpoint filter (p1417) is greater than the Shannon frequency.
The Shannon frequency is calculated according to the following formula: 0.5 / p0115[0]
See also: p1417
Remedy: Reduce the natural frequency of the speed setpoint filter (PT2 low pass) (p1417).

F03590 (N, A) TM: Module not ready

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2 (NONE)
SERVO: NONE (DCBRAKE, ENCODER, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
VECTOR: OFF2 (DCBRAKE, ENCODER, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The terminal module involved does not send a ready signal and no valid cyclic data.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Drive object number.
Remedy: - check the 24 V power supply.
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

3-810  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A05000 (N) Power module: Overtemperature heatsink

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The alarm threshold for overtemperature at the inverter heatsink has been reached. The response is set using
p0290.
If the temperature of the heatsink increases by an additional 5 K, then fault F30004 is initiated.
Remedy: Check the following:
- is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values?
- have the load conditions and the load duty cycle been appropriately dimensioned?
- has the cooling failed?
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:

A05001 (N) Power module: Overtemperature chip

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Alarm threshold for overtemperature of the power semiconductor in the AC converter has been reached. The
response is set using p0290.
If the chip temperature increases by an additional 15 K, then fault F30025 is initiated.
Remedy: Check the following:
- is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values?
- have the load conditions and the load duty cycle been appropriately dimensioned?
- has the cooling failed?
- pulse frequency too high?
See also: r0037, p0290
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:

A05002 (N) Power module: Overtemp. air intake

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The alarm threshold for the air intake overtemperature has been reached. The response is set using p0290.
If the air intake temperature increases by an additional 5 K, then fault F30035 is output.
Remedy: Check the following:
- is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values?
- has the fan failed? Check the direction of rotation.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:

A05003 (N) Power module: Overtemperature electronics unit

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The alarm threshold for the overtemperature of the electronics module has been reached. The response is set using
p0290.
If the temperature of the electronics module increases by an additional 5 K, then fault F30036 is initiated.
Remedy: Check the following:
- is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values?
- has the fan failed? Check the direction of rotation.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-811

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A05004 (N) Power module: Overtemperature rectifier

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The alarm threshold for the overtemperature of the rectifier has been reached. The response is set using p0290.
If the temperature of the rectifier increases by an additional 5 K, then fault F30037 is initiated.
Remedy: Check the following:
- is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values?
- have the load conditions and the load duty cycle been appropriately dimensioned?
- has the fan failed? Check the direction of rotation.
- has a phase of the line supply failed?
- is an arm of the supply (incoming) rectifier defective?
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:

F05050 Parallel circuit configuration: Pulse enable in spite of pulse inhibit

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
SERVO: OFF2
VECTOR: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A power module signals that the pulses are enabled although the pulses are inhibited.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Number of the power module involved.
Remedy: The power module is defective and must be replaced.

F05051 Parallel circuit configuration: Power module pulse enable missing

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
SERVO: OFF2
VECTOR: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For one or several power modules, the pulses were not able to be enabled.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Number of the power module involved.
Remedy: - acknowledge power module faults that are still present.
- inhibit the pulses of the power module involved (p7001).

A05052 (F) Parallel circuit configuration: Impermissible current dissymmetry

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The deviation of the individual currents of the power modules exceeds the alarm threshold specified in p7010.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
1: Phase U.
2: Phase V.
3. Phase W.
Remedy: - inhibit the pulses of the faulted power module (p7001).
- check the connecting cables. Loose contacts can cause current spikes.
- the motor reactors are non-symmetrical or faulty and must be replaced.
- the CTs must be calibrated or replaced.
Reaction upon F: A_INFEED: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
SERVO: NONE
VECTOR: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY
upon F:

3-812  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A05053 (F) Parallel circuit configuration: Inadmissible DC link voltage dissymmetry

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The deviation of the DC link voltage measured values exceeds the alarm threshold specified in p7011.
Remedy: - inhibit the pulses of the faulted power module (p7001).
- check the DC link connecting cables.
- the DC link voltage measurement is incorrect and must be calibrated or renewed.
Reaction upon F: A_INFEED: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
SERVO: NONE
VECTOR: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY
upon F:

F05055 Parallel circuit configuration: Power modules with different code numbers
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The code numbers of the power modules do not match.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Parameter in which the first different power module code number was detected.
Remedy: For parallel circuit configurations, only power modules with identical power module data may be used.

F05056 Parallel circuit configuration: Power module EPROM versions differ

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The EEPROM versions of the power modules do not match.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Parameter in which the first different version number was detected.
Remedy: For parallel circuit configurations, only power modules with identical EEPROM versions may be used.

F05057 Parallel circuit configuration: Power module versions differ

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The firmware versions of the power modules connected in parallel do not match.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Parameter in which the first different version number was detected.
Remedy: For parallel circuit configurations, only power modules with identical firmware versions may be used.

F05058 Parallel circuit configuration: VSM EPROM versions differ

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The EEPROM versions of the voltage sensing module (VSM) do not match.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Parameter in which the first different version number was detected.
Remedy: For parallel circuit configurations, only VSM with identical EEPROM versions may be used.

F05059 Parallel circuit configuration: VSM FW versions differ

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The firmware versions of the voltage sensing module (VSM) do not match.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Parameter in which the first different version number was detected.
Remedy: For parallel circuit configurations, only VSM with identical firmware versions may be used.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-813

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F06000 Infeed: Precharging monitoring time expired

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
SERVO: NONE
VECTOR: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: After the line contactor closes the power module does not signal the READY state within the monitoring time (p0857).
The end of the DC link pre-charging was not detected due to one of the following reasons:
- there is not line supply voltage.
- the line contactor is not closed.
- the line supply voltage is too low.
- the power module has detected an internal fault.
- there is a DC link short-circuit.
- the DC link has a ground fault.
- the pre-charging resistors are overheated as there were too many pre-charging operations per time unit.
- the pre-charging resistors are overheated as the DC link capacitance is too high (max. 20 mF).
See also: p0857
Remedy: - check the line supply voltage
- check or energize the line contactor.
- check and if required increase the monitoring time p0857.
- if relevant, carefully note additional power module fault messages.
- check the DC link regarding short-circuit or ground fault.
- wait until the pre-charging resistors have cooled down.
- reduce the DC link capacitance by removing the power modules or supplementary modules.

F06010 Infeed: Power module EP 24 V missing in operation

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
SERVO: NONE
VECTOR: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: In operation, withdraw the pulse enable at terminal EP at the line module (X21.3, X21.4).
Remedy: - do not open the line breaker in operation - only when the pulses are inhibited.
- check the wiring of the DP input (X21.3, X21.4) at the line module to exclude any poor contacts.

F06050 Infeed: Smart mode is not supported

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2
SERVO: NONE
VECTOR: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The power module does not support the smart mode.
Remedy: - upgrade the power module software and/or hardware for the smart mode (r0192).
- de-activate the smart mode with p3400 and supply voltage p0210 <= 415 V.
See also: r0192

F06100 Infeed: Shutdown due to line undervoltage condition

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2 (OFF1)
SERVO: NONE
VECTOR: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The filtered (steady-state) value of the line supply voltage is less than the fault threshold (p0283).
Alarm condition: Vrms < p0283 * p0210.
Fault value (r0949, floating point):
Actual steady-state line supply voltage.
See also: p0283
Remedy: - check the line supply.
- check the line supply voltage (p0210).
- check the fault threshold (p0283).

3-814  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A06105 (F) Infeed: Line undervoltage

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The filtered (steady-state) value of line supply voltage is lower than the alarm threshold (p0282).
Alarm condition: Vrms < p0282 * p0210.
Alarm value (r2124, floating point):
Actual steady-state line supply voltage.
See also: p0282
Remedy: - check the line supply.
- check the line supply voltage (p0210).
- check the alarm threshold (p0282).
Reaction upon F: A_INFEED: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
SERVO: NONE
VECTOR: NONE
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY (power on)
upon F:

F06200 Infeed: Failure of one or several line phases

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2 (OFF1)
SERVO: NONE
VECTOR: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: Failure of one or several line phases.
The alarm can be output in two operating states:
1. During the power-on phase of the infeed unit.
The measured line supply angle deviates from the regular characteristic for a 3-phase system - the PLL cannot be
synchronized.
2. While the infeed is operational.
After a voltage has been detected (A6205) in one or several line phases a fault occurred within 100 ms (also refer to
other relevant messages).
Probably causes of the fault:
- voltage dip on the line side or phase phase failure lasting longer than 10 ms.
- overload condition on the load side with peak current.
- commutating reactor missing.
Remedy: - check the line supply and fuses.
- check the connection and size (rating) of the line commutating reactor.
- check the load.
See also: p3463

A06205 (F) Infeed: Voltage dip in one or several phases during operation
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Voltage dip in one or several line supply phases have been detected in the closed-loop voltage controlled mode.
The pulses are then cancelled for 10 ms. The ready signal of the infeed unit in r0863.0 remains and the pulse inhibit
due to the phase failure is displayed in r3405.2.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Internal fault type of the line angle characteristic.
Remedy: - check the line supply and fuses.
- check the line supply quality and system fault level.
- check the load.
See also: p3463
Reaction upon F: A_INFEED: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
SERVO: NONE
VECTOR: NONE
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY (power on)
upon F:

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-815

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F06210 Infeed: Summed current too high

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2 (OFF1)
SERVO: NONE
VECTOR: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: Smoothed sum of the phase currents (i1 + i2 + i3) greater than 4 % of the maximum power module current (r0209).
Possible causes:
- the DC link has a ground fault that results in a high summed current (r0069.6). The DC component in the line cur-
rents can damage/destroy the power module, commutating reactor or line filter!
- the zero point calibration of the current measurement was not carried-out (p3491, A06602).
- defective current measurement in the power module.
Fault value (r0949, floating point):
Smoothed sum of the phase currents.
Remedy: - check the DC link for a low-ohmic or high-ohmic ground fault and if one is present, remove.
- increase the monitoring time of the current-offset measurement (p3491).
- if required, replace the power module.

A06215 (F) Infeed: Summed current high

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Smoothed sum of the phase currents (i1 + i2 + i3) greater than 3 % of the maximum power module current (r0209).
Possible causes:
- the DC link has a ground fault that results in a high summed current (r0069.6). The DC component in the line cur-
rents can damage/destroy the power module, commutating reactor or line filter!
- the zero point calibration of the current measurement was not carried-out (p3491, A06602).
- defective current measurement in the power module.
Alarm value (r2124, floating point):
Smoothed sum of the phase currents.
Remedy: - check the DC link for a low-ohmic or high-ohmic ground fault and if one is present, remove.
- increase the monitoring time of the current-offset measurement (p3491).
- if required, replace the power module.
Reaction upon F: A_INFEED: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
SERVO: NONE
VECTOR: NONE
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY (power on)
upon F:

A06250 (F) Infeed: Defective capacitor(s) in at least one phase of line filter
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A change in the line filter capacitance was detected in at least line phase.
The voltages and phase currents of the line filter, measured using a voltage sensing module (VSM), indicated a devi-
ation of the filter capacitances from the value parameterized in p0221.
A change or a defect of the line filter capacitors results in a shift of the resonant frequencies and can result in severe
damage to the drive system.
Alarm value (r2124, floating point):
The calculated actual capacitance in µF (rounded-off to an integer number).
The 1st decimal point specifies the number of the phase (1, 2, 3) where the capacitance deviates from the specified
value.
Remedy: - check the parameterized value of the filter capacitance (p0221).
- check the correct wiring of the voltage sensing module (VSM):
Differential voltages u12 and u23 must be present at the 100 V/690 V inputs of the VSM; the phase currents of the
line filter must be connected to the 10 V inputs through a current - voltage converter.
- check the alarm limits for the permissible filter capacitance deviation (p3676).
- check the normalization of the line supply voltage measurement using the VSM (p3660).
- check the normalization of the filter current measurement using the VSM (p3670).
- check the line filter capacitors and if required, replace the line filter.
See also: p0221, p3660, p3670, p3676

3-816  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

Reaction upon F: A_INFEED: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)

SERVO: NONE
VECTOR: NONE
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY (power on)
upon F:

F06300 Infeed: Line voltage too high at power on

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
SERVO: NONE
VECTOR: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The RMS line supply voltage Vrms was so high when powering-up that controlled operation is not possible without
exceeding the permissible maximum voltage in the DC link (p0280).
Fault condition: Vrms * 1.5 > p0280.
Fault value (r0949, floating point):
Lowest possible controlled DC link voltage for the line supply voltage presently connected.
See also: p0280
Remedy: - check the line supply voltage
- check the maximum DC link voltage and if required, increase (p0280).
- check the line supply voltage and compare with the actual line supply voltage (p0210).
- check whether the power module is dimensioned for the line supply voltage actually being used.
See also: p0210, p0280

A06301 (F) Infeed: Line overvoltage

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The filtered (steady-state) value of the rms line supply voltage Vrms is higher than the alarm threshold (p0281).
Alarm condition: Vrms < p0281 * p0210.
Alarm value (r2124, floating point):
Actual steady-state line supply voltage.
See also: p0281
Remedy: - check the line supply.
- check the line supply voltage (p0210).
- check the alarm threshold (p0281).
See also: p0210, p0281
Reaction upon F: A_INFEED: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
SERVO: NONE
VECTOR: NONE
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY (power on)
upon F:

A06310 (F) Infeed: Supply voltage (p0210) incorrectly parameterized

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: After pre-charging was completed, the line supply voltage Vrms was calculated using the measured DC link voltage.
This voltage Vrms is not within the tolerance range of the supply voltage.
The following applies for the tolerance range: 85 % * p0210 < Vrms < 110 % * p0210.
Alarm value (r2124, floating point):
Line supply voltage Vrms present.
See also: p0210
Remedy: - check the parameterized supply voltage and if required change (p0210).
- check the line supply voltage.
See also: p0210
Reaction upon F: A_INFEED: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
SERVO: NONE
VECTOR: NONE
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY (power on)
upon F:

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-817

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A06350 (F) Infeed: Measured line frequency too high

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The actual line frequency f_line is higher than the parameterized alarm threshold (f_line > p0211 * p0284).
The alarm can be output in two operating states:
1. During the power-on phase of the infeed unit.
Consequence:
Synchronization of the infeed to the line supply is interrupted and is restarted.
2. While the infeed is operational.
Consequence:
The infeed remains in the operating (run) state and alarm A6350 is output. This signifies a critical operational fault.
Alarm value (r2124, floating point):
Actual line frequency determined.
See also: p0284
Remedy: - check the parameterized line frequency and if required change (p0211).
- check the alarm threshold (p0284).
- check the line supply.
- check the line supply quality.
See also: p0211, p0284
Reaction upon F: A_INFEED: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
SERVO: NONE
VECTOR: NONE
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY (power on)
upon F:

A06351 (F) Infeed: Measured line supply frequency too low

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The actual line frequency f_line is lower than the parameterized alarm threshold (f_line < p0211 * p0285).
The alarm can be output in two operating states:
1. During the power-on phase of the infeed unit.
Consequence:
Synchronization of the infeed to the line supply is interrupted and is restarted.
2. While the infeed is operational.
Consequence:
The infeed remains in the operating (run) state and alarm A6351 is output. This signifies a critical operational fault.
Alarm value (r2124, floating point):
Actual line frequency determined.
See also: p0285
Remedy: - check the parameterized line frequency and if required change (p0211).
- check the alarm threshold (p0285).
- check the line supply.
- check the line supply quality.
See also: p0211, p0285
Reaction upon F: A_INFEED: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
SERVO: NONE
VECTOR: NONE
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY (power on)
upon F:

A06400 Infeed: Line supply data identification selected/active

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Line supply data identification selected/active.
The line inductance and the DC link capacitance are measured at the next pulse enable.
See also: p3410
Remedy: No remedial action required.

3-818  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F06500 Infeed: Line supply synchronization not possible within the monitoring time
Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2 (OFF1)
SERVO: NONE
VECTOR: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: Line supply synchronization is not possible.
The infeed was re-synchronized to the line supply because it was interrupted due to a line frequency that was deter-
mined to be either too low or too high.
After 20 attempts, synchronization - and therefore also the power-on operation - were interrupted.
Remedy: - check the parameterized line frequency and if required change (p0211).
- check the fault thresholds (p0284, p0285).
- check the line supply.
- check the line supply quality.
See also: p0211, p0284, p0285

A06601 (F) Infeed: Current offset measurement interrupted

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Defective current measurement or a DC current is present during the offset measurement.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
1: Excessively high phase current has occurred during the current-offset calibration.
2: The measured current - offset is greater than the 3% of the maximum permissible converter current (e.g. due to a
ground fault in the DC link).
Remedy: For alarm value = 1:
- possible counter-measure if there is no line contactor: Switch-in the line supply for a sufficiently long time before
OFF1 = 1.
For alarm value = 2:
- defective current measurement or a DC current is present during the offset measurement.
- check the DC link for a ground fault.
Reaction upon F: A_INFEED: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
SERVO: NONE
VECTOR: NONE
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY (power on)
upon F:

A06602 (F) Infeed: Current offset measurement not possible and offset set to zero
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: After an OFF1 = 1 no valid current offset measurement was able to be made within the monitoring time (p3491)
before closing the line contactor.
The phase current measurement calibration is interrupted. The current offset is set to 0.
See also: p3491
Remedy: - check the DC link for a ground fault. A ground fault can destroy parts and components!
- Check the monitoring time setting and if required increase (p3491). At least 100 ms are required for the current
calibration (p3491 > 100 ms).
Notice:
If the current measurement is not calibrated, then under certain circumstances, the quality of the DC link control will
be reduced.
See also: p3491
Reaction upon F: A_INFEED: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
SERVO: NONE
VECTOR: NONE
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY (power on)
upon F:

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-819

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A06800 (F) Infeed: Maximum steady-state DC link voltage reached

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The DC link voltage setpoint has reached the maximum steady-state voltage parameterized in p0280.
The DC link voltage is increased by the modulation depth reserve controller for the following reasons:
- modulation depth reserve is too low (p3480).
- line supply voltage is too high.
- supply voltage (p0210) parameterized to be too low.
- excessively high setpoint for the reactive line current.
Remedy: - check the line supply voltage setting (p0210).
- check the line supply for an overvoltage condition.
- reduce the modulation depth reserve (p3480).
- reduce the reactive current setpoint.
See also: p0210, p0280, p3480
Reaction upon F: A_INFEED: NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
SERVO: NONE
VECTOR: NONE
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY (power on)
upon F:

F07011 Drive: Motor overtemperature

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2
SERVO: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
VECTOR: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: KTY:
The motor temperature has exceeded the fault threshold (p0605) or the timer stage (p0606) after the alarm threshold
was exceeded (p0604) has expired.
VECTOR: The response parameterized in p0610 becomes active.
PTC:
The response threshold of 1650 Ohm was exceeded and the timer stage (p0606) has expired.
VECTOR: The response parameterized in p0610 becomes active.
Possible causes:
- motor is overloaded.
- motor ambient temperature too high.
See also: p0604, p0605, p0606, p0610
Remedy: - reduce the motor load.
- check the ambient temperature.
See also: p0604, p0605, p0606

A07015 Drive: Motor temperature sensor fault, alarm

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An error was detected when evaluating the temperature sensor set in p0600 and p0601.
With the fault, the time in p0607 is started. If the fault is still present after this time has expired, then fault F07016 is
output; however, at the earliest, 1 s after alarm A07015.
Possible causes:
- wire breakage or sensor not connected (KTY: R > 1630 Ohm).
- measured resistance too low (PTC: R < 30 Ohm, KTY: R < 340 Ohm).
Note:
For induction motors, the model value is selected for the temperature monitoring.
For synchronous motors, the temperature monitoring is disabled and the ambient temperature is displayed in r0035.
Remedy: - check that the sensor is connected correctly.
- check the parameterization (p0600, p0601).
See also: p0600, p0601, p0607

3-820  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F07016 Drive: Motor temperature sensor fault, fault

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2
SERVO: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
VECTOR: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An error was detected when evaluating the temperature sensor set in p0600 and p0601.
Possible causes:
- wire breakage or sensor not connected (KTY: R > 1630 Ohm).
- measured resistance too low (PTC: R < 30 Ohm, KTY: R < 340 Ohm).
Note:
For induction motors, the model value is selected for the temperature monitoring.
For synchronous motors, the temperature monitoring is disabled and the ambient temperature is displayed in r0035.
If alarm A07015 is present, the time in p0607 is started. If the fault is still present after this time has expired, then
fault F07016 is output; however, at the earliest, 1 s after alarm A07015.
See also: p0607
Remedy: - check that the sensor is connected correctly.
- check the parameterization (p0600, p0601).
- induction motors: Deactivate temperature sensor fault (p0607 = 0).
See also: p0600, p0601, p0607

N07044 Drive: Rotor position identification completed

Reaction: A_INFEED: NONE
SERVO: NONE
VECTOR: OFF2
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The message is used to signal the sequential control that the rotor position identification routine has been completed.
Remedy: The message is used to signal the sequential control that the rotor position identification routine has been completed.

F07080 Drive: Open-loop/closed-loop control parameterization error

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: Closed-loop control parameters have been parameterized incorrectly (e.g. p0350 = R_stator = 0).
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
The fault value includes the parameter number involved.
See also: p0300, p0311, p0341, p0344, p0350, p0354, p0356, p0358, p0360, p0400, p0640, p1082, p1300
Remedy: Modify the parameter indicated in the fault value (r0949) (e.g. p0640 = current limit > 0).
See also: p0311, p0341, p0344, p0350, p0354, p0356, p0358, p0360, p0400, p0640, p1082

F07082 Macro: Execution not possible

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The macro cannot be executed for the following reasons:
Fault for the trigger parameter itself:
- trigger parameter (e.g. p0015) does not match that in the specified file.
- data type of the TAG index, number of bit is not U16 or the data type of the TAG Dotype is not I16.
Faults for the parameters to be set:
- commissioning was carried-out (p0009 = 0) and a wait condition, required after commissioning, was not defined in
the ACX file.
- parameter cannot be written into because it is either read-only or does not exist.
- parameter cannot be written into as the data is either incomplete or corrupt/incorrect (e.g. incorrect data type,
value range or assignment incorrect).
- factory setting is not possible for this drive object (e.g. the drive object does not exist).
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
The parameter number involved, if this is available.
Remedy: - check the parameter involved.
- check the macro file and connections.
See also: p0015, p0700, p1000, p1500

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-821

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F07083 Macro: ACX file not found

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The ACX file (PM file) to be executed was not able to be found in the appropriate directory.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Parameter number with which the execution was started.
See also: p0015
Remedy: - check whether the file is saved in the appropriate directory on the CompactFlash Card.
Example:
If p0015 = 1501 is set to 1501, then the selected ACX file must be located in the following directory:
... /PMACRO/DEVICE/P15/PM001501.ACX

F07085 Drive: Open-loop/closed-loop control parameters changed

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: Parameters of the open-loop/closed-loop control had to be changed as they exceeded dynamic limits as a result of
other parameters.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
The fault value includes the modified parameter number.
See also: p0640, p1082, p1300, p1800
Remedy: It is not necessary to change the parameters as they have already been correctly limited.

F07090 Drive: Upper torque limit less than the lower torque limit
Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The upper torque limit is lower than the lower torque limit.
Remedy: P1 must be >= P2 if parameter P1 is connected to p1522 and parameter P2 to p1523.

F07100 Drive: Sampling times cannot be reset

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: When resetting drive parameter (p0976) sampling times cannot be reset using p0111, p0112, p0115.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Parameter whose setting prevents the sampling times being reset.
See also: p0110
Remedy: - continue to work with the set sampling times.
- before resetting the drive parameters, set the basic clock cycle p0110[0] to the original value.
See also: p0110

F07110 Drive: Sampling times do not match the basic clock cycle
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The parameterized sampling times do not match the basic clock cycle.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
The fault value specifies the parameter involved.
See also: p0110, p0111, p0115
Remedy: Enter the current controller sampling times so that they are identical to the basic clock cycle, e.g. by selecting p0112.
Note which basic clock cycle is selected in p0111.
The sampling times in p0115 can only be changed manually in the sampling times preset "Expert" (p0112).
See also: p0110, p0111, p0112, p0115

3-822  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A07200 Drive: Master control ON/OFF1 command present

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The ON/OFF1 command is not 0, either via binector input p0840 (current CDS) or in control word p3982 bit 0.
Remedy: The signal at binector input p0840 (actual CDS) as well as p3982 bit 0 must be 0.

F07210 Master control PC/AOP inhibited

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The transfer of master control is disabled via binector input p3985.
Remedy: Change the signal via binector input p3985.

F07220 (N, A) Drive: Master control by PLC withdrawn in operation

Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The "control by PLC" signal was withdrawn in operation.
- interconnection of the binector input for "control by PLC" is incorrect (p0854).
- the higher-level control has withdrawn the "control by PLC" signal in operation.
- data transfer via the fieldbus (master - drive) was interrupted in operation.
Remedy: - check the interconnection of the binector input for "control by PLC" (p0854).
- check the "control by PLC" signal and, if required, switch-in.
- check the data transfer via the fieldbus (master - drive).
Note:
If the drive should continue to operate after withdrawing "control by PLC" then fault response must be parameterized
to NONE.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

F07300 (A) Drive: Line contactor feedback signal missing

Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: - the line contactor was not able to be closed within the time in p0861.
- the line contactor was not able to be opened within the time in p0861.
- the line contactor has dropped-out in operation.
- the line contactor has closed although the drive converter is powered-down.
Remedy: - check the setting of p0860.
- check the feedback circuit from the line contactor.
- increase the monitoring time in p0861.
See also: p0860, p0861
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-823

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F07320 Drive: Automatic restart aborted

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: - The specified number of restart attempts (p1211) has been completely used up because within the monitoring time
p1213 the alarms were not able to be acknowledged. The number of restart attempts (p1211) is decremented at each
new start attempt.
- there is no active ON command.
- the monitoring time for the power module (p0857) has expired.
- when exiting commissioning or at the end of the motor identification routine or the speed controller optimization, the
drive unit is not automatically powered-up again.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - increase the number of restart attempts (p1211). The actual number of starting attempts is displayed in r1214.
- increase the delay time in p1212 and/or the monitoring time in p1213.
- issue an ON command (p0840).
- either increase or disable the monitoring time of the power module in p0857.

A07321 Drive: Automatic restart active

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The automatic restart is active. When the line supply returns and/or the fault causes are removed, the drive is auto-
matically restarted. The pulses are enabled and the motor starts to rotate.
Remedy: - the automatic restart function can be disabled using p1210 = 0.
- the automatic restart operation can also be directly interrupted by withdrawing the power-on command (refer to
p0840).

F07330 FlyRestart: Measured search current too low

Reaction: A_INFEED: NONE
SERVO: NONE
VECTOR: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: During a flying restart, it was identified that the search current reached is too low.
It is possible that the motor is not connected.
Remedy: Check the motor feeder cables.

A07350 (F) Drive: Measuring probe parameterized to a digital output

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The measuring probe is connected to a bi-directional digital input/output and the terminal is set as output.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
9: DI/DO 9 (X122.8)
10: DI/DO 10 (X122.10)
11: DI/DO 11 (X122.11)
13: DI/DO 13 (X132.8)
14: DI/DO 14 (X132.10)
15: DI/DO 15 (X132.11)
Remedy: - set the terminal as input (p0728).
- de-select the measuring probe (p0488, p0489, p0580).
Reaction upon F: OFF1
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY
upon F:

3-824  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A07400 (N) Drive: DC link voltage maximum controller active

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The DC link voltage controller has been activated because the upper switch-in threshold has been exceeded (r1242).
The ramp-down times are automatically increased in order to maintain the DC link voltage (r0026) within the permis-
sible limits. There is a system deviation between the setpoint and actual speeds.
When the DC link voltage controller is switched-out (disabled), this is the reason that the ramp-function generator
output is set to the speed actual value.
See also: p1240
Remedy: If the controller is not to intervene:
- increase the ramp-down times.
If the ramp-down times are not to be changed:
- use a chopper or regenerative feedback unit
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:

A07401 (N) Drive: DC link voltage maximum controller deactivated

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The Vdc_max controller can no longer maintain the DC link voltage (r0026) below the limit value (r1242) and was
therefore switched-out (disabled).
- the line supply voltage is permanently higher than specified for the power module.
- the motor is permanently in the regenerative mode as a result of a load that is driving the motor.
Remedy: - check whether the input voltage is within the permissible range.
- check whether the load duty cycle and load limits are within the permissible limits.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:

A07402 (N) Drive: DC link voltage minimum controller active

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The DC link voltage controller has been activated as the lower switch-in threshold has been fallen below (r1246).
The kinetic energy of the motor is used in order to buffer the DC link. This brakes the drive.
See also: p1240
Remedy: The alarm disappears when power supply returns.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:

F07403 Drive: Lower DC link voltage threshold reached

Reaction: A_INFEED: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
SERVO: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
VECTOR: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The DC link voltage monitoring is active (p1240 = 8, 12) and the voltage is below the lower DC link voltage threshold
(p1248).
Remedy: - check the line supply voltage and the infeed module.
- reduce the lower DC link threshold (p1248).
- switch-out (disable) the DC link monitoring (p1240 = 0).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-825

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F07404 Drive: Upper DC link voltage threshold reached

Reaction: A_INFEED: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
SERVO: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
VECTOR: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The DC link voltage monitoring is active (p1240 = 4, 12) and the upper DC link voltage threshold (p1244) was not
reached.
Remedy: - check the infeed module or the pulsed resistor module.
- check the line supply.
- increase the upper DC link voltage threshold (p1244).
- switch-out (disable) the DC link monitoring (p1240 = 0).

F07405 (N, A) Drive: Kinetic buffering minimum speed not reached

Reaction: OFF2 (DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: During kinetic buffering the speed fell below minimum speed (p1257) and the line supply did not return.
Remedy: Check the speed threshold for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering) (p1257).
See also: p1257
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

F07406 (N, A) Drive: Kinetic buffering maximum time exceeded

Reaction: OFF3 (DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The maximum buffer time (p1255) has been exceeded but the line supply has not returned.
Remedy: Check the time threshold for Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering) (p1255).
See also: p1255
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

A07409 Drive: V/f control, current limiting controller active

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The current limiting controller of the V/f control was activated because the current limit was exceeded.
Remedy: The alarm is automatically withdrawn when increasing the current limit (p0640), reducing the load or using a slower
up ramp for the setpoint (reference) speed.

F07410 Drive: Current controller output limited

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2 (NONE)
SERVO: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
VECTOR: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: - motor not connected or motor contactor open.
- no DC link voltage present.
- motor module defective.
Remedy: - connect the motor or check the motor contactor.
- check the DC link voltage (r0070).
- check the motor module.

3-826  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F07411 Drive: Flux controller output limited

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2
SERVO: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
VECTOR: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The specified flux setpoint cannot be reached although 90% of the maximum current has been specified.
- incorrect motor data.
- motor data and motor configuration (star/delta) do not match.
- the current limit has been set too low for the motor.
- the motor module is too small.
Remedy: - correct the motor data.
- check the motor configuration.
- correct the current limits (p0640, p0323).
- if required, use a larger motor module.

F07412 Drive: Commutation angle incorrect (motor model)

Reaction: ENCODER (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An incorrect commutation angle was detected, that can result in a positive coupling in the speed controller. The com-
parison of the rotor position angle from the encoder and the motor model resulted in an excessively high value (> 80
° electrical).
- the motor encoder is incorrectly adjusted with respect to the magnet position.
- the motor encoder is damaged.
- the angular commutation offset is incorrectly set (p0431).
- data to calculate the motor model has been incorrectly set (p0356 (motor-stator leakage inductance) and/or p0350
(motor-stator resistance) and/or p0352 (cable resistance).
- the changeover speed for the motor model is too low (p1752). The monitoring function only becomes effective
above the changeover speed.
Remedy: - if the encoder mounting was changed - re-adjust the encoder.
- replace the defective motor encoder.
- correctly set the angular commutation offset (p0431).
- correctly set the motor stator leakage inductance, motor-stator resistance and cable resistance (p0356, p0350,
p0352).
- increase the changeover speed for the motor model (p1752).

F07413 Drive: Commutation angle incorrect (rotor position ID)

Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An incorrect commutation angle was detected, that can result in a positive coupling in the speed controller. The com-
parison of the rotor position angle from the encoder and from the rotor position identification routine has resulted in
an excessively high difference (> 45 ° electrical).
- the angular commutation offset is incorrectly set (p0431).
- the motor encoder is incorrectly adjusted with respect to the magnet position.
- the motor encoder is damaged.
- the rotor position identification routine does not function correctly.
Remedy: - correctly set the angular commutation offset (p0431).
- re-adjust the motor encoder after the encoder has been replaced.
- replace the defective motor encoder.
- check the rotor position identification routine. If the rotor position identification routine is not suitable for this motor
type, then disable the plausibility check (p1982 = 0).

F07414 Drive: Encoder serial number changed

Reaction: ENCODER (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The serial number of the motor encoder of a synchronous motor has changed. This means that it may be necessary
to re-calibrate/re-adjust the commutation angle.
- an encoder was replaced.
- re-commission a build-in motor or third-party motor.
- the firmware was updated to a version that checks the encoder serial number.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-827

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

Remedy: Calibrating/adjusting the commutation data in p0431. The calibration/re-adjustment can be automatically initiated
using a rotor position identification routine with p1990 = 1.
If calibration/adjustment is not required, then the serial number can be directly transferred using p0440 = 1.

N07415 (F) Drive: Commutation angle offset transfer running

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The angular commutation offset was automatically determined using p1990 = 1.
This fault causes the pulses to be cancelled - this is necessary to transfer the angular commutation offset to p0431.
See also: p1990
Remedy: The fault can be acknowledged without any additional measures.
Reaction upon F: OFF2
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY
upon F:

F07420 Drive: Current setpoint filter natural frequency > Shannon frequency
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: One of the filter natural frequencies is greater than the Shannon frequency.
The Shannon frequency is calculated according to the following formula: 0.5 / p0115[0]
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Bit 0: Filter 1 (p1658, p1660)
Bit 1: Filter 2 (p1663, p1665)
Bit 2: Filter 3 (p1668, p1670)
Bit 3: Filter 4 (p1673, p1675)
Remedy: - reduce the numerator or denominator natural frequency of the current setpoint filter involved.
- reduce the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]).
- switch-out the filter involved (p1656).

F07421 Drive: Speed setpoint filter natural frequency > Shannon frequency
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: One of the filter natural frequencies is greater than the Shannon frequency.
The Shannon frequency is calculated according to the following formula: 0.5 / p0115[1]
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Bit 0: Filter 1 (p1417, p1419)
Bit 1: Filter 2 (p1423, p1425)
Bit 8 ... 15: Data set number (starting from zero).
Remedy: - reduce the numerator or denominator natural frequency of the speed setpoint filter involved.
- reduce the speed controller sampling time (p0115[1]).
- switch-out the filter involved (p1414).

F07422 Drive: Speed controller reference model natural frequency > Shannon frequency
Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The natural filter frequency of the PT2 element for the reference model (p1433) is greater than the Shannon fre-
quency.
The Shannon frequency is calculated according to the following formula: 0.5 / p0115[0]
Remedy: - reduce the natural frequency of PT2 element for reference model (p1433).
- reduce the speed controller sampling time (p0115[1]).

F07430 Drive: Changeover to open-loop torque controlled operation not possible

Reaction: A_INFEED: NONE
SERVO: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
VECTOR: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For sensorless operation, the converter cannot change over to closed-loop torque-controlled operation (BI: p1501).
Remedy: Do not attempt to cover over to closed-loop torque-controlled operation.

3-828  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F07431 Drive: Changeover to sensorless operation not possible

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2 (OFF1, OFF3)
SERVO: OFF2 (OFF1)
VECTOR: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For closed-loop torque control, the converter cannot change over to sensorless operation (p1404).
Remedy: Do not attempt to change over to sensorless operation.

F07432 Drive: Synchronous motor without overvoltage protection

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2 (OFF1, OFF3)
SERVO: OFF2 (OFF1)
VECTOR: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Under voltage conditions, a synchronous motor can generate an overvoltage condition that can destroy the drive sys-
tem.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Associated drive data set (DDS).
Remedy: Overvoltage protection can be implemented in the following ways:
- limit the maximum speed (p1082) without any additional protection.
The maximum speed without protection is calculated from p1082 = 9590/p0316.
- use a voltage protection module (VPM) in conjunction with the function "safe standstill" (p9601, p9801).
When a fault condition exists, the VPM short-circuits the motors. During the short-circuit, the pulses must be can-
celled - this means that the terminals for the safe standstill must be connected to the VPM.
When using a VPM, p0643 must be set to 1.
See also: p0643

F07500 Drive: Power module data set PDS not configured

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Only for controlled line supply infeed/regenerative feedback units:
The power module data set was not configured - this means that a data set number was not entered into the drive
data set.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Drive data set number of p0185.
Remedy: The index of the power module data set associated with the drive data set should be entered into p0185.

F07501 Drive: Motor data set MDS not configured

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Only for power modules:
The motor data set was not configured - this means that a data set number was not entered into the associated drive
data set.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
The fault value includes the drive data set number of p0186.
Remedy: The index of the motor data set associated with the drive data set should be entered into p0186.

F07502 Drive: Encoder data set EDS not configured

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Only for power modules:
The encoder data set was not configured - this means that a data set number was not entered into the associated
drive data set.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
The fault value includes the drive data set number of p0187, p0188 and p0189.
The fault value is increased by 100 * encoder number (e.g. for p0189: Fault value 3xx with xx = data set number).
Remedy: The index of the encoder data set associated with the drive data set should be entered into p0187 (1st encoder),
p0188 (2nd encoder) and p0189 (3rd encoder).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-829

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F07510 Drive: Identical encoder in same drive data set (DDS)

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: More than one encoder with identical component number is assigned to a single drive data set. In one drive data set,
it is not permissible that identical encoders are operated together.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Drive data set + 100*first identical encoder + 1000*second identical encoder.
See also: p0141, p0187, p0188, p0189
Remedy: Different encoders are always assigned to one drive data set.
See also: p0141, p0187, p0188, p0189

F07511 Drive: Enc. used multiple

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Each encoder may only be assigned to one drive and within a drive must - in each drive data set - either always be
encoder 1, always encoder 2 or always encoder 3. This unique assignment has been violated.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Codes the two parameters that refer to the same component number.
First parameter:
Index: First and second decimal position
Parameter number: Third decimal position (1 for p0187, 2 for p0188, 3 for p0189)
Drive number: Fourth and fifth decimal position
Second parameter:
Index: Sixth and seventh decimal position
Parameter number: Eighth decimal position (1 for p0187, 2 for p0188, 3 for p0189)
Drive number: Ninth and tenth decimal position
See also: p0141
Remedy: Correct the double use of a component number using the two parameters coded in the fault value.

A07512 Drive: Encoder data set changeover not permissible

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A changeover of the encoder data set is prepared using p0187, p0188 or p0189. For this firmware release, an
encoder data set changeover is not supported. Commissioning can only be exited with the correct parameterization.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Parameter number with incorrect indices (p0187, p0188 or p0189).
See also: p0187, p0188, p0189
Remedy: The selectors to the encoder data sets (p0187, p0188, p0189) must, for all data sets, point to the same encoder data
set.
The following must apply:
p0187[0] = p0187[1] = ... = p0187[n]
p0188[0] = p0188[1] = ... = p0188[n]
p0189[0] = p0189[1] = ... = p0189[n]

A07530 Drive: Drive data set not available

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The selected drive data set is not available (p0837 > p0180). The drive data set was not changed-over.
See also: p0180, p0820, p0821, p0822, p0823, p0824, r0837
Remedy: - select the existing drive data set.
- set-up additional drive data sets.

3-830  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A07550 (F, N) Drive: Not possible to reset encoder parameters

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When carrying-out a factory setting (e.g. using p0970 = 1), it was not possible to reset the encoder parameters. The
encoder parameters are directly read out of the encoder via DRIVE-CLiQ.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Component number of the encoder involved.
Remedy: - repeat the operation.
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
Reaction upon F: NONE (DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY (power on)
upon F:
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:

F07551 Drive encoder: No commutation angle information

Reaction: OFF2 (DCBRAKE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The motor encoder used does not supply an absolute commutation angle. This means that synchronous motors can-
not be controlled (closed-loop control)
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
The fault value includes the drive data set number involved.
Remedy: - check the encoder parameterization (p0404).
- use an encoder with track C/D, EnDat interface of Hall sensors.
- use an encoder with sinusoidal A/B track for which the motor pole pair number p0313 is an integer multiple of the
encoder pulse number p0408.
- activate the rotor position identification routine (p1982 = 1).

F07552 (A) Drive encoder: Encoder configuration not supported

Reaction: OFF2 (DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The requested encoder configuration is not supported. Only bits may be requested in p0404 that are signaled as
being supported by the encoder evaluation in r0456.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Encoder data set number.
See also: p0404, r0456
Remedy: - check the encoder parameterization (p0400, p0404).
- use the matching encoder evaluation (r0456).
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

F07553 (A) Drive encoder: Sensor module configuration not supported

Reaction: OFF2 (DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The requested sensor module configuration is not supported. In p0430, bits may only be requested that are signaled
by the sensor module in r0458 as being supported.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Encoder data set number.
Remedy: - check the encoder parameterization (p0430).
- use the matching encoder evaluation (r0458).
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-831

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F07560 Drive encoder: Number of pulses is not to the power of two

Reaction: OFF2 (DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: For rotary absolute value encoders, the pulse number in p0408 must be to the power of two.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
The fault value includes the encoder data set number involved.
Remedy: Check parameterization (p0408, p0404 Bit 0 and Bit 1).
Upgrade the sensor module firmware.

F07561 Drive encoder: Number of multiturn pulses is not to the power of two
Reaction: OFF2 (DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The multi-turn resolution in p0421 must be to the power of two.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
The fault value includes the encoder data set number involved.
Remedy: Check parameterization (p0421, p0404 Bit 0 and Bit 1).
Upgrade the sensor module firmware.

A07565 (F, N) Drive: Encoder fault/error in PROFIdrive encoder interface 1

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An encoder error was signaled for encoder 1 via the PROFIdrive encoder interface (G1_ZSW.15).
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Error code from G1_XIST2, refer to the description regarding r0483.
Remedy: Acknowledge the encoder error using the encoder control word (G1_STW.15 = 1).
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY
upon F:
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:

A07566 (F, N) Drive: Encoder fault/error in PROFIdrive encoder interface 2

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An encoder error was signaled for encoder 2 via the PROFIdrive encoder interface (G2_ZSW.15).
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Error code from G2_XIST2, refer to the description regarding r0483.
Remedy: Acknowledge the encoder error using the encoder control word (G2_STW.15 = 1).
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY
upon F:
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:

3-832  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A07567 (F, N) Drive: Encoder fault/error in PROFIdrive encoder interface 3

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An encoder error was signaled for encoder 3 via the PROFIdrive encoder interface (G3_ZSW.15).
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Error code from G3_XIST2, refer to the description regarding r0483.
Remedy: Acknowledge the encoder error using the encoder control word (G3_STW.15 = 1).
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY
upon F:
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:

F07570 Drive encoder: Existing speed encoder not parameterized

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: In spite of the fact that a speed encoder exists (refer to topology r0098) this was not parameterized.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Encoder data set index of the incorrect parameterization of p0400.
See also: p0141, p0187, p0188, p0189, p0400
Remedy: Select the speed encoder in p0400.
See also: p0400

F07575 Drive: Motor encoder not ready

Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The motor encoder signals that it is not ready.
- initialization of encoder 1 (motor encoder) was unsuccessful.
- the sensor module is defective.
Remedy: Evaluate other queued faults via encoder 1.

A07580 (F, N) Drive: No sensor module with the matching component number
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A sensor module with the component number specified in p0141 was not found.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Encoder data set involved (index of p0141).
Remedy: Correct p0141.
Reaction upon F: OFF1 (DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY (power on)
upon F:
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:

F07800 Drive: No power module present

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power module parameters cannot be read or no parameters are stored in the power module.
See also: r0200
Remedy: Connect the data line to power module and restart the control unit (POWER ON).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-833

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F07801 Drive: Motor overcurrent

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2
SERVO: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
VECTOR: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The permissible motor limit current was exceeded.
- effective current limit set too low.
- current controller not correctly set.
- motor was braked with an excessively high stall torque correction factor.
- V/f operation: Up ramp was set too short or the load is too high.
- V/f operation: Short-circuit in the motor cable or ground fault.
- V/f operation: Motor current does not match the current of motor module.
Note:
Synchronous motor: Limit current= 1.3 * p0323
Induction motor: Limit current= 1.3 * r0209
Remedy: - check the current limits (p0323, p0640).
- check the current controller (p1715, p1717).
- reduce the stall torque correction factor (p0326).
- increase the up ramp (p1318) or reduce the load.
- check the motor and motor cables for short-circuit and ground fault.
- check the motor module and motor combination.

F07802 Drive: Infeed or power module not ready

Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: After an internal power-on command, the infeed or drive does not signal ready.
- monitoring time is too short.
- DC link voltage is not present.
- associated infeed or drive of the signaling component is defective.
- supply voltage incorrectly set.
Remedy: - increase the monitoring time (p0857).
- ensure that there is a DC link voltage. Check the DC-link busbar. Enable the infeed.
- replace the associated infeed or drive of the signaling component.
- check the line supply voltage setting (p0210).
See also: p0857

A07805 (N) Drive: Power module I2T overload

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Alarm threshold for I2t overload (p0294) of the power module exceeded.
The response parameterized in p0290 becomes active.
See also: p0290
Remedy: - reduce the continuous load.
- adapt the load duty cycle.
- check the assignment of the rated currents of the motor and motor module.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:

F07810 Drive: Power module EEPROM without rated data

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: No rated data are stored in the power module EEPROM.
See also: p0205, r0206, r0207, r0208, r0209
Remedy: Replace the power module or inform Siemens Customer Service.

3-834  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F07815 Drive: Power module has been changed

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The code number of the actual power module does not match the saved number.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Number of the incorrect parameter.
See also: r0200, p0201
Remedy: Connect the original power module and power-up the control unit again (POWER ON) or set p0201 to r0200 and exit
commissioning with p0010 = 0.
If the new power module is accepted, then if required, the current limit p0640 can be reduced by a lower maximum
current of the power module (r0209) (torque limits stay the same).
If not only the power module is changed, but also the motor, then the motor must be re-commissioning (e.g. using
p0010 = 1).
See also: r0200

A07820 Drive: Temperature sensor not connected

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The temperature sensor for motor temperature monitoring, specified in p0600, is not available.
- parameter download with "incorrect" setting.
- module with sensor evaluation has been, in the meantime, been removed.
Remedy: - connect the module with temperature sensor.
- set the available temperature sensor (p0600, p0601).
See also: p0600, p0601

F07840 Drive: Infeed operation missing

Reaction: OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The signal "infeed operation" is not present although the enable signals for the drive have been present for longer
than the parameterized monitoring time (p0857).
- infeed not operational.
- interconnection of the binector input for the ready signal is either incorrect or missing (p0864).
Remedy: - bring the infeed into an operational state.
- check the interconnection of the binector input for the signal "infeed operation" (p0864).
- increase the monitoring time (p0857).
See also: p0857, p0864

F07841 Drive: Infeed operation withdrawn

Reaction: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The signal "infeed operation" was withdrawn in operation.
- interconnection of the binector input for the signal "infeed operation" is either incorrect or missing (p0864).
- the enable signals of the infeed were disabled.
- due to a fault, the infeed withdraws the signal "infeed operation".
Remedy: - check the interconnection of the binector input for the signal "infeed operation" (p0864).
- check the enable signals of the infeed and if required, enable.
- remove and acknowledge an infeed fault.
Note:
If this drive is intended to back-up the DC link regeneratively, then the fault response must be parameterized for
NONE so that the drive can continue to operate even after the infeed fails.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-835

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A07850 (F) External alarm 1

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: BICO signal "external alarm" triggered. The condition for this external alarm is fulfilled.
See also: p2112
Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this alarm.
Reaction upon F: NONE (DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY (power on)
upon F:

A07851 (F) External alarm 2

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: BICO signal "external alarm" triggered. The condition for this external alarm is fulfilled.
See also: p2116
Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this alarm.
Reaction upon F: NONE (DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY (power on)
upon F:

A07852 (F) External alarm 3

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: BICO signal "external alarm" triggered. The condition for this external alarm is fulfilled.
See also: p2117
Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this alarm.
Reaction upon F: NONE (DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY (power on)
upon F:

F07860 (A) External fault 1

Reaction: OFF2 (DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: BICO signal "external alarm" triggered.
See also: p2106
Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this fault.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

F07861 (A) External fault 2

Reaction: OFF2 (DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: BICO signal "external alarm" triggered.
See also: p2107
Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this fault.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

3-836  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F07862 (A) External fault 3

Reaction: OFF2 (DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: BICO signal "external alarm" triggered.
See also: p2108
Remedy: Eliminate the causes of this fault.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

F07900 (N, A) Drive: Motor locked

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2
SERVO: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
VECTOR: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Motor has been operating at the torque limit longer than the time specified in p2177 and below the speed threshold
set in p2175.
Remedy: - check that the motor can freely rotate.
- check the torque limit: For a positive direction of rotation r1538, for a negative direction of rotation r1539.
- check the parameter, message "Motor locked" and if required, correct (p2175, p2177).
- check the inversion of the actual value (p0410).
- check the motor encoder connection.
- check the encoder pulse number (p0408).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

F07901 Drive: Motor overspeed

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2 (NONE)
SERVO: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
VECTOR: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The maximum permissible speed was either positively or negatively exceeded.
The maximum permissible positive speed is formed as follows: Minimum(p1082, CI: p1085) + p2162. The maximum
permissible negative speed is formed as follows: Maximum(-p1082, CI: 1088) - p2162.
Remedy: For a positive direction of rotation:
- check r1084 and if required, correct p1082, CI: p1085 and p2162.
For a negative direction of rotation:
- check r1087 and if required, correct p1082, CI: p1088 and p2162.

F07902 (N, A) Drive: Motor stalled

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2
SERVO: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
VECTOR: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Only for vector drives (refer to p0107):
It was detected that the motor was stalled for a time longer than that entered into p2178.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
1: Stall detection using r1408.11 (refer to p1744)
2: Stall detection using r1408.12 (refer to p1745)
See also: p1744, p2178

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-837

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

Remedy: For closed-loop speed and torque control with speed encoder:
- check the speed signal (interrupted cable, polarity, pulse number).
If there is no fault, then the fault tolerance can be increased (p1744).
For closed-loop speed and torque control without speed encoder:
- check whether the drive stalls due to the load if the speed setpoint is still zero. If yes, then increase the current
setpoint using p1610.
- if the motor excitation (magnetizing) time (r0346) was significantly reduced, then it should be increased again.
- check the current limits (p0640, r0067). If these are too low, then the drive cannot be magnetized.
If there is no fault, then the fault tolerance (p1745) or the delay time (p2178) can be increased.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

A07903 Drive: Motor speed deviation

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The absolute value of the speed difference from the two setpoints (p2151, p2154) and the speed actual value (r2169)
exceeds the tolerance threshold (p2163) longer than tolerated (p2164, p2166).
The alarm is only enabled for p2149.0 = 1.
Possible causes could be:
- the load torque is greater than the torque setpoint.
- when accelerating, the torque/current/power limit is reached. If the limits are not sufficient, then it is possible that
the drive has been dimensioned too small.
- the speed controller is inhibited (refer to p0856; refer to Kp/Tn adaptation of the speed controller).
- for closed-loop torque control, the speed setpoint does not track the speed actual value.
- for active Vdc controller.
The signal is not generated if the ramp-function generator tracking prevents the setpoint and actual speed from drift-
ing (moving) apart.
Only for vector drives:
For V/f control, the overload condition is detected as the Imax controller is active.
See also: p2149
Remedy: - increase p2163 and/or p2166.
- increase the torque/current/power limits.
- enable the speed controller.
- for closed-loop torque control: The speed setpoint should track the speed actual value.

A07910 (N) Drive: Motor overtemperature

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: KTY:
The motor temperature has exceeded the alarm threshold (p00604).
VECTOR: The response parameterized in p0610 becomes active.
PTC:
The response threshold of 1650 Ohm was exceeded.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
1: No output current reduction.
2: Output current reduction active.
See also: p0604, p0610
Remedy: - check the motor load.
- check the motor ambient temperature.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:

3-838  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A07920 Drive: Torque too low

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic in the negative direction (too low).
See also: p2181
Remedy: Adapt the load.

A07921 Drive: Torque too high

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic in the positive direction (too high).
Remedy: Adapt the load.

A07922 Drive: Torque outside the tolerance

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic.
Remedy: Adapt the load.

F07923 Drive: Torque too low

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF1 (NONE)
SERVO: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
VECTOR: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic in the negative direction (too low).
Remedy: Adapt the load.

F07924 Drive: Torque too high

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF1 (NONE)
SERVO: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
VECTOR: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic in the positive direction (too high).
Remedy: Adapt the load.

F07925 Drive: Torque outside the tolerance

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF1 (NONE)
SERVO: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
VECTOR: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic.
Remedy: Adapt the load.

A07926 Envelope curve, parameter invalid

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Invalid parameter values were entered for the envelope characteristic of the load monitoring.
The following rules apply for the speed thresholds:
p2182 < p2183 < p2184
The following rules apply for the torque thresholds:
p2185 > p2186
p2187 > p2188
p2189 > p2190
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Number of the parameter with the invalid value.
Remedy: Set the parameters for the load monitoring according to the applicable rules.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-839

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F07930 Drive: Brake control defective

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
SERVO: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
VECTOR: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The control unit has detected a brake control fault.
- no motor holding brake connected.
- the motor holding brake control on the motor module is faulty.
- a DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred between the control unit and the motor module involved.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
10: No brake connected or fault in the motor module brake control circuit ("open brake" operation).
11: Defect in the brake control circuit of the motor module ("brake open" operation).
20: Short-circuit in the brake winding or fault in the brake control circuit of the motor module ("brake open" state).
30: No brake connected, short-circuit in the brake winding or fault in the motor module brake control circuit ("close
brake" operation).
31: Defect in the brake control circuit of the motor module ("close brake" operation).
40: Defect in the brake control circuit of the motor module ("brake closed" state).
50: Defect in the brake control circuit of the motor module or communications fault between the control unit and the
motor module (brake control diagnostics).
Remedy: - check the motor holding brake connection.
- check the function of the motor holding brake.
- check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communications error between the control unit and the motor module
involved and if required, carry-out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- replace the motor module involved.

A07931 Brake does not open

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: This alarm is output for r1229.4 = 1.
See also: p1216, r1229
Remedy: - check the functionality of the motor holding brake.
- check the feedback signal (p1223).

A07932 Brake does not close

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: This alarm is output for r1229.5 = 1.
See also: p1217, r1229
Remedy: - check the functionality of the motor holding brake.
- check the feedback signal (p1222).

F07950 (A) Drive: Motor parameter defective

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The motor parameters were incorrectly entered while commissioning (e.g. p0300 = 0, no motor selected)
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
The fault value includes the parameter number involved.
See also: p0300, p0301, p0304, p0305, p0307, p0310, p0311, p0314, p0316, p0320, p0322, p0323
Remedy: Compare the motor data with the rating plate data and if required, correct.
See also: p0300, p0301, p0304, p0305, p0307, p0310, p0311, p0314, p0316, p0320, p0322, p0323
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

3-840  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F07955 Drive: motor was changed

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The code number of the actual motor with DRIVE-CLiQ does not match the saved number.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Number of the incorrect parameter.
See also: p0301, r0302
Remedy: Connect the original motor, power-up the control unit again (POWER ON) and exit the quick commissioning by set-
ting p0010 to 0.
Or set p0300 = 10000 (load the motor parameter with DRIVE-CLiQ) and re-commission.
Quick commissioning (p0010 = 1) is automatically exited with p3900 > 0.
If quick commissioning was exited by setting p0010 to 0, then an automatic controller calculation (p0340 = 1) is not
carried-out.

F07956 Drive: Motor code number does not match the list (catalog) motor
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The code number of the actual motor with integrated encoder evaluation does not match the possible list motor types
(refer to the selection, p0300).
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Motor coder number from the integrated encoder evaluation.
Remedy: Use the integrated encoder evaluation with the matching motor code number.
The first three digits of the motor coder number generally correspond to the matching list motor type.

F07957 Drive: Motor type does not match drive type

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The code number of the actual motor with integrated encoder evaluation does not match the actual drive type
(p0107).
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Motor coder number from the integrated encoder evaluation.
Remedy: Select another drive type (e.g. servo drive for synchronous motors).

F07970 Drive: Automatic encoder adjustment incorrect

Reaction: A_INFEED: NONE
SERVO: NONE
VECTOR: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred during the automatic encoder adjustment.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
1: Current controller limited
2: Motor shaft locked.
3: Damping input limited.
4: Encoder speed signal not plausible.
Remedy: Re fault value = 1:
Check whether the motor is correctly connected.
Check whether motor data have been correctly entered.
Replace the motor module involved.
Re fault value = 2:
Motor holding brake active.
Load blocks the motor.
Re fault value = 3:
Check whether the speed actual value inversion is correct (p0410.0).
Check whether the motor is correctly connected.
Check whether motor data have been correctly entered.
Re fault value = 4:
Check whether the encoder pulse number (p0408) and gearbox factor (p0432, p0433) are correct.
Check whether the motor pole pair number is correct (p0314).

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-841

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A07971 (N) Drive: Automatic encoder adjustment activated

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The automatic encoder adjustment is activated.
The automatic encoder adjustment is carried-out with the next power-on command.
See also: p1990
Remedy: None necessary.
The alarm automatically disappears after the encoder has been successfully adjusted or for the setting p1990 = 0.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:

A07980 Drive: Speed controller optimization activated

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The automation speed controller optimization is activated.
The optimization routine is carried-out at the next power-on command.
See also: p1960
Remedy: None necessary.
The alarm disappears automatically after the speed controller optimization has been successfully completed or for
the setting p1900 = 0.

A07981 Drive: Speed controller optimization, enable signals missing

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Automatic optimization of the speed controller cannot be started because some enable signals have not been set.
Remedy: - acknowledge faults that are present.
- establish missing enable signals.
See also: r0002, r0046

A07982 Drive: Speed controller optimization encoder test

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A fault has occurred during the encoder test.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
1: The speed did not reach a steady-state condition.
2: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the minimum limiting is active.
3. The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active.
4. The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the maximum limiting is active.
5: The encoder does not supply a signal.
6: Incorrect polarity.
7: Incorrect pulse number.
8: Encoder signal faults.

3-842  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

Remedy: Re alarm value = 1:

- check the motor parameters.
- carry-out a motor data identification routine (p1910).
- if required, reduce the dynamic factor (p1967 < 0.25).
Re alarm value = 2:
Adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or minimum limiting (p1080).
Re alarm value = 3:
Adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or suppression (skip) bandwidths (p1091 ... p1094, p1101).
Re alarm value = 4:
Adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or maximum limiting (p1082, p1083 and p1086).
Re alarm value = 5:
Check the encoder connection. If required, replace the encoder.
Re alarm value = 6:
Check the connection assignment of the encoder cable. Adapt the polarity (p0410).
Re alarm value = 7:
Adapt the pulse number (p0408).
Re alarm value = 8:
Check the encoder connection and encoder cable. It is possible that there is a problem associated with the ground
connection.
Note:
The encoder test can be switched-out (disabled) using p1959.0.
See also: p1959

A07983 Drive: Speed controller optimization, saturation characteristic

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A fault has occurred while determining the saturation characteristic.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
1: The speed did not reach a steady-state condition.
2: The rotor flux did not reach a steady-state condition.
3: The adaptation circuit did not reach a steady-state condition.
4: The adaptation circuit was not enabled.
5: Field weakening active.
6: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the minimum limiting is active.
7: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active.
8: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the maximum limiting is active.
9: Several values of the determined saturation characteristic are not plausible.
10: Saturation characteristic could not be sensibly determined because load torque too large.
Remedy: Re alarm value = 1 ... 4:
- check the motor parameters.
- carry-out a motor data identification routine (p1910).
- if required, reduce the dynamic factor (p1967 < 0.25).
Re alarm value = 5:
The speed setpoint (p1961) is too high. Reduce the speed.
Re alarm value = 6:
Adapt the speed setpoint (p1961) or minimum limiting (p1080).
Re alarm value = 7:
Adapt the speed setpoint (p1961) or suppression (skip) bandwidths (p1091 ... p1094, p1101).
Re alarm value = 8:
Adapt the speed setpoint (p1961) or maximum limiting (p1082, p1083 and p1086).
Re alarm value = 9, 10:
The measurement was carried-out at an operating point where the load torque is too high. Select a more suitable
operating point, either by changing the speed setpoint (p1961) or by reducing the load torque. The load torque may
not be varied while making measurements.
Note:
The saturation characteristic identification routine can be disabled using p1959.1.
See also: p1959

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-843

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A07984 Drive: Speed controller optimization, moment of inertia

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A fault has occurred while identifying the moment of inertia.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
1: The speed did not reach a steady-state condition.
2: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the minimum limiting is active.
3. The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active.
4. The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the maximum limiting is active.
5: It is not possible to increase the speed by 10% as the minimum limiting is active.
6: It is not possible to increase the speed by 10% as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active.
7: It is not possible to increase the speed by 10% as the maximum limiting is active.
8: The torque difference after the speed setpoint step is too low in order to be able to still reliably identify the moment
of inertia.
9: Too few data to be able to reliably identify the moment of inertia.
10: After the setpoint step, the speed either changed too little or in the incorrect direction.
11: The identified moment of inertia is not plausible.
Remedy: Re alarm value = 1:
- check the motor parameters.
- carry-out a motor data identification routine (p1910).
- if required, reduce the dynamic factor (p1967 < 0.25).
Re alarm value = 2, 5:
Adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or minimum limiting (p1080).
Re alarm value = 3, 6:
Adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or suppression (skip) bandwidths (p1091 ... p1094, p1101).
Re alarm value = 4, 7:
Adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or maximum limiting (p1082, p1083 and p1086).
Note:
The moment of inertia identification routine can be disabled using p1959.2.
See also: p1959

A07985 Drive: Speed controller optimization, vibration test

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A fault has occurred during the vibration test.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
1: The speed did not reach a steady-state condition.
2: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the minimum limiting is active.
3. The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active.
4. The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the maximum limiting is active.
5: Torque limits too low for a torque step.
6: No suitable speed controller setting was found.
Remedy: Re alarm value = 1:
- check the motor parameters.
- carry-out a motor data identification routine (p1910).
- if required, reduce the dynamic factor (p1967 < 0.25).
Re alarm value = 2:
Adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or minimum limiting (p1080).
Re alarm value = 3:
Adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or suppression (skip) bandwidths (p1091 ... p1094, p1101).
Re alarm value = 4:
Adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or maximum limiting (p1082, p1083 and p1086).
Re alarm value = 5:
Increase the torque limits (e.g. p1520, p1521).
Re alarm value = 6:
Reduce the dynamic factor (p1967).
Note:
The speed controller vibration test can be disabled using p1959.4.
See also: p1959

3-844  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F07986 Drive: Speed controller optimization, ramp-function generator

Reaction: A_INFEED: NONE
SERVO: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
VECTOR: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Problems with the ramp-function generator have occurred during the automation speed controller optimization rou-
tine.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
1: The positive and negative direction of rotation is inhibited.
Remedy: Re fault value = 1:
Enable the direction of rotation (p1110 or p1111).

A07987 Drive: Speed controller optimization, no encoder available

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: No encoder available. The automatic speed controller optimization routine is carried-out without encoder (sensor-
less).
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
1: An encoder is not connected.
2: It involves a SINAMICS G drive unit that only supports sensorless closed-loop control.
Remedy: Re alarm value = 1:
Connect-up the encoder.
Re alarm value = 2:
None necessary.

A07988 Drive: Speed controller optimization, no configuration selected

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: No function was selected when configuring the automatic optimization of the speed controller (p1959).
Remedy: Select at least one function for automatic optimization of the speed controller (p1959).
See also: p1959

F07990 Drive: Incorrect motor data identification

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2 (NONE)
SERVO: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
VECTOR: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A fault has occurred during the identification routine.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
1: Current limit value reached.
2: Identified stator resistance lies outside the expected range 0.1 ... 100 % of Zn.
3: Identified rotor resistance lies outside the expected range 0.1 ... 100 % of Zn.
4: Identified stator reactance lies outside the expected range 50 ... 500 % of Zn.
5: Identified magnetizing reactance lies outside the expected range 50 ... 500 % of Zn.
6: Identified rotor time constant lies outside the expected range 10 ms ... 5 s.
7: Identified total leakage reactance lies outside the expected range 5 ... 50 % of Zn.
8: Identified stator leakage reactance lies outside the expected range 25 ... 250 % of Zn.
9: Identified rotor leakage reactance lies outside the expected range 25 ... 250 % of Zn.
10: Motor has been incorrectly connected.
11: Motor shaft rotates.
20: Identified threshold voltage of the semiconductor devices lies outside the expected range 0 ... 10 V.
30: Current controller in voltage limiting.
40: At least one identification contains errors. The identified parameters are not saved to prevent inconsistencies.
50: With the selected current controller sampling rate, the pulse frequency cannot be implemented.
Note:
Percentage values are referred to the rated motor impedance:
Zn = Vmot.nom / sqrt(3) / Imot,nom

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-845

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

Remedy: Fault value = 0:

Check whether the motor is correctly connected. Observe the configuration (star-delta).
Fault value = 1 ... 40:
- check whether the motor data have been correctly entered into p0300, p0304 - p0311.
- is there an appropriate relationship between the motor power rating and that of the motor module? The ratio of the
motor module to the rated motor current should not be less than 0.5 and should not be greater than 4.
- check the motor configuration (star-delta).
Fault value = 50:
Reduce the current controller sampling rate.

A07991 (N) Drive: Motor data identification activated

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The motor data identification routine is activated.
The motor data identification routine is carried-out at the next power-on command.
See also: p1910
Remedy: None necessary.
The alarm automatically disappears after the motor data identification routine has been successfully completed or
for the setting p1900 = 0.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:

F07995 Drive: Rotor position identification not successful

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The rotor position identification routine was unsuccessful.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
1: No current is established.
2: The starting current is not zero.
3: The selected maximum distance was exceeded (p1981).
4x: The measuring signal does not permit a clear evaluation.
5: The maximum current was exceeded during the measurement.
6: The current measurement must be re-calibrated.
7x: The sensor module does not support the rotor position identification routine.
70 ... 79: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Note: x = 0 ... 9
Remedy: Re fault value = 1:
Check the motor connection and DC link voltage.
For the following parameters, set practical values that are not zero (p0325, p0329).
Re fault value = 3:
Increase the maximum distance (p1981).
Reduce the currents for the rotor position identification routine (p0325, p0329).
Stop the motor in order to carry-out the rotor position identification routine.
Re fault value = 40 ... 49:
Increase the currents for the rotor position identification routine (p0325, p0329).
Stop the motor in order to carry-out the rotor position identification routine.
Select another technique for rotor position identification routine (p1980).
Use another motor, absolute value encoder or Hall sensors.
Re fault value = 5:
Reduce the currents for the rotor position identification routine (p0325, p0329).
Re fault value = 6:
Re-calibrate the motor module.
Re fault value = 7x:
Upgrade the software in the sensor module.

3-846  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F07996 Drive: Rotor position identification not carried-out

Reaction: ENCODER (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The drive was changed-over from sensorless operation, flying into operation with an encoder without having first car-
ried-out a rotor position identification routine for the encoder. p1404 has a value between zero and the maximum
speed and the pulses in the speed range above p1404 were enabled without having first carried-out a rotor position
identification routine in operation with an encoder.
Remedy: For a flying changeover between operation with and without encoder with rotor position identification after power-on
or commissioning (p10 not equal to zero) enable the pulses once at zero speed. A rotor position identification is then
carried-out and the rotor position angle is available for operation.

F08000 (N, A) TB: +/-15 V power supply faulted

Reaction: NONE (DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: Terminal board 30 detects an incorrect internal power supply voltage.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
0: Error when testing the monitoring circuit.
1: Fault in normal operation.
Remedy: - replace terminal board 30.
- replace control unit.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

F08010 (N, A) TB: Analog-digital converter

Reaction: A_INFEED: NONE (DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
SERVO: NONE (DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
VECTOR: OFF1 (DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The analog/digital converter on terminal board 30 has not supplied any converted data.
Remedy: - check the power supply.
- replace terminal board 30.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

F08500 (A) COMM BOARD: Monitoring time, configuration expired

Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The monitoring time for the configuration has expired.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
0: The transfer of the send-configuration data has been exceeded (time).
1: The transfer of the receive-configuration data has been exceeded (time).
Remedy: Check communication line.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-847

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F08501 (A) COMM BOARD: Monitoring time, process data expired

Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The set monitoring time expired while transferring process data via COMM BOARD.
See also: p2040
Remedy: - check communications link.
- check the set monitoring time if the error persists.
See also: p2040
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

F08502 (A) COMM BOARD: Monitoring time, sign-of-life expired

Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The monitoring time for the sign-of-life counter has expired.
Remedy: Check communication line.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

F08510 (A) COMM BOARD: send configuration data not valid.

Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: COMM BOARD did not accept the send-configuration data.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Return value of the send-configuration data check.
Remedy: Check the send configuration data.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

A08511 (F) COMM BOARD: Receive configuration data not valid

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The drive unit did not accept the receive-configuration data.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Return value of the receive-configuration data check.
0: Configuration accepted.
1: Drive overflow.
2: Data length overflow.
3: Data length uneven.
4: Setting data for synchronization not accepted.
5: Drive still not in cyclic operation.
6: Buffer system not accepted.
7: Cyclic channel length too short for this setting.
8: Cyclic channel address not initialized.
9: 3-buffer system not permitted.
10: DRIVE-CLiQ fault.
11: CU link fault.
12: CX32 not in cyclic operation.
Remedy: Check the receive configuration data.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY
upon F:

3-848  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A08520 (F) COMM BOARD: Non-cyclic channel error

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The memory or the buffer status of the non-cyclic channel has an error.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
0: Error in the buffer status.
1: Error in the memory.
Remedy: Check communication line.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY
upon F:

A08530 (F) COMM BOARD: Message channel error

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The memory or the buffer status of the message channel has an error.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
0: Error in the buffer status.
1: Error in the memory.
Remedy: Check communication line.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY
upon F:

A08700 (F) CBC: Communications error

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A CAN communications error has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
1: The error counter for the send telegrams has exceeded the BUS OFF value 255. The bus disables the CAN con-
troller.
- bus cable interrupted.
- bus cable not connected.
- incorrect baud rate.
- incorrect bit timing.
2: The master no longer interrogated the CAN node status longer than for its "life time". The "life time" is obtained
from the "guard time" (p8604[0]) multiplied by the "life time factor" (p8604[1]).
- bus cable interrupted.
- bus cable not connected.
- incorrect baud rate.
- incorrect bit timing.
- master fault-
Remedy: - check the bus cable
- check the baud rate (p8622).
- check the bit timing (p8623).
- check the master.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY
upon F:

A08751 CBC: Telegram loss

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The CAN controller has lost a receive message (telegram).
Remedy: - reduce the cycle times of the receive messages

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-849

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A08752 CBC: Error counter for error passive exceeded

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The error counter for the send or receive telegrams has exceeded the value 127.
Remedy: - check the bus cable
- set a higher baud rate (p8622).
- check the bit timing and if required optimize (p8623).

A08753 CBC: Message buffer overflow

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A message buffer has overflowed.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
1: Non-cyclic send buffer (SDO response buffer) has overflowed.
2: Non-cyclic receive buffer (SDO receive buffer) has overflowed.
3: Cyclic send buffer (SDO response buffer) has overflowed.
Remedy: 2: Reduce the cycle times of the SDO receive messages.
3: Check the bus cable.
Set a higher baud rate (p8622).
Check the bit timing and if required optimize (p8623).

A08754 CBC: Incorrect communications mode

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An attempt was made to make a change at parameters p8700 - p8737 while the CAN node was in the operational
mode.
Remedy: Change into the pre-operational or stopped mode.

A08755 CBC: Obj cannot be mapped

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: PDO mapping is not possible for the object.
Remedy: Use an object intended for the PDO mapping or enter 0.
The following objects can be mapped in the receive PDO:
0x6040, 0x6060, 0x60FF, 0x6071.
The following objects can be mapped in the transmit PDO:
0x6041, 0x6061, 0x6063, 0x6069, 0x606B, 0x606C, 0x6074.
Note:
As long as A8755 is present, the COB-ID cannot be set to valid.

A08756 CBC: Number of mapped bytes exceeded

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The number of bytes of the mapped objects exceeds the telegram size for net data (max. 8 bytes).
Remedy: Map fewer objects or objects with a smaller data type.
Maximum possible are:
2 objects of data type 4 bytes.
4 objects of data type 2 bytes.
See also: p8710, p8711, p8712, p8713, p8714, p8715, p8716, p8717, p8730, p8731, p8732, p8733, p8734, p8735,
p8736, p8737

3-850  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A08757 CBC: Set COB-ID invalid

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: For online operation, the appropriate COB-ID must be set invalid before mapping.
Example:
Mapping for RPDO 1 should be changed (p8710[0]).
--> set p8700[0] = C00006E0 hex (invalid COB-ID)
--> set p8710[0] as required.
--> p8700[0] enter a valid COB-ID
Remedy: Set the COB-ID to invalid.

A08758 CBC: Number of CAN channels too low

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The number of CAN channels in p8740 has either been set to 0 or too low.
See also: p8740
Remedy: The number of channels set in p8740 must be greater than or equal to the number of PDOs.
There are 2 possibilities:
Increase the number of channels in p8740 and confirm the selection using p8741.
Reduce the number of PDOs by setting the COB-ID to invalid.
See also: p8740, p8741

A13000 License not adequate

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: - for the drive unit, the options that require a license are being used but the licenses are not sufficient.
- an error occurred when checking the existing licenses.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
0:
The existing license is not sufficient.
1:
An adequate license was not able to be determined as the CompactFlash Card with the required licensing data was
withdrawn in operation.
2:
An adequate license was not able to be determined, as an error occurred when reading-out the required licensing
data from the CompactFlash Card.
3:
An adequate license was not able to be determined as there is a checksum error in the license key.
4:
An internal error occurred when checking the license.
Remedy: Alarm value 0:
Additional licenses are required and these must be activated (p9920, p9921).
Alarm value 1:
With the system powered-down, re-insert the CompactFlash Card that matches the system.
Alarm value 2:
Enter and activate the license key (p9920, p9921).
Alarm value 3:
Compare the license key (p9920) entered with the license key on the certificate of license.
Re-enter the license key and activate (p9920, p9921).
Alarm value 4:
- carry-out a POWER ON.
- upgrade the firmware release.
- contact the Hotline.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-851

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A13001 Error in license checksum

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When checking the checksum of the license key, an error was detected.
Remedy: Compare the license key (p9920) entered with the license key on the certificate of license.
Re-enter the license key and activate (p9920, p9921).

F30001 Power module: Overcurrent

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power module has detected an overcurrent condition.
- closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized.
- motor has a short-circuit or fault to ground (frame).
- V/f operation: Up ramp set too short.
- V/f operation: Rated motor current is significantly greater than that of the motor module.
- infeed: High discharge and post-charging current for line supply voltage interruptions.
- infeed: High post-charging currents for overload when motoring and DC link voltage dip.
- infeed: Short-circuit currents at power-on due to the missing commutating reactor.
- power cables are not correctly connected.
- power cables exceed the maximum permissible length.
- power module defective.
Fault value (r0949):
Bit 0: Phase U.
Bit 1: Phase V.
Bit 2: Phase W.
Remedy: - check the motor data - if required, carry-out commissioning.
- check the motor circuit configuration (star-delta).
- V/f operation: Increase the up ramp.
- V/f operation: Check the assignment of the rated currents of the motor and motor module.
- infeed: Check the line supply quality.
- infeed: Reduce the load when motoring.
- infeed: Correct connection of the line commutating reactor.
- check the power cable connections.
- check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault.
- check the length of the power cables.
- replace power module.

F30002 Power module: DC link overvoltage

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power module has detected an overvoltage condition in the DC link.
- motor regenerates too much energy.
- line supply voltage too high.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
DC link voltage [1 bit = 100 mV].
Remedy: - increase the ramp-down time.
- activate the DC link voltage controller.
- use a brake resistor or active line module.
- increase the current limit of the infeed or use a larger module (for the active line module).
- check the line supply voltage.
See also: p0210, p1240

3-852  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F30003 Power module: DC link undervoltage

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power module has detected an undervoltage condition in the DC link.
- line supply failure
- line supply voltage below the permissible value.
- line supply infeed failued or faulted.
Remedy: - check the line supply voltage
- check the line supply infeed and if necessary observe the fault messages of the line supply infeed.
Note:
The ready signal of the infeed r0863 must be connected to the associated inputs p0864 of the drives.
See also: p0210

F30004 Power module: Overtemperature heatsink AC inverter

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The temperature of the power module heatsink has exceeded the permissible limit value.
- insufficient cooling, fan failure.
- overload
- ambient temperature too high.
- pulse frequency too high.
Fault value (r0949):
Temperature [1 bit = 0.01 °C].
Remedy: - check whether the fan is running.
- check the fan elements
- check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
- check the motor load.
- reduce the pulse frequency if this is higher than the rated pulse frequency.
Notice:
This fault can only be acknowledged after this alarm threshold for alarm A05000 has been fallen below.
See also: p1800

F30005 Power module: Overload I2T

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power module was overloaded (r0036 = 100 %).
- the permissible rated power module current was exceeded for an inadmissibly long time.
- the permissible load duty cycle was not maintained.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
I2t [100 % = 16384].
Remedy: - reduce the continuous load.
- adapt the load duty cycle.
- check the motor and power module rated currents.
See also: r0036, r0206, p0307

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-853

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F30006 Power module: Thyristor control board

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The thyristor control board of the basic line module signals a fault.
- there is not line supply voltage.
- the line contactor is not closed.
- the line supply voltage is too low.
- line supply frequency outside the permissible range (45 ... 66 Hz).
- there is a DC link short-circuit.
- there is a DC link short-circuit (during the pre-charging phase).
- power supply thyristor control board outside the nominal range (5 ... 18 V) and supply voltage >30 V.
- there is an internal fault in the thyristor control board.
Remedy: The faults are saved in the TCB and are acknowledged by switching-out the TCB supply voltage for at least 10 s!
- check the line supply voltage
- check or energize the line contactor.
- check the monitoring time and, if required, increase (p0857).
- if required, observe additional power module messages/signals.
- check the DC link regarding short-circuit or ground fault.
- observe the LED fault display of the thyristor control board.

A30010 (F) Power module: Sign-of-life, cyclic data

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred between the control unit and the power module involved.
The cyclic setpoint telegrams of the control unit were not received on time by the power module for at least one clock
cycle.
Remedy: - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY (power on)
upon F:

F30011 Power module: Line phase failure in main circuit

Reaction: OFF2 (OFF1)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A line phase failure was detected at the power module.
- the fuse of a phase of a main circuit has ruptured.
- the DC link voltage ripple has exceeded the permissible limit value.
Remedy: Check the fuses in the main circuit.

F30012 Power module: Temperature sensor heatsink wire breakage

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2 (OFF1)
SERVO: OFF1 (OFF2)
VECTOR: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The connection to one of the heatsink temperature sensors in the power module is interrupted.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Bit 0: Module slot (electronics slot)
Bit 1: Air intake
Bit 2: Inverter 1
Bit 3: Inverter 2
Bit 4: Inverter 3
Bit 5: Inverter 4
Bit 6: Inverter 5
Bit 7: Inverter 6
Bit 8: Rectifier 1
Bit 9: Rectifier 2
See also: r0949
Remedy: Contact the manufacturer.

3-854  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F30013 Power module: Temperature sensor heatsink short-circuit

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2 (OFF1)
SERVO: OFF1 (OFF2)
VECTOR: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The heatsink temperature sensor in the motor module is short-circuited.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Bit 0: Module slot (electronics slot)
Bit 1: Air intake
Bit 2: Inverter 1
Bit 3: Inverter 2
Bit 4: Inverter 3
Bit 5: Inverter 4
Bit 6: Inverter 5
Bit 7: Inverter 6
Bit 8: Rectifier 1
Bit 9: Rectifier 2
Remedy: Contact the manufacturer.

F30017 Power module: Hardware current limit has responded too often
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The hardware current limitation in the relevant phase (see A30031, A30032, A30033) has responded too often. The
number of times the limit has been exceeded depends on the design and type of power module.
For infeed units, the following applies:
- closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized.
- load on the infeed is too high.
- voltage sensing module incorrectly connected.
- commutating reactor missing or the incorrect type.
- power module defective.
The following applies to motor modules:
- closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized.
- fault in the motor or in the power cables.
- the power cables exceed the maximum permissible length.
- motor load too high
- power module defective.
Fault value (r0949, binary):
Bit 0: Phase U
Bit 1: Phase V
Bit 2: Phase W
Remedy: For infeed units, the following applies:
- check the controller settings, if required, reset and identify the controller (p0340 = 2, p3410 = 5).
- reduce the load, if required, increase the DC link capacitance or use a higher-rating infeed.
- check the connection of the optional voltage sensing module.
- check the connection and technical data of the commutating reactor.
- check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault.
- replace power module.
The following applies to motor modules:
- check the motor data.
- check the motor circuit configuration (star-delta).
- check the motor load.
- check the power cable connections.
- check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault.
- check the length of the power cables.
- replace power module.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-855

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F30021 Power module: Ground fault

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Power module has detected a ground fault.
- ground fault in the power cables
- winding fault or ground fault at the motor.
- CT defective.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Absolute value, summed current [32767 = 271 % rated current].
Remedy: - check the power cable connections.
- check the motor.
- check the CT.

F30022 Power module: Monitoring U_ce

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: power on
Cause: In the power module, the monitoring of the collector-emitter voltage (V_ce) of the semiconductor has responded.
Possible causes:
- short-circuit at the motor module output.
- defective semiconductor in the power module.
Fault value (r0949, binary):
Bit 0: Short-circuit in phase U
Bit 1: Short-circuit in phase V
Bit 2: Short-circuit in phase W
Bit 3: Light transmitter enable defective
Bit 4: V_ce group fault signal interrupted
See also: r0949
Remedy: - check the power cable connections.
- select the defective semiconductor and replace.

F30025 Power module: Overtemperature chip

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Chip temperature of the semiconductor has exceeded the permissible limit value.
- the permissible load duty cycle was not maintained.
- insufficient cooling, fan failure.
- overload
- ambient temperature too high.
- pulse frequency too high.
Fault value (r0949):
Temperature difference between the heatsink and chip [1 Bit = 0.01 °C].
Remedy: - adapt the load duty cycle.
- check whether the fan is running.
- check the fan elements
- check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
- check the motor load.
- reduce the pulse frequency if this is higher than the rated pulse frequency.
Notice:
This fault can only be acknowledged after this alarm threshold for alarm A05001 has been fallen below.
See also: r0037

3-856  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F30027 Power module: Precharging DC link monitoring

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The power module DC link was not able to be pre-charged within the expected time.
- line supply voltage too low.
- line supply phase fault.
- short-circuit or ground fault in the DC link.
- pre-charging circuit defective.
Fault value (r0949):
Missing internal enable signals, power module (lower 16 bit):
(Inverted bit-coded notation FFFF hex -> all internal enable signals available)
Bit 0: Power supply of the IGBT gating shut down
Bit 1: Reserved
Bit 2: Reserved
Bit 3: Ground fault detected
Bit 4: Peak current intervention
Bit 5: I2t exceeded
Bit 6: Thermal model, overtemperature calculated
Bit 7: (heatsink, gating module, power module) overtemperature measured
Bit 8: Reserved
Bit 9: Overvoltage detected
Bit 10: Power module has completed pre-charging, ready for pulse enable
Bit 11: SH terminal missing
Bit 12: Overcurrent condition detected
Bit 13: Armature short-circuit
Bit 14: DRIVE-CLiQ fault active
Bit 15: Vce fault detected, transistor de-saturated due to overcurrent/circuit-circuit
Status, power module (upper 16 bit, hexadecimal number):
0: Fault status (wait for OFF and fault acknowledgment)
1: Restart inhibit (wait for OFF)
2: Overvoltage condition detected -> change into the fault state
3: Undervoltage condition detected -> change into the fault state
4: Wait for bypass contactor to open -> change into the fault state
5: Wait for bypass contactor to open -> change into restart inhibit
6: Commissioning
7: Ready for pre-charging
8: Pre-charging started, DC link voltage lower than the minimum switch-on voltage
9: Pre-charging, DC link voltage end of pre-charging still not detected
10: Wait for the end of the de-bounce time of the main contactor after pre-charging has been completed
11: Pre-charging completed, ready for pulse enable
12: It was detected that the SH terminal was energized at the power module
See also: p0210
Remedy: - check the line supply voltage
- check the line supply.
See also: p0210

A30031 Power module: Hardware current limiting, phase U

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Hardware current limit for phase U responded. The pulsing in this phase is inhibited for one pulse period.
- closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized.
- fault in the motor or in the power cables.
- the power cables exceed the maximum permissible length.
- motor load too high
- power module defective.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-857

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

Remedy: - check the motor data.

- check the motor circuit configuration (star-delta).
- check the motor load.
- check the power cable connections.
- check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault.
- check the length of the power cables.

A30032 Power module: Hardware current limiting, phase V

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Hardware current limit for phase V responded. The pulsing in this phase is inhibited for one pulse period.
- closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized.
- fault in the motor or in the power cables.
- the power cables exceed the maximum permissible length.
- motor load too high
- power module defective.
Remedy: - check the motor data.
- check the motor circuit configuration (star-delta).
- check the motor load.
- check the power cable connections.
- check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault.
- check the length of the power cables.

A30033 Power module: Hardware current limiting, phase W

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Hardware current limit for phase W responded. The pulsing in this phase is inhibited for one pulse period.
- closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized.
- fault in the motor or in the power cables.
- the power cables exceed the maximum permissible length.
- motor load too high
- power module defective.
Remedy: - check the motor data.
- check the motor circuit configuration (star-delta).
- check the motor load.
- check the power cable connections.
- check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault.
- check the length of the power cables.

F30035 Power module: Overtemp. air intake

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2
SERVO: OFF1 (OFF2)
VECTOR: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Power module air intake temperature has exceeded the permissible limit value.
- ambient temperature too high.
- insufficient cooling, fan failure
Fault value (r0949):
Temperature [1 bit = 0.01 °C].
Remedy: - check whether the fan is running.
- check the fan elements
- check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
Notice:
This fault can only be acknowledged after this alarm threshold for alarm A05002 has been fallen below.

3-858  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F30036 Power module: Overtemperature electronics unit

Reaction: A_INFEED: OFF2
SERVO: OFF1 (OFF2)
VECTOR: OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Power module temperature in the module slot of the drive converter has exceeded the permissible limit value.
- insufficient cooling, fan failure.
- overload
- ambient temperature too high.
Fault value (r0949):
Temperature [1 bit = 0.01 °C].
Remedy: - check whether the fan is running.
- check the fan elements
- check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
Notice:
This fault can only be acknowledged after this alarm threshold for alarm A05003 has been fallen below.

F30037 Power module: Overtemperature rectifier

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Power module rectifier temperature has exceeded the permissible limit value.
- insufficient cooling, fan failure.
- overload
- ambient temperature too high.
- line supply phase failure.
Fault value (r0949):
Temperature [1 bit = 0.01 °C].
Remedy: - check whether the fan is running.
- check the fan elements
- check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
- check the motor load.
- check the line supply phases.
Notice:
This fault can only be acknowledged after this alarm threshold for alarm A05004 has been fallen below.

F30040 Power module: Undervoltage 24 V

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: power on
Cause: Failure of the 24 V power supply for the power module.
- the 16 V threshold was fallen below for longer than 3 ms.
Fault value (r0949):
24 V voltage [1 bit = 0.1 V].
Remedy: Check the 24 V DC voltage supply to power module.

A30041 (F) Power module: Undervoltage 24 V

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: 24 V power supply fault for the power module.
- the 16 V threshold was fallen below.
Fault value (r0949):
24 V voltage [1 bit = 0.1 V].
Remedy: Check the 24 V DC voltage supply to power module.
Reaction upon F: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY (power on)
upon F:

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-859

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A30042 Power module: Fan operating time reached or exceeded

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The maximum operating time of the fan in the power module is set in p0252.
This message indicates the following:
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
0: The maximum fan operating time is 500 hours.
1: The maximum fan operating time has been exceeded.
Remedy: Replace the fan in the power module and reset the operating hours counter to 0 (p0251 = 0).
See also: p0251, p0252

F30600 SI MM: STOP A initiated

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The Safety Integrated function on the motor module has detected a fault and initiated STOP A (pulse cancellation
via the safety shutdown path of the motor module).
- forced checking procedure of the safety shutdown path of the motor module unsuccessful.
- subsequent response to fault F30611 (defect in a monitoring channel).
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
0: Stop request from the control unit.
1005: Pulses cancelled although SH not selected and there is not internal STOP A present.
1010: Pulses enabled although SH is selected or an internal STOP A is present.
9999: Subsequent response to fault F30611.
Remedy: - select safe standstill and then de-select again.
- check whether the safe standstill function on the control unit is enabled (p9601).
If required, select the safety commissioning mode (p0010), enable the safe standstill function on the control unit and
motor module (p9601, p9801), exist the safety commissioning mode (p0010) and carry-out a POWER ON for all com-
ponents (power-down/power-up).
- replace the motor module involved.
Re fault value = 9999:
- carry-out diagnostics for fault F30611.
Note:
MM: Motor module
SI: Safety Integrated

F30611 SI MM: Defect in a monitoring channel

Reaction: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The Safety Integrated function on the motor module has detected a fault in the crosswise data comparison and ini-
tiated a STOP F.
As a result of this fault, after the parameterized transition has expired (p9858), fault F30600 (power module Safety
Integrated: STOP A initiated) is output.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
0: Stop request from the control unit.
1 to 999:
Number of the crosswise compared data that resulted in this fault.
1: Safety Integrated monitoring clock cycle (r9780, r9880).
2: Safety Integrated enable safety functions (p9601, p9801).
3: Safety Integrated tolerance time SGE changeover (p9650, p9850).
4: Safety Integrated transition period STOP F to STOP A (p9658, p9858).
5: Safety Integrated enable safe brake control (p9602, p9802).
This number is also displayed in r9895.
1000:
Watchdog timer has expired. Within the time of approx. 5 * p9850 too many switching operations have occurred at
the safety-related input signals of the control unit.
1001, 1002: Initialization error, change timer / check timer.
2000: Status of the SH terminals on the control unit and motor module are different.
2001: Feedback signal for safe pulse cancellation on the control unit and motor module are different.

3-860  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

Remedy: Re fault value = 1 to 999:

- check the crosswise compared data that resulted in a STOP F.
- carry-out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the motor module software.
- upgrade the control unit software.
Re fault value = 1000:
- check the wiring of the safety-relevant input signals on the control unit (contact problems).
Re fault value = 1001, 1002:
- carry-out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the motor module software.
- upgrade the control unit software.
Re fault value = 2000, 2001:
- check the tolerance time SGE changeover and if required, increase the value (p9650, p9850).
- check the wiring of the safety-relevant input signals (contact problems).
- replace the motor module involved.
Note:
MM: Motor module
SI: Safety Integrated

N30620 (F, A) SI MM: Safe standstill active

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The safe standstill function was selected on the motor module and is active.
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
Remedy: None necessary.
Note:
MM: Motor module
SI: Safety Integrated
Reaction upon F: OFF2
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY (power on)
upon F:
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

F30625 SI MM: Sign-of-life error in safety data

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The Safety Integrated function on the motor module has detected an error in the sign-of-life of the safety data and
initiated a STOP A.
- there is either a DRIVE-CLIQ communications error or communications have failed.
- a time slice overflow of the safety software has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - select safe standstill and then de-select again.
- carry-out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communications error between the control unit and the motor module
involved and if required, carry-out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified.
- de-select all drive functions that are not absolutely necessary.
- reduce the number of drives.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
Note:
MM: Motor module
SI: Safety Integrated

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-861

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F30630 SI MM: Brake control defective

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The Safety Integrated function on the motor module has detected a brake control fault and initiated a STOP A.
- no motor holding brake connected.
- the motor holding brake control on the motor module or the control unit is faulty.
- a DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred between the control unit and the motor module.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
10: No brake connected or fault in the motor module brake control circuit ("open brake" operation).
30: Short-circuit in the brake winding or fault in the motor module brake control circuit ("close brake" operation).
40: Defect in the brake control circuit of the motor module ("brake closed" state).
60, 70: Fault in the brake control of the control unit or communications fault between the control unit and motor mod-
ule (brake control).
Remedy: - check the motor holding brake connection.
- check the function of the motor holding brake.
- check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communications error between the control unit and the motor module
involved and if required, carry-out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- replace the motor module involved.
Note:
MM: Motor module
SI: Safety Integrated

F30649 SI MM: Internal software error

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: An internal error in the Safety Integrated software on the motor module has occurred.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry-out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- re-commission the Safety Integrated function and carry-out a POWER ON.
- upgrade the motor module software.
- contact the Hotline.
- replace the motor module.
Note:
MM: Motor module
SI: Safety Integrated

F30650 SI MM: Acceptance test required

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The Safety Integrated function on the motor module requires an acceptance test.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
130: No safety parameters available for the motor module.
1000: Reference and actual checksum in the motor module are not identical (run-up).
- at least one checksum-checked piece of data is defective.
2000: Reference and actual checksum on the motor module are not identical (commissioning mode).
- reference checksum incorrectly entered into the motor module (p9899 not equal to r9898).
2003: Acceptance test is required as a safety parameter has been changed.
9999: Subsequent response of another safety-related fault that occurred at run-up that requires an acceptance test.

3-862  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

Remedy: Re fault value = 130:

- carry-out safety commissioning routine.
Re fault value = 1000:
- again carry-out safety commissioning routine.
- replace the CompactFlash Card.
Re fault value = 2000:
- check the safety parameters in the motor module and adapt the reference checksum (p9899).
Re fault value = 2003:
- carry-out an acceptance test.
Re fault value = 9999:
- carry-out diagnostics for the other safety-related fault that is present.
Note:
MM: Motor module
SI: Safety Integrated
See also: p9899

F30651 SI MM: Not synchronized with the control unit

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The Safety Integrated function is requesting synchronization of the safety time slices on the control unit and motor
module. This synchronization routine was not successful.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: - carry-out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
- upgrade the motor module software.
- upgrade the control unit software.
Note:
MM: Motor module
SI: Safety Integrated

F30652 SI MM: Monitoring clock cycle not permissible

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The Safety Integrated monitoring clock cycle cannot be maintained due to the communication conditions requested
in the system.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Upgrade the motor module software.
Note:
MM: Motor module
SI: Safety Integrated

F30655 SI MM: Align monitoring functions

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: An error has occurred when aligning the Safety Integrated monitoring functions on the control unit and motor module.
Control unit and motor module were not able to determine a common set of supported SI monitoring functions.
- there is either a DRIVE-CLIQ communications error or communications have failed.
- Safety Integrated software releases on the control unit and motor module are not compatible with one another.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-863

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

Remedy: - carry-out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.

- upgrade the motor module software.
- upgrade the control unit software.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
Note:
MM: Motor module
SI: Safety Integrated

F30656 SI MM: Incorrect motor module parameter

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: When accessing the Safety Integrated parameters for the motor module on the CompactFlash Card, an error has
occurred.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
129: Safety parameters for the motor module corrupted.
131: Internal software error on the control unit.
255: Internal motor module software error.
Remedy: - re-commission the safety functions.
- upgrade the control unit software.
- upgrade the motor module software.
- replace the CompactFlash Card.
Note:
MM: Motor module
SI: Safety Integrated

F30659 SI MM: Write task for parameter rejected

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The write task for one or several Safety Integrated parameters on the control unit was rejected.
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
10: An attempt was made to enable the SH function although this cannot be supported.
11: An attempt was made to enable the SBC function although this cannot be supported.
See also: r9771, r9871
Remedy: Re fault value = 10, 11:
- check whether there are faults in the safety function alignment between the control unit and the motor module
involved (F01655, F30655) and if required, carry-out diagnostics for the faults involved.
- use a motor module that supports the function safe standstill or safe brake control.
- upgrade the motor module software.
- upgrade the control unit software.
Note:
MM: Motor module
SI: Safety Integrated

F30801 Power module DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign-of-life missing

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred between the control unit and the power module involved.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
0A: The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set.
Remedy: - check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- replace the component involved.
See also: p9916

3-864  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F30802 Power module: Time slice overflow

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Time slide overflow.
Remedy:

F30804 Power module: CRC

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: CRC error actuator
Remedy:

F30805 Power module: Incorrect EPROM checksum

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Internal parameter data is corrupted
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
01: EEPROM access error.
02: Too many blocks in the EEPROM.
Remedy: Replace the module.

F30820 Power module DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram error

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred between the control unit and the power module involved.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
01: CRC error.
02: Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
03: Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
04: The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
05: The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
06: The address of the power module in the telegram and in the receive list do not match.
07: Power module expects a SYNC telegram, but the receive telegram is not a SYNC telegram.
08: Power module does not expect a SYNC telegram, but the receive telegram is a SYNC telegram.
09: The error bit in the receive telegram is set.
10: The receive telegram is too early.
Remedy: - carry-out a POWER ON.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
See also: p9916

F30835 Power module DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred between the control unit and the power module involved. The
nodes do not send and receive in synchronism.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
21: The cyclic telegram has not been received.
22: Timeout in the telegram receive list.
40: Timeout in the telegram send list.
Remedy: - carry-out a POWER ON.
- replace the component involved.
See also: p9916

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-865

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F30836 Power module DRIVE-CLiQ: Send error for DRIVE-CLiQ data

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred between the control unit and the power module involved. Data
were not able to be sent.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
41: Telegram type does not match send list.
Remedy: - carry-out a POWER ON.

F30837 Power module DRIVE-CLiQ: Component faulted

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
20: Error in the telegram header.
23: Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
42: Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
43: Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904).
- replace the component involved.

F30845 Power module DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred between the control unit and the power module involved.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
0B: Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer.
Remedy: - carry-out a POWER ON.
See also: p9916

F30850 Power module: Internal software error

Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge: power on
Cause: An internal software error in the power module has occurred.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
1: Background time slice is blocked.
2: Checksum over the code memory is not OK.
Remedy: - replace power module.
- if required, upgrade the firmware in the power module.
- contact the Hotline.

3-866  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F30860 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram error

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred between the control unit and the power module involved.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
11: CRC error and the receive telegram is too early.
01: CRC error.
12: The telegram is shorter than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too
early.
02: Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
13: The telegram is longer than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too
early.
03: Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
14: The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
04: The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
15: The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
05: The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
16: The address of the power module in the telegram and in the receive list does not match and the receive telegram
is too early.
06: The address of the power module in the telegram and in the receive list do not match.
19: The error bit in the receive telegram is set and the receive telegram is too early.
09: The error bit in the receive telegram is set.
10: The receive telegram is too early.
Remedy: - carry-out a POWER ON.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
See also: p9915

F30885 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred between the control unit and the power module involved. The
nodes do not send and receive in synchronism.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
0A: The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set.
1A: Sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram not set and the receive telegram is too early.
21: The cyclic telegram has not been received.
22: Timeout in the telegram receive list.
40: Timeout in the telegram send list.
62: Error at the transition to cyclic operation.
Remedy: - check the power supply voltage of the component involved.
- carry-out a POWER ON.
- replace the component involved.
See also: p9915

F30886 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Error when sending DRIVE-CLiQ data

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred between the control unit and the power module involved. Data
were not able to be sent.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
41: Telegram type does not match send list.
Remedy: - carry-out a POWER ON.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-867

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F30887 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Component faulted

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
20: Error in the telegram header.
23: Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
42: Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
43: Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
60: Response received too late during runtime measurement.
61: Time taken to exchange characteristic data too long.
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
- if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904).
- replace the component involved.

F30895 CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error

Reaction: OFF2 (DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred between the control unit and the power module involved.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
0B: Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer.
Remedy: - carry-out a POWER ON.
See also: p9915

F30897 DRIVE-CLiQ: No communications to the components

Reaction: OFF2 (DCBRAKE, ENCODER, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: power on (IMMEDIATELY)
Cause: Communications with the DRIVE-CLiQ component specified by the fault value is not possible.
One cause can be, e.g. that a DRIVE-CLiQ cable has been withdrawn.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Component ID.
Remedy: - check the DRIVE-CLiQ connections.
- carry-out a POWER ON.

F30899 (N, A) Power module: Unknown fault

Reaction: NONE (DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: A fault occurred on the power module that cannot be interpreted by the control unit firmware. This can occur if the
firmware on the power module is more recent than the firmware on the control unit.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Fault number.
If required, the significance of this new fault can be referred to in a more recent description of the control unit.
Remedy: - replace the firmware on the power module by an older firmware version (r0128).
- upgrade the firmware on the control unit (r0018).
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

3-868  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A30903 Power module: I2C bus

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Communications with EPROM not possible
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy: Replace module

A30920 (F) Power module: Temperature sensor fault

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
1: Wire breakage or sensor not connected (KTY: R > 1630 Ohm).
2: Measured resistance too low (PTC: R < 30 Ohm, KTY: R < 340 Ohm).
Remedy: - check that the sensor is connected correctly.
- replace sensor.
Reaction upon F: NONE (DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY
upon F:

A30999 (F, N) Power module: Unknown alarm

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: An alarm occurred on the power module that cannot be interpreted by the control unit firmware. This can occur if the
firmware on the power module is more recent than the firmware on the control unit.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Alarm number.
If required, the significance of this new alarm can be referred to in a more recent description of the control unit.
Remedy: - replace the firmware on the power module by an older firmware version (r0128).
- upgrade the firmware on the control unit (r0018).
Reaction upon F: NONE (DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY (power on)
upon F:
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:

F31100 Encoder 1: Zero mark clearance error

Reaction: A_INFEED: NONE (DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
SERVO: ENCODER (DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
VECTOR: ENCODER (DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: READY
Cause: The measured zero mark clearance does not correspond to the parameterized zero mark clearance (p0425 for rotat-
ing encoders).
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Last measured zero mark clearance in increments (4 increments = 1 encoder pulse).
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections.
. check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks).
- adapt the parameter for the clearance between zero marks (p0425).
- replace the encoder or encoder cable.
Acknowledgment:
This fault can only be acknowledged by canceling the pulses.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-869

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F31101 Encoder 1: Zero mark failed

Reaction: A_INFEED: NONE (DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
SERVO: ENCODER (DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
VECTOR: ENCODER (DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: READY
Cause: The 1.5 x parameterized zero mark clearance was exceeded (p0425 for rotating encoders).
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Number of increments after POWER ON or since the last zero mark that was detected (4 increments = 1 encoder
pulse).
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections.
. check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks).
- adapt the parameter for the clearance between zero marks (p0425).
- replace the encoder or encoder cable.
Acknowledgment:
This fault can only be acknowledged by canceling the pulses.

F31110 Encoder 1: EnDat communications error

Reaction: A_INFEED: NONE
SERVO: ENCODER (DCBRAKE, NONE)
VECTOR: ENCODER (DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: READY
Cause: Serial communication protocol transfer error between the encoder and evaluation module SMCxx.
Fault value (r0949, binary):
Bit 0: Alarm bit in the position protocol.
Bit 1: Incorrect quiescent level on the data line.
Bit 2: EnDat encoder does not response (does not supply a start bit).
Bit 3: CRC error: The checksum in the protocol from the encoder does not match the data.
Bit 4: Incorrect encoder acknowledgement: The encoder incorrectly understood the task (request) or cannot execute
it.
Bit 5: Internal error in the EnDat driver: An illegal mode command was requested.
Bit 6: Position value longer than 40 bits.
Remedy: Re fault value:
Bit 0 = 1: Encoder defective. F31111 may provide additional details.
Bit 1 = 1: Incorrect encoder type / replace the encoder or encoder cable.
Bit 2 = 1: Incorrect encoder type / replace the encoder or encoder cable.
Bit 3 = 1: EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable.
Bit 4 = 1: EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable, replace the sensor module.
Bit 5 = 1: EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable, replace the sensor module.
Bit 6 = 1: The sensor module does not support this encoder.
Acknowledgment:
This fault can only be acknowledged by canceling the pulses.

F31111 (A) Encoder 1: Absolute value encoder EnDat, internal fault/error

Reaction: A_INFEED: NONE
SERVO: ENCODER (DCBRAKE, NONE)
VECTOR: ENCODER (DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: READY
Cause: The EnDat encoder fault word contains fault bits that have been set.
Fault value (r0949, binary):
Bit 0: Lighting system failed.
Bit 1: Signal amplitude too low.
Bit 2: Position value incorrect.
Bit 3: Encoder power supply overvoltage condition.
Bit 4: Encoder power supply undervoltage condition.
Bit 5: Encoder power supply overcurrent condition.
Bit 6: The battery must be changed.

3-870  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

Remedy: Re fault value, bit 0 = 1:

Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the
motor.
Re fault value, bit 1 = 1:
Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the
motor.
Re fault value, bit 2 = 1:
Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the
motor.
Re fault value, bit 3 = 1:
5 V power supply voltage fault.
When using an SMC. Check the plug-in cable between the encoder and SMC or replace the SMC.
When a motor encoder with a direct DRIVE-CLiQ connection is used: Replace the motor.
Re fault value, bit 4 = 1:
5 V power supply voltage fault.
When using an SMC. Check the plug-in cable between the encoder and SMC or replace the SMC.
When a motor encoder with a direct DRIVE-CLiQ connection is used: Replace the motor.
Re fault value, bit 5 = 1:
Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the
motor.
Re fault value, bit 6 = 1:
The battery must be changed - only for encoders with battery back-up.
Acknowledgment:
This fault can only be acknowledged by canceling the pulses.
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

F31115 Encoder 1: Amplitude error track A or B (A^2 + B^2)

Reaction: A_INFEED: NONE
SERVO: ENCODER (DCBRAKE, NONE)
VECTOR: ENCODER (DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: READY
Cause: The amplitude (A^2 + B^2) does not lie within the tolerance bandwidth (software monitoring function).
SMC20:
The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25 % / +20 %).
On the other hand, the response thresholds are < 230 mV and > 750 mV (frequency characteristic).
SMC10:
The nominal signal level is at 2900 mV (2.0 Vrms). The response thresholds are at < 1070 mV and > 3535 mV.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Low word:
Signal level, track A (16 bits with sign).
High word:
Signal level, track B (16 bits with sign).
SMC20:
A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec.
SMC10:
A signal level of 2900 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 6666 hex = 26214 dec.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections.
- replace the encoder or encoder cable.
- check the encoder module (e.g. contacts).
Acknowledgment:
This fault can only be acknowledged by canceling the pulses.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-871

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F31116 Encoder 1: Amplitude error, monitoring track A + B

Reaction: A_INFEED: NONE
SERVO: ENCODER (DCBRAKE, NONE)
VECTOR: ENCODER (DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The amplitude of the rectified encoder signals A and B is not within the tolerance bandwidth (hardware monitoring).
The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25 % / +20 %).
On the other hand, the hardware response thresholds are at < 176 mV and > 1.35 V.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Low word: Signal level, track A (16 bits with sign).
High word: Signal level, track B (16 bits with sign).
A signal level of 500 mV corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec.
These analog values are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections.
- replace the encoder or encoder cable.
- check the encoder module (e.g. contacts).

F31117 Encoder 1: Inversion error, signals A and B

Reaction: A_INFEED: NONE
SERVO: ENCODER (DCBRAKE, NONE)
VECTOR: ENCODER (DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: For a square-wave signal encoder (TTL. bipolar. double ended) the A* and B* signals are not inverted with respect
to signals A and B.
Remedy: Check the setting of p0405: p0405.2 = 1 is only possible if the encoder is connected at X520.
Check the encoder/cable: Does the encoder supply TTL signals and the associated inverted signals?

F31118 Encoder 1: Speed difference outside the tolerance range

Reaction: A_INFEED: NONE
SERVO: ENCODER (DCBRAKE, NONE)
VECTOR: ENCODER (DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: READY
Cause: The speed difference between two sampling cycles has exceeded the value in p0492.
The error is only evaluated for HTL/TTL encoders.
Encoder 1 is used as motor encoder and can be effective has fault response to change over to sensorless operation.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Speed difference per current controller clock cycle in increments.
Remedy: - check the tachometer feeder cable for interruptions.
- check the grounding of the tachometer shielding.
- if required, increase the maximum speed difference per sampling cycle (p0492).
Acknowledgment:
This fault can only be acknowledged by canceling the pulses.

F31120 Encoder 1: Power supply volt.

Reaction: A_INFEED: NONE
SERVO: ENCODER (DCBRAKE, NONE)
VECTOR: ENCODER (DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge: READY
Cause: Encoder power supply voltage fault.
Note:
If the encoder cables 6FX2002-2EQ00-.... and 6FX2002-2CH00-.... are interchanged, this can result in the encoder
being destroyed because the pins of the operating voltage are reversed.
Fault value (r0949, binary):
Bit 0: Undervoltage condition on the sense line (threshold 4.75 V).
Bit 1: Encoder power supply voltage overcurrent condition (threshold 450 mA).

3-872  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

Remedy: For fault value, bit 0 = 1:

- correct encoder cable connected?
- check the plug connections of the encoder cable.
- SMC30: Check the parameterization (p0404.22).
For fault value, bit 1 = 1:
- correct encoder cable connected?
- replace the encoder or encoder cable.
Acknowledgment:
This fault can only be acknowledged by canceling the pulses.

F31130 Encoder 1: Zero mark does not match position of C/D track
Reaction: A_INFEED: NONE
SERVO: ENCODER (DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
VECTOR: ENCODER (DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: READY
Cause: After initializing the rotor position using the C/D track or using Hall signals, the zero mark was detected outside the
permissible range. This zero mark is rejected.
The deviation may be up to 18 ° mechanical or up to 60 ° electrical.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Normalization: 32768 = 180 °
High word:
Mechanical zero mark position determined.
If the initialization via a C/D track is selected in p0404, then it is checked whether the zero mark occurs in an angular
range of +/-18 ° mechanical.
Low word:
Deviation of the zero mark from the expected position as electrical angle.
If the correction of the commutation position with the zero mark is selected in p0404, then a difference of a maximum
of +/- 60 ° electrical is permitted.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections.
- if the Hall sensor is used as equivalent C/D track, check the connection.
- check the C or D track connection.
- replace the encoder or encoder cable.
Acknowledgment:
This fault can only be acknowledged by canceling the pulses.

F31131 Encoder 1: Deviation, position incremental/absolute too large

Reaction: A_INFEED: NONE
SERVO: ENCODER (DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
VECTOR: ENCODER (DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: READY
Cause: When cyclically reading the absolute position, an excessively high deviation to the incremental position was
detected. The absolute position that was read is rejected.
Limit value for the deviation:
- EnDat encoder: Is supplied from the encoder and is a minimum of 2 quadrants (e.g. EQI 1325 = 2 quadrants, EQN
1325 = 50 quadrants).
- other encoders: 15 pulses = 60 quadrants.
Fault value (r0949, decimal):
Deviation in quadrants (1 pulse = 4 quadrants).
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections.
- replace the encoder or encoder cable.
- check whether the coding disk is dirty or there are strong ambient magnetic fields.
Acknowledgment:
This fault can only be acknowledged by canceling the pulses.

 Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved 3-873

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

F31150 Encoder 1: Initialization error

Reaction: A_INFEED: NONE
SERVO: ENCODER (DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
VECTOR: ENCODER (DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: READY
Cause: Encoder functionality selected in p0404 is not operating correctly.
Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
The fault value is a bit field. Every set bit indicates functionality that is faulted.
The bit assignment corresponds to that of p0404 (e.g. bit 5 set: Error C/D track).
See also: p0404
Remedy: - Check that p0404 is correctly set.
- check the encoder type used (incremental/absolute value) and for SMCxx, the encoder cable.
- if relevant, note additional fault/error messages that describe the fault in detail.
Acknowledgment:
This fault can only be acknowledged by canceling the pulses.

F31405 (N, A) Encoder 1: Encoder evaluation temperature too high

Reaction: NONE (DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (power on)
Cause: The encoder evaluation for a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ has detected an excessively high temperature.
The fault threshold is 125 ° C.
Alarm value (r2124, decimal):
Measured board/module temperature in 0.1 °C.
Remedy: Reduce the ambient temperature for the DRIVE-CLiQ connection of the motor.
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:
Reaction upon A: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon A:

A31410 (F, N) Encoder 1: Serial communications

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: Serial communication protocol transfer error between the encoder and evaluation module SMCxx.
Alarm value (r2124, binary):
Bit 0: Alarm bit in the position protocol.
Bit 1: Incorrect quiescent level on the data line.
Bit 2: EnDat encoder does not response (does not supply a start bit).
Bit 3: CRC error: The checksum in the protocol from the encoder does not match the data.
Bit 4: Incorrect encoder acknowledgement: The encoder incorrectly understood the task (request) or cannot execute
it.
Bit 5: Internal error in the EnDat driver: An illegal mode command was requested.
Bit 6: Position value longer than 40 bits.
Remedy: - check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections.
- replace the encoder.
Reaction upon F: A_INFEED: NONE
SERVO: NONE (DCBRAKE, ENCODER, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
VECTOR: NONE (DCBRAKE, ENCODER, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge IMMEDIATELY
upon F:
Reaction upon N: NONE
Acknowledge NONE
upon N:

3-874  Siemens AG 2004 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS S List Manual, Edition 12.2004
 Faults and Alarms
List of faults and alarms

A31411 (F, N) Encoder 1: EnDat encoder signals alarms

Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: The error word of the EnDat encoder has alarm bits tha